NATIVE ARTS AND INDUSTRIES ON THE ARCHER, KENDALL AND

HOLROYD RIVERS, CAPE YORK PENINSULA, NORTH QUEENSLAND

BY URSULA H. MCCONNEL, EAGLE HEIGHTS, QUEENSLAND

Summary

This paper describes in technical detail, material collected during field research in 1927, 1928 and

1934 in the Gulf of Carpentaria region of Cape York Peninsula, North Queensland, and particularly

on the Kendall, Holroyd and Archer Rivers, which is housed in the South Australian Museum. This

material is complementary to that obtained by Hale and Tindale (1933) on the east coast of the

Peninsula and demonstrates Papuan and Torres Straits Island influences upon mainland culture.

The specimens, which are fully listed and illustrated in plates and drawings, are described in

relation to the cultural background to which they belong.

NATIVE ARTS anp INDUSTRIES on THe ARCHER,

KENDALL ann HOLROYD RIVERS, CAPE YORK

PENINSULA, NORTH QUEENSLAND

By URSULA H. McCONNEL, Eacie Heicuts, QUEENSLAND,

Plates i-xvii and text figs. 1-4.

SUMMARY.

THis paper deseribes in technical detail material collected during field

research in 1927, 1928 and 1934 in the Gulf of Carpentaria region of Cape York

Peninsula, North Queensland, and particularly on the Kendall, Holroyd and

Archer Rivers, which is housed in the South Australian Museum. This material

is complementary to that obtained by Hale and Tindale (1933) on the east coast

of the Peninsula and demonstrates Papuan and Torres Straits Island influences

upon mainland culture.

The specimens, which are fully listed and illustrated in plates and draw-

ings, are described in relation to the cultural background to which they belong.

INTRODUCTION.

The material described in this paper was obtained by means of grants from

the Australian National Research Council in 1927-28 and 1934, since when I have

been awaiting an opportunity to prepare it for publication, an opportunity

recently afforded by courtesy of the Director of the South Australian Museum,

in which institution it is now housed and where I have had the assistance of

members of the staff in sorting, repairing, describing and photographing the

specimens shown in these plates. I am particularly indebted to Mr. Norman B.

Tindale for his help in classifying and describing specimens; the technical

descriptions of which are largely his. The compilation of the material has

been further assisted by a grant made towards typing costs by the Science and

Endowment Fund of the Council for Scientific and Industrial Research Organisa-

tion, which I gratefully acknowledge here. I would also like to acknowledge the

assistance of the late Government Botanist, Mr. Cyril White, in identifying

plants referred to, and to Mr. B. C. Cotton for identifying shells. I am also

indebted to my brother, Mr. K. H. MeConnel, F.R.I.A., for the drawings of text

2 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

figures, and to Miss M. Boyce for the preparation of the ethnographical photo-

graphs.

My task as a social anthropologist is to place these artefacts in their social

setting and to describe their function in the way of life to which they belong.

This way of life may have existed for thousands of years and would still be

existing indefinitely if it had not been disturbed.

The specimens are all from Cape York Peninsula, North Queensland, and,

unless otherwise stated, from the Archer, Kendall and Holroyd Rivers, which

flow into the Gulf of Carpentaria on the Queensland side. The area in question

forms part of a Native Reserve extending along the Gulf coast from the Batavia

to the Mitchell River. A list of specimens is appended, fully illustrated by

plates and drawings, together with their registration numbers in the South

Australian Museum. Native names of specimens, unless otherwise stated, are

given in the Wikmunkan language. The phoneties of the Wikmunkan language

are as outlined in my previous paper (McConnel 1945). S in Sivri is a northern

sound, not used in the Wikmunkan language; [ is sometimes a cerebral 1 not

previously recorded, but usually a palatal; 7 is sometimes a retroflex palatal r

and ¢ is sometimes an interdental f.

I am indebted to Prof. A. P. Elkin and the Australian National Research

Council for arranging the use of a special symbol used in setting up one of the

native words given herein.

Archer, Kendall and Holroyd Rivers area is sheltered from northern con-

tacts by the mangrove-clad and crocodile-infested Archer River (five miles wide

at the mouth), and from the eastern coast by the Great Dividing Range. It is

low-lying country, perfectly flat for thirty to forty miles inland, and inaccessible

to stock on account of its innumerable water channels, its net-work of lagoons,

swamps and water holes, with bogs in all directions. As it teems with wild life,

it is a veritable paradise for its native inhabitants.

I chose this field for research because nowhere else in Queensland was I

likely to find a native culture less disturbed. In 1927 I accompanied the

Aurukun (Archer River) Mission’s first journey overland into these parts, which

had at that time been but partially surveyed. Apart from a few sandal wood-

getters, and a visit by the Mission lugger, little other white contact had been

made, though some of the men had visited the Mission the previous year, and

some had signed-on for work on pearling luggers. Here the natives pursued

their customary life oblivious of an outside world. John Burke’s steamer, on

its monthly voyage down the Gulf to Normanton, was regarded as a corpse

in the course of cremation—inspiring, appropriately enough, a funeral dirge.

McCoNNEL—NATIVE ARTS AND INDUSTRIES 3

INFLUENCE OF PAPUA AND ISLANDS OFF CAPE YORK

ON THE MAINLAND CULTURE

In studying the culture of the Peninsula in general, one has to take into

consideration the proximity of the mainland to Papua and the Torres Straits

Islands, Contact undoubtedly has been made, over a long period, apparently by

means of the double ovt-rigger canoe, whieh is made and used by Papuans,

Islanders and tainlanders ulike, as Tarsouth as Princess Charlotte Bay (Stewart

River) on the east coast, and the Batavia and Archer Rivers on the Gulf Coast,

Haddon and Hornell (1987) have wade a detailed study of the canoes in this

area, Haddon (1912) speaks of these vanoes as voyaging to the mainland from

the Islands in 1888 and demonstrates the sinrilarity of Island customs and arte-

facts to those of the Papuan mainland, Lt is not surprising, therefore, to tind

cultural similarities existing also between the Islands and the Cape York main-

land, particularly where direct contact by canoe has been made. Owing to the

early establishment of a Government Resident at Somerset, near Cape York,

however, there is little evidence left of such contact in the area nearest the

Islands, where it must have been most obvious at one time. Eyidenee of this

eutural contact diminishes inland and southwards as direct links by canoe

recedes, borrowed enstoms bemg adapted and simplified to meet inainland

requirements and the conditions of a hunting rather than a village Jife, This

external influence extends farther south on the eastern coast than on the western

Gulf coast, because the eastern coast is more accessible by canoe. This eastern

coastline of the Peninsula, and particularly the Princess Charlotte Bay region,

has been studied and recorded in detail by Hale and Tindale (1935). They

also discuss the use of double and single out-rigger canoes.

In this area of direct contact on the east coast, Thomson (1933, 1934)

deseribes the use by the Koko Yaz'o (Pascoe River, Princess Charlotte Bay)

of drums, bark-strip skirts, masks and dance enclosures in the cult of the craro-

dile. These were reported also by Roth (1909) in the Margaret Bay area and

oceur also in the dances of the sea-eavle, sea-oull and Torres Straits pigeon cults

of the Tys'yandys and Yu:pyati tribes, south of the Batavia River on the Gulf

Coast, as do also the dvum and the bow and arrow, recorded by Thomson (1934 )

and by MeConnel (1936), but which are not foynd elsewhere on the mainland

and are typically Torres Straits Islands and Papuan. Sivri, the seagull, is said

to have made his drum of two kinds of wood, the hollow stem of the pandanus

tree for soft sounds, and messmate wood for loud sounds, and ta have covered

both ends with goanna skin. The specimen shown here in Plate vii, fig. a, has

only one end closed, a type which is also found in Papua. The palm of the

hand is used for low sounds and the fingers for high sounds, Sturt is also said

4 RECORDS OF THE S,A, MUSEUM

to have made his bow from the wood of « native shrub and its string from the

fibre of the bean tree root.

It is in the totemie pattern of the mainland that these sea-going heroes

should be said to have voyaged, in the direction of the migratory birds they

respectively represent, to Maubiag Island and the Papuan mainland, and, on

returning thence, to haye introduced these arts to the mainland. The song and

dance of the seagull and Torres Straits pigeon resemble those used in the

Islands and Papua, and the Maubiag cult is regarded as a brother-cult to that

of Stems on the mainland,

“these objects are not in daily use, however, and oceur only in the ceremonial

danees. In addition to such objects found only in these dances and common also

to Papua and the Islands, are the plaited pandanus palmleaf armlets, pearl

shell pendants, cowrie and pearl-shell necklets and head bands, nautilus shell

nosepees, large wooden ear-eylinders (worn suspended in (he ear-lobe which

has been piereed (Plate i, fig. a) and gradually stretched for the purpose), anc

ornamental clubs, all of which are either traded-in or copied, and ure in use to

sore extent all over the northern part of the Peninsula.

Customs shared with the Isliuds and Papua whieh have permeated the

conmon life of the mainlanders are (a2) the use of the sleeping platlorm, whieh

is sometimes two-storied like those shown in use on the Islands by Wilkin and

Haddon (1912) and Roth (1910); (b) the round bark-house which is also

shown by Wilkin and Haddon (1912) in use on the Islands; (¢) the Papuan

communal pipe, made of bamboo or hollow wood (Gulf area), sealed at both

ends with wax, with holes on the top at either end used respeetively for holding

the cigarette and for inhalation, This isa pipe which ean be passed around, with

a finger over the smoke-hole, and shared when tobacco is searee; (d) the weaving

of baskets from NXerotes multiflora as described by Haddon (1912), and most.

striking of all, perhaps, (e) the practice of mummification, described by Roth

(1907), with its attendant inourning restrictions and observances, its mourning

dance or wake, and its coneluding feast and wrestling mateh—thouel these rites

are far less elaborate and spectacular on the mainland than those described for

Papua and the ‘Torres Straits Islands by Haddon (1912) and Harris (1912)

and end in cremation.

Tyist, the fishhawk, a hero of the Ndras'anit tribe (north of the Archer

River), is said to have introduced these funcral rites in honour of his brother

Mbu:, the ghost, who was killed fighting (Plate vi, fig. c, e and f). According

to the legend, reeorded by MeConnel (1935), this hero, after remoying the

intestines and liver, ete., through an openine made in the side, tied the body

McCONNEL—NATIVE ARTS AND INDUSTRIES 5

of Mbuz to a Jong pole and suspended il on iwo forked sticks to dvy near w fire.

Then the body was rolled in ti-tree bark (Plate vi, fig. e-f), tied round with bush

string aid carried to his parents, and a big dance was held, The corpse is kept

thus on forked sticks for the required period, ie. for anything up Lo two or three

years according to the wishes of the relatives, aud is guarded always by them

in a seeluded spot, the wake being periodically performed by the women, if and

when the corpse is in vamp. ‘These rites have already been described by

MeConnel (1936). Relatives of the opposite moiety are subjected to food obliga-

tiuns and speech taboos, especially the widow, who has to sil und weep, and

eats only when given certain foods by the deceased's relatives, 1o whom she muy

not speak. She must remain apart from the camp, her head covered with ashes

and tutts ol hair fastened with beeswax over her head, Mourning ends with

the eretmation ol the hody at dawn after an all-night vigil kept by women iu

relays aecompanied by & continiows wailing and performance of the mourning

dance. The ereniation ts followed by a feast, when the recognized food debts are

paid, and a wrestling mateh takes place (between members of the same moiety

ouly), after which the widow's head is shaved, her remarriage arranged, and

all food and speech taboos are lifted. 1 witnessed a cremation on the Areher

River in 1927, which was probably the last to be performed near the Mission

there. ‘hese practices then extended as far south as the Mdward River, and

probably even further along the Gull Coast. Along the east coast the type of

nunimifieation varies. Harris (1912) and Roth (1907) have deserihbed the

various forms found as far south as southert) Queensland. A legend of the

Kamdyu (near Coen) reported by MeConnel (1937) shows that burial also was

practised on the Peninsula. Roth (1907, p. 399) reports the eating of the

deeeased’s flesh by the widow, a eustom also recorded for the orres Straits

Islands, I myself have nothing to report of this nature in the Gulf area; but

in the Mossman-Daintree area on the cast coast an informant had eaten a park

of the thigh of his sister, and expected thereby to become better at finding yams,

in which art she had excelled. The eating of certain parts of a dead relative's

flesh was an accepted duty that one should honour if not enjoy, Roth

(1907) records the carrying of the deeceased’s bones by certain relatives, Tis

custom was still practised south of the Archer River in 1927-28; the carrying

ol the leg bones was said tu be a means of preventing the deceased’s ghost from

walking about the camp alter death, Haile and Tindale (1928, p, 94) deseribe

simular burial eustonis at Princess Charlotte Bay on the east coast,

In contrast to these Island and Papuan affinities, it is interesting to note

the absence on the Peninsula of the boomerang and shield, so typical of the

6 RECORDS OF THE $.A, MUSEUM

south. The use of the former is, however, recorded in a Wik-kulkun tribe legend

as haying been used to clear scrub. The boomerang can be made, but it is not

now used. The shield is used on the Mitchell River to the south, Tt assumes

untisual proportions on the east coast in the Cairns-Port, Douglas revion in asso-

ciation with the large wooden fighting sword, peculiar to these parts (sce

MeConnel 1935, 1). Absent also from this part of the Peninsula are the rite of

cireumcision and the four-section system; aceording to Tindale (1940) the

former does not occur east of Burketown and the latter occurs only to the south

of Princess Charlotte Bay.

FOOD SUPPLIES AND ECONOMIC PURSUITS.

The Gulf Coast is rich in food supplies—in animal, bird, fish and plant lite.

The sea yields dugong, sea-turtle and large salt-water fish for those who own an

outrigger canoe. The tidal rivers bring in a plentiful supply of fish with every

incoming tide, which men spear from the prow of the iudivenous bark canoe.

Kish are eooked in the coals. Stingray, a delicacy reserved for older men,

is favoured by rolling the cooked flesh around the previously removed heart

and liver, wrapping all in ti-tree bark and cooking in an antbed oven. The

sandbeaeh supplies crabs, sea-turtles' eggs and shellfish of many kinds, which

the Women gather at low tide and cook in the coals (the heat opening the shell).

Oysters cluster thickly on the roots of the mangrove frees edging the months

of certain salt-water ereeks (Plate i, fie, ¢), Th the salt-water creeks women

collect mud-mussels ((elawia coaema), erawling along the creek bed on all fours

as they feel for the shells with their fingers in the mud, dropping them into

dillvbags suspended from the neck or held in the teeth. River beds and fresh-

water channels inland are interspersed with deep water-holes (left after flood-

ing). These harbour fish and the fresh-water crocodile, the eggs of whieli are

dug out of the sand and eaten as a delicacy, especially when nearly hatehed.

The freshwater turtle is eooked upside down in the ashes; then, after knocking

out the under-shell and removing the head and limbs, the shell is used as a

soup toureen; juices from the body make a soup which is imbibed by dipping

a. frayed end of a stick into the juices and sucking it. The eges are sometimes

fried in the juices of the up-turned shell. The salt-water turtle’s ege@s, which

are solt-shelled and do not set when cooked, ave usually sucked raw.

Swamps, lagoons and waterholes are the haunts of wild fowl—duck, geese,

ibis, native companion, jabirn, ete. Kmn are to be found in certain localities

inland, and flying-fox camps are numerous in mangrove and other serubs,

Kangaroo (inland) and wallaby abound. Men spear all these by stealing up

McConNEL—NATIVE ARTS AND INDUSTRIES 7

close, merging with their surroundings und disguising themselves with branches

in open ¢ountry.

In the dry winter months, the grass is burned off and kangaroo and wallaby

ave speared as they flee belore the flames. Women follow in the wake of the

flames, digging out from the holes, in which they have taken refuge, bushrat

and bandieoot, iguana, snakes and lizards, ete.. with the aid of thei yamsticks

and the domesticated dingo, All these foods are vooked in antbed, as are emu

and all large birds aud animals, the skin and viseera being discarded only after

cooking,

The anthed oven is inade by digeing a hole in the ground, lighting a fire

in it and heating ¢hunks of antbed in the fire. When hot, the fire is removed

and the food then placed between the pieces of hot antbed and covered over

with elean strips of ti-tree bark, over whieh the sand or earth is piled to preserve

the heat, This method of cooking is that of a slow oven and preserves all the

jnices in the meat,

Swamps near the coast are filled with rushes (Scirpus littoralis), the eorms

of which are dug out by the women, sitting up to the chest in mud around the

edges. The corms are earvied home and washed and roasted in the coals, the

old ones being first beaten with a wooden hammer into a flat cake. Corms of

the up-river swamp rush, called ‘*bush-nuts,’’ which are washed wp with the fioad

rubbish in the wet season, are also cooked and eaten. The seeds of the inanyrove

pod are cooked and eround into flour.

Swamps and lagoons are eovered with white and blue water lilies of several!

varieties, the flowers and stalks of which are eaten raw, the roots cooked in

antbhed and the seed-pods roasted in the coals, The women wade in the lagoons

and swamps for these, and dive for the roots in deep water. Yams of several

varieties, arrowroot and many other roots are dug up by the women with their

yamsticks, Sometimes the top of the yam is left adhering to the stem of the

vine and replanted, only the lower part of the root being taken for food, whieh

is interesting where agriculture is unknown, A similar practice is reported by

Hale and Tindale (1938, p, 113) on the east coast. Edible fruits of many kinds

are gathered in the summer months, As they travel through the bush, especially

in spring and summer, the eves of all are on the look-out for the tell-tale bee,

coming io and out of its hole in tree or log. The shading of the eyes with the

hand, looking upwards this way and that as they travel, is so characteristic an

attitude, that it is used im corroboree to signify a journey through the bush,

When a bee is sighted, the tree is felled, or climbed, and a stick with a frayed

end is inserted into the hole to test the supply of honey. When found to be

8 RECORDS OF THE S.A. Museum

present, it is chopped out and eaten—bees, wax and all—till the spoilers are

replete. The surplus is carried home tied wp in bark or in a tubular ‘‘ grass’?

basket (woven closely for the purpose) and is usually mixed with water to make

a swect drink, There are a variety of honeys, taken by bees from different, trees

and shrubs, each with its peculiar flavour and its special name. As it is the

worian's place to supply roots and small eame obtained hy digging, the yamstick

is regarded as the symbol of womanhood; and since it is the man’s part to

provide meat, the spear is the symbol of manhood. Tn eeremonies the part of

a woman played by a man is always signified by the use of x yamstick.

MATERIALS AND TECHNICAL EQUIPMENT.

The equipment required for these economie pursuits is limited by the

materials available. As previously stated, stone and flint are lacking in this

area. Axes and knives are traded in and are a rare and valuable possession.

Spear barbs are made from the bones of stingray, emu, kangaroo and Wallaby —

the jawbone of the latter being used as a craper and, with the incisor attached,

as an engraver. Wallaby bone is used also as a stiletto for piercing holes in

bark, ete. Such material takes the place of flint in other places. Shells (par-

ticularly the mussel-shell) are used as serapers and as spoons, Sharp fragments

of shell-grit, hardened by the action of the sea, are used for grinding and shaping

the edges of pearlshell, and the spiral shell (Z'urritella cerea) is used for boring

holes in the sheli dises thus shaped. The bailer shell (Melo amphorus) is used

to bail water out of canoes and wells, as a drinking vessel, and for heating gum,

elc., on the fire.

The plentiful supply of hardwood and softwood timbers (and bamboo),

with their stems, bark, gums and fibres, supplies the greater part of the material

used in the manufacture of artefacts. Yellow stains are obtainable from certain

roots, and red and white clays and chareoal are used as colouring matter, Bees-

wax is used in addition to 2ums for sealing purposes. Grass bugles, scarlet

seeds and yellow orehid bark, feathers and cowrie shells (threaded on string)

are used for decorative ptiposes.

During the dry winter months people sleep by the open canmpfire, wherever

food supplies take them, by lagoon or swamp, riverbed or seashore, and on reeog-

nized camping grounds used from season to season. Break-winds of bark and

branches are placed against stakes in the ground as open shelters, the branches

also affording a shade during the heat of the day. Camps consist usually of

small family groups, but where the food supply is temporarily abundant, as

hy water lily lasoons or swamps (Plate ii, fig, d, and Plate iit, fie. a-b), at certain

McCoNNEL—NATIVE ARTS AND INDUSTRIES 9

times of the year, larger groups assemble and an opportunity ts afforded for

holding initiation ceremonies and inter-tribal discussions, etc. During the wet

vorth-west Inonsoon season in the summer months, however, when rain is imees-

sant and flooding takes place, it is necessary to builcl more permanent shelters,

A common shelter used is the sleeping platform, built mostly near inland water

holes and water-courses, which attract. birds, and where wallaby may be speared

aod fish trapped. The sleeping-plattorm is made by placing saplings on four

forked sticks wid laying others aeross them, whieh may then be eovered with

sheets of messmate bark, Under this platform fires may be lit for cooking,

which also provide a smokesereen 10 ward off mosquitoes. Sometimes a second

story is built to form a ceiling above the first. When the weather is squally,

eapecially near the coast, a completely covered-in bark house is used. The round

beehive-shaped bark house is made of branches placed cireularly in the ground

and tied at the top, aver which strips of ti-tree bark (Melaleuca leucadendron)

are laid so as to completely cover over the branches, one piece being removed

when going in or out. Tuside these sealed bark houses, with a fire smouldering,

a tamily with its dogs may live snug and dry and free from mosquitoes till the

worst weather ig over. These houses and platforms, being used only during the

wet season, usily tall to pieces from negleet during the winter months. In a

hunting community, where there is no incentive to build pernianent houses as in

the case of the village settlements of the Torres Straits Islands and Papua, there

is no adequate storage for goods made trom perishable materials. Perhaps for

this reason mainland artefacts are less elaborate and spectacular than those of

Papna and the Islands, though the technical skill and artistic finish of the former

are none the less excellent, and adequate for the requirements of their owners.

The double out-rigger eanoe is fashioned from the trunk of a milkwood

tree, The out-rigger booms pass over the gunwale and are fastened, inside and

outside the lull, by strips of green bark (usually MWibisews) to a stick which

passes through both sides of the gunwale. I the specimen T saw made on the

Archer River, the two booms were not made in a single piece, but in two pieces,

and were fastened to the floats on either side by lashing. The dug-out canoe

ean dravel alone the coast and out to sea in calm weather and is used for fishing

expeditions. The art of tiaking out-igger eanoes on the Archer River was

possibly copied from the Batavia and Embley River Missions in the north and

may have deteriorated, Certain it is, however, that the out-rigger canoe is not an

indigenous product and must have been introduced at some time or another m

(he past to the mainland. The mainland eanoe is made from bark of the mess-

mate tree (vide Haddon and TMornell, 1937). After ringbarking a strip of bars

10 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

of the required size, the bark is smoked dry over the fire. It is then folded in

two (inside ont) and placed between two sticks to secure it (Plate i, fiz. b),

whilst each end is shaped by cutting off a triangular piece downward to the fold.

The ends of the canoe are secured by sowing-up these shaped ends with a piece of

eane, the point of which has been sharpened and hardened in the fire and the cane

soltened by biting. The cane is passed through holes pierced in the bark (Plate i,

fig. b) by means of a bone stiletto (with or without a wax knob to protect the

hand). When both ends are thus scevred, the canoe sides are drawn together to

the required distanee by tying strips of green hibiscus bark across the canoe

towards prow and stern, and the canoe is kept open by two forked sticks placed

crosswise under each tie. The inside of the eanoe is sealed with heeswax to

render it watertizht, A young mangrove stem splayed at the end is used as a

paddle, To manipulate the canoe, the rower kneels, or sits on the floor with his

legs out in front of him, and swings the paddle first to one side and then the

other, which also serves to steer the canoe. The sides of the eanoe are some-

tinies only a few inches above water level, The eanoe is so light that it responds

to the slightest movement of the paddle (Plate i, fig. d), and the paddler must

maintain a perfect balance if he is to eseape the erocodiles lurking below. When

hunting, the fisherman stands in the prow of the canoe, spear poised on spear

thrower, alert for action, When hunting the bony bream at night time he holds

a bark toreh in the one hand, which attracts and bewilders (he fish. As the fish

flashes past, the spear flies through the air, and the fish, plunging madly,

earries the spear with it, till, the paddler deftly steering the canoe in chase, the

fish is captured and the spear retrieved,

Messmate bark is also used to make vessels for carrying and washing food

and as a baby’s cradle (Plate iv, fig. d). The bark is treated as for canoes,

but instead of cutting and sewing up the ends, the bark is thinned out al the ends

und @athered together with pleats held by a wooden skewer, which is bound

over and over with coarse bark strips to secure the pleats,

Spears naturally vary in make and type according to the use for which

they are required (Plate viii), Short spears are used for fighting (or hunting

wallaby) at a distance. The heavy spears are used for large game sneh as

kangaroo, wallaby and emu, ete., and the lighter spears for fish and birds.

Heayy spear shafts are made from the straight young stems of ironwood or

acacia, carefully scraped and shaped to the required balance, the light part being

used near the throwing-end and the heavy part near the head and barbs to throw

the weight forwards. Light spear handles are similarly made from lighter woods

spel as rosella, hibiscus, cottonwood, grass-tree Hower spike, and baniboo, ete,

McCONNEL—NATIVE ARTS AND INDUSTRIES ll

A spear may be made all in oné piece, or with a separate butt or head, or with

both. Sometimes an imitation butt or head is simulated by painting the part

with clay, A spear thay have one, three or four points, which are usnally made

of acacia wood, The barb is fastened to the point. with wallaby or kangaroo tail

sinew and is covered over with grass-tree (or other) gum heated over the fire in

a bailer shell and smoothed on a wooden palette, which is sometimes fitted with

a wallaby ineisor for engraving (Plate ii, fig, b).

Stingray-bone barbs are used for fighting and punitive spears, and are very

poisonous. These barbs may be arranged serially along the head, pointing

backwards or in a cluster of three, or in a flower-like cluster (painted red) on

a stem-like head (painted white). Ceremonial spears are decorated with white

and red clay in large or small ecireles. Sometimes blood is smeared along the

shatt of a spear ina wavy pattern (made by turning the spear in a hlood-stained

hand), used possibly as a charm to acquire power in hunting another vietim.

The spearthrower of the Peninsula is distinctive with its shell ornament at.

one end. The shaft, which varies in width, has a smooth, plain surface contract-

ing towards the head-end, and is plastered at this end with gum, which serves

to fasten to this end twits bailer shell dises, against whieli the spear is balaneed.

Mn use, a wooden peg at the other end engages the end of the spear. The shaft

is sometinies ornamented at the end with bands of yellow orchid bark and

scarlet clbrus seeds are sometimes let into the gum of the shell ornament.

Children tse toy spears 50’-53” long, with wooden points let into light eane

shafts lashed with bark fibre (Plate ii, fio. ¢). On some of these a strip of

bark is lett ina position similar to that used by poisonous etm on adult spears

so as tO make believe it is a fighting spear, and sometimes string round the

handle is used to simulate a join between head and shaft, also in imitation of

an adult's spear (Plate ix, fig. ak).

Shields are lacking, hut wooden elubs with painied knobs or plain fat

stieks are used to deflect spears (Plate x, fig. b-e), Women use long hard-

wood fiehting sticks usually made of acacia wood and painted red with white

points, and are supported by “‘seconds’’ ina fight, who use short, sticks, similarly

painted, to hit back the opponents’ spears (Plate ix, fig. c-f), Axes, which are

traded in, and the beater, the yam-stiek and the fighting-stiek used by the women

ave made or hafted in hardwood.

Gull firesticks are made of matchbox-bean wood and are as long as spears.

For earrying, the two sticks are fitted into a double-barrel sheath, made ot

two hollow bamboo tubes tied round with strips of yellow orehid-bark and

fastened into a knob of beeswax studded with searlet Abrus seeds. These

12 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

sheaths with their colours ol fire add a gay note to the camp scene, "To kindle

fire, one stick is laid on the ground and steadied with the foot, whilst the other

is twisted between the hands with a swilt downward movement, and creates

the required friction as it rubs aguinst the stielc on the ground, As suol) as 4

spark is kindled, it is deftly dropped into tinder, and is blown between cupped

hands into a flame for starting the fire. When no firestiek is to hand, a smoulder-

ing stick is carried and rekindled at intervals by stopping to make a small fire,

a piece of bark is often carried for kindling purposes. The wings of such large

birds as jabiru, ibis and native companion are fastened together (stretched out

and stiffened) to form a feather fan which is used as a bellows and ts carried

about on a string-loop passed over the wrist.

The soft bark of the Melaleuca is used for innumerable purposes. Apart

from its use for walls of houses, breakwinds and shelters, it is used to wrap up

objects of all kinds and sizes, from corpses to spearbarbs and clays, and for

covering food when cooking in antbed ovens, ete. Twisted into a flat pad, it is

worn by women to distribute the weight of loads carried on the head, such as

a bark vessel loaded with roots or a pile of firewood picked up on the homeward

journey, As a small wedge it is used to break the strain of string handles on

“prass'’ baskets. Women use a strip of ti-tree bark for utility purposes (Plate

xi, fiz. q), which is passed between the legs and fastened baek and front to a

waist-string by turning in the ends. Rolled into a long bundle, this paper bark

serves aS a torch or flare at night-time (Plate xi, fig. 1),

Strips of green bark (usually Hibiscus) are used in the rough for binding

purposes, e.g., in making canoes, houses and bark vessels, ete. Mibres are used

in making rope and twine for weaving fishing nets, dillybags, aprons and

decorative strings, ete. The coarse red fibre of Acacia flavescens or A, latifolia

makes a strone harsh string (fet po:la) for fishing nets, ete, whilst the

yaffia-like strands of the mder epidermis of the Limslona australis palm-leaf

makes a firm white string (koi testa) for more delicate use. The fibre most

commonly used for making twine for dillybags, aprons, cte,, is Lieus cuwning-

hama (kot yastan) (Plate xi, fig. b), The fibre is soltened by soaking it in

water or chewing it in the mouth, When dry it is stripped into strands and

tucked away in a bundle ready for use (Plate xi, fig. a). ‘Twine is made by

twistme together strands (usually two) of the required size with a deft move-

nent of the palin of the hand against the thigh, which is used as a kind of table,

Le., with the lower leg and foot tucked under and the other lee crooked up

out of the way. Roth (1901, Plate ii) illustrates this method of making twine,

and in other plates in this same Bulletin fully illustrates the various types ol

McCONNEL—-NATIVE ARTS AND INDUSTRIES 13

Weaving and netting used also in this urea and shown in the accompanying

drawings. “‘Crass*’ baskets (kampian) are made (Plate lil, fig. c-cd) from the

blades of Verotes multiflora. They are nsually made wide at the mouth (Text

fig. le), but also woven closely in tubular forin for holding honey (Text fle. 1h)

and, in sinaller sizes, as tobueeo pouches for the men, Sometinies the basket is

elose-woven at the base only, to hold food when washing it, allowing the water

lo eseape through the more open weaving of the sides. These ‘‘grass’’ baskets

are woven in an onti-cloekwise chain-twist pattern (vide Roth 1910, Plate xvi),

and are woven over basal strands trom: the botton) upwards, the ends being

turned in ut the lop and sometimes over-wound to make a neat edye (Text

fia. 1e),

Sgr

/ elles

ab pape

] y UREN

| , tl IU wv x

| P The rc fel 4 9 Pi f p

seems ie Faint ~ 4

Ae / SS eee

t | : SS pea

% 78 7

- ef

ro ¢

d b c

Mig. 1, Bags and baskets. «a, Dilly-bag in the hour-glass pattern, b, Closely woven

basket for holding honey, e. Wide-mouthed basket made with anti-clockwise chain twist,

Dillybags (wa:nka) are sometimes made in this chain-twist or ‘‘grass’'-

stitch pattern (Text fie. 2e-d) from the Livistona twine (wa:nk iyampan) and

sometimes in the fishing-net pattern (wank omyana) (Text fig. 2a-b). Most

dillybags, however, are made (Plate iv, fig. ¢) in the hourglass (usually double-

loop) pattern, from brown fibres of the Ficus (wamka nastan), ved Moacia

(wankea povla) and white Livistona Cwa:nka mesa), and often two or inore of

these twines are combined to give a striped effect. The hourglass stiteh is worked

with one continuous lony strand (joined al intervals) for the whole length

of the dillybag, from a basal strand stretehed between two sticks (Plate iv,

fie, ©), or from one bie toe to the other (Roth 1901, Plate vil-x).

Fishing nets are usually made in the fish-net pattern (Roth 1901, Plate xi),

but the specimen shown (Plate xii, fig, a) is made in the hour-glass pattern, the

14 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

strands being looped arovnd 4 basal eane withy (bent to form ” hoop) and lashed

over with strands of strong /Tibiscus bark (Roth 1901, Plate x, fig, 4-5), The

technique then proceeds as with dillybag making, The looping eommences at

the top (over the boop) and gradually narrows towards ihe bottom, which is

abruptly finished off with a flat intermeshing (knotted at the final end), thus

piving a wide, flat hase to the net,

Sis)

Pelt Dy

—~

Fig. 2, 4, Netted string bag. 6, Ditte detail, o, Coiled string bag. d. Ditto detail.

® Woman's apron, tf, Ditta retail,

The type of handle used with ‘‘erass’’ baskets and dillybags varies. These

may be of one or more strands used separately or overwound to give strength

(Roth 1901, Plate vii, fig. 7), The method of fastening also varies; e.g., the

basal strands may be eaught together with other weaving strands to make a

central core which is overwound, or separate strands may he passed directly

through the basal strings on either side, overwound, and fastened in the centre

by knotting or intertwining, Sometimes the handles are fastened more to one

side of the mouth, so that the mouth falls open when in use (Text fig. la),

allowing the hand to pass in and out easily and the dillybagw to lie flat on the

hack. The handle is sometimes interwoven with jabiru-down to make it soft

against the forehead, Handles of ‘‘erass’’ baskets are usually fastened ta the

sides with a proteetive wedge of hark to break the strain of the handle on the

basket, or a small stick may be used, which is more easily removed and renders

the handle detachable.

Women’s aprons (wa:ta), may be made from Micus, Acacta or Livistona

twine, but usually from Meus whieh is softer, and may be coloured with red

clay or stained yellow with the root or leaves of Alphistuna crotenoides or

McCoNNEL—NATIVE ARTS AND INDUSTRIES i5

Morinda, citrifolia, whieh is used also for cleaning aprons and dillyhbags, when

the colour is usually rubbed off afterwards. Aprons are made on a basal waist-

string (Text fig. 2e-f) fron whieh lone loops of equal length are suspended in

front and fastened by a single loop tu (he waist-string (Roth, 1901, Plate vil,

fig. 4), The basal waisi-string is looped at oue end and the ends lett [ree at

the other end for tying into the loop. When not in use, this apron ts rolled round

a stick and fastened round with the loose ends of the waist-string, leaving the

loop at the top for earrying,

RITUAL AND DECORATIVE ART.

Clothes in the Huropean sense ave non-existent. Men and womeu go iaked.

Aprons are worn by women only on certain oceasions with a special sivnificance,

A young girl (koman manya) first wears an apron when she returns to camp

after separation at the onset of puberty, and after each ensuing separation for

a similar reason, either as a mature girl (koman) or as a married woman (wantya

piz’an). When a mother returns to her husband's eamp at the end of hier isola-

tion during childbirth, she wears a brand new apron, bringing with her an

offering of! yalis and fish, one dillybagful each for hersel’ and her husband

and one trom the child to its father. Aprons are also worn by women on

cerchiomal occasions, as when they take part in dances, and especially for the

iourning danee.

As healing, power-giving and protective charms, plain stvines are tied

round the affeeted part, for headaches, pains in leg and stomach and siekness.

Men wear stvings round arm or lez when hunting, and pregnant women wear

them around the abdomen when diving for water lilies. Decorative strings are

wort on ceremonial occasions. Both men and women wear shell nosepess (made

from Megalotractus aruana), pearlshell pendants suspended from a string round

the neek. Sueh neeklets and headbands of threaded discs are made of pearl:

shell and Nautilus pompilius. Men wear pandanus-palm armiets, plain and

plaited (Roth 1901, Plate iv), a large hollow wooden ear-cylinder (painted red

and white and worn in the lobe of one ear, whieh is stretehed to hold it), or, leas

usual, a collar of hght wood covered with beeswax and studded with scarlet

élbrus seeds. Women wear cowrie shell girdles and cross-overs, These ornaments

are mostly borrowed from the north and are not, properly spealsing, indigenous.

Indigenous art is seen in plain and over-wonund striigs, strings iiterwoven willl

posstun-fur and jabiru-feather down, threaded golden grass-bugles (Text fle, 3e),

plaited yellow orehid-bark, local pearlshell necklets and headbands, and

nowadays (when needle and cotton are available) strings of scarlet Abrus seeds.

16 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Women’s strings may be made completely circular for passing oyer the head,

either of the required size or long enough to be doubled and redoubled a number

of times; or they may be made of one or more strings fastened together at the

ends by various devices, e.2., loose string at one end and a loop at the other, or

with basal strings left free to tie back into the main string (doubled), or with

the basal strings at either end overwound partway but left loose at the ends

for tying (Text fig. 8e). The workmanship of these decorative strings is skilled

Fig, 8, Shell drill and orhaments. a, Turritelia cerea drill for piercing shells. b, Nautilus

shell nacklace. c. Necklace of grass bugles. d. Flat band ornament of Dendrobium orchid

epidermis and string. e. Oyerwound strings worn as ornament. f. Pinetada margaritifera, a

fragile peatly shell used in ornamental necklace making.

and artistic. A small, fragile pearlshell (Pinclada marguritifera, Text fig. 3f)

found on the Gulf shore is used instead of the coarser Nautilus pompilius to make

a fine pearl necklet or headband, worn by men and women. Toles are drilled

in the pearlshell by means of a spiral shell (Turrtfella cerea) which is fastened

to the end of a stick (fixed so that the point is in a central position) and twisted

between the hands like a firestick (Text fiz. 4a). The small pieces of shell, each

with its eentre-hole, ave ground and sharpened by means of solidified shell-

grit and then strung on twine which is twisted so that the rectangular pieces

lie Hat (Text fig. 3b). The epidermis of the Dendrabium johannis orehid

(wilted to yellow in the fire) is plaited in and ont of a strine-base to form a

flat band (Text fig. 8d), which may be worn round the head or arm or leg by

McCONNEL—NATIVE ARTS AND INDUSTRIES 17

men, and long and doubled as a girdle or crossover breastlol by women, Sone-

times twine is interwoven with soft white jabiru-down and, folded and twisted

into a number of strands, worn as a crossover breastlet or girdle by the women,

showing dazzlingly white against their brown skins. Golden vrass-bueles, fine

and coarse, are gathered together into a number of strands and tied round the

neck, or, folded over a number of times, passed over the head as crossovers and

girdles, or sometimes in single strand worn hanging from the head down the

back for mourning.

ee cal at

irene om 7 r YOUTH Tee

rarer Tm TN

Fig. d. a. Betrothal ring of string, overwound. b. Loyer’s string, dyed red. ¢. Umbilical

cord in wax pendant, decorated with yellow orchid bark stripes. d. Widow’s string nock

ornament with wax balls decorated with red Abrus seeds fastened with beeswax.

In addition to these decorative strings, worn for ceremonial purposes in

general, strings are used also for specific purposes. The most common of these

is the cireular overwound plain string worn as a crossover (single or doubled)

for mourning; the crossover goes over neck and underarm, i.e., across the breast.

It is worn by widows but is not compulsory. The compulsory widow’s string is

made of overwound twine, with blobs of beeswax at the ends. It is worn round

the neck, fastened in front, with the ends crossed again at the back and hanging

down behind. Sometimes the beeswax blobs are studded with scarlet seeds

and have the basal strands left loose for tying so as to make the necklet more

secure (Text fig. 4d). The wearing of the widow's string is compulsory until

mourning ends. If it should wear out, it must be replaced, but the old one

must be kept also. If a widow should lose her mourning necklet and be seen

walking about without it, she would be killed by her husband’s relatives.

18 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

A small plain ring (Text fig. 4a), made in the same overwound technique,

is used in the betrothal ceremony as a symbol of the promise made by a woman

to give her daughter in marriage to a man. In this ceremony her head is

covered with a sheet of bark (on account of the strict taboo existing between

son-in-law and mother-in-law), as, accompanied by another woman (acting as

proxy for the promised daughter) she encircles the man seated on the ground

and places the ring over a tuft of his hair and hangs a dillybag over his head.

The betrothal ring is kept by the man as a surety for his promised bride. When

the marriage takes place the ring is placed under honey in a bark vessel, as the

last payment due to future mother- and father-in-law.

A lover’s string (manenka), made of several fine strands of twine, plain

or knotted and coloured with red clay (Text fig. 4b), is sent by a woman to her

lover by the hand of this man’s half-sister, in whom she can confide. On receipt

of it, the lover sends her back a message arranging a rendezvous, saying: ‘* You

’? and they meet at the time and

pretend to go for yams, and I will go hunting,

place arranged.

A baby’s umbilical cord (which it is considered essential to preserve),

finished with a wax pendant striped with yellow orchid bark (Text fig. 4c)

is hung around a baby’s neck when it is presented to its father, on the occasion

of the mother’s return to her husband’s camp after childbirth. The father

accepts the child as his own and as a member of his clan, anoints its face with

his sweat so that the clan spirits will recognise it as ‘‘belonging.’’ Later the

child is given a name identifying it with a clan totem through a ‘‘namesake,”’

who acts as its guardian should anything happen to its father.

THE USE OF CLAYS IN RITUAL.

In ritual and ceremonial art the use of coloured clays is unlimited. Painted

on the body, clays are used with an endless variety of meanings according to

the ritual and the ceremony concerned. In everyday life clays are used in

sickness to cool the body. When a baby is presented to its father, a white

streak is painted down its nose (the significance of which I am uneertain) and

the child is also rubbed with charcoal to cover any remaining lightness of skin.

At the betrothal ceremony, a white streak is placed on the abdomen of the girl’s

mother’s brother, denoting his relationship to her through the mothei, and his

responsibility for his sister’s promise; the girl’s father touches the man’s head

with his spearthrower as a gesture of subjection and the girl’s brother rubs

chests with him as a sign of his acceptance of the pledge. In initiation cere-

monies, women paint their bodies (Plate vi, fig. d) in a manner signifying their

McCONNEL—NATIVE ARTS AND INDUSTRIES 19

relationship to the initiates, e.@., ‘‘mothers’’ paint their breasts with red and

white clay and hold the breast as if to feed, symbolising a maternal relationship:

a ‘father’s sister’? paints a circle on her shoulder and holds her hand there in

the attitude of steadying a child by the knee when carrying it on her shoulder,

whilst a ‘sister’? paints her lees with white stripes and holds her hand behind

ler head in the manner of supporting a baby’s back, when carrying it on the

shoulder. Sometimes two or all of these syvnbols and attiludes are combined

to signify a variety of relationships on the part of one woman. bi moureing

dances, women of the deceased's clan and moiety paint their faces and bodies

with red and white clay, and wear the inournime strings, apron, and other

ornaments alluded to above,

Tn all saered ritnal and ceremonial, red and white clays are used by the

men to denote the peculiar significance of (he ceremony. Totemic emblems are

painted on the bodies of the men who take part in the ritual of their own

totemic clans. For example, men of the bony-bream clan have a male and female

fish paintd on their ehests, men of the euss-euss opossum elan are covered in

white spots, and men of the tortoise elan have a tortoise painted in white elay

on the baek, ete, A white mark down the abdoisen denotes the female of the

species, In the bony-bream ceremory, the male and female bony-bream appear

covered respectively in red or white clay, according as each “‘steps ont’’ of a

hloodwood or a milkwood tree. In addition to clays, feathers are used, e.2.,

as headdresses, held together with gum or wax, Wax is used for modellinz—as

in the ease of the figurine of a baby (Plate v, fie. f, and Plate xvii, fig. 1). Wood

also is used, e.e., for making ceremonial objects such as the bull-roarer (Plate v,

fig. a), wooden phallus (Plate v, fig. d), ete, Bark is used for representing

various objects, such as a fish carried in the beak of a bird (Plate vy, fig, e, and

Plate vi, fig. b), pulwatya, ete. There is no end to the uses made of such

available materials, of which the examples quoted are but an inadequate

indication.

RELIGION AND DRAMA.

The creative talent of these people is revealed not only in their (echnical

skill and jyeenuity in the manufaeture and the artistic finish of objects of

everydas use, and their decorative and ritualistie art, but is seen to perfection

in the dramatic portrayal of religious beliefs associated with the eults of their

elan totems or pulivaiya, Kor behind all these eeonomie activities, and the ritual

attending the crises of life, behind the sanctions which govern mental attitudes

and behaviour patterns, even behind all natural phenomena, beneficial or other-

wise, lies the belief in a spirit world, conceived in terms of these pu/maiya,

20 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Whose abode is known, who permeate all reality and are the souree of all that

exists, who control and maintain all forms of life and inherent capacities, and

whose creative and inventive activities ‘'in the beginnine’' (ke:nka) established

the world as it is today and who sanctioned the present social order, These

traditional beliefs absorbed implicitly by one generation after another, are made

exphieit in the social consciousness by means of ritual and the recital and dramatic

portrayal of the prowess and creative powers of the pulwaiya. It is only in the

light of sueh beliefs that present activities and skills ean be properly evaluated.

Every eult, whether it be associated with food supplies, forees of nature

or with human attributes, has its **story,’’ its drama and ritual and its auwa,

Where natural and human factors are merged by the incarnation of the human

pulwaiya in some material form, Bach auwa is marked by a tree, water-hole

or antbed, in which the pulwarya resides aid Whence its ereative power emanates.

On the upper Kendall River, where the fresh-water bream breed, is a small

circle of antbeds with a line of them Jeading from these spirit-camps down

to the water-hole. On the upper Areher River a small cirele of antbeds marks

the auwwe of the euss-cuss opossuin, All such shrines are kept in order and swept

with branches and revered as the abode of the pulwaiya is felt to he there, At

the mouth of the Tokali River—at the auwa of viya nospan, the rock python,

the trees on which the spirit-snakes sun themselves are sacred and must not be

touched for fear of creating a bush-fire. Sweat must be smeared on strangers

who approach so that they may be recognised by oiya no:pan as ‘‘frienda,"’

On the Great Dividing Range in which these rivers rise, where stones and rocks

are plentiful, these auwa often are marked by stones, e.e., the rock-cod family

marked by three stones (father, mother and child), and the kangaroo puliwaiya

by a line of stones crossing a ridge with a larger ‘‘old man’’ in the lead

(MeConnel 1931), Though separately conceived, all these cults are implicitly

comprehensive and complementary and together cover the whole field of man’s

orientation to reality in all its forms,

Only those eults associated with ceremonial objects shown im this collection

are deseribed here, for the better understanding of the nature and funetion of

these objects. Incidentally, these erlts deal with two most important. aspects of

social life: (i) the source of food supplies; (ii) the erises of life, associated

with the sex relationships and childbirth.

A. The cult of Wolkolan, the bony-bream pulwaiya,

Members of the bony-bream clan are the custodians of this cult. lWvery

year, when the bony-bream come up the river to breed, word is sent to neigh-

bouring clans to come for the fishing season and share in the proeeeds of the

McCoONNEL—NATIVE ARTS AND [NDUSTRIKS 21

hunt. Wolhkolan has his abode (auwa) in a small ereek off the lower Archer

River, where a spring breaks through the bank into a waterhole, in which the

bony-breain breed. Here a ritual for the inerease of the bony-bream periodieally

takes place. With stamping of feet and hitting of the surrounding trees in

whieh the spirits of the bomy-bream reside, men eall upon Wolkslan to send out

a plentiful supply of bony-bream into the river for men to spear for food,

'The measure of the response of Wofkolan to this ‘‘awakening’’ ritual dramatic:

ally was revealed to an imitiate of this ¢lan during the uutiation ceremony, a

ritual which I was permitted to attend. Tn response to the rhythmie chanting

and elapping of hands eame an answering call as the female spirit of the bony-

bream emerged from a group of trees, She was covered from head to foot in

white clay (having ‘‘stepped out"’ from a milkwood tree), She was crowned

with a semi-circle of feathers of the peewit (an associated clan pulwatya), her

body was riddled with the spears of her slayers. She staggered forward to the

rhythmie chanting (legs and arms outstretched and head falling forward).

She paused now and then, only to be called into action again by the chanters,

Beside her stood Wolkalan, covered with red clay (having ‘‘stepped out’’ of a

bloodwood tree), Kneeling at the feet of Wollolan, a suppliant, with a feather

fan, raised (by sleight of hand) the wooden phallus into creative activity in

response to his people's call for a plentifyl supply of bony-hream (Plate v,

fiz. d). Innate in this dramatic portrayal of the pulwaiya answering the call

of this people, staggering tinder Spear wounds inflicted through a willing inear-

nation as bony-bream, slain that people may eat and live, lies the belief in a

beneficent and creative deity and a spirit of voluntary self-sacrifice, For a full

description of this cult see MeConnel (1935),

B. The cult of the ''Bull-roarers.''

This eult. ig not confined to one clan or tribe but is a series of eults, asso-

ciated hy their own inner logic with one another, each with its own auwa and

pwhwaiya, and each concerned with one aspect of the phases through which

a woman passes in her development from (a) a girl entering puberty (koman

manye) to (b) amature girl (koman), (ec) a married woman (wantya piz’an),

(4) aw married woman who has given birth to a child (kafa), The bull-roarers

vary (in order of the above) from (a) a small, plain leaf-like piece of wood

(moiya) to (b) one similar but larger (pakapaka), (c) a larger one coloured

red with white splotehes (moipaka) which is one of a pair (husband and wife),

the male being phallie-shaped and painted red with long white stripes and dots,

and (d) a female motpaka similar m shape but painted red with white stripes

22 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MusEUM

across, Which is used (Plate vy, fig. 4) in association with the ritual of 4 woman

with a child (ka:tu) (Plate v, fiw. f), the latter being represented by a wax

figurine of a newborn male baby, complete with eyes (searlet seeds), teeth,

pubie hair, ete., lying on the abdomen of the “first woman’? (Plate v, fig, {).

The ‘*bull-roarers’’ moiya aud pakapaka ave swung respectively by youny

initiates at the end of the first part and at the close of the Ustyanam ceremony;

the first motpuke is swung by men for married women, and the last motpahu in

association with the ritual of childbirth. Hach has its own story of origin, its

rittal and drama, and its place in relation to social life.

The dramatic presentation of these symbolic ideas concerning the ‘* bull-

roarers’’ and their auc was vivid and arresting, coming as it did without any

expectation on my part. These dramatic seenes are deseribed here just as they

were witnessed by me.

(a) A koman manya vehemently swung the moiya whilst other /omean

‘manya lay stretched on the ground—they represented those who had gone down

into their auwea; after hiding the motya in a erack in a bloodwood tree ‘‘for

men to use,"’ she too went down into her auwa.

(b) The pakapaka was swung by a oman (white elay on breasts to

indicate her sex), whilst the wetyana (initiates) stood hand in hand apparently

listening. The marks on the wstyane were those used for initiates in the U styanam

ceremony (MeConnel 1935). It is from these ‘‘eirl’? awa (girls having first

possessed the motya and the pakapaha) that the power of awakening adolescence

and maturity are believed to come in response to the swinging of the ‘*bull-

roarers’’ by the welyane, who now assert their claims over the swineine of (he

‘“bull-roarers’’ relinquished by the girls,

(e) A line of fieures he prone on the ground with arms outstretched and

hands interlocking, on the abdomen of one of which (wantya piz’an) lies the

female moipaha. She represents a married woman, as yet without child. The

motpake (man and wife), having found each other, have entered a state of

married life. The female moipake is swune by a man for ‘‘married woman,”

invoking the virility from this auwe.

(d) A line of figures similarly lying, on the abdomen of one of which is

ka:ta, the wax figurine of a new-born male baby. This represents the first birth.

The figures on one side of the woman with a child are the first men who inhabited

the earth and who were growing old with no one to replace them: those on the

other side of ‘the woman with a child’ are those who, coming after this event,

are born of woman in the ordinary way, A mau at the end of the line swings

& motpaka, The idea symbolically presented here is ''the continuity of life

McCONNEL—NATIVE ARTS AND INDUSTRIES 23

”)

through birth, and its first coming. The interlocking of hands denotes conti-

nuity, and the swinging of the moipaka preservation of that continuity.

(e) The female moipaka pulwaiya sits with her child on her knee (the first

child ever created) with her husband beside her, the three together representing

the institution of family life. Sitting thus in their camp, the moipaka pulwayu

father, mother and child go down into their awwa, whence more babies now come.

From these ‘‘bull-roarer’’ awwa are believed to emanate those mystie forces

intimately concerned with the maintenance of sex relationships, which the

“‘bull-roarers’’ symbolise, and the sanctions which govern their social strati-

fication (MeConnel 1935).

The primitive symbolism of these cults should not mislead us into under-

estimating their psychological and sociological value. They are the means by

which individual experience is socialised and made explicit in the social con-

sciousness. They are a basic support of social structure and the conerete

expression of abstract ideas such as we are accustomed to express in more

sophisticated language, with the accumulated knowledge of thousands of years

enabling us to do so.

The ethnological specimens upon which the foregoing analysis is based

are in the South Australian Museum under the registered numbers listed here.

Duplicates of many of these specimens have been passed to the Australian

Museum, the University of Sydney (Department of Anthropology), and the

University of Queensland.

SPECIMENS SHOWING OUTSIDE INFLUENCE.

A.42055. Drum (Plate vii, fig, a). This is a hollow wooden cylinder,

slightly tapered; over larger end-hole is stretched skin of a lizard; beaten by

hand—palm of hand for deep notes and fingers for lighter sounds—used with

one or both ends closed, as in Papua. It is used in ceremonial dance of totemic

hero Sivrt, the seagull, among the T'yonandyi tribe (Batavia River), who is

said to have introduced it trom the Torres Straits; not found south of Archer

River.

A.42066-67. Bows (Plate vii, fig. Im). Specimens used in dances asso-

ciated with cults of totemic hero Sivri. (Tyonandyi tribe, Batavia River). Not

found south of Archer River. :

A.42068-69. Arrows (Plate vii, fig. n-o). The points of these arrows are

missing. They are used with the above bows.

A.42056-57, SueLtL Nose-Pec (Plate vii, fig. b-c). Wikmuykan name

ha:wovyama. Nose ornament pierced through hole in nose; made from Megala-

24 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MuSEUM

tractus aruanus or Turritella cocea? This specimen is from Kendall, Holroyd

and Archer Rivers area.

A.42058-59, SuEtt Penvants (Plate vii, fig. d-e), Semi-lunate or oblong

pearlshell ornament, worn mostly by men suspended from neck; pearlshell

usually traded in from east coast and the Torres Straits, These specimens

are from Kendall, Holroyd and Archer Rivers area,

A.42063. Dancing Sximr (Plate vii, fig. i). The skirt is made from strips

of hibiseus bark and worn by men in dances. Found north of Archer River;

associated with the Batavia River hero cults of Sturt the seagull and Nywngu the

Torres Straits pigeon, said to have been introduced by them.

A.42060. SuEut Neckuet (Plate vii, fig. f). Wikmunkan name wastakuspa,

The necklet is made of rectangular pieces of nautilus shell strung together; the

shell is traded from Hast Coast and Torres Straits. Specimen collected from

Kendall, Holroyd and Archer Rivers area,

A, No specimen, Ear Ornament. <A large wooden eylinder painted red

and white and worn through lobe of ear, Papuan fashion. Used in Kendall,

liolroyd and Archer Rivers area.

A42061-62. Armurrs (Plate vii, fig. g-h), Plaited strips of pandanus-

palm leaf from Kendall, Holroyd and Archer Rivers area, worn by men (Torres

Straits Islands fashion).

A.42064. Pipe (Plate vii, fig. j), Native name is marippa. It is a wooden

cylinder, sealed at both ends, with two loles, one to hold bark cigarette and the

other for drawing smole into mouth. The pipe is passed from one to another

with finger held over hole to prevent smoke escaping. This type of pipe is used

in Papua, also by men on Areher River (Papuan fashion).

A.42070. Crus (Plate vii, fig. p). Named marikan. A two-pronged elnb,

decorated with black seeds; traded in from Torres Straits Islands. The head is

used to knoek back spears.

A.42071. Cius (Plate vii, fig. q). Native name marikan. Pineapple type

of club, traded in from Torres Straits Islands and used to knock back spears.

A.42065. BoommkanG-sHarep CrremMoniaL Osseot (Plate vii, fig. k).

Decorated with pipeclay and strips of orchid bark; significance not recorded,

The boomerang is not used in this area,

Axe. An unhafted axe traded in from south or east; found on Kendall-

Holroyd River and rehafted.

KwIre (no specimen). Is named hoiyama, Traded in. Wikmunkan name.

Dousiz-OurriccerR CANOE (no specimen). This is made from hollowed-out

milkwood tree; the booms are usually in two pieces and lashed to a stick placed

McCONNEL—NATIVE ARTS AND INDUSTKIES 35

throngh gunwales towards prow and stern; foats on either side are lashed to

booms. Made on Batavia, Embley and Areher Rivers and used along the Gulf

Coast as far south as Edward River, Jt was introduced from northern neigh-

bouwrs and is not indivenous art. Vide: Hale and Tindale (1933, fig. 150-151)

and Haddon and Hornbill (1937),

INDIGENOUS SPECIMENS FROM ARCHER, KENDALL, HOLROYD

RIVERS AREA.

A42001, SHorr Ficutmse Srear (Plate viil, fiz. a). Wilkmuykan name,

jiu:"ina; has no barb; acacia head and bamboo shaft; is used for fighting at a

distanee,

A.42002, Burr Enp of an example identieal with A42001 (Plate viii,

fig. b). An imitation butt; used for fighting at a distance; average length

60 inches.

A.42003, Snore PicuvinG Spear (Plate viii, fig. ©), Wikmunkan name

pepin, There is no barb, has acacia head and lightwood (hibiseus) shalt, 1 is

used fur fighting at a distance,

A.42004. Srorr Fianving Span (Plate viii, fig. d). Native name,

pankuta. There is no barb, has acacia head, cottonwood, bamboo or grass tree

shaft abd is used for fighting at a distance (also for wallaby).

A42008, LonG Fighting Spear (1 prong) (Plate viii, fig. bh), Native name,

keha yandala. Tt has a lone acacia point and shalt in one (imitation join,

poisohous guut?), wallaby or emu bone barb with short cane or softwood butt;

hotel at end to fit spearthrower. It is coloured red and white at end of shaft

and has circle of white edged with red at foot of point.

A42009. Burr Exp of example identical with A.42008 (Plate viii, fig. i),

A.42015-17, Long Figurine Spears (Stingray Barpep) (Plate viii, fis.

o-). Native name, wolka, Has a long hardwood head spliced to lightwood shatt;

1-3 stingray barbs (white) with imitation painted butt. Painted when given to

initiates at end of seeond initiation ceremony (e.2., note white rings on head of

A.42017). These spears are used for spearing in the lez, a punishment for

infringement of tribal law or iniseonduet, ete,

A.42016, Burr Exp of example identical with A,42015 (Plate viil, fig, p).

A.42019-23. Lone Ficutmna Spears (StivcraAy Bareep) (Plate viii, fig.

rw). This is called katya and is a flower-like cluster of stingray barbs mounted

on stemlike head of acacia wood (white and red) and is attached by gui to

bamboo or softwood (Hibiscus) shaft. Blood is smeared on bamboo shaft iit

waving pattern hy twisting spear in blood-stained hand. Note ceremonial paint-

26 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

ing on butt ends (Plate viii, fig. u and x). They are punitive or fighting spears;

e.g., used for spearing in the leg as punishment for infringement of tribal law or

misconduct, ete.

A.42024. Burr Env of example identical with A42023 (Plate vill, fig. x).

A ceremonial spear, red and white paint on shaft; has been decorated for an

initiation ceremony.

A.42025, Lone Figurina Spear (Srincray Barsep) (Plate viii, fig. y).

Spear, etiketu, with successive stingray barbs (white) lashed on to acacia head,

facing backwards and serially arranged; with bamboo or lightwoud (//ihisews)

shaft. A punitive or fighting spear used for spearing in the leg as purishinent

for infringement of law or misconduct, ete.

A.42005. Ligur Hunting Spear (Plate viii, fig. e). Wrhkarunkan nani,

pinta, It has long bamboo shait, one-pronged hardwood head and double-

pointed bone lashed on to acacia or ironwood point to form a terminal barb. A

lone, light spear used for fish, birds, goanna, native colnpation, ete,

A.42006. Lona Huntine Spwar (1 Prone) (Plate viii, fig. f). This spear,

fs’ has (a) a short butt (ceremonial); (b) long butt (utility); head and shalt

of acacia in one piece; strip of gum in imitation of join; butt of hibiscus or

other softwood; milkwood gum on point; ironwood gum on lower part of head;

has ceremonial paint. (ved and white circles) on shaft. This is used for spearing

bony-bream from canoe on lower Archer River and in ceremony of bony-bream

totem (MeConnel 1936).

A.42007. Burt Env or A.42006 (Plate vill, fig. 2).

A42010. Lone Hunviye Svear (3 Proxgep) (Plate viii, fig. 3). Called

wantan dyindan, has a softwood shaft (Jibiseus); acacia head; 3 points with

hone barbs; false butt effect, in painted white butt-end of shaft. This is used the

same as A.42006.

A42011. Lona Hunrine Spear (4 Proncep) (Plate viii, fig. k). Welemun-

Kan name is pita piznta. It is a bamboo shaft with 4 acacia points, each with

terminal double-ended hone barb lashed on to form a barbed point; the light

end of cane is at butt end. This is used for hunting emu, wallaby, jabiru, fish,

ete.

A.42012. Burr Enp of example identical with A4A2011 (Plate viii, fig. 1).

A.42013. Long Heavy Huntinc Spear (4 Pronuep) (Plate viil, fig. m).

Wikmunkan name, keka dintyan. There is a double-pointed terminal bone on each

of the 4 hardwood points. Tt is used for hunting big game. This specimen has

(a) Acacia wood shaft, imitation butt fitting into spear thrower; (b) Pate

palonki, grass tree shaft; (¢) Pita okindya, Hibiscus wood shaft.

McCoONNEL—NATIVE ARTS AND INDUSTRIES 27

A42014. Burr Enp of example identical with A.42013 (Plate viii, fig. n),

A.42045-47, Sprearrirowers (Plate x, fig. bh). Named tusina: (tusla

hantya = nose or peg; tuvzle manka = neck where held; (v:la mampa = shell

end). his has a flat shaft, plain smooth surface, varying in width; sometimes

expanded in breadth, contracting towards handle-end, which is plastered with

gun and fastened between two bailer dises, against whieh spear is balanced,

wooden peg at other end into which spear is hooked; ornamental yellow orehid

bark bands, and searlet abrus seeds sometimes inserted into gum between shell

dises, Ji is used to wive added foree and leneth in throwing spear,

A42048, Wax, <A stiek of wax on earrying stick.

A42051, Stxew (Plate x, fig. 1). Wallaby-tail sinew prepared for use in

fastening-on spear barbs.

A.42049. Gum (Plate x, fig. j). A stock of grass-tree gum on carrying

stick for use on spear point after barb is lastened on to point.

A.42050. BAILER SHELL (J/élo @nphorus) (Plate x, fig. k). Native name,

wela. It is used for melting gum on fire before putting over spear point, used

also for hailing out water and for drinking purposes.

A.42058, Pauterre (Plate x. fig. n). Wikmughken name, havyaman, A

wooden palette with projection for engraving; used for smoothing hot gum on

spear point.

A.42054, Pauerrr (Plate x, fig, 0). Wikmunkan name, kavyaman, A

wooden palette With incisor tooth of wallaby or kangaroo attached to projection

for use as engraver.

A42052. Bark Bunptr (Plate x, fig.m). Made of folded ti-tree bark and

tied with string; used for carrying stingray barbs, ete,, and for use in spear

making; found in a man’s dilly-bag.

Bark Canoe (Specimen in Queensland Museum). Canoe is made from strip

ol messmate tree bark shaped at ends and sewn up with eane by using a bone

stiletto; sides drawn together with straps of green hibiscus bark and kept open

by forked sticks supporting ties; paddled by young mangrove stem splayed at

the end, and used in fishing and for crossing rivers. (Plate i, fig. b-d.)

A.42041-42, Miauriva Sticks or Ciups (Plate x, fig. b-c). These are hard-

wood, flat, pointed and red ochred, Used by men for fighting at close range or for

warding off spears,

A.42043-44. Criups (Plate x, fig, d-e). Rounded clubs with knob at end;

used for warding off spears,

A.42040, SHorr Yam Svick (Plate x, fig. a). Wikmunhkan name, katyan.

It is made of hardwood and used by women for digging out roots, ete,

28 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

A.42026. Lone Yam Stick (Plate ix, fig. a). Wikmunkan name, ka’tyan.

Hardwood yam stick pointed at one end, used by women for digging out roots,

goanna, bandicoots, etc., and for stripping bark, ete.

A.42027. Potntep ENp or Yam Stick similar to A.42026 (Plate ix, fig. b).

A.42028-29, Ficntine Sticks (Plate ix, fig. e-d). Wikmunkan name,

hatyan-o:taka or katyan pu’nka. These are painted red with white points and

used by women in fighting each other; the photographs show opposite ends of

the two specimens.

A.42030-31. Fiautine Sricks or CLuss (Plate ix, fig. e-f). These are short

fighting sticks and are used by women taking part in fight to hit back at

opponents’ long fighting sticks. The photographs show only the head end of

one and the butt of the other.

A.42032-36. CHILDREN’s Spears (Plate ix, fig. g-k). These have wooden

points let into reed shafts and fastened with strips of bark fibre string; average

length 50-53 inches. (a) Portion of bark left on wooden point in imitation of

poison gum used in similar place on adult fighting spears. (b) Plain, no bark

strip. (ce) Imitation prong, made by fastening string round place for joining;

imitation poison gum on point. Plate ix, fig. h, shows the butt end of a spear

identical with A.42032.

A.42037-39. Fire Sticks (Plate ix, fig. lm). Wikmunkan name,

tu:mpu:piya. Two long sticks made of match-wood (match-box bean); carried

in sheath made of two hollow bamboo tubes, fastened together by strips of

orchid bark (Dendrobium johannis) burnt yellow on the fire and wound round

and round the tubes, which are held together at end by a knob of black bees-

wax, studded with scarlet seeds of Abrus precatorius; black, yellow and red

represent the colours of fire. Method of using fire stick is to place one on the

ground, steadied by foot, and to spin the other downwards between the hands

to create friction against the one on the ground.

A.42081, Srems or Ficus cuNNINGHAMI (Plate xi, fig. a). Wikmunkan

name, na:tan. Samples of raw material from which string (koiya) is made by

stripping off bark.

A.42082. SrRANDS or Ficus CUNNINGHAMII (Plate xi, fig. b). Wikmunkan

name, koina:tan. Strands stripped from stem of Ficus and used for making

twine; sometimes used in this rough state also for tying purposes.

A.42083, BunpbLE or Ficus cuNNINGHAMIT (Plate xi, fig. ¢). Wikmunkan

name koina:tan. It is rendered soft by chewing in the mouth and used for

making twine.

A.42084. Srranps or Ficus cUNNINGHAMI (Plate xi, fig. d). Ready for

use in making 2-ply twine by twisting strands together with palm of hand

against thigh.

McCONNEL—NATIVE ARTS AND INDUSTRIES 29

A.42085-87. Twinz, Compuerep (Plate xi, fig. e-g). Wikmunkan name,

kowya. It is made from Ficus fibre; of varying thicknesses—coarse, medium and

fine.

A.42088, Srranps or CoMPLETED TwINE (Plate xi, fig. i). Twine is caught

together into required size and fastened at top by overwinding; sometimes worn

in this unfinished state.

A.42089. Twine CircLeT (Plate xi, fig. j). Cirelet is in overwinding

pattern and only partially completed.

A.42090, Twine Circuer (Plate xi, fig. k). Overwinding completed.

A.42095. Srring Apron (Plate xi, fig. 0). Wikmunkan name wa:ta. A

small apron made of Ficus twine (koiya na:tan); long loops suspended from

waist-string (single loop) and fastened behind; rolled for carrying and usually

wound around a stick or piece of bark; worn by young girls at onset of puberty.

A.42096. Srrinc Apron (Plate xi, fig. p). Wikmunkan name, wa:ta. A

woman ’s apron made of Ficus twine (koiya na:tan). It is worn by a woman on

special occasions such as presentation of child to its father, mourning dances,

ete.; rolled, with loop out for carrying.

A.42093, String APRON (RED) (Plate xi, fig. m). Wikmunkan name, wa:ta.

A woman’s apron made of Ficus string (koiya na:tan); dyed with red ochre;

worn on special occasions; rolled, with loop out, for carrying.

A.42094. Srrinc APRON (wuHIve) (Plate xi, fig. n). Wikmunkan name,

wa:ta. The twine is made from strips of white under-epidermis of leaves of

Livistona palm (koi-tu:ta). It is worn by women on special occasions, such as

presentation of child to its father, mourning dances, etc.; rolled, with loop out

for carrying.

A.42092. Srring Apron (YELLOW) (Plate xi, fig. 1). Wikmunkan name,

wa:ta. The twine is made from Ficus cunninghamii, stained yellow with root

or stem of Morinda citrifolia or leaves of Alphitonia crotonoides. It is worn by

women on special oceasions, such as presentation of child to its father, mourning

dances, ete.; rolled, with loop out for carrying.

A.42091. Roor or Morinpa crrrirouta (Plate xi, fig. k). A powdered root

used to clean aprons and dillybags, dried in sun and rubbed off again; leaves

a yellow stain used for colouring, if desired, as above.

A.42097,. Woman’s Utitrry Pap anv Strine (Plate xi, fig, q). Wikmunkan

name mu:ta me:’a. It is a strip of ti-tree bark (Melaleuca leucadendron) used

as a pad during menstruation; passed between legs and fastened at waist both

back and front by folding ends under waist-string; carefully burned and buried

after use.

30 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

A.42098. Bark Torcu (Plate xi, fig. r). Bark is of Melaleuca leucadendron

(kitya tumpa); rolled into longish bundle and tied round with strands of the

bark. It is used as a flare at night, e.g., finding one’s way around the camp,

attracting prawns, or when fishing for bony-bream from canoe at night time, ete.

A.42099. Bark BUNDLE (Plate xi, fig. s). It is tied round with twine and

used to carry spear-barbs, clays, ete.

A.42134. Bark Heap Prorector (Plate xv, fig. d). Bark twisted into pad

for wearing on top of head to distribute weight and lessen strain in carrying

loads; used by women.

A.42145. Dimxy-Bac (Plate xiii, fig. h). Wikmunkan name, wa:nka

na’:tan. <A large dilly-bag made from fig-tree fibre string ( koiya na:tan) in

figure-of-eight double-loop pattern and used for carrying roots of all kinds.

A.42146. Diuy-Baa (Plate xiii, fig. c). Wikmunkan name, wa:nka po:la.

String twine made from red acacia (Acacia flavescens or A. latifolia), sometimes

alternated with white Livistona twine to give striped effect; figure-of-eight

pattern; used for carrying heavy loads.

A.42143. Duuy-Bac (Plate xiii, fig. f). Wikmunkan name, wa:nka me:’a.

The fine white twine is made from epidermis of leaf of Livistona australis;

figure-of-eight pattern; sometimes alternates with Ficus or Acacia twine to

give striped effect; used for carrying lighter loads.

A.42144, Dm.y-Bac (Plate xiii, fig. g). Wikmunkan name, wa:nk 9:nyana.

The twine is from dark Ficus fibre in pattern used for making fish nets.

A.42155. Fisaina Ner (Plate xii, fig. a). Wikmunkan name, puntaman.

Made from fibre of Acacia holosericea (koiya go:ka) or its equivalent; in figure-

of-eight pattern; held at top by looped cane; usual pattern for fish nets is

that used in dilly-bag A.42144 (wank o:nyana), i.e., fish net pattern.

A.42148. XEROTES MULITIFLORA (SAMPLE) (Plate xiv, fig. ¢). Wikmunkan

name kimpian. It is used for making grass-baskets after soaking in water to

soften.

A.42149. Grass BasKET (INCOMPLETE) (Plate xiv, fig. b). Wikmunkan

name, kdmpian; in course of manufacture.

A.42147. Grass Basket (COMPLETED) (Plate xiv, fig. a). Wikmunkan

name, kémpian. A large open basket, handle of fibre-string overwound; some-

times with white jabiru-down interwoven to render it soft against head or

shoulder in carrying; used by women to carry roots, ete.

A.42150. Grass-BASKET (PARTIAL CLOSE-WEAVE) (Plate xiv, fig. f). Native

name, kdmpian. It is closely woven at base to hold meal when washing (after

grinding) to cleanse from poisonous or indigestible substances; wad of bark

McCoNNEL—NATIVE ARTS AND INDUSTRIES 3]

lastened to end of string handle to ease strain on side of basket; handle not

overwound.,

A.42151, Gnrass-BAskr? (ALL CLOSE WEAVE) (Plate xiv, fig.e). Wikmaujphan

name, kampidn. This specimen is closely woven throughout to hold moist sub

stances, e.@., honey; handle partially completed.

A42154. Grass-Basker (Plate xiy, fig. h), Wilonunhan name, Idimpian,

Tt is closely woven and coloured with white and red clay; tubular shaped;

specially woven for carrying honey.

A.42153, Grass-Basker (Plate xiv, fig. 2). Wikmunhan name, kiinepian, A

small, tubular-shaped, closely woven basket used by men vor carrying small

treasures, e.g., tobacco.

A.42152, Grass-Basker (Plate xiv, fig d). Wihmuyhkan name, himpian.

A small, tubular-shaped, coarsely woven basket used by nien for carrying small

treasures, e.g, Lobacca,

A42140, Livisrona ausrratis (Plate xiii, fig. b and e). <A bundle of

strands from underneath of palm leaf, and twine made from same, Wikmunkan

name, kot tusta. This is raw material used for making 2-ply twine (white) from

epidermis of under-leaf of Livistonm,

A,42141, Dinty-Bac (Plate xiii, fig, a), Wihmunhkan name, wamk iyampan,

This specimen is made from white twine of Diwmstona wustralis in grass-basket

chain and twist pattern (anti-clockwise), which lends itself to this pattern,

handle o! overwound type, not yet jomed in centre. Positions of handles to one

side allows bag to lie flat against back as it hangs from the head, and also leaves

room for hand to pass in and out easily.

A.42142, Druty-Bac (Plate xiii, fig. d), Wikmunkan name, wamk dyampan.

Tt has handles equidistant on sides of it.

A42155. Scirpus LIrroRaLis (OLD CORMS ON staLK) (Plate xv, fig. k),

Wikmunkan name pindya or mai kuztala. Corms due from edge of awamp

by women who sit up to the shoulder in nud as they dig. (Plate iii, fig. a), Old

corms beaten into flat eake after cooking in fire.

4.42136. ScrRPUS LITTORALIS (YOUNG CORMS ON s?TALK) (Plate xv, fig. 1).

Wikmunhan name, pindya. Corms are cleaned and tied together for carrying.

The young corms are roasted and eaten without beating: first.

A.42137. Diuny-Baac (Plate xv, fig. m). A dilly-bag containing corms of

Scirpus littoralis.

A.42138. Wooprn Matier (Plate xv, fig n), Wikmunkan name d:la, Ii

is used for beating corms after cooking them on coals. (It is shown in use in

Plate iv, fig. a).

32 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

A42139. Fuar Cakes or Scirpus irrrorauis (Plate xy, fig. f), They are

ready for eating, rendered digestible by roasting and beating.

A.42125, Duiy-Bag (sAmpue) (Plate xv, fig. a), Bag filled with shells to

illustrate falling open of mouth due to position of handles, whiel: allows it to

lie flat on hack: also vives easy entrance of hand when gathering roots and mud

shells.

A.42126-42127, Mussen Sueuis (GQmLoINA COAXANS) (Plate xv, fig. b-c).

Wikmunkan name, ku:mala. Shells dug out of the nnd of the mangrove-clad

ereek-beds by women. These mussels are eaten and shells used for spoons,

scrapers, ete.

A42128. Barer SHenu (MeLo amprorus) (Plate xv, fig. e), Wrikmunhan

name, weja. This specimen is used for bailing water out of canoes and wells,

for drinking, as 4 cooking vessel, and for heating gum, ete,

A.42130, Prart SHett Oysters (PrvcTapA MARGARITINERA) (Plate xv, fig.

h, j, also Text fig. 3f). Wikmunkan name, atuwa, They are found on the Cult

shore. The fish is used for eating and the shell for making necklets,

A.42131. Ni&CKLET MADE PROM RECTANGULAR PIECES OF PINCTADA MARGARI'T-

rera (Plate xv, fig.o). Wilmunken name, atuwa. Rectangular pieces of shell

eround and shaped by pieces of hardwood and shell-erit, and threaded on string.

A42132, Sprrau Seen Drm (TURRITELLA CEREA) (Plate xv, fig. i).

Wikmunkan name, ta:’snta, This specimen is used for drilling holes in rectangu-

lar pieces of pearl shell.

A42133, SHetn Driuw (Plate xv, fiz, p, also Text fig. 3a). A stick with

Turritella shell lashed obliquely on to end—so that drilling point is at exact

ventre of spinning stick when twisted between hands as in making fire; used

to bore holes in pearl shell for threading pieces into necklet.

A.42111-112, Circiers (twixr overRwounD) (Plate xvi, fig, o-p). Wihkmaun-

kan name, manku pislam (girdles). These are worn by women for special oeca-

sions around abdomen or over neck and under arm, doubled over to required

size.

A.42108 and A.42158. Circtets (WINE AND JaprRU-poWwN) (Plate xvi,

fig. |). These are made of white fiuffy jabiru-down woven into twine, folded

to required size, worn by women around abdomen (mayka pizlan) or over neck

and under arm (mankoiya buntyaka) on special occasions,

BerrorHaL, Ring (Twink ovERWwouND) (Text fix, da). This specimen is

placed over tuft of man’s hair by a woman who promises her daughter.

A.42113-114. Circuers (twink OverRWwouND) (Plate xvi, fig. qr‘). Wiki

kan name, mankotya buntyaka. These overwound twine circlets are made to fit

MCCONNEL—NATIVE ARTS AND INDUSTRIES 33

over neck and under arm and worn by women, ¢ehielly for mourning purposes

(uptional) and danees.

A42107, Neckurr (wipow’s) (Plate xvi, fig. k). Wikmunhan name,

munkoiya wantya-wantanika, ie., neeklet of a bereaved woman, String of

oyerwound twine, worn by widows round neck, fastened in front and crossed

behind; beeswaxed ends hangine down at back; compulsory use; must be kept

and worn always Ull mourming ends.

A42106. Necxter (wimow’'s) (Plate xvi, fig. j; also Text fig, 4d). Wihk-

avjhun nanie, maunkoiya wantya-wantanaka, It is worn as above, heeswax ends

ave studded with scarlet Abrus seeds with strings at one end for tastening for

extra security,

AA2105, Necker (pany’s) (Plate xvi, fig. i; also Text fig. 4¢). Wikmur-

kan nate, mankorya wantya-wantanaka. This specimen shows manner of

attaching navel eord to pendant (beeswax ornamented with yellow orehid bark

strips), tied round baby’s neck on oceasion of presentation to its father by its

mother; navel cord must always be kept safely. String replaces navel cord in

tlis specimen,

A.42109-110. Neckuers (Lover’s) (Plate xvi, fig. m-n). Wikmwnkan

name, manenha, These specimens are fine knotted or plain strands of string,

dyed ved; sent by woman to her lover by his half-sister, who arranges a meeting

plaee, (See also Text fig. 4b.)

A.42100-101. Girpies (ORCHID BARK) (Plate xvi, fig. a-b). Wikmunkan

hame, manka pi:lan. These are strips of orchid bark (Dendrobium johannis)

burned in fire to accentuate yellow colouring; Woven or plaited hy women intu

’

a flat band on twine base; worn by women uround abdomen on special occasions

or as crossovers; sometimes worn in shorter lengths round head, arm or leg by

men.

A.42102-108. QGirpLes (GRass BUGLE) (Plate xvi, fig. e-d). Wikmunhan

name, manka pislan mankoiya buntyaka, They have hollow stems of grass of

various sizes strung on twine; made in single, double, or multiple strands;

fastened by strings at both ends or a loop at one end and strings at other; or by

tyine striny into doubled-over girdles; worn by women on special oceasions

around abdomen (manka pi:lan) or over neck and under arm (mankoiya pun-

tyakea) in short lengths or folded.

A42103. Wipow’s Serine (Grass BUGLE) (Plate xvi, fig. d). This speci-

ine. is worn hanging down the back from head for mourning.

A.42104, NecKLET (GRASS BUGLE) (Plate xvi, fig. e), Wikmunian. name

mankowed, This is similar to the above specimen and is worn around neck by

women.

34 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

A.42115. Neckurr (nautitus) (Plate xvi, fig. s). Wikmunkan name,

wartakuzpa, Pierced rectangular pieces of pearly shell (Nautilus pompilius)

threaded on string, twisted so as to show pearly flat side of shell; worn as head

hand or necklet by men and women; usually by women for mourning dances.

A42117. Neckuer (suet) (Plate xvi, fig. y). Wikmuykan name,

welmanya. A necklet made of small shells (Oliva ispidula) used hy 1. coast

tribes; sometimes used in Gulf area as necklets, or cross-over and under arm, or

around abdomen.

A.42121, Aprus precavortvs (sampne) (Plate xvi, fig. @). These seeds

are used for decoration purposes, @.g., on fivestick sheaths and spear-throwers;

nowadays are threaded to make necklets, ete., while green, using needle and

cotton,

A42122, Ciecier (Asrus) (Plate xvi, fig. f). Seeds of Abrus precatorius

threaded when soft on cotton with needle, This string is popular for use on

ceremonial occasions; worn by women over neck and under arm or us necklets;

probably a modern adaptation of an old use of decorative seed, due to introdue-

tion of needle-and-cotton.

A.42116. Tleapsanp (orossuM’s FUR AND Twine) (Plate xvi, fig. x). A

worn specimen of man’s headband made of twine with opossum fur interwoven.

A.42120, Nroxpanpd or Couuar (Plate xvi, fig. h). It is made of pliable

wood bent in a eirele, covered with beeswax and studded with Abrus seeds. It

is said to be worn by men; a nnique specimen; not indigenous to Gulf areas.

A.42118-119. Armiers (PANDANUS) (Plate xvi, fig. t-u). Waiknrunkan

name, koiya buntaka. These armlets are made of slips of pandanus palm leaf

(kuntyan), sewn together at ends by passing stripped ends of leaf through

other end of band and knotting. They are worn chiefly by men for the dance.

A.42123, Merssacr Srick (Plate xvi, fig. v). Wikmunkan name, ma:ka.

The message is indieated by ineisions on stick; telling recipient to come up

Archer Riyer and bring his wife; division into two parts—smaller part denotes

wife.

A42124. Mmssacr Stick (Plate xvi, fie, w), Wihmuykan name, maska.

The incisions indicate how many sticks of tabaeeo reeipient is asked to deliver

to owner of message stick.

A.42074. Butproarer (Plate xvii, fig. b). Wikmunhkan name, moiya, This

specimen represents young girl entering puberty (oman manya), small leat-

like flat smooth wooden object. fastened to string for swinging. It is swung by

initiates at end of first part of initiation (Ustyanam) ceremony, Vide Oceania,

vol. vi, No, 1, pp. 68-93; plate 2 (A and B), p. 68; pp. 76-83.

MCCONNEL—NATIVE ARTS AND INDUSTRIES 35

A.42073. Buuuroarrr (Plate xvii, fig. ¢). Wikmunkan name, pakapaka.

A similar object, larger and heavier, painted red and white, represents

fully-matured girl (koman); swung by initiates at end of U :tyanam ceremony.

Vide Oceania, vol. vi, p. 68, plate 2, and pp. 76-83.

A.42075, BULLROARER (FEMALE) (Plate xvii, fig. d). Wikmunkan name,

moipaka. This specimen is similar to above specimen but is larger, red with

white splotches. It represents a married woman (wantya pi:’an), who has as

yet no child; swung by fully-grown man (mantaiyan) to awaken interest of

wantya pi:’an. Vide Oceania, vol. vi, p. 69 (3-4), also pp. 89-92.

A.42072. BULLROARER (MALE) (Plate xvii, fig. a). Wikmunkan name,

motpaka. A phallic-shaped specimen; represents husband of above. Vide

Oceania, vol. vi, p. 69 (3-4) and pp. 89-92.

BULLROARER (FEMALE). It is striped red and white, similar to above

(female), and represents married woman with child; swung at childbirth drama.

Vide Oceania, vol. vi, plate III B.

A.42077. Ficurine (Plate xvii, fig. f). A wax-modelled figure of newly-

born baby (male), complete in all essentials. Penis and pubic hair are well

shown. This specimen is used in myth and drama of creation of first child;

shown (Plate v, fig. f) lying on abdomen of man (representing a woman).

Vide Oceania, vol. vi, No. 1, p. 92, Plate III A.

A.42076. PHALLUS (WOODEN) (Plate xvii, fig. e). It is painted red and

white and used (Plate v, fig. d) in creation ritual of bony-bream pulwaiya

Woalkalan (Wikmunkan tribe, Archer River). Vide Oceania, vol. vi, No. 1, p. 93,

Plate I; also pp. 66-68.

A.42078-79, PuHauuic SymBois (Plate xvii, fig. g-h). These symbols are

made of painted strips of pandanus palm bark strung together; worn suspended

from the waist. Part of Wikkalkan drama of the Two Cockatoos and the

moipaka. Vide Oceania, vol. vi; No. 1, pp. 84-89.

A.42080. Sympouic Fisu (Plate xvii, fig. i). This specimen is made of a

wad of ti-tree bark to represent a fish; held in mouth of man (Plate vi, fig. b)

representing bird preying on fish on edge of water hole in drama belonging to

that clan.

A.42245, Firestick, SuearH. <A sheath for firesticks; two hollow cane

tubes for holding firesticks, fastened with bark strips of orchid (Dendrobium

johannis) burnt yellow in fire; sheath held at end by knob of black beeswax

studded with scarlet seeds of Abrus precatorius; colours of fire, black, yellow

and red. This specimen is from Gulf of Carpentaria.

36 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

A.42244, Figurep Base AnD Firesvicks (2). They have a flat base carved

and coloured; represents woman’s figure, into eyes of which firesticks are bored

to produce fire; from Cairns-Port Douglas area, N.Q.

A.42243. Figurep Base anp Firesricks. The sticks are fastened to base

for carrying; from Cairns-Port Douglas area, N.Q.

A.42246. Firesticks (2) anp TinpER. The flattened base is said to be

female into which the rounded stick, said to be male, is bored to make fire.

From California, U.S.A., Karuk Indians, Klamath River.

SPECIMENS FROM CAIRNS-PORT DOUGLAS AREA.

A42201. Figuring Samtp. This specimen has boomerang design, comes

from the Gu:ndnni tribe of Mitchell River, N.Q. Published in ‘‘ Art in Austra-

lia,’’ May, 1935, p. 57, fig. 1.

A.42202. Ficutinc Suieip. Mopoke design from Gu:ndnni tribe of

Mitchell River, N.Q. Published in ‘‘ Art in Australia,’’? May, 1935, p. 57, fig 2.

A.42203. Figuting Suimtp. Initiation markings, Gu:ndnni tribe, Mitchell

River, N.Q. Published in ‘‘Art in Australia,’’ May, 1935, p. 57, fig. 3.

A.42204. Ficutinc Suieip. Boomerang design, from Gu:nanni tribe,

Mitchell River, N.Q. Published in ‘‘Art in Australia,’’? May, 1935, p. 57, fig. 4.

A.42205. Smauu CEREMONIAL SHIELD (bi:go:rn gidgar). Ink fish (dyu:-

dugan) design, Kungé:ndyt (often Kungdéndyi) tribe, Yarrabah, Cairns, N.Q.

Mira Ka:bara ground, Fitzroy Island. ‘‘Art in Australia,’’ p. 58, fig. 1.

A.42206, Smauu CEREMONIAL SHIELD (bi:qo:rn gidgar). Boomerang (wanal)

design, from Yiddindyi tribe, Mira Gu:dyun (near Reeve Creek) ground.

Published in ‘‘ Art in Australia,’’ p. 58, fig. 2.

A,42207. SmaLL CEREMONIAL SHIELD (bi:go:rn gidgar). Tree grub (min-

deri) design, Yiddindyi tribe, Mira Gu:dyun (near Reeve Creek). Published

in ‘‘ Art in Australia,’’ p. 58, fig. 3.

A.42208. SmaALuL CEREMONIAL SHIELD (bi:go:rn gidgar). Leaves of serub

tree bearing edible fruit (bi:win), from Kungdé:ndyi tribe, Mira Ka:bara (Fitz-

roy Island). Published in ‘‘Art in Australia,’’ p. 58, fig. 4.

A,.42209. Larce Ficuiine SHIELD (bi:go:rn). Turtle (birikala) design,

Viddindyi tribe, Mira Baki. Published in ‘‘ Art in Australia,’’ p. 59, fig. 1.

A.42210. Larce FIGHTING SHIELD (bi:go:rn). Scorpion (dumbun) design,

Yiddindyi tribe, Mira Baki ground. Published in ‘‘Art in Australia,’’ p. 59,

fig. 2.

A.42211. Larce Figurine Sueno (bi:go:rn). Matchbox bean pod

(dyunai) design, Kungé:ndyi tribe, Mira Wungula ground. Published in ‘‘ Art

in Australia,’’ p. 59, fig. 3.

MCCONNEL—NATIVE ARTS AND INDUSTRIES 37

A.42212. Larce Ficutine Surevp (bi:go:rn). Drops of blood and scratches

(gunaugu) design, scratches made on nose and drops of blood thus obtained

and used as an adhesive in decoration during ceremonies; Yiddindyi tribe,

Mira Baki ground. Published in ‘‘Art in Australia,’ p. 59, fig. 4.

A.42213. SmauL CEREMONIAL SHIELD (bi:go:rn gidyar). Seorpion (dum-

bun) design, Yiddindyi tribe from Yarrabah, Cairns, N.Q. Mira Numbundyi

ground, Published in ‘‘ Art in Australia,’’ p. 60, fig. 1.

A.42214. Sma CEREMONIAL SHIELD (bi:go:rn gidyar). Salmon (kuiman)

design, Kungé:ndyi tribe, Yarrabah, Cairns, N.Q., Mira Wungula (mission site)

ground. Published in ‘‘Art in Australia,’’ p. 60, fig. 2.

A.42215. SMALL CEREMONIAL Sworp (ba:ga:r gidyar). Salmon (kuiman)

design, Kungd:ndyi tribe, Yarrabah, Cairns, N.Q., Mira Wungula (mission site)

ground. Published in ‘‘Art in Australia,’’ p. 60, fig. 3.

A.42216. SmaLL CEREMONIAL SHIELD (bi:go:rn gidyar). Leaves of tree

used in making boomerang (dydra dyira), Kungdé:ndyi tribe, Yarrabah, Cairns,

N.Q. Published in ‘‘Art in Australia,’’ p. 60, fig. 4; ef. also p. 62 VI

(boomerang).

A.42217. SMALL CEREMONIAL SHIELD (bi:go:rn gidyar). Tomahawk (kél-

bun) design, Kungié:ndyi tribe, Yarrabah, Cairns, N.Q., Mira Ka:bara ground.

‘Art in Australia,’’ p. 61, fig. 1.

A.42218. SmaLu CEREMONIAL SHIELD (bi:go:rn gidyar). Bark water bag

(dogobil) design, Yiddindyi tribe, Yarrabah, Cairns, N.Q., Mira Dumbundyi.

“‘Art in Australia,’’ p. 61, fig. 2.

A.42219. Smati CEREMONIAL SHIELD (bi:go:rn gidyar). Starfish (dydra

madyai) design, Kungd:ndyi tribe, Yarrabah, Cairns, N.Q., Mira Ka:bara

ground. ‘‘Art in Australia,’ p. 61, fig. 4.

A.42220. Smauu CEREMONIAL SHIELD (bi:go:rn gidyar). Nettle-sting curing

plant (ka:nds:r), Kungé:ndyi tribe, Yarrabah, Cairns, N.Q., Mira Baki ground.

“Art in Australia,’’ p. 61, fig. 5.

A.42221. CEREMONIAL PappLE (milgara) used in paddle dance. Crocodile

(kanyara) design, Kungi:ndyi tribe, Yarrabah, Cairns, N.Q., Mira Baki ground.

‘Art in Australia,’’ p. 62, plate i, fig. 1.

A.42222. CEREMONIAL PappLE (milgara) used in paddle dance. Sawshark

(dydgara) design, Kungé:ndyi tribe, Yarrabah, Cairns, N.Q., Mira Baki ground.

‘Art in Australia,’’ p. 62, fig. 2.

A.42223, CEREMONIAL PappLE (milgara) used in paddle dance. Nettle-sting

curing plant (ka:ndo:r), Kungi:ndyi tribe, Yarrabah, Cairns, N.Q., Mira Baki

ground. ‘‘Art in Australia,’ p. 62, fig. 3.

38 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

A.42224, CEREMONIAL PappLE (milgara) used in paddle dance. Rainhow-

serpent (kudyu kudyu) design, Kungi:ndyi tribe, Yarrabah, Cairns, N.Q., Mira

Baki ground. ‘‘Art in Australia,’ p. 62, fig. 4.

A.42225. CEREMONIAL PappLE (milgara) used in paddle dance. Lawyer

eane (kui:gi) design, Kungdé:ndyi tribe, Yarrabah, Cairns, N.Q., Mira Baki

ground. ‘‘Art in Australia,’’ p. 62, fig. 5.

A.42226. CEREMONIAL PoLEe (worripa gidyar). Rainbow-serpent (kudyu

kudyu) design, Kungdé:ndyi tribe, Yarrabah, Cairns, N.Q. ‘‘Art in Australia,”

p. 62, plate u, fig. 1.

A.42227, CEREMONIAL Sworp (ba:go:r gidyar). Rainbow-serpent (kudyu

kudyu) design, Kungdé:ndyi tribe, Yarrabah, Cairns, N.Q. ‘‘Art in Australia,”’

p. 62, plate ii, fig. 2.

A.42228, CEREMONIAL PappLe (imilgara gidyar). Rainbow-serpent (kudyu

kudyu) design, Kungé:ndyi tribe, Yarrabah, Cairns, N.Q. ‘‘Art in Australia,”’

p. 62, plate ii, fig. 3.

A.42229. CrREMONIAL Cross—BooMERANG OR TWIRLER (yintyo:r gidyar),

spun between hands in whirlwind dance. Scorpion (dwmbun) design, Yiddindyi

tribe, Yarrabah, Cairns, N.Q., Mira Numbundyi ground. ‘‘Art in Australia,”’

p. 62, plate vi (first step).

A.42230, CEREMONIAL Cross—BOOMERANG OR TWIRLER (yintyo:r gidyar),

spun between hands in whirlwind dance. Comet (dyiri:bara) design, Kun-

gié:ndyi tribe, Yarrabah, Cairns, N.Q., Mira Ka:bara ground. ‘‘Art in Aus-

tralia,’’ p. 62, plate vi (second step).

A.42231. CEREMONIAL CRoSS—BOOMERANG OR TWIRLER (yintyo:r gidyar),

spun between hands in whirlwind dance. Star (kawwai) design, Kungié:ndyt

tribe, Yarrabah, Cairns, N.Q. ‘‘Art in Australia,’’ p, 62, plate vi (second step,

right).

A.42232. CEREMONIAL Cross—BOooMERANG OR TWIRLER (yintyo:r gidyar),

spun between hands in whirlwind dance. Kingfish (tydla:da) design, Kun-

ga:ndyi tribe, Yarrabah, Cairns, N.Q., Mira Wungula ground, ‘‘ Art in Austra-

lia,’’ p. 62, plate vi (third step).

A.42233. CEREMONIAL CRoss—BOOMERANG OR TWIRLER (Yyintyo:r gidyar),

spun between hands in whirlwind dance. Bark water bag (dogobil) design,

Kungé:ndyi tribe, Yarrabah, Cairns, N.Q. ‘‘Art in Australia,’’ p. 62, plate vi

(fourth step).

A.42234, CEREMONIAL CRoss—BOoOMERANG OR TWIRLER (yintyo:r gidyar),

spun between hands in whirlwind dance. Matchbox bean pod (dyunai) design,

Kungié:ndyi tribe, Yarrabah, Cairns, N.Q. ‘‘Art in Australia, p. 62, plate vl

(fourth step).

A.42235,. CEREMONIAL Cross—BOOMERANG OR TWIRLER (yintyo:r gidyar),

spun between hands in whirlwind dance. Salmon backbone (kuiman) design,

MCCONNEL—NATIVE ARTS AND INDUSTRIES 39

Kunga:ndyi tribe, Yarrabah, Cairns, N.Q. ‘‘Art in Australia,’’ p. 62, plate vi

(fourth step).

A.42236. CEREMONIAL Cross—BooMERANG OR TWIRLER (yintyo:r gidyar),

spun between hands in whirlwind dance. Sawfish (dydégara) design, Kungé:ndyi

tribe, Yarrabah, Cairns, N.Q., Mira Baki ground. ‘‘Art in Australia,’’ p. 62,

plate vi (fifth step).

A.42237. CEREMONIAL CRoss—BooMERANG OR TWIRLER (yintyo:r gidyar),

spun between hands in whirlwind dance. Edible palm leaf and fruit (dyaiys:r)

design, Kungd:ndyi tribe, Yarrabah, Cairns, N.Q. ‘‘Art in Australia,’’ p. 62,

plate vi (fifth step).

A.42238. Boomeranc. Plain stick with lighting attachment, used to amuse

children by spinning at night-time.

A.42239. CEREMONIAL Sworp (ba:go:r gidyar). Scorpion (dumbun)

design, Yiddindyi tribe, Cairns, N.Q., Mira umbundji ground. ‘‘Art in

Australia,’’ p. 67, plate iii, fig. 2.

A.42240, CEREMONIAL BooMERANG. Scorpion (dumbun) design, Yiddindyi

tribe, Cairns, N.Q., Mira umbundji ground. ‘‘Art in Australia,’’ p. 67, plate

lii, fig. 3.

A.42241. CEREMONIAL SPEARTHROWER (milai). Scorpion (dumbun) design,

Yiddindy? tribe, Cairns, N.Q., Mira umbundji ground. ‘‘Art in Australia,’”’

p. 67, plate ii, fig. 4.

A.42242. Oxtp Ficutinc Sworp (ba:ga:r). Found by early settlers on

Daintree River by the late Mr. Osborn, senior. ‘‘Art in Australia,’’ p. 68,

plate v, fig. 2.

A.42249, Pair or Tappinc Sticks, used to keep time in dances. Kun-

gdé:ndyi tribe, Cairns area, N.Q.

OTHER SPECIMENS IN THE McCONNEL COLLECTION

(at present on loan to Sydney University).

One FisH Hoox from Cairns area.

Axe. It is a large, unpolished and rehafted axe from the Cairns area and

found by early settlers in Douglas Creek; smoothed by action of water. Rehafted

by man of this area in old style with lawyer-cane and beeswax.

AxE. A small, polished and rehafted specimen from the Cairns area. The

stone is not indigenous; axe picked up on beach; said to be a child’s axe.

Axr. Unhafted specimen from Daintree River, N.Q.

Axe. Unhafted specimen from Upper Brisbane River, found by the late

W. A. Munro on Braemar farm, Toogoolawah.

40 RECORDS OF THE S.A: MUSEUM

ONE GRINDING STONE AND GRINDER. This specimen was found by the late

W. A. Munro on Braemar farm, Upper Brisbane River, and is of a type used

for grinding Moreton Bay chestnuts into flour.

OnE Coup bE Pornc. This specimen is Mousterian and from Dordogne

River, France. Dug out of rock shelter by U. H. MeConnel when working with

American School of Prehistory.

Spear Heap. This specimen is made from glass insulator; found in Central

Australia and presented to U. H. McConnell by a Central Australian resident.

SHrieLps. Four shields from Mitchell River, figured in ‘‘ Art in Australa,’’

plate i, fig. 1-4. (A.42201-42204.) The others listed above have not as yet

been allotted South Australian Museum numbers.

REFERENCES CITED.

Haddon, A. C. (1912): Reports of the Cambridge Anthropological Expedition

to Torres Straits.

Haddon, A. C., and Hornell, J. (1987). Canoes of Oceania. Bernice P. Bishop

Museum, Honolulu. Special publication No. 28.

Hale, H. M., and Tindale, N. B. (1933): Rec. S. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, v, pp.

63-172, maps and figures.

Harris, R. H. (1912): Mem. Qu. Mlus., Brisbane, i, pp. 1-22.

McConnel, U. H. (1982): Oceania, Sydney, ii, pp. 292-295.

McConnel, U. H. (1935) (1): Art in Australia, Sydney, 3rd series, No. 59,

pp. 49-68.

MeConnel, U. H. (1935) (2): Oceania, Sydney, vi, pp. 66-93.

McConnel, U. H. (1986): Oceanta, Sydney, vii, pp. 69-105.

McConnel, U. H. (1937): Oceania, Sydney, vii, pp. 346-371.

McConnel, U. H. (1945): Oceania, Sydney, xv, pp. 353-375.

Roth, W. E. (1901): North Queensland Ethnography Bulletin, i, Brisbane.

Roth, W. E. (1907): Rec. Aust. Mus., Sydney, vi, pp. 365-403.

Roth, W. E. (1909): Le. vii, pp. 166-185.

Roth, W. E. (1910): Le. viii, pp. 20-54.

Thomson, D. F. (1933): Journ. Roy. Anthrop. Inst., London, Ixiii, pp. 453-537,

map and figures.

Thomson, D. F. (1934): Le. Ixiv, pp. 217-235, 237-262, and figures.

Tindale, N. B. (1940): J'rans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., Adelaide, lxiv, pp. 140-231,

map.

Wilkin, A., and Haddon, A. C. (1912): Reports of the Cambridge Anthropo-

logical Expedition to Torres Straits, iv, pp. 94-107.

McCONNEL—NATIVE ARTS AND INDUSTRIES 41

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Plate i, a-d.

Archer River family; note the artificially distended ear lobe for wearing ear ornament.

Sewing the prow of an Archer River bark canoe with cane and wallaby bone stiletto;

sheet of bark is folded in two and held by stakes.

. Archer River woman in a bark canoe with dog and her husband’s spears, paddling along

the mangroves.

Kendall River man paddling a sewn-bark canoe, using mangrove wood paddle.

Plate ii, a-d.

Old woman returning to camp, yamstick in hand; on her head is a dilly-bag full of

corms, topped by a bundle of firewood.

Old man repairing a spear point by using a palette to smooth on it hot gum while moulding

the join.

Boy with play spears of bamboo, and small girl with abdominal string.

. Women coming up out of lagoon with dilly-bags full of water-lily seed-pods on their heads,

Note habitually worn abdominal strings.

Plate iii, a-d.

Women digging with their hands for Scirpus corms in mud of a swamp near Kendall River.

Women gathering water-lily (Nymphaea) seed-pods in a lagoon near the Holroyd River.

e-d. Women camped in sandy river bed of the Holroyd making ‘‘grass’’ baskets of Xerotes

aes

blades.

Plate iv, a-d.

Woman roasting rush-corms on a fire; another using a mallet to soften when roasted.

Mother with new-born babe, still in seclusion, attended by other women; note dilly-bag

of roots on stick, feather fan, and shell dish with water.

Woman netting a string bag; note string tied around deformed leg, also about wrist,

to induce strength.

Mother and old woman attendant in a secluded spot with new-born baby in a bark cradle.

Plate v, a-f.

. Drama of the first birth; man swinging the female moipaka or bullroarer.

The oyster pulwaiya goes down into his auwa, after being speared by a shark; he is

attended by his younger brother, who catches lice in his hair; the elder brother is

gradually assuming the sessile position of the oyster.

Archer River drama of the first death.

Increase ritual of bony-bream; this fish pulwaiya stands, riddled with the spears of

his slayers, while a suppliant fans him and manipulates a wooden phallus.

Wax figurine of first man child lying on abdomen of first mother; the clasped hands

symbolize continuity through birth.

Bird pulwaiya on edge of waterhole, with a fish (of bark) in its mouth; see also Plate vi,

fig. b.

case

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Plate vi, a-f.

Dramatic representation of oyster pulwaiya; the performer has his nose flattened by

tying; the face is covered with white ash pigment and the mouth propped open with a

stick to represent the oyster shell opened for eating.

Man representing bird pulwaiya holding a fish (of bark) in his mouth.

Mbu: the ghost, haunting the camp after death; body tied to pole for mummification.

Women painting their bodies with clay for a mourning dance.

Mbu: the ghost, representing the first corpse to be mummified, tied up in bark and

supported on forked sticks.

Tyi:t, the hawk, his brother, making a mourning dance for Mbu:, the ghost, during the

first inauguration of funeral rites.

Plates vii-xvii.

Ethnographic objects from Kendall, Holroyd and Archer River areas. For descriptions see

text at pages 23 et seq.

SA. MUSEUM Vou. NT, Vivre

cae

dows

NI, PLATE

Von.

SA. MUSEUM

Nd. bare iV

Vo,

oS.A. Museum

’

Khe. S.A. MushoM Vor. NI. UrnaTre Vv

PLATE

NI.

Vor,

~ SA. Museum

Vou. XL Peare Vit

Reo. S.A.MUSEUM

eee

a a ee ee

PLAT!

NI,

Vor.

S.A) Museum

REC.

2S sia -

Kare S.A. MuskuM Vou, NI, PLATE SN

NI, PLATE

VOL.

MUSEUM

Ss.

REC.

Kre. SA, MVSEUM Vou. NT Paare NI]

Von. NL Vb ATI

Fa ny)

VOvl at

Fava vary

i! AANA) A val

TO Wns kt a

UU LULL) (Tht

HC DAY

UMUC Lin nT

OES tt

wey vs

NSA AHA MLA enna

NO]

Rhee, S.A, Museunm Vot AL, Prag NEN

a oe

Waa

% 44 I

hace. SaA, MUSEUM Vor. NT, PLATE XV

Vou. NT, PLate NVI

Ree. S.A. Museen

foo —_— eee =

ag ce Oe res

Ee ee ~eeed sees Site - er __

x *% mM

a IS ES a ea

PLATE XVII

NJ,

Vor,

A. MUSEUM

NEW RHOPALOCERA, AND A LIST OF SPECIES FROM THE GRAMPIAN

MOUNTAINS, WESTERN VICTORIA

BY NORMAN B. TINDALE, B.SC., SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

Two new races of Heteronympha banksii, H. b. nevina from Mt. Rosea, Western Victoria, and H. b.

mariposa from the Macpherson Range, South Queensland, are described, also a new race of H.

solandri, H. s. angela from Mt. Rosea.

Pseudalmenus chlorinda fisheri is described as new from Mt. Victory — the first record of a form of

this Tasmanian and Eastern mountain species in Western Victoria.

Hesperilla crypsargyra lesouefi is also described as new from Mt. William. Several life histories and

locality records are given, together with a list of 39 species taken in the vicinity of the Grampians.

The sword grass Gahnia microstachya Bentham, foodplant of Hesperilla crypsargyra, and a grass

(Tetrarrhena acuminata R. Brown) are recorded for the first time from Western Victoria and the

Grampians.

The significance is discussed of the presence of these newly recorded species in terms of climate

and geographical distribution.

NEW RHOPALOCERA, anp a LIST or SPECIES rrom tHe

GRAMPIAN MOUNTAINS, WESTERN VICTORIA

By NORMAN B, TINDALE, B.Sc., Sourn Ausrranan Museum.

Plates xviii-xxi and text fig. 1-4.

SUMMARY.

Two new races of Heteronympha banksii, H. b. nevinu from Mt, Rosea, Western

Victoria, and H. b, mariposa from the Macpherson Range, South Queensland,

are described, also a new race of H. solandri, IT. s. angela from Mt. Rosea.

Pseudalmenus chlorinda fisheri is described as new from Mt. Victory—the

first record of a form of this Tasmanian and Hastern mountain species in

Western Victoria.

ITesperilla erypsargyra lesouefi is also described as new from Mt. William.

Several life histories and locality records are given, together with a list

of 39 species taken in the vieinity of the Grampians.

The sword grass Guhnia microstachya Bentham, foodplant of IHesperilla

crypsargyra, and a grass (T'elrarrhena acuminata R. Brown) are recorded for

the first time from Western Victoria and the Granipians.

The significance is discussed of the presence of these newly recorded species

in terns of climate and gseosraphical distribution.

INTRODUCTION.

Messrs. B. B. Given, J. C. LeSouef and the writer spent from 8-19th

November, 1950, eollectine in the Grampians and vicinity. The author again

collected in the Grampians from 24-30th November, 1951, with Messrs. R. H.

Fisher and J, C. LeSouef; Fisher and he also visited the Little Desert and

jata. <A third visit) was imade to the Grampians, with A. J. Tindale, from

25-28th December, 1951. The subalpine summit plateau of Mt. William (3,829

ft.) was collected over on 13th and 27th November and 27th December; owing

to bad weather none of the visits to the summit proved to be productive. In

general the 1951 season was poor, possibly a result of the unprecedented

heat of the previous summer.

These visits to the Grampians area have yielded several new vecords as

well as five new forms. Of these Heteronynpha penelope maraia Tindale (1952)

is described elsewhere, the others are presented herein.

44 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

HeTERONYMPHA BANKSIL BANKSU (Leach) Ld14.

Plate xviii, fig. ed; plate xix, fig. h.

Hipparchia banksii Leach, 1814, i, p. 28, pl. 10, fig. 1-2.

Heteronympha affinis Lucas, 1890, p. 1,065.

Heteronympha banksi Waterhouse and Lyell, 1914, p. 38, fig. 103-105.

In the original account, this species was indicated only as trom ‘*New

Holland.’’ The early nineteenth century date implies that the first specimens

must have been taken in New South Wales, either in the general vicinity of

Sydney, or along the eastern coast. At that time other places where the species

is known to occur had not been visited by Kuropeans. Therefore I nominate

as the typical race that from the Sydney distriet. The male example figured

herein is from Clifton, and the female trom Roseville; both are places in thie

Sydney area. These may be regarded as topotypical. A pair depicted by Water-

house and Lyell (1914, fig. 103-105) were from Wandin, Hastern Victoria, They

appear to belong to the same race as Sydney examples. Lucas deseribed very

similar examples from Gippsland as J/. affinis. His type pair are m the South

Australian Museum (registered No. lL. 14866). They are closely similar to

Sydney examples, and it is unlikely they ever could be regarded as belonging

to axeparate race. If required the name affinis is available. It is possible Lucas

when he described //, affinis did not have any authentically identified specimens

of H. banksii for eomparison; his remark that typical H. banksi had ten

orange spots on the forewing seems hard to reconcile with any examples of the

species.

H. b. banksii flies in February, March and April, being distributed on the

Eastern Coast from Manning River, Central New South Wales, southward to

Loch, Trafalgar aud Wandin in Eastern Victoria. Ut is everywhere rare near

the coast, becoming more common in the Blue Mountains and on the uplands of

Eastern Victoria, at elevations of from one to three thousand feet.

HereRONYMPHA BANKSIL NEVINA subsp. nov.

Plate xviii, fig, a-b, g; plate xix, fig. g, and text fig. 1.

Male. Wings above black with orange markings, also dull brown markings

and suffusions near bases of both wings but not extending to tornus of hind-

wing; wing patterns generally as in the race HW, b. banksti but with basal

orange areas of hindwing large and separated from distal series only by a

relatively narrow zig-zag intervening portion of black ground-colour; tornal

TINDALE—NEW RHOPALOCERA PROM WESTERN VICTORIA 45

Area orange, not tiniformly suffused with brown as in other races; a single

eyespot on hindwing similar in size to that in HW, b, bavksii but with outer brown

ring less developed. Wings below generally as in A. b. banksit but apex of

furewing with a sub-costal dark brown patel more conspicuously developed;

basal hal! of hindwing of a bright vellowish-orange liue scareely darker than

hasal-third of forewing; the outer suffused chocolate areas on hindwing have a

rather conspienous dark patel in the outer third. Wing length 27 min., expanse

7 wien,

Female. Colour and markings above somewhat as in male but orange spots

larger and separated only hy narrow black interspaces; basal orange areas of

fore- and hindwings very large; u small spot near termen of forewing white,

instead of orange, as in male, forewing beneath with basal areas orange, but

distal spots yellow and surrounded with black, except near apex, where there

is a chocolate-brown pateh, and below it a small white spot. The hindwings

have the basal half fawn with fine rich brown markings, the distal half is

broadly blotehed with (he same brown colour, with a more smoky area midway

between the eye spots. Wing leneth 26.5 mm., expanse 56 mm.

Loc, Western Victoria: Mt. Rosea at 1,000 ft. (Holotype, a male, 28th

January, 1952, and allotype lemale, 13th February, 1952, and paratype male,

registered No, [, 19089 in South Australian Museum, collected and presented

by R, H, Fisher and the author; a paratype pair in the collection of R. H,

Fisher), Three males and two females examined,

Members ol this race differ from H/. 6. banksti in colour and markings, In

particular the basal orange areas of the hindwing above are much larger,

encroaching on the dark area separating the basal and distal series of orange

spots and reducing it to about one-half the width Tound in 7/7, 6. banksi. The

darker brown areas of hindwings beneath are much less evident and the basal

hall is of gn orange to yellow eolour little darker than on forewing, Tf only

females of the two aces had been known they would be considered separate

species for the differences between them are marked, Txarnination of males

siiveests a closer relationship and they ean only be regarded as very distinet

races of one species.

The doseribed examples were bred from larvae taken in late November,

1951, The male pupated 30th December, emerged 28th January. The female

pupated 20th Janvary, emerged 13th Febrnary. The larvae were discovered

feeding at night on native tussock grasses (Poa caespitosa Forster and Poa

caespilosd var. tenerd Bentham) at an elevation of 1,000 ft. Several larvae

oceiured also at a site at 2,000 ft. elevation in close proximity to larvae of

H. solandri angela and from these one was reared,

46 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Where present. the larvae were not uncommon, it being estimated that like

the H. solandri larvae referred to in later paragraphs a larva was to be found

for each thirty tussocks or so of the foodplants examined. However, the habitat

is a very restricted one, the larvae oceurring only where the grass is sheltered

from direet sun. Even a few yards away, where conditions of less adequate

shelter prevail, larvae could not be found. Two larvae may be present on

the one grass tuft. unlike Hf. penelope, which seems always to be solitary in its

habits.

Fig. 1. ac, Heteronympha banksii nevina. Mt. Rosea, 2,000 ft.; 2, adult larva, length

4b mm.; b, face, diameter 2-8 mm.; e¢, pupa, length 12 mm,

Larva. The adult larva (text fie. la-b) is 23-25 mm. in leneth, shagreened,

pale buff in colour, with longitudinal striae, the head dark brown with cream

stripes. The sides of the abdomen are brown and a dark spot is present on each

of the prolegs, the tip of the abdomen is bifureate. The head, viewed from in

front, bears large laterally placed, somewhat rounded projections covered with

relatively large pustule-like elevations which extend oyer much of the face;

some are dark brown and others pale cream, forming two stripes on each side

of faee, also a lateral stripe. There ave three pustular elevations on each side,

larger than the rest, and pale cream in colour.

TINDALE—NEW RHOPALOCERA FROM WESTERN VICTORIA +7

Larvae teed after about 9 pan. When mature they remain dormant for

up to Hine days resting on a pad of silk; they then suspend themselves, main-

taining a flexed position, head down, for from 10 to 28 hours before the pupal

ecdysis takes place.

Pupa; Bright grass green or dull purplish-brown suspended by cremaster

(text fig. Je), Length 12 mm., diameter 6 mm. There are four, sometimes five

pairs of rounded processes on the abdomen. The pupation period ranged from

20-32 days. On oeeasion the butterfly emerges from the pupa during the

hour of midnight and is then fully developed long before dawn.

T1etkRONYMPHA BANKSI MARIPOSA subsp, bov,

Plate xviii, fig, e-f, and plale xix, fig. f.

Male. Wings above black with orange markings, a broad pale brown suffu-

sion over basal part of each wing extending to tornus of hindwing; orange

markings of forewings as in Z, 6, bunksit; basal orange patches of hindwing

large but well separated from distal ones; ocellus large with large black inner

ring, but outer brown ring less conspicuous than in the above mentioned form.

Hindwing below with choecolate-brown tmavkings extending over whole of wing,

an opalescent purple sheen very conspicuous over the wing, eyespots both

large. Wing length 27 mm., expanse 58 mim.

lemale. Wings above black with ovange markings and brown basal suffu-

sion similar to the male; sex seales absent from hind margin of cell of forewing

and the posterior subapieal spot white instead of orange. 'Uhe eye spot on hind-

wing above, and both of those present below are large. ‘The chocolate-brown

markings extend to base of hindwing but the opalescent sheen appears far paler

there. Wing length 26 win, expanse 56 mm.

Loc. Queensland: MePherson Range (lolotype, a male and allotype

female numbered [. 19091 in South Australian Museum) taken Mareh, 1891,

by H, Tryon,

H, b, meriposa differs from JT. b. banksv in the larger eye spots on the

wings; the inner black ring is over half as big again as in the corresponding ring

on the two more southern forms. Other differences lie in the larger size and

greater diffusion of the orange markings,

The examples of this race deseribed were taken by the late H. Tryon and

given to R. Tlidge, who in 1898 took note of them in a published list of the

butterflies of the Brisbane district. They came to the South Australian Musenin

along with the T. P. Lueas collection, The late Dr. G, A. Waterhouse, to whom

they were shown in 1931, mentioned the loeality of their (taking in his bool

(1932, p. 97). He had intended to collect specimens of his own and deseribe

48 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

it as the northern race. The finding of the Grampians form affords a convenient

opportunity to place it on record.

Possible limiting factors in the distribution of the three races of IT. banksi,

as now recognized, are their seeming requirements of cool, grassed slopes in

sheltered humid areas away [rom the heat of noon-day where the foodplants

either are perennially green or at least remain green until January. Our efforts

at. breeding them show that the larvae as readily succumb to the effeets of

excessive moisture, as they ave intolerant of dry conditions. It is probable

that conditions suitable for the species oecur at few if any places between the

Grampians and Hastern Vietoria.

The three races are separable by the following key:

Key to Races or JJETERONYMPHA BANKSII (Leach).

1. Median black band of hindwing ahove narrow seem nevind

Median black band of hindwing above wide te 2

2, Tornal ocellus of hindwing above and below relatively small __..... banksti

‘Tornal ocellus of hindwing above and below relatively large ... +~— mart posa

[lerERONYMPHA SOLANDRI SoLANDRI Waterhouse 1904.

Plate xix, fig. a-b.

Heteronympha solondri Waterhouse 1904, p. 466,

The type male was from Poowong, January, 1893, and the female from

Mt. Briea, 4,500 ft, in February, 1903, Both localities are in Eastern Victoria.

The race also has been taken on Mt. Hotham, on Mt. St. Bernard at 5,000 ft.,

on Mt. Donna Buang at 4,000 ft, and 1 have it also from Tanybryn tm the

Otway Ranges, taken on Ist February, 1953. New South Wales records are

from Mt. Kosciusko and near Jenolan Caves. It flies from late December to

March.

In the Grampians its place is taken by a separate race, smaller in size and

differently marked. In this western form males have the orange marks generally

reduced in size but more intereonnected, while the females have the orange

areas much extended and in consequence appear fav brighter in colour.

H[urrroNYMPHA, SOLANDRI ANGELA subsp. nov.

Plate xviii, fig. bh; plate xix, fig. e-d, and text fig. 2.

Male. Wines above black with orange markings, generally as in H. s.

solandri but. reduced in size, some sex scales along posterior margin of cell less

conspicuous than in Jf. s. solandri; the sub-marginal orange spots of hindwing

TINDALE—NEW RHOPALOCERA FROM WESTERN VICTORIA 49

obsolete; a discal series of spots parallel to fermen of hindwing forming a

continuous band, however, the ihird spot in the series is only half the width

of the others; the backeround colour appears as a black band dividing these

discal spots from the orange basal area; this band is particularly narrow where

adjacent to the first and seeond diseal spots; there is un ocellus near anal angle,

Wings beneath much as in J7, s, solandri; hindwings yellow with conspienous

upaleseent purple-brown sulfasion beyond end of cell, Wing Jenedh 25) nim.

expanse hO snm.

Memale, Markings generally as in male, but sex seales absent; orange

pateh neav inner marein of forewing laree and connected with a basal orange

area and the subcostal spot at one-hal!; there is a conspicuous white spot below

apex; (he discal spots of hindwing are continuous and the basal orange patch

extends almost to inner angle. Horewines below as in male; hindwings dull

yellowish-brown with a general iridescent appearance accentuated tn a patels

heyond end of cell. Wing length 50 mm., expanse 54 mm.

Lov, Western Victoria: Mt. Rosea, 2,000 ft, (Molotype, a male and allotype

female, 25th December, 1951, collected and presented by RK. H. Fisher and N. B.

Tindale, tumbered 1, 19090 m South Australian Museu; a paratype pair

2nd and Mth January, 1952, in colleetion of R. UW, Fisher). Two males and

two females examined.

In typical A. s. solandri the diseal series or orange spots on hindwings

is broken, whereas in both sexes of the western race the spots form a con-

tinuous series only divided, in the males, by faint black lines at the veins, and

in the females appearing as a solid hand, The Griuiopians race appears to be

smaller than the Hastern Mountain one.

The paratype inale is similar to the type but slightly smaller; a paratype

female has the orange markines rather larger and even more conspicuously

connected together than in the deseribed female specimen. The given mame was

suggested to me by Mr. Fisher,

An example of the larva of this interesting form was first encountered on

10th November, 1950, on Mt. Rosea at 2,000 ft., it pupated 30th December but

the author failed to rear it. Additional larvae, some about to pupate, were taken

in the same area the following year. They were feeding, late at night, on

sheltered clumps of the tussock #rass, Pea caespifosa Forster, and oceasionally

also on clumps of the tenuous form of the same species, which is found in some

places.

hike those of H. 6. nevina the larvae seem intolerant hoth of dry sunny

conditions and excessive humidity, so that their larval habitat is very restricted.

Larva, Similar to that of 7. hankstt neving in colour and markings, but

viewed from above the dark markings on the baek of the head form a conspienous

50 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

triangle and the texture of the body surface is finer (Text fig. 2a). There is

generally a pink flush over the anterior part of the body and some traces of a

transverse pink tone running around the middle of each body segment. The

head (Text fig, 2b) bears small lateral rounded projections. The surface, in

common with the face and sides, is covered with tiny elevations, generally each

bearing traces of a hair. Viewed from the front the head is finely shagreened,

brown with two ill-defined paler patches. The adult larva is 23-25 mm. in

Fig, 2. a-c, Heteronympha solandri angela, Mt. Rosea, 2,000 ft.; a, adult larva, length

21 mm.; b, face, diameter 2-8 mm.; ¢, pupa of female, length 14 mm,

length. It may be distinguished from that of ZH. b. nevina by the less defined

lateral projections on head, the finer shagreening, and the absence of the

specialized pustular elevations present on the head in that species.

Pupa. Green, erayish-green, or as in the example figured, dark brown,

almost black, with paler brown wing cases and head; there are seven rounded

tubercles on each side of abdoinen, cach with the summit cream in colour.

Leneth 14 mm., diameter 6 mm. The pupa drawn (Text fig. 2c), when its

specifi¢ identification was checked by a partial dissection, proved to be a female.

The pupal period is about 21 days.

TINDALE—NEW RHOPALOCERA FROM WESTERN VICTONIA 51

HeTERONYMPIHA PENELOPE MARAIA Tindale L952.

TMurther series confirm the appearance of this Grampians form as reported

in an earliex paper (Tindale, 1952). In one female specimen a black bar

Iveaks the normally linked orange patches across the forewing above but in all

Other characters it is like others of this race. Mr. J, Womersley has since taken

asmall form at Snuggery in Mareh, 1952, thus extending the range of the

species into the South-East of South Australia.

Further observations were made in the 1951-52 season on the life history

o! the speeies in the Grampians. The larvae are to be found feeding at night

chiefly on large tussocks of the grass Poa caespilosu Forster. They were found

ut several places between Hall Gap and Mt. Rosea, at altitudes of from 750 to

1,000 feet. They occurred also, less commonly, on Danthonia pilosa R. Brown

and one larva was taken on T'hemeda australis R, Brown, Nowhere common,

rough counts were made indieatine the finding of only one larva to each 100

fussocks of grass searched. The Jarvae are solitary, in no instanee were two

taken even on adjacent clumps, There is a prepupal resting stage of more than

a weeks in which the larva stays among damp grass and leaves; no attempt is

made by the larva to attach itself to any support and the pupa lies loose amone

debris held together with a few strands of silk on the ground. All the pupae

seen were pale brown; a few had dark spots on the wing cases and leg sheaths,

The adult) emerges with a sudden and very complete rupturing of its pupal

skin and is most vigorous and active while seeking a place where it may rest.

and expand its wings. On more than one occasion such emergences have taken

place at mht; one at 9 p.m. and another between midnight and dawn. Pupation

periods in four different examples were 37, 41, 47 and 60 days.

HETERONYMPHA CORDACE WwuiLSont Burns 1947,

A large newly emerged male taken at Dartmoor, Western Victoria, 18th

November, 1950, is the earliest seasonal record for the species.

A series of five freshly emerged males were taken in a swamp thicket

overerown with scented Honey-Myrile (Welalenca squarrosa Donn) on Button

Grass (Mesomelaena sphaerocephalus KR, Brown) flats of the Wannon River

headwaters at 1,400 fi, on 26th and 27th December, 1952. They were alighting

on and flying about sedges (Carex fascicularis) overgrown with a rare species

oF vrass (Vetrarrhena ucuminata R, Brown) not previously recorded trom

Western Victoria,

These are the first examples of the butterfly from the Grampians. They

seent generally to be a little larger than ones taken at the type locality near

52 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Dartmoor, on the Lower Glenelg River, otherwise they are not to be distinguished,

It is possible that Telrarrhena is the foodplant of ZH. cordace, since a Satyrid

larva was taken on a Telrarrhena grass similar to it, at Dartmoor, in November,

1950, but was not reared.

PSEUDALMENUS GHLORINDA (Blanchard) 1548,

Thecla chlorinda Blanchard 1848, pl. 3, fig. 15-18, and 1853, p. 401,

Pour races previously have been described.

Pseudalmenus chlorinda barringtonensis Waterhouse 1928. Originally

known only from a single male found dead on snow in Oetober near Edwards

Hut, on Barrington Tops, New South Wales; others were obtained by Messrs,

Frank Dodd and A. Burns at Tubrabueces, New South Wales, in September,

1947.

Pseudalmenus c. chloris Waterhouse and Lyell 1914. New South Wales,

Only known so far from Katoomba in October and Mittagong in November.

Pseudalmenus c. zephyrus Waterhouse and Lyell 1914. Eastern Victoria,

Gippsland and Dandenong Ranges. Single-bvooded, appearing in September,

October and early November (Plate xx, fig. e-!).

Pseudalmenus c. chlorinda (Blanchard 1848), Tasmania, found usually at

low elevations; very loeal. Sinele-brooded, appearing from August to November

(Plate xx, fig. d). There are important notes about this race in a paper by

Couchman (1948),

To these may be added a fifth race from the Grampians.

PSEUDALMENUS CHLORINDA PFISHERT subsp. noy.

Plate xx, fie. a-c and text fig. 3.

Male. Forewinys above brownish-black with a black spot at end of cell

enclosed on three sides by a pale orange oval pateh, broken into five contiguous

spots by fine black lines following the veins, termen finely fringed white. Hind-

wings brownish-black with a small orange mark near cell outwardly from a

rather darker black spot, an orange band running parallel to termen, tapering

evenly towards and disappearing before apex, this partly encloses two small

black spots; fringes conspicuously white, dorsum broadly suffused with white

scales. Forewings beneath pale stone erey with a relatively large black discoidal

spot. and a more distal band; the termen narrowly mareined with black. Hind-

wings also pale stone grey with wide orange terminal band and a series of

TINDALE—NEW RHOPALOCERA FROM WESTERN VICTORIA 53

rather large black spots, the apical three marginal, the more posterior ones

enclosed within the orange band; a black spot at tornus separated from another

by the tornal portion of the orange band; a band composed of three blacls

spots across cell. Wing length 14.5 mm.: expanse 31 mm.

Female. Forewing with orange area similar to male, with black spot vf cell

almost surrounded by orange. Hindwings with pale orange cell spot very large;

submarginal deep orange band wide and with margins intensely black; the two

black spots within it well indicated. Forewings beneath as in male; rather dull

grey in colour with traces of lighter seales in position corresponding to markings

above; hindwings dull erey with black markings not very evident, and reddish

ones, vather diffused, extending well in from the black ones, Wing leneth

14.5 mm., expanse 32 mm.

Loc. Western Vietoria: Mt, Victory, Grampians, 1,200 {t. (ELolotype,

a male, January, 1952, and allotype female, 15th September, 1952, numbered

1. 19092, and a paratype male, in the South Australian Museum, eolleeted by

Rh. TH. Fisher and the writer; a paratype pair are in the collection of R, H.

isher). Three males, two females have been examined,

As indicated in the accompanying key, the present race differs froin the

others in extent of orange markings on wings above and jn the distribution and

relative sizes o! the markings on the wings below.

From P. ¢, zephyrus it differs below in the greater development of black

spots within the orange marginal band ot hindwing; from P. c. chlorindu it

differs in the absence of a second black band in the cell of hindwing,

The paratype niale in the series placed in the S.A, Musetum has the normally

pale orange marks of the wings above almost white; in other vespeets if is

like the other two examples.

Mr. J. C, LeSouef touk one example on Mt. Rosea at 2,800 {t. in November,

1941. He vealized it was a distinctive orm bub the specimen was lost and no

further specimens have been taken at the plaee where he found it, On 80th

November, 151, numerous larvae were found feeding on blackwood (.leacia

melanaxylon) shrubs near Mt. Vietory. They were attended by small sweet-

smelling black ants.

When disturbed the ants shepherded larvae together in elasters of ap te

u dozen and more, usually near a fork, and stood over them.

Bees and larvae in all stages were present. The larvae fed readily on

blackwood tips and were reared to maturity, Ants continued to minister to

them until they pupated, in December. Further adult larvae and pupae were

taken at the same place on 28th December, 1951. The pupae were generally

54 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

to be found hidden in crevices in bark and seemed not to be of interest to the

ants.

Three male examples emerged in early January from pupae of this brood.

The pupal period was about 22 days. The January emergences suggest that

under some conditions there may be cither a complete or a partial second or

summer brood of this race. The greater proportion of the brood remained in

the pupal state over the winter. Females emerged on the 13th and 14th

September.

Fig. 8. a, Pseudalmenus chlorinda fisheri. Mt. Victory, 1,200 ft.; a, eggs, diameter

)-8 mm.; b, adult larva, length 19 mni.; c, pupa, length 10 mm,

The ees are laid, up to four at a time, on tender tips of saplings and small

trees, They are 0-8 mm. in diameter, ereenish-white, hemispherical and pitted

with coarse punetures set in spirals about the ege (Text fig. 3a).

Larvae whieh emerge from these eges are 3-5 1mm. in length. They complete

their larval life in 28 to 33 days, There seem to be five larya instars. The

adult larva (Text fig. 3h) is 18-21 mm. in length, rather cylindrical with similar

diameter from prothorax to last segment of abdomen. The head is black, earried

partly concealed beneath the prothorax, the body above is marked with

numerous greenish-grey bands and lines together with spots of greenish-cream;

TINDALE—NEW RHOPALOCERA FROM WESTERN VICTORIA 55

paired cream spots of larger size are present on second and filth abdominal

segments, the seventh abdominal segment has a pink suffusion. Th lateral view

a pink band extends from posterior margin of prothorax to the sixth abdoninal

segment, ventral to this band is a grey one, below it there is a narrow lighter

band having while lateral hairs; the under parts are pale ereen,

Pupa, Brownish-black, rounded, compaet, covered with fine ridges and

eminences which give if a matt appearance (Text fie. 8e). It is supported by a

median girdle and by a eremaster. Length 10 mm., width 4 mim.

The adult larva appears to differ from that of P. c. barringtonensis in the

disposition of the markings, the large ereamy-vellow spots usually being absent,

except for ones on the second and filth abdominal segments.

The five races of P, chlorinda may readily be distinguished as follows:

Key To Races or PSEUDALMENUS CHLORINDA (Blanchard).

1. Cell of hindwing above with orange spot 92 we, me atts 2

Cell of hindwing above without orange spot ke 5

2. Cell spot of hindwing not joined to terminal orange band awit rr 3

Cell spot joined to terminal orange band _.... —— barringtonensis

3. Central orange spot of forewing large and surrounding a black internal

SPOT Foye om oh. | tes ra oe ee chloris

Central orange spot of forewing smaller, not surrounding the black

internal spot __..... ny ” Tint sn fee ane | Sid 4

4. Orange cell spot of hindwing above relatively large... ph Shay zephyrus

Orange cell spot of hindwing above relatively small (or obsolete) ...,, fishert

5, Hindwing below with only one series of cell spots athe — fishern

Hindwing below with two series of cell spots (sometimes without

orange) goes ease pox Act) um oe chlorindu

LIesPERILUA CRYPSARGVRA (Meyrick) 1888,

Telesto crypsarqyra Meyrick (1887) L888, p. 829.

Hesperilla c. crypsargyra Waterhouse 1927, p. 281.

Two races of H, crypsargiyra previously were known.

Hesperilla ¢, hapsont Waterhouse 1927, is front New South Wales at

Barrington Tops and Deervale, near Dorrigo, flying in January and February.

The sexes are figured here (Plate xxi, fig, i-]) for comparison with a new form.

Hesperilla e. erypsargyra (Meyrick) 1888. New South Wales, from the

Blue Mountains, near Blackheath and Katoomba, above 2,000 ft., where locally

it is common from about 21st November until early February (Plate xxi, fie, e-h),

The following new form has heen taken in the Grampians.

56 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

ITeSPERILLA ORVPSARQYRA LESOUEFL subsp. nov,

Plate xxi, fig, a-d, m-n, and text fig, 4a-4h-

Male. Morewings brownish-black with traces of lighter greenish-toned hairy

seales on busal fourth; three seis of spots silvery-white; an oblique black sex

matk from beyond end of cell to dorsum; hindwing brownish-bla¢k with

an orange yellow band, Forewings beneath dull black tending to brown

towards apex, with markings similar to those of upper side, but larger and

pale yellow in eolour; also a pale lemon-yellow series of four spots near

apex; hindwing rich brown with three large silvery-white spots arranged across

wing and another séries of smaller ones parallel to margin; fringes alternately

black and very pale yellow. Wing leneth 12 mm., expanse 27 mm.

Female, Similar to male but with more rounded wings and heavier body.

The silvery-white markings of forewings are larger and there is an additional

spot. present near the posterior margin; the sex band is absent; hindwings with

markings similar to those of male; the median orange yellow band broad,

fringes conspicuously pale yellow and black, the yellow tone being generally

darker than in male. Wines beneath as in male. Wing length 14 miu., expanse

81 mm,

Loc. Western Victoria; Mt. William 2,000-3,000 tt., locally common.

(Holotype a male, numbered I. 19093 in South Australian Museum, 5th Deeem-

ber, 1950, collected and presented by N. B. Tindale, Allotype female, 29th

November, 1950, collected by J, C, LeSouef and deposited in the South Austra-

lian Museum. Paratypes are in the collections of J, C. LeSouef, F. Erasmus

Wilson, R. H. Fisher and the South Australian Museum. The figured specimens

are a paratype pair from the collection of F', EK. Wilson; they were taken by

B. B. Given). Thirty males and thirteen females haye beeu examined.

In one aberrant male the white spots normally present beside the sex mark

are lacking and in three others there is only one instead of two. Rarely, mm the

wiale, there are traces of one or two spots near the posterior margin in the

position of the conspicuous spots present in the female.

I. c. lesouefi differs from typical I. ¢. erypsargyra in colour, markings, and

size. The wing colour above is darker and the forewing markings are silvery-

white, not pale yellow. The hindwing band is a clear orange-yellow, somewhat

wider, and less interrupted at the veins than in most specimens of the typical

form. Allowing for the freshness of the specimens the forewings beneath are

ot a far darker background colour and the silvery-white spots of the hindwing

wré relatively large. The small male wing expanse, ranging from 26-29 mm,

TINDALE—NEW KUOPALOCERA FROM WESTERN VICTORIA 57

contrasts with the 82 niin. wsual m Blackheath and Katoomba males of the

originally haned form; females also are smaller than in the two eastern races,

IT, ¢, hopsoni is even more distinet from this new vace by reason of its

larger size, the deep oratye-coloured marks of the forewings beneath, and the

brighter brown colour of the hindwings. Examples of this new race were first

taken on 13th November, 1950, in the pupal state, also as larvae, on clumps of a

sWordgrass (Gahnia microstachys Bentham). This swordgrass was growing

on steep, south-facing roek walls and slopes of the Mt. William massil up to

altitudes of about 3,000 ft,

At somewhat lower elevations down to 2,000 ft, larvae of the probable

second and third instars were found, Between 25 and 80 elrnps have to be

examined for each larva found. The foodplant. on Mt, Willian extends down-

wards commonly to about 1,800 ft., below whieh it is found only as an uncommon

plant to its limit at 1,500 1t., occurring there on damp sandy slopes of Cathedral

Rock among cleacia thickets and tea tree serub. So far as is known the food-

plant does not occur elsewhere in the Grampians and its presence seemingly has

escaped scientitie notice Lill now.

The first adult specimen of the butterfly, a male expanding 27 nim., emerged

on 25th Noveniber; another of similar size and markings on Sth December, 1950.

J. LeSouel reared two males and a female in the last. week of November, and

8B. Given tools specimens on the wing, and as pupae, between 13th and 19th

December. Other examples were reared and taken on the wing in Deeember,

1951. The latest eniergence date is 2nd January; males seem far more abun-

dant than females,

Life history. Ege not examined.

Young larvae, perhaps ol the second or third instar, are 10 inm. in length,

pale green, with traces of longitudinal markings; the head, 1:8-1-9 mm. in

diameter, is pale brown with a faint median longitudinal darker brown stripe.

Larvae of a later instar (Text fig. 4a and Plate xxi, fig. m), leneth 14 wm.,

ave pale olive-green, with faint traces of longitudinal brown tavkines, a narvow

darker inidline and paler brown lateral stripe. The head is 2°4-2-4 mm, in

diameter, yellow with a broad black median facial band, widened anteviorly,

where if is divided; viewed from above the margins of the head appear as if

rimmed narrowly with brown but in the larval head-easts this is not as evident,

Adult larval shelters usually are made by drawing three leaves together in

un upright position; pupation is in the open tube su lormed; the third leaf often

has a loop in it which seems to serve as a spring and keeps the shelter in position;

there usually is a white meal over the anterior end of the pupa. The pupa

(Text fig, 4b and Plate xxi, fig. n) is 18 mm, in length, smooth pale green,

58 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

with still paler wing cases, which become yellow and then brownish-black as

the pupa matures, a prominent pair of horns is present on the head. The

pupation period is aboul 2! days. Breeding sites preferred are on Gahnia

microstachya in open patches among the Granrpian Mountain gums, but some

larvae and pupae were found on tussocks in dense under-brush.

Fig. 4. da-b, Hesperilla crypsargyra lesouefi. Mt. William; a, subadult larva, length

14 mm.; b, pupa, length 18 mm. 4c, Signeta flammeata, Mt. Rosea; pupa, length 15 mm,

dd, Dispar compacta, Mt. Rosea, 1,000 ft.; mule pupa, length 12 mm.

The finding of such a distinetive member of the W. crypsargyra group in

Western Victoria suggests that with the further examination of the Eastern

Vietorian highlands a form of the species also should be found there. In the

light of the subspecific differentiation shown by other Grampians butterflies,

when compared with Eastern Victorian races, it seems possible that, if such a

find is made, the form taken in Hastern Victoria will be closer to 7, c. erypsar-

gyra than to the Western race, ZT, ¢. lesouefi.

SIGNETA FLAMMEATA (Butler 1882)

Text fig. te.

On 10th Noventber, 1950, a larva approximately 10 mm, in length was taken

in a tussoek of soft @rass (Pow caespifasu Worster) at Mt. Rosea, by searching

about 11 p.m. with a Jamp. On 8lst December the adult larva was 15 mui, in

length, pale brown with a darker mid-dorsal line; the head lrownish-black,

large and with prominent eves. The larva gathered dry grass together to form

a loose shelter within whicl: it pupated on 2nd January; the pupa was attached

to the grass by a few strands of silk about the tip of abdomen. The pupa

TINDALE—NEW KHOPALOCERA FROM WESTERN VICTORIA 59

(Text fig. de) is 15 mm, in length, rather cylindrical, with the head somewhat

squarely truncate, brown in colour with the eyes mottled with dark brown; the

last segments of the abdomen seem to possess an enlarged circular gland or

specially pigmented arca. On 17th January the pupa darkened. Tt emerged

19th January, 1951, and the butterfly was fully developed by 8am, Mr. R, H.

Fisher took a male specimen on the wing at [all Gap, 29th January, 1951, In

November, 1951, further larvae were taken by R. Fisher; these also emerged in

January. All proved to be males,

So far as can be aseertained these are the first records of the species in

Western Victoria.

[t is known to oeeur at Killarney in Souther Queensland, at Barrington

Tops, Dorrigo, Sydney, Ulawarra, the Blue Mountains, and Colo Vale, in New

South Wales, and in Victoria at Mt. St. Bernard, Wandin, Healesville, Gisborne,

Kallista aud Lorne. On Ist February, 1953, 1 took it at Tanybryn in the

Southern Otway Range, Tt vanges from neat sea level to about 4,000 tt.

Variations which might be considered of subspecific value have not been

recognized although some examples are very dark in colour. Further study

inay show that the separation is warratited of the northern examples from

Dorrigo and Killarney. Butler’s type came from the vicinity of Melbourne.

Hastern Victorian specimens from Kallista are large, and while somewhat

darker than specimens from Northern New South Wales, are not quite as dark

as examples from Mt. Rosea. Mt, St, Bernard examples agree with those trom

Kallista exeept that they are a little lighter in colour. A typical freshly

emerged male from Kallista expands 36 mm., and has the hindwing beneath

dark ochreous, while the ochreous suffusion above is conspicuous,

Dispar compacts Butler 1882.

Text fio. 4d.

Mr. B. Given took a male of this species at Dartmoor on 81st danuary,

1951. It seems not previously to have heen known trom Western Victoria.

Larvae were taken at Mt, Rosea (1,000 ft.) in November, 1951, feeding

on the grass Pow cuespitosé Forster and also on P. eaespitosa var. tencra Ben-

tham. They ean be found near inidnight on the fine flower stems. ‘These

may bend over with the weight of the larva,

The larva is of the palest green with a dark head. On 3rd December

three examples nieasured 14, 16 and 16 mm. in leneth when fully extended, but

only 9, 10 and 11 in a contraeted position such as they assume when disturbed.

The largest larva pupated just prior te 26th December in a tube shelter formed

by joining the two edges of a leaf with a series of equally spaced silken sLraps;

60 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

it emerged on 20th January, 1952. Two other larvae continued to feed until

7th January. They formed shelters by joining the edges of spills of paper in

a similar manner to the leaf used by the earlier one, and pupated between

Sth and 12th January, The two last named showed little signs of development

on 27th January; they darkened shortly after this date and one emerged

on 7th February.

Pupa pale fawn, smooth, covered with an opalescent. white meal. The head

is rounded, with a large black process at base of forewing. There is another

large dark chestnut coloured lateral impression near the apex of abdomen;

the abdominal extremity in ventral yiew is expanded, fan-like strongly chitinized

and with a fringe of hairs. The pupa (Text fig, 4d) is sumilar to that of Signeta

flanmeata. With development the pupal wing cases darken. The pupal period

ranges from 24 to 28 days,

The adults do not seem to differ from those taken in Eastern Vietoria.

LIST OF SPECIES FROM GRAMPIAN MOUNTAINS,

WESTERN VICTORIA AND VICINITY.

Delias aganippe (Donovan, 1805). Mt. William, 27th December; Wannon Falls,

Anaphoeis java tevtonia (Febricius, 1775). Hall Gap; Mt. Rosea.

Pieris rapae (Linnaeus, 1758). Hall Gap.

Danaus menippe menippe (Huebner, 1816). Hall Gap. The studies of Talbot

(1943), Corbet. (1949), and Field and others (1951) indicate menzppe to be

the proper name of this North Ameriean visitor. The formerly used name

plezippus Linnaeus applies to a Chinese species, displacing the name genutia

Cramer. The lectotype of D. plexippus, nominated by Corbet (1949) is one

of the Chinese examples studied by Linnaeus, still bearing his name label.

Vumessa cardui kershawt (MeCoy, 1868). Mt. William. The name Vanessa

takes precedence over Pyrameis by reason of Opinion 156 of the Interna-

tional Commission on Zoological Nomenclature.

Vanessa itea (Fabricius, 1775). Mt. Rosea.

Heteronympha banksti nevina Tindale, 1953. Mt. Rosea, LO00-2,000 ft.

Heteronympha solandri angela Tindale, 1953. Mt. Rosea, 2,000 ft.

Heteronympha merope merope Fabricius, 1775. Wannon Falls; Myrtlebank;

Hall Gap.

Heteronympha penelope maraia Tindale, 1952. Myrtlebank, 800 ft.; Mt. Rosea,

1,000 ft.

TINDALE—NEW RHOPALOCERA FROM WESTERN VICTORIA 61

Heteronympha cordace wilsoni Burns, 1947. Dartmoor, 18th November, 1951;

Wannon River Headwaters, 1,400 ft., 26-27th December, 1951.

CGeitonevra klugit klugit (Guerin, 1830). Hall Gap.

Tisiphone abeona antont Tindale, 1948. Wannon River Headwaters, Moora, and

Dartmoor, as laryae on Gahnia psitfacorum; newly emerged female, Dart-

moor, 19th December, 1951. Examples of 7. abeona taken at Yaugher,

Otway Ranges, 23rd December, 1951, are all 7. a. albifascia Waterhouse,

1904,

Oreienica kershawt kanuwnda Tindale, 1949, Dartmoor, 31st January, 1951.

A newly emerged male of O. kershawi taken at. Turton Pass, Otway Ranges,

23rd December, 1951, appears to belong to the form O. k. kershawi Miskin,

(876, as also lone series from Lavers Hill and Tanybryn, also in the Otway

Ranges, 3tst January to Ist February, 1953.

Candalides acasta Cox, 1873. Little Desert, Ist December.

Candahdes hyacinthina simplexa Tepper, 1882. Brimbaga, South Australia; a

pair of the species from Yaueher, Otway Ranges, taken 23rd December

are of the raee C. h. hyacinthina Semper, 1878.

IT ypochrysops ignita ignita (Leach, 1814). Kiata, Ist December.

Zizeeria labradus labradus (Godart, 1824). Myrtlebank.

Paralucia aenea lucida Crosby, 1951. Kiata.

Neolucia serpentata Werrich-Schaeffer, 1869. Little Desert and Kiata, Ist Decem-

ber.

Nealucia agricola agricola Westwood. Mt. William, 3,800 ft., 27th December;

Pomonal, lith and 28th November; Little Desert, Ist December, worn

male.

Lampides boeticus Linnaeus. Taratap Station, South Australia; Hamilton,

Vietoria.

? Oguris olane Hewitson. A larva on Loranthus pendulus at Tyrendarta, Vic-

toria; it was not reared.

Ogyris idmo halmaturia Tepper, 1890. Brimbaga, South Australia, 23rd Novem-

ber and 2nd December, 1951,

Ogyris hewitsoni meridionalis Bethune-Baker 1905. At Bellfield; several pupae

were taken under bark of Acacia melanoxrylon near Loranthus linophyllus;

of these one reared by R. Fisher proved to be an example of the aberration

hopensis Burns, 1947, which is not a separate race since it occurs as an

occasional variant in more than one place where O. h. meridionalis oceurs.

62 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The race O. h. parsonsi Angel 1951 described from Central Australia is a

distinctive form of the same species. Some previous authors have been in

evror in associating the name meridionalis with Ogyris amaryllis. The last

named is a separate species, with several races, found from South Queens-

land to South Australia, principally along the coast and inland near Can-

berra.

Jalmenus icilius ILewitson, 1865, Kiata, December.

Pseudalmenus chlorinda fisheri Tindale, 1953. Mt. Victory. Eggs, larvae and

pupae on Acacia melanoxylon November and December; adults, January,

September.

Trapezites eliena monocycla Lower, 1911, Myrtlebank, a reared example, 18th

December, pupal duration 16 days; Snuggery, South-East of 8. Australia,

30th January, 1953.

Trapezites sciron eremicola Burns, 1947. Little Desert, a worn example, Ist

December, 1951.

Trapezites phigalivides Waterhouse, 1903, Pomonal, 11th November; Myrtle-

bank; Mt. Rosea, 2,000 ft., 15th November.

Trapezites phigalia phigalia Wewitson, 1868, Pomonal, 11th November.

Siqneta flammeata Butler, 1882. Mt. Rosea.

Dispar compacta Butler, 1882. Dartmoor, 31st January; larvae at Mt. Rosea,

1,000 ft., emerged January.

Hesperilla chaostola chares Waterhouse, 1933, Jimmy Creek, a worn female

taken by R. Fisher on 26th November.

Hlesperilla donnysa delos Waterhouse, 1941. All examples taken in the Gram-

pians area are of this race. Myrtlebank, 24th and 27th November; Jimmy

Creek, 3rd December; Wannon Falls, 19th and 23rd November, 2nd Decem-

her; Cavendish, 28rd November, 3rd December; Victoria Valley, 22nd

November. All larvae and pupae seen were on Gahnia radula, The identi-

fication of the Gahnia has been confirmed by the National Herbarium,

Melbourne.

Ilesperilla chrysotricha leucosia Waterhouse, 1938. Dartmoor, 27th November,

reared from pupae on Gahnia trifida; closer to this race than to the eastern

Victorian H. ¢. cyclospila Lower.

Tlesperilla idothea clara Waterhouse 1932. Mt. Rosea, Mt. Victory, and Mt.

William; larvae on Gahnia psittacorum, 1,400-2,500 ft., males flying about

summits in December. Both sexes also from Snuggery, 8. Australia, 30th

January, 1953.

TINDALE—NEW RHOPALOCERA FROM WESTERN VICTORIA 63

Hesperiila erypsargyrd losouefi Tindale, 1953. Mt. William, 2,000-3,000 [,, on

wing December, as larvae and pupae, November, on Guhnia microsluchya.

Oreisplanus peorornatus Kirby, 1893. Wannon Teadwaters, 1,400 ft.; Lake

Wartook; Mt, Victory, 2,000 ft. Larvae and pupae November; on wing

late November.

DISCUSSION ON CLIMATE.

Progress of speciation in the Grampians area seems to have led fo the

formation of distinctive races in several species which require relatively high

humidity in their environment, Among those previously reported were :

Tistphone abeond anloni Vindale; Heteronympha cordace wilsoni Burus;

Helcronympha penelope muraia Tindale; Oreixenica kershawi kanunda Vindale,

To this suite are now added two further Satyrids, a form of JTeteronympha

solandrit Waterhouse and another of Jf. banksit Leach, a race of Pseudalinenus

chlorindd, as well as IZesporilla crypsarqyra lesouefi Vindale, member of a

peculiarly southern Australian group of Temperate Zone Uesperiids.

The last named seems 10 require an environment such as is now testrieted

on Mt, William in Western Victoria to a belt extending from about 2,000 ft.,

up to the upper limit of the growth of its foodplant Gahnia microstachya, at

about 3,000 ft. The rainfall of this area is stated to be in the vicinily of 46

inches per annum, distributed rather uniformly over the year. JT. o. lesouefi

sees to have maintained its isolated existence in Graiipians area during a

tine sufliciently long to have diverged from forms existing further to the east,

Ui, shows well-marked subspecific differences,

The two other known survival areas for this species are in the Hastern

highlands of New South Wales. The three known forms live in areas now

separated from each other by belts of drier country respectively 350 aud 250

miles in width where today conditions seemingly are nol suitable tor their

existence.

Any drastie past degeneration of climate in Southern Australia probably

would have eaused //, ¢, lesouefi to have become locally extinct since in such an

event there is no area where either it could have sought asylum, or have found

its climatic needs,

Hence within the limits of time which must be allowed lor the development

of a distinctive subspecies of this kind, there probably has not been, in the

(Grampians area, any drastically arid climatic eyele.

On the contrary, the dispersal of the parent form of what are now the three

known races of IT. crypsargyra, confined respectively to (1) Barrington Tops,

6+ RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

(2) the Blue Mountains and (3) the Grampians, inust have been affected in

some period when there prevailed a cooler and wetter condition than now exists.

What is at present the climate of areas situated at about 2,000-3,000 ft. elevation

niust then haye prevailed far more generally either on the lowlands or the lesser

highlands between these areas, .

Another Hesperiid which shows the same type of distribution is T'rapezttes

eliena, of whieh the Western Vietorian race, 7. c. monocycla Lower, described

many years ago, is different from the Eastern form.

To South Australians the Lepidopterous fauna of the Grampians is thus of

particular interest since it preserves elements of the relatively eool-wet-climate

loving section of the South Australian fauna in so far as it is distinet from that

of South-Eastern Australia. Some Grampians subspecies extend also to the

Mt. Lofty Ranges, Kangaroo Island, Port Lincoln, aud the southern Flinders

Raiiges, others extend only to the Mt. Lofty highlands, yet others range only

into wet places in the South-Kast of South Australia and still others, bemg

truly high humidity-requirine forms, survive only in the Grampians area. itselt,

a few even being confined to specific valleys and peaks within the Grampians

aren,

It is of some interest to note that due to the limited number and situation

of rainfall observation stations available in Western Victoria the presence of

the Crampians massil, with its rainfall of over 40 inches, is not recognized on

eeneralized elimate maps such as that of Thornwaite, as elaborated by

Gentilli (1948). Tt actually is a more extensive arca of relatively high rainfall

than the Mt. Lofty one and should seemingly fall into the classifieation as B B’r

(hamid, warm, rainy) with an ame of B B’s (humid, warm, summer dry)

around it. The highest Grampians suniuuit plateaux are subalpine in character.

Wood (1949), in his Veeetation Map of Australia, gives no indication of the

presence of the small areas of wet selevophyll forest and incidentally also fails

to show the outliers of rain forest and Nathofagus of the Otway Range, signifi-

cant though these are from the point of view of plant distribution.

Tt seems evident from the study of the Lepidoptera that there is a significant

faunal break between the Grampians and the mountain aveas of Hastern Vie-

toria. The Grampians fuuna extends westward into the lower South-Hast of

South Australia and to the Mt. Lotty Ranve itself, which must be regarded as

a recently isolated outlier sinee recognizable subspecific differences seem not

yet to have arisen between butterflies cammon to the Grampians and Mt, Lofty

areas. At no very distant date in the past they probably were more closely

linked than today; at that time the elimate of the more humid highland areas

must then have been present in the low country between them.

TINDALE—NEW RHOPALOCERA FROM WESTERN VICTORIA 65

The Otway Range fauna is different to that of the Grampians, favouring

tore a relationship with the Hastern Victorian mountain areas. Tlenece it is

probable that what is now the fauna of the wet Otway Ranges at 1,000-1,800 ft.,

was formerly that of a moist lowland belt continuous with that of Gippsland

When it was a little cooler than now, Examples suggesting this are Tisiphone a.

albifascia, which ocewrs in the Otways, not 7. a. andonts also Oreirentea Ir.

hershawt and not the form O, hk. kanunda. The broad helt of sayanwaty land

hetween the Otways and Grampians effectively divided these two areas even

during the sueeested cooler, more humid interval.

The button grass incidentally referred to in recording the capture of

HT, cordace wilsont on the swaii flats at the headwaters of the Wannon River

is the same species (Mesomeluena sphaerocephalus R. Brown) as is found in

Western Tasmania on swamp lands in the old glacial valleys. Although loeally

rather common on the headwaters of the Wannon and oceurring elsewhere in the

wettest parts of the South-Hast of South Australia, it nowhere in the Grampians

seems to cross the low divide to the headwaters of the northward flowing Fyans

Creek. It is possible therefore that its distribution is intimately tied to the

past climate of the Grampians region and on the headwaters of the Wannon

and in the South-East of South Australia it may be a reliet form making a last

stand and witness to former wetter and possibly cooler conditions in the country

south of the Grampians. Similar witness is perhaps borne by the postelimax

ecommitinities of tree ferns and attendant Pomaderris apetala Lahillarditre

thickets about Mt. Rosea.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS.

T am indebted to Mr, S. Blake, of the Botanie Musewn and Herbarium,

Brisbane, tor identifications of Gahnia sword grasses. Ile informs me that ours

is perhaps the first report of Gahnia microstachya Bentham ‘ron: Western Vie-

loria. A previous Victorian record, ac¢ording to Mr. J, C. LeSouel, is from the

Avon Range, north of Stratford, Gippsland, where it was eolleeted in 1854 by

Baron §. von Mueller,

Prot. J. B. Cleland las kindly provided identifications of several shrubs

and grasses and submitted others to Mr. A. W. Jessep, Director of the National

Herbarium, Melbowme, tor confirmation; T am indebted to both tor their help.

Mr, Keith llateley kindly placed his knowledge of the Kiata district and

Little Desert at ovr disposal, enabling interesting series to be obtained within

a minimum of time.

Mr. J. ©. LeSouef kindly consented to lodge an allotype lemale specimen

of H. ¢. lesouefi in the South Australian Museum and he and Mr, B, B. Given

66 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

contributed freely of their knowledge and experience to make the visits to the

Grampians a suecess,

Mr. F. E. Wilson kindly loaned two paratype specimens of JTesperilla c.

lesouefi which haye been figured, Mr. R, Fisher, my companion on the second

visit to the area, also kindly placed type material in the South Australian

Museum when my own takings were not adequate for the purpose. All material

listed, other than that in the collections of my companions, has been presented

to the South Australian Museum,

REFERENCES CITED,

Angel, F, M, (1951): Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Australia, Adelaide, 74, pp. 6-17, pL. I.

Blanchard, C, B. (1848): Voy. au Pole Sud, Atlas. Zool. Ins., pl. 3, fig, 16-18.

Blanchard, C. B. (1853): Voy. au Pole Sud, Dese. des Ins. 4, pp, 401-402.

Burns, A. (1947): Mem. Nat. Mus., Melbourne, 15 p, 86-102,

Butler, A. G. (1882): Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., London, (5) ix, p. 85.

Corbet, A. 8. (1949): Proc, Roy. Ent, Soc., London, 18, p. 188.

Conchman, L, (1948). Ree. Qu. Victoria Mus., Launceston, II, (2), pp. 95-96,

Field, W. D., Clarke, J. F. G,, and Franclemont, J. G. (1951): Setence, Cam-

bridge, Mass., 113, p. 65.

Gentilli, J. (1948): Aust. Journ. Sctence, Sydney, 9, pp. 15-16.

Tilidge, R. (1898): Proe. Roy. Soc. Queensland, Brisbane, xii, p. 93,

Leach, W. BE. (1814): Zool. Miscellany, London, 1.

Lueas, T. P. (1890): Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, Sydney, I (4), pp. 1065-

1066,

Meyrick, B, (1888): Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, Sydney, 1887, II (2), p, 829.

Talbot, G. (1943): Trans. Roy. Ent. Soc., London, 98, p, 115.

Tindale, N. B, (1947): Rec. 8S. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, viii, pp. 613-618.

Tindale, N. B. (1949): Rec. 8S. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, ix, pp, 148-155.

Tindale, N. B. (1952): Trans. Roy, Soc. 8. Aust., Adelaide, 75, pp. 25-29,

Waterhouse, G. A, (1904): Proc. Linn, Soc. N.S, Wales, Sydney, 29, p. 466.

Waterhouse, (. A., and Lyell, @. (1914): Butt. of Aust., Sydney.

Waterhouse, @. A. (1927): Proc, Linn. Sov. N.S. Wales, Sydney, 52, pp, 275-

283.

Waterhouse, G. A. (1928): Proc. Linn, Soc. N.S. Wales, Sydney, 53, pp. 401-

412.

Waterhouse, G. A, (1932): What butterfly is that?, Sydney, pp. 1-291.

TINDALE—NEW RHOPALOCERA FROM WESTERN VICTORIA

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Plate xviii.

Fig, a-b, Heteronympha banksit nevina.

(a) holotype male, Mt, Rosea, 1,000 ft., 28th January, 1952.

(b) allotype female, same locality, 13th February, 1952.

Fig. e-d, Heteronympha banksii banksit.

(e) male, Clifton, 16th March, 1898. (d) female, Roseville, 4th April, 1904,

Fig. e-f, Heteronympha banksii mariposa,

(e) holotype male, MePherson Range, March, 1891. (f) allotype female, same details,

Fig. g, Heteronympha banksii nevina.

paratype female, Mt, Rosea, 1,000 ft., 9th February, 1952, underside (specimen in Fisher

collection),

Fig. h, Heteronympha solandri angela.

allotype female, Mt, Rosea, 2,000 ft., 25th December, 1951.

Plate xix.

Fig. a-b, Heteronympha solandri solandri.

(a) male, Mt. Hotham, January, 1904. (b) female, same details,

Fig. e-d, Heteronympha solandri angela.

(¢) holotype male, Mt. Rosea, 2,000 ft., 25th December, 1951. (d) allotype female, same

details.

Fig. e, Heteronympha solandri solandri.

male, Mt. Donna Buang, 4,000 ft., 12th February, 1949, underside.

Fig. f, Heteronympha banksii mariposa.

holotype male, MePherson Range, March, 1891, underside,

Fig. g, Heteronympha banksii nevina.

paratype male, Mt. Rosea, 22nd January, 1952, underside (specimen in Fisher Collection).

Fig. h, Heteronympha banksti banksii.

mule, Clifton, 16th March, 1898, underside,

Plate xx.

Fig. a-c, Pseudalmenus chlorinda fisheri.

(a) holotype male, Mt. Victory, 1,200 ft., 6th January, 1952,

(b) paratype male, same locality, 7th January, 1952.

(ec) paratype male, same locality, 10th January, 1952, underside.

(Last-named specimen in Fisher Collection.)

Vig. d, Pseudalmenus chlorinda chlorinda.

male, Kingston, Tasmania, November.

Fig. e-f, Pseudalmenus echlorinda zephyrus.

(e) male, Gisborne, 50th October, 1894, (f) male, Moe, October, 1922, underside.

68 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Plate xxi.

Fig. a-d, Hesperilla crypsargyra lesouefi.

(a-b) paratype male, Mt. William, 19th December, 1950, upper and under side. (¢-d)

paratype female, Mt. William, December, 1950, upper and under side (specimens

in F. E. Wilson collection).

Fig. e-h, Hesperilla crypsargyra crypsargyra.

(e-f) male, Blackheath, upper and under side. (g-h) female, Katoomba, upper and under

side.

Fig. i-l, Hesperilla crypsargyra hopsoni.

(i-j) male, Barrington Tops, upper and under side. (k-1) female, Barrington Tops, upper

and under side.

Fig. m-n, Hesperilla crypsargyra lesouefi.

(m) subadult larva, Mt. William. (n) pupae, showing three aspects.

Co S.A. MUSEUM

VoroNl Puare NVI

KEG. SA, MUSEUM Vor NI. Prare XLS

Rec. 5.4, MUSEUM Vou. XI, PLATE XN

a... ' ow

? i-— ”

= VU SS <= 3

eee I foal — ak

Rec. S.A. Museum Von, XI, PLare XNI

ON THE SARCOPTID OR MANGE-MITES OF THE WOMBAT

BY H. WOMERSLEY, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

A sarcoptid mite infesting the skin of the Australian Wombat has been known since 1893, when

Raillet (Traite Zool. med. et agric,. 2" ed.) recorded without description or figures, a mite which

had been found by Dumeril on the skin of a wombat from Australia in the Museum nationale

d’Histoire naturelle de Paris. Apparently on the opinion of Fournier, the mite was considered to be

identical with that of man, Sarcoptes scabei (Linn. 1758) and was given the variety name of

wombati. It was said to be able to affect man (the keepers in charge of the wombat while in

captivity) and to cause larger vesicles than the human scabies.

On THe SARCOPTID orn MANGE-MITES or tur WOMBAT

By H. WOMERSLEY, Sourn AusrrauiAn Museum.

A Sarcoptm mite infesting the skin of the Australian Wombat has been known

since 1893, when Railliet (Traité Zool. med, et agric,, 2nd ed.) recorded without

description or figures, a mite which had been found by Dumeril on the skin of a

wombat trom Australia in the Museum nationale d'Histoire naturelle de Paris.

Apparently on the opinion of Fournier, the mite was considered to be identical

with that of man, Sarcoptes scabei (Linn. 1758) and was given the variety name

of wombati. It was said to be able to affect man (the keepers in charge of

the wombat while in captivity) and to cause larger vesicles than the human

scabies.

Apart trom the above information which has been repeated by many writers,

viz., Canestrini and Kramer in *' Das Tierreich, Lig. 7, 1899°'; Warburton

in “Parasitology, 12, 289, 1920°’; Lemaire in ‘‘Traité d’Entomologic Med. et

Vet., 1938"'; and Rainbow in ‘‘ Ree. Aust. Museum, 6, 190, 1906 (who also gives

the species of wombat as Phascolomys ursinus Shaw (= Vombatus wrsinus

ursinus Shaw in Iredale and Troughton, whieh if correct would indieate that

the specimen was from Tasmania), no records, descriptions or figures of fresh

material have been found in the literature.

In 1937, however, specimens were collected from wombats and were identi-

fied by Dr. R. N. MeCulloek as Sarcoptes scabed (L.). A slide of this material

was sent to Mr, $8. L. Allman, of the Department of Agriculture, New South

Wales.

Fortunately Mr. Allman has been able to find this slide, which eontained

seven females and three males, and I am greatly indebted to both Dr, MeCulloch

and Mr. Allman for the opportunity of examinine this material.

The specimens have been remounted on individual slides, and I am now

able to give certain details of the morphology, figure both sexes, and fully

confirin the identification,

I am also indebted to Mr. David Lee for the opportunity of examining four

other slides of Dr, McCulloch's material left at the School of Public Health and

Tropical Hygiene, Sydney. These slides contained numerous specimens of both

sexes and young stages.

70 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Famity SACOPTIDAE.

Genus SARCOPTES.

SARCOPTES SCABEL vy. WOMBATI Railliet 1893.

Sarcoptes scabei v. wombati Railliet 1893, Traité de Zool. med. et agric., 2nd ed.

(nom.nud. ).

Fig. 1. Sarcoptes scabei v. wombati Raillict 1893. A-B, Female: A dorsal, B ventral;

C-D, Male: C dorsal, D ventral.

WoOMERSLEY—MANGE-MITES OF THE WOMBAT 7)

Description: As in 8. scabei and its various physiological races, from differ-

ent host species. Female. Length of idiosoma of mounted specimens 320p,

width 299, Length of dorsal cones 16, of dorsal spines 34y. Jale, Leneth

of idiosoma 162p, width 169,, dorsal cones 8p, dorsal spines 17p.

Loc, and ITost. From wombats, species 2, from Goulburn, New South

Wales, June, 1937 (coll. the District Veterinary Officer).

Recently I haye received through Mr. T. G. Campbell, of the Division of

Entomology, U,S,..R.O., Canberra, some sarcoptid material taken from a speci-

men of Vombatus hirsutus hirsutus Perry 1810 (= mitchelli auct.) which was

killed on the Bundahella Road, Australian Capital Territory, on the 13th July,

1951.

This new material, white being closely related to the Sarcoptidae, differs in

80 Many respects that a new tamily is required for it.

Famity ACAROPTIDAE nov.

With # pair of vertical setae. Cuticle striated. Carunele stalked on short

legs. Without dorsal cones, spines or seales. Female with only propodosomal

shield; male with both propodosomal and hysterosomal shields. Male with anal

suckers,

Remarks. Closely allied to the Sareoptidae, differing in the above charae-

ters. In the structure of the third and fourth lees and the anal suckers in the

male, however, it shows sone resemblance to Megninia of the Analgesidue, a

family confined to birds, and in which yertical setae are wantine.

Genus ACAROPTES noy.

Female with legs I and II normal, tarsi furnished with a single claw and

a shortly peduneulate sueker; legs ITT and IV short, without claws or suckers

but ending in a pair of very long setae; epimera of leg I united apically;

genitalia between lees IT and TIT. Male with all lees of normal length except

Il, which is half the length of TV; I and IT furnished with tarsal peduneulate

sucker and paired bifureate claws; lee [17 with tarsus ending in a short stout

claw; leg IV ending in two long setae and two lanceolate spines; anal suckers

present,

Dorsum striate, with propodosomal and hysterosomal shields in the male,

propodosomal only in female; without dorsal spines; apically in the male the

abdomen is divided into six short lobes, each with a long seta, the middle pair

of which are slightly expanded basally.

Cenotype Acaroptes vombatus sp. n.

72 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

ACAROPTES VOMBATUS sp. N.

Description. Female. Shape oval, but anterior of shoulder the sides are

coneavely converging to the rounded apex. Length of idiosoma 3804, width

300n. Dorsum striated with a single anterior small dorsal shield as figured;

furnished with a pair of vertical setae 16 long, three median pairs of setae of

moderate length ca. 50x, on each side of the first of these pairs is a very long

seta of almost body length, and laterally of these another of moderate length;

Fig. 2. Acaroptes vombatus g. et sp. n. A-C, Female: A dorsal, B ventral, C tip of

tarsus | or II; D-H, male: D dorsal, E ventral, F tarsus I or Il, G tarsus IIT, H tarsus IV

with long setae eut off.

WOMERSLEY—MANGE-MITES OF THE WOMBAT 73

laterally on level of coxae IIT another of moderate length. Ventrally: epimera

of leg I united medially; a seta on coxae I, 11, IT; genitalia between coxae IT

aud ITI, flanked by three fine setae, the third of which is fairly long and

sinuous; anus also flanked by three setae, the anterior of which is fairly long

and smuous; legs I and II of normal length, tarsi furnished with a short stout

claw, and a fairly long earunele and sucker; legs IIL and IV short, tarsi without

claws or caruncles and sucker, but ending in a pair of very long setae.

Male. Shape as figured. Larger than female. Length 780, width 650p.

Dorsum with striate cuticle, and two dorsal shields, an anterior as in female

and a larger posterior shield; body posteriorly with six lobes, the medial pair

with a moderately long basally slightly expanded seta, the next and longest lobe

with two very long and one short seta, and the short outer lobes with a long

seta; other dorsal setae much as in female. Ventrally: epimera ot lee I free

as figured. Legs all of normal length, except IIT which is only half as long

as IV; tarsi 1 and II with shorter carunele than in female and ending in a pair

ot bifid claws (see figure), III ending in a single strong stout claw with a few

inner small teeth; IV with tarsus ending in two very long setae and a pair

of strong lanceolate setae. Anus flanked on each side by an anal sucker.

Chelicerae in both sexes small, with two blunt teeth. Palpi apparently

three segmented.

Remarks: Described from 11 males and 18 females in the collection of the

South Australian Museum.

A BRIEF REVISION OF THE FOUR-FINGERED MEMBERS OF THE

GENUS LEIOLOPISMA (LACERTILIA)

BY FRANCIS J. MITCHELL, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

Several specimens belonging to the “Heteropus” subgroup of this genus were collected in 1948 by

the National Geographic Society, Smithsonian Institution and Commonwealth Government

Expedition to Armhem Land. Considerable difficulty was experienced in identifying these

specimens for inclusion in the official report on the expedition, and therefore a brief revision of the

group, characterized within the genus by the presence of 4+5 digits and an undivided fronto-

parietal, has been compiled in an endeavour to clarify the taxonomy. This work has been

handicapped by the inadequacy of the material and data available, the inconstancy of certain

characters in some species, but apparent constancy in others, necessitating the examination of a

large number of specimens of all recognizable forms. Until more extensive collections are made, the

distribution and interrelationship of the twelve Australian lizards recognized in this work cannot be

determined satisfactorily.

A BRIEF REVISION or raz FOUR-FINGERED MEMBERS

or THE GENUS LE/JOLOPISMA (LACERTILIA)

By FRANCIS J. MITCHELL, Sourm Ausrrauian Mustum.

Text fig. 1-4.

SEVERAL specimens belonging to the “ Heteropus’ subgroup of this genus were

collected in 1948 by the National Geovraphie Society, Smithsonian Institution

and Coimnonwealth Government Expedition io Arnhem Land. Considerable

difficulty was experiehced in identifying these specimens for inelusion in the

ofticial report on the expedition, and therefore a brief revision of the vroup,

characterized within the genus by the presence of 4 + 9 digits and an undivided

fronto-parietal, has been compiled in an endeavour to clarity the taxonomy.

This work has been handicapped by the inadequacy of the material and data

‘vailaible, the inconstaney of certain characters in some species, but apparent

constancy in others, necessitating the examination of a large number of specimens

of all recognizable forms. Until more extensive collections are made, the

distribution aud interrelationship of the twelve Australian lizards recognized

in this work cannot be determined satistactorily.

The following abbreviations of Museum titles have beeu utilized to indicate

the institution in which each specimen is housed: ‘‘U.S.N.M »' United States

National Museum, Washington; ‘'M.C.Z...? Museum of Comparative Zoolozy,

Harvard; ‘*A.M.,"’ Australian Museum, Sydney; “'S.A.M.,’? South Australian

Museum, Adelaide; *‘*Q.M,,"? Queensland Museum, Brisbane; and ‘‘M.M.,”°

Macleay Museum, University of Sydney.

T wish to aeknowledge my appreciation of the co-operation of Mr. G. Mack,

Director, Queensland Museum, Brisbane, and Messrs. (J. Ilenry and §. J, Cop-

land of the Macleay Museum, University of Sydney, in making the De Vis

and Macleay type material, together with their opinions thereon, available for

my examination. Also, I am grateful to Me. Arthur Loveridge, of the Museum

of Comparative Zoology, Harvard, for his assistanee in obtaining the loan of tawe

speeimens collected at Coen, Queensland, which are herein considered to repre-

Sent a previously undeseribed species.

Key vo THe AUSTRALIAN Species anp RAcEs.

These species have proved difficult to key, Tew possessing an outstanding

distinguishing feature. Also, the limited nuniber of specimens available has

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

in many eases prevented determination of the stability of some features, and

therefore their suitability for use in a key is in doubt.

10.

11.

Interparietal distinet (ue es Pe a 2

Tnterparictal fused with frontoparietal ome wea rhomboidults

Dorsal scales smooth ee ne cating ten toch WB eentis alls 3

Dorsal scales keeled... wee ert seen Mase omc 7

Palpebral disk much larger than @ar ue see ee 5

Palpebral disk equal to Car we wee te ous ites) = 4

Dorsal and lateral colouring uniform we oe fuscum fuscum

Darker and/or lighter dorso-lateral stripes present Las fuscum variegatum

28 or less midbody scales... ae te ie te novae guinede

30 or more midbody seales ee oe oe wehbe ra 6

Prefrontals separated acc se eee tenes at pueccooeyt

Prefrontals contacting or forming » short median suture u.. tetradactylum

Majority of dorsal seales tricarinate so os diye daha 8

Majority of dorsal scales bicarinate mutts ays SRE 12

Prefrontals separated on the midline vn. ee es ane abn 9

Prefrontals forming a median suture no ee ee triacantha

Dorsal scales with simple keels 0.0 0 ese ee ae 10

Dorsal keels broken into series of POIMtS 0 ce ee tee COENSE

Palpebral disk much larger than ear wwe oe tut pectoralis

Palpebral disk equal to ear ewe es mt ste ae 11

Dorsal and lateral colouring UniTOrM a ee fuscum fuscum

Darker and/or lighter dorso-latera] stripes present wu fuscum variegatum

28-32 midbody scales nn cme tenet ste tees tts 13

38-40 midbody scales snc seen ce ae teen net vertebralis

Palpebral disk much larger than ear stares “tein st ee or vwar

Palpebral disk equal to ear un on wee LT wan bicarinalum

Both fuscum and pectoralis show wide variation in the degree of keeling of

the dorsal scales. Both the keeled and the smooth varieties of fuscum are

ineluded in the above key, but only the keeled variety of pectoralis, Apart from

the fact that I have not seen a perfectly smooth scaled example of the latter

species, the inclusion of this yariety could not be made without ereatly compli-

cating the key. It has therefore been omitted, although its probable existence

could be borne in mind when using this key for the jdentification of smooth

scaled specimens.

MITCHELL—FOUR-FINGERED SPECIES OF LEIOLOPISMA 4

LEIOLOPISMA FUSCUM ¥UscUM (Dumeril and Bibron),

Hetevopus fuscus Dumeril and Bibron, 1839, p. 759.

Heteropus schmeltzit Peters, 1867, p. 23,

Heteropus tricarinatis Meyer, 1874, p. 138,

Heteropus longipes Macleay, 1877, p. 66.

Heteropus serdentatus Macleay, 1877, p. 67.

Heteropus maculatus De Vis, 1885, p. 169.

Teteropus rubricatus De Vis, 1885, p, 170,

Heterapus rostralis De Vis, 1885, p. 171.

Specimens examined: Northern Territory; U,S,N.M, 128612-128617, 128519,

Yirrkala; A.M. R13583, 18584, 13656 (3 specimens), Cape Arnhem.

Queensland: Q.M, 17796, Iron Range, Cape York Peninsula; Q.M. .17778,

South Perey Island, Northumberland Group; Q.M. .17790, Rockhampton (topo-

type of H. schmeltzii Peters); Q.M. J5639 Lindeman Island, Cumberland

Group; QM. J7801, Archer River, Cape York Peninsula: A.M, J230 Cardwell

(holotype of H. rostralis De Vis); S.A.M. R2969-2970, Port Douglas; MM,

R427, Wndeavour River (holotype of I/, longipes Macleay); M.M, R462-464, Cape

Crenyille (types of A. sexdentatus Macleay).

Variation: Midbody seales in 32 rows (3 specimens), 34 rows (12 speei-

mens) or 36 rows (9 specimens), Dorsal seales obtusely trikeeled, tristriated, or

perfeetly smooth; oecasional quinquecarinate scales on the nape. Four upper

labials (five in A.M. R13584) anterior to the suboeular, Ear opening vertically

oval, of similar size and shape to the horizontally oval palpebral disk; auricular

lobules very variable, varying from 3-5 short, acute lobules on the anterior

border and 1-2 large but obtuse lobules on the posterior border to numerous

seute lobules on all borders. Six or seven supraciliaries; 27-32 lamellae beneath

the fourth toe.

In the Arnhem Land speeimens the dorsal eolonring is dark brown to

olive without any sign of dorso-lateral markines in either juvenile or adult

speciniens, while in the Queensland material faint indication of a black dorso-

lateral stripe is evident on the neck of several small specimens, and the dorsal

rolour has faded to grey in the long-preserved material,

Discussion: The presence or absence of dorso-lateral markings has been

used as # key character for the separation of the eastern (fuscum vartegatum)

and western (/uscum fuscum) races in New Guinea. The Arnhem Land inaterial

uerees with the western race in possessing uniform dark brown dorsal and

78 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

lateral colouring, while those examined from islands in Torres Strait agree with

the eastern race, possessing a light-edged black dorso-lateral stripe extending

trom the ear to above the shoulder, and part or all the way along the body.

However, the task of satisfactorily stabilizing the subspecifie names in this species

is complicated by the Cape York Peninsula specimens, which have been described

under various names by Peters, Macleay and De Vis. This material is shown

to be intermediate between the New Cuinea races, the juvenile colour pattern

apreeing with the eastern race, while that of the adult is uniform as in the

western race.

Aeeepting the adult colouration as standard, all Australian mainland speci-

mens have been placed under fuscum fuscun, although some Cape York adults

no doubt show sign of the dorso-lateral markings, Should the markings proye

{o be present in the greater majority of adult skinks from the vieinity of Rock-

hampton, schmelizii Peters (1867) may he considered to hold priority over

variegdtum Macleay (1877) for the eastern race.

The type specimens of schmelizii, maculatus, rubricatus, and the two smallest

specimens of the serdentatus types (MLM. R463-464) appear to have possessed

some dorso-lateral markings.

A re-examination of Q.M, J230, the holotype of JTeternpus rastralis De Vis

indicates that the name should be placed in the svnonomy of fuseum rather

than that of rhomboidalis, to which it was doubtfully referred by Boulenger

(1887, p. 285). De Vis (1887, p. 822) also recognized this, but retained rostralis

on the grounds of its possessing strongly compressed toes. The dehydrated con-

dition of the type specimen leaves doubt as to the value of this character.

LEIOLOPISMA ruUsoUM VARTmGATUM (Macleay ).

Teteropus variegatus Macleay, 1877, p. 66.

ITeteropus quinquecarinatus Macleay, 1877, p. 67.

Helerapus cheverli Macleay, 1877, p. 67.

Teteropus luetuosus Peters and Doria, 1874, p. 364.

Lygosoma atragulare Ogilby, 1890, p. 94.

Lygosoma nigrigulare Boulenger, 1897, p. 700, pl. vii, fig. 3.

Leiolopisma pullum Barbour, 1911, p. 15.

Leiolopisma fuscum diquliense Kopstein, 1926, p. 88,

Specimens examined: M.M. R384-385, Barrow Island, Queensland (type

specimens of J. cheverti Macleay); M.M. R889-391, Darnley Island, Torres

Strait (type specimens of MH. variegatus Macleay); M.M. R422-426, Darnley

MITCHELL—FOUR-FINGERED SPECIES OF LEIOLOPISMA 79

Island, Torres Strait (type specimens of M7. quinguecurinutus Macleay); QM,

41509, Darnley Island, Torres Strait; (Q.M. J6438, Yorke Island, Torres Strait:

6445, Prince of Wales Island, Torres Strait.

Variation and Discussion, This race is not readily distinguishable tron (he

type race on structural characters, although the present material suggests that

it may possess a lower average of midbody scales and subdivital lamellae. This

series shows # variation of 32 midbody seales (4 specimens), 34 midbody scales

(10 specimens), 36 midbody seales (1 specimen) ; subdigital lamellae beneath

fourth toe, 24-80, Dorsal seales weakly triecarinate; a few faintly quinque-

carinate seales in the quinguecurinatus type series.

Colouration constant; markings less prominent in the fully adult speci-

mens. The longitudinal stripes in the dorso-lateral rewioi provide the only

stire Means of identifying this race without knowledge of the locality.

Loveridge (1948, p, 309, 361) was unable to diavnose the positions of varie-

galus, quinquecarinatus and cheverti from Macleay’s short deserviptions ancl

therefore accepted luctuosus Peters and Doria (1878) as holding priority for

this race, Lowever, the present examination indicates all tliree of Macleay 's

names lo be synonynious with /uefwosus aid hold priority over it. /eteropus

schmeltzi (Peters, 1867) could hold priority for this race il Roelshampton

skinks are shown to consistently retain their dorso-lateral markings to adulthood,

(See diseission on the type race.)

OF the /. variegatus type series, M.M, R390 has been ehosen us lectotype

and the following detuil compiled trom it to supplement the type deseription.

Axilla to groin jeasurement 14 times the forelimb) to tip of snout Jeneth; when

the limbs ave adpressed along the body the fourth toc reaches the elhow. Mid-

body scales in 32 rows; dorsals and laterals weakly tricarinate. Har opening

vertically oval, its vertieal diameter bee equal to the horizontal diameter of

the palpebral disk, whieh is half that of the ocular slit. three acute auricular

lobules present on the anterior border, The fourth of seven upper labials

larvest, subocular; four supra-oenlars; seven or eight supra-ciliaries, Length

of the frontal equal to that of the fronto-parietal; internasal-frontal suture

equal to one-quarter the internasal-rostrnl suture, Subdigital lamellae formula

for hind limb, 16,27,18,14,8. No markedly enlarved anal scales.

Dorsal colour fawn, with a white-edeed black dorso-lateral stripe com-

mencing behind the eye and extending from above the ear lo the showlder and

along the body to the hind limb, becoming less prominent posteriorly. The

light lower border of the stripe passes through the ear.

Measurements: 128 (46 4+ 82) mm.

80 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

All three of the type specimens possess 32 midbody seales aud 26 or 27

lamellae beneath the fourth toe,

The abovementioned J/. variegatus types and those of IZ, quinquecarinatus

appear to represent the juvenile and adult respectively of the Darnley Island

poptlation of this race. In two of the five //. quinquecorinatus types oceasional

scales could be considered quinquecarinate, but by far the greater majority

are obtusely tricarinate, and except for the less prominent dorso-lateral stripes

and the inconstaney of the upper labials, M.M. R422 possessing five labials

anterior to the subocular on both sides and M.M, R425 on one side, these speci-

mens show no features whieh could be used to separate them from the sub-

adult I. variegatus types. The largest specimen, M,M, R422, measures 130+

(69 + 65+) mm.

The Barrow Island lizards deseribed as H. cheverti by Macleay show similar

variation, M.M. R384 measuring 132 (48 + 89) mm., possessing the dorso-

lateral markings, while in M.M. R385 measuring 118+ (57 + 61+-) mm. the

dark stripe is only visible for a limited distance on the neck.

Loveridee (1948, p, 363) has keyed two additional races of this species,

jamnanum Loveridge trom Janna Island, Dutch New Guinea, and beccart

(Peters and Doria) from Kei Islands, Dutch Hast Indies. In addition, he

suevests that leucotaenia (Bleeker, 1860) from Ceram will prove to be a fifth

race (? — schlegelii (Peters, 1864) trom Amboyna and Timor).

LEIOLOPISMA VERTEBRALIS (De Vis).

Fig. 1.

Heteropus vertebralis De Vis, 1888 (1887), p. 821.

Lygosoma mundivense Broom, 1897, p. 643.

Lygasoma waite Zietz, 1920, p, 211 (nom, noy, for vertebralis as preoccupied in

Lyqosoma).

Specimens examined. Queensland: Q.M. J248, Chinchilla, Darling Downs

(one of the type series); Q.M. 34408, Townsville; 5.A.M. R2967-2968, Lrvine-

bank; SAM, R2058, R2966, Kaban,

From a comparison of its type description with the present material,

Lygosoma mundivense Broom would appear to be synonymous with vertebrals.

().M, 1248, one of the type series forwarded for examination trom the

(Jueeusland Museum, has been designated the lectotype, and the following data

and fig. 1 compiled from it. Midbody scales 1 40 rows; four lower labials

MITCHELL—FOuR-FINGERED SPECIES OF LEIOLOPISMA 81

anterior to the subocular; four supraoculars and sever supra-ciliaries. Dorsal

and lateral scales mostly biearinate, but with oceasional tri- and quadvicarinate

scales, particularly towards the nape. Subdivital lamellae constant, 23 ur 24

beneath fourth toe of the lectotype and 22-24 for the remainder of the material

examined, Ear opening a little shorter than the (vansparent palpebral clisk,

alinost round, with short acute lobules on all borders, the one or two on the

anterior border being most prominent. The snout of this species is sttonely

depressed (see fig, 1),

Fig. 1. Lejolopismu vertehratin (De Vis); dorsal and lateral views of the head of the

lectotype (Q.M. J248),

Mr. G, Mack of the Queensland Museum kindly forwarded the following

data on the remaining four specimens of the type series, “‘Dorsals bi-, tri- and

quadricarinate, each keel being entire; laterals mostly bicarinate, but some tri-

carinate. Midbody scales in 23 rows (3 specimens) or 24 rows (1 Specimen) ;

lamellae beneath the fourth toe 23 (3 specimens) or 24 (1 specimen).”’

The overall variation noted for the species is; midbody seales in 38 rows

(5 specimens), 39 rows (2 specimens) or 40 rows (3 specimens); lamellar

formula for the hind limb, 15-16, 22-24, 17-18, 13-14, 8; there is some variation in

the percentage of tricarinate seales in the lateral region of the body,

The basic colouring of the recently collected South Australian Museum

specimens is blue-green with the irreeular darker patterning in the dorso-lateral

and lateral regions defining a uniformly coloured vertebral stripe, comprising

two adjacent series of pale blue scales, Ventral surfaces uniform pale blue.

RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

LEIOLOPISMA COENSE Sp. Nov.

Fig, 2.

Leiolapisma vertebralis Loyeridge (nee. De vis), 1984, p. 361,

Types: Holotype, M.C.Z. 37171 and one paratype, M.C.4Z. 87170. Both

specimens were collected at Coen in Northern Queensland by P. -J. Darlington in

May, 1932.

Diagnosis. Midhbody seales in 36 or 38 rows; dorsal and lateral scales weakly

tricarinate, each keel being broken up into a series of points (see fig. 4). hitth

upper labial largest, suboeular; palpebral disk a little ymaller than the ear

opening, which has 4 or 5 short rounded lobules on the anterior border, Sub-

digital lamellae of 4th toe, 30-32.

Fig. 2. Leiolopiame coense sp. noy.: dorsal and lateral views of the head of the holotype

(M.C.Z, 37171).

Type description. Distance between the tip of the snout and the forelimb

equal to that between the axilla and groin; when the hind limb is adpressed

along the body the fourth toe reaches the axilla. Fronto-parietal single, inter-

parietal distinet; prefrontals separated by a distance a little less than half the

length of internasal-rostral suture, Four supra-oculars, seven or eight supra-

ciliaries; one pair of enlarged nuchals; seven upper labials, fifth largest,

subocular, Transparent palpebral disk a little smaller than the ear opening,

which has four short rounded lobules anteriorly. Body scales in 38 longitudinal

rows at midbody; dorsals and laterals weakly trikeeled, each keel being broken

into a series of points, Digits slender, lamellar formula for hind limb, 20, 30,

25, 17, 10.

MITCHELL—FourR-FINGERED SPECIES OF LEIOLOPISMA 83

The dorsal colowving is dark choeolate brown with five longitudinal series

of light blue rectangular spots, an almost continuous middorsal series, one

oxtending from the posterior border ot each eye along the body above the limbs

fo & point approximately one third the way along the tatl and one from each

ear 10 the forelimb and along the side to the groin. ‘The dorso-lateral stripes are

continuous on the nape but break up on the body. Ventral surfaces near white.

The holotype measures 107 (42 + 65) mm.—tail complete, but damaged,

Poratype variation, Unfortunately, the paratype specimen is badly erushed

about the head, but. the sealation detail discernible indieates that it agrees closely

with the holotype, Midbody seales in 36 loneitudinal rows, each dorsal seale

possessing three of the characteristically broken keels. The subdivital lamellae

vary a little, the lamellar formula for the hind limb in M.C\Z% 87170 being

22, 32, 24, 18, 10. The size, shape and prominence of the auricular opening and

lobules are constant, while the only sienifieant variation in the colour pattern

is a slight difference in the continuity of (he middorsal stripe.

Affinities. Loveridge (1934, p. 361) confused this species with vertebralis

De Vis, from which it differs in the nature and constancy of the trikeeling, larger

size of the ear with less prominent lobules, greater ntunber of subdigital lamellae

and in colouration,

LEIOLOPISMA TRTRADACTYLA (O *‘Shauchnesay ).

Mocoe tetradactyla O’Shaughn., 1879, p. 300.

Specimens examined, (.M. 12631-2632, Toowoomba, south-eastern Queens-

land.

Variation. The two specimens examined possess thirty smooth seales at

midbody. Pretrontals contacting on the midline or forming a short median

suture, Ear opening small, oval: vertieal diameter equal to half the horizontal

diameter of the palpebral disk, which is equivalent to one third the leneth of

the ocular slit. One large aurieular lobule anteriorly and small dentictlarions

on each side. Limbs short, stout, the hindlimb lamellar formula for these

specimens being 12-13, 18-21, 14-16, 11-13, 7,

LelOLOPISMA MACCOORYI (Ramsay and Osilby ),

Lygosoma maccooeyi Ramsay and Ogilby, 1890, p. 8,

Specimens examined, Q.M, 17775-7777, Dubho, New South Wales.

Variation. Body scales smooth, in 30-32 rows at midbody, Ear opening

small, round, without obvious lobules; much smaller than the palpebral disk.

Prefrontals and nasals separated. The subdigital lamellae vary as follows:

hindlimb formula 13-14, 21-23, 16, 11-12, 8; forelimb formula 7-9, 12-14, 14-16,

9-10.

8+ RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Lrrouorisma pigaminaTum (Macleay).

Heteropus bicarinatus Macleay, 1877, p. 68.

Helcropus albertisti Peters and Doria, 1878, p. 362.

Leivlopisnue albertisti Barbour, 1914, p. 204.

Leiolopisma peronti Barbour (nec. Dumeril and Bibron), op. ett.

o-7

Specimens examined. Queensland, Q.M. J7779, Dunk Island, Rockingham

Bay; §.A.M. R2877, R2973, R2983, Cairns; S.A.M. R274, R2979, 2980,

R2985-2987, Palm Beach, near Cairns; S.A.M, 82976, Port Douglas.

Variation. Midbody seales in 30 or 32 longitudinal rows; each dorsal and

lateral seale strongly bicarinate, the keels forming longitudinal lines alona the

body. War opening almost round, diameter equal to or a little smaller than

tle mean diameter of the palpebral disk; with numerous acute lobules on all

borders. Four labials anterior to the subocular. Lamellar formula for the

hind limb, 15, 28-80, 19-20, 13-14,, 7-2.

A black-edeed pearl-white dorso-lateral line commencing at a point above

the ear in line with the supraciliary ridge and continuing along the body to

above the hind limb is prominent in three of the specimens from Cairns and.

the one from Port Douelas, but is very faint or absent in all other material

examined, The white line follows a single longitudinal series of scales, keeping

between the two keels.

LeroLorisMA RHOMBOTDATAS (Peters),

Heteropus rhomboidalis Peters, 1869, p. 446.

Specimens examined, Queensland: Q.M. J2493, S.A. R2965, R2989,

Innisfail; Q.M, -17785-7787, Herbert River Gorge; S.A.M. R2959, R2962, Tully;

8 AM. R2960-2961, R2963-2964, Lake Hacham; S.A.M. R2987, Mount Hypi-

pawea.

This species is readily distinguishable from its allies by the fusion of the

frontoparictals and interparietal into a single rhomboidal shield.

Variation. Midbody seales weakly tricarinate; in 32 or 34 longitudinal rows

at midbody. Palpebral disk approximately equal in size to the ear opening,

which has two or three short rounded lobules anteriorly. Subdigital lamellae

somewhat irregular, the hind lituh formula varying 15-17, 28-28, 18-21, 11-12, 7

in the specimens examined.

Some evidence of a light dorso-lateral line is evident in all specimens, the

line generally starting behind the eye and fading into the basic body eolouring

about half-way along the body. In this species the line is approximately one

seale wide, and runs between two series of seales, each seale being half white.

MiTCHELL—FOUR-FINGERED SPECIES OF LEIOLOPISMA 85

LEIOLOPISMA NOVARGUINEAR (Meyer).

Lygosoma (Carlia) Novac Guineae Meyer, 1875, p. 132.

Lygosoma laeve Oudemans, 1894, p. 144.

Lygosoma acratum Barbour, 1901, p. 7.

Specimens exumined. Queensland: Q.M. J7791-7792, Iron Range, Cape

York Peninsula; S.A,M. R2972, Palm Beach, neay Cairns.

Variation. Midbody seales in 22-26 longitudinal rows: dorsal and lateral

scales perfectly smooth. Ear opening smaller than the palpebral disk, but yari-

able in both size and shape: in 8.A.M. R2972 it is surrounded by long acute

lobules almost concealing the opening, as in aeratum, while in the Tron Range

specimens only one obtuse lobule is present on the anterior border.

Faint signs of a dark-edged light dorso-lateral stripe are evident on the

anterior half of the body in the two Iron Range specimens.

LEIOLOPISMA vivAx (De Vis).

Heteropus peronit Dumeril and Bibron, 1839, p. 760 (suppressed as a homonytm

in the genus Lygosome).

Myophila vivaz De Vis, 1884, p. 77,

Heteropus blackmanni De Vis, 1885, p, 168.

Specimens examined. Northem Territory (Arnhem Land): U.S.N.M,.

128507-128510, Milimgimbi Island, Crocodile Islands; U.S.N.M. 128257, Niehit-

cliff, near Darwin; A.M. RL35S85 (4 specimens), RI3586 (4 specimens), Cape

Arnhem.

Queensland: Q.M. -J7803, Noosa Heads, south-eastern Queensland; Q.M.

35640-5641, Lindeman Island, Cumberland Group; Q.M. J7772, Low Islands;

Q.M. 7780-7781, Stannary Mills near Herberton; Q.M. J6328, 16332, Toogeom,

via. Torbanlea, North Maryborough; Q.M. J1308, Mount Coot-tha; Q.M. 17773,

“No data, but probably one of the type series of blackmanni De Vis,’’ which

were collected at Port Curtis.

Variation, The Arnhem Land speciinens displayed the following variation:

Dorsal scales sharply bicarinate, becoming smooth or obtusely tri- or quadri-

carinate on the nape. Midbody seales in 28 rows (2 specimens), 30 vows (6

Specimens) or 32 rows (4 specimens )—only the L.S.NJM. and S.A.M, specimens

counted. Prefrontals narrowly separated or making point contact in the majority

of specimens, but forming a definite median suture in two of the Groote Eylandt

skinks, Interparietal very small; a single pair of enlarged nuchals. Seven

86 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

upper labials, fifth subocular. Ear opening variable in size, usually only about

half the maximum diameter of the transparent palpebral disk; several short

lobules anteriorly. The position of the posterior suture of the second supra-

ocular is variable; this scale makes point contact with the frontal in several

specimens. The frontal is fused with the frontoparietal in U.S.N.M. 128440.

The subdigital lamellae counts show a variation of 22-26 for the fourth toe.

Metallic green to bronze dorsally with numerous, irregularly distributed,

black-edged ocelli, recalling those of Ablepharus lineo-ocellatus Dum. and Bibr.

Lateral surfaces light bronze; ventral surfaces white to pale blue; a black

reticulate patterning along the ventro-lateral surfaces and under the throat

of males.

The Queensland specimens examined showed similar variation, the signifi-

eant points being: Midbody scales in 28 rows (1 specimen), 30 rows (6 speci-

mens) or 32 rows (3 specimens); dorsal and lateral scales strongly bicarinate,

becoming tri- or quadri-carinate, towards the nape; in some specimens as many

as twelve distinct keels are present on the enlarged nuchals. Usually four labials

anterior to the subocular, but occasionally only three, and in J5641, five. Har

opening noticeably smaller than the palpebral disk; with one or two rounded

lobules anteriorly. The lamellar counts for the fourth toe are a little higher

than those recorded for the Arnhem Land specimens, varying from 25-28.

The general colouration is more uniform and less metallic; little or no sign

of the reticulate patterning in cither sex. A light lateral stripe is faintly visible

in three specimens.

LEIOLOPISMA PECTORALIS (De Vis).

Carlia melanopogon Gray, 1844, pl. vii, fig. 1 (homonym in the genus Lygosoma).

Heteropus lateralis De Vis, 1885, p. 168 (homonym in the genus Lygosoma).

Heteropus pectoralis De Vis, 1885, p. 169.

Heteropus mundus De Vis, 1885, p. 172.

Lygosoma devisii Boulenger, 1890, p. 79 (n.n. for lateralis De Vis as preoccupied

in the genus Lygosoma).

? Lygisaurus foliorum De Vis, 1884, p. 77.

Specimens examined. Northern Territory: U.S.N.M. 128764, Oenpelli;

U.S.N.M. 128528, Port Essington; S.A.M. R2696, R2699, R2703, Adelaide River;

Q.M. J2619-2620, J7789, Darwin.

Queensland: Q.M. J1414, Port Curtis (holotype of H. pectoralis De Vis);

Q.M. J234, North Pine River (holotype of H. lateralis De Vis); Q.M. J7782-7784,

“I

MttCGHELL— Four-FINGERED SPECIES OF LEIOLOPISMA 8

Stannary Hills, near Herberton; Q.M. J2462, Herbert River Goree; QAM. J6287,

36329, Toogoom, via Torbanlea, North Maryborough; Q.M, J2403, Magnetiv

Island, off Townsville; Q.M. J7774, Gregory River.

Unfortunately the type specimen of Lygixaurus fuliarwm De Vis eould not

be located in the Queensland Museum and therefore its position vemains in doubt.

Wig. 3. Drawings illustrating the middursal senles of (a) Leiolopisma vertebralis

(DeVis); (bh) Lefolopisma peetoralis (De Vis); («) Leiolapisma triacantha sp. nOov.5

and (d) Lelolopisma coonse Sp. tov.

Variation, Midbody scales in 26 rows (U.S.N.M, 128764), 28 rows (3 speci-

mens), 30 rows (11 specimens) or 32 rows (5 specimens). Four, oceasionally

five, upper labials anterior to the suboeular, five to seven supraciliaries. Mar

opening usually without prominent lobules, but one or two short rounded ones

are evident on the anterior border in several specimens. An average lamellar

formula for the hind-lim) is 14, 24, 19, 11, 7, the specimens examined showing a

variation of 22-29 in the number of lamellae beneath the fourth toe.

General colouration varying from uniform brown to erey-sreen with silver-

grey dorso-lateral and Ovcasionally lateral stripes. These longitudinal stripes

are discontinuous in the Adelaide River specimens,

Q.M, 16287 is a gravid female containing two eges. It tmneasures '5-++

(41 + 54+-) mm,— tail incomplete,

88 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Discussion. The specimens examined support the opinion of Loveridge

(1934, p. 363) that pectoralis De Vis and mundus De Vis are synonymous with

melanopogon Gray, and that this species shows wide variation in the prominence

of the keeling on its dorsal and ventral scales, as does its near ally, fuscum

Dumeril and Bibron. An examination of the type specimen of lateralis De Vis

(Q.M. J234) indicates that the name belongs in the synonomy of this species

rather than that of peronii Dumeril and Bibron (= vivax De Vis), to which

it was doubtfully referred by Boulenger (1887, p. 286).

The holotype of Heteropus pectoralis De Vis (Q.M. J1414) was also re-

examined and the following details were noted as being discrepant with the

type description. The midbody seales are in 30 and not 32 longitudinal rows

and there are eight upper and eight lower labials, five of the upper labials

being anterior to the subocular. The colouring of the type has faded beyond

recognition.

The type specimen of Heteropus mundus De Vis could not be located, but

Q.M. J7774 was identified by De Vis as belonging to this species. It corresponds

closely with De Vis’ short type description, differing from the type of pectoralis

in possessing only seven upper labials with four anterior to the subocular, and

in lacking the distinct trikeeling on the dorsal seales, the only evidence of this

being striations visible when the scales are viewed under oblique light. Mid-

body seales in 30 rows and subdigital lamellae 23-24 on the fourth toe in both

specimens.

LEIOLOPISMA TRIACANTHA Sp, Nov.

Holotype: S.A.M. R2697, a sub-adult male taken at Adelaide River, Northern.

Territory, and collected by Dr. R. V. Southcott, in June, 1948.

Paratypes: S.A.M. R2700, R2702, Adelaide River, Northern Territory; Q.M.

J7788, Darwin, Northern Territory.

Diagnosis. Midbody scales in 30 or 32 longitudinal rows, each dorsal seale

being strongly tricarinate and of characteristic form (see fig. 3). Ear opening

without obvious lobules; approximately two-thirds the horizontal diameter of

the palpebral disk.

This species appears to be most nearly allied to pectoralis, differing in the

nature of the dorsal scales and in possessing a median prefrontal suture.

Type description. Distance between the end of the snout and the forelimb

equal to that between the axilla and eroin. Adpressed hind limb reaches a

point between the axilla and the ear opening. Frontoparietal single; inter-

parietal distinct; prefrontals forming a median suture equal to one third the

MITCHELL—lourR-FINGERED SPECIES OF LEIOLOPISMA ay

internasal-rostral suture. Four supraoculars, second largest and forming sutures

with both frontal and fronto-parietal; six supraciliaries. Seven upper and

seven lower labials, the fifth upper labial largest and subocular. Ear opening

eveseent shaped, without obvious lobules on the anterior border, but with a

denticulate posterior cdge (see fig. 4); its horizontal diameter is two-thirds that

of the palpebral disk, One pair of enlarged nuchals and a pair of enlarged anal

scales present. Thirty-two vows of scales at midbody, the dorsals and laterals

being strongly tricarinate, some middorsals incipiently trienspid; ventral scales

mostly smooth although faint trikecling is evident in some ventro-lateral scales.

Vig. 4. Loeivlopisma trivcantha sp. uoy.; dovsal and lateral views of the holotype

(S.A.M. R2697),

Subdigital lamellae rounded, the hind- and fore-limb formulae being 14, 25, 17,

10, 7 and 11, 17, 15, 7 vespeetively. The reproduced section of the tail has

latevally expanded upper eaudals.

Measurements. 79 (386 + 438) mm.—tail reproduced.

Colour. The colourine of the type is irideseent blue-green dorsally will

irregularly distributed black-pointed scales, these being most nutherous on the

tail. Ventral surfaces pearl-white.

Variation. The paratypes show few differences from the type. Midbody

seales in 30 or 82 rows; 22-24 lamellae beneath the fourth toe. Seven or eight

upper labials with the fifth constantly suboeular; six ov seven supraciliaries.

Median prefrontal suture coustantly one-third the internasal-rostral suture,

90 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

SUMMARY.

The type specimens of certain species described by W. Macleay and ©. W.

De Vis have been re-examined and compared with 134 specimens from Queens-

land and Northern Territory in an endeavour to stabilize some of the scientific

names and synonymies of species in this group. Numerous changes are made

in the synonymies, and Leiolopisma coense and Leiolopisma triacantha are

described and figured as new species. The lectotype of Letolopisma vertebralis

(De Vis) is also figured.

A dichotomic key has been constructed for the Australian species and races,

REFERENCES: CITED,

Barbour, T., 1901, Proce. Mus. Comp. Zool., 39, p. 3.

Barbour, T., 1911, Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., 24, p. 15.

Barbour, T., 1914, Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., 27, p. 203,

Boulenger, G. A., 1885-1887, ‘Catalogue of Lizards in the British Museum,"’

London, Vols, 1-3.

Boulenger, G. A., 1890, Proc, Zool. Soc, p. 79.

Boulenger, G. A., 1897, Ann, Mus. Genova (2), xviii, p. 700, pl. vii, fig. 3.

Broom, R., 1897, Proc. Linn, Soc, N. 8S. Wales, xxii, p. 643.

Dumeril, A., and Biberon, G,, 1834-1854, Erp. Gen., i-ix.

(tray, J. E., 1844, Zool. '* Erebus and Terror,’ Rept., pl. vii, fig. 1.

Kopstein, F., 1926, Zool. Med, Leiden, p. 88.

Loveridge, A,, 1934, Bull, Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, lxxvii, No. 6, pp. 336-344.

Loveridge, A., 1948, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., ci, No. 2, pp. 305-430.

Macleay, W., 1877, Proc. Linn. Soc., N.S. Wales, ii, pp. 63-67.

Meyer, A., 1874, WB. Akad. Berlin, pp. 128-140.

O'Shaughnessy, A, W. E., 1879, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist, (5), iv, p. 300.

Oudemans, J. T., 1894, Mem. Soc. Zool. France, vii, p. 144.

Peters, W., 1867, Monatsh. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, p. 710.

Peters, W., 1869, Monatsh, Akad. Wiss, Berlin, p. 607.

Peters, W., and Doria, G., 1878, Ann. Mus. Genova, xiii, p. 364.

Ramsay, E. P., and Ogilby, J. D., 1890, Ree. Austral. Mus., i, p. 8.

Vis, C. W. de, 1884-1885, Proc. Roy. Soc., Qld., i, pp. 77, 169-172,

Vis, C. W. de, 1887-1888, Proc. Linn. Soc., N.S, Wales (2), ii, pp. 820-824.

Vis, C, W. de, 1888, Proc. Roy. Soc. Qld., v, p. 160.

Zietz, F’, R., 1920, Rec. S. Austral. Mus., i, pp. 181-228.

RECORDS

OF THE

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Vol. XI, No. 2

Published by The Museum Board, and edited by the

Museum Director

Apg.aipg, May 28, 1954

PRINTED AT THE HASSELL PRESS, 104 CURRIE STREET

MATERIAL CULTURE OF AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINALS

PART 1: PROGRESSIVE MODIFICATION OF A STONE ARTEFACT

PART 2: INCISED STONES FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY H. M. COOPER, ASSISTANT IN ETHNOLOGY, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

This paper discusses briefly, in part 1, the diminution in size and alteration in shape of the Tula and

other closely related adze-stones of the Australian aboriginals, resulting from wear and re-trimming.

Mention is made of the important bearing which the relative abundance and scarcity of material,

suitable for their manufacture, appears to have upon the numerical extent of their occurrence.

Reference is also made to the subsequent improvization of an implement, differeing in form from

the original, fashioned from apparently discarded worn examples of suitable shape. In part 2 Incised

Stones from the Artipena and Yudnapunda Hoards are described, together with a brief but general

discussion regarding their possible use and significance, both of which continue to remain

indeterminate. A series of drawings, illustrating examples of their characteristic pattern markings, is

shown.

MATERIAL CULTURE or AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINALS

Part 1. PROGRESSIVE MODIFICATION OF A

STONE ARTEFACT

Part 2. INCISED STONES FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By H. M. COOPER, Assisranr in Eruno.ocy, Sourn Ausrratian Museum.

Fig. 1-26.

SUMMARY.

THIS paper discusses briefly, in part 1, the diminution in size and alteration

in shape of the Tula and other closely related adze-stones of the Australian

aboriginals, resulting from wear and re-trimming. Mention is made of the

important bearing which the relative abundance and scarcity of material, suit-

able for their manufacture, appears to have upon the numerical extent of their

occurrence. Reference is also made to the subsequent improvization of an imple-

ment, differing in form from the original, fashioned from apparently discarded

worn examples of suitable shape. In part 2 Incised Stones from the Artipena

and Yudnapunda Hoards are described, together with a brief but general

discussion regarding their possible use and significance, both of which continue

to remain indeterminate. A series of drawings, illustrating examples of their

characteristic pattern markings, is shown.

Part 1.

Adze-stones, semi-discoidal in shape, differing but little in technique of

manufacture and design, may be found upon abandoned native camp-sites in

many parts of Australia; some, in fact, continue to be made and employed in

the more remote and isolated parts of the Continent where the Stone Age culture

of primitive man persists amongst groups of our surviving aboriginals.

The zenith of master craftsmanship attained in the production of this type

of implement, represented by the true Tula adze-stone industry, appears to

have existed in certain portions of the Lake Eyre Basin, including the territories

formerly occupied by the Wongkanguru, Dieri and neighbouring tribes. Variously

coloured cherts, jasper, agate, porcellanite, fine-grained quartzites and other

products of these and adjoining arid regions—all of which produce an excellent

92 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

conchoidal fracture when struck—provide material worthy of association with

so skilful a culture.

Horne and Aiston (1924) introduced the word ‘‘Tuhla’’ in order to

describe this beautifully made implement, but subsequently the spelling was

altered to ‘‘Tula’’ by Hale and Tindale (1930) as being more in consonance

with the phonetic system.

Fig. 1, illustrating a typical example of the Tula adze-stone, shows little

if any evidence, either in its shape or form, of wear from use and necessary

re-trimming; it may be regarded, therefore, as a specimen in almost new condi-

tion. The head or working edge, situated upon the upper surface of the imple-

ment (at the opposite end to the base which, in all cases, is also the point of

pereussion), is stoutly convex in section in order to anticipate provision for

future wear, and shows strong edge and associated stepped trimming; the remain-

der of the periphery being secondarily trimmed in most cases but to a lesser

degree. The flake, which upon its under or nether side is comparatively flat,

as the drawings indicate, was detached from the parent core by means of a

single fracture and needed no further trimming upon that surface.

The adze-stone of the Australian aboriginals was mounted in and held

securely by a mass of gum at the extremity of a comparatively short, stout

wooden stick, about 50-60 em. in length, and also at the handled end of certain

spear-throwers, more especially the broad-bladed type of Central Australia.

When removing the adze-stone for sharpening and further trimming or reset-

ting, the process was simplified by softening the gum. Such adze-stones,

including the Tula, mounted in this manner, were employed when in operation

similarly to the handled European metal adze, that is, with a chopping motion

directed towards the operator. They were highly efficient in the hands of a

skilled native craftsman and capable of producing beautiful work. Food vessels,

shields, spear-throwers, boomerangs, spears, clubs, digging sticks and tjurungas,

besides the many other domestic, hunting, fighting and ceremonial impedimenta,

all so essential in the every-day life of the aboriginals of Australia, both in camp

and afield, were fashioned with the aid of this very effective implement.

Horne and Aiston (1924) remark that during the process of shaping a

boomerang the native tradesman trims the Tula from time to time as its edge

becomes blunted, by means of a hammerstone, until it is discarded and a fresh

implement inserted in the gum. A good Tula, they add, was capable of fashion-

ing at least two boomerangs.

In consequence of continued use and the resultant symmetrical re-sharpening

of the working edge to compensate for it, the Tula is gradually but evenly

COOPER—MATERIAL CULTURE OF AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINALS 93

on ae

Pa a,

ia Seen

’ ..

7 *

‘ ‘

’ s

F, *

od BA

. s

’

’ A

‘

r} 1

H '

c .

1 ‘

t ca

q a

‘ a

‘ cd

. e

q4 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

diminished in size and shape in the direction of its base, as shown in fig. 2-6, until

it finally attains that state of diminution where it is no longer practical to

embed it firmly in the gum or continue its employment economically. The

apparently deliberate use of discarded exanrples, such as shown in fig. 6, for

conversion into a new design is referred to later in this paper,

Semi-diseoidal adge-stones of the Tula and closely related types appear

to have been especially dominant in certain specific but often widespread locali-

ties such as the Far North of South Australia, including the Lake Eyre Basin,

areas around Stuart's Creek, Areoona, portions of Central Australia, South-

Western Queensland, Western New South Wales, South-Hast of South Australia

and parts of Yorke’s Peninsula in the vicinity of Moonta and Black Point.

The retention of Tulas for as long as possible, particularly those made from

the more highly prized material, is clearly shown by the presence of large

quantities of worn specimens found strewn upon many now long-abandoned

camp-sites, The relative scarcity or abundance of suitable material appears to

have asignificant bearing upon the ratio of discarded to still serviceable examples.

The three analyses which follow, in association with comparable ratios from

other sites, tend, perhaps, to confirm this theory.

An examination of material secured recently upon an extensive camp-site

previously unnoticed at Oolarinna Waterhole, west of Oodnadatta, by an

experienced collector, included the following:

Tula adze-stones, approximating fig. 1 and 2.. 4, ale ka 74

Eyenly worn examples, sueh asin fig. 3-6 r, = .. 892

A small number of specimens represented successive and intermediate

stages of wear. These figures appear to indicate that material in certain locali-

ties was hiehly prized owing to diffieulty in replacement,

During the course of seven visits to Emu Springs, Wirrealpa Station, by

the present writer, 279 adze-stones, many showing no more than partial but

very irreewlar diminution in size and shape due to use, were secured, together

with only 29 evenly worn, trimmed examples, such as shown in fig. 3-6. The

presence of an extensively worked near-by native ‘‘stone quarry,’' and in eon-

sequence the abundance of suitable roek, would appear to aceount for both

the scarcity of totally worn symmetrically re-trimmed examples and the presence

of so many implements apparently rejected early in their lives, in preference

to adjusting the effeets of wear by ineans of further trimming and consequent

rejuvenation.

Tixtensive cantp-sites in the Sotth-RHast of South Australia provide an

additional significant indication of what could be termed an example, primitive

COOPER—-MATERIAL CULTURE OF AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINALS 95

——

“ai

Ess

Oks

)

AN ye

Sa At

4) na

96 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

it is true, of the application of a law of supply and demand in its simplest form.

Although the collection from that area in the South Australian Museum embraces

several hundred examples of semi-discoidal adze-stones, no symmetrically re-

trimmed worn types, such as fig. 3-6 denote, could be found with the exception

of one specimen from Woakwine Range, possibly wrongly labelled. There exist,

however, in this collection, several thousand adze-stones from the same area

worn by use to an irregular and only moderately reduced size and then ap-

parently discarded, an inexhaustible supply of local flint, excellent in its texture,

rendering any need for prolonging their usefulness by symmetrical trimming

unnecessary.

The absence here of highly-worn re-trimmed examples might indicate, per-

haps, in addition, that to the skilled craftsman the fashioning of new implements

where material was easily available for replacement purposes, was a labour of

little consequence. The presence of many partly worn adze-stones of similar

irregular shape at Emu Springs, with its abundance of local stone, may be

comparable in its inference.

The existence, therefore, of large quantities of adze-stones, carefully and

progressively re-trimmed to the utmost limit of their useful life, upon certain

camp-sites, provides an interesting example of practical economy, dictated, not

by choice, but by stern necessity.

Some collectors, influenced perhaps by the symmetrical shape of trimming

applied to examples reduced in size, step by step, owing to wear, such as shown

in fig. 3 and 4, have inclined towards the belief that they may represent a totally

different type of implement to the semi-discoidal adze-stone. However, a careful

examination of many hundreds of specimens gradually reduced in dimensions

down to fig. 6, including some still mounted in situ at the gummed ends of their

wooden handles, appears to indicate without doubt that all represent suc-

cessively worn stages of original forms such as shown in fig. 1.

Tulas and other types of implements, fashioned from the more highly prized

material such as cherts, porcellanite, jasper and fine-grained quartzites, may

be found upon camp-sites far distant from their nearest natural source of supply,

doubtless reaching their various destinations, along with other bartered pro-

ducts, by way of the elaborate network of trade routes then existing. Where

suitable local stone was non-existent, they represented, therefore, the only

material available, and even when rock of an inferior nature was obtainable

near-by the traded examples of superior quality were employed as a welcome

addition to supplement it. The presence of cores and blocks of such traded

stone upon certain camp-sites suggests that the unfinished raw product was

secured by ‘‘importation’’ additionally to the completed article.

COOPER—MATERIAL CULTURE OF AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINALS 97

Although an examination of over one thousand worn adze-stones in the

South Australian Museum collection appears to convey the impression that most

specimens, upon attaining the state depicted in fig. 6 were finally discarded as

no longer economically or practically efficient, a comparatively small proportion

of the requisite shape appears to have been retained and adapted to a further

period of usefulness by transformation, with considerable skill and improyiza-

tion, into long end-serapers, Such implements, shown in fig. 7-11, would per-

form admirably in producing the beautifully symmetrical scribing, grooving

and fluting with which the natives in some districts delighted to adorn and

decorate their food vessels, shields, spear-throwers, boomerangs and clubs,

A comparison of figured specimens 7 to 11, with typical examples of the

long end-seraper found so abundantly in association with them upon Far

Northern South Australian camp-sites, indicates, signifieantly, identical trim-

ming, and in consequence the possibility that both types may have been in use

conteniporaneously.

An examination of the relatively small collection of worn adze-stones from

Western New South Wales and South-West Queensland, possessed by the South

Australian Museum, is suggestive of the probable existence of this interesting

improvized implement in those and other areas.

Parr 2.

Tncised stones of unknown signifieance, such as illustrated in fig. 12-26,

were first referred to by Mountford (1938) and subsequently by Cooper (1947

and 1948). In the earlier of the papers by the latter, the writer expressed a

hope that, as a result of attention drawn to the existence of this interesting

material, definite proof might be forthcoming regarding its use and also some

information more clearly defining the localization or extension of their present

known occurrence—a realization which, unfortunately, has not been attained.

Litlle fresh evidence, therefore, is available for inclusion in this paper with

the exception of a description of the Artipena and Yudnapunda Hoards; certain

information, however, previously known regarding these incised stones, is added

in order to assist those unfamiliar with them. For a more detailed description

the reader is referred to Cooper (1947) wherein the figured drawings still ade-

quately represent the principal arrangements of incisings upon the specimens,

now increased from 70 to 200, including the Yudnapunda Hoard, lately trans-

ferred to the South Australian Museum,

With the exception of a few scattered examples, found in adjacent moun-

tainous vegions to the westward and south, the 200 known specimens were

98 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MusEUM

collected wpon former c¢amp-sites, amidst saltbush plains, lying in the area to

the south-westward of Lake Frome and east of the Flinders’ Ranges, more

especially in pastoral country situated within Martin's Well Station, along

sections of the Wilpena Creek and its tributaries. This district, the former home

of the Jadliauva Tribe, long since extinet, is typically arid in its aspect and

has a six-inch annual rainfall but is liable to severe and prolonged droughts.

The veeetation includes Mulga (leacia aneura), Black Oak (Casuarina cris-

tata), varions species of Saltbush (itripler) and other arid country planta.

Splendid specimens of the Red Gum (Eucalyptus camaldulensis) line the creeks,

more especinily in the vicinity of permanent waters, The district is drained

by several streams of considerable size, including Wilpena, Baleoracana and

Wirrealpa Creeks; all in times of infrequent Imt heavy flood carry immense

volumes of water into Lake Frome. During all other periods their channels,

with the exception of seattered permanent water-holes and springs situated in

their beds, are dry and parched, Many incised stones, ineluding the Artipena

and Yudnapunda Hoards, were found upon the banks of Wilpona Creek and its

network of tributaries,

Ineised Stones, with the exception of a few examples either vylindrical or

angular in shape, consist of small flat water-worn stones derived from fine-

grained silt-stones and silty clay shales, countless numbers of whieh exist in

the beds of local creeks and upon their banks. <All examples found bearing

incisines are of natural shape with no evidence of artificial trimming; they vary

in weight from + an ounce to 64 ounces, with an approximate average of 22

ounces.

Tim ARTIPENA Hoarp, Upon the banks of Artipena Water, situated in

the bed of Wilpena Creek, is an extensive eamp-site upon which have been

discavered, along with other material, large and primitive trimmed water-worn

pebble hand ¢hoppers, identical both in shape and technique of manufacture

with the archaeologieal Kangaroo Island Industry, referred to by Cooper (1943),

Numerous stone cooking hearths, extensively scattered in all directions, indicate

the existence in former times of an important native occupation. The Artipena

Hoard, comprising 19 specimens, was found within a small area upon this camp-

site. In addition, some interesting examples were discovered in scattered places

upon the banks of Artipena Water in association with various types of stone

implements; they include fig, 26. The arrangements of the incisinys, together

with those of the Yudnapunda Hoard, are referred to elsewhere in this paper.

Tur Yupwaponpa Hoarp. Yudnapunda Springs, situated just outside the

foothills of the Flinders’ Ranges in the bed of a small gui creek which later

joins Wilpena Creek, form a fine permanent water which, during the visit of

COOPER—MATERIAL CULTURE OF AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINALS 99

the present writer in company with a native station hand in 1950, when the

hoard was discovered, was flowing strongly for more than a quarter of a mile.

A former camp-site, somewhat scantily supplied with the larger and more primi-

tive stone implements such as trimmed cores and blocks and simple flakes, many

highly weathered and probably archaeological, was found upon its banks. :

The Yudnapunda Hoard of incised stones, including fig. 18-24, was scat-

tered upon the surface within an area having an estimated radius of 15 yards.

The total collected comprised 73 specimens of which 59 are broken and incom-

plete, and only two of these could be restored by re-construction to their original

form by means of their respective parts. It is impossible to determine whether

these restorable examples were already broken when deposited where found or

100 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

whether their present damaged state could be attributed to subsequent climatic

conditions. A careful search failed to locate any missing portions of the

remainder. The possible significance of the presence of so many broken examples

is referred to in a subsequent paragraph.

GENERAL DISCUSSION.

A casual or superficial examination of representative specimens of all the

incised stones under review may appear to convey an impression of purposeless

and haphazard markings, but upon closer inspection there is strong evidence of

preconceived and deliberate intention, interpreted by at least several clearly-

defined and alternatively utilized pattern markings. In order to examine these

markings more fully, the specimens figured in Cooper (1947) will assist. The

drawings in this present paper refer, necessarily, to material found in the two

hoards, which, unfortunately, is somewhat cireumscribed in the diversity of its

patterns.

The markings of the incised stones occur either upon one side only or upon

both, the totals in each case being approximately equal. In rare cases, such as

fig. 23 and 24, they are present, in addition, along the edges. The length,

direction and form of the lines, used in the production of the incisings generally,

comprise the following arrangements: long transverse lines, more or less parallel

but sometimes rarely in spaced groups such as fig. 19: very short transverse:

very short longitudinal. Extended longitudinal markings are uncommon and

consist chiefly of a single line as in fig. 19. These various lines are utilized in

producing certain patterns, some complex, of which the following are those

most frequently found: long transverse lines alone, as in fig. 12-15: short trans-

verse alone, fig. 21, second face: short longitudinal alone, fig. 24, second, third

and fourth faces: long transverse in association with short longitudinal, fig. 19

and fig. 24, first face.

Examples combining long and short transverse markings occur sparingly,

as also do patterns which associate long and short transverse coupled to short

longitudinal lines as in fig. 26, first face, and finally, a concurrence of short

transverse and short longitudinal, fig. 17 and 26, both second faces. In no case

has the present writer discovered an incised stone exhibiting long transverse

markings such as shown in fig. 12 to 15, upon both of its sides; the markings

upon the reverse surface of all these examples consisting, invariably, of short

transverse or longitudinal lines, either alone or in association.

Oceasional stones, such as fig. 22, exhibit dual or superimposed incisings,

COoPER—MATERIAL CULTURE OF AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINALS 101

one superficial and the other deeply eut, They appear to have been applied at

different periods, similarly to carved designs recorded wpon certain rock faces.

Figures 25 and 26, included to indicate the amount of incising involved in

unusual cases, illustrate, in addition, the patient application of their creator.

The various arrangements of incisings deseribed above, appear to be far

too deliberate in the constancy of their use to permit the investigator any thought

of rejecting the belief that they represent some very real intention of purpose.

Any definite conclusion or even assumption regarding the use or purpose

for which incised stones was intended, is hindered by the lack or almost complete

absence of corroborative evidence upon which to base a decision; the best, there-

fore, which can he attempted at the present time is to consider, perhaps, certain

tentatively possible uses to which this interesting culture were applied, The

present writer has been unsuccessful in tracing, amongst records regarding the

aboriginals of Australia, any reference relating to incised stones, similar to or

resembling those under discussion, with the exception of a single example to be

described later, and this could imply, in consequence, that they were not in

general use throughout the Contment at any time sinve the commencement of

the European oecupation. It is possible, therefore, that either they will be found

in a local and restricted area, where their use has passed unnoticed, such as their

incidence at the present time appears to suggest, or that the culture will prove

to be archaeological.

Of three specimens received by the South Australian Museum a consider-

able time ago, one is endorsed, somewhat vaguely: “' Message stone, sent from

one tribe to another with an aceampanying verbal message; Northern Flinders’

Range,’’ The use of wooden message sticks by some Australian. tribes is well

established and has heen referred to by several writers, including Roth (1901),

Howitt (1904) and R. Hamlyn-Harris (1918), but owing to much conflicting

evidence the actual significance of the markings is somewhat obscure. Tt.appears

probable, however, that the incisings upon the sticks, in many il uot all cases,

merely represent a tally or some general indication of the kind of message with

which the carrier has beer erttrusted, for delivery verbally in detail, and is,

in addition, a proof of his own hone fides. Despite the little similarity of the

markings upou the wooden message sticks, in comparison with incised stones,

the latter as regards convenience in transportation, at least resemble the former

in approximate length. Message sticks, however, are not comparable generally

in shape with incised stones, which, in addition, owing to the softness of the

material utilized, would be prone to damage when carried fram place to place.

The presence of countless numbers of flat stones, so readily available, identical

in shape and poorness of texture with examples selected for manufacture into

102 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

incised examples, probably influenced the natives in the selection of this material,

ease in securing it overriding the inferiority of its structure. This adverse condi-

tion alone, however, should not influence the observer unduly by dismissing the

possible use of the latter as ‘‘message stones.’’

The significant presence of so many broken examples amongst the Yudna-

punda Hoard, and other incomplete specimens secured upon an abandoned camp-

site near Wirrealpa homestead, together with the absence of the necessary broken

parts to reconstruct them, is the result of some unknown contributory cause; a

possible explanation could be damage whilst serving as a “‘message stone.”’

Tt is unfortunate that the only recorded information known to the present,

writer relating to the possible use of incised stones, is the vague record as stated

above, but since this particular specimen was found in the Northern Flinders’

Ranges—the source of several others—their employment as ‘‘message stones"!

to denote some unknown interpretation merits consideration.

In proposing any alternative uses, several suggestions, all problematical,

present themselves, such as some association with the social, cultural or cere-

monial fields. They could represent, perhaps, a primitive type of tjurunga or

possess some affinity with the mystifying cylindro-conical stones which some-

times bear similar markings, or finally, they may be phallic in their meaning.

The difficult problem which at the present time appears to surround the

origin and use of the Incised Stones of South Australia provides an interesting

and fascinating field for future investigation.

Loealities of the specimens figured are as follows:

1. Mern Merna.

2. Goolong Springs, 8.E. of Marree.

3. Stuart’s Range.

4. Muloowurtina.

5. Cooper’s Creek.

6. Callabonna.

7 to 11. Oolarinna Water-hole.

12 to 17. Artipena Water.

18 to 24. Yudnapunda Springs.

25. Artipena Water.

26. Salt Creek, Martin’s Well,

These drawings were made by one ot the South Australian Museum artists,

Miss M. P, Boyee, to whom best thanks are due.

COOPER—MATERIAL CULTURE OF AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINALS 103

REFERENCES CITED.

Cooper, H. M. (1943) : Records South Aust. Mus., Adelaide, vii, fig. 44, 62, 63, 79.

Cooper, H. M. (1947): Mankind, Sydney, iii, pp. 292-298, pl. AB, AC.

Cooper, H. M. (1948): South Aust. Nat., Adelaide xxv, pp. 1 and 4.

Hale, H. M. and Tindale, N. B. (1930) : Records South Aust. Mus., Adelaide, iv,

fig, 243, p. 208.

Hamlyn-Harris, R. (1918): Memoirs Qld. Mus., Brisbane, vi, pp. 13-36.

Horne, G. and Aiston, G. (1924): Savage Life in Central Australia, London,

p. 89, pp. 101-1038, fig. 74.

Howitt, A. W. (1904): The Native Tribes of South-East Australia, London,

p. 710.

Mountford, C. P. (1938): Victorian Nat., Melbourne, lv, pp. 144-146, fig. a-h.

Roth, W. E. (1901): North Queensland Ethnography, Brisbane, Bulletin 8, pp.

9-12, pl. 1-4.

FOUR NEW FISHES FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY TREVOR D. SCOTT, B.SC., MARINE BIOLOGIST, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

Four new species of fishes from South Australia are described and figured. Threpterius maculosus

Richardson and Trygonorrhina fasciata guanerius Whitley are redscribed, and keys are given for the

Urolophidae and Gobiesocidae, known to occur in South Australia.

FOUR NEW FISHES rrom SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By TREVOR D, SCOTT, B.Sc., Marine Biotocisr, Sourn Austratian Museum.

Plate xxii and text fig. 1-3.

SUMMARY,

Four new species of fishes from South Australia are described and figured.

Threpterius maculosus Richardson and Trygonorrhina fasciata guanertus Whit-

ley are redescribed, and keys are given for the Urolophidae and Gobiesocidae,

known to oceur in South Australia.

Famity UROLOPHIDAE.

This family contains one genus, Urolophus, characterized by the rather short

muscular tail, terminating in a well developed caudal fin. A small adipose

dorsal fin may be present or absent.

Key to tHE UROLOPHIDAE or Souru AustRAuia.

1. Dise broader than long oe bale bielege dll, «tort 2

Dise longer than broad nk ass shite ut «aie side bets 3

2. Nostrils with broad and prominent posterior lobes ga testaceus

Nostrils with small and inconspicuous posterior lobes _..... expansus

3. Spiracle of moderate size; dise with cruciform markings _..... cruciatus

Spiracle very large, more than twice as long as eye, disc spotted

gigas sp. nov.

Genus Urotornts Muller and Henle.

Urolophus Muller and Henle, 1836, p. 117 (Orthotype, Raja cruciata Lacepede).

UROLOPHUS GIGAS sp. nov.

Plate xxii,

Snout very obtusely pointed, disc oval, slightly longer than broad. Length

of dise 420 mm. (1-7), width 385 (1-8) in the total length 698 mm, Skin

smooth. Eye small, length 14 (3-3) in the interorbital width 47. Spiracle very

large, length 29, width 18, projecting forward below to middle of eye. Tail

short and muscular, length 265. Width of tail 38 at posterior insertion of

106 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

ventrals. Preocular length 110, greater than preoral length 98. Width of

mouth 55, teeth small and flattened. Width of internasal valve 58. Ventral

fins rather short, length equal to width of mouth.

Adipose dorsal fin small, height 10, length of base 28. Spine originating

immediately behind posterior margin of dorsal fin. Origin of spine 112 from

tip of caudal fin. Last gill opening only slightly behind middle of pectoral

dise.

Colour. Central part of disc, tail and caudal fin dark brown, fading to

light brown pectoral flaps, margin of dise off-white. A pattern of small cream

spots bordering disc, passing along tail to the caudal fin. Spots aggregated

to form irregular circular markings covering parts of the disc. Ventral fins

bluish-grey. Ventral surface white, with a wide border coloured warm brown.

Described from a female specimen measuring 698 mm. total length, taken

January, 1952, at Port Noarlunga, South Australia. Type in South Australian

Museum, Reg. No. F2744.

Famity RHINOBATIDAE.

Body, head and tail depressed. Dise broad behind, tapering anteriorly.

Orbit with low fold below eye and projecting shield above pupil. Teeth small,

numerous, in pavement-like formation. Nostrils oblique. Spiracles large, close

to eye. Tail muscular, wide at base, with two dorsal fins, moderate to small

caudal. Pectorals extend opposite gill openings, but not on snout.

Genus TRYGONORRHINA Muller and Henle.

Trygonorrhina Muller and Henle, 1938, p. 90. (Logotype, 7’. fasciata Muller

and Henle).

TRYGONORRHINA MELALEUCA sp. nov.

Snout obtusely pointed, rather short, slightly longer than interorbital width.

Skin velvety. A row of thirteen spinous tubercles on median line of back,

between eyes and first dorsal fin. Two more between first and second dorsals.

Two rows of four tubercles situated two on either side of median line, and in

line with second and third median tubercles. No tubercles near eye as in

fasciata. Pectoral dise slightly narrower than long, its length 360 mm. (2-5)

in the total length, 890 mm. Width of dise 338 (2-6) in the total length. Length

of eye 23 (3-0) in interorbital width, 69.

Preocular length 92, slightly longer than preoral length, 90. Mouth large,

transverse, its width 72 (1-25) in preoral length. Teeth small, surfaces smooth

Scott—Four NEW FISHES FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 107

and flattened, arranged in broad bands in upper and lower jaws. Width of

internasal valve 78, its margin entire. Length of spiracle equal to that of eye,

projecting forward below to middle of eye. Tail length 490, much longer than

body. Width of tail at posterior insertion of ventrals equal to that of inter-

nasal valve. Ventral fins entirely separate, length 150. Claspers longer than

ventral fins, length 180. First dorsal fin, height 70, longer than second dorsal,

height 65. Distance of first dorsal from origin of tail 105 (8-5) in total length.

Distance of second dorsal from origin of tail 245 (3-6) in total length. Last

gill opening only slightly behind middle of pectoral dise.

Fig. 1. Trygonohhrina melaleuca, holotype male from Kingscote, Kangaroo Island.

Colour. Outer margin of dise off-white. A diffuse bluish-black pattern

covering all of back and upper part of tail to caudal fin. Dorsal and caudal

fins off-white. Four dark grey bars at posterior end of disc, two on either side

of median line, in same position as bars on fasciata. Claspers with a black spot

on distal ends. Lower surface of body white.

Described from a male specimen measuring 890 mm. total length, taken

March, 1958, at Kingseote, Kangaroo Island, by Mr. BE. Sundberg, of Kingscote.

Type in South Australian Museum, Reg. No. F2769.

Differs from 7. fasciata guanerius (Whitley, 1932), the South Australian

subspecies, in the colouring and pattern, absence of tubercles near the eye,

smaller number of tubercles in the median line, and in general body proportions,

the tail being much longer in relation to the body in melaleuca.

108 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

TRYGONORRHINA FASCIATA GUANERIUS Whitley.

Trygonorrhina fasciata guanerius Whitley, 1932, p. 327.

Snout obtusely pointed, short, longer than interorbital width. A row of

seventeen spinous tubercles on median line of back, between eyes and first

dorsal fin. Two more between first and second dorsals. Two rows of four

tubercles situated on either side of median line as in melaleuca. Pectoral dise

broader than long, its width 374 mm. (2-3) in the total length, 864 mm. Length

of dise 357 (2-4) in the total length. Length of eye 24 (2-5) in interorbital

width, 61.

Preocular length 93, shorter than preoral length, 100. Mouth large, its

width 78 (1:3) in preoral length. Teeth very small, arranged in pavement-like

formation in upper and lower jaws. Width of internasal valve 83, its margin

entire. Length of spiracle equal to that of eye, projecting forward below to

middle of eye. Tail length 434, slightly longer than the body. Width of tail

at posterior insertion of the ventrals 74 mm. Ventral fins entirely separate,

length 156 mm.

First dorsal fin, height 88, longer than second dorsal, height 77. Distance

of first dorsal from origin of tail 66 (13-0) in total length. Distance of second

dorsal from origin of tail 182 (4-7) in total length. Last gill opening slightly

behind middle of pectoral disc.

Colour. Dise and tail brownish-grey. A number of grey bars edged with

dark brown forming a characteristic pattern on the disc as in Waite’s figure

(Waite, 1923, p. 47). Under surface white.

Described from a female specimen measuring 864 mm. total length, taken

February, 1954, in St. Vincent’s Gulf, South Australia. Specimen registered

F2843 at the South Australian Museum.

Famity CHIRONEMIDAE.

Genus THREPTERIUS Richardson.

Threptertus Richardson, 1850, p. 68 (Haplotype 7. maculosus Richardson).

THREPTERIUS CHALCEUS Sp. nov.

D. xv. 17-18. P. 14 A. iii. 7. V.i.5. C. 15-16. LL 47-48. L. t. 6:13.

Length of head 54 mm. (3:3), greatest depth of body 47 (3-8), greatest

width of body 27 (6-6) in the total leneth 177 mm. Snout 18 (3-0), eye 13

(4-1) in the head. Depth of caudal peduncle 14. Interorbital 9. Branchiostegal

rays 6. Gill rakers 16. Body slightly depressed anteriorly, compressed pos-

teriorly. Dorsal profile strongly convex behind eye, concave above eye. Eye

ScoTT—Four NEW FISHES FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 109

encroaches upon the dorsal profile. Mouth small, not extending back to the

eye. Lips thickened. Teeth small and conical, in several rows in front of

jaws, single row at sides. Vomer with a single row of similar teeth. Gill mem-

branes united across isthmus. Gill rakers short and numerous,. longest measuring

2-5 mm.

if fy

25 RAS UY, EBS he

Fig. 2. Threpterius chaleeus, holotype female from Kangaroo Island, South Australia.

Pectoral fin long, 9th ray being the longest, length 45 mm. Upper 7 rays

of pectoral branched, and connected by a membrane. Lower 7 rays un-

branched, the last four only joined at their bases. Dorsal fin begins above

upper angle of operculum. Membrane of dorsal fin without scales. Ventral

fins abdominal. Third spine of anal fin half as long as soft rays. Caudal fin

rounded, length 25 mm. Scales small, preopereulum and operculum scaly, inter-

orbital and snout scaleless.

Colour in Alcohol, Sides of body and upper parts of body dark brown.

Head, operculum and ventral surface off-white with dark brown patches on the

snout and under the eye. Dorsal and caudal fins off-white with dark brown

bands. A small silver spot at the upper origin of the operculum.

In life, the sides and upper parts of body exhibit a bronze tint; the name

chalceus is proposed, in allusion to the life colouration.

Similar in general appearance to 7. maculosus Richardson, but differing in

scale counts, number of dorsal spines, character of membrane of the spinous

dorsal fin and the position of the silver spot on the operculum.

Described from a female specimen measuring 177 mm. total length, taken

September 10th, 1952, on the West Coast of Kangaroo Island, South Australia.

Presented by Mrs. I. M. Thomas of the Zoology Department, University of

Adelaide. Type in South Australian Museum, Reg. No. F2729.

110 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

THREPTERIUS MACULOSUS Richardson.

Threpterwus maculosus Richardson, 1850, p. 70, pl. ii, figs. 1-2.

Chironemus maculosus Gunther, 1860, p, 78,

D. xiv. 18-19. PL 14. A, iii, 8. Vii 5, ©, 16-17, G1, 58-60, L. t, 11; 22,

Length of head 81 mm. (4-0), greatest depth of body 70 (4:7), greatest

width of body 40 (8-2) in the total length 327 mm, Snout 18 (4:5), eye 21

(3-8) in the head. Depth of caudal peduncle 24. Interorbital 13, Branchio-

stegal rays 6. Gull rakers 18,

Head depressed, body compressed, Dorsal profile strongly convex behind

eye, Eye large, not encroachin® upon the profile. Mouth large, extending back

ta below middle of eye. ‘Teeth small, eardiform, arranged in several rows in

front. of jaws, single row at sides. Single row of similar teeth on the chevron-

shaped yomer, Palatines and tongue toothless. Gill rakers short and numerous,

longest measuring 4:5 mm. Base of pectoral fin sealy, scales extending on to

part of fin. Opereulom and subopereulum sealy, several rows of scales on the

preoperculum, Cheeks, snout and top of head without scales. Dorsal fin com-

mences over upper angle of operculum. Seventh spine is the longest, Base

of dorsal fin sealy. Spines of dorsal fin with a deep groove on each side. Caudal

fin rounded, the rays projecting beyond the membrane. Anal fin commences

opposite beginning of soft dorsal, Pectoral, anal, caudal, and soft dorsal fins

with discontinuous black banding, Sides of body light brown, densely covered

with dark brown spots. A silver spot on the hind edge of the opereulum.

Described from a specimen measuring 327 mm, total leneth, taken February

18th, 1944, at Port Lincoln, South Australia, Registered number F2081 at the

South Australian Museum,

Famiry GOBIFSOCIDAE.

Key ro toe GOBLESOCIDAR or Sour Avusrrautia.

1, Dorsal fin not counected by a membrane with the base of the caudal fin 2

Dorsal fin connected by a membrane with the base of the caudal fin

Aspasmogaster tasmantensis.

2, Distance between termination of dorsal and base of caudal fin less than

total base of eandal .. ra inl ger Se Bee ew eet 3

Distance between taeminatioa of as and base of candal fin greater

than total base of candal tat Parvicrepis parvipinnis,

3. Dorsal fin with 8-9 rays. Upper surface without spots _..... wie 4

Dorsal fin with 6 rays. Upper surface densely spotted

Cochleoceps spatulit,

4. Ineisor teeth present in both jaws 0) Inn Volgiolus costatus.

Teeth in both jaws of uniform size _..... “ Aspasmogaster patella sp. nov.

Scott—Four NEW FISHES FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 111

Genus ASPASMOGASTER Waite.

Aspasmogaster Waite, 1907, p. 315 (Orthotype, Crepidogaster tasmaniensis

Gunther).

ASPASMOGASTER PATELLA SD. Nov.

D. 8-9. P. 18-19. A. 7-9. Vii 4 ©. 13-14.

Length of head 22 mm. (2:9), greatest depth of body 10 (6-4), greatest

width of body 13 (4-9) in the total length, 64mm. Snout 6 (3-6), eye 4 (5:5)

in the head. Body depressed anteriorly, compressed posteriorly. Head rather

broad, snout narrow, greatly depressed. Mouth small, extending back to below

anterior third of eye, jaws equal. Teeth in upper and lower jaws villiform, in

a single row. Eye moderately large, oval, encroaching slightly upon the dorsal

profile. Dorsal profile strongly convex from beginning of head to tip of snout,

slightly convex from above origin of pectoral fin to end of tail.

Fig. 3. Aspasmogaster patella, holotype from Kingston Park, South Australia.

Hill membranes united across isthmus at anterior origin of first adhesive

dise. Pectoral fin short, length 8-2 in total body length. Pelvie fins attached

to 17th pectoral ray. Dorsal fin small, height 16-1 in total length of body,

base longer than base of anal fin. Dorsal begins more anteriorly than anal, but

both are co-terminal. Caudal fin rounded, length 6-4 in total length. Anterior

sucker slightly wider than body. Posterior margin of anterior sucker terminat-

ing at middle of posterior sucker. The posterior sucker does not overlap base

of anterior sucker.

Posterior sucker oval, broader than long, width 5-8 in total body length.

Vent mid-way between posterior margin of this sucker and origin of anal fin.

Colour in Alcohol. Yellow ochre, with twenty-one reddish-brown bars

almost completely encircling the body. One of these bars crosses the snout,

three bars pass from eye to eye, and the remaining seventeen bars, which are

fairly uniform in thickness, lie between the eyes and the tail.

A single bar passes down either side of the snout from the tip of the upper

jaw to the eye.

112 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Aspasmogaster patella is closely allied to A. tasmaniensis (Gunther), but

differs in possessing twenty-one cross-bars, compared with fourteen in the latter.

The dorsal fin is not connected with the base of the caudal fin in patella, and

body proportions differ considerably from tasmaniensis.

Described from a specimen measuring 64 mm. total length. Other speci-

mens measuring 72, 56 and 57 mm. were collected with the type specimen in

shallow pools at Kingston Park, South Australia, on September 26th, 1953, by

biology students of the University of Adelaide. Type in South Australian

Museum, Reg. No. F2788.

REFERENCES CITED.

Muller and Henle (1886): Ber. Verh. A. Pr. Akad. Wiss. Berlin.

Muller and Henle (1838): Mag. Nat. iTist. (Charlesw.), n.s. ii.

Richardson, J. (1850): ‘‘Notices of Australian Fish,’’ Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond.,

xviii, pp. 58-77.

Waite, E. R. (1907): ‘‘The Generie Name Crepidogaster,’’ Rec. Aust. Mus., vi

(4), p. 315.

Waite, H. R. (1923): ‘‘The Fishes of South Australia.’’

Whitley, G. P. (19382): ‘‘Studies in Ichthyology, No. 6,’* Rec. Aust. Mus. xviii

(6), pp. 321-348.

kEC. S.A. MUSEUM Vor. XI, PLATE XXII

CVrolophus gigas, holotype female from Port Noarlunen, South Australia,

TWO NEW SPECIES OF MITES (ACARINA: MESOSTIGMATA:

ASCAIDAE) ASSOCIATED WITH BARK-BORING BEETLES FROM

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY H. WOMERSLEY, ENTOMOLOGIST, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

Family Ascaidae Ouds. 1906

Genus Dendrolaelaps Halbert 1915

Clare Island Survey, Pt. 39 Ht Acarinida; Terrestrial and Marine, in Proc. Roy. Irish Acad., 31, 68-

69, pl. 6, fig. 15 a-d.

Type Dendrolaelaps oudemansi sp. n

Dendrolaelaps adelaideae sp. n

As with the other known species of this genus, viz., oudemansi Halbert 1915, armatus (Kramer)

1886, and quadrisetis (Berlese) 1920, the following species are very small, white, and found

amongst the frass of bark-boring beetles of the genus Ips and its allies.

TWO NEW SPECIES or MITES (ACARINA: MESOSTIG-

MATA: ASCAIDAE) ASSOCIATED wirn BARK-BORING

BEETLES rrom SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By H. WOMERSLEY, Entomotoaist, SourH AustraLtian Museum.

Fig, 1-2.

Famity ASCAIDAE Ouds. 1906.

Genus DENDROLAELAPS Halbert 1915.

Clare Island Survey, Pt. 39 II Acarinida; Terrestrial and Marine, in Proc. Roy.

Trish Acad., 31, 68-69, pl. 6, fig. 15 a-d.

Type Dendrolaelaps oudemansi sp. n.

DENDROLAELAPS ADELAIDEAE sp. 0.

Fig. 1 A-G.

As with the other known species of this genus, viz., oudemansi Halbert 1915,

armatus (Kramer) 1886, and quadrisetis (Berlese) 1920, the following species

are very small, white, and found amongst the frass of bark-boring beetles of the

genus Ips and its allies.

Female. Length of idiosoma 325n, greatest width on level of coxae IT, 182u.

Shape, elongate with almost straight sides, and rounded anteriorly and pos-

teriorly. Colour in life whitish. Dorsum divided into two by a line between

coxae ITI and IV; on the anterior shield the setae are 14 to 16 long except

a pair behind the 4 vertical, and one on each shoulder between coxae II and

III which are 28, long; on posterior shield the two longitudinal rows of setae are

14n to 16p long, the laterals from 25, to 35y; posteriorly with 3 pairs of longer

setae, the anterior laterals 56u long and of the two extreme pairs the inner

pair 84, the outer pair to 100 long. Venter: the sternal shield as figured,

ending posteriorly at posterior point of coxae III; genital shield as figured, with

straight posterior margin and 1 pair of setae; a pair of elliptical inguinal shields

behind coxae IV; anal shield wider than long and narrower anteriorly than pos-

teriorly, widely separated from genital shield. Legs shorter than body;

I slender, 312, long, II slightly thicker, 221 long, without any specialized

114 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

armature; TIT 221h long, 1V 234p long; coxae IT narrow, and much broader

than trochanter. Gnathosoma as figured, epistome (tectum) trispinous; cheli-

cerae short and stumpy, movable finger with 4 prominent retrorse teeth; fixed

finger with a strong subapical and subbasal tooth, and finely serrate in between.

Vig. 1. Dendrolaclaps adelaideae sp. u, A-D, female: A venter, B

dorsum, C tectum, D chelicerae; E-G, male; E venter, F chelicerae, G Leg IT.

WoMERSLEY—MITES ASSOCIATED WITH BARK-BORING BEETLES 115

Male. Shape and colour as in female. Size from the material available

larger than in female. Length of idiosoma 416, width 195y. Dorsim as in

temale, with setae of similar lengths. Venter; sternal and genital shields as

figured; anterior of anus is an indistinct transverse line which seems to suggest

an incipient demarcation of an anal shield as figured, between this line and pos-

terior of genital shield are some radiating lines. Lees: IT much thicker than I

and III, and TV also thicker, IT armed on basifemur with a long and strong

ventral spur, but no other inecrassations, [V with a posterior spur on coxae;

I 312, long, TL 269p, TIL 221p,, IV 286p. Gnathosoma as in female. Chelicerae

as figured, fixed finger with a strong subbasal tooth; movable finger unarmed,

with a Jonge slender spermatophore carrier.

Remarks. This species differs markedly from the genotype oudemansi, in

the shape of the anal or ventri-anal shield of the female, and the posterior margin

of the sternal shield in the same sex. In the male, the second lee lacks the small

inerassations or spurs on the other seements than the femur.

From the Enropean cornutus the female differs in the shape of the ventrianal

and ingttinal shields, and the posterior end of the sternal shield. In the male,

it lacks the small boss-like incrassations on the genu and tibia of leg IT present

in cornutus, and is different from both oudemans? and cornutus in having a

spur on coxae IV,

Locality, The holotype °, and two paratype ? @ and the allotype 4 fram

Trass of bark-boring beetles, Adelaide, May, 1952. In the collection of the

South Australian Museum,

DENDROLAELAPS CONCINNA SP, 1,

Fig. 2 A-B.

Female. Shape as in preceding species. Colour in life whitish, Dorsum

as figured, divided in two on level of coxae IV, anterior shield 195, long, pos-

terior 247; dorsal setae as figured, of similar lengths to preceding species,

Venter: as figured; sternal shield ending between eoxae TIT and IV with eon-

eave posterior margin, and the 3rd and 4th pairs of setae close together; genital

shield as figured with 1 pair of setae; vertri-anal shield as shown, with irregu-

larly scolloped anterior and lateral margins, widest in line of anus, with 6 setae

in addition to anal setae, adanal setae longer, 314 than post-anal 17; inguinal

shields lenticular and longer than in adelaideae, all other ventral setae including

sternal 14y long. Legs: I longer and more slender than others, 351 long, IT

260, TIT 234y, TV 300; tarsi with short ambulacra and paired claws, Epistome

trispinous. Dentition of chelicerae not observable.

116 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Locality. A single female from frass under bark infested with bark-boring

beetles, Adelaide, May, 1951. In the collection of the South Australian Museum.

Remarks. Differs from preceding species in the shape and size of the ventri

anal shield.

Fig. 2. Dendrolaelaps concinna sp. nu. Female: A venter, B dorsum.

TWO NEW SPECIES OF ECTOPARASITIC MITES FROM POUCHED

MICE, SMINTHOPSIS FROM AUSTRALIA

BY H. WOMERSLEY, ENTOMOLOGIST, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

Family Laelaptidae Berlese 1892

Laelaps (Laelaps) sminthopsis sp. n.

Description Female. Shape broadly oval. Dark brown and strongly chitinized. Length of idiosoma

1,300u, width 845u. Dorsal shield not entirely covering dorsum; as figured 880u long by 500u wide

with numerous long slender setae to 120u long; some of the anterior marginal setae on shield and

anteriorly on the surrounding cuticle are rather shorter, stumpier and strongly shortly ciliated.

Venter: tritosternum with base in front of margin of sternal shield; no pre-endopodal or jugular

shields; sternal shield wider than long, with 3 pairs of setae and 2 pairs of pores, the anterior setae

are short and ciliated, the others long and nude, surface reticulate; metasternal shields distinct with

long slender seta and pore; genito-ventral shield small, flask-like but not conspicuously expanded

behind coxae IV, with fimbriated anterior and 4 pairs of setae; metapodal shields small and round;

cuticle behind coxae IV with numerous setae, lengthening posteriorly where they are more ciliated;

anal shield rounded with usual 3 setae; setae on gnathosoma ciliated. Legs: rather short, II the

thicker, I 780u long, IT 650u, II 690u, TV 975u; coxae I with a very stout blunt smooth spur, a

smaller one on II, the other setae on coxae ciliated and rather stumpy; legs with ciliated setae.

Chelicerae small as figured, each finger with 2 subapical teeth and fixed finger with simple seta

(pilus dentarius), pulvillum with spine-like teeth.

TWO NEW SPECIES or ECTOPARASITIC MITES rrom

POUCHED MICE, SMINTHOPSIS rrom AUSTRALIA

By H. WOMERSLEY, Entomotocist, Sourn Austrauian Museum.

Fig. 1-2.

Famity LAELAPTIDAE Berlese 1892.

Laruaps (LAELAPS) SMINTHOPSIS sp. Nn.

Fig. 1 A-D.

Description Female. Shape broadly oval. Dark brown and strongly chiti-

nized. Length of idiosoma 1,300, width 845p. Dorsal shield not entirely cover-

ing dorsum; as figured 880, long by 500, wide with numerous long slender

setae to 120u long; some of the anterior marginal setae on shield and anteriorly

on the surrounding cuticle are rather shorter, stumpier and strongly shortly

ciliated. Venter: tritosternum with base in front of margin of sternal shield;

no pre-endopodal or jugular shields; sternal shield wider than long, with 3

pairs of setae and 2 pairs of pores, the anterior setae are short and ciliated, the

others long and nude, surface reticulate; metasternal shields distinct with long

slender seta and pore; genito-ventral shield small, flask-like but not conspicu-

ously expanded behind coxae IV, with fimbriated anterior and 4 pairs of setae;

metapodal shields small and round; cuticle behind coxae IV with numerous setae,

lengthening posteriorly where they are more ciliated; anal shield rounded with

usual 3 setae; setae on gnathosoma ciliated. Legs: rather short, II the thicker,

I 780p long, II 650n, III 690p, IV 975y; coxae I with a very stout blunt smooth

spur, a smaller one on II, the other setae on coxae ciliated and rather stumpy;

legs with ciliated setae. Chelicerae small as figured, each finger with 2 subapical

teeth and fixed finger with simple seta (pilus dentarius), pulvillum with spine-

like teeth.

Male. Unknown.

Loc. and Host. The holotype female and 5 paratypes from Sminthopsis

leucopus Gray, from Gorae, Victoria, 1937 (coll. H. H. Finlayson).

Remarks. In size this species is closely related to the genera Macrolae-

laps Ewing 1929 and Gigantolaelaps Fonseca 1937. From the latter it differs

118 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

in haying the normal 4 pairs of genito-ventral setae and the straight not medially

produced anterior sternal margin, In Macrolaelaps the genito-ventral shield is

much expanded behind coxae IV and almost reaches the anal shield.

Fig. 1. Laeclaps sminthopsis sp. n. Female: A venter, B dorsum, C leg I,

D chelicerae.

Famity LISTROPHORIDAE Canestrini 1892.

AUSTROCHIRUS SMINTHOPSIS sp. 1.

Fig. 2, A-E.

Description. Form elongate, with dorsal and ventral semiciretlar scaling,

not much compressed, but provided particularly on coxae IT with a raised carina

WOMERSLEY—ECTOPARASITIC MITES FROM SMINTHOPSIS 119

tor grasping hair, and the body posteriorly on coxae IV in life tending to ineurve

ventrally for the same purpose; legs I and II also slightly modified for grasping

hair. Coxae in two comparatively narrowly separated groups, Dorsal shield

trilobed. All tarsi with suckers. Legs IV of male stouter than in female, and

in that sex with two pairs of anal suckers.

very

Vey wy va

Fig. 2, Austrochirus sminthopsis sp. n. A, female dorsal view; B, same,

ventral view; C, male, ventral view; D, coxae IT and legs If and IT in semilateral

aspect to show raised carina; E, genu, tibia and tarsus of leg IV.

Female. Length of idiosoma to 377p, width to 104p. The dorsal shield

about one-fifth of body length, divided into 3 lobes, the median of which is

short and rounded, the laterals with the posterior margins curving inwards and

bluntly pointed on inner angle; furnished with two pairs of setae, the anterior

pair about 3 times as long as posterior; dorsum with 3 pairs of short setae.

120 RECORDS OF THE S,A. MUSEUM

Ventrally coxae I and II touching in the midline, that of II is enlarged with

a strongly raised longitudinal ridge-like lamina, for grasping hair; posterior of

coxae IT on each side is a smaller triangular apparently movable sclerotized

plate which may also assist in grasping hair, both coxae I and II apparently

without setae; coxae IIT and TV also touching in median line, IV the larger,

with setae as figured; the genital opening anteriorly between coxae ITT; on the

cuticle between coxae IT and III two pairs of long setae, the posterior lateral of

coxae III the longest; on the posterior fifth of the venter are 4 pairs of short

setae with 2 other pairs flanking the anal opening.

Male. Length of idiosoma 325u, width 1044, as in the feniale dorsally.

Ventrally with the genital opening between coxae TV, the anal opening sur-

rounded with an elliptical ring inside of which are two pairs of sucking discs.

Leg IV with the trochanter femur and tibia much stouter than in female; apex

of tarsi IV furnished with a strong subapical claw.

Loc. and Host. Numerous specimens from a specimen of Sminthopsis crassi-

caudata, the flat-tailed or yellow-footed pouched mouse from the Ninety-mile

Desert, west of Tintinara, south-east of South Australia, September 27th, 1953

(coll. W. G, Heaslip).

Remarks, This species is placed in the genus Austrochirus Womersley, 1943,

although in some respects, the more cylindrical form, the peculiar coxae II

with the small accessory shield for grasping hair, the less modified legs I and II,

the trilobed dorsal shield, and the strongly scaled cuticle, it does not quite con-

form to the genus as typified by Austrochirus queenslandicus Womersley 1943.

Holotype ¢ and allotype @ and paratypes in the South Australian Museum

collection.

ON THE SUBFAMILY TROMBELLINAE SIG THOR 1935 (ACARINA.

TROMBIDIIDAE) WITH THE DIAGNOSIS OF THE NYMPH OF AUDYANA

THOMPSONI WOMERSLEY, 1954

BY H. WOMERSLEY, ENTOMOLOGIST, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

The subfamily Trombellinae was erected in 1935 by Sig Thor (Zool. Anz. 109 (5, 6), 108) for the

single genus Trombella Berl. 1887 (Acari. Myr. Scorp. Ital. rep., fasc. XL, No. 2) with Trombella

glandulosa Berl. 1887 from Italy, as type. Included by Berlese in his 1912 monograph (Redia VIII,

fasc. 1) were also the species Trombella nothroides Berl. 1888 (Acari Austro-americani, p. 10, tab.

VI, fig. 2, and tab. VII, fig. 6 and 7) and Trombella otiorum Berl. (Riv. Di Patol. Veget,. IX, p.

127), the first from Brazil and Paraguay, and the second from Italy, Sardinia, Corsica and Norway.

Ox true SUBFAMILY TROMBELLINAE SIG THOR 1935

(ACARINA. TROMBIDIIDAE) wirs tut DIAGNOSIS or rue

NYMPH or AUDYANA THOMPSONI WOMERSLEY, 1954

By H. WOMERSLEY, Ewromonocisr, Sourn Ausrratian Museum,

Fig. 1-2.

Tue subfamily Trombellinae was erected in 1935 by Sig Thor (Zool. Anz. 109

(5, 6), 108) for the single genus Trombella Berl. 1887 (Acari. Myr. Scorp. Ital.

rep., fase. XL, No. 2) with Trombella glandulosa Berl. 1887 from Italy, as type.

Included by Berlese in his 1912 monograph (Redia VIII, fase. 1) were also the

species Trombella nothroides Berl, 1888 (Acari Austro-americani, p. 10, tab. VI,

fig. 2, and tab. VII, fig. 6 and 7) and Trombella otiorwm Berl. (Riv. di Patol.

Veget., IX, p. 127), the first from Brazil and Paraguay and the second from

Italy, Sardinia, Corsica and Norway.

In 1937 Womersley (Ree. 8S. Aust. Mus., VI (1), 75) also included in the sub-

family the genera Chyzeria Canest. 1897 (Termes Fuzetek, 20, 483) with @,

ornata Canest., 1897, as type from New Guinea and represented by several

species in Australia, and Parachyzeria Hirst 1926 (Proc. Zool. Soc. London,

p. 825) with P. indica Hirst 1926 as type. (Thaumatotrombium André 1938 with

Th. poecilotrichum André 1938 as type is synonymous with Parachyzeria Hirst).

This placing of Chyzeria and Parachyzeria in the Trombellinae has since

been followed by other workers, Vitzthum, 1941, Baker and Wharton, 1952, ete.

The subfamily was defined by Sig Thor 1935 as follows:

“‘Korper langgestreck. Abdomen rektangular. Haut hart, héckerig;

Haare kurz und spitz. Crista fehlt; die 2 Sinneshaare sitzen dicht beisam-

men an der Mitte des Thorax in 2 dicken Tuberkeln zwischen den 2 unges-

tielten Doppelaugenpaaren. 4 Palpenglied mit verschiedenen Dornen oder

Haaren; 5 Glied lang.’’

Vitzthum 1941, defines the subfamily rather more fully so as to inelude

Chyzeria and Parachyzeria, thus:

“Grosse scharlachrote, dunkelrote oder schwarze Acari von 1500 bis

4400 m.m. Lange Rumpf ziemlich langgestreckt; Hysterosoma rechteckig,

in Chyzeria mit jederseits 5 dorsolateralen Zipfelformigen Aussackungen;

an deren Stelle bei Parachyzeria in Wirbeln biischelartig zusammenged

122 RECOKDS OF THE 5,A. MUSEUM

vingte Behanwung. Integunien mitunter (Trombella) hart, hoekerig, Keine

Crista metopiea, Auf der Mitte des Propodosoma zwei pseudostiginatisehe

Organe iit Triehohothrien dicht aneinander gedriingt, zwischen zwei sehr

kurz gestielten Doppelaugen. Palpitibia mit mehreren Dornen und Haaren.

Palptarsus lang, mindestens bis an die Spitze der Tibialkralle reichend,

Beine missie lang.’’

The species of Chyzeria and Parachyzeria differ markedly from all the

species hitherto placed in Trombella in the comparatively simple nature of the

dorsal setae which, in the species of Trombella, are charaeteristically m the form

of short to long slightly curved nude to ciliated setae at the apices of more or

less elongate papillae. Nude or simple setae are found in otiorwm and nothrovdes,

but in other species they are ciliate. Again Chygeria and Parachyzeria in their

peculiar body form, apart from the lack of a erista and the sensillae bases being

more or less close together in the midline of the propodosoma, seem to have but

a meagre relationship to 7'rombella, It is therefore proposed that, while retaining

them in the Trombellinae, they should be placed in a new tribe, the Chyzerinu

nov, with Chyzeria Canestrini as the type.

Of the three species of Trombella described by Berlese, both ofioruwm and

nothroides do not agree very well with the genotype, 7. glandulosa, in the fol-

lowing points: firstly, the characteristic dorsal pits {urnished with peripheral

setae in glandulosa are absent in both ofiorum and nothroides; secondly, the

palpal tibia has uo distinct pectine in glindulosa but only a secondary strony

spine at the base of the claw,

For otiorum and nothroides, therefore, a new genus Nothrotrambidium'

with Trombella oliorum Berl. as genotype is now proposed,

The two inore recently described species of T'rombella trom Australia,

namely, werreqensts Hirst 1929 (Prov. Zool, Soe, London, p. 168) and adelaidene

Wom. 1929 (Trans. Roy, Soc, 8, Aust., 68 (2), 149), agree in the above features

with glandulosa and belong therefore to Tramhella s. str. They are redeseribed

and keyed later in this paper.

In a etirvent paper (Malaysian Parasites, VIIJ—New Geneva and Species

of Apoloniinae (Leeuwenhoekiidac—Acarina) from the Asiatic-Pacifie Region—

Raffles Museum), the writer has ceseribed the larva of a new venus and species

as Audyana thompsont trom larvae trom a scorpion, Ifetcrometrus longimanis,

from Pahang, Malaya, 1948,

On the basis ol larval characters this genus was placed in the subfamily

Apoloniinae of the Leeuwenhoekiidae, but at the time it was pointed out that the

‘The species Trombella Iundbladi. Willmann 1989 (Arkiv. f. Zool. 1A, No, 10; 15) from

Madeira will come into Nothrotrombidium,

WOMERSLEY—THE SUBFAMILY TROMBELLINAE (ACARINA) 123

subfamily was rather a heterogeneous assemblage of genera, many of which, when

the nymphs and adults are reared and correlated with the larvae, will have to be

placed elsewhere.

While the above paper was in the press, Dr. R. J. Audy was successful in

rearing the larvae of Audyana thompsoni through to the nymph, and has very

kindly asked me to study these nymphs.

This study has shown that the genus Audyana is closely related to the

other genera of the Trombellinae and must be placed therein and not in the

Apoloniinae. Audyana differs from Trombella s. str. in the apparent absence

of eyes, the sensillae bases being wide apart and situated on the posterior margin

of a large propodosomal shield, and in that the dorsum, instead of having glandu-

lar depressions, has lateral and sublateral protuberances furnished with the

characteristic Trombella type of setae.

Genus Aupyana Womersley 1954.

Diagnosis. Nymph. Trombellinae with the dorsum furnished with lateral

and sublateral tubercles bearing 2 to 12 small lightly-curved ciliated setae at

the apices of rather long peduncles. Propodosoma apically with a large trian-

cular shield rather deeply excavated anteriorly; without crista, but with two

widely separated pseudostigmata on its posterior margin furnished with long

nude sensillae. Eyes absent. Palpi with strong tibial claw, and two accessory

spines at base of claw; no pectines. Only one pair of genital discs.

Larvae. With a single anterior dorsal scutum, with 2 AM, 2 AL and 2 PL

setae of which AM and AL are short and claviform; no antero-median process,

but with a wide anterior hyaline portion. Legs: I 7-, IT and III 6-seemented; tarsi

with only a single claw. Palpal tibia with two short straight claws; maxillae

and femora with short claviform setae. Genotype Audyana thompsoni Womers-

ley 1954 (larva).

AUDYANA THOMPSONI Womersley 1954.

Description. Nymph. Colour in life ereamy pink. Shape as figured.

Length 739, width across propodosoma 533y. With suture between propodosoma

and hysterosoma, the propodosoma with a large triangular shield, 227 long by

227 wide, the anterior end of which is fairly deeply excavated. Eyes apparently

absent. Crista absent. Sensillae filamentous and nude. ca. 100u long, and sen-

sillae bases situated behind the posterior margin of the propodosomal shield and

130n apart. Chelicerae not observed. Palpi as figured, tibia with a stout claw

with two strong accessory spines as its base, no pectines on tibia, tarsus long and

124 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

clavate and just exceeding tip of tibial claw. Dorsum with two to three lateral

rows of strong tubercles furnished with peculiar short curved ciliated setae on

long peduncles, the number on each dorsal tubercle varying from two to twelve;

there are similar tubercles on the sides of the propodosomal shield; the dorsal

Fig. 1. Audyana thompsont Wom. 1953. Nymph. A dorsal view, B

palp, C leg I, D dorsal protuberance with one seta and peduncle more

enlarged, E leg seta, F genitalia.

setae, plus peduncles, measure to 32. Legs: not longer than body, I as figured,

715,» long, II 559p, TIL 559u, TV 670; tarsus 1 260u long by 104, high, tibia 84p

long; the setae on the leg segments, except the tarsus I, are of similar type to

the dorsal setae but hardly ciliated and on rather shorter peduncles. The geni-

talia are as figured, with only a single pair of discs; 97» long and dises 39» long

by 26» wide.

WOMERSLEY—THE SUBFAMILY TROMBELLINAE (ACARINA) 125

KEY TO THE TRIBES AND GENERA OF TROMBELLINAE.

1, Large reddish acarids, with either dorso-lateral elongate processes on abdo-

men, and medially intermixed with the normal setae a number of fine

filmentous sensillae-like setae; or without such processes, but with four large

tufts of long fine setae arising anteriorly, and a few smaller tufts pos-

teriorly. Crista absent, but senillae bases (pseudostigmata) close together

with a pair of long filamentous sensillae. Kyes 2 + 2, sessile.

Tribe Chyzeriini nov. 2

Not as above, but of variable colour from red to black, without processes

or bushes of setae on dorsum. With dorsal glandular pits or raised tuber-

cles, or without these. Vestiture peculiar, consisting of short to rather long

nude or ciliated, slightly curved setae at the apices of short to long

peduncles. Crista absent, pseudostigmal organs widely separated.

Tribe Trombellini nov. 3

Dorsum with long lateral process and without bushes of setae.

Genus Chyzeria Canest. 1897.

Type C. ornata Canest. 1897.

Dorsum without processes but with strong bushes of long setae.

Genus Parachyzeria Hirst 1926.

Type P. indica Hirst 1926.

3. Dorsum with lateral and median circular glandular depressions, with

more or less peripheral series of setae. Setae not on peduncles or only on

short ones. Palpal tibia without a pectine. Eyes present 2-+ 2, sessile.

Genus 7'rombella Berl. s. str.

Type 7’. glandulosa Berl. 1887.

Dorsum with lateral and sublateral protuberances furnished with peduncu-

late setae, or without either protuberances or depressions... ..... 4

4. Dorsum with lateral and sublateral protuberances and setae on long

peduncles. Eyes absent, no palpal pectine.

Genus Audyana Wom. 1954.

Type A. thompsont Wom. 1954.

Dorsum without such protuberances, setae on only short peduncles. Palpal

tibia with distinct pectine. Eyes present 2 + 2, sessile.

Genus Nothrotrombidium nov.

Type T. otiorum Berl. 1902.

Redescriptions of the two known Australian species of Trombella Berl. s. str.

TROMBELLA WARREGENSIS Hirst 1929.

Proe. Zool. Soe. 1929 (1), 168, fig. 5 K, L.

Fig. 2 A-D.

Length 1-84 mm., width 1-0 mm. Opisthosoma rectangular, with promi-

nent squarish shoulders and rounded posterior; propodosoma subtriangular, 0:35

mm. long with a prominent nasus about 180p long. Crista absent. Sensillae

126 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

missing but arising from raised denticulate papillae, 170» apart, the denticles

of papillae enlarging outwardly and ending in about four ciliated pointed setae

arising from long peduncles. Hyes 2-+ 2, small and lateral, and subsessile or

shortly pedunculate. Palpal tibia with strong terminal claw and long accessory

spine (or claw) basally of claw; tarsus large and clavate, over-reaching tip of

claw; no pectines. Legs fairly thick, shorter than body, I 1,650» long, IT 1,125p,

TIT 1,125p, TV 1,425p, tarsi T 3875p long by 135,, metatarsus 1300p, long. Dorsal

Fig. 2. A-D Trombella warregensis Hirst 1929. A propodosoma, B

tarsus and tibial elaw of palp (after Tirst, but now missing from type),

laideae Wom. 1939. E propodosoma, F palpal claw and tarsus, G front

tarsus and tibia, H dorsal setae and peduncles.

setae decumbent conical, finely pointed with distinct ciliations, and arising from

long upstanding peduneles, leneth of both peduncles and setae 29y; similar

setae occ on the nasus and the lees, and on the propodosoma anteriorly and

laterally of the sensillae base, otherwise this portion is bare. The depressions

on the dorsum consist of a row of 6 circular ones on each side, and medially

with two cireular ones followed by a large oval one and then a smaller circular

one; all these depressions are ringed with setae of the usual shape but are

WOMERSLEY—THE SUBFAMILY TROMBELLINAE (ACARINA) 127

inwardly naked; the lateral rows all have strongly marked centres; ventrally

behind coxae IV are 10 rather smaller depressions arranged 5 on each side.

No genital dises,

Locality, The type, a single specimen from River Warrego, near Barrin-

gum, New South Wales, under a log, August, 1928 (S. Hirst), now in South

Australian Museum,

Remarks. Hirst was unable to compare this specimen with glandulosa Berl,

but from Berlese’s figure, it differs in the size and dimensions of the front tarsi

and inetatarsi, the single simple curved accessory seta on the sensillae bases

(see Berlese’s fig, 3 and 8), and the ciliated and rather differently formed dorsal

and leg setae; the dorsal depressions in glandulosa also have an inner ring or

crown of setae.

TROMBELLA ADELAIDEAE Womersley 1939.

Trans. Roy, So¢, 8. Aust., 63 (2), 149, fig, 1 A-D.

Fig, 2 E-H.

Length 1-2 mm., width 0:75 mm. Colour in life white. General form

as in waerregensis Hirst, propodosoma 225pn, with nasus 75. long. Crista

absent, Sensillae long and fine, arising frum raised dentieulate papillae bases,

126. apart, the denticles enlarging outwardly and ending in one or two long,

thick ciliated setae, different from the normal setae. Byes 2+ 2, small, lateral

and shortly pedunculate or subsessile, Palpal tibia as in fig. 2F, with strong

terminal elaw, and near its base with a strony spine (?accessory claw), no pee-

tines; tarsus more or less clavate and over-reaching tip of claw. Legs fairly

thiek, shorter than body, I 1,050» long, IT 750, TIT 750u, TV 960g, tarsus T

270 long by 90 high, metatarsus 165. long. Dorsal setae decumbent, conical,

pointed, with, under high magnifieation, a very fiue pubescence, and arising

from upright long peduncles, leneth of setae 25y; similar setae veeur on nasus

and legs, and anteriorly and laterally of the sensillac bases. Dorsal clepressions

16, rounded, exeept the anterior one of medial row of four, which is oval, the

lateral rows with six, all the pits are not ringed with a crown of setae, and the

setae cover the whole pit-surface; ventrally behind eoxae IV there appears to be

only five small depressions. Genital discs absent.

Locality. A single specimen, the type, from wnder a stone, Burnside, South

Australia, August, 1938 (J,S.W.).

Remarks. Closely related to glandulosa Berl. and warregensis Hirst, but

differing in the arrangement of dorsal depressions, the dorsal setae, and the

setae of sensillae bases.

1238 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Krv ro tHE Species or TROMBELLA Berl. s. str.

1. The setae arranged in two peripheral rows on each depression. __..... 2

The setae on the depressions not in distinct peripheral rows. Tarsus I not

parallel sided, half as long again as metatarsus (tibia) and about 3 times as

long as high, widest at one-third from apex ..... T. adelaideae Wom. 1939.

2. Tarsus I with subparallel sides, slightly tapering to apex, twice as long as

metatarsus and nearly 4 times as long as high __..... T. glandulosa Berl.

Tarsus I not parallel sided, more or less clavate and widest beyond middle,

less than half as long again as metatarsus and 2-75 times as long as

high. tn hee Nese tah Ml T. warregensis Hirst 1929.

SUMMARY.

The subfamily Trombellinae Sig. Thor 1935 is discussed and divided into

two tribes, the Chyzerini nov. with the genera Chyzeria Canestrini 1897 and

Parachyzeria Hirst 1926; and the Trombellini nov. for Trombella Berl. 1887 s.

str. and allied genera.

The genus Trombella Berl. 1887 is separated into two groups, Trombella

Berl. s. str. with 7. glandulosa Berl, 1887 as type and Nothrotrombidium nov.

with 7. otiorwm Berl. 1902 as the type. The latter genus also contains T. noth-

roides Berl. 1888; and T'rombella s. str. the two Australian species 7’. warregen-

sis Hirst 1929 and 7’. adelaideae Womersley 1939, both of which are redescribed,

The nymph of the larval species Audyana thompsont Womersley 1954 is

described from two specimens reared by Dr. J. R. Audy in Malaya, and the

genus is shown to belong, not to the Apoloniinae (Leeuwenhoekiidae), as thought

on larval characters, but the Trombidiidae.

Keys to tribes and genera of Trombellinae and to the species of Trombella

s. str. are given.

A REVISION OF THE FLOWER BUGS (HETEROPTERA

ANTHOCORIDAE) OF THE AUSTRALIAN AND ADJACENT PACIFIC

REGIONS. PART I.

BY GORDON F’. GROSS, ASSISTANT ENTOMOLOGIST, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

The Anthocoridae of this area now number at least 28 species, belonging to seventeen genera.

Seven of the genera and twenty-five of the species are restricted to this region, the remainder are

fairly cosmopolitan. A more detailed account of the ecology and Pacific zoogeography of this group

appears at the end of the taxonomic account.

A REVISION or tue FLOWER BUGS (HETEROPTERA

ANTHOCORIDAE) or roe AUSTRALIAN anp ADJACENT

PACIFIC REGIONS. PART I

By GORDON F. GROSS, Assistant Enromo.ocist, SourH AusTRALIAN Museum.

Fig, 1-4,

INTRODUCTION.

Tue Anthocoridae of this area now number at least 28 species, belonging to

seventeen genera. Seven of the genera and twenty-five of the species are

restricted to this region, the remainder are fairly cosmopolitan. A more detailed

account of the ecology and Pacific zoogeography of this group appears at the

end of the taxonomic account.

The usual differences in coloration, of apparent structure, and estimated

dimensions that most past workers have employed to describe species in this

family are, I am convinced, quite inadequate to separate very closely allied

species or even to adequately characterize new species in some of the genera.

I have, therefore, introduced as many measurements as practical into the descrip-

tions and these when all else fails, or is strongly in doubt, will at least provide

a concrete yardstick which can be relied upon, within the limits of observational

error and normal variability, to be constant in the one species.

To do this it has been necessary to make permanent mounts in polyvinyl

aleohol lactic acid medium. On the micrometer scale under the magnification

used, each division was equivalent to approximately 17-244. Where measure-

ments range from 200% upwards, this gives relatively low deviations from 5 p.c.

of the co-efficients of variation per se, but where the measurements range from

100» downwards these large steps in relation to the value being measured usually

induce larger deviations from this desired level.

Several measurements used are also subject to another kind of observational

error irrespective of the relationship between the value of the measurement and

the value of one division on the micrometer scale. This, in some cases, is due

to difficulty in defining the edges or position from which certain measurements

must be taken. An example would be across the anterior width of the scutellum,

130 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

which can depend on whether the animal is flexed, causing the pronotum to move

forward (or backwards) over the seutellum, exposing more or less (depending

on the flexure). In other cases this type of observational error is induced by

obliqueness of the object measured (inevitable with such thick mounts), aud

this affects especially the lees, antennal und rostral seements. This error lends

to lower the lower limit. of the observed range and inerease the standard deviation

and co-efficient of variation,

All measurements are made with the aim to get the maximum length

involved, and the usual ways in which this is effected is shown in fig. + Is-T

Only where there are more than five specimens has there been any attempt to

treat the sample statistically, and then only in those measurements exceeding

100u, in the other eases only the obseryed range is quoted.

The presence or absence of a well-developed ovipositor in the female, first

systematically investigated hy Myers and China, proves to be very useful on

the generic level, and the shape of the male genitalia likewise is useful on both

the generic and specific levels, these are both characters that have largely been

nevlected by past workers,

The family may he characterized as follows:

Famity ANTHOCORIDAE.

Head prolonged anteriorly, rostrum apparently three segmented, held away

from the lower surface of head as in Reduviidae and Nabidae, antennae four

segmented; a pair of ocelli present or absent; hemielytra with both enneus and

embolium separated by a distinct fractiire. Tarsi three segment, no ariolia.

Male genitalia strongly asymmetrical and oyipositor present, often reduced, or

absent.

The three subfamilies are each represented here and may be distinguished

by the following key.

Key To SuspramMity or ANTHOCORIDAR,

Cell of hindwings with a hamus (opus into the cell), this is sometimes

almost rudimentary corm) auc, MWe ee em at a Mr 2

Cell of hindwings completely without ahamus .... aw Dufouriellinae.

2, Last two antennal segments slender, filiform, with long hairs, hamus

viven off from the ‘‘vena connectens’’ or posterior transverse vein of

Ca” Wx ey tte cco” ihe wt Lyctocorinac,

Liast two antennal segments fusiform, short, without long hairs, hamus

viven off from the ‘‘yvena subtensa’’ (interior longitudinal vein of

cell) or rarely from the “‘‘vena connectens’’ a sass Anthocorinae.

GRoss—A REVISION OF THE FLOWER Bucs 131

Subfamily Anrnocorinae.

The most distinguishing feature is the short fusiform nature of the two

terminal segments of the antennal and their short pilosity. This, however, does

not apply to Blaptostethus Fieb. In addition, the hamus is usually given off

trom the ‘‘yena subtensa,’’ but this is not so in Maoricoris China.

Ky To AUSTRALIAN AND Paciric Genera or ANTHOCORINAR.

1. All femora unarmed

Fore femora with denticles

2. Hamus arising from ‘‘vena connectens’’ as in Lyctocorinae, but with

Anthocorine-like third and fourth antennal segments _...,. Maoricoris China,

Hamus arising from the ‘‘vena subtensa’’ n,n 3

4. Apical annulation of the pronotum distinct _,,,, os Anthocoris Fall,

Apical annulation obscure or completely absent

Orius Wolff (= Triphleps Fieh).

4, Last antennal segments fairly thick, spindle shaped. Whole hody

shining and smooth with very short hairs _ Lampronanella Popp.

Last antennal segments thin, filiform. Body longer, sparsely haired

Blaptostethus Fieb.

Genus Maoricorts China, 1933.

Maoricoris China, 1933, AMNH (10) 11, 514, fig.

Narrow, elongate, head exserted, with a distinct collum, antennae short,

last two segments fusiform, rostrum just surpasses anterior coxae. Apical

annulation of pronotum completely absent, lateral margins of pronotum straight,

basal margin deeply excavate. Scutellum convex. Cuneus large, rounded at

apex, membrane with four veins, middle two joining the interior to form two

basal cells. Basal cell of wing with vein arising trom the vena connectens, meta-

pleural orifice produced anteriorly. Anterior femora incrassate, unarmed. Ovi-

positor absent or obsolete. Genotype M. benefactor China.

Maoricoris BENEFACTOR China, 1933.

Maoricoris benefactor China loc. cit., 516, fig.

Deep shining ferrugineous red, rostrum yellow, extreme base infuseate,

antennae black. Hemielytra rather dull fuscous brown. An elongate spot down

elaval commissure, one half on the apex of each clavus and an indefinate round

spot at apex of embolium extending onto eorium, but not onto cuneus, pale

132 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

yellow, Coxae, bases and apices of femora sordid yellow, tibiae and tarsi pallid

yellow,

Sparsely pilose, posterior margin of vertex behind ocelli with a characteris-

tie fringe of backwardly-directed moderated short. bristles. Relative lengths

antennal segments 9: 21:16:16. Length, 2-8 mm, Maximum width of prono-

tum across humeral angles, 0:7 mm.

Loc. New Zealand.

Genus LampronanneLua Popp., 1909,

Lampronannella Poppius, 1909, Ac, Soc. Sci. Fenn,, 37 (9), 39.

Elongate, shining, with very short prostrate hairs. Head hardly longer than

wide, Rostrum surpasses the fore coxae, Antennae almost as long as the head

and pronotum together, second segment as long as width of frons between eyes,

and as long as the third and fourth together. Basal margin of the pronotum

shallowly sinuate, apical annulation narrow but distinct. Dise posterior to the

middle deeply transversely impressed. Orifice of the scent gland bent anteriorly.

Middle coxae widely spaced, hind eoxae approximated, Legs fairly short, fore

femora incrassated apically and with two small teeth. Tibiae with very short

teeth. Genotype: Z, reutert Popp.

This genus is very near Orius Wolff, but distinguished from it by the armed

fore femora and tibiae. It is possible my P, armatus should be placed in this

genus, but as this species differs only in the toothed fore tibiae from the remain-

ing species of Orius, I prefer to describe it under that genus at this stage.

LAMPRONANNELLA REUTERI Popp., 1909.

Lumpronannella reuteri Poppius, 1909, loc, cit.

Dark brown, the head lighter (reddish brown), hind femora and antennae

brown, seeond antennal segment, rostrum, and legs yellow.

Antennae with short hairs. Basal width of pronotum about twice the

medial length and much wider than fore margin, the dise is wholly flat, anterior

lobe somewhat convex. Seutellum deeply impressed medially, Tibiae with very

short thorns. Length, 1-8 mm.

Loc. New Guinea.

Genus BuaprostetHus Fieber, 1860,

Blaptostethus Fieber 1860, Wien ent. Monats., 4, 270; Reuter, 1885, Act, Soe.

Sei, Fenn., 14, 611 and 666; Distant, 1910, Fauna British India (Rhyn-

chota), 5, 309 (London).

Gross—A REVISION OF THE FLOWER Bucs 133

Body elongate, shining, moderately pubescent. Head with a distinct collum.

Rostrum long. Apical annulation of pronotum obsolete or very tenuous. Anterior

femora somewhat incrassated, beneath in the middle with two obsolete tubercles

and behind middle nearest the apex with two acute teeth, the first the larger.

Terminal pair of antennal segments thin, filiform. Cell of the hindwings with

a hamus arising from the “vena subtensa.” Genotype: B. piceus Fieb.

BLAPTOsTETHUS PICEUS Fieber, 1860.

Blaptostethus piceus Fieber, 1860, loc. cit, 270, taf. 7, fig. 4; Reuter loc. cit. 667.

Body shining black, with a greyish pubescence. Hemielytra with a pallid

punctuation on the interior apical angle of the embolium, the membrane also

narrowly pale at its external basal angle. Head in front of the collum as wide

(including eyes) as long. Pronotum anteriorly strongly transversely triate.

Length, 3 mm.

Loc. Celebes, Sumatra, New Guinea and Lombok (fide Poppius, 1909).

Genus AntTHocorIS Fallen, 1814.

Anthocoris Fallen, 1814, Spee. Nova Hemipt. Disp. Meth., 9; Van Duzee, 1917,

Cat. Hem. Nth. Mexico, 292 (Berkeley, California), syn.

Body oblong, shortly pubescent above, sometimes almost glabrous. Eyes

usually not touching pronotum but closely approximated to its anterior margin.

Pronotum basally broadly emarginate with a distinct anterior collar. Rostrum

reaching the anterior coxae. Orifice of the scent gland almost straight, or bent,

but very slightly forward anteriorly. Posterior coxae almost contiguous, meta-

sternum often produced between them in a simple lobe. Apex of the abdomen

with long exserted setae. Female with a well developed ovipositor. Genotype:

A. nemorum (Linn) = sylvestris (Linn).

There are two known species in these regions which can be separated by

the following key. Anthocoris arctatus Walker, 1872, Cat. Heteroptera, 5, 153,

is definitely not an Anthocoris for the long rostrum and third and fourth seg-

ments of the antennae distinguish it from this genus. It may be a Cardiastethus,

but I have seem no examples of this genus which could fit Walker’s description.

Key to AUSTRALIAN AND ADJACENT REGIONS Species or ANTHOCORIS.

Tegmina piceous, concolorous with body ..... Anthocoris austropiceus nov.

Tegmina cinereo-testaceous basally, apically and cuneus infuscated

Anthocorts pacificus Kirkaldy.

134- RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

ANTHOOCORIS PactFICUS Kirkaldy, 1908.

Anthocoris pacificus Kirkaldy, 1908, Proe, Linn. Soc. N.S.W,, 33, 374.

Piceous shining, almost glabrous. Second antennal segment and last seg-

ment of rostrum testaceous. Tegemina cinereotestaceous basally, apex and cuneus

infuseate. Apex of anterior and middle femora, fore and middle tibiae and

tarsi, and hind tarsi testaceous. Head almost as long as wide between eyes

which are not nearly contiguous with pronotum. Second segment of antennae

24 times as long as first and 14 times as long as third, third segment slightly

shorter than fourth. Lateral margins of pronotum subsinuate. Hemielytra shortly

pilose. Fore femora with four or more bristles. Length, 2-76 to 3 mm.

Loc, Viti Levu, Fiji Island Group.

ANTHOCORIS AUSTROPICEUS sp. noy.

Fig. 1 A, B.

Body above wholly piceous, tibiae and tarsi only somewhat lighter.

Elongate, nearly glabrous, shining, with five or six prominent hairs on each

side near the apex of the abdomen. Head with a distinct collum and the eyes

consequently well removed from the anterior margin of the pronotum.

Pronotum with sides distinctly marginate into a narrow but explanate ledge,

which continues almost straight right up to the anterior angles. Collar distinct,

placed in front of the anterior angles.

Scutellum broadly and deeply transversely impressed near the middle.

Hamus very distinct, arising from the vena subtensa.

The systematic measurements (which have been made on all the materia!

available to me of this family) are for this species (in microns from one

specimen ) :

Head. Total length, 362; length in front of eyes, 121; length hehind eyes,

103; length of eves, 155: 172; width across eves, 413; width of eyes, 86: 86; inter-

ocular, 207; width of eollum, 362.

Antennae. I, 121 * 52, 121 > 52; II, 2938 x 52, 310 & 52; III, 207 x 34,

207 * 34; TV, missing, 207 x 34.

Rostrum. 1, 155 > 69; II, 258 * 69; ITI, 207 > 69.

Pronotum. Anterior width, 396; posterior width, 809; median length, 258;

lateral length, 465, 413.

Scutellum. Anterior width, 534; median length, 413; lateral length, 430,

430.

Gross—A REVISION OF THE FLOWER Bucs 135

Fig. 1. A-B, Anthrocoris austropiceus sp. nov. Female. A, head and pronotum; B,

apex of abdomen from above. C-D, Orius armatus sp. nov. Male. C, fore tibia; D, apex

of abdomen from above. E-F, Oplobates femoralis Reut. Female. E, left front femur and

tibia; F, apex of abdomen from above. G-I, Falda queenslandica sp. nov. Female. G, head

and pronotum; H, left front leg; I, left middle leg. J, Lyctocoris campestris (Fab.). Male.

J, apex of abdomen from above. K, Lasiochilus derricki sp. nov. Male. K, head and

pronotum. (C-D, enlarged 80 diameters; A-B, E-K, enlarged 40 diameters. )

136 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Legs coxa femur tibia tarsi I IL Til cl.

T 288 396 896 34 34 86 17

275 430 396 not visible

II not clear 396 879 34 34 103 wi

not clear 396 396 34 52 86

TIT 285 568 585 42 34 86 34

not clear 637 585 52 a4 ? ?

Total length, 2,400; width, 880; length abdomen, 1,295; ovipositor, 637.

Loc. New South Wales: Bogan River (J. Armstrong, Holotype ¢ in

Australian Museum).

Very closely allied to A. pacificus Kirkaldy in having the eyes remote

from the anterior margin of the pronotum, but ean be easily distinguished from

that species by the concolorous hemielytra and the absence of spines on the fore

femora,

jenus Ors Wolff, 1811.

Orius Wolff, 1811, Icon, Cim., 5, 4; Zimmerman, 1948, Insects of Hawaii 3, 176.

Triphleps Fieber, 1860, Wien Ent. Monat., 4, 266; references largely summarized

by Van Duzee, 1917, Cat. Hem. Nth. Mexico, 293.

Body ovate or oblong ovate. Pronotal collar absent or very obsolete. Ros-

trum not surpassing fore coxaec. Second segment. of antennae as long or shorter

than interocular. Ovipositor present. Genotype: O. nigra (Wolff).

There are two species in Australia, and they may be distinguished by the

front tibiae being armed with small denticles in the case of Orius armatus sp.

noy. and unarmed in Orius australis (China).

Orius AUSTRALIS (China), 1926.

Triphleps australis China, 1926, Bull. Ent, Res.. 17 (1), 361.

Elongate oval, almost glabrous. Black, hemielytra pale yellowish brown,

with the clavus, embolium and cuneus more or less ferrugineous brown. Legs

yellow.

The standard measurements in microns of the female specimen in the South

Australian Museum are as follows (China’s measurements, where given, follow

in brackets) :

Head. Total length, 360; length in front of eyes, 130; length behind eyes,

65; length of eyes, 160; width of eyes, 90-100; interocular, 170; width of collum,

400.

Gross—A REVISION OF THE FLOWER Bucs 137

Antennae. 1, 90-100 & 30 (93); II, 210 & 50 (203); IT], 150-160 x 17

(156); IV, 160-180 *% 40 (179).

Rostrum. 1, 90; TI, 250; TIT, 160.

Pronotum. Anterior width, 420; posterior width, 790 (690); median length,

273; lateral length, 400.

Scutellum. Anterior width, 530; median length, 390; lateral length, 420-440,

Legs coxa, femur tibia tarsi [ IT 11r cl.

I 270 390 350 40 70 70-80 40-50

i 220-230 390 340-350 30-40 70 80 40

III 260 460-480 530 50 90 80-90 40

Total length, 2,000; total length width hemielytra, 2,100 (1,750); total

width, 790 (690); length abdomen, 1,020; length ovipositor, 570,

Loc. Queensland (no other data); 1 ¢ in 8. Aust. Museum.

ORIUS ARMATUS sp. nov.

Fig. 1 C, D.

Fairly elongate. Head brownish black, pronotum and seutellum darker.

Hemielytra vellowish. Legs ocelli and first two segments of antennae yellow,

remaining two segments of antennae darker. Eves reddish black.

Head with but a very short collum. Lateral margins of pronotium straight,

Inarginate, anterior margin almost straight, hind margin almost concave. A pune-

tate crescent in the hind fifth of the pronotum not reaching the edges, anterior

portion of dise slightly raised. Seutellum almost planate, slightly raised

anteriorly.

Fore tibiae with about 21-23 short denticles (approximately 6 long). Male

genitalia asymmetrical (fig. 1 D).

The standard measurements in microns of the type and paratype are:

Head, Total length, 310-350; length in front of eyes,. 120-130; length

behind eyes, 50-80; length of eyes (oblique), 140-170; width across eyes, 360;

width of eyes, 80-90; interocular, 130-140; width of collum, 300-320.

Antennae. 1, 90-100 * 30-40; IT, 200-210 x 50; ITI, 170 « 40; IV, 200-210

x 40.

Rostrum. I, 70 & 30; I], 180 x 50; II1, 170 & 30.

Pronotum, Anterior width, 330-350; posterior width, 640-720; median

length, 270; lateral length, 360-390.

138 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Scutellum, Anterior width, 520-530; median length, 340-400; lateral length,

360-460.

Legs coxa, femur tibia tarsi 1 II Til CL.

qT 120 330380 310-360 40 AQ 70 30

Il 170-180 = 330-360 = 820-360 40 50 70 30

Til 200 420-440 480-510 40 50-70 90) 30

Total length, 1,970-2,030; total width, 770-780.

Loc. Queensland: Stanthorpe (E. Sutton, August 7, 1928, Holotype ¢ ),

Mt. Cootha (A. A, Givault, June, 1929, Paratype of unknown sex, apex of

abdomen missing, both in Queensland Museum).

Subfamily Lycrocortnag.

Terminal pair of antennal seginents long and thin, usually with long hairs.

Cell in the hind wines with hamus (inwardly directed spur vein) always arising

from the ‘‘vena connectens.”’ (Also called *‘vena decurrens,’’ the transverse

vein making up the hind margin of the cell.)

Five geneva are represented in these regions, one of them new, and they

imay be distineuished by the following key.

Key To AUSTRALIAN AND ADJACENT Paciric LYCTOCORINAE.

1. Pronotum with a very marked transverse constriction about 2/3 of

the way back Pr eee Falda gen. nov.

Pronotuta not ag abover jc cy | GOR SER Satie pte 2

2.. Orifice of the scent gland on the metapleura bent backwards apically.

Margins of pronotum and hemielytra ciliate __..... Lasiochilus Reut.

Apex of orifice bent forwards 6 ee seus ee ne ae 3

3. Sides of pronotum and hemielytra ciliate, anterior femora armed

Sides of pronotum and hemielytra not unduly ciliate _..... ‘i 4

4, Our species large, black, suboval 0 . estas Lyctocoris Hahn.

Our species smaller, more elongate, bicoloured, anterior femora in-

erassafell © on som Ths asst eee Xylocoris Dufour.

Genus OrLoBATEes Reuter, 1895.

Oplobates Reuter, 1895, Ent. Mo. Mag. 31, 170.

Body oblong, shining with a long pubescence. Head with a short collar

behind the eyes. Rostrum hardly surpassing the base of the head. Pronotum

Gross—A REVISION OF THE FLOWER BuGS 139

with a very tenuous anterior collar, sides not marginate or sinuate. Membrane

with four distinct veins. Anterior femora armed, underneath with thin spines

their whole length. Female with a well developed ovipositor. Genotype: O.

femoralis Reut.

OPLOBATES FEMORALIS Reuter, 1895.

Fig. I HE, F.

O. femoralis Reuter, 1895, loc. cit., 171.

Fuscous above with a long yellowish pubescence, head ferrugineous, antennae

and legs testaceous, the first and third antennal segments and the apical part

of the second fusecous. Anterior femora infuscated on the upper surface. Hemie-

lytra with a pallid mark within the interior angle of the embolium. Head in

front of the collar as long as broad. Pronotum longer than the head, sides

straight but curved apically, dise obscurely transversely impressed near the

middle. Posterior tibiae shortly spinose.

Length, 33 mm.

Loc. Victoria (fide Reuter). Northern Territory, Melville Island (W. D.

Dodd, one female in S. Aust. Museum).

Genus F'aLpa gen. nov.

Elongate, linear. Head fairly short, broad, little produced and strongly

declivous in front of the eves with a distinet but not very long glabrous collum.

Antennae about as long as head and pronotum together, terminal pair of seg-

ments filiform long, last segment curved. Rostrum very short, surpassing base

of head but not attaining fore coxae. Pronotum with a tenuous anterior collar,

strongly transversely impressed about 2/3 way back, this impression continuing

right to the lateral margins and giving the pronotum the aspect of such Lygaeids

as Pamera. Anterior angles of pronotum placed behind the collar, lateral

margins diverge gradually, going from the anterior angles to the constriction

then thereafter diverge considerably more to the posterior angles. This latter

section of the lateral margins gradually curved. Hind margin of the pronotum

very shallowly excavate, almost straight, anterior margin slightly concave.

Seutellum with a deep puncture about 2/3 way back on either side and a

third centrally near the tip. Hemielytra with on the clavus 3 longitudinal rows

of punctures, the two outer straight and extending the whole length, the inner

curved and restricted to the apical half, and on the corium near the inner

edge one row running from the base to as far as the apex of clavus. Inner

margin of clavus markedly sinuate. Cell of hindwing apparently with a hamus.

140 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Orifice of the scent gland T shaped, the upper transverse portion crossing the

whole pleurite at a level lower than halfway up, the vertical section running

forwards as well as downwards from this right to the base of the pleurite and

forming a 45° angle with the head of the T,

Fore and middle femora inerassated, subtriangular, armed with short teeth

from the middle to the apex on their inner margin, tore tibiae markedly expanded

to at least twice the width of the rest in their basal third. Middle tibiae and hind

femora and tibiae normal, Female with a short ovipositor, apex of abdomen

with a few long hairs, Genotype Falda queenslandica sp. nov,

This is at once an extremely distinctive genus and one which is hard to

place systematically, The unusual shaped pronotum for an Anthoeorid is

approached only remotely by Septicius Dist. and Arnulphus Dist,, and more

particularly Euwlasiocolpus Champ. Arnulphus, however, belongs to an entirely

different subtamily. The inerassation of the first and second pairs of femora

as well as that of the fore tarsi is extremely distinetive, Scoloposcelis heing the

only other genus in this region with two pairs of femora expanded, but in its

case it is the fore and posterior femora, and Scoloposcelis Jacks a hamus.

FALDA QUEENSLANDICA sp, nov,

Fig. 1 G, H, 1.

Head, pronotum and seutellun dark brown, head and pronotum shining,

collam darker, Dead in front of eyes, rostrum, antennae, legs (except the

spines which are black) and a median and lateral stripe on abdomen beneath

yellowish brown, Remainder ol underside yery dark brown including a broad

stripe on either side of the abdomen, reaching back to the seventh visible segment

and between the pale areas described. Hemielytra darkish brown, but with

some yellowish lightenings. Membrane brown, Head, pronotwin and seutellom

sparsely pilose, hemielytra a little nore densely so. Collum glabrous, Last two

filiform segments of antennae with very short hairs.

The standard ineasurements in microns from two specimens are:

Head, Total length, 570-590; length in front of eyes, 120; length behind

eyes, 190-260; length of eyes, 240; width of head across eyes, 460; width of eyes,

160; interocular, 120; width of eollum, 380.

Antennae. I, 210-220 *« 70; II, 400-480 x« 50; III, 450-520 « 30; IV,

500-570 x 30.

Rostrum. 1, 280-310; IT, 260; TII, 120-140.

Pronotum, Anterior width, 380-430; posterior width, 1,030-1,090; median

Jength, 570-790; lateral length, 790-880.

Gross—A REVISION OF THE FLOWER Bucs 141

Scutellum, Anterior width, 690-760; median length, 520-600; lateral length,

550-640,

Legs coxa femur tibia tarsi I It III cl.

I 550 770-860 640-690 70-90 90 160 90

II 530 670-860 670-800 50-70 90-140 150-190 90

Ii! 290-330 1050-1170 1100-1190 50-70 120-210 170-240 70-103

Total length, 3,900; length abdomen, 2,700; length ovipositor, 760.

Loc, Queensland; Cairns District (A. M. Lea, Holotype ?, Reg. No.

J 20082); Mt, Tambourine (A. M. Lea, ‘‘rotting leaves,’’ one Paratype, sex un-

known—apex o! abdomen missing, Reg. No. I 20083; both in S. Aust. Museum).

Genus Lyctocoris Hahn, 1835.

Lyctocoris Hahn, 1835, Wanz, I., No. 3, 19, In addition to the references

quoted by Van Duzee (1917, Cat. Hem, Nth. Mexico 288, Berkeley, Cali-

fornia), there is Zimmerman, 1948, Insects of Hawaii, 3, 174 (Honolulu).

Nesidiocheilus Kirkaldy, 1902, in David Sharp’s Fauna Hawaiiensis, 127.

Body oblong or oblong ovate, with a very slight low pubeseence, pronotum

and scutellum shining, hemielytra densely punctate. Anterior collar of prono-

tum tennous or very indistinct, anterior coxae almost contiguous. Female with

an ovipositor. Genotype (Logotype) : L. domesticus Hahn = campestris (Fab.).

There is only one species so far known from these regions, the very widely

spread L. campestris (Fab.).

Lycrocoris CAMPESTRIS. (Fab,), 1794.

Fig, 1 J.

eleanthia campestris Fabricius 1794, Ent. Syst., 4, 14; Dyclocoris campestris,

Lethierry et. Severin, 1896, Cat. Gen. Hem., 3, 327, and Van Duzee, 1917,

Cat. Hem. Nth. Mexico, 288 (syn.).

Dark ferrugineous, second segment of the antennae (except the apex), legs

and hemielvtra testaceous. Rostrum reaching middle coxae. The standard

measurements in microns of two British specimens, kindly loaned for this pur-

pose by the British Museum, and three Australian specimens (male and 2

females), are as follows:

Head. Total leneth, 640-750; length in front of eyes, 240-340; length

behind eyes, 170-190; length of eyes, 220-260; width across eyes, 540-620; width

of eves, 120-190; interoeular, 250-290; width of collum, 430-540.

142 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Antennae. I, 140-190 x 50-70; II, 520-590 s 50-70; TIT, 340-380 x 17-34;

TV, 330-380 >< 17-34.

Rostrum. I, 280-370; IT, 580-680; IIT, 380-390,

Pronotum, Anterior width, 570-650 (2-740); posterior width, 1190-1400;

median length, 520-590; lateral length, 410-720.

Scutellum. Anterior width, 720-1000; median length, 490-690; lateral

length, 590-780.

Lega COXA, femur tibia tarsi I Il TIL Cl.

I 430-530 690-740 700-790 50-70 90—L00 140-190 90

TT 380-400 Ss00-8$90 740-830 50-70 90-120 170-200 90

TW 470-520) «©1000-1120 1200-1310 70-90 120-190 190-240 100-120

Total length, 8,800-4,600; width across abdomen, 1,620-1,800; leneth abdo-

men, 1,820-2,540; leneth ovipositor, 850-900; leneth male genital capsule, 480-530,

Loc. South Australias Urrbrae (H. M. Cane, June, 1946, 7 specimens in

C.S.LR.0. Division of Entomology, Canberra). Tasmania; Hobart. (A, M, Lea,

3 specimens, 2 reared from wood, in 8, Aust. Museum), <A.C.T.: Duntroon

(Willis, Mareh, 1951, 1 specimen in ©.S.1.R.0. Division of Entomolgy, Can-

berra). New Zealand; Auckland (May, 1950, ‘‘biting man at night,’’ in Wood-

ward Collection).

Genus LAasrocuinus Reuter, 1871.

Lasiochilus Reuter, 1871, Oefv. Vet. Akad. Forh., 562; in Van Duzee, 1917,

Cat. Hem. Nth. Mexico, 289-90, and the useful account by Zimmerman, 1948,

Insects of Hawaii, 3, 172, syn.

Body oblong with a longish pubescence. Head with a short collar behind

the eyes, frons between the eyes usually with one or two distinct arcuate lines.

Rostrum reaching middle coxae. Pronotum with a very tenuous collar. Orifice

of the scent gland produced backward. Apex of the abdomen with long exerted

hairs. Female with an ovipositor, Genotype: L. pallidulus Reut.

The six species now known from this region may he distinguished by the

following key.

Key To AUSTRALIAN AND Apsacent Reatons Specs or LASTOCHILUS.

1, Hemielytra punctate —...,

Hemielytra not punctate 2000...

2, (1) Tibiae with thornlike spines 0 ae fruhstorfert Popp.

Pronotum longer than head '

Tibia with five long spines, head longer than pronotum ..... derricki nov.

Gross—A REVISION OF THE FLOWER Bucs 143

3. (1) Fore femora armed kets solemonensis nov.

Fore femora unarmed octets jun oat’ 4

4. (3) Abdomen very elongate in relation to width (1350: 620) ..... misimae nov.

Abdomen not unduly elongate in relation to width (1300-1500:

900-1000) wuss ane ae ere mim” atti 5

5. (4) Apex of abdomen with about 4 long hairs, fore and hind femora

AHURIBGALEE we Ber. shop the ome aches eed “iit femoralis nov.

Apex of abdomen with but short hairs, fore and hind femora less

inerassated sane ble leal ges Bs vitiensis nov.

LASIOCHILUS FRUHSTORFERI Popp., 1909.

Lasiochilus (Dilasia) fruhstorferi Poppius, 1909, Ae, Soe. Sei. Fenn., 37 (9), 9.

Elongate, shining. Above with a golden pilosity. Blackish brown tibiae

and tarsi yellowish. Membrane brownish-black with a small light stripe at the

apex of the euneus.

Head as long as wide across the eyes, in front of eyes as long as an eye.

Rostrum not surpassing middle coxae, second segment about 24 times as long

as the first. Pronotum longer than head, posterior width hardly twice the

median length. Hemielytra longer than the hody, obseurely punctate on the

euneus. Legs with fine hairs, tibiae with thorns.

Length, 2-8 mm.

Loc. Uambok Ts.

LASIOCHILUS DERRICKI sp. nov,

Fig. 1 K, 2 A.

Elongate oval, pilose. Dark brown, legs (except apical halves of femora),

rostrum and terminal pair of antennal segments brownish yellow. Hemielytra

yellowish with a very broad diffuse transverse band about the middle and one

apically on the coriaceous parts.

Rostrum almost attains hind coxae. Eyes ciliate. Sides of pronotum very

ciliate, with the characteristic long hair on each corner. Fore femora somewhat

inerassate, fore tibiae sinuate.

Clavus, adjacent part of eorium and extreme hind portion of pronotum

strongly punctate. Hemielytra somewhat abbreviated, not reaching apex of

abdomen.

The standard measurements from two specimens in microns are:

Head, Total length, 430; length in front of eyes, 170-210; length behind

eyes, 70; length of eyes, 170; width across eyes, 470; width of eyes, 100-120;

interocular, 210-241; width of collum, 360-380.

144 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 2. A, Lasiochilus derricks sp. nov. Male. A, apex of abdomen from above. B-C,

Lasiochilus misimae sp. noy. Male. B, head, pronotum and fore femora; ©, apex of

abdomen from above, D-E, Lasiochilus solomonensis sp. nov. Female. D, pronotum; E,

right fore leg. F, Lasiochilus femoralis sp. nov. Female. F, dorsal outline. G-H, Lasiochilus

vitiensis sp. nov. Female. G, head and pronotum; H, apex of abdomen from above, (All

enlarged 40 diameters.)

GrRoss—A REVISION OF THE FLOWER Bucs 145

Antennae. IT, 120-140 * 50; II, 400 * 50; III, 360-380 * 30; IV, 410-430

x 30.

Rostrum. 1, 260; IT, 600; ITI, 400.

Pronotum, Anterior width, 600-640; posterior width, 790-860; median

length, 400; lateral length, 480-500.

Scutellum. Anterior width, 520; median length, 430; lateral length, 450-470,

Legs coxa femur tibia tarsi I Il Til Ol.

I not clear 520 570 50 90 140 70

II 240 570 550 50 90-100 140 70

Il 260 690 790 70 90 160 70

Total length, 2,860-3,480; width, 1,090-1,240; length abdomen, 1,260-1,690;

length male genitalia, 220; length female genitalia, 720.

Loc. Queensland: Brookfield (EB. HH. Derrick, 2nd Aug., 1949, ‘‘Berlesed

soil litter,’’ Holotype ¢, Reg. No. 120071, Allotype 2, Reg. No. 120072, in

5. Aust. Museum).

Seems to be very near . fruhstorferi Poppius, but can be distinguished from

this species by the different colouration, the shorter hemielytra, and the absence

of thorns on the fore tibiae.

LASIOCHILUS MISIMAF sp. noy.

Fig. 2 B, C.

Very elongate, flattened. Castaneous, legs lighter almost yellow, femora

between shades. Coriaceous parts of hemielytra and body with long sparse

hairs. Eyes shortly ciliate, sides of hemielytra with short cilia, the usual long

hairs at the four corners. Wings not attaining the tip of the abdomen, male

genitalia very large with sparse long hairs. Fore femora very markedly in-

erassate.

The standard measurements (from one male), in microns, are:

Head. Total length, 360; length in front of eyes, 140; length behind eyes,

90; width across eyes, 310; width of eyes, 90; interocular, 140; width of collum,

290.

Antennae. I, 100 x 50; II, 220 * 30; rest missing.

Rostrum. 637 (individual segments are not clearly defined).

Pronotum, Anterior width, 360; posterior width, 570; median length, 310;

lateral length, 360-380.

Scutellum. Anterior width, 400; median length, 260; lateral length, 290-310,

146 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Legs coxa femur tibia tarsi I Ir Tit Cl.

I 240-260 210-230 290-330 34 52 90 34

II 190-210 310-3850 810-830 34 52 90 34

pal 210 450-470 470-480 34 86 189 34

Total length, 2,270; width, 620; length abdomen, 1,350; length male genitalia,

290.

Loc, New Guinea: Misima Is. (Rev. H. K. Bartlett, Holotype ¢, Reg. No.

120073 in 8, Aust. Museum).

This species does not seem to have any particular close allies in this

venus; it can be distinguished from the other species here by the key characters.

La8IOCHILUS SOLOMONENSIS sp. Nov.

Fig, 2 D, E.

Chocolate, antennae tibiae and tarsi yellow. Hyes grey, ocelli white. Hemie-

lytra brown, membrane semi-opaque, light brownish. Elongate oval head with

setae in front and behind eyes, pronotum with the usual hairs on the four

corners, but with very short ciliations along the sides, Apex of the abdomen

with a few sparse hairs. Rostrum not attaining fore coxae. Fore femora with

four short teeth. BHemielytra surpassing the end of the abdomen.

The standard measurements (one female) are:

Head. ‘Total length, 570; length in front of eyes, 170; length behind eyes,

170; length of eyes (oblique), 240; width across eyes, 470; width of eyes and

interocular, not clear; width of ecollum, 400.

Antennae. I, 160 % 52; II, 360 x 70; ITI, 260 % 20-30; IV, 290 x 30.

Rostrum. I, 90; II, 550; ILI, 350.

Pronotum. Anterior width, 430; posterior width, 930; median length, 400;

lateral length, 550-590.

Scutellum. Anterior width, 620; median length, 470; lateral length, 520.

Legs coxa femur tibia tarsi I Ir Til cl.

I 330 430-550 550-570 70 70 160 70

II 330 530-550 930 50-60 70-90 120 50

TIT 120-150 =720-770 =790-810 30 90 120-150 50-70

Total length, 3,100; width, 1,120; length abdomen, 1,590; length female geni-

talia, 670.

Loc. Solomon Is. (J. H. L. Waterhouse, ‘‘on bunches of dried bananas,’

Holotype 9, Reg. No, 120074, in S. Aust. Museum).

Gross—A REVISION OF THE FLOWER BuGS 147

LASIOCHILUS FEMORALIS Sp. NOV.

Fig. 1 FP.

Elongate, depressed. Castaneous, legs and antennae yellow. Head with a

prominent hair behind and before each eye, and with a faint U-shaped mark

between the eyes, the open end facing forwards, Hyes not ciliate, but with a

long hair in front and behind. Pronotum with the usual long hair at each

corner, but the lateral margins with very short hairs, dise very flat, hind margin

almost straight. Sides of hemielytra prominently ciliate, hemielytra not sur-

passing the apex of the abdomen. Apex of abdomen with about 4 very long

hairs, rest of body with but a very short pilosity including the terminal pair

of antennal segments. Fore and hind femora markedly incrassated.

The standard measurements (in microns) for two females are:

Head. Total length, 410-460; length in front of eyes, 120-160; length behind

eyes, 120-160; length of eyes (oblique), 140-160; width across eyes, 410; width

of eyes, 100-120; interocular, 170-190; width of collum, 380,

Antennae. T, 120-150 % 50; II, 360-400 % 50-70; TIT, 260 > 20; IV,

240-260 * 30.

Rostrum. 1, 140; IT, 470; III, 260-290.

Pronotum, Anterior width taken as same as collum, fore angles shallowly

curved; posterior width, 760; median length, 280-290; lateral length, 430-470.

Scutellum. Anterior width, 550-600; median length, 350-380; lateral length,

400-430.

Legs coxa femur tibia tibia I II III Ci,

IT 260 430-470 410-430 50 not clear in either spec.

II not clear 430-470 380 30 50-70 100 30-50

iil 210-290 550-600 550-590 50 90 100 78

Total length, 2,550-2,800; width, 910; length abdomen, 1,290; length ovi-

positor, 570.

Loc, Queensland; Clermont (Dr. K. K. Spence, October, 1929, Holotype ?

and one Paratype ¢, Reg. No. 62496 in the Australian Museum).

Seems to be fairly closely allied to the following species from which it ean

be distinguished by the long hairs at the apex of the abdomen, the more incrassate

fore and hind femora, the much shorter hairs on the last two antennal segments,

and the different colouration,

148 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

LASIOCHILUS VITIENSIS Sp, nov.

Fig, 2 G, H.

Elongate oval, semi-depressed. Brown, a yellow fleck on the outer basal

angles of the hemielytra, first two sezments of antennae and femora brown,

terminal pair of antennal segments, tibiae and tarsi yellow.

Tlead with a short hair behind each eye (there may be a short one also

before each eye, but this point is not clear. Terminal pair of antennal segments

with long hairs. Pronotum with the usual long hair at each of the four corners,

sides with long ciliations, likewise the lateral margins of the hemielytra. Disc

of pronotum fairly depressed with a low anterior callus behind whieh is a semi-

circular depression. Apex of abdomen and remainder of body with mainly short

hairs, fore femora fairly strongly incrassated.

The standard measurements (in microns) of two females are:

Head. Total length, 400-410; length in front of eyes, 160-170; length behind

eyes, 90-100; leneth of eyes (oblique), 140-160; width across eyes, 400; width

of eyes, 100-120; interocular, 160; width collum, 330-360.

Antennae. I, 120-140 %* 50; IT, 310-350 % 50; ITT, 280 + 20; TV, 200-280

x 20-30,

Rostrum. I, 90; II, 480; III, 220.

Pronotum. Anterior width taken as same as collum for the anterior angles

are gradually rounded; posterior width, 790-510; median length, 330-360; lateral

length, 450-480,

Scutellum. Anterior width, 620; median length, 410; lateral length, 470.

Legs coxa femur tibia tarsi I It Tir Cl,

I 260-310 470-480 360-410 50 70 100-120 40-50

IL 240-260 430-470 450-480 50 70 120 50

Tl 280-310 590-600 690-710 50 100-120 120-140 70

Total length, 2,670-2,690; width, 980-1,000; leneth abdomen, 1,330-1,520;

length ovipositor, 500-530.

hoc. Fiji Island Group: Viti Levu (A. M. Lea, Holotype ?, Reg. No.

T 20075, and one Paratype 2, Reg. No. 120076, in 8S. Aust. Museum).

Genus XyxLocoris Dufour, 1831,

Xylocoris Dufour, 1831, Ann. Soe. Ent. France, 2, 106; Zimmerman, 1948,

Insects of Hawaii, 2, 175; Van Duzee, 1917, Cat. Hem. Nth. Mexico, 290

(syn.).

GrRoss—A REVISION OF THE FLOWER BuGS 149

Oblong ovate, shining. Eyes remote from the anterior margin of the pro-

notum, rostrum reaching middle coxae. Pronotal collar obsolete or tenuous.

Apex of the abdomen (except in flavipes and queenslandicus) with a long pilosity.

Anterior and posterior coxae contiguous, anterior and sometimes posterior femora

somewhat incrassated. Anterior tibiae of the male apically strongly dilated.

Our two species with prominent hairs on each of four angles of the pronotum;

these are, however, very fragile (unlike Lasiochilus) and are easily broken off.

Male genitalia very asymmetrical (fig. 3, A, C). Ovipositor present in the

female. Genotype: X. rufipennis Dufour = cursitans (Fall.).

There are two species here, the widespread X. flavipes (Reuter) in its

apparently typical habitat of stored grain, and a new species belonging to the

flavipes group. This species (X queenslandicus) is larger than X. flavipes

(2430-2780p to X. flavipes 1500-22602), much darker as microscopic mounts,

the female ovipositor is much longer in relation to the body than in Y. flavipes.

( 520 260).

1,258% °° 1,070-1,090p

different (figs. 3 A, C).

) and the male external genitalia are somewhat

XXYLOCORIS FLAVIPES (Reuter).

Fig. 3 A, B.

Piezostethus flavipes Reuter, 1875, Bihang till S. V. A. K. Handl., 3 (1), 65;

1885, Acta. Soe. Sci., Fenn., 14; Puton, 1886, Cat. Hem. Pal., 43.

Elongate oval, piceous with a pale pubescence. Rostrum, antennae, legs

and hemielytra yellow. Cuneus infuscated membrane fuliginous hyaline. Head

pronotum and seutellum shining, almost glabrous. Dorsal surface of abdomen

castaneous, ventral surface dark brownish to piceous. Eyes brown, ocelli red.

Pronotum.somewhat convex, sides immarginate, anterior angles very slightly

rounded. Scutellum. anteriorly raised. Hind legs with some mediumly promi-

nent spines. The standard measurements (in microns) of two females and one

male are:

Head. Total length, 350-400; length in front of eyes, 140; length behind

eyes, 90-100; length of eyes (oblique), 100-140; width across eyes, 350-360;

width: of eyes, 90-100; interocular, 170-190; width of collum, 380-360.

Antennae. I, 90-120 & 30-50; II, 220-260 x 40; TII, 190-220 x 20; IV,

220-260 20.

Rostrum. I, 140?; II, 400? III, 410?.

150 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Pronotum. Anterior width (fore angles too gradually curved to allow

measurement); posterior width, 570-720; median length, 290-400; lateral length,

350-410.

Scutellum. Anterior width, 400-500; median length, 290-330; lateral length,

390-430.

Fig. 3. A-B, Xylocoris flavipes (Reut.). A, apex of abdomen of male; B, apex of

abdomen of female from above. C-D, Xyloceris queenslandicus sp. nov. C, apex of abdomen

of male; D, apex of abdomen of female from above. HE, Plochiocorella elongata Popp. Male.

E, apex of abdomen from above. F, Physopleurella mundula (White). Male. FF, apex of

abdomen from above. G-I, Physopleurella pacifica sp. nov. Male. G, head and pronotum;

H, apex of abdomen from above. Female. I, apex of abdomen from above. J-L, Physo-

pleurella armata Popp. J, head and pronotum; K, apex of abdomen of male from above;

L, apex of abdomen of female from above, (All enlarged 40 diameters.)

Gross—A REVISION OF THE FLOWER Bucs 15]

Legs coxa femur tibia. tarsi I Ir TIL Cl,

I 240-280 400-480 360-410 30 70 90-120 30

IT 220-270 400-410 380-430 30-50 70 100 80-59

Tit 240-280 500-570 570-670 30-50 100-120 100-170 50

Total length, 1,500-2,260; width, 840-900; length abdomen, 1,070-1,170;

length male genitalia (oblique), 380; length ovipositor, 260.

Loc, Piji: Suva (R. A. Lever, 1st July, 1944, ‘‘Ex bagged rice,’’ in Fiji

Dept. Agriculture). Western Australia: Pintharuka (F. Wilson, August, 1941,

‘Prom insect-infested wheat,’? in C.S.1.R.0,, Division of Entomology, Can-

herra). Has been reeorded from similar locations overseas,

XYLOCORIS QUEENSLANDICUS sp. Noy.

Fie, 3.0, D,

Elongate oval. Dark brown, eyes black, ocelli red. Hemielytra yellowish,

membrane milly, euneus infuseated. Rostrum, tibiae and tarsi yellow, antennae

and other parts of lees yellowish brown.

Head and pronotum sparsely pilose, but hairs on head lone, Hemielytra

with a thicker golden pubescence, also the underside of the abdomen,

Pronotum flattened, immarginate, behind the middle with a suggestion of

transverse striae, lateral margins straight and with but gradually rounded

angles, anterior collar very tenuous. Seutellum slightly raised anteriorly, Fore

eoxae elongate, middle and hind tarsi with rather more prominent spines than

X, flavipes.

Male genitalia directed to the left, ovipositor of the female longer in relation

to the length of the abdomen than in X. flavipes. Apex of abdomen without

long hairs, but a few rather short ones present.

The standard measurements (in microns) of four males and one female

are:

Head. Total length, 400-430; length in front of eyes, 120-170; length

behind eyes, 90-140; length of eyes (oblique), 160-170; width across eyes, 410-470,

width of eyes, 90-120; interoeular, 210-260; width of collum, 350-400.

Antennae. I, 100-140 * 50; IT, 290-360 x 50; TTI, 260-280 x 20; IV,

260-310 % 25.

Rostrum. I, 170-240; IL, 350-400; TIT, 200-260.

Pronotum. Anterior width, anterior angles too gradually curved to permit

a measurement; posterior width, 830-950; median length, 360-430; lateral length,

510-590.

152 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Scutellum. Anterior width, 590-740; median length, 450-500; lateral length,

500-600,

Legs coxa femur tibia tarsi 1 It TIT Cl.

I 380-450 500-570 450-570 30-50 70-90 120--160 70

I 290-360 480-600 430-570 30-70 90-100 120-160 70-8)

Tl 290-380 560-720 670-880 30-70 100-140 170-190 70-80

Total length, 2,430-2,800; width, 910-1,140; length abdomen, 960-1,260;

length male genitalia (oblique), 400-480; length female ovipositor, 590,

The individual measurements of the female tend to be 5-15 p,c, larger than

those of the male, though not invariably, and this has contributed to the large

observed range in some cases,

The differences in colouration and structure already mentioned distinguish

this species from flavipes. From Y. discalis (Van Duzee), the only other species

in this region, of which I have only Abernathy’s figure in Zimmerman’s Insects

of Hawaii (and which may not be a member of flavipes group as Aberuathy's

figure is no certain guide to whether the apex of the abdomen is with or without

long hairs) queenslandicus seems to be distinguished by the lighter coloured

antennae and fore tibiae.

Loc. Queensland: Cairns District (A. M. Lea, Holotype @, Reg. No.

120077, Allotype 2, Reg. No, 1 20078, and three Paratypes, Reg. Nos. [ 20079-81,

in 8, Aust. Museum),

Subfamily DurourteLinar.

Cell of hindwings without a hamus, second and third segments of antennae

filiform, usually with a long pilosity.

This is our best represented subfamily, the two most characteristic genera

being Curdiastethus and Physopleurella, both showing a marked reduction (or

complete absence) of the ovipositor in the female.

The genera can be distinguished by the following key :

Key to AUSTRALIAN AND ApgacentT Pactiric DUFOURIELLINABR,

1. Fore acetabula markedly intumescent, fore fernora usually armed,

Ys 2

2. Fore femora interiorly armed _.... Me Nn sy 3

Fore femora unarmed sn. ores 4

Gross—A REVISION OF THE FLOWER Bucs 153

4, Pore femora interiorly armed with bristle-like teeth, fore tibiae bent,

body fairly thick set rounded, sparsely haired _..... Orthosoleniopsis Popp,

Fore femora interiorly with more or less numerous stouter denticles,

fore tibiae straight, hind femora also inerassated. Body slender,

parallel sided, glabrous ee ae Scoloposcelis Fieb.

+. Basal margin of pronotuin shallowly and broadly sinuate ... Lasidielly Reut.

Basal margin of pronotum deeply sinuate

Mike to gat ae 5

». Orifice of seent gland on metapleura always bent feiWeied. dud co-

alescing with the longitudinal keel in an are reaching to, or nearly to,

the anterior edge of the mesopleurae n,n tt 6

Orifice straight with apex more or less bent posteriad, the latter not

eoaleseing with the longitudinal keel (where this is present)

Poronotellus Kirk.

6. Antennae not very long, second segment not as lone as head, our

species fairly oval. Ovipositor absent 9. un Cardiastethus Fieb.

Antennae yery long, second segment longer than the length of head.

A well-developed ovipositor present in the female _..... Plochiocorella Popp.

Genus LAsieLuipea Retiter, 1895,

Lusiellidea Reuter, 1895. Ent. Mo. Mag., 31, 172.

Body elongate, parallel, flat, shining and smooth. Head about as long as

wide with a short collam, Rostrum reaching middle coxae, first segment reaching

the eyes, second the fore coxae. Pronotum depressed with a median longitudinal

impression, Femora unarmed, embolium narrow. Genotype: L. glaberrima

Reut.

LASIELLIDEA GLABERRIMA Reuter, 1895.

L. glaberrima Reuter, 1894, loc. eil., 172

Piceous, shining all over, rostrum apex of the femora base of the tibiae and

tarsi, pale testaceous, Membrane fulizinous, interior basal angle paler. Scutel-

lum depressed. Second segment of antennae 2} times as long as the first and

as long as the head up to the hind margin of the eyes. Length, 23 mm.

Loe, Vietoria (fide Reuter).

Genus PLOCHIOCORELLA Popp., 1909.

Plochiocorella Poppius, 1909, Ae. Soe. Sei. Fenn., 37 (9), 22.

Large, elongate, above conspicuously shining. Head and pronotum sparsely

pilose, hemielytra more densely pilose. Rostrum surpassing fore coxae, antennao

yery long, noticeably longer than the head and pronotum together. Pronotum

15+ RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

and head about the same length. Lateral margins of seutellum serrate. Orifice

of the scent gland anteriorly directed. Legs long, femora slightly inerassated

and with longish hairs. Genotype: P. elongata Poppius.

There is, so far, only the one species in this genus.

PLOCHIOCORELLA ELONGA'TA Poppius, 1909.

Fig. 3 E.

Plochiocorella elongata Poppius loc. cit., 23.

Dark brown, hemielytra largely yellow, a fairly broad transverse band

across corium at about the level of the apex of clayus, the cumeus and a band

along the inner margin of clavus brown, antennae brownish or yellow, legs and

rostrum largely vellow, the body beneath is brownish black.

The standard measurements from three specimens (in microns) are:

Head, Total leneth, 600-640 (690 if first true rostral segment is included) ;

length in front of eyes, 220-260 (330 if first true rostral segment is included);

length behind eyes, 120-160; length of eyes, 210-220; width across eyes, 430-470;

width of eyes, 120-160; interocular, 160-240; width of collum, 350-360.

Antennae. J, 160 x% 70; II, 530-600 x 40-50; TIT, 510-520 « 20; IV,

370-470 > 20.

Rostrum. 1, 160-210; I1, 690-790; ITI, 290-330,

Pronotum. Anterior width, 330-400; posterior width, 930-950; median

length, 400-430; lateral length, 600-670.

Seutellum. Anterior width, 500-640; inedian length, 500-570; lateral leneth,

500-570,

Legs COXR femur tibia tarsi I II Ut Cl.

I 240-310 640-800 740-790 Aan 70-120 120-140 50

II 220-290 740-790 740-810 50-70 100-120 140-160 50-70

Uti 200-260 880-950 1100-1170 50-90 160 140-170 50-70

Total length, 2,550-3,550; width, 1,030-1,090; length abdomen, 1,650-1,820;

length male genitalia, 380-400; length female oyipositor, 770.

Loc. Queensland: Mt. Tambourine (A. M. Lea); Cairns District (A. M.

Lea, both in S. Aust. Museum); Stanthorpe (E. Sutton, April, 1929, 3 males

and 1 female, in Queensland Museum). New South Wales: Gosford (in 8. Aust.

Museum); Vaucluse (Dr, K, K. Spence); Deep Creek (Dr. K. K. Spence, Feb-

ruary, 1932); Sydney (Dr. K. K. Spence, April, 1931, Reg. No. K64188, all in

Australian Museum).

GrRoss—A REVISION OF THE FLOWER BUGS 155

Genus ScoLoroscenis Fiehber,

Scoloposcelis Fieber, 1864, Wien. Ent, Monat., 7, 61; Van Duzee, 1917, Hem.

Nth. of Mexieo, 297 (Berkeley, California) (syn.); also Distant, 1906, Faun.

Brit. India, 3, 6-7; 1910, loc. cit,, 5, 30; and Poppius, 1909, Ac. Soe. Sei.

Fenn., 37 (9), 25.

Body elongate depressed, glabrous. Head in front of eyes hroad. Rostrum

surpassing the anterior coxae. Orifice of the scent gland curved forward, meso-

sternum flat, medially suleate, acutely produced between the coxae at the base,

apically truncate. Anterior and posterior femora flattened and incrassated,

usually with spines or denticles along their length. Genotype: S. crassipes Flor.

= pulchellus Zett.

There is only one recorded species from these regions and that is of remark-

ably widespread occurrence in the Indo-Australian region,

SCOLOPOSCELIS PARALLELUS (Motseh,), 1863.

Anthocorts parallelus Motschulsky, 1865, Bull. Soe. Mose., 36 (3), 89.

Scoloposcelis parallelus Reuter, 1885, Act. Soe. Sci. Fenn., 14, 717; Distant, 1906,

Faun, Brit. India, 3, 7; 1910, loc. c2t., 5, 304; Poppius, 1910, Wien. Ent, Zeit.,

29, 140,

Scoloposcelis picitcornis Poppius, 1909, Ac. Soe. Sci. Fenn., 387 (9), 26,

(rlossy, piceous or dark brown, tibiae, tarsi and often the coritum basally

and near the claval suture yellowish brown. Head with some long hairs dorsally

and Jaterally, fore and hind angles of the pronotum each with a long hair.

Basal margin of pronotum very slightly excavate, about twice as wide as the

median length and 14 times as wide as the anterior margin. Fore femora with

about four strong teeth, hind femora with more, Length, 2°5 mm.

Distributed from Ceylon to Queensland. One specimen apparently of this

species (for it lacks the hind tibiae on which certain identification can be made)

in 5. Aust. Museum.

Genus OrTHOSOLENIOPSIS. Popp., 1909.

Orthosoleniopsis Poppius, 1909, Ac. Soe. Sei. Fenn., 37 (9), 21.

Klongate, shinine with a lone erect dorsal pilosity. Head clearly longer

than interocular, rostrum not attaining fore coxae, second segment not surpass-

ing the base of the head. Base of margin pronotum deeply excavated. Fore

acetabula simple, fore femora incrassated with short erect setae along the whole

156 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

of the anterior margin, fore tibiae weakly arched. Genotype, O. australis Popp.

Poppits compared this genus with Cardiastethus, but it is likely to be mich

more easily confused with Physoplewrella, indeed it may be only a subgenus of

this genus. It seems to be distinguished by not having the expanded fore

acctabula of Physoplewrella, in having a longer rostrum and a very broad inter-

ocular, The genotype is still the only species included.

ORTHOSOLENIOPSIS AUSTRALIS Popp., 1909.

Orthosoleniopsis australis Poppins, 1909, loc. cit., 22.

Yellowish red. The legs yellow, the eyes, the apex of the second antennal

segment, and the third antennal segment brown, the cuneus brownish red, pilosity

yellow.

Head not longer than wide across the eyes. The second antennal segment

clearly longer than these former, Posterior width of the pronotum about twice

the median length. Posterior portion of the disc finely punctate. Hemielytra

shining indistinctly punetured. Length, 3 mm.

Loc, New South Wales (fide Poppius).

fenus PHysorpLeuRELLA Reuter, 1885.

Physopleurella Reuter, 1885, Ac, Soc. Sei. Fenn., 14, 114 and 124,

Oblong, lateral margins of pronotum and embolium often with long baek-

wardly directed cilia. Ocelli very large and prominent,

Rostrum short, thick, hardly (or not) surpassing the base of the head,

Anterior collar of the pronotum distinct but tenuous. Fore acetabula markedly

intumescent, anterior femora very incrassated, in our species armed with long

spines along the inner argin, sometimes in several rows. Fore tibiae arched.

Seutellum with lateral margins serrate. Genotype: P. mundula (White),

This genus is well represented in this region by at least five species. I

have found the genus extremely difficult to treat for there is a great deal of

uncertainty over the identity of the three species deseribed here. Physopleurella

mundula B. White has a conspicuous dark stripe down portion of the centre of

the seutellum according to Zimmerman’s figure, a Fijian specimen showing this

character has, therefore, been relegated to that species. A series of specnmens

from N.S,W, and Queensland agree in many points with Poppius’ Ph, armata

and in other points with his PA. obscura, showing aiougst themselves quite a

range of colour variation, I have, therefore, followed Usinger and regarded

these two speeies as synonymous, arid, as the firstnanied is first in Poppius’ paper,

Gross—A REVISION OF THE FLOWER Bucs 157

the species stands as Ph, armata. The remaining specimens fall into three new

species,

These five species may be separated by the following key:

J. Apex of ahdomen with long hairs a. aa. ike «mnt wij 2

Apex of abdomen with but very short hairs 0.0 4

2. Seutellum with a broad brown stripe running from the base to two-

thirds way to apex, male genitalia in the form of an expanded, back-

wardly facing, cup with two very lone sinistrally directed processes

mundula B. White.

Scutelltiim concolorous — .... ee . gene Op 3

3. Male genitalia composed of a large flat plate with a short process

(fig. 3.1) hardly exceeding the limits of the plate. Sides of pronotum

nearly straight, broadly rounded anteriorly

armata Popp. = Ph. obscura Popp.

Male genitalia composed of an expanded posteriorly directed cup

from which emerge 2 long processes directed sinistrally

pactfica nov. (fig. 3 H).

4, Lateral margins of pronotim almost stralght, almost without hairs,

broadly rounded anteriorly vist mk =. bribiensis nov.

Lateral margins of pronotum sinuate, with Sng hairs j in the anterior

portion, anterior angles almost straight walle pani ait australis nov.

PHYSOPLEURELLA MUNDULA (White),

Fig, 3 F,

Cardiastethus mundula White 1877, A.M.N.IT. (4), 20, 111.

Physopleurella mundula Reuter, 1885, Ac. Soc, Sei. Fenn., 14, 125; Usinger, 1946,

Bernice P. Bishop Mus. Bull., 189, 55; Zimmerman, 1948, Insects of Hawaii,

3, 177, fig.

Pale rufous brown, with fairly dense long ochraceous pilosity, vertex of

the head, first segment. of antennae, the dise of the pronotum, a broad longitudinal

stripe in the basal two-thirds of the scutellum, the cuneus, most of the under-

side of the body and femora darker. Collum very short, anterior margin of pro-

notum straight, posterior margin excavate, lateral margins sinuate and strongly

ciliate, anterior angles very flat.

Orifice of scent gland directed anteriorly at apex, mesopleurae striate.

Male genitalia in the form of an expanded backwardly-directed cup with 2 long

thin sinistrally-directed processes, curving anteriorly at the tip. Apex of

abdomen with long hairs.

158 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The standard measurements (in microns) from one specimen are:

Head, Total leneth, 450; length in front of eyes, 140; length behind eyes,

90; length of an eye, 210-220; width across eyes, 410; width of an eye, 160;

interoeular, 100; width of collum, 280,

Antennae. I, 100 x 50; IT, 360-380 % 50; IIT, 190-210 % 20; IV, 210 «

30.

Rostrum. 393.

Pronotum. Anterior width, 330; posterior width, 790; median length, 400;

lateral length, 550.

Scutellum. Anterior width, 620; median length, 530; lateral length, 500-530.

Legs coxa femur tibia tarai I iI TIL Cl.

I 200-220 520-530 430-450 30 30 50 30

II 200-220 500-520 450 30 70 80-100 30

TTI 210-220 590-620 670 30-40 90 100-120 30

Total length, 2,500; width, 1,120; length abdomen, 860; length male genitalia,

240, White quotes the length as 2? mm.

Loc. Fiji: Moturiki (A. M. Lea, June, 1 male in 8. Aus. Museum). Is

apparently widespread over the Pacific, being recorded from Hawaii and Guam.

PHYSOPLEURELLA PACIFICA Sp. moy.

Fig. 3 G-I.

Dark brown. Second, third and fourth segments of antennae, ocelli, apical

portion of seutellum, rostrum, underside of embolium and tibiae and tarsi yellow.

Eyes red to black, underside of abdomen (except centrally) infuscated. Pilosity

golden, first segment of antennae, a transverse patch on hind margin of pro-

notum yellowish brown. Cuneus with a reddish tinge.

Collum distinct, glabrous. Anterior margin of pronotum straight, posterior

margin deeply excavated, lateral margins sinuate, prominently ciliate, anterior

angles nearly straight. Pronotum with a centrally raised portion which has a

longitudinal channel. Seutellum raised anteriorly, transversely impressed about

halfway back, then plane in posterior half. Mesopleurae striate, orifice of scent

gland directed posteriorly at the apex.

Lateral margins of hemielytra slightly sinuate, ciliate.

Male genitalia in the form of an expanded backwardly directed cup with

two processes sinistrally directed, these processes shorter and stouter than P.

mundula.

Gross—A REVISION OF THE FLOWER Bucs 159

The standard measurements of 6 specimens treated statistically (in microns)

are:

Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff, of

Mean deviation range ringe variation

Head.

Length of head 500-0+9-6 23-5+6-8 429-5-570-5 465-534 4s7

Length of head

in front of eyes 183-3-+8-6 §-8+2-5 156+9-209.7 172-189 4-8

Length of head

behind eyes 52-108

Length of eyes 222-8+4-7 16-8+3-3 173-9-27 1-7 207-241 7°3

Width of head

across eyes 418-745-7 13-9+4-0 377+ 0-460-4 396-420 +3

Width of eye 136-5+6-8 23-62-4-8 55-7-207-3 103-172 17-0

Interoeular 167-6+5-5 13-6+4-0 126-8-208-4 121-172 8-1

Width of collum 295 - 62-10-23 25-147-2 220-3-370-9 275-310 8-5

Antennae,

I 103-155

TI 426-44+9-8 32-S+6-9 328-0-524-8 418-500 737

TIL 278-6+3-6 8142-5 254-5-349~.1 275-293 2.9

IV 241-0+5-1 11-6+3-6 206-2-275-8 224-258 4-8

Rostrum.

1 and It 262-0+6-0 13-6+4-3 211-2-302-8 207-276 a-2

Tit 174-8+2-8 6-9+1-9 154-1-195-5 172-189 ag

Pronotum.

Anterior width 367 -3+22-0 54-0411-7 205-3-529-3 293-430 14-7

Posterior width 889-5+16-3 40-0+11-5 769-5-1009-5 844-946 4:5

Median length 430-3+6-4 15-744:-5 353+2-477-4 413-448 3-6

Lateral length 620-9+9-3 32-5+6-6 525-4-716-4 §85-671 5-2

Scutellum.

Anterior width §54-0+25-5 62-5+18-0 426-5-681-5 500-654 11-3

Median length 441-8+9-3 23-0+6-6 372-8-510-8 413-551 5-2

Lateral length 490-8+9-3 32-4+6-6 393-6-588-0 465-551 6-6

Legs.

Coxa I 195-6+6-7 22-3+4-7 129. 7-262 -5 172-241 11-4

Coxa IT 205-1+-6-+8 22-544-7 137-6-272-6 172-241 11-0

Coxa III 205-0+6-1 21-144-3 141-7-268-3 189-275 10-3

Femur I 571-4+20-2 64-1+14°-3 379-1-763-7 602-688 11-2

Femur IT 561-44+13-8 43-7+9-7 430-3-692-5 517-637 7-8

Femur III 631-0+17-4 60-4+12-3 509-8-752-2 671-774 9-6

Tibia I 560-4+-5-9 17-7+4-1 508-3-612-5 534-602 3-2

Tibia IT 560-3+-12-5 39-54+8-8 450-8-669-8 517-637 7-0

Tibia TIT 812-1+-23-3 77-42416-5 579-9-104-4 602-947 9-5

Tarsus I I 34-52

Tarsus I If 34-69

Tarsus I TIT 86

Tarsus IT I 52-69

Tarsus IT II 52-121

Tarsus If IIT 86-121

Tarsus III I 52-69

Tarsus IIT IT 103-121

Tarsus III III 103-138

Claw I 34-52

Claw IL 34-52

Claw ITI 34-52

160 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff. of

Mean deviation range range variation

Total length 2748+66-2 162-0+46-8 2362-0--3234-0 2580-4000 5-9

Total width 927-2+23-1 56-8+16-4 756-8-1097-6 880-1000 6-1

Length of abdomen 1222-0+53-3 130-5437-7 830-0-1614-0 1050-1448 16-9

length of male

genitalia 327-362

Length of female

genitalia 155

Hemielytra exceed the length of the abdomen and therefore the quoted

total leneth by about 140,.

Loc. Fiji: Viti Levu (A. M. Lea, Holotype ¢, Reg. No. I 20068, Allotype

2, Reg. No. I 20069, and 3 Paratypes, Reg. Nos. I 20070 and I 20067). Queens-

land: Cairns District (A. M. Lea, Paratype 8, Reg. No. I 20066, all in S. Aust.

Museum).

PHYSOPLEURELLA ARMATA Popp., 1909.

Fig. 3 J-L.

Physopleurella armata Poppius, 1909, Ac. Soc. Sci. Fenn., 37 (9), 12.

Physopleurella obscura Popp., loc. ctt., 13.

Yellowish brown, fairly shining above. Hemielytra dull with semi-erect

sparse hairs. Beneath, first segment of antennae and tip of second, seutellum

and legs darker.

Head with a prominent collum. The anterior margin of pronotum almost

straight, posterior margin deeply excavate, lateral margins straight, ciliate,

margined, anterior angles lying behind the collar, broadly rounded.

Seutellum depressed, hemielytra longer than the abdomen, clavus, corium

and cuneus indistinctly punctate. Male genitalia composed of a large plate

with short process on the left side placed on the edge and sinistrally and an-

teriorly directed (fig. 3K).

The standard measurements (in microns) treated statistically from nine

specimens are:

Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff. of

Mean deviation range range variation

Head.

Length of head 558-2+-12-4 37-1+8-3 446-9-669-5 482-602 6-6

Length of head

in front of eyes 199-0+5-2 15-5+3:-6 152-5-245-5 172-224 7-8

Length of head

behind eyes 52-155

Length of an eye 250-6+3-1 12-4+2-] 213-4-287-8 224-258 4-9

Width of head

across eyes 476-3+4-0 12-0+2:-8 440-3-512-3 448-482 2-5

Width of an eye 138-189

Interocular 134-2-+-5-5 16-54+3-8 84-7-233-7 121-172 12-3

Width of collum 356-3+-5-7 17-0+4-0 301-3-407-3 345-396 4-8

Gross—A REVISION OF THE FLOWER BuGS

Mean

Antennae.

II 447-6+5-3

TIL 259-6+-4-8

Iv 264-5+5-5

Rostrum.

T and IL 303-5+10-3

III 232-6+4-0

Pronotum.

Anterior width 558-7+10-7

Posterior width 1071-0+12-1

Median length 430-6+8-7

Lateral length 674-845-1

Scoutellum,

Anterior width 719-0+16-2

Median length 608-0+11-5

Lateral length 633-0+7-9

Legs.

Coxa I 277-4+6-3

Coxa IL 262+-2+7-1

Coxa IIT 242-14+19-9

Femur I 631-8+12-8

Femur IT §84-2+43-0

Femur IIt 722-7+16-4

Tibia I 580-1+6-3

Tibia IT 504-7+11-0

Tibia LIT 873-7+13-3

Tarsus I T

Tarsus T IT

Tarsus I 11I

Tarsus IT I

Tarsus IIT IT

Tarsus IT IIL

Tarsus [IL fT

Tarsus IIT IT

Tarsus III III

Claw I

Claw IT

Claw IIT

Total length B387-O+24-1

Total width 1147 -0+22-8

Length of abdomen 1753-0+21-6

Length of male

genitalia

Length of female

genitalia

Standard

deviation

—

Pees

ae eo

260+

we oe

cae e

Ro BO He &

eSxsuas

RadgtHe:

A ie bo

oe op oS bo

Lowad

It tt EE + Ht

iit

one bo

7T2+3+17>0

H8-8+16-1

64-4+15-1

Theoretical

range

381-3-515-9

211+6-307-

217-1-311-

221-9-385-1

199-1-266-1

462-1-653-3

911-0-1231-0

352-6-308-6

610-0-739-6

583-5-854-5

504-8-711-2

531+ 6-633 - 6

199 -4-355-4

173-7-350-7

473-4-790-

546-4-625-

531-3-914-

501-2-659-

373-0-636-

708-4-1039-0

Boro

5170+0-3604+0)

942-0-1352-0

1530-0-1946-0

Observed

range

86-138

x 50

413-482

x 50-60

224-275

« 20

241-293

258-345

224-258

534-620

1017-1138

396-465

637-724

654-792

68-671

585-688

258-345

207-827

241-327

620-723

482-637

620-826

584-620

482-602

7238-929

30-70

52-86

50-100

30-70

50-90

70-120

50-70

90-100

90-140

30-70

3170-8876

1030-1280

1550-2150

275-860

189-207

161

Coeff. of

variation

eo to O1

"ee @

Nuonm

occ

. the

wo-I-7

G22 01 TS He Go Os

oe ek Stoo

aon Ls

a ae ng

ace

Hemielytra exceed the length of the abdomen and therefore the quoted length

by about 180p,.

Loc, Japan and New Guinea (fide Poppius). Queensland: Cairns District

(A. M. Lea, in S. Aust. Museum).

Museum).

New South Wales: Gostord (in 8S. Aust.

162 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

PHYSOPLEURELLA BRIBIENSIS Sp. nov.

Fig. 4 A, B.

Elongate oval. Above and below castaneous, cuneus and eyes darker. Legs

possibly lighter.

Pronotum similar microscopically to P. pacifica, but the lateral margins are

margined, straight with the anterior angles broadly rounded like P. armata, but.

not ciliate as in the latter. Scutellum anteriorly raised, transversely suleate well

behind the middle.

Mesopleurae striate, metapleural orifice curved strongly forward almost to

fore margin of pleurite. Apex of abdomen without prominent long hairs.

The standard measurements (in microns) from one female are:

Head. Total length, 530; leneth in front of eyes, 170; length behind eyes,

160; length of an eye, 250; width of eyes, 470; width of eye, 130; interocular,

140; width of collum, 350.

Antennae. 1, 120; (1, 400; TIT, 250-260; IV, 220-230.

Rostrum. Missing.

Pronotum. Anterior width (across collar), 380; posterior width, 1,030;

median length, 410; lateral length, 570-620.

Scutellum. Anterior width, 620; median length, 520; lateral length, 570-590.

Legs coxa femur tibia tarsi T Ir TIr Cl.

I 260-280 620-650 530 30 50-70 90 missing

It 220-260 500-570 480-530 50 70 100 missing

III 240-310 620-690 770 missing missing missing missing

Total length, 2,970; width, 1,140; length abdomen, 1,640; length female

genitalia, 210.

Closely allied to the following species in the very short hairs at the apex

of the abdomen and almost elabrous sides of the pronotwn, but in the shape

of the pronotum it resembles Ph. armata.

Loc, Queensland, Bribie Island, Moreton Bay (Lea and Hacker, Holotype

2, Reg. No, 120063, in S. Aust, Museum).

PHYSOPLEURELLA AUSTRALIS Sp. nov.

Fig. 4 C, D.

Elongate oval. Dark brown; middle of venter, tibiae and tarsi, rostrum,

humeral angles of pronotum and hemielytra yellow. Pilosity golden. Eyes

black, ocelli red. Head with a distinct collum, pronotum with a distinct though

Gross—A REVISION OF THE FLOWER Bucs 163

Fig. 4. A-B, Physopleurcila bribiensis sp. nov. Female. A, head and pronotum; B,

apex of abdomen from above. C-D, Physopleurella australis sp. nov. Female. C, head and

Pronotum; D, apex of abdomen. E-I, series of dorsal outline sketches showing methods of

taking some of the standard measurements. E, head and pronotum, and T, apex of abdomen

of female of Physopleurella bribiensis sp. noy.; F, fore right leg of Oplobates femoralis Reut.;

G, apex of abdomen of male of Physopleurella armata; H, apex of abdomen of female

Xylocoris queenslandicus sp. nov. (All enlarged 40 diameters.)

ac, anterior width of scutellum; aw, anterior width of pronotum; i, interocular; 11, length

tarsus 1; 72, length tarsus 11; /3, length tarsus IIL; Ja, length of head in front of eyes; Ir,

length of claw; le, length of eve; /f, length of femur; lg, length male genitalia; [h, length

of head; JU, lateral length of scutellum; /o, length female genitalia (or ovipositor when

present) ; 7p length of head behind eyes; Js, lateral length of seutellum; 7t, length of tibia:

lz, length coxa; me, median length of seutellum; mi, median length of pronotum; pw, posterior

width of pronotum; wac, width of head across eyes; we, width of-an eye; wh, width of collum,

16+ RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

tenuous collar, anterior margin almost straight, posterior margin deeply excavate,

lateral margins sinuate, not conspicuously ciliate, and hardly marginate.

Scutellum slightly raised anteriorly, slightly impressed two-thirds of the

way back. Sides of hemielytra not sinuate. Apex of abdomen without long

hairs. Mesopleurae striate.

The standard measurements for one female specimen (in microns) are:

Head, Total length, 590; length in front of eyes, 210; length behind eyes,

120; length of eyes, 260; width across eves, 470; width of an eye, 160-170; inter-

ocular, 140; width of collum, 310.

Antennae. I, 140 * 50; If, 460-480; JIT, 210 «* 20; IV, 210-240 x 20.

Rostrwm. I and I, 241; ITI, 172.

Pronotum. Anterior width, 360; posterior width, 1,020; median length, 500;

lateral length, 650-700.

Scutellum. Anterior width, 670; median length, 590; lateral Jength, 550-640.

Legs coxa femur tibia tarsi I IL III Cl.

I 290-310 680-670 550-570 30 50 90 30

Il 260-280 600-620 490-640 ? ? q ?

IIT 280-290 660-670 910-930 50-70 100 120-140 30-50

Total length, 3,570; total width, 1,170; length of abdomen, 1,810; length of

female genitalia, 189.

Loc. Queensland ; Cowell Creek (McNamara, Holotype ?, Reg. No. 1 20064,

in §, Aust. Museum).

This species is allied to Ph. bribiensis in not having long hairs at the apex

of the abdomen. The side of pronotum is sinuate and strongly ciliate, resembling

in the latter respect Ph. mundula, Ph. armata and Ph. pacifica, and in the former

Ph. mundula and Ph. pactfica.

MOLLUSCA OF THE OUTER HARBOUR, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY BERNARD C.. COTTON, CONCHOLOGIST, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

There is a rapidly-growing interest in shell collecting among students and school teachers in South

Australia; this paper has been prepared, therefore, to explain how a typical beach may be explored.

One of the best places for shell collecting near Adelaide is in the vicinity of the Outer Harbour,

situated about fourteen miles from the city. In a radius of one mile, at the tip of LeFevre Peninsula,

is an area of river, mangrove swamps, estuarine mud-flats, weeds, rocks and stones. Practically all

the variety of marine fauna a collector is likely to obtain in the upper protected waters of Gulf St.

Vincent is represented here.

MOLLUSCA or ru#zs OUTER HARBOUR, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By BERNARD C, COTTON, Concnonocist, Sout Austrari4an Museum.

Plate xxiii and text fig. 1.

INTRODUCTION.

THERE is a rapidly-growing interest in shell collecting among students and sehool

teachers in South Australia; this paper has been prepared, therefore, to explain

how a typical beach may he explored.

One of the best places for shell collecting near Adelaide is in the vicinity

of the Outer Harbour, situated about fourteen miles from the city. In a radius

of one mile, at the tip of LeFevre Peninsula, is an area of river, mangrove

swamps, estuarine mud-flats, weeds, rocks and stones. Practically all the variety

of marine fauna a colleetor is likely to obtain in the upper protected waters of

Gulf St, Vincent is represented here,

This account records where certain well-known molluses live, as distinet

from the many kinds one may find cast up haphazardly on the beaches after

storms. Years of patient and experienced collecting are required to obtain the

300-odd species which live here.

Most of the shells mentioned are figured and briefly described in ‘‘South

Australian Shells,” published by the South Australian Museum, and sets of

35 mm. colour slides are being prepared under the auspices of the Museum

and Visual Aid Section of the Education Department for exhibition in schools.

The slides can be obtained by schools on loan through the Visual Aid Section

and the explanatory text is contained in the publication mentioned,

Comparatively rapid changes have taken place on our beaches during the

last few years through natural and artificial causes. The cumulative effect of

recent violent storms coincident with high spring tides, protruding sea walls,

and, to a lesser extent, minor sea level rise, have measurably modified the pat-

tern of scouring deposition along this coast. At Glenelg and Henley Beach fine

sand has been temporarily removed in places, exposing the remains of a man-

erove swamp which flourished several thousand years ago in this area, during

the Mid-Reeent Period, when the sea-level was some 10-14 feet higher, At

Brighton an old gum tree im situ was uncovered, and also an ancient whale

skeleton.

166 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Sand drawn from sand dunes at storm level and from the sea floor further

south may re-cover these areas. Sand movement is essentially northwards; sand

depositions are oceurring at Outer Harbour, and finer materials are silting

mangrove areas further north towards Port Wakefield.

NORTH BANK

PORT ADELAIDE RIVER

YACHT SYDADRON

OUTER

HARBOUR

BREAKWATER fy

TORRENS

ISLAND

BREAKWATER

SAND FLAT.

UNCOVERED AT LOW TIDE

LEFEVRE PENINSULA

SAMPHIRE SWAMP.

COVERED AT WiGit TIDE

ONE FIT MILE

Fig. 1, Sketch map of the northern part of LeFevre Peninsula.

Within the next few years portion of the Outer Harhour surveyed here

is to be entirely altered to form a ‘‘Greater Port Adelaide."’ It is, therefore,

suggested that biological surveys of local beaches should prove instructive and

valuable to future generations, following the rapid changes and obliteration of

certain areas. Here a remarkable opportunity is presented to observe the con-

tinuous environmental adjustments which accompany changes in sea-floor con-

figuration and the altered pattern of sand deposition.

COTTON—MOLLUSCA OF THE OUTER HARBOUR, SOUTH AUSTRALIA 167

OUTER IARBOUR.

At the southern end of the Harbour is a long stone breakwater about one

mile long protecting the wharf and entrance channel to the Port River; facing

and parallel to it is another similar breakwater on the opposite side of the

channel. Fyrom the two breakwaters northwards extend sand-nud flats which

are exposed at low tide. At the tip of LeMevre Peninsula there is a mangrove

swap, numerous small estuarine creeks, and a samphire swamp, inundated at

hieh tide, Down the east coast of the Peninsula facing Torrens Island there

are odd stretches of the Port River mudhbanks, where industries have not ab-

seured them. Such a river bank is at Snowden Beach in the south of the

Peninsula,

Jn pl, xxiii, fig. |, ean be seen the two hundred aeres of beach sored by

silting south of the southern breakwater, and also, exposed at low tide, the

sand and mud beach around the northern breakwater, In pl. xxiii, fiz, 2, the

sand and mud flat is on the right of the Royal Yacht Squadron Harbour, the

raised bank of dead shell-sand is on the right of the raised cirele, and the sand-

mud flat of the northern bank is situated on the far side of the channel, Fi, J

presents a sketch map of the northern part of LeFevre Peninsula.

Sourr or THE BREAKWATER,

Thirty years ago the bay in the south, adjoining the harbour projection,

was filled with deep sea-water, but it is now silted up, forming a sandy beach.

This southern breakwater has acted as a groyne, catching the drifting sand,

and thus building np 200 acres of fine-saud beach. Foreshore walls further south

alone Gulf St. Vineent have aided seouring and the shallow layers of fine sand

resting above old mangrove swamps are being carried northwards, exposing the

mangrove Inud on formerly attractive beaches.

At very low tide two shallow-water sandbanks beyond aud parallel to the

shore can be explored, On the outer bank lives the rare and attractive Frilled

Cockle Callanaiis disjecta, the Heart Cockle Cardium vacketti, the Feather

Cockle Tawera gallinula, and the closely allied Grouse Cockle Tawera lagopus

(the latter favouring deeper water), the Globular Ark Veletuceta radians, the

Date Shell Solemya australis and the rarer Southern Finger Solen vaginoides,

which protrudes from the sand at night time until early morning, rapidly bur-

rowing immediately the early sun rays appear, In a muddy sponge lives the

Doughboy or Prickly Seallop Mimachlamys asperrimus, and evawling on the

sand is the Smooth Mitre Vicimitra glabra, the Triangle Murex Pterynotus tri-

Jormis, the Sea-hubble Quibbula tenwisimma and the False Helmet Hypocassis

168 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

bicarinata. On the first or mside bank live colonies of the large White Cockle

clustramactra pura, the Southern Cockle clustvomactra australis and the Pink

Sunset Shell Tellina albinella wedged in fire sand, Rarely, the King Seallop

Notovola alba and, move frequently, the Queen Seallop Hyuichlamys bifrons,

tu which is sonietimes attached the Southern Slipper Zeacrypla immersa, vest ou

the saud surface,

Near low water mark the Sand Cockle MKatelysia scalarina digs itself im

with almost. invariably a tult of “Tangle Weed” Entero morphe intestinalis on

the protruding posterior end. High up on the sand flat near high tide mark

is the Adelaide Triangle Cockle Anapella adelaidae. In certain areas this small

white cockle is plentiful; it is good food, sweet and delicate in taste, but rather

too small for anyone but a confirmed cockle connoisseur, Lower down the beach

in pools left by the tide, just beneath the sand, lives the Small Wedge Amphi-

desma dngusta and the Blunt Wedee Amphidesma cunecta, in quantity. Silver

gulls ean be seen “paddling” the wet sand ai low tide making numerous depres-

sions about nine inches in diameter. Fron the disturbed sand and water the

gulls pick up food—Small Wedge coekles, minute Amphipoda, wud other smal]

erustaceans which live there, On clear areas nearby are sharp carved knife-like

washes in the sand, These are (hie tracks of the Small Wedge, and a specimen

may be found hal! dug-in at the newer end of the eut. Preving on these small

cockles is the red-banded Flame Borer Niotha pyrrhus. A cockle can be upened

and used as bait to attract the Flame Borer and viher carnivorous gastropods.

Washed up in spouges on this beach after storms is the White Lima slis-

froline gemini, and soimetinies also the Oriental Lima Promantellum orientale

from deeper water, where it lives it colonies attached to broken Heart Cockles

atid Razor Shells, and also the Port Lincoln Oyster Ostrea sinuata, which grows

partienlarly well when attached to aceumulations of Razor Shell farther out.

The light and delicate Wing Shell Llectroma georgiana attached to weed is cast

high np on the beach.

Dead shells of Sseallops, oysters, Heart ('ockles, Dov Coclkles, and even

Bednall’s Trigonia Neotrigania bednalli, washed up from ten or fifteen fathoms,

may have attached to the inner surface the tear-drop shaped container of the

Flask Cockle Gastrachaena tasmanica. The container is composed of marine

debris, shell fragments, [Lydrozva, Lace Coral, Beyozoa, aud so on.

THe BREAKWATER,

When the tide is well out an examination of the lower rocks of the hreak-

water can be made. Most of the reef-living shells ave found here alive in shallow

water, the Round Back Sea Kar Fxohaliotis cyclobates, Torr’s Periwinkle Aus-

trocochlea terri, Black Key Hole Limpet Sophismalapas migrita, Common War-

COTTON—MOLLUSCA OF THE OUTER HARBOUR, SOUTH AUSTRALIA 169

rener Huninella undulata, Black Periwinkle Nerita melanotraga, Common Lim-

pet Cellana tramoserica, Conniwink Bembicitum melanostoma (which deposits

groups of bean-shaped, jelly-like ege masses about one-eighth of an inch long

on the surface of the sand, each capsule containing about 50 eggs), the Dog Whelk

Dicathais textiliosa (with its numerous close-packed, small horny, tumbler-

shaped yellow egg capsules attached to rocks or broken shell), the Rough Cockle

Chama ruderalis, and the Rock Shell Cleidothaerus albidus, and sometimes the

Thorny Oyster Spondylus tenellus. Below low-tide the Jingle Shell Monia tone

is found attached to stones by means of the shelly plug which protrudes through

a hole in the lower valve.

Some of the commoner chitons, for instance, the Lined Chiton Ischnochiton

lineolatus, and Decayed Chiton Heterozona cariosa, cling to the rocks. In

deeper water, on rocks further out, live the Peppered Cowry Notocypraea

piperita, the rare Gruner Warrener Huninella gruneri, and the Lyre Shell Lyria

mitraeformis, the last active at night and readily collected in number if a suit-

able light is available. Towards the end of the breakwater, attached to the

rocks, the large Port Melbourne Mussel Mytilus planulatus has been taken, and

also the Rostrate Mussel, Brachyodontes rostratus. In shallow water, attached

to rocks, broken shell and debris, is a bed of Beak Mussels Brachyodontes erosus,

solitary among the limy tubes of Serpulidae such as Galeolaria caespitosa, while

imbedded in sponges is the Bearded Horse Mussel Modiolus areolatus, and less

commonly the Ridge Mussel Modiolus albicostus. Other Serpulae tubes attached

to rocks are the solitary Galeolaria hystrix, the little flat, spiral, Spirorbis, and

the world-wide Serpula vermicularis.

Away from the breakwater to the south below low tide are meadows of the

plants Posidonia and Cymodocea, giving a dark blue appearance to the water.

In the latter lives the beautiful Pheasant Shell Phasianella australis, and these,

when taken alive, have the delicate aperture of the shell undamaged and the

shelly operculum in place, making them far more attractive to the student and

collector. Many other weed-loving shells inhabit these meadows, such as the

Spindle Shell Colus australis, the Waved Spindle Propefusus undulatus and

Tulip Shell Plewroploca australasia, with its small bell-like horny transparent

ego capsules attached in groups to dead shells.

INSIDE THE BREAKWATER.

When the tide is particularly low an examination of the inside of the break-

water is well worth while. In the masses of weed growing just below low tide

mark are the Stenochitons, which live only in Southern Australia. If you pull

out a handful of the common strap-like weed Posidonia, beneath the sheath and

near the root you will find the larger Weed Chiton Stenochiton longicymba which

170) RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

should be carefully removed with the finger and thumb and placed in the eol-

lecting jar of seawater. so that if ean he carefully tied down to # flat lath and

dried in the laboratory, Tf removed and allowed to dry without this attention,

it curls up tightly and cannot be straightened without fractare. All Chitons

eurl when removed rom the water, the outer shell surface thus forming a

protective covering, Stenachiton longicymba is in quantity at this locality. Ou

the leaves of Posidonia may be tound the small and inconspicuous Weed Limpet

Navowla parva, and the Pilsbry Weed Chiton Stenochiton pilsbryanus, once

called Stenochiton posidonialis trom its habitat. Among the roots of the weed

live the Milkstone Cockle Venerupis galactites. You may next observe a patel:

of wiry weed with a green leat almost hike that of an olive tree; this is Cymodocea.

Pull out a bunch of the weed for on it live, beside the Pheasant Shell, a number

of smaller weed shells belonging to the gens Phasianotrochus; the Small Neck-

lace Phasianotrochus irisudontes, Red Lip Necklace Phasianotrochus bellulus,

Sharp Necklace Phasiantrochus apicinus, the Hoop Shell Thaloli conica, the rare

shining green Green Mouth Odontotrochus chlorostomus and the common Banded

Kelp Shell Bankiviu fasciate all oceur on Cymodocea, Tf you examine the weed

carefully you may find a very amall and rare Slit Shell Seissurona vincentiame,

or one of its relatives, The Dove Shell Zemitrella lincolnensis and its relations

may also be present; in addition may occur the little Emerald Mussel Museulus

pauliueciae, also smaller Starfish, and the delicate spined Sea Urehin slmblyp-

neustes pallidus, on which lives the glassy, curved commensal Mulima commen-

sais, On the stems of Cymodocea lives a suvall narrow Cymodoeea Chiton N/enn-

chitan eymadocealis.

NortH BREAKWATER,

If a boat is available, an examination of the breakwater on the far side

of the ehannel will produce worth-while results. Here will be found the reet-

living shells, Limpets, Peviwinkles and Warreners, like those on the south side

of the breakwater previously examined, and in deeper water, crawling on sand

patches at the south end of the sand pit and inside the breakwater, the Southern

Olive Oliva australis, In addition one may see here on rocks helow low tide

the Flamed Limpet Chiazasmed flammea, the Seven Flame limpet Notacnien

septiformés, and Sealy Limpet Patellanax squamifera, the Marbled Limpet ¢o!-

lisellinn laristrigata, the Worm Shell Vermicularia sipho (whieh incubates (he

eves within the shell), the Split Worm. Stiquarta australis with its bottle-cort

like opereuliin and the Wammer Oyster Wellews meridianus. Hamner Oysters

should he placed in water for 3 or 4 days, then scrubbed after reniovine the

animal, Tie the shells together with string and dry and preserve the hair-like

COTTON—MOLLUSCA OF THE OUTER HARBOUR, SOUTH AUSTRALIA 171

byssus. Numerous blue Australwinks Melarhaphe wnifasciata, Conniwinks Bem-

bicitum melanostoma and closely related species, and the Speckled Periwinkle

Fractarmilla concamerata are found on the rocks, also the large Stronger Spined

Sea Urehin Meliocidaris erythrogramma, sometimes carrying the commensal

Brown Stylifer Stylifer brunneus.

THE Sanp anp Mup F1.ats.

At low tide an expanse of sand and mud flats are exposed on the north

and west side of the Royal Yacht Squadron Harbour. At low to half tide mark,

on the banks of the channel leading to the Port River, live the three common

cockles, the Sand Cockle Katelysia scalarina, the Mud Cockle Katelysia peroni

and the rarer Corrugated Cockle Katelysia corrugata, favouring mud to sand

respectively, all closely alike in appearance. Numbers of people are sometimes

seen working with rakes, spades, or bare hands collecting these cockles at low

tide for food and bait. They are collected and sold commercially bottled,

soused in vinegar. The cockles live just a few inches below the surface when

the tide is down. As an experiment, open a cockle shell and place it on

the surface of the sand. In a few minutes the small Borer Whelk Parcanassa

pauperata will appear nearby, or some feet away, and will approach the open

cockle. Take out a pocket lens and watch the Borer Whelk insert its trunk-like

proboscis into the flesh of the cockle. The radula or ribbon tongue with its

minute teeth tear the cockle fiesh to threads and pass it down the proboscis.

The procedure ean be easily watched under the lens. The Flame Borer, Lined

Whelk Cominella lineolata, Small Ivory Whelk Cominella eburnea, Burchard’s

Borer Parcanassa burchardi, and even the Sand Snail Uber conicum may join

in the feast. In pools left by the tide is Goldstein’s Litozamia Litozamia gold-

steint.

Just below the surface of the sand in a few inches of water when the tide

is at its lowest lives the large cream coloured slug-like Har Snail Hctosinum

zonale, with a small ear-like shell on its back. Having a somewhat similar

appearance, and living in a similar position, is the Angas Philine Philine angast,

with its delicate internal bubble-like shell and three strong internal gizzard

plates for crushing the small shells which it eats. From November to February

the peculiar gelatinous, balloon-shaped egg-capsule is found near the Philine,

which burrows just below the sand. The ege capsule is two to three inches

long and is attached to its sandy base by a thin filament. Beds of Razor Shell

Pinna dolabrata oceur in places such as at the northern entrance to the Royal

Yacht Squadron Harbour and are exposed at extremely low tide. The shells

172 Recorps or THE S,A, MuSEUM

are anchored by the hairy byssus at the lower pointed end while the sharp and

dangerous upper edges of the shell project above the surface. Wher colleeting

a few of these for the cabinet, preserve the hair-like byssus, soak it in tepid

water until soft, place on a white blotting paper and stroke out with a camel-

haw brush. Finally replace the byssus in the cleaned shell and eum into position,

The animal is large and is moderately esteemed as ood, particularly the large,

ereamy-white adductor musele. On the Razor Shell erawl yarious eommon

chitons, particularly the Oval Chiton Ischnochiton contractus, Attached to

dead Razor Shells are found the Jingle Shell Mona ione, the Southern Slipper

Zeucrypta tmmersa, the Port Lincoln Oyster Ostrea siunata, and, anchored by

the byssus, are numerous Hammer Oysters Mulleus meridianus. Atmone the

Razor Shells is found the Southern Cone Floraconus anemone (a relative of the

larger tropieal poisonous cones), the Triangle Murex Prerynotus trifornus, the

Queen Seallop and good specimens of the Round Back Sea Ear. with occasionally

the Cap Limpet Capiulus australes attached. Protected by and within the dead

Razor Shells may be found the smal! Ringed Octopus Mapaluchlaena moacnlose

and the Lined Squid Sepiolvidea lineoluta. Numerous eges of the former are

sometimes attached to the inner surface of the dead Razor Shell.

Below low water, atnongst fon! stones and weed, are the burrows of a shrimp

Agius plectorhynchus; living in the burrows with the shrimp is the small and

peculiar flat. bivalve, the Moon Cockle Ephippodonta macdougalli. Adult speei-

mens ean sometimes be seen ereeping about the stones daring Mareh and April.

The shrimp burrow is marked by a light orange eolowred sponge and the Pagoda

Cockle Mylhita deshayesi is also found in the burrow. The barrow seems par-

ticularly attractive to eertain small ineubatory commensal, nestling bivalves,

for in it ave found Mylhita tasmanien, W. genmata, Kellia angasiana, R. austra-

his, Marikellia vincentensis, MW, yorkensis, Lepton trigonale, L. ovatum and L.

australe,

Buried deep in sandy nnd is the large Hard Clam Lutraria rhynchaena, the

shell gaping at the upper end, through whieh protrudes the trunk-like sheath

containing the siphons, Nestling in the mud between tide marks ia the eregari-

ous, small, shining chestnut brown Variable Mussel Modiolus inconstans and

occupying erypts in.a friable consolidated shell-ooze in deep water is the burrow-

ing Southern Date Mussel Lithaphaga cunerformis.

As the fide turns and rises examine the sand quickly trom the water's edee

to ten feet or so op the beach. Many species at this period eraw] out to the

surface or move towards the water. Among those ploughing in the sand are

the Sunset Shell Telling albinella, Roush Tellen Pseudiarcopayia victoriac, Glo-

bular Ark Veletuceta radims, Date Shell Solemya australis, White Coekle Aus-

tromactra pura, the Southern Coekle Austromactra australis and Flinders Mae-

COTTON—MOLLUSCA OF THE OUTER HARBOUR, SOUTH AUSTRALIA 173

tra Electromactra flindersi. The Feather Cockle Tawera gallinula and the

Grouse Cockle Tawera lagopus throw themselves out of the sand at the turn of

the tide following low water.

The Double Ray Sunset Soletellina biradiata can be located by the semi-

circular mark in the sand, as though a knife has been pulled along the surface.

The molluse is situated at the newer end of this cut and sometimes throws itself

out when the tide approaches. On the surface is the Smooth Mitre Vicimitra

glabra, False Helmet Hypocassis bicarinata and the Lyre Shell Lyria mitrae-

formis. Ploughing into the sand and leaving a coarse wavy track of disturbed

sand is the Sand Snail Uber conicum. At the newer or more recently disturbed

end of the track is a hump of sand and just beneath this occurs the Sand Snail.

From November to February the Sand Snail’s collar-like egg girdle of cemented

sand, three or four inches in diameter, is plentiful on the beach. The numerous

small eggs can be seen by transmitted light. The girdle is flexible when fresh,

stiff and very brittle when dry.

PILES.

If while the tide is low old piles and wood structures are examined, near

their base will be found attached massed colonies of the small Black Mussel

Modiolus pulex, the Hairy Mussel Brachyodontes hirsutus, the Ark Shell Area

pistachia, Among the encrusting masses of Serpulae tubes, such as Hydroides

multispinosa with its thin, white, brittle, limy tubes nestles, anchored by the

byssus, numerous specimens of the rose-tinged Australian Kellia Kellia australes

which retains and develops the young within the parent shell. Attached to and

sometimes embedded in the piles are the limpet-like Southern Siphon Siphonaria

diemenensis. Old piles and pieces from them are usually bored by the Long

Southern Shipworm Notoferedo edax and the septate tubes can be seen lining

the holes. The valves of the shells and pallets may be shaken out from dead

specimens or removed from living ones.

Quantities of old wharf fenders and piles pulled up from the water front

are to be found in the vicinity of the wharves. An examination of these will

provide specimens of sedentary, boring and nestling types of Molluses, Cirripedia

and other marine growths,

STONEs,

At certain places on the sand-mud flats heaps of waterworn stones more

or less encrusted with weed, such as the Sea Lettuce Ulva lactuca, and sometimes

referred to by collectors as ‘‘foul stones,’’ are uncovered at low tide. On these

live the Lined Whelk Cominella lineolata and the Small Ivory Whelk Cominella

eburnea, the Adelaide Whelk Cominella adelaidensis with its small acuminate

L 74+ RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

pouch-shaped eve-capsules, three-eighths of an ineh long, blunt at the point and

slightly expanded at the base, attached individually in irregular groups or lines

following the depressions or eracks in the undersurface of the stones,

There is an apron of larger stones at the northern end of the main wharf on

the southern bank of the Royal Yaeht Squadron Harbour. These are “foul”

or weed-covered stones where a good series of Bembiciwn, the Ray Limpet Notoae-

ned septiformis, together with some of its relatives, may be found alive near the

water’s edge between tide marks.

MANoRovE Swamps.

Northwards is the entrance to the Port River at Pelican Point, where there

are dense Mangroves -lvicenna officinalis, with the mangrove fauna which is so

consistent round the whole coastline of Australia. The only difference between

the northern tropical areas and the southern is thut the larger dropieal Club Shell

and a few other large warm water species are absent in the south. Crawling ov

the sandy-mud about the mangroves, and south of them in littoral pools, is the

Smooth Creeper Hubitium lawleyanwmn, Hstuarine Creeper Batillariella estu-

rina, and the Granular Horn Zearwnantus diemenensis, all in great quantity,

On foul stones below low tide is the Granular Creeper Cacozeliana granarvum,

Among the mangroves erawl the Solid Air Breather Salinator solida and the

common and more numerous Fragile Air Breather Salinafor fragilis, distin-

suished by its thinner shell and different opereuluim; the last-ramed Air Breather

will live in marine mangrove areas as Well as in braekish to almost fresh water,

Minute eges of the Air Breather are cemented with grains of sand to form a

small band or girdla, about one ineh i diameter, deposited on the surface of

the sand; the ova hateh in fourteen to sixteen days, Associated with these girdles

are groups of about ten red eggs of an unidentified marine animal.

Attached to the limbs and on the finger-like pneumatophores is the Man-

grove Conniwink Bembicium imbricalum and the Zebra Periwinkle Austrocochlea

zebru, These species ave also to be found in some of the small ereeks in the

north of the Peninsula, together with the Smoke Cockle Zumarcia fumigata.

Wren CHANNELS,

North of the Royal Yaeht Squadron Harbour and running across the mud

flats to the Port River Channel is a weed channel along which the sea water

flows in and out with the rise and fall of the tide.

Most of the weed-living shells abound here, as also does the Smoke Cockle

Tunucrcta fumigala in muddy situations, and the small mud-dwelling Stout

Triangle Cockle Anapella pinguis, and, less numerously, the Triangle Cockle

COTTON—MOLLUSCA OF THE OUTER HARBOUR, SOUTH AUSTRALIA 175

Notaspisula trigonella, On the Sea Grass Zostera nina evawls the Dinkers Clan-

culus Isoclanculus dunkeri, Yates Saneulius Fsoclanculus yatesi, Adelaide Peri-

winkle Chlorediloma adeluidae and the Yellow Dot Periwinkle Chlorodiloma

odontis, Sinilar channels and creeks to the north of LeFevre Peninsula have

a similar fauna.

A little north of the Royal Yacht Squadron Harbour is a slightly raised

area of sand which is covered only at high tide. Ilere can be found at almost

any time numerous species of dead shells in fairly good condition; about two

hundred different kinds have heen taken over some years by diligent collectors.

One old gentleman spent years of his later life collecting and sieving samples

of yand and sorting out the small shells. Te found a goodly number of previ-

ously unknown species which would take a long time to examine, draw, and

deseribe; so one may make a valuable collection here without getting the feet

wet!

Nort Bank.

The North Bank is uncovered at low tide and will vield a typical

sand flat fauna, Razor Fish beds, partienlarly on the north side, are more

extensive here than on the mud flats, and the Ark Shell Arca pistachia is common

on rocks, just below low tide, opposite Pelican Point in foul ground, mud and

weed. (nder foul stones lives the Pitted Keyhole Cosmetalepas concatenatus

(usually in company with a grey Ascidian) and also the Shield Shell, Rlephant

Slug or Duck Bill Sextus anatinus (a large black creature with a white shell

on its hack hidden under the mantle), Wide Mouth Stomatella imbricata, False

Eur Shell Gena auricula, Golden Star Micrastraca aureum, the Seale Star Bella-

straeca squamifera, the Beaded Top IMerpetopoma aspersa, the Small Warty

Triton Cymatiella verrucosa, the Waterhouse Triton Cymatilesta waterhousei,

the Triangle Murex Plerynotus trifarmis, the Paivae Boring Whelk Bedewa

patvae, and the Southern Cone Floruconus anenione, whieh ean be found in the

hollows heneath the stones, Some collectors maintain that our Southern Cone

is capable of transmitting a mild sting. However, there has heen no suggestion

that it is a dangerous one, like that of the much bigger tropieal cones. The Sea

Bubble Quibbula tenwissima is common in felty weeds and muddy sand,

Port River.

In the mud banks of the Port River, at places such as Suowden Beach,

Peterhead, North Arm and Torrens Island, live the Estuary Tellen Macon

deltoides, Paper Clam Lulernala recta, Smoke Cockle Eumarcia fumigata and

the Fragile Air Breather Salinator fragilis, while the Solid Air Breather Salina-

tor solida is more common here than on the mud flats, Sandstone just below

176 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

low tide mark, and that dredged from the Port River, is sometimes bored by

the Southern Piddock Pholas australasiae, and specimens may be removed alive

by carefully breaking away the stone.

CONCLUSION.

It is helpful to obtain a tide table from the Harbours Board and to select

particularly low tides when the rarer living material is desired. The falling tide

should be followed out so that the species present under these conditions may be

obtained and the maximum time allowed for low-tide collecting. As the tide

turns and rises, and the collector moves shorewards, many species can be seen

emerging from the sandbanks just above low tide. Incidentally, all species are

edible if taken alive.

Many will remain alive for days in a jar of sea water, where they can

be easily photographed or sketched; little is known about the living colours

of many animals, and good work could be done in this direction. Methylated

spirits will serve to preserve the flesh but not the colours. Formalin decalcifies

the shell and should not be used for anything but shell-less Nudibranchs and

most Cephalopoda. Chitons are taped to a flat stick to prevent them curling

when drying, as this spoils them as cabinet specimens.

Ree. S,A. Museum VoL. NI, PLATE XNIII

Pig. 1. Outer Tarbour Jooking south, showing silting south of the breakwater,

Onter Harbour looking west. Rovil Yaeht Squsileon and raised

sand arena near the eirele in the centre of the prefure,

A CATALOGUE OF INTRODUCED SNAILS AND SLUGS IN AUSTRALIA

BY BERNARD C.. COTTON, CONCHOLOGIST, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

This paper is a record of land and freshwater molluscs introduced into Australia. Its main object is

to stimulate interest in the collecting and identifying of introduced species.

A CATALOGUE or INTRODUCED SNAILS anp SLUGS

in AUSTRALIA

By BERNARD C. COTTON, Concno.ocisr, SourH AustRALIAN Museum,

Plate xxiv.

THIS paper is a record of land and freshwater molluses introduced into Australia.

Its main object is to stimulate interest in the collecting and identifying of intro-

duced species.

Following a request from Dr. H. E. Quick, President of the Malacological

Society of London, for land snails, the author collected many living specimens

in South Australia and western Victoria. Series of these were sent to Dr.

Quick for comparison with authentic material from type localities in overseas

museums and for dissection, and he gives a brief review of the introduced land

molluses in the references cited. Identification is difficult, and a thorough ana-

tomical study of the animal as well as a microscopic examination of the shell is

required before any satistactory conclusions can be reached. An exchange of

authentic material has aided this work in South Australia. Introduced snails

frequently show variation from the typical species.

The Common Garden Snail Helix aspersa is abundant in South Australia

and variations in shell form and animal colouring occur. In later years there

appears to be a greater percentage of pale pigmented specimens, some approach-

ing the albino exalbida, odd specimens of which have been taken. Shells from

the foothills are thinner and smaller of the tenuior variety, while some in the

Torrens Valley area approach dark nigrescens. The largest specimens taken are

from Kangaroo Island. Two sinistral specimens, one cornucopia and one acu-

minata, are in the Museum collection, taken locally. Soil, rainfall, temperature,

period of colonization, original variety and other factors have been mentioned

in connection with some of these variants, but no scientific investigation has

been made locally.

Further species of land molluses and, in addition, the freshwater species are

recorded here as a preliminary basis for Australian workers. Numerous requests

for identification of introduced species are made by government bodies to the

agricultural departments, museums and universities, and it is presumed that

similar questions are submitted to institutions in other States.

173 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

SLUGS.

Minax GAGATES (Draparnaud) 1801.

Distribution. South Western Europe, Greece, Izium, North Africa, Atlantic

Isles, British Isles.

Introduced. South Africa, Bermuda, Juan Fernandez, North and South

America, New Zealand.

Australia. S.A., Vict., N.S.W.

Remarks. Jet Slug. Small Black Slug. Redescribed as Limax maurus

Quoy and Gaimard 1824 from Port Jackson, Wilaz tasmanicus Tate 1880 from

Tasmania, Limax pectinatus Selenka 1865, Sydney.

Time. Pleistocene to Recent. England.

Loiax Maximus Linne 1758,

Distribution. Europe to North Bergen, Transcaucasia, Baviois, Algiers,

Atlantic Isles, British Isles.

Iniroduced. North America, South Africa, North and South America, New

Zealand,

Australia. S.A., N.S.W., Vict., Tas.

Time. Pleistocene to Recent. England.

Remarks. Great Grey Slug.

Limax rLavus Linne 1758.

Distribution. Europe, Norway, Syria, Tripoli, Atlantie Isles, British Isles.

Introduced. North and South America, Japan, South Africa, New Zealand.

Australia, S.A., N.S.W., Vict., Tas., Q.

Time. Pleistocene, Cromerian to Reeent. England.

Remarks. Yellow slug. Redeseribed as Limax megalodontes Quoy and

Gaimard 1824 from Port Jackson, Limazx olivaceus Gould 1852 from Parramatta,

and possibly Limax bicolor Selenka 1865 from Sydney.

Limax MARGINATUS Miller 1774.

Distribution. Frurope, Greece to Finland and Eastern Russia, Iceland,

British Isles.

Introduced. North America, New Zealand.

Australia. S.A.

Time, Pleistocene, Cromerian to Recent. England.

Remarks. Tree Slug. Sometimes referred to as Liman (Lehmannia) ar-

borum Bouchard-Chantereaux 1837.

COTTON—SNAILS AND SLUGS INTRODUCED INTO AUSTRALIA 179

AGRIOLIMAX AGRESTIS (Linne) 1758.

Distribution. Northern Europe, Asia, Turkestan, China, Japan, North

Africa, Syria, Atlantic Isles, Greenland, British Isles,

Introduced, Zanzibar, North and South America, South Africa, West In-

dies, Mauritius, New Zealand.

Australia, S.A., N.S.W., Vict., Tas.

Time. Pleistocene to Recent. England.

Remarks. Field slug. Redescribed as Limax legrandi Tate, Tasmania and

Timax molestia Hutton, New Zealand.

AGRIOLIMAX LAEVIS (Miiller) 1774.

Distribution. Europe, Northern Asia, North and Central America, British

Isles.

Introduced. South America, West Indies, South Africa, Madagascar.

Australia, S.A., Q.

Time. Pleistocene to Recent. England.

Remarks. Marsh Slug. Smooth Slug. Recorded from the foothills of the

Mount Lofty Ranges, near Adelaide. A synonym is Limax queenslandicus Hed-

ley 1888,

AGRIOLIMAX RETICULATUS (Miiller) 1774.

Distribution. Southern Europe, Asia, North Africa, Atlantic Isles, British

Isles,

Introduced. North and South America, South Africa, New Zealand.

Australia. Viet., N.S.W., Tas.

Time. Pleistocene to Recent. England.

Remarks. Netted Field Slue.

ARION HORTENSIS Férussac 1819.

Distribution. Central Europe, northwards to Tromiso, North Spain, France,

Italy, Netherlands, Russia, British Isles,

Introduced. North Ameriea, South Africa, New Zealand.

Australia. S.A.

Remarks. Garden Slug. The South Australian record is not definitely

confirmed.

ARION a'rerR (Linne) 1758.

Distribution. Europe, Portugal, Italy, Balkans, British Isles.

Introduced. North America, New Zealand.

Australia. S.A., N.S.W., Vict.

Remarks. Large Black Slug.

180 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

TESTACELLA HALIOTIDEA Draparnaud 1801.

Distribution. North Afriea, Western Europe, Belgium, Germany, Balearic

Tsles, Canary Isles, Madeira, British Isles.

Introduced. North America,

Australia, S.A., Tas., N.S.W.

Time. Holocene to Recent. England.

Remarks. Shelled Slug. Carnivorous Slug. Recorded from the Botanical

Gardens, Adelaide. Testacella mauget Férussae 1819, Is a synonym.

SNAILS.

EUPARYPHA PISANA (Miller) 1774.

Distribution. Europe, Mediterranean, North Africa, Atlantic Isles, British

Isles.

Introduced. North America, South Africa.

Time. Pleistocene to Recent. England.

Australia. Cottesloe, W.A., Vict., Geelong, N.S.W.

Remarks. White Snail. Now placed in the genus Theba. Specimens closely

resembling this species and similar to those taken at Cottesloe, Western Aus-

tralia, were found alive by H. M. Cooper on April 22nd, 1954, at Port Arthur,

near Port Wakefield, S.A., on Boxthorn, about 200 yards above the high tide

level,

HeEnice.ia 1TaALA (Linne) 1758.

Distribution. Wurope to Petrograd, Transcaucasia, Algeria and Syria,

British Isles,

Introduced. New Zealand.

Australia. S.A.

Time. Lower Pleistocene to Recent. England.

Remarks. Heath Snail. South-east of South Australia. Mentioned as

introduced to South Australia by A. E. Ellis, *‘British Snails,’’ 1926, p. 195.

Originally recorded as J/elicella ericelorwm (Miller) 1821, Dr. Quick now

identifies specimens trom Yorke Peninsula as eltcella (Xerocinctu) neglecta,

mentioned below.

HELICELLA (XEROGINCTA) NEGLECTA (Draparnaud) 1805.

Distribution. Southern France, Italy, Germany, Greece, Syria, Algeria.

Introduced. British Isles.

slustralia. S.A., Yorke Peninsula.

Time. Recent. England.

Remarks. White Heath Snail.

COTTON-—SNAILS AND SLUGS INTRODUCED INTO AUSTRALIA 181

HeEviceLa (CERNUELLA) virGATA (Da Costa) 1779,

Distribution, Western Europe, Mediterranean east to Crimea, British Isles.

Introduced, Australia.

Australia. S.A. ‘‘N.W.A. Foul Point’’ (Richardson, quoted by Musson),

N.S.W., Viet.

Time, Pleistocene to Recent. England.

Remarks. Striped Snail. Recorded from vineyards at Northfield near

Adelaide, South Australia. Dr, Quick identifies the S.A. records of Theba pisana

as belonging to HW. virgata, a svnonym of which is H. variabilis Draparnaud,

mentioning that ‘It is true the shell of the Northfield examples is more globose

and the upper surface of the whorls flatter than in the British variety of this

variable shell that I have seen, and the umbilicus is smaller than the typical.’’

Shells sent from Kangaroo Island are identified by him as H. virgata

depressa Requien 1868, or H. v. subaperta Jeffreys. H. virgata depressu Requien

1848 was taken in 1953 at American River, Kangaroo Island,

HELICELLA (CANDIDULA) CAPERATA (Montagu) 1803.

Distribution. Europe to Crimea, Bagdad, British Isles.

Introduction. Australia.

Australia, S.A., Robe, Vict., Tas.

Time. Pleistocene to Recent. England.

Remarks. Wrinkled Snail,

HELIOELLA (MICROSCRROMAGNA) STOLISMENA (Bourguignat) 1880,

Distribution. Spain, France,

Introduced. Australia.

sLustralia. S.A., South-east.

Remarks. A species named and described as Helicella mayeri Gude 1914

was taken on **Tea Tree’’ Melaleuca, at Millicent, South Australia. Dr. Quick

thinks that the species may be H. stolismena. Living specimens are required

to verify the identification. Although numerous shells are in the Museum eol-

lection from Millicent. and Robe, no living specimens have been obtained in

recent years. A synonym of IJ. stolismena is Helix vestita Rambur 1868 pre-

occupied by Ferrasae 1819.

HELICELLA HERIPENSIS (Mabille) 1877.

Distribution, Germany, France, British Isles,

Introduced. Australia.

182 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Time. Pleistocene to Recent. England.

Australia. S,A., Adelaide foothills and S.E. S.A.

Remarks. Hedge Snail. Originally introduced into the South-east but

now taken in the foothills of the Mount Lofty Ranges, near Adelaide, in gardens.

Also ealled Candidula gigarit (Charpenticr) 1850. These may be H. caperate,

the identification needs confirming.

CocHLIcELLA acuta (Miller) 1774.

Distribution, South-western Enrope, Mediterranean, British Isles.

Introduced. Australia.

Time. Pleistocene to Recent. England.

Australia. S.A., Yorke Peninsula, W.A,, Cottesloe, Vict.

Remarks. Pointed Snail. Common at Stansbury and Minlaton, Yorke

Peninsula, 9.A., and Cottesloe, W.A. Bulimus acuéus Miller 1774 is an older

name for this species. Listed by Cox and Hedley, 10, p. 10, as Helicella arbara

Linne 1889 from Victoria.

CocHLICELLA VENTROSA (Férussac) 1819.

Distribution. Mediterranean, Canaries, Azores, Bermuda.

Introduced. South Africa.

clustralia. S.A., Yorke Peninsula, Mount Gambier, Adelaide; Viet., N.S.W,,

W.A.

Time. Recent.

Remarks. Swollen Snail. Recorded from Corny Point and the South-east

of South Australia. Sometimes referred to as C. ventricosa (Draparnaud) 1831,

pre-occupied, There are two variants in Adelaide gardens, C. bizona Moquin-

Tandon and C, inflata Moquin-Tandon.

Hewix aspersa Miller 1774.

Distribution. Netherlands, France. Spain, Mediterranean, British Isles.

Introduced. North and South America, South Africa, New Zealand.

Australia, S.A., Viet., N.S.W., W.A.

Time. Pleistocene to Recent. England.

Remarks, Garden Snail. Common in gardens, general. Brightly coloured

specimens with thick shells measuring 36 mm. in diameter are numerous at

Muston, Kangaroo Island, according to a series taken by H. M. Cooper in

February, 1954,

COTTON—SNAILS AND SLUGS INTRODUCED INTO AUSTRALIA 183

OXYCHILUS CELLARIA (Miiller) 1774.

Distribution. Europe, Algeria, Rhodes, Armenia, Palestine, Persia, British

Isles.

Introduced. North and South America, South Africa, New Zealand.

Australia. N.S.W., Vict., Tas.

Time. Pleistocene to Recent. England.

Remarks. Cellar Snail. Redeseribed as Helix sydneyensis Cox, from

N.S.W. Sometimes called Helicella and Vitrea cellaria. Actively carnivorous

in Sydney gardens. Wats slaters and Helix aspersa.

OXYCHILUS ALLIARIUS (Miller) 1822.

Distribution. Europe, Algeria.

Introduced. America, South Africa, New Zealand.

Australia. N.S.W.

Time. Pleistocene to Recent. England.

Remarks. Mentioned by Ellis 1926, ‘‘British Snails,’’? p. 244, as having

been introduced into Australia and first recorded from Australia by J. S. Miller,

1822.

tEOSTILBIA APERTA (Swainson) 1835.

Distribution. Southern Europe.

Introduced. Australia.

Australia. Tas.

Remarks. Recorded from Australia by Petterd and Hedley, 1909.

VITREA CRYSTALLINA (Miiller) 1774.

Distribution. Europe, north to Hamar Stift and east to the Caucasus,

Algeria, Atlantic Isles, British Isles.

Introduced, Australia.

Australia. Tas.

Time. Pleistocene to Recent. England.

Remarks. Crystal Snail. Vitrina may prefer a carnivorous diet.

ZONITOIDES NITIDA (Miiller) 1774.

Distribution. Kurope, Algeria, Asia, Kashmir, Tibet, Japan, North America,

British Isles.

Introduced. South America, New Zealand.

Australia. N.S.W., Tas., Vict.

Time. Pleistocene, Cromerian to Recent. England.

Remarks. Shiny Snail.

184

RECORDS OF THE $.A. MUSEUM

VALLONIA cosTATA (Miller) 1774.

Distribution. British Isles. Europe, North America.

Introduced. Madeira. Azoves, South Africa, Palestine,

Australia. N.S.W., Tas., Norfolk Island.

Time. Pleistocene to Recent. England.

Remarks. Ribbed Snail. Known also as Helix pulchella Miiller 1805, and

vedeseribed as Melia alexandrae Cox 1868, from places about Sydney.

VALLONIA PULCHELLA (Miiller) 1774.

Distribution, British Isles.

Introduced. South Africa.

Australia, N.S.W., Tas., Norfolk Island.

Time. Pliocene to Recent. Wngland.

Remarks. Beautiful Snail.

SusBuLINA ocTANA (Bruguiére) 1789.

Distribution. Ameriea.

Introduced. England.

Australia, NASW.

Ferussacia FOLLICULUS (Cronoyvius) 1781,

Distribution, Mediterranean, South of France from the Pyrenees to the

Riviera and in the Balearic Isles.

Australia, S.A., Linden Park, suburb of Adelaide.

Remarks. Inflated Ferussacia. This small snail was seen in great numbers

on August 1, 1953, at Verdale Avenue, Linden Park, a suburb of Adelaide, by

Colin F. Hutehinson. Groups of individuals were found in very damp places

on a building block, under bricks, old cement bags or any other type of cover.

The builder, Mr. Page, noticed them only during June and July of this year

(1953) and thinks they were not present when the undergrowth was burnt off in

January. There are no unusual weeds among the thick grass, and the few small

olive trees are seedlings of the olive tree so common in this district since the

early days of white occupation. All building materials used on the block are

locally produced. There is no elue as to how the snails came here. Householders

and children around the district have not scen the snails even in adjacent areas.

There are no records of the species or anything like it from South Australia

or anywhere else in Australia. It seems that the snail has been discovered and

recognized soon after importation or dispersal, and immediate steps have been

taken by the Agricultural Department to eradicate it.

COTTON—SNAILS AND SLUGS INTRODUCED INTO AUSTRALIA 185

The shell is about a quarter of an inch long, pupaeform, brown, highly

polished. The animal has a long slender foot, slender tentacles, the upper pair

bearing well-developed eyes. The foot is light yellow grading to light green,

anteriorly and posteriorly, and the long slender tentacles and head are a dark

grey shade. The snail moved rapidly from light into shade, and one would

say, from its general appearances and habits, that it would not survive the

heat and dryness of the Adelaide Plains. It would probably thrive in hot houses

whence these specimens may have originated. It is prolific and ovoviparous,

the young being formed in an ege and the egg hatched inside the parent. It

is normally herbivorous, but is said to turn carnivorous when vegetable food

is unobtainable.

On first sight the species was thought to be possibly Cochlicopa lubrica,

which is abundant all over the British Isles, Europe, North America, Asia and

North Africa. Dr. Quick kindly examined specimens sent by us to the British

Museum and mentioned in correspondence that it was a Perussacia. The species

belongs to the family Ferussacidae, which is contained in the superfamily

Achatinacea, including the family Achatinidae, and consequently has distant

affinities with the Giant African Snail Achatina fulica Férussac, unfortunately so

widely dispersed and uncontrollable. The family Ferussacidae contains some ten

genera and numerous species.

HELIX SIMILARIS Ferussac 1819.

Distribution. Cuba, America, South Africa, China, Brazil, Singapore,

Bengal, Mauritius, Java, Sandwich Islands.

Introduced. Frankland Isles.

Australia. N.E. Aust., N.S.W. (Sydney).

Remarks. This species appears to have been widely dispersed over the

earth’s surface. The Australian records are doubtful. Musson, 1890, writes,

‘Originally recorded for Australia from the Frankland Islands, collected by

MacGillivray. Mr. Brazier, who had some of the original specimens, remarks

that they are H. aridorum, Cox, 1867, or Neveritis aridorum, to give its latest

name, and that it is a native snail, originally described from Clarence River,

under logs in ironbark ranges, burrowing in dry weather.’

OTALA VERMICULATA (Miiller) 1774.

Distribution. Southern Europe and North Africa.

Introduced. Australia.

Australia. Tas.

Remarks. Recorded by Petterd and Hedley, 1909, as Helix vermiculata

Miiller 1774.

186 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

FRESHWATER SNAILS.

LYMNAEA PEREGER (Miller) 1774.

Distribution. KEurope, North Afriea, Asia, Kashmir, Afehanistan, Cape

Verde Islands, British Isles.

Introduced. Tasmania.

Time. Pliocene to Recent. Hneland.

Remarks, Wandering Snail. Redeseribed as Limnaca tusmanica Tenison-

Woods 1876, Limnaea lutosa Petterd 1889, and Limnaea hobartensis Tenison-

Woods, 1876, from Tasmania,

LYMNAEA STAGNALIS Linne 1758.

Distribution. Furope, Asia, Afghanistan, Kashmir, North Afriea, British

Tsles.

Introduced. Tasmania, South Australia.

Australia. Frequently seen in aquaria, but so far not established in any

freshwater area.

Time. Pleistocene, Cromerian to Recent. England.

Remarks. Great Pond Snail. This snail grows very well in South Aus-

tralian garden ponds and aquaria, but is not in our creeks and ponds.

PLANORBIS SPrRORBIS (Linne) 1801.

Distribution. Western Europe, Asia, North Africa, British Isles.

Introduced. Australia?.

Time. Pleistocene to Recent. England.

Remarks—Button Ram’s Horn, Sometimes named Planorbis (Gyraulus)

laevis. Specimens of P. spirorbis Miller 1774, or more correctly P. (Spiralina)

spirorbis Linne 1758, are labelled as Australian in the British Museum (Musson,

p. 884).

PLANORBIS CAMPANULATUS Say 1821.

Distribution. North Ameriea.

Introduced. South Australia.

Remarks. Bell Planorbis. Specimens of this species were recorded by the

author in the ‘‘South Australian Naturalist’’ 15, No. 1, p. §, 1933, from Blanche-

town, Riyer Murray, where it was established. Mr. Oliver, Senior Resident En-

gineer, reported ‘‘that the shells referred to were found at approximately half

a mile upstream (from Blanchetown), where the American machinery purchased

COTTON—SNAILS AND SLUGS INTRODUCED INTO AUSTRALIA 187

for lock construction was unloaded. This place is, however, a landing place for

farm machinery and windmills of American manufacture.’’

This was the first record of a freshwater snail being introduced into the

River Murray. I have seen no specimens at Blanchetown or elsewhere since

1933.

Petterd 4, p. 97, records that Planorbis lacustris is plentiful in “the fresh-

water streams near Melbourne.” ‘This species is probably a Segmentina, more

recently named Segnitila victoriae, Smith, 1882, indigenous to the region.

REFERENCES CITED.

1. Quoy and Gaimard (1824): Zool. Voy. Uranie, pp. 426-427.

2. Selenka, E. (1865): Malak. Blatt, 12, p. 105, pl. 2, fig. 1-9.

3. Legrand (1879): Journ. of Conch., pp. 95-96.

4. Petterd, W. F. (1879): Journ. of Conch., pp. 96-98.

5. Tate, R. (1880): Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., pp. 15-18.

6. Godwin-Austen (1883): “Land and Freshwater Molluses of India,” pt. 4,

p. 146, pl. xh, fig. 1-8.

7. Hedley, C. (1888): Proc. Roy. Soc. Qld.

8. Musson, C. T. (1890): Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 5, pp. 883-896.

9. Petterd, W. F. and Hedley, C. (1909): Rec. Aust. Mus., 8, No. 4, pp. 283-304.

10. Cox, J. C. and Hedley, C. (1912): Men. Nat. Mus. Vict., No. 4.

11. Vereo, J. C. (1922): Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 2, No. 2, p. 221.

12. Vereo, J. C. (1924): Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 2, No. 4, pp. 489-490.

13. Fischer, P. H. (1939): Journ. Conchyl., 83 (3), pp. 245-253.

14. MeLaughton, ©. F. (1949): Proc. Zool. Soc. N.S.W., pp. 21-24.

15. Quick, H. E. (1952): Proc. Mus. Soc. Lond., 29, pt. 3, p. 75.

16. Quick, H. E. (1952): Proc. Mus. Soc. Lond., 29, pt. 5, p. 189.

17. Cotton, B. C. (1953): National Park and Reserves of South Australia, pp.

136-146 (S.A. Museum).

Rec, S.A. MuskuMm Vor. XI, PLATE XXIV

Top. Six views of Ferussacia folliculus emerging trom the shell (6), Linden Park,

Below. Three views of the shell of Forussaeia follieulus (x 1),

TAXONOMIC NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN HAWKS

BY H. T. CONDON AND DEAN AMADON

Summary

The primary purpose of the present paper is to contribute to the series of revisions of Australian

birds which must precede any semi-stable Australian check-list. Peters’ work (1931) often follows

Matthews’ treatment of races, and these taxonomic notes are to some extent a re-examination of the

proposals of that author whose types, now contained in the American Museum of Natural History,

were available for study.

TAXONOMIC NOTES on AUSTRALIAN HAWKS

By H. T. CONDON* ann DEAN AMADON}.

INTRODUCTION,

THE primary purpose of the present paper is to contribute to the series of revi-

sions of Australian birds which must precede any semi-stable Australian cheels-

list. Peters’ work (1931) often follows Mathews’ treatment of races, and these

taxonomic notes are to some extent a re-examination of the proposals of that

author whose types, now contained in the American Museum of Natural History,

were available for study.

arly students of the group, such as Gould (1865), Sharpe (1874), Ramsay

(1876), and North (1912) were compelled to work with few specimens, and

although unaware of the many confising aspects of variability, the quality of

their work was remarkably good considering the nature of their limitations.

We have handled many hundreds of specimens which were not available to

previous workers, but have found that much still remains to be learned and that

further collecting in all parts of the continent is very necessary, Especially

have we lacked material from Western Australia, southern Queensland and

Tasmania, and these regions should prove profitable areas for investigation in

the future. Subadult specimens greatly outnumber adults in museums, many

skins are incorrectly sexed or poorly labelled, and certain well-marked forms are

often represented by only one or two examples.

As pointed out by Mathews (1946), the single record of Butastur teesa from

New South Wales is unconvincing and perhaps better placed on the suspended

list,

Because of its long isolation, the Australian continent has served as an

important area for differentiation in this order, as in others. One may mention

such distinct and fine species as Maleo subniger and F, hypoleucos, Aquila

(UVroaétus) audax is the largest and most striking member of the Aquila chry-

saétos group (or, lor that matter, of the genus Aguila). The Milvinae are very

well represented, not only by widespread forms, but also by two remarkable

endemies, Hamirostra melanosternon and Lophoictinia isura, Tt present distri-

bution means anything, Australia was the ancestral home or, at least, the focal

point of the evolution and distribution of this group of kites.

* Ornithologist, South Australian Museum,

+ Department of Birds, American Museum of Natural History, New York.

190 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Some fossil forms were named by DeVis (1890 to 1911) from the Pleistocene

of southern Queensland and northern South Australia, but the status of most of

these is doubtful. The genus Taphactus may be referable to Aquila or Halicé-

tus, while Lydekker (1892) expressed grave doubts as to the validity of

Necrastur. The identity of Paleolestes, named from a single toe-bone, is extremely

problematical.

Our remarks are based on an examination of collections in the American

Museum of National History (including the Mathews collection), the South

Australian Museum, the National Museum, Melbourne (including the H. L.

White collection), and the Australian Museum, Sydney, as well as certain

material in the United States National Museum and the British Museum.

To the Directors of the various institutions for permission to study their

collections are best thanks are due, and we are especially indebted to Messrs.

H. G. Deignan, Washington, W. B. Hitchcock, Melbourne, and J. R. Kinghorn

and J. A. Keast, Sydney, for assistance rendered.

The only Australian Acciptres not discussed in the following notes are

Falco (Teracidea) berigora, Circus approximans and Pandon haliaetus. The

first-named species was recently revised by Condon (1951), and we have little

to add to Amadon’s earlier revision (1941) of the other two mentioned.

Abbreviations used: AM—Australian Museum, Svdney; AMNH—American

Museum of Natural History, New York; HLW—H. L. White collection, National

Museum, Melbourne; NMM—National Museum, Melbourne; SAM—South Aus-

tralian Museum, Adelaide.

GEOGRAPHICAL VARIATION.

Variability due to geography is still incompletely understood in Australian

birds, but correlation between environment and taxonomic characters and geo-

graphical variation is often marked, as in other parts of the world, and being

parallel in many species, seems to confirm certain ecological rules that were

put forward many years ago.

In the birds of prey the Bergmann effect may be conveniently demonstrated

by the use of wing leneths; individuals of such species as Acctpifer fasciatus,

Circus assimilis, Falco berigora, Haliastur sphenurus, and Pandion are larger

in the cooler regions of southern Australia and Tasmania than in other parts.

There is also a tendency towards richer and darker pigmentation in popu-

lations inhabiting regions of greater humidity (Gloger’s Rule). Sometimes it

is a case of the colour becoming paler in the more arid regions, when orthodox

(internal) clines occur; Accipiter cirrhocephalus, A. fasciatus, Falco longipennis,

CONDON AND AMADON—TAXONOMIC NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN Hawks 191

and F. berigora ave examples in Australia, The heavily piginented races of

Mieraaétus morphnoides and Accipiter navachollandiae in New Guinea may be

considered further examples of this law,

For reasons not yet understood, when species rather than races are eom-

pared, the ecological rules may receive little confirmation. Species more or

less characteristic of the drier areas, such as Elanus scriptus, Faloo subniger, and

Hamirostra melanosternon are no paler than allied species of more humid

regions, and in some cases ave darker, It is possible, of course, that this may

point tu a very recent deterioration of climate, and that these dark forms arose

during more pluyial or humid periods which are known to have oceurred during

the Tertiary,

Clines or ‘‘eharacter gradients’’ are found in areas where continuous or

wibroken chains of populations oven, more especially on continents and islands.

The clines most easily demonstrated ave those of size and eolonr,

The white-headed Pandion, or Osprey common to the East Indies and Aus-

tralia, shows a clinal increase in size in southern Australia which led Amadon

(1941) to recognize southern birds as a race, cristetis, Such procedure has, of

course, been generally followed by taxonomists, a8 with, for example, the Ameri-

ean sea-cagle (/faliw@étus lencocephalus), but whether such elines warrant

nomenclatural recounition is more and more debated, In the case of Pandion

of Australia, however, ‘urther material may show that there is rather an abrupt

increase in size in the southern part of its range, If such a stepped cline can

be demonstrated there should be less misgiving about admitting two races in the

Australian region.

Stepped ur external (inter-group) elines are not always readily apparent.

In the Goshawk, Accipiter fasciatus, the difference in size in northern birds is

abrupt, and the birds resemble more closely in colour some of the insular

tropical forms rather than members of populations inhabiting the major portion

of the continent. This suggests that the small northern race, didimus, could be

a derivative of some island form and a rather late entrant to the Australian

mainland,

However, one cannot always assume that small northern races outside Aus-

tralia, as in Acetpiter fasciatus and Hieraaitus morphnoides, are an extension

of the size trend discernible in Australia, for such species may have large races

on soine of the other (i,e., other than New Guinea) tropical islands. The papu-

lation of Acetpiter fasciatus on Rennel Island, an outher of the Solomons, is

fully as large as and apparently indistinguishable from the goshawk of southern

Australia, and the vaces of this hawk on New Caledonia and the Louisiade

Archipelago are comprised of birds almost as large. Possibly factors other than

192 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

temperature response may play the dominant role in directing changes in the

bird populations of small islands.

While almost nothing is known of migratory movements, certain Australian

hawks may wander far from their normal habitat. For example, it would appear

that the Brown Goshawk of southern Australia may visit the Kimberley division

in the north, and the faleons Falco longipennis and F. c. cenchroides occur as

non-breeding stragglers to various islands north of Australia, and the latter

also visits New Zealand at times.

The distribution of the diphasie goshawk, Accipiter novaehollandiae, in

Australia and New Guinea is a special problem, for whose analysis one may

consult Southern and Serventy (1947). The white phase has become exclusive

in Tasmania, but elsewhere, though geographical variation occurs, there is little

of regular clinal nature in the distribution of this phase. The fact that the

grey phase has never been recorded in Tasmania indicates that in this species

isolation is reasonably complete on that island. Also, the hawks of this genus,

in parts of the world where they are non-migratory, show more geographical

variation than do most other genera and are presumably more sedentary than

most others. As might be expected, Tasmanian subspecies are particularly well-

marked in small song birds, but in the hawks not enough collecting has been

done in most species to enable satisfactory studies to be made of material from

this region, although in certain instances there appear to be no differences be-

tween specimens from the island and the adjacent mainland.

DEVELOPMENT.

Study of plumage changes due to age is important in taxonomic work. In the

Aecipitres the downy chick is usually whitish, but in Elanus it is pale brownish

or grey. Sexual dimorphism is generally great, females being larger, except

perhaps in Zlanus where no striking differences have been detected. Juvenals

of both sexes may be markedly different from the adult, and the moult into

adult plumage may be direct, as in Elanus, Aviceda, Accipiter cirrhocephalus,

Falco hypoleucos, and F’. longipennis, or take several years as in Aquila, Haliwe-

tus, Accipiter fasciatus, F'. berigora, F. peregrinus, and F. cenchroides. Owing

to the protracted moult in the species quoted, confusion may be caused through

superficial examination or insufficient material, and a proper understanding of

the factors responsible for individual variation by ornithologists whose chief

interests lie in other directions is desirable in order to make their observations

of value. For instance, in the Brown Hawk young birds are usually dark,

even when in breeding condition, vet they have often been confused with dark

CONDON AND AMADON--TAXONOMIC NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN HAWKS 193

phase adults. In the Kestrel, also, both sexes may have reddish tails when

young, and the young of the sea-eagles (Haliastur and Haliwétus) might be

mistaken for other species. Immaturity in goshawks and falcons is indicated

by the markings of the rectrices, and since these are usually the last feathers

to be replaced at the moult, a good idea of the age of cabinet specimens may

be obtained.

Genus ELANus Savigny 1809.

Typé. Elanus caesius = E. caerulus. Old and New Worlds. (Four species. )

Of all the major regions, Australia alone has two species of Hlanus. How-

ever, this does not necessarily mean that the genus originated in Australia, but

merely that we are dealing with an example of double invasion or double

colonization at long intervals.

Were it not for the occurrence of two species in Australia, species that

are, moreover, very similar to each other, some might prefer to unite all

members in a single species. Furthermore, nofatus is more like leucurus

of America than it is like caeruleus of the East Indies, Eurasia and Africa.

Twice in the past and at two widely separated intervals this genus invaded

Australia, presumably from the north, thus giving rise to the two species endemic

there. Present day distribution of the two species, and the resemblance of

notatus to leucurus of the New World, suggests that the first-named was the

earlier arrival in Australia. Unusual, also, is the recent discovery of a local

endemic race of E. caerwleus in New Guinea (Mayr and Gilliard, in press, Bull.

Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist.). Presumably this species is a newcomer to New Guinea.

ELANUS NOTATUS Gould.

Elanus notatus Gould, 1838, Syn. Bds. Aust. part 4, app. p. 1: New South

Wales.

Elanus axillaris parryi Mathews, 1912, Nov. Zool., 18, p. 251: Parry’s Creek,

northwestern Australia. Type: AMNH No. 531543; adult male; January

27th, 1909; J. P. Rogers. Wing, ? (moult); tail, 142 (worn). Coloured

plate of type: Mathews, 5, plate 249, opp. p. 199.

Range. Australia; not Tasmania.

The Black-shouldered Kite has a wide distribution in Australia and appears

to be a true nomad, although in many districts one or more birds will remain

for weeks, or even months, before moving on. In Western Australia it is regarded

as a typical inland species, whereas in eastern Australia it is perhaps just as

numerous in coastal areas.

1o+ RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

In northern Australia it has been reported at Katherine River, Northern

Territory, and Barnard at one time found it breeding in the McArthur River

district. In the lower Northern Territory, it was allegedly seen by members

of the Horn Expedition in 1894, and in 1911 it was reported by the Barclay

Expedition at Tdracowra; in 1914 5, A. White believed he saw the species near

Chambers’ Pillar.

As might be expected, no evidence of eeographical variation has been found

over the entire range.

The opinion has been expressed that the black ‘‘shoulder’’ (lesser wing

coverts) is larger in this species than in seripfus, but actually the reverse may

be the case in fully adult birds. Tn notatus, also, the true outer primary (small

and concealed) is white on the outer web and grey on the inner, whereas in

scriptus this feather is uniformly grey.

In his account of the American species, /eucurus, Friedmann (1950, p, 7],

footnote) wrote; ‘‘It is rather remarkable that there should be no sexual differ-

enee in size... . sinee Mathews... , finds females to be larger than males in

Elanus notatus and F. seriptus.’" Actually, however, the number of specimens

of scriptus in Mathews’ collection (five) is too few to determine this point,

while in noftatus the females, if \eally larger, are only yery slightly so, as shown

by the following measurements of adults.

Wing, 11 4, 289-302 (298); 15 9°, 293-310 (300-5) (AMNH).

12 4, 280-298 (290); 3 @, 280-298 (289) (SAM).

Tail, 7 4, 142-182 (147); 9 ©, 142-154 (149) (AMNH).

12 4, 143-153 (149); 3 9, 148-154 (152) (SAM).

Weights of a pair of adults taken on June 28th by K, Buller were: 3 270

grammes; ° 250 grammes. This would suggest that the sexes are about equal

in size,

From the earliest stages, when the tail is very short, nestlings of notatus

may be distinguished from those of scripfius by the much greater extent of black

on the under-wing coverts in the latter.

At the time of hatching, young notatus are covered in pale brownish-coloured

down, which changes within a fortnight to a smokey-grey colour. At this stage

the position of the black shoulder is indicated by a bare pateh of skin of dark

bluish colour, perhaps caused by the unerupted dark feathers beneath. It is

not known if a similar marking occurs in scriptus. In the week-old nestling,

the iris has been observed to he hazel, the cere bluish, and the legs flesh-

coloured. In a bird a fortnight old the iris was dark brown, the cere bluish-

green, ind the legs pale yellow.

CONDON AND AMADON-—TAXONOMIC NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN Hawks 195

Juvenals of notatus differ markedly from the adult. The top and sides

of the head are rich brown and the back is brownish-grey with white tips to

the feathers. The shoulder is dark grey with many of the feathers tipped

with white and the black patch under the wing is less extensive than in scriptus.

The upper breast is washed deep buff (formed by coloured tips to the white

feathers), with dark brown central shafts; it becomes paler with wear. The

iris at this stage is light brown, cere yellow, legs and feet bright yellow.

In several adults of both sexes the iris has been recorded as red, cere

yellow, legs and feet yellow.

ELANUS scriptus Gould.

Elanus scriptus Gould, 1842, pt. 9, 1, pl. (24); South Australia. (Mathews,

1927, p. 259, gives the further restriction of Cooper Creek.)

Elanus scriptus victorianus Mathews, 1917, Austral Av., Rec., 3, p. 70; Victoria.

Type (no field label): AMNH No. 531575; adult male; December, 1902.

No collector is given, but it may have been A. Coles, who is mentioned as

the collector of some specimens entered near the present specimen in

Mathews’ manuscript catalogue. Wing, 293; tail, 150. Coloured plate of

type: Mathews, 5, plate 250, opp. p. 208.

Range. Normally confined to the dry interior of the Australian mainland.

In abnormal seasons some birds reach the coastal districts of New South Wales,

Victoria, South and Western Australia; not recorded from Tasmania.

The Letter-winged Kite, unlike its congener, is a gregarious species which

nests in colonies (Jackson, 1919). In South Australia it is found in the north-

east, from Minnie Downs, Lake Eyre, Manuwalkaninna, and Lake Callabonna to

Moolawatana (near Lake Frome), an abnormal occurrence in 1952 being from

Butler, Eyre Peninsula. Previously unknown from Western Australia, during

the ‘‘southern invasion’’ of northern and central birds in the years 1951-53, this

kite was reported from such widely separated localities as Adele Island (near

Yampi) and Esperance, as well as the Pilbara district, and north and east of

Perth (Serventy, 1952, 1953).

Although specimens have been taken near Dubbo and at Melbourne (Moonee

Ponds), generally speaking, alleged occurrences in southern Australia prior to

1951 should be treated with caution.

In describing victortanus Mathews gave no characters, merely referring to

his plate and description of the specimen from Victoria in his ‘‘Birds of Aus-

tralia.’’ There he had made no attempt to differentiate Victorian birds from

those of other regions, but was merely describing the specimen as a representative

of the species. It is unlikely that any geographical variation exists.

196 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Probably scriptus is a slightly larger bird than volalus, because all the wing

lengths of females measured are near or above the maximum found in a con-

siderable series of #otatus, The wing of the type of victorianus is not in very

good condition for measurement,

Wing. 2 (type of victoriqnus) 292 (AMNH).

4 (breeding) 296; (juv.) 287 (MHLW).

@ 808, 311, 313 (AMNH),

be]

(subadult) 310 (AM); (breeding) 802, 305; (juy.) 302 (HLW).

Tail. 2 (“vietorianus’) 150; 146 (AMNH),

2 162 (AM); 156 (HLW).

When fully adult, scriptus is a rather whitish-looking bird, Perched, the

only means of distinguishing it from nolatus would be by the larger black

shoulder and somewhat paler erey back, both rather difficult characters to observe:

in the field, The bill averages slightly deeper and heavier in scriptus than in

notatus. Dy. Ernst Mayr has pointed out to us that whereas in the latter the

miter visible primary is two centimetres or more longer than the fourth, im

scriptus the difference is much less, and these two primaries are usually sub-

equal; this difference was constant in all material examined.

Mr. Warren Hitchcock has drawn our attention to a series of skins in the

H. l. White collection, showing fourteen stages in the development from newly-

hatched young to breeding adult. On hatching, the chick is greyish with dark

(blackish) eves, and after about seven days the head and breast become white.

Later, the seapulars appear as brownish feathers, and the back is also brown.

In the short-tailed nestling of about one month, the head assumes the same brown

volouration as the back, and the black shoulder and under-wing eoverts are well-

developed. At this stage the eyes are pale brown, cere pale horn, and legs and

feet pale yellow. The tail, grey at first, becomes progressively more whitish as

it lengthens, and as the bird approaches adult size the rufous upper breast

becomes paler. The black shoulder and under-wing markings, which are strongly

developed at an early age, increase in extent, while the head and baek become

more whitish ax the bird develops, With the completion in growth of the tail,

the rufous breast disappears, the back remains brownish, but the head is white,

and the priniaries are broadly tipped with white. The irides at this stage

have changed to a reddish-brown. Tn a comparable stage in notatus the head is

streaked with hrown and the edges of the secondaries, as well as the primaries,

are broadly tipped with white.

The colours of the soft parts of adults are similar to those of Hlanus notatus.

CONDON AND AMADON—TAXONOMIC NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN HAWKS 197

Genus Avicepa Swainson 1836.

Type. Awiceda cuculoides, Synonyms inelude Baza Hodgson 1837, Lepidogenys

Gould 1838, Lophastur Blyth 1842, and Nesobaza Mathews 1916, <Austra-

lian, Ethiopian and Oriental Regions (five species).

The name Aviceda antedates Baza which, until recently, was in general use,

AVICEDA suBoRisTATA (Gould).

Aviceda subcristata suberistata (Gould).

Lepidagenys subcristatus Gould, 1838, Syn. Bds. Austr. part 3, plate (46) and

text; New South Wales,

Baza subcristata queenslandica Mathews, 1912, Nov. Zool., 18, p. 251; Mackay,

Queensland, Type: AMNH No, 531727; adult female. There is no

original label, but in Mathews’ manuscript catalogue, where this specimen

is No, 6392, it is indicated that it was one of a lot of skins obtained from

Gerrard (a London dealer) in 1911, Wing, 341; tail, 209,

Lophastur subscristatus kempi Mathews, 1916, Bds. Austr, 5, p, 220; Skull

Creek, Cape York, Type: AMNH No, 531725; adult (?) female; Deeem-

ber 22nd, 1912; Rohin Kemp, Wing, 327; tail, 213,

Range. Coastal northern Australia eastward and south to the northern

rivers of New South Wales.

The Crested Hawk is of northern distribution in Australia, and one would

not expect birds that have penetrated a short distance into New South Wales

to be separable from those of Queensland, nor do they seem to be. Hartert:

(1931, p, 44) reached a similar conclusion, but Peters (1931), following Mathews’

‘Systema,’ recognized queenslandica with kempi a synonym, as distinet from

nominate subcristata of New South Wales, Measurements of specimens (some

probably wrongly sexed) may indicate a clinal sequence, the largest examples

being from New South Wales.

The bird figured in Mathews (1916, plate 251) is unusually rufous on the

ahdomen, but is natehed by at least three of sixteen skins from Queensland in

the American Museum. There seoms to be considerable variation as regards the

tone of this rufous or buffy suffusion, but it may be largely age variation and

fading rather than individual variation. Freshly moulted birds are darker

generally, Six skins have been seen by us from New South Wales, one without

more restricted locality, one from Goondiwindi, one from Clareville (Pittwater),

two trom Richmond River and another from Casino, not. far south of the Queens-

land border,

198 RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM

In New Guinea there ave three races of this hawk, slenzona and mwaigeuensis

in the west and megala in the east, which differ chiefly in size (Mayr, 1940, p,

7-8). Bastern Australian birds are larwer than the New Guinea races, and the

vrey of the breast and ventral stripes or barrings are paler,

Sexual dimorphism seems to be somewhat reduced in the Australian birds,

although material is not well enough labelled to work out the details, more

particularly since wear is so great or moult is so protracted in this species that

some portions of the plumage of many Australian specimens are badly bleached

and foxed,

Little is known of the occurrence of the Crested Hawk in the Northern

Territory, but it has been reported from the Darwin area and as tar south at

least as Adelaide River township, Condon, during the years 1943-1944, found

it a rare species and observed it only at Batehelor, abont 50 miles south of

Darwin, It was reported from the lower Northern Territory, at Palin Valley,

by Whitlock in 1925, but this record must remain doubtful as it has not been

seen by other visitors to this area,

There is a single record from the Kimberley area, Western Australia, and

examination of the specimen obtained suggests that a distinct geographical race

oceurs in that region, and to which Territory birds may also belong.

AVICEDA SUBCRISTATA NJTKENA, subsp, Tov.

Type. HLW 8329, Nat, Mus. Melbourne; adult male, fresh plumage; Fitzroy

River, Western Australia; August 8th, 1924; F. L. Whitlock collector,

Wing, 310; tail, 192; tarsus, 30. ‘'Iris golden yellow (eyes very promi-

nent), bill bluish, ewlmen darker, legs drab’’ (from field label),

Diagnosis, Smaller than eastern Australian birds (wing ¢ 310, against

321-348); top of head dark blue-wrey, face blue-grey, generally darker above;

less grey on hindneck (collar) and wpper baek; barrings on breast. blackish-

brown, without rufous tinge; some rufous on foreneck; under tail coverts deep

ochraceous as in A. s, suberistata; rump dark slate-grey, also retrices, with blue-

black barrings and terminal band, Njikena is the tribal namo of the aborigines

inhabiting the area where this bird was collected.

In general appearance and size the type of njikena seems closest to bis-

marckii of the Bismarck Archipelayo. The closest. race geographically is timor-

lavensis, which oceurs in the island chain from Lombok ta Timorlaut, hut it is

smaller still than njtkena and the eross-barrines are more as in s. subcristata.

Another form, pallidu, trom south-east and Kei Islands, is also small, but lacks

the blackish tone in Lhe barrings, while typical stenzona from Aru Islands and

western New Guinea has blackish barrines and pale ochraceous under tail

voverts,

CONDON AND AMADON —TAXONOMIC NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN HAwks 199

Whitlock, in his account of his trip to the Fitzroy River (1925), stated that

he believed he saw the mate to the bird deseribed above. The species is verv

sedentary, ten subspecies being known from the islands to the north of Australia.

Wing measurements:

New South Wales. 4 329; 9 358 (AMNH).

6 528, 329, 329; 9 345 (AM).

Queensland. 12 8, 9 321-344 (332-5) (AMNH).

3 8 340-348; 9 320, 382 (SAM).

Western Australia (type of njikena). 2 310 (HLW),.

Zastern New Guinea and islands (megala, from Mayr, 1940, p. 8).

8 § 298-313 (307-4); 8 9 314-384 (323-5).

Western New Guinea, Aru and other islands (stenozona, from Mayr, Inc,

cit.).

8 g 290-303 (296-8); 5 & 296-314 (305-6).

Waiget Island (waigewensis Mayr, 1940, p. 8). 2 314-319.

South-east and Kei Islands (pallida, trom Stresemann, p. 305).

g 286-295; 2 800-314.

Lombok to Timorlant, ete. (fimorlaoensis, Stresemann, loc. cit.).

8 295-306; @ 310-327.

Bismarck Archipelago (bismarckii, Stresemann, loc. cit.).

6 309-312; @ 317-330.

In young birds of A, s. subcristata the erey breast is lackine and the cross-

barring are much narrower than in the adult, while the upper surfaces are

brownish, perhaps accentuated by fading and wear.

Genus Minyrus Lacépéde 1799.

Type. Falco mnailuus. Old World (two or three species),

Minvus MIGRANS (Boddaert).

Milvus migrans affinis Gould.

Milwus affinis Gould, 1838, Syn. Bds. Austr., part 3, plate (47, fiz. 1) and text;

Australia (restricted to New South Wales by Mathews, 1916).

Milvuus horschun napiert Mathews, 1912, Nov. Zool. 18, p. 249; Napier, Broome

Bay, Kimberley Division, Western Australia. Type: AMNH No. 532065;

adult female (no date giyen); G. F. Hill collector; wing 408, tail (long outer

feathers), 252.

Range. Lesser Sunda Islands, Timor, Celebes, New Guinea, Bismarck

Archipelago. In Australia mainly north of about 20° south latitude.

200 KkECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

It is probable that the Black Kite is only a recent arrival in the north of

Australia, one which may yet establish itself in the south as a result of large

scale radial dispersal movements during abnormal seasons (sec Serventy, 1953).

We have coinpared specimens from the Celebes, the Lesser Sundas, New

Guinea, and various parts of Australia without detecting geographical differences,

Although sexual dimorphism is slight, recently collected material shows

that the bill is shorter and more strongly hooked in the male than in the female,

Genus LorpHorctiniA Kaup 1847.

Type. Milvus isurus; Australia (one species).

The single member of this monotypie genus bears a strong resemblance to

the Red Kite (Milwus milvus) of Murope, and were it not lor the faet that the

latter has transverse seutes down the front of the tarsus, while iswrus has reti-

culations, one might he inclined to assign the Australian bird to the genus

Milvus, Although the nature of the tarsal covering is undoubtedly a rather

variable character when well-marked differences oeewr among closely related

forms (the scales are reticulate in Hamirostra also), they must be given im-

portance. In Lophoictinia the coracoids are distinctive, being short and rela-

tively wide and heavy, and the right coracoid overlies ventrally the left, which

is the reverse of the condition of the pectoral areh met with in Aquila, Circus,

Faleo, and Iieraaiitus. Instead of overlying one another, the coracoids just

touch in Milvus, Maliastwr and the unrelated Klanus. We have no skeletal

material of Hamirostra for comparison.

Published veeords and notes on stomach contents indicate that this species

ix a persistent hunter of birds, and probably also a nest-robber, In its actions

it has been likened to a harrier, and possibly it is mistaken at times for one in

the field.

LoOpHOIcTINIA tsuRA (Gould),

Milvus isurus Gould 1838, Syn, Bds. Austr, part 5, plate (47, fig. 2) and text;

Australia New South Wales, according to Mathews, 1916.

Milvus isurus westraliensts Mathews 1912, Noy, Zool., 18, p, 250, Perth, Western

Australia. Type: AMNH No, 582146; adult male; November 7th, 1904;

‘Dr. Kelsall’’s wing, 455,

Range, Australian mainland.

The Sqtiare-tailed Kite is a rare species which is likely {o turn up at

unexpected times and places. For instance, Ashby collected a bird at Black-

wood, near Adelaide, in October, 1919, and the few speeimens contained in

CONDON AND AMADON—TAXONOMIC NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN Hawks 201

museums have been taken from such widely separated localities as Pubelup and

Broome Hill, Western Australia, Trangie (north-west of Narromine), and

Sydney, New South Wales, and Gayndah (west of Maryborough), Cooktown

and Cape York, Queensland.

The type of westraliensis is in rather abraded and soiled plumage, but so

far as can be judged it does not differ from specimens from Queensland in the

American Museum. The type is rather a small specimen, but one of the Queens-

land males has the wing only three millimetres longer.

At present there is no evidence of geographical variation. A male in the

South Australian Museum, from Pubelup, collected by the late Major H. M.

Whittell on December 30th, 1938, is a juvenal. It is a more ‘‘golden’’ bird

than all others seen and entirely lacks the broad blackish stripes on the

breast and head, thin blackish shafts on the feathers being the only indication

of striping, with a few small black streaks on the nape. The rump is whitish,

recalling the Swamp Harrier (Circus approximans). In this bird the iris was

‘‘orey-brown,’’ cere ‘‘flesh colour,’’ and feet ‘‘white.’’

In adults the irides have been recorded as ‘‘yellow,’’ as also are the cere,

legs and feet; the bill is bluish horn.

Wing. 38 south-western Australia 445, 470 (SAM; HUW); 455 (westra-

liensts).

470 (HLW).

New South Wales 450, 460 (HLW).

South Australia 475 (SAM).

Cape York 470 (SAM); eastern Queensland 490 (AM).

Queensland 463, 462, 460, 466, 482 (?—-shot from nest—may be

mis-sexed); @ 480; unsexed, 465 (AMNH).

Os +0 +0 Os +40

Genus Hamirostra Brown 1846.

Type. Hamirostra montana = Buteo melanosternon. Australian mainland

(one species).

The systematic position of this monotypic genus is still uncertain, but it

may be related to the Kite Lophoictinia. The legs and feet are strong, the tarus

heavy, feathered one-third in front and reticulated, but with a single row of

scales in front somewhat larger. In its actions and posture it is unlike any

other medium-sized Australian hawk, and rather resembles the Buteos or ‘‘ Buz-

zards” in its habit of soaring in wide circles often to great heights, with

separated primaries or ‘‘fingers.’’ Like a Buteo, too, its flight is rather laboured,

becoming swift on attacking when it grapples with its prey on the ground.

202 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Although MeCilp (1934) and Serventy and Whiltell (1951) have stated that

Hamirestra does not feed on carrion, perusal of various authors quoted by

Mathews can leave no doubt that it does so at tines, One of the speeimens in

Mathews’ collection had, according to the collector, J. P. Rogers, fed wpon a

decomposed kangaroo. <A similar habit has occasionally been reported in the

Commion Buzzard (Butea buteo) of the Palacarctie Region. Despite all these

restiiblances to buzzards it is considered that /Tamirostra must be regarded as

a kite, and if is unfortunate that the name “‘buzzard’’ has become firmly

established amongst ornithologists in Australia, It is suggested that the bird

be known as the Black-hreasted Buzzard-Kite.

HLAMIROSTRA MELANOSTERNON (Gould).

Buteo melanosternon Gould 1841, Proce. Zool. Soe., London, 1840, p, 162; interior

of New South Wales.

Hamirostra montana Brown 1846, Ulastr. Gen. Bds., part 8, p, 12; Swan River,

Wostern Australia.

Gypoictinia melanosterna decepla Mathews 1912, Noy. Zool., 18, p. 250; Parry's

Creek, north-western Australia. Type: AMNIT No, 582147; female; Feb-

ruary 4th, 1909; J. P. Rogers collector, Wing, 447. Coloured plate of

type: Mathews, Bds, Austr., 5, plate 248, opp. p. 188,

Range. The northern and interior regions of the Australian mainland,

This short-tailed raptorial bird is a rare species judging by the limited

number of specimens in collections. Tt is generally accepted that a light and

dark phase occurs, but we have seen no very young birds with characters of the

dark phase. In the Mathews collection there are three skins from the Northern

Territory and four from north-western Australia. All of them lack the blaek

head and breast from which the species takes its name, but all appear to be

adults and at least one of them was taken at the nest. They ave rather uniform,

although great individual variation was observed in specimens m other Aus-

tralian collections, Tn some light phase birds the dorsal surfaee may be more

rufous than in others, while in certain dark phase examples the hind-neek is

deep rufous and there is also much rafous on the back, Other dark birds lack

entirely any rufous colouration above, and the presence of this feature is prob-

ably a sign of immaturity.

Light phase specimens have been examined (rom Marngoe Creek, W. Win-

berlev, Point Torment, uorth-west Australia, Alexandra, Northern Territory

(nestine) (AMNTH), Northern Territory, Parry's Creek, Western Australia, and

Byrock (ITLW) and Clare (SAM), New South Wales, while the dark phase

CONDON AND AMADON—TAXONOMIC NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN HAWKS = 203

has been taken in Western Australia (no exact locality (AM)), at Borroloola

(HLW), Northern Territory, Sedan (SAM) and Cooktown (AM), Queensland,

Mosseiel (AM), New South Wales, and Swan Mill (NMM), Victoria,

Western Australia 455 (AM).

North Queensland 445 (AM).

New South Wales 460 + (HLW), 452°(SAM),

type of decepta 447 (AMNIT).

Wing, 3

¢ Northern Territory 455 (HUW),

New South Wales 477 (AM).

North Queensland 462 (SAM).

The nestling has heen described as ‘‘clothed in bluish-white down with a

few rufous feathers on the head and back... . bill horn-colour, the legs and cere

pinkish-erey, and the ivides brown.’’ (MeGilp, 1934.)

There is a chiek labelled *‘about one month old”’ in the Australian Museum

whieh was collected at Mossgiel, New South Wales, by K. 11. Bennett, in Novem-

her, 1884, which is covered with white down, with rufous feathers just appearing

on the head, hind-neck, seapulars, and with the remiges and rectrices just

showing, and the irides are recorded as ‘‘clear light brown,’’ cere ‘‘bluish,’’

legs and feet ‘‘white,’’ and claws ‘‘black.”’

Two nestlings in the Australian Museum, collected at Mossgiel, New South

Wales, in December, are labelled ‘‘about six weeks old.’’ Both birds are

feathered and bright rufous generally; on the under-surfaces the very bright

rufous feathers of the foreneck and breast have dark shafts which are less

prominent on the abdomen, Above both birds are blackish on the back, but the

remainder of the bright rufous feathers all show dark shafts, ineluding the sea-

pulars, rump and upper tail coverts. From aboye the tail is brownish-grey,

tipped with Iuffy white. ‘‘Iris, clear light brown; cere bluish-white; bill, basal!

half of upper mandible bluish, remainder black; lower mandible bluish; legs and

feet white with black claws.”’

In the adult ihe iris is ‘‘rich hazel’’; cere ‘‘greenish-white’’; bill ‘horn

colour with black tip’*; Jews and feet ‘‘pinkish’* with ‘‘black’’ claws,

‘

Genus Hauiastur Selby 1840.

Type, Haliastur pondicertianus = Falco indus. Synonym Tetiniastur

Mathews, 1915, Malaysia and Australasia (two species),

The name, /ctiniastur, was originally introduced by Mathews as a sub-

venus for the species sphenurus, but cannot be upheld,

204 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Hauiastur spHenurus (Vieillot).

Milvus sphenurus Vieillot, 1818, Nouy, Diet, d’Hist, Nat., 20, p. 564; “Austral-

asie’ — New South Wales.

Haliastur sphenurus territori Mathews 1912, Austral Av, Ree,, 1, p. 88; Daly

River, Northern Territory. Type: AMNH No, 532299; adult male; Septem-

ber 24, 1894: Knut Dahl, Wing, 379?) tail, 245? (badly worn).

Haliastur sphenurus johannae Brasil, January 7, 1916, Rev. Franc, d’Orn,, 4,

p. 201; New Caledonia.

Haliastur sphenurus sarasint Mathews, February 29, 1916; Bds, Australia, 5,

p. 169; New Caledonia. Mathews designated no type. His collection con-

tains only one specimen from New Caledonia, a female taken November 18,

1914, by P. D. Montague, now AMNII No. 532341. This might be con-

sidered the type; on the other hand, it cannot be proved to be such, and it

is possible that Mathews, who had a habit of writing new naines on labels

attached to specimens, examined other New Caledonian material. A search

of collections, such as those of the British Museum, may reveal a specimen

so labelled.

Range, New Caledonia, New Guinea, Australia; (?) visiting northern

Tasmania,

Amadon (1941) revised this species and admitted no races. Re-examination

of large series from Australia and New Guinea and of three from New Cale-

donia re-affirms this conelusion. Admittedly, some specimens from southern

Australia are yery large, but this is not true of all of them, and the slight size

cline does not seem worthy of subspecifie status. There seems to be no important

eolour variation. The newly moulted feathers fade and bleach more rapidly in

Australia than in the more humid climate of New Guinea, but any slight dif-

ference visible in series seems to be due to this cause and not to geographic

variation.

The following data for three females collected by L, Maemillan are of

interest: adult, New Caledonia, May 15, 1939; wing, 415; weight, 921 grammes

(fat), Adult, southern Queensland, March 25, 1940; wing, 425; weight, 761

grammes; immature (on wing), April 6, 1940; wing, 403; weight, 517 grammes.

The name ‘' Whistling Bagie’’ is a misnomer, and we feel consideration

should be given to the suggestion that this species be called the ‘‘ Whistling

Kite,’ especially as the birds often gather in large numbers, are kite-like in

their actions, and are, in fact, kites!

CONDON AND AMADON —TAXONOMIC NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN Hawks 205

Hauiastur inpus (Boddaert),

Haliastur indus girrenera ( Vicillot).

Haliaetus girrenera Vieillot, 1822, Gal. Ois., 1, p. 31, pl. 10; “India, Bengal,

Pondicherry, Coromandel and Malabar, also New Holland according to

Latham.’’ The type locality has been restricted to Australia', and more

specifically New South Wales, as the plate is said to represent the Australian

form. The species occurs in New South Wales, though we have seen no

specimens from there. Stresemann (1951) has shown that the ‘‘ Expedition

Baudin,’’ which secured the Australian birds named by Vieillot, collected

only a limited number of species in New South Wales. He does not men-

tion this species, but the problem is less important in that only one race

is found in Australia.

Haliastur indus subleucostemius Mathews, 1912, Nov. Zool,, 18, p. 249; Augustus

Island, north-western Australia (published as ‘‘Derby”’ in original deserip-

tion). Type: AMNH No. 532278; adult female; August 4, 1910; G@. F.

Hill, Wing, 372; tail 200 (?).

Range, Australia, chiefly the northern, manegrove-bordered coasts, and

reaching northern New South Wales, which has been designated as type locality,

but from whence we have seen no specimens. Also Papuan region and Moluceas,

intergrading with intermedius on islands to the west of New Guinea, and ex-

tending eastwards to the Bismarck Archipelago. Normally a coastal] species in

northern Australia, it will often proceed far inland along the margins of rivers.

Diagnosis. Differs from H. i. indus and H. i. intermedius by having the

breast usually immaculate white (without black shaft streaks), Differs from the

Solomon Islands population as noted under the description of the following

race.

The nominate race of the Brahminy Kite, which is confined to south-east

Asia (India, Burma, southern China, ete.), is replaced in southern Annam,

northern Siam and the Malay Archipelago east to Celebes and the Lesser Sundas

by the race intermedius.

Although New Guinea birds appear a little smaller than Australian ones,

the difference is hardly as great as the wing measurements suggest. Many of

the New Guinea specimens are moulting or in poor feather, and it is suspected

that some may be wrongly sexed.

‘Rothschild and Hartert, Nov. Zool, 21, p, 210, 1014,

206 ReEcorDs orf THE S.A. MusEUM

Wing. Australia, 7 ¢, 358-377 (368); 3 9 867, 372, 378; 2 lahelled ‘‘ @ _

378, 390 (AMNH).

Northern Territory, 6, 343 (SAM).

North-western Australia, 2, 375 (SAM),

Cape York, @, 358 (SAM).

New Guinea (and coastal islands), 15 ¢, 348-378 (359); 10 ¢,

358-373 (864) (AMNTIL).

New Ireland (no sex), 860 (SAM),

HALIASTUR INDUS PLAVIROSTRIS, SUbSpP. NOY.

Type. AMNH No. 221221: adult female; Bougainville Island, Solomous;

April 17, 1928; Whitney South Seas Expedition. Wing, 383; tail, 207; erdmen

from cere, 30; depth of bill at front marein of cere, 20.

Range. Solomon Islands (including Nissan Island), also some of the

easternmost islands of the Bismarck Archipelago, and Feni Island, east of

southern New Treland.

Diagnosis. Agrees with girrenera of Australia and Papua in having the

breast usually immaculate white, Differs from it, and from the other races of

the species, by having (adults) the bill entirely yellow, without blackish areas

at the base of either mandible. The bill of flavirestris is also, when compared

with that of girrenera, perceptibly licavier and more ‘‘aquiline.”’

This race is doubtless of very general oecurrence throughout the Solomons.

Specimens were examined from the following islands in this archipelago: Arnar-

yon, Bagea, Beagle, Bougainville, Choiseul, (fizo, Gower, Gaudaleanal, Kulain-

bangra, Pavuvu, Shortland, Uvi, Vella Lavella, Wickam Arch, Ysabel,

Although specimens from the Admiralty Islands, New Britain, New Han-

over, Lihir, Squally Island, and even New Ireland (one skin) are very close

to or inseparable from girrenera, four birds from Feni Island definitely belong

to fluwirestris, Whether this Solomons’ race has, correlated with its heavier

bill, more predatory habits than other Brahminy Kites is not known. If so, it

would form an interesting parallel to the sea-eagles represented in the Solomons

by the species Waliaétus sanfordi, which has more predatory habits than Jeaco-

gaster (Mayr, 1936, p. 3),

Flavirostris averages larger than girrenera trom Papua, but we have not

enoueh Australian birds in guod feather to be sure how they compare with

Jlavirostris in size. Two unsexed Australian birds in the American Museuni are

fally as laree as any ot the Solonion Island ones, while two females in the South

Australian Museum, one from the Northern Territory and one from Cape York,

are slightly smaller and larger respectively than the type of this new raee,

CONDON AND AMADON—TAXONOMIC NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN TJAWKS = 207

The helly in flavirostris averages paler rufous than in girrenera, While the

difference is unmistakable in our material, the difference may possibly be due

to wear or bleaching. No difference in colour was visible in dorsal aspeet, nor

did comparison of inimature stages reveal colour differences,

A. female was selected as type of flavirastris becanse the heavy bill is often

more apparent in this, the larger sex. The colour of the bill of this race, as

noted by the collectors, was usually given as‘ vellow,’’ once as ‘‘chrome yellow,”’

ores as “‘horn with a yellow tinge,’’ and onee as ‘‘ereen,’’ In the dried skin

‘horn with a vellow tinge’’ might be the best deseription,

Although females of this species are somewhat larger than males, it is not

always possible to sex specimens acenrately by measurements, The following

data doubtless include some mis-sexed birds,

Wing, Solomon Islands, 16 @, 357-384 (871); 13 3, 871-390 (379).

Feni Islands, 2 4, 372, 878; 2 2, 378, 383,

Dy, EK, Mayr, while with the Whitney Expedition in the Solomons, obtained

the weights of three adult males, as follow: 625, 625, 650 ovanimes,

bes

Genus Accrrrrer Brisson 1760.

Types. Accipiter Brisson = Falco nisus Linné, Synonyms include uAstur

Lacépeéde 1799, Leucospiza Kaup 1844, Uraspiza Kaup 1854, and Paraspizias

Mathews 1915. Old and New Worlds (about 45 species).

All the generic synonyms given above were used at some time or other by

Mathews in his various writings; none can be upheld. There are no reliable

characters available for separating the goshawks (under Astur) from Acctpiter

(ef, Peters (1981), p, 205, footnote).

Owing to variation in size, plumage, coloration and pattern, some confusion

has oceurred as to the number of Australian species which should be admitted.

Gould (1865), Sharpe (1874, 1899), North (1912) and Mathews (1946) all

regarded the ‘‘Grey’’ and ‘‘White’’ Goshawks as separate species, but there

seems little doubt that these are merely colour phases of a single species, Acci-

piter novaehollandiac,

-lecipiter fascialus and A. cirrhocephalus are sibling species which almost

defy exact definition on a physical basis apart from size; both pass through

similar plumage stages, but the changes are more prolonged in the first-named.

Tn birds from the extreme north of Australia, males of the former are about the

same size and colowr as females of the latter, and mis-sexed cabinet specimens

inay add to the confusion. In southern birds, small males of fasciatus also pro-

vide some difficulties, Perhaps the most reliable feature for separating the

208 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

two species is the bill, which in the larger is always noticeably heavier, Mea-

surements of the greater height of the maxilla or upper mandible lave shown

that in didimus, the northern race of fasciatus, this is about 10 tm.,, while

in females of cirrhocephalus it rarely exceeds 85 mm, In the eabinet skin the

feet may dry in such a way as to make measurement difficult, but it is usually

quite apparent that the tip of the hind elaw reaches only to the proximal end

of the last seement of the middle toe in the Collared Sparrowhawk, whereas in

fasciutus it reaches to the base of the claw of the middle toe, Nevertheless, in

the Brown Goshawk the condition is more variable, and in some birds the tip of

the hind claw only reaches to about the middle of the middle toe. Because of

these differences in the toes fasciatus was finally placed in -lstur with the gos-

hawks.

Slight differences in the barrings of the primaries may also be observed,

Tn cirrhacephalus the dark harrings are usually wider and stronger at all stages,

whereas in fasciatus they may be narrow and tapering, with the outer edge of the

feather light-coloured, and the bars not extending so far towards the tip ol the

wing, Exceptions in both species oceur,

In young birds, differences in the tarsal scutes permit ready separation of

the species. In cirrhocephalus, which moults directly into adult plumage from

the juvenal stage, the scutes are fused at quite an early age, but in fasciatus the

*hooted’? condition is found only in old birds.

Mueh vonfusion has occurred regarding the status of the problematical

“West Australian Goshawk,’’ A, ¢ruentus of (lould and other early writers, but

we have been unable to discover any discernible basis for its recognition, either

as a species, ‘‘hybrid,’’ or geographical race, Could’s type speeimen, whieh

came from the York distriet, Western Anstralia, appears to have been merely a

rather small individual in fully adult plumage (ef, Rameay 1879, p, 174; Gurney

188), p. 262). North (1898, p. 16-18; 1972, p. 194) dealt at some length with

**crnentus,’’ and referred to it as ‘'undoubtedly the rarest’? of Australian Ae-

cipitres, but examination of speciinens in the Australian Museum labelled as

such (by Ramsay or North) has shown that they are typical didimus,

Mathews, who examined the type of cruentus, found that North’s **cxiver-

tus”* was not the same as Gould's bird, but ‘the common bird of Western Aus-

tralia” (i.e, fasciatus) (quoted hy White, 1915),

Acciprrer rasciatus (Visors and Horsfield),

Aeeipiter fasciatus taseiatus (Vigors and Horsfteld),

Ashu Fasciatus VYigors and Tlorsfield, 1827. Trans. Linn, Soe. London, 15, p.

181; New South Wales.

CONDON AND AMADON—TAXONOMIC NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN HAWKS = 209

Astur cruentus Gould, 1842 (1843), Proce. Zool. Soc. London, p. 113; York

district, Western Australia. Type said to be in the Academy of Natural

Sciences of Philadelphia (No. 1279).

Astur maculosus Coles, 1897, Vict. Nat., 14, p. 43; Blackburn, Victoria. (Type

said to be in British Museum.)

Astur fasciatus mackayt Mathews, 1912, Nov. Zool., 18, p. 246; Mackay, Queens-

land. Type: AMNH No. 533214; adult male. The specimen has no date,

locality, or field label, but according to Mathews’ catalogue was acquired

in 1911 from the London dealer, Gerrard. Wing, 290? (worn moulting) ;

tail, 237? (worn). The type is in excessively worn plumage; this is the

basis for this supposedly brown-backed race.

Urospiza fasciata rennelliana Kinghorn, 1937, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, ser. B,

107, part 1, p. 180; Rennell Island. Type: Austr. Museum No. O 32284.

The specimen has no date or field label, but bears a printed label ‘‘ Astur

versicolor Ramsay. Hab. Ugi Isld. Sex female.’’ The entry in the Aus-

tralian Museum Register merely states ‘‘Rennell Island. Coll. G. A. V.

Stanley.’’ Wing, 280; tail, 214; tarsus 75, The type is in very poor condi-

tion and the plumage is badly faded and worn.

Range. The whole of Australia, except the coastal northern regions from

Cape York westwards to the Kimberleys; Tasmania; Norfolk Island (queried by

Peters, 1931, no specimens seen by us); Rennell and Bellona Islands, off the

southern Solomons.

The Brown Goshawk occurs in all parts of Australia and Tasmania, and

has a wide distribution in tropical regions from Christmas Island in the Indian

Ocean through the Lesser Sundas and Timor to New Guinea, New Caledonia,

Lifu, Loyalty Islands, and Fiji eastwards. Peters (1931) listed seven sub-

species, including three from Australia, and Rand (1941) has described an addi-

tional New Guinea race, dogwa.

Peters used the name cruentus for birds from ‘‘ West and South Australia, ’

perhaps following Mathews, but there is little justification for recognizing a dry

country race even though birds from a wide area over the interior of the con-

tinent are duller and with greyish heads, characters which seem to be largely

induced by wear and fading. Examples from more humid regions have blackish

heads, and we have seen specimens from Napier Broome Bay, north-western

Australia, Vasse, south-west Australia, Adelaide, South Australia, Heidelberg,

Vietoria, and Ravenshoe, north Queensland, which are inseparable from New

South Wales birds. In several south-western individuals in the Australian

Museum the thighs were brighter rufous than in eastern ones both in the adult

210 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

and young, but generally speaking western birds seem to be practically indis-

tinguishable,

Although nothing is known of regular movements of the Brown Goshawk

in Australia, specimens examined suggested that, in Western Australia at least,

southern birds may warider to the extreme north of that State, thereby invading

the territory of didimus, An adult lemale in the National Museum, Melbourne,

collected on June 5, 1910, at. Napier Broume Bay is fully as laree as and almost

indistinguishable from dark-headed birds from Vasse (near Busselton), Western

Australia, Plenty River (neai’ Melbourne), Victoria, and Cobborah, New South

Wales, Furthermore, during a recent Australian Museum expedition, Mr. Allen

Keast. collected a large female (wine 290), in juvenal plumage, at Forrest River

Mission, about 50 miles south of Napier Broome Bay, on June 2, 1952, Two

other juvenals in the Australian Museum (no dates recorded), and one in the

South Australian Museum (female, April 8, 1913) were taken near Derby,

north-western Australia, and all are large birds. Although more brownish above

and below than examples of corresponding age seen from the south, they are

matched by at least one from Homebush, New South Wales, ard several from

Swan River and King George’s Sound, Western Australia. ‘lhe breast and fore-

neels ave heavily-barred brown, the whitish throat is heavily streaked with brawn,

and the thimhs are dull rufous-brown and buffy white.

Tasmanian birds are generally somewhat larger, a little darker above and

below, with more whitish throats than most from the adjacent inainland, How-

ever, at this stage, we prefer not to introduce a name to indicate the differences

in this population, whieh appews to merge with southern mainland birds,

Tt is remarkable that on Rennell Island and its outlier, Bellona Island,

there is a population of this species very similar to the New Caledonian (vigilar)

and Australian races, Rennell, though usually ineluded with the Solomons, is

considerably south of that eroup and has a somewhat different fauna, and J1ce7-

piter fasciatus does not occur in the Solomons proper,

The Whitney Expedition secured a pair of adults of fasciatus, the male m

badly worn plumage, on Rennell and Bellona. This was before the American

Museu had any specimens of vigiltax, and Mayr, in his report on the Rennell

Expedition (1931), based his assizument of these birds to vigilar on a eom-

parison made for him in the British Museum by the late A. Goodson, who noted

their similarity to fasciatus of Australia,

With the present fine sevies of wiytlax, it heeame evident that the pair of

adults from Rennell is larger in every dimension than vigilax. The difference

is not very preat, however, and imerely serves to bring the Rennell birds into

the size class of /. fasczatus, from which they appear inseparable. In particular,

CONDON AND AMADON—TAXONOMIC NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN HAWKS 271

the adult male from Bellona, which is in fine plumage, agrees in every detail of

colour and size with specimens from southern Australia.

In the meanwhile, a third specimen was collected on Rennell by G. A. V,

Stanley, and became the type of Winghorn’s Urespiza fasciata rennelliana, dit-

ferentiated as follows: ‘‘In size and colour this bird is very similar to the

narrow-banded form of U. fasciata. The tail feathers, though much worn at the

tips, are a little broader than those of WU, fasciata (Australian), the tarsus is

longer, and the legs and feet more powerfully built... , Wing, 280.’’ These

differences are not apparent in the two birds in the American Museum. Examina-

tion of the type of rennelliana in the Australian Museum confirms Kinghorn's

remarks to some extent, but the differences are well within the range of variation

met with in Australian birds, and the specimen is in poor condition. It appears

to be rather faded, with a ‘‘washed-out’’ appearance, and in this respect is

similar to a specimen of didimus from Darwin, The head is dark grey, the

face pale brownish-grey, and there is a trace of a red collar on the sides of the

neck; the upper surfaces are greyish-brown. Ventrally, the feathers are barred

pale rufous and dull white (slightly wider and darker on the breast), and the

thighs ave of the same colour.

Unless by chanee the Rennell birds reached there rather recently {rom

Australia, one would not expect them to be the same as the Australian race. We

conclude, nevertheless, that *ennellianus must be considered a synonym of fascia-

tus until proved otherwise,

A few very large examples (mainly females) were examined from New

South Wales and Tasmania, but the size is not indicated by wing or other

conventional measurements. Nevertheless, even allowing for different methods

of preparation resulting in some distortion, it is believed that outsize birds (and

also “‘runts’’) may be met with occasionally.

lixeept where otherwise indicated, measurements given below are taken from

skins im museums in Australia.

Wing, 2, adult.

South-eastern Australia (6), 260-275 (265) (AMNI).

New South Wales (9), 255-278 (265).

Victoria (1), 270.

Tasmania (4), 268-272 (270°5).

Sonth Avstralia (7), 256-270 (262).

Southern Queensland (1), 268 (AMNH),

South- and mid-west Australia (3), 250 -+, 261, 262 (AMNH),

Rennell Island (1), 265 (AMNTI),

212 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

é, immature (8), 257-267 (262) (AMNH).

¢, second year :

New South Wales (7), 247-270 (260-1).

Tasmania (1), 270.

South Australia (4), 255-270 (261-5).

Southern Queensland (1), 270.

South-west Australia (1), 266.

juvenal

New South Wales (7), 245-275 (264-4).

Tasmania (1), 264.

South Australia (16), 227-270 (261-7).

South-west Australia (4), 238-265 (253-7).

@, adult

South-eastern Australia (3), 302, 307, 311 (AMNBH),

New South Wales (3), 302, 305, 310.

South Australia (3), 306, 302, 308.

Southern Queensland (1), 312 (AMNH).

South-west Australia (1), 305.

South-west and mid-west Australia (3), 300, 305, 313 (AMNH).

North-western Australia (1), 290.

Northern Territory (2), 287, 305.

Rennell Island (2), 280 (AM), 292 (AMNH).

9, immature (15), 295-312 (304) (AMNH).

9, second year

New South Wales (8), 292-311 (298-8).

South Australia (8), 265-305 (290°2).

North Queensland (1), 305,

juvenal

New South Wales (6), 296-312 (304).

South Australia (10), 262-311 (300-6).

Tasmania (7), 291-305 (300-7).

South-west Australia (4), 253-290 (268-2).

North-western Australia (4), 270-290 (279-5),

Weight, 1 large @ imm. 593 grammes.

tes

Altogether, we have examined and measured more than 170 specimens of

this, the large, more heavily-pigmented nominate race, The general trend towards

maturity is for the broad stripes and barrings of the ventral surface in the

juvenal to be replaced by narrower transverse barrings, probably over a period

CONDON AND AMADON—TAXONOMIC NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN Hawks 213

of several years. Immature birds far outnumber adults in collections, and this

has enabled us to distinguish three plumage stages—juvenal, ‘‘second year,”’

and adult. Individuals in fresh plumage are always darker than those in worn

plumage, especially on the upper surfaces. The moult from one plumage stage

to another is gradual and protracted, and is responsible for the remarkable

variety of patterns met with. However, most of the variations in colour are

due to wear and fading, and very few skins were seen in which it was due solely

to moulting. This is remarkable considering the large number of individuals

handled.

After hatching, in the late spring or early summer, the white downy chick

rapidly acquires the juvenal plumage—first on the wings, then on the scapulars,

back and tail. As soon as fully fledged, and when about a month old, the

young Goshawk leaves the nest.

Juvenals of both sexes, which differ markedly from adults, may be distin-

guished by the heavy brown streaks on the breast and throat and the broad

blotehes or barrings on the abdomen. Above, the dark brown feathers are edged

with cinnamon-rufous, this later fading to pale buff or being lost by wear.

The nape is streaked with white, the central rectrices are prominently barred

above, and the tibiae are indistinctly or broadly barred dull rufous and buffy

white. The few Tasmanian specimens examined have the streaks on the throat

reduced, and the tibiae are heavily barred fawn and buff. Juvenals of didimus

are duller with less rufous above (perhaps due to fading), have less white at

the nape, numerous streaks on the chin and throat, and dull rufous-brown tibiae

with only slight indications of barring.

It is believed that the juvenal plumage is retained for nearly one year,

when the ‘‘second year’’ plumage is gradually acquired. The first new feathers

are those of the crown, cheeks, mantle, throat and abdomen, and these are fully

developed before the second summer; the tail may not be replaced completely

until the beginning of the following autumn.

The ‘‘second year’’ plumage is much like the adult, but may be distin-

guished as follows. The upper surfaces are dark greyish-brown without any

rufous and the crown is blackish-brown or dark grey with fewer white streaks

at the nape. The only trace of a chestnut nuchal collar is on the sides of the

neck, while the central rectrices are paler and more distinctly barred than in

the adult and are the last feathers to be acquired. Below are numerous trans-

verse bars on the breast, abdomen and under tail coverts of dull rufous brown

with darker edges adjacent to the alternating white bars; the throat is dappled

grey and dull white and the tibiae have acquired narrow bars of dull rufous

and white. The markings on the lining of the wings resemble the barrings of

214 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

the underparts, being rufous instead of dark brown (as in the juvenal), Tndivi-

duals are commonly found breeding in this plumage.

Nothing appears to be known of the duration of the ‘‘second year"’ type of

plumage, bt if may he retained for more than one year. In most descriptions

reference is made simply to “immature’’ and ‘‘adult”’ plumages, the ‘‘seeond

year'’ stage being ineluded in the last-named, There is reason to believe, how-

ever, that the fully adult bird is characterised by much finer rufous and white

ventral barrings on the breast, abdomen, tnder tail eoyerts, and thighs, A

prominent ¢hestnut collar and usually the eonrplete absence of white streaks on

the nape also distinguish this stage, when the central pair of! reetrices are darle

in colour with the merest trace of darker harrings. Altogether, the tully adult

Goshawk, examples of which are rare in collections, is a brilliantly-eoloured bird

when in fresh plumage. It may be recognized also by the complete fusion of

the tarsal scutes, which forms the ‘‘hooted’’ condition,

From specimens examined it would appear that the moult into adult plumage

eommences in the spring and continues for several months, although the body

feathers are rapidly aequired,

In several adult females the iris has been variously recorded as ‘‘yellow,"

“bright yellow,’’ and ‘‘dark golden’’; feet ‘‘yellow’’; cere ‘‘olive’’ or ‘‘green’'s

bill ‘‘blackish’' or ‘‘blackish-blne.** In a female juvenal the irides and feet

were found to be ‘‘straw yellow.”’

Aecipiter fasciatus didimus (Mathews),

Astur fasetatus didimus Mathews, 1912. Austral, Avy. Ree., 1, p. 33; Melville

Tsland, Northern Territory.

Range, Coastal regions from about Cooktown, Cape York, westwards to

the Northern Territory and Derby, north-western Australia.

In his original diagnosis the author stated '‘differs from A. f. fasciatus in its

smaller size: wing 236 mm.’’ Tn addition, didimus is a paler bird than the

other Australian race, and intergradation between the two forms seems to be

of the ‘‘stepped cline’’ variety.

A pair of birds from as far north as Mackay, Queensland, one of them

the type of Mathews’ muckayt, are fully as large as specimens of more southern

ovigin. Another bird, in the H. L. White collection, from Vine Creek (altitude

3,000 ft.), Ravenshoe, which is just south of Cairns, belongs to the nominate

form, while a large series of birds from Cooktown are nearer didimus in size,

but a few of them are fully as large as average examples of f, fasciatus. Some

of the Cooktown specimens are quite as small as topotypical didimus from Mel-

CONDON AND AMADON—TAXONOMIC NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN HAWKS 215

yille Island, and do not differ in colour. The situation in north-vestern Australia

may indicate a rather sharp area of intergradation, but the fact that a few

specimens are as large and dark as fasciatus while others are as small as didimus

suggests that the former may have been visitors from the south, and this has

already been discussed above.

Wing. ¢, adult

Melville Island (5), 229-239 (234) (AMNH), 238 (SAM).

Northern Territory (3), 240 (AMNH), 249 (AM), 245 (HLW).

Cape York (4), 285, 240, 246 (AMNH), 247 (NMM).

North-western Australia (2), 230, 255? (AMNH).

immature (22), 229-262 (247) (AMNITI), 225-253 (243-3) (SAM).

2, adult

Melville Island (2), 263?, 275 (AMNH).

Northern Territory (2), 270?, 277 (AMNH), (4), 270-287 (276)

(AM).

N. Cape York (2), 270, 284 (AMNH).

Cooktown, C. York (7), 272-297 (287) (AMNH).

Derby, N.W.A,, 265 (AM).

immature

Melville Island (1), 261.

Northern Territory (5), 267, 268, 314? (AMNHE), 254, 272 (SAM).

Normanton, Queensland (8), 272, 276, 290 (AMNH),.

Cape York (29), 258-291 (277) (AMNH), (1), 285 (NMM).

New Guinea (A. f/, polycryptus and A. f. dogwa)

g, adult (4), 223, 224, 227, 233; 9, adult (3), 254, 256, 257.

Most. of the races of fasciatus of New Guinea and the smaller islands north

of Australia are more or less similar to didimus, but, for the most part, even

smaller, paler, more rufous, and in some cases actually whitish on the flanks

and belly (¢.g¢., hellmayri Stvesemann, dogwa Rand).

Accipiter fasciatus buruensis Stresemann.

Accipiter torquates buruensts Stresemann, 1914, Noy. Zool., 21, p. 381; Fakal,

Buru.

Range. Island of Buru.

The status of this race is puzzling’. Stresemann said it does not differ

from fasciatus in colour, but is smaller, He gave wing lengths as 259 and 270.

*Ste also Van Bemmel, Treubia, 19, 1948, part 2, p. 392.

216 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

‘The sinaller of these, the type, which is the only one we have available for com-

parison, actually has the wing in moult. Stresemann did not mention the small

north Australian race didimus, a valid form which Mathews had deseribed two

years before, Direct comparison of the type of buruensis with topotypical

females of didinvws reveals no appreciable difference. The bill of burwensis seems

a bit heavier (and perhaps the feet also); it is slightly grever on the chest than

most didinus, thus resembling f, fasciatus rather than didimus. Were Buri

adjacent to north Australia we should not hesitate to list Huwrwensis as a synonym

of didimus,

Buru is some distance removed, however, and distinct races inhabit the

islands around it, ineluding a small rufous race wallacit found on some of the

smaller islands more or less intermediate in geographical position between Buru

and Australia, It is not expected, therefore, that the birds of Buru will belong

to the northern Australian race, and until proved otherwise by adequate material,

it nrust he assumed that burwensis is valid on the basis of slight differences

noticed and perhaps additional ones that will become evident in series.

Accipiter fasciatus vigilax (Wetmore),

Astur fasciatus vigilax Wetmore, 1926. Condor, 28, p. 6 (new name for

tnswlaris Sarasin, pre-oecupied): New Caledonia.

Like tjendange of the island of Sumba, this race is similay in eolow' to

nominate fasciatus, but smaller. Mr. L. Macmillan collected a fine series of

this bird lor the American Museum on New Caledonia (the type locality) and

on the three principal islands, Lifu, Mare, and Uvea, in the Loyalty (vroup.

They all belong to vigilax, in which the bars on the underparts are rather greyish,

as in fasciatus, exeept the flanks, which tend to be more rufous as in didimus,

Wing, ¢, adult (9), 236-255 (244); 9, adult (5), 263-282 (275),

AGCIPITER CIRRHOCEPHALUS (Vicillot).

Aecipiter cirrhocephalus cirrhocephalus (Vieillot).

Sparvius cirrhocephalus Vieillot, 1817, Nowy. Dict. d'’Hist. Nat., 10, p, 329;

New South Wales.

Accipiter cirrhocephalus broomei Mathews, 1912, Nov. Zool., 15, p. 247; Broome

Hill, southern Western Australia. Type: AMNH No, 533982; adult inale;

'8/6/6"" (2 June 8, 1906); “T.C."? (2 Tom Carter). Wing, 205; tail, 150,

Range. Tasmania; Australian mainland, except the northernmost parts,

CONDON AND AMADON—TAXONOMIC NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN HAWKS 217

Four races*® of the Collared Sparrowhawk may be reeognised; papudnus

(New Guinea) and quaesitandus (northern Australia) are smaller and more

rufous ventrally than cirrhocephalus, while rosselianis (Rossel Is,, New Guinea)*

is believed to be large and similar to the nominate orm but darker above, though

less heavily marked below.

Of ‘brane,’ Mathews stated, .. .. darker above and the nuchal collar

darker red,’’ but we have seen examples in the Australian Museum from south-

western Australia which are inseparable from eastern Australian birds, including

Tasmanian ones, Nevertheloss, the darker colorations which characterize the

nominate face ave on the whole slightly more evident in the west, though most

specimens from the two areas eannot be differentiated.

Colour variation in Accipiter cirrhocephalus in Australia parallels that in

Alccipiter fasciatus; northern birds are paler, more rufous, and in both species

these trends are continued further in New Guinea, In the ease of fasciatus,

most of the other races of the northern islands are also paler and more rufous

than the Australian forms, but there are also definite exeeptions; cirrhocephalus

is absent from these smaller islands,

As regards size variation within Australia, fasciatus is much smaller in

northernmost Australia than im southern Australia, while cirrhocephalus is only

slightly so, The two species can be confused in the north, if the two sexes are

not kept separate, but hardly in the south.

Wing, 10 3, 200-219 (208); 8 9, 232-242 (238) (AMNH),.

15 ad, 4, 195-210 (205); 14 ad. ¢, 232-251 (236-5) (AM, NMM,

SAM),

Although ctrrhovephalus is very similar to A. fasciatus in plumage, the

change from juvenal to adult is direct and takes place at the beginning of the

second year; this is indicated in examples with the fine breast barrings of the

adult intermixed with the heavy blotches or stripes of the juvenal, Juvenals

of the two Australian races are inseparable.

Accipiter cirrhocephalus quaesitandus Mathews.

Accipiter cirrhocephalus quaesitandus Mathews, 1915. Birds of Australia, 5,

p. 81; Utingu, Cape York, Queensland, Type: AMNH No, 533939; adult

male; July 4, 1912; Robin Kemp. Wing, 203; tail, 154.

Accipiter cirrhocephalus haesttata Mathews, 1917. Austral Av, Ree,, 8, p. 128;

Cape York.

‘Van Bemmel, 1948, Treubia, 19, p. 391, also regards Accipiter ery thravichen of the

Moluccas as conspecific with etrrhocephalus,

‘Mayr, 1940, Amer. Mus. Novit., 1056, p. 12.

218 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Type. No skin indicated as the type of this race is present in the American

Museum of Natural History; probably no type was designated. Although

entered as a new race, with description and type locality, one wonders about the

connection of haesitata Mathews, 1917 to qudesttandus Mathews 1915 with the

same type locality, Probably in 1917 Mathews forgot that he had named the

Cape York population in 1915, and yet involuntarily picked a similar sounding

name. Perhaps he realized the blunder later and for this reason did not desig-

nate a type for haesitata,

Range. Cape York and the entire north coast area of Australia,

Diagnosis. Differs from ¢. cirrhocephalus by being less greyish, more rufous

ventrally and perhaps slightly smaller. The race papuanys, of New Guinea, is

still more rufous ventrally, and less barred; it also smaller (wing, @, 184).

A male from Normanton and one for north-western Ansiralia are slightly

paler than the other four adult niales, all from Cape York, in the American

Museum. It is probable, however, that the differences observed are due to

individual variation and, in part, to plumage lading in the arid resions, because

seyeral other skins do not show this difference, Specimens of this race have

been examined from Mt, Alexander (south of Derby), Fitzroy River, Brooking

Creek (West Kimberley); Borroloola, Brock’s Creek, Alexandra, Alligator River,

troote, Melville and Bathurst Islands (all Northern Territory).

Tt is probable that birds from the arid portions of the interior and Western

Australia begin to show the paler, rufous coloration of qudaesitandus at more

southern localities than do those from the humid eastern coast. Yet, an adult

female, taken in 1947 by Ken Buller on the De Grey River, well north in mid-

western Australia, is typieal of the nominate race, This bird weighed 235

eTammes.

Wing, 6 &, 196-209 (201); 4 9%, 229-237 (232) (AMNH).

Q2ad, 4, 194 (HUW), 200 (SAM); 6 9, ad. 228-242 (235°5)

(HLW, SAM).

ACCIFITER NOVAEHOLLANDIAE (Gmelin),

Aecipiter novaehollandiae novaehollandiae (Gmelin).

Falco novae-Hollandiae Gmelin, 1788, Syst, Nat., vol. 1, pt. 1, p. 264; New South

Wales ex Latham = Tasmania fide Mathews.

Astur clarus cooktowni Mathews, 1912, Noy. Zool., 18, p. 245; Cooktown, northern

Queensland, Type: AMNH No, 532939; “?" = adult male, grey phase;

May 13, 1902 (E. Olive). Wing, 261; tail, 197. As Hartert already pointed

out, this bird is obviously a male and Mathews’ indication of its smaller

size as compared with a female from New South Wales is not significant.

CONDON AND AMADON—TAXONOMIC NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN HAWKS 219

Astur novaehollandiae alboides Mathews, 1912, Nov. Zool., 18, p. 246; Parry’s

Creek, East Kimberley, north-western Australia. Type: AMNH No, 532958;

adult male, white phase; October 8, 1908: J. P. Rogers. Wing, 258; tail,

194.

ALstur clarus robustus Zietz, 1914, South Aust. Ornith., 1, p. 13; Melville Island,

Northern Territory. Type: SAM No. B1334; feniale, juy., grey phase;

Aueust 2, 1913; W. D. Dodd, collector. Wing, 285: tarsus, 79; tail, 220.

‘Tris yellow, feet yellow.”

Range, Tasmania (white phase only); Australia (chiefly eastern and

northern); Kangaroo Island,

The Grey and White Goshawks of Australia are now known to be phases

of one and the same species (see also Mack, 1953). Somewhat more diffienlt for

immediate acceptance was Stresemann's demonstration that the brown (‘‘etor-

ques’*) and white (leucosomus) birds of New Gilinea are also phases, ‘‘ Wild-

type’ birds of Australia are white below, barred with vrey on the breast

and pale grey above; in New Guinea races they are dark grey above and rufous

or deep chestnut below. The female of the race /eucdsomus is somewhat barred,

so that by a total loss of the phaeomelanins and a loss in intensity of the

eumelanins, a coloration like that of wild-type Australian birds could result.

Sueh changes, in one direction or another, have been of not infrequent oceur-

rence during the evolution of the numerous species and races of raptorial birds

of the Australo-Papuan region, many of which are grey and white, others grey

and rufous.

Mayr has pointed owt that immatures of wild-type leucosomus vary greatly

in the amount of phaeomelanins present. Some of them are as light (though

more heavily marked) as immature wild-type novaehollandiae. He designated

two phases of these lewcosomus wild-type immatures; a ‘‘rufous’’ and a ‘*white™’

one. The latter might better be termed ‘‘pale,’’ sinee it apparently, as Mayr

coneluded, has nothing to do with the trie white phase of /eucosomus. We are

inclined to believe that this variation in immature wild-type leucosomus may,

to a greater degree than realized by Mayr, be due to bleaching, fading, and

possibly to age changes (appearance of first indieations of adult rufous eolora-

tion), but there is undoubtedly some genuine genetic variation in the amount

of phaeomelanins present, This helps to explain how, in wild-type novaehol-

landiae, the phaeomelanins are entirely lacking in all stages of plumage, and

is further argument for regarding leucosomus as a race of the Australian bird.

It. is impossible to say whether the paling of the wild-type plumage in the

nominate race (adults are nearly white below and pale grey above) has any

220 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

selective relation to the occurrence or origin of the white phase. Certainly the

latter is a discrete genetic entity; even immatures of the white phase birds are

said to be pure white at all ages. At the same time, it is possible that the physio-

logical advantages presumably correlated with the white, which in Tasmania

have led to its complete establishment, are also present and responsible for the

paling of the wild-type Australian birds. The by no means low incidence of the

white phase in New Guinea in a race which the wild-type adults are dark-

coloured might be considered to refute this suggestion. As already noted, how-

ever, there is a reduction of phaeomelanins (and perhaps in the intensity of

eumelanins) in a considerable percentage of immatures of lewcosomus, wild-type,

so it is possible that the same trends discernible in wild-type novaehollandiae

are incipient in leucosomus.

Although white plumage may have a direct selective advantage in gyrfalecons

and snowy owls, one cannot suppose this to be the case in white phase novae-

hollandiae. More likely, the white colour is genetically linked with unknown

favourable characters, and since it has not proved to be a great disadvantage it

has become widespread. Hawks have few predators themselves, and apparently

the white plumage does not seriously inconvenience them in securing their own

prey. One observer even believed that small birds showed less fear of white

goshawks than of the generality of hawks, perhaps mistaking the former for

white cockatoos!

In the case of novaehollandiae, the increase in size and the change in colour

is so abrupt when one passes from the northern islands to Australia, that some

may still prefer to recognize two species. The occurrence of a white phase in

leucosomus does, however, serve to link the island races with that of Australia

and Tasmania. One is inclined to follow the current practice and make them all

races of novaehollandiae, if for no other reason than to emphasize the amount

of variation that can oeeur within the limits of a ‘‘rassenkreis.’’

It is worth pointing out that the race misulae Mayr, found on two of the

small islands east of New Guinea, is almost as large as nominate novaehollandiae;

its feet and bill are fully as robust as in the latter race. Wild-type, that is

‘““orey phase,’’ birds of Accipiter novaehollandiae novaehollandiae differ from

those of all other races by lacking rufous in the adult. White phase birds are

inseparable from white phase leucosomus of New Guinea, but are, sex for sex,

much larger.

White phase birds in Australia are usually pure white at all ages and in

all areas. We have discovered no geographical variation in colour in the grey

phase. Fleay (1950) refers to one case of intermediacy, a specimen in the

H. L. White collection. This bird is white, but with grey on the shoulders, back

CONDON AND AMADON—TAXONOMIC: NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN Hawks 221

and outer webs of the secondaries. It is a female taken at Dorrigo, N.S.W. In

immature birds of the grey phase the bars on the breast are much broader than

in the adults and they are slightly tinged with brown. Dorsally a faint brownish

collar is sometimes evident, and this seems to represent the last stage in the

disappearance of a rufous nuchal collar previously present, and characteristic

of many species of Accipitres in their adult plumage.

As long since known, only the white phase of this hawk occurs in Tasmania.

In Australia, as Southern and Serventy (1947) have shown in a detailed, if

somewhat laboured, analysis, there is little regular or clinal variation. In par-

ticular, there is no regular decrease from south to north in the incidence of

white birds, which, as a matter of fact, predominate in the Northern Territory,

and apparently, in the adjacent Kimberley Division of north-western Australia

(whence the only specimen we have seen is the type of Mathews’ alboides).

Although these colour phases are, of course, genetic, the percentage of white

birds in Australia is far too high to warrant separating them racially from the

all-white population of Tasmania.

Turning now to size variation, Mathews described a race cooktownt, from

Cape York, and another race alboides, from the far north-west. Both supposedly

differed from nominate novaehollandiae (terra typica, Tasmania) by smaller

size. Mathews later admitted there is very little reason to think northern

birds are smaller. Zietz, meanwhile, named a race from Melville Island which

he believed to possess characters embodied in the name robustus. The type

specimen is medium greyish-brown above, including the head, and has fairly

heavy brownish barrings beneath, as well as an unbooted tarsus, both signs of

immaturity. It is quite an average specimen in every way, and we conclude

that Zietz must have lacked adequate comparative material at the time when

he introduced the name robustus. Hartert (1931, pp. 40-41), in discussing

Mathews’ two types, admitted that they (and many other northern specimens)

are as large as southern ones. He also detected a slight size decrease northerly

which he thought might warrant recognition of cooktowni and most later writers

have followed this course, including Peters (1931).

Although Fleay (1950) believes Tasmanian birds to be larger and heavier

than others, we have been unable to discover any great variation in size in this

hawk, in available material, and believe it to be non-existent or negligible. One

has only to place side by side adults from Tasmania, Cape York and the North-

ern Territory to see that they are, in general terms, of the same size. It is

true that, in series measurements, the northern birds average a bit smaller, but

even this may be because the northern specimens available are in general in

poor plumage. The interesting point is that the birds of such climatically

222 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

diverse and rather remote areas as Tasmania, Cape York and Melville Island

and the Kimberley Division are substantially alike in size. The correct means

of emphasizing this is, it seems to us, to unite all the Tasmanian and Australian

birds in one race, novaehollandiae.

Wine. Tasmania: 3 @, 250, 254, 257 (all worn) (AMNH).

8 9, 295-309 (305) (AMNH).

South Australia: 1 2, 315 (AMNH).

1 ¢, 313 (SAM),

New South Wales: 5 2, 258-270 (AMNH).

2 9, 306, 312 (AMNH).

Queensland (except Cape York): 4 2, 290-319 (307) (AMNH).

Cape York: 7 ¢, 257-270 (261) (AMNH).

7 9, 293-300 (296) (AMNH).

Melville Island: 1 9, 303 (AMNH).

1 9, 285 (SAM) (type of robustus),

Northern Territory (except Melville Island): 1 ¢@, 253 (AMNH).

2 2, 300, 304

(AMNH)

North-western Australia: 1 ¢, 258 (AMNH).

Genus EryrHROTRIORCHIS Sharpe, 1875.

Type. Falco radiatus. Australian mainland (one species).

The single member of this genus is usually considered to be a modified

goshawk. The wings are longer and the tail shorter than in Accipiter, but the

feet suggest that genus, while the coloration, as Mr. M. Jollie has pointed out

to us, is very like that of Accipiter burgersi of New Guinea.

Although Megatriorchis doriae of New Guinea has sometimes been included

in this genus, as for example in Peter’s Checklist (1981), such action is debatable

to say the least. Doriae has departed from Accipiter in just the opposite way

from radiatus; the wings are very short, the tail very long. Thus doriae re-

sembles Urotriorchis macrourus of equatorial Africa, but the latter is not so

far trom typical Accipiter.

Brythrotriorchis radiatus is said to soar at times and is undoubtedly less

closely restricted to forest cover than is M. doriae. Both species have very long,

curved claws and hoth are bird-eaters. Presumably they branched off independ-

ently from Accipiter stock, but even if they are more closely related than this

would indicate, they are now too unlike to fit properly in the same genus.

CONDON AND AMADON—-TAXONOMIC NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN HAWKS 223

Eryrurorriorcuis rapiatus (Latham).

Falea radiatus Latham, 1801, Index Ornith., Suppl.. p. xii; New South Wales.

Erythrotriorchis rufotibia Campbell, 1911, Emu, 10, p, 249; Napier Broome

Bay, Kimberley Division, Western Australia, Type: National Museum, Mel-

bourne, No, FULW 5369; adult female; June 21, 1910; . I, Till for H. L.

White. Wing, 896; tail, 245; tarsus, 7-5. Paratype: WLW 5370; adult

female; February 18, 1909; G. FY. Hill, Wine, 395; tail, 295; tarsus, 8.

Erythrotriorchis radiatus katherine (sie) Mathews, 1916, Austr. Av. Ree., 3.

p. 57; Katherine River, Northern Territory. Type: AMNH No, 534012;

male moulting from very worn and faded plumage into adult plumage; July

25, 1895: (Knut) Dahl. Wing, 358; tail, 220. Coloured plate of type:

Mathews, vol. 5, pl. 240, opp. p. 87.

Hiythrotriorchis radiatus queenslandicus Mathews, 1917, Austr, Av, Ree, 3,

p. 128; “Cedar Bay’? (label says ‘‘ Cardwell’'), Queensland, Type; AMNTI

No. 534018; adult male (said to be from a collection made in northern

Queensland in -ime and July, 1898, by collectors of A. S. Meek), Wing,

362; tail, 218.

Range. Australian inainland.

The Red Goshawk, whieh seems to ocenr mainly in northern and eastern

Australia, is undoubtedly one of the rarest and least-known hawks, and the

number of specimens in museums is limited.

Hartert (1931, p, 42) has already pointed out that Mathews’ names queens-

landicus and katherine are synonyms of radiatus, and there is no reason to

believe geographical variation oceurs, The type and paratype of rufotilia

Campbell have been examined; both are females which seem to fall within the

variational limits of the species. Campbell’s speeirnens, whieh came from north-

west Australia, differ from all others contained in the H, U. White collection in

being whitish on the centre of the breast and abdomen, with the undertail coverts

more whitish, but with some rufous. As the name implies, the thighs are more

rufous than the underparts, but this feature is matehed in an adult female from

Borroloola, Northern Territory, and this specimen also has a rather whitish

abdomen, The rump is variable, being grey in the type of rufotibia, grey with

some rufous in the paratype and rufous in all others seen, While the colour

of the upper surface generally is rather uniform, there is much variation in

the coloration of the lower surfaces. The chin and throat varies from whitish

to buff, with blackish stripes, and in a male from Cairns, taken in November,

1909, the entire underparts and tibiae are deep rufous.

224 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

All but one (the type of katherine) of the seven specimens in the American

Museum are from Queensland. Three skins in the H. L. White collection are

from Borroloola, one from Cairns, and one from King River, Northern Territory.

This last-named specimen, as well as another male from Borroloola have the

tail incompletely barred, a sign of immaturity. In the South Australian Museum

there is a male from Bathurst Island and a subadult female from Byromine,

Cloneurry River, Queensland has the tail incompletely barred.

Three adults with completely barred tails and taken at Cooktown, Junction

Camp, and Dawson River, Queensland, are in the Australian Museum, Sydney.

Measurements :

Wing. @, 335, 345, 350, 352, 353 +, 355, 356, 358, 360, 362, 372.

9, 385, 390, 395, 396, 410, 420, 420 +, 420.

Tail. 8, 198, 200, 210, 215, 218, 220, 222, 222.

2, 235, 235, 240, 245, 260, 265, 266, 268.

For comparison of proportions, a female Megatriorchis doriae measured ;:

wing, 352, tail 330; an immature female of Accipiter gentilis atricapillus: wing

383, tail 305, Tail/wing ratios: radiatus, 1, 9, -64; atricapillus, 1, @, imm.,

+80; doriae, 1, 9, -94.

Colours of soft parts: @ (? subadult); iris, pale yellowish-brown; feet,

vellow: bill, blue-grey; tip black. 4 (? juvenal); iris, yvellowish-olive; fect,

sulphur vellow; bill, black upper, lower bluish; cere, pale dull blue. 9° ; iris,

pale yellowish-hrown; feet, yellow; bill, light grey, tip black.

Genus Himraartus Kaup, 1844.

Type. Falco pennata. Ethiopian, Palaearctic, Oriental and Australian

regions (5 species).

Hieraartus morPuHNoweEs (Gould).

Hieraaétus morphnoides morphnoides (Gould).

Aquila marphnoides Gould, 1840 (1841), Proc. Zool. Soc. London, p, 61; Yar

rundi, Upper Hunter River, New South Wales.

Aquila morphnoides coongani Mathews, 1912, Nov, Zool., 18, p. 248; Coongan

River, north-west Australia. Type: AMNH No. 535063; adult male (mis-

sexed by collector as female); July 7, 1908; F.L.W. (Whitlock). Wing,

334 (worn).

Range. Australian mainland.

CONDON AND AMADON—TAXONOMIC NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN HAWKS 225

While the nominate race of the Little Eagle is confined to Australia; a

smaller, more heavily pigmented form, weiskez, occurs in the mountain forests

of central and eastern New Guinea. In his ‘‘Birds of Australia’’ Mathews

pointed out the resemblances between these forms and pennatus of the Palae-

arctic region, and regarded them all as conspecific. Most authorities are now

agreed that the Australian bird is distinct, and later Mathews reverted to this

treatment in 1946.

We have examined 36 skins all told and can find no evidence in support of

the race coongani, which was supposed to be a small bird. Our material is in-

sufficient to rule out absolutely the possibility of geographical variation in

colour, but since individual and age variation is great in this direction, there is

no reason to suppose that such exists.

Although it is generally believed that light and dark phases occur, Fleay

(1951) has drawn attention to the possibility that dark plumage may develop

with increasing age. North (1898, p. 29) stated that besides being smaller, adult

males are ‘‘usually darker in colour, and the abdomen, flanks, and thighs of a

more uniform tint of rufous, the shaft lines always darker.’’ An adult male

from Broken Hill is actually lighter in coloration beneath than two females

from the same district, and although Fleay (loc. cit.) has stated also that males

are darker, it is felt that this distinction cannot always be relied upon. Examples

of dark males have been seen from Kyabram, Victoria and Castlereagh River,

New South Wales, and there is a dark female which was shot at the nest from

Dawson River, Queensland.

Wing. Queensland: ¢, 343 (AMNH); ¢, 390, 393, 399 (AMNH), 370, 380,

385 (AM).

New South Wales: ¢, 384 (SAM), 345 (AMNH), 300 (juv.}

(AM); 2, 378, 380, 388 (juv.), 405 (juv.) (AM), 380, 381,

402 (SAM).

Victoria: ?, 382 (SAM).

South and ‘‘Central’’ Australia: 8, 335 (AMNH); ¢, 380 (juv.)

(SAM), 374 (AMNH),.

Western Australia: ¢, 334; 2, 400 (juv.) (AM).

New Guinea (weiskei): &, 808; 9, 327, 387, 342 (AMNH).

Young birds (juvenals) are dark—the ‘‘ginger’’ stage of Fleay (loc. cit.).

They differ from dark adults in being very rufous on the head and hind-neck,

darker brown on the back (although this probably fades rapidly in adults),

with upper tail coverts and ventral surface a deep, dull rufous. Specimens of

both sexes in this plumage have been collected in New South Wales, Victoria,

226 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

South Australia and south-west Australia, and it is possible that in life they

would be mistaken for dark phase adults.

The newly hatched chick is covered in creamy-white down; iris ‘pale

brown,’’ cere ‘‘yellow,’’ bill ‘‘light horn,’’ feet ‘‘flesh colour.’’

The juvenal plumage is rapidly acquired, and after two months the tail

is about half grown with the central rectrices dark and somewhat less strongly

barred than in the adult. In the adult, colours of the soft parts are as follows:

iris, ‘‘reddish brown,’’ cere ‘‘leaden blue,’’ bill ‘‘bluish with black tip,’’ feet

‘*vellowish-white.”’

Three birds from New Guinea (weisket) in the American Museum are more

heavily streaked ventrally than any from Australia. The female in this race is

about the size of the male of H. m. morphnoides, and sexual dimorphism is

equally great in both forms.

Genus Agquina Brisson, 1760.

Type. Falco chrysaétos. Synonym Uroadtus Kaup, Old and New Worlds

(9 species).

The single Australian member of this genus (a@udax) is often placed in

Uroaétus Kaup, the only character of which is that the tail is cuneate, whereas

in the various species of Aquila it is rounded. This, in our opinion, is not of

sufficient importance to warrant placing the Wedge-tailed Hagle in a monv-

typic genus; more particularly inasmuch as it appears to be closely related 10

the Golden Eagle (A, chrysaétos), the type of the genus. Indeed, it is possible

that audax is more closely related to chrysaétos than is any other species of the

genus.

AQUILA AUDAX (Latham).

Aquila andax andax (Latham),

Vultur audax Latham, 1801, Ind. Ornith, Suppl, p. ii; New South Wales,

Aquila audax carteri Mathews, 1912, Novitates Zool., 18, p. 247; Gracefield,

Western Australia. Type: AMNH No, 535398; adult ‘‘male’’ (?); there

is no original label on this specimen, but someone has written on the red

type label of the Rothschild Museum ‘'4-5-08 (Tunney).'’ Wing, 620.

Coloured plate of type: Mathews, Bds. Austr. 5, plate 241, opp. p. 99.

Range. Australian mainland and southern New Guinea.

The number of skins of the Wedge-tailed Hagle preserved in Australian col-

lections is inadequate for serious racial studies. This is partly due to the

CONDON AND AMADON—TAXONOMIG NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN HAWKS 237

preponderance of immature individuals and the frequency of moulting specimens,

and partly because, owing to the large size of the species (which raises problems

of preparation and storage), no attempts have been made by institutions to

gather comprehensive series, A fully representative collection of properly-

sexed individuals of all ages may reveal geographical variation on the Australian

mainland, but at present we can find no evidence of this. Mayr (1987) found

that a bird from Dogwa, southern New Guinea, compared “fairly well with adults

from New South Wales,”

Mathews described the race carteri in the belief that the birds of western

Australia are blacker, or, at least, attain the black plumage (in which only the

under tail coverts and nape remain rufous) at a younger age than do birds of

eastern Australia, This would be difficult. to prove except with captive birds,

There is no doubt that fully adult birds are always black. HH, L. White (in

Mathews, 1915, p. 104) stated that. a captive bird he had reared was no less than

ten years old before it assumed black plumage, while Fleay (1952) has expressed

the opinion that bath sexes may don this plumage after six years, Old zoo birds

examined by us have all been black,

There appears to be much variation in size in all parts of the range, and,

as pointed out hy Fleay (loc. ctt.), unusually small individuals of either sex

may be encountered. There are numerous published records of the wine span

of this eagle, and some rather astonishing claims have been made by bushmen

and other observers. Many records are of little value because of the

neglect to distinguish age, sex, and plumage condition. Disearding a lot

of reports as unreliable, Morgan (1982) found, from a series of 126

measurements ot birds mainly from eastern Australia, that the average

wing span was 7 feet 4 inches; there were no records less than 6 feet,

The greatest wing span regarded as reliable was 10 feet, being that of a bird

shot: in Werribee Gorge, southern Victoria. Roche (1914) recorded 11 feet

for an adult from the same locality, but this was not aecepted by Morgan, who

also tound that the averave weight of 54 birds (sexes not distinguished) was

7 pounds 15 ounces. In this ease the greatest reliable record was 103 pounds

for a South Australian individual.

Considering (he large proportion of young birds whieh fall to the gun or

trap and the protracted moult of the species, the true average figures miwht he

slightly higher than those given by Morgan, although this would be offset to

some extent by the numerous reports of exceptionally large individuals, other

birds heing neglected by observers.

Fleay (oc, ett.) believes that Tasmanian birds are larger than those of

the mainland, but we have found no conelusive evidence in favour of this,

228 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

neither can we refute it. He quotes one record of 9 feet 4 inches wing spread.

but this has certainly been exceeded in reports from New South Wales, Victoria,

and South Australia (Morgan, loc. cit.). Also, wing measurements of three

birds in good feather from Tasmania (all females) have been found to be no

greater than those of mainland birds, as shown below.

Wing. Victoria: 3, 622; ¢, 653;7 @ (imm.), 584-667 (628);2 ¢@ (imm.),

609, 667 (NMM).

South Australia: ¢, 620; 2°, 670; 3 ¢ (imm.), 590, 590, 610; 9?

(imm.), 600 (SAM).

Tail. Victoria: @, 444; ¢, 444;7 @ (imm.), 432-457 (447);2 ¢ (imm.),

432, 438.

South Australia: ¢, 460; ¢, 500; 2 4 (imm.), 420, 420; 9

(imm.), 430.

The following description was taken from an immature male in fresh

plumage collected at Peake, South Australia, in January, 1953.

Top of head, hind neck, ear coverts and back, deep buff; a very dark brown

stripe along angle of jaw; rump, brown with buff edges to the feathers; tail and

primaries, black; secondaries, blackish-brown; wing coverts, buffy to buffy-

brown near the body; greater wing coverts, greyish-brown; chin and throat

with black feathers, throat buff; foreneck, buffy-brown; breast and abdomen,

dull dark brown with pale buff edges to tips of feathers. Under tail coverts, buffy-

white; under wing coverts, buff; axillaries, buffy-brown. Tarsus, dull dark brown

with buffy edges to feathers. Tail from below, lighter on the terminal half with

dark brown bars; dark brown on basal half. Primaries 1-4 and secondaries

greyish-brown with dark barrings near tip. Lores and eyelids, flesh white with

black hair like feathers on lores. Iris, light hazel; bill, greenish horn with darker

tips to both mandibles; feet, white; claws, black; cere, light horn; gape and

inside mouth, flesh white. Wing, 590 mm.; culmen, 75 (incl. cere); wing span,

6 feet 34 inches; weight, 7 Ibs. (3175-2 grammes).

Adult male (fresh ‘‘black’’ plumage), Montacute, South Australia: Wing

span, 6 feet; weight, 5% Ibs. (September 28, 1947).

Adult female (fresh “black” plumage), Reedy Creek, South Australia: Iris,

dark brown; feet, ereamy-white; bill, horn colour with black tip; cere, gape and

inside mouth, flesh-white; wing span, 7 feet 4 inches; weight, 8 lbs. 10 ozs.

(May 2, 1949).

The iris has been given on various occasions also as ‘‘greyish-brown,’’ and

‘“‘vellow’’ for adults (? male), and ‘‘buffy-brown’’ in younger birds.

CONDON AND AMADON—TAXONOMIC NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN HAWKS = 229

AQUILA AUDAX PLEAYI, subsp. nov.

Type. No. R6115, National Museum, Melbourne; adult female; Great

Lakes, Tasmania; April 28, 1915; “J, E, Chubb”; wing, 653; tail, 477.

Diagnosis. Similar to birds from south-eastern mainland, but lacks the

buff, golden-brown, or rufous coloration of the upper surface; the nape is buffy-

white or pale buff.

Range. Tasmania.

Fleay (1952), in his excellent account of the Wedge-tailed Eagle, has drawn

attention to the differences in Tasmanian birds given above. He also mentions

a ‘‘slaty tinge in the wing ecoverts,’’ but since only three females have been exa-

mined, we are not certain of this feature, which is entirely lacking in a large

juvenal, The question of larger size in this race has already been diseussed

above, and while at present we feel that further evidence is required, the toes

and claws in ow specimens, perhaps by chance, are slightly heavier than in

females from the mainland.

Wing. ?, 667 (near adult, taken ou same day as type) (NMM); 650 (juv. |

(SAM),

Tail, 451+; 490 (juv.).

Genus Hantaretus Savigny, 1809.

Type. JTaha@étus nisus = Faleo albicilla. Synonyms, Ciunewmna Hodgson,

1837, Blagrus Blyth, 1846. Old and New Worlds (8 species),

HALIAEETUS LEUCOGASTER (Gmelin).

Falco leucogaster Gmelin, 1788, Syst. Nat., 1, part 1, p. 257; New South Wales,

designated by Mathews.

Halievétus leucogaster pallidus Mathews, 1912, Nov. Zool., 18, p. 248; Point

Torment, King Sound, north-western Australia (from label; the type locality

was published as ‘‘Derby’’). Type: AMNH No. 535486; adult male;

April 1, 1911; J. P. Rogers. Wing, 555; tail, 265.

Range. From India and Ceylon across southern Asia to the Philippines,

New Guinea, Solomons, Australia and Tasmania.

Very few Australian specimens from south-eastern Australia, the type

locality of the White-bellied Sea-eagle, have been examined by the writers. In

the American Museum there is a skin of an immature female from New South

Wales, wing 630, and another, also an immature female, from Tasmania, wing

600. In the South Australian Museum are three specimens from South Australia

and one from Hitape, New Guinea. Details are: South Australia, adult male,

230) RECORDS OF THE S.A. MusSEUM

wing 520; immature female 620; New Guinea, adult male, wing 535. Material

is lacking from India and Ceylon, so that comparisons between the extremes of

the range are impossible. So far as could be determined with birds from the

area reaching from Sumatra to New Guinea and Australia, there is no signi-

ficant. geographical variation, Australian examples may, as Hlartert once sug

gested, be a little larger. Whistler gave the wing of an adult male from Ceylon

as 544, which is about the size of the Australian birds,

The species leucoguster is thus to be treated as a binomial unless one wishes

to consider sanfordi Mayr, of the Solomon Islands, a race ot it. The loss of

the grey and white adult plumage in sanfordi, as well as its apparently more

predatory, upland habits, indicates that Mayr was correct in giving it specifie

status. The White-bellied Sea-eagle has now been recorded by Ripley (1947,

p. 95) from Nissan Island, an outlier of the Solomons in the direction of the

Bismarek Archipelago (where the species is common). Dr. Mayr, who spent

about 10 days on Nissan while with the Whitney Expedition, tells us that this

party saw no sea-eagles and could hardly have overlooked them. But the species

is a great wanderer among islands, and the specimen taken by Bennett and

reported by Ripley might have been # straggler, or perhaps a pair or two

colonized the islands subsequent to the visit of the Whitney Expedition,

Genus Circus Lacépéde, 1799.

Type. Falco aeruginosus, Synonym Npilocircus Kaup, 1847. Old and

New Worlds (12 species),

Circus asstmmis Jardine and Selby.

Circus assimilis Jardine and Selby, 1828, Ill, Ornith., 1, sig. H, plate 51 and

text; Sydney, New South Wales,

(Circus assimilis rogerst Mathews, 1912, Novy. Zool., 18, p. 244; ‘'50 miles up Fitz-

roy River’? (from label), north-western Australia. Type: AMNH No.

536039; adult male; August, 1898. The field label is unsigned but does not

appear to be that of J. P. Rogers (as might be expected from the name

given the bird), but rather like the labels of J, T. Tunney, who was actively

collecting for the Western Australian Museum at the close of last eentury,

According to Mathews’ catalogue, he got the specimen from that museum.

Wing, 397. Coloured plate of type: Mathews, 5, plate 234, opp. p. 18.

Circus approvimans inexpectatus Mathews, 1912, Nov. Zool., 18, p. 245; Parry’s

Creek, north-western Australia, As Hartert pomted out, this specimen is

Cireus assimilis in immature plumage and not (, approximans. Type:

AMNHE No, 536283; immature male; January 22, 1909; J. P. Rogers, Wing,

387,

CONDON AND AMADON—TAXONOMIC NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN HAWKS 231

Circus dssimilis quirundus Mathews, 1915, Bds, Austr., 5, p. 23; Celebes and

the northern islands (presumably Lesser Sundas), Type not in the Ameri-

can Museum of Natural History.

Circus assimilis celebensis Stresemann, 1924, Ornith. Monatsber, 32, p. 48:

Minahasa, Celebes.

Range. Celebes, Lesser Sundas, and Australian mainland.

Tn an earlier revision of the Spotted Harrier, Amadon (1941, pp. 372-375)

recognized three races based on size only; assimilis, of southern Australia

(large); rogersi, of northern Australia and the Lesser Sunda Islands (medium-

sized) ; and quirundus, of Celebes (small). This division was not proposed with

confidence, for, while specimens from Celebes are numerons, all those examined

by Amadon seemed to have the wing in moult, a possible explanation of their

small size. The possibility that some Celehes birds are as large as southern

Australian ones was substantiated when Amadon, in the summer of 1950, mea-

sured material in the British Museum. Tn that collection there are two females

from Celebes with wings of 443 and 451, respectively, and a female from Cape

York, Australia, with wing 460. These are as large as ones from southern

Australia. At the other extreme, we have examined an adult male from Victoria

with wing 393, a figure matched by some Celebes males. Unless southern Aus-

tralian birds migrate to Celebes and mix with a smaller local race, which we

doubt, it would seem that there is too much individual size variation in Circus

assimilis to justify the recognition of races based on size. This is not meant to

deny that tropical harriers of this species average a little smaller, but even of

this we are not convinced. Tartert (1931, p, 40) tentatively recognized the

Celebes race, but felt ‘‘uneasy’’ about its validity. Rensch suggested that

Lesser Sundas birds are richer colonred than Australian ones, but this im-

pression seems based on nothing more substantial than the fact that they are

less often faded than those from the dricy regions of Australia.

Gents Paco Linné, 1758.

Type. Faleo subbutcv. Synonyms inelude Tinnwnculus Vieillot 1807,

Hverofalca Cuvier 1816, Cerchneis Boie 1826, Rhynchodon Nitach 1829, Teracider

Gould 1838, Gennata Kaup 1850, Nesieruz Oberholser 1899, Notofalco Mathews

1913, and Palifalco Mathews 1946. World-wide (abont 37 species),

These names have been einployed by various authors as subgenera, and in

somne eases genera. Friedmann (1950) lists no fewer than 54 names (subgenera

and synonyms) under Falco,

The characters of the members of! this genus are so diverse that it enald

232 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

be a simple matter to derive a different subgeneriec name for each Australian

species, without, however, gaining a true understanding of relationships, Peters’

arrangement of the group (1931) is obviously imperfect, especially with regard

to the Australian forms, but without having surveyed the genus as a whole we

do not venture an opinion as to whether the resemblances of some species to

extralimital forms is more than parallelism. Peters associates the Grey Falcon

(F. hypoleucos) with the hobbies (‘‘subgenus Falco’’), Could, on the other

hand, compared it with the Gyrfaleon (F. rusticolus) whieh Peters and Fried-

mann (1950) separate under subgenus ‘‘Mierofaleo.'' Gurney (1882) thought

F, hypoleucos and F, subniger should be placed together with the Lanner (F.

biamarcus), another desert form, under ‘‘Gennaia,’? which was disearded by

Peters but resurrected by Friedmann, while Mathews has proposed the names

“ Palifaleo"’ and ‘‘Notofalco” tor the two Australian species. The subgenus

Palifalco was differentiated tvom Falco s.str. ‘‘in proportions as follow: The

bill is larger, the wing longer, the tail shorter, and the legs notably Jonger, while

the coloration is distinctive’; and for Notofaleo: ‘differs from Rhynchodan

Nitzsch in its much longer wings, longer tail, and weaker feet.’ These differ-

ences are best regarded as well-marked specific characters.

Sealation of the tarsus is extremely variable in the different, species, In

some cases the differences are slight, while in others they are striking, In F.

peregrinus the jarsus is covered with rather sinall seales which are fairly unitorm

in size, while in J’. subniger and F’. hypoleucos they are also uniform but a little

larger, la F. longipennis there is an inner row of enlarged scales and six or

seven seutella on the lower portion of the acrotarsium, and a somewhat similar

condition is found in F. cenchroides, The Brown Hawk (7. berigora), which

has the tarsus inusually lone and ‘‘coarse’’ and the tarsal scales greatly en-

larged, is often placed in a separate genus (Jeracidea) on this account, but. in

every other respect it is a true faleon, Tn the New Zealand Bush Hawk

(** Nesierax’’ novaeseelandiae) the tarsus is somewhat like that of F. longipennis,

but it is velatively longer, and we are inclined to associate these two species,

tovether with the Brown Hawk, as being closer to one another than all others

in the Australian region.

Friedmann (1950, p. 575) refers to the New Zealand Bush Hawk as

‘leracidea''’ (whieh is not a new procedure), and suggests if is intermediate

between the “true faleons’? and the South American ‘Carrion Faleons’’ of the

genus Milvago, but we cannot subseribe to this.

Mathews (1915) hinted that there were important osteologieal differences

whieh would support a division of Falco, but none have been found apart from

those of bodily proportions. There is quite a lot of variation im the amount of

CONDON AND AMADON—TAXONOMIC NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN HAWKS 233

emargination of the primaries in the different species, but the taxonomic value

of this feature is doubtful.

The Peregrine Faleon (F'. peregrinus) is sometimes placed in a separate

genus Rhynchodon, and the kestrels in Cerchneis or Tinnunculus, but there are

not sufficient characters to warrant generic or subgeneric division.

FaLco HYPOLEUCOS Gould.

Falco hypoleucos Gould, 1840 (1841), Proc. Zool. Soc. London, p. 162; York,

Western Australia.

Falco hypoleucus ashbyi Mathews, 1913, Austr. Av. Rec., 2, p. 73; South Aus-

tralia. Type: AMNH No. 537628; adult male; 1902; ‘‘North.’’ Wing, 298;

tail, 146? The type is a very poor specimen with most of the feathers

missing from the head.

Falco hypoleucus ashleyi Mathews, 1916, Bds. Austr., 5, p. 234 (Lapsus for

‘fashbyt’’),

Range. Interior of Australia.

The Grey Falcon is one of the least known of Australian Accipitres. It

clings to semi-arid districts, and avoids the forested areas of coastal regions.

Owing to limited amount of material at our disposal there is little opportunity

to make geographical comparisons, but variation is scarcely to be expected in

this wide-ranging species of the interior of the continent. Specimens have been

examined from Parry’s Creek, north-western Australia; Borroloola, Northern

Territory; north Queensland; Barcoo (Victoria) River, south-western Queens-

land; Garah, Mungindi (both near Moree), Broken Hill, Nevertire, Wagga,

Temora, Cobborah, Byrock, near Moulamein, New South Wales; and from Calla-

bonna Creek, Laura, Yunta, and Fulham (near Adelaide—S. A. White Collec-

tion), South Australia. No important differences were detected. Wear and

dirt transforms the beautiful blue-grey coloration of the fresh plumage to a

dull grey.

Wing. 3 (adult), 287, 2887, 298 (AMNH), 290, 290, 302 (AM), 268, 275,

285, 295 (HLW), 280 (SAM); (immature) 281, 286, 294

(AMNH), 265 (AM), 294 (HLW).

@ (adult), 335 (AMNH), 325, 330, 338 (AM), 315, 320 (SAM);

(immature) 297, 315 (AM), 320 (NMM).

Tail. 8 (adult), 146? (AMNH), 155, 177, 170 (AM), 138 +, 150, 147+,

163 (HLW), 150 (SAM); (immature) 143 (AM), 144 (HLW).

2 (adult), 170? (AMNH), 156, 170, 174 (AM), 185, 175 (SAM);

(immature) 163, 175 (AM), 180 (NMM).

234 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

In juvenals the whitish breast, foreneck and abdomen is heavily streaked

and blotched with brown or blackish brown, and the hack, seapulars and rump

are areyish brown with pale buff edges to the feathers. The primaries are

very dark grey or blackish, strongly barred with pale buffy-white, while the

rectrices are grey and feebly barred dark grey, the subterminal portion being

blackish, with a white tip. In adults the tail is stronely barred while the entire

upper surface is blue-grey with darker shafts, and below, pale grey with dark

shafts,

A female, collected at Orroroo, South Australia, in October, 1933, had iris

‘‘dark brown,”’ feet ‘yellow.’’ pharynx ‘‘grey.’’ Wing span was 98 cm,

Stomach contents; ‘*Flesh and hair of a mouse-like creature—no bones present

and flesh almost digested’’ (J.T. Gray),

ALCO SUBNIGER (ray,

Faleo subniger Gray, 1843, Ann, Mag. Nat. Hist., 11, p. 371; Australia (Victoria

fixed by Mathews).

Notafalco subniger minnie Mathews, 1915, Austr, Av, Rec, 2, p. 127; Minnie

Downs, Queensland. Type: AMNII No. 5387096 (adult male); January 6,

1882. According to Mathews’ manuseript catalogue this was one of the

specimens he acquired from the Norwegian naturalist, Robert Collett. Some

or perhaps all of Collett’s material from northern Australia, including,

perhaps, the present type, was collected by Knut Dahl, Wing, 374; tail, 22.

Coloured plate of type: Mathews Bds. Austr., 5, plate 255, opp. p. 253.

Range. Interior of Australia,

The Black Falcon, endemic to the More open country of the mainland, is

a rather elusive species which oceasionally visits coastal districts. Individual

variation is great, but there is no geographical variation,

Mathews merely fixed the type locality in the southern part of the species’

range and named a race from the northern part to have one of his names avail-

able if needed. The Mathews collection contamed only four specimens of suh-

niger, three from Queensland and one from Horsham, Victoria. Three care-

fully labelled specimens were secured in Queensland in 1940 by Messrs. L.

Maemillan and J. R, Henry for the American Museum.

About thirty skins have been examined from the imterior of eastern

Australia, and it is thought that immatures have more white about the head

than adults. A breeding (7? adult) female from the Diamantina River, south-

western Queensland, which was collected in July, 1918, has a very white throat,

and there are some white spots on the breast, and the under tail coverts are

CONDON AND AMADON—TAXONOMIC NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN HAWKS = 235

prominently barred with white. Most individuals have some white at the chin,

although in at least two males and one female this feature is entirely absent.

The Black Falcon is at once distinguished from the extreme dark phase of

Falco berigora by its much shorter and more powerful tarsi; the light markings

on wing and tail are more sparing or absent on the tail and are whitish, not

rufous.

Wing. Queensland, ¢ (ad.), 371, 371, 374; (imm.) 366 (AMNH); @ (ad.),

391, 392 (AMNH); 403 (British Museum).

Victoria, ¢ (imm.), 3868 (AMNH).

Loe.? 9, 405 (British Museum).

South Australia, ¢ , 363, 363, 366 (SAM); ¢, 405, 405, 415 (SAM).

New South Wales, 2, 398 (SAM).

South-western Queensland, ¢, 405 (SAM).

Tail. Queensland, g (ad.), 219, 221, 222; (imm.) 215; 9 (ad.), 223, 226

(AMNH).

Victoria, ¢ (imm.), 206 (AMNH),.

South Australia, ¢, 219, 220, 220; 9, 247, 235, 235.

South-western Queensland, ¢?, 240 (SAM).

Weight. Queensland, 6 (full breeding condition), 597; (imm.), 607; ° (full

breeding condition), 670 grammes.

Soft part colours of a pair of breeding adults (June 14): “Iris brown,

bill bluish-horn with black tip, cere bluish, legs and feet livid pale blue flesh.”’

The skin around the eye has sometimes been recorded as ‘‘whitish’’ or ‘‘bluish-

grey.’’

A chick taken from the nest towards the end of July was covered in white

down with the primaries (brown) just showing. The irides were ‘‘dark brown,”’

bill ‘‘pale bluish-horn,’’ cere ‘‘pale bluish-horn,’’ feet ‘‘ pale bluish.’’

In the juvenal the cheeks are often buffy-white, the throat is whitish with

dark brown streaks, and a moustachial stripe is visible. In some juvenals also

the rectrices and primaries are indistinctly barred with pale buff, but we have

been unable to trace the sequence of plumage, changes to the adult condition

from the limited material at our disposal.

FALCO PEREGRINIS Tunstall.

Faleo peregrinus macropus Swainson.

Falco macropus Swainson, 1837, Anim. in Menag., p. 341; Tasmania.

Range. Australia (except south-western Australia), Tasmania.

The Peregrine Falcon, of which about 18 races may be listed from most

236 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

parts of the world, is widespread but not very plentiful in Australia. Altogether

we have examined 58 skins of juvenals and adults in the museuis in Adelaide,

Melbourne and Sydney, and there are eight specimens in the Mathews collection

in New York.

Available material is rather disappointing as it is largely composed of

immature individuals. The head, cheeks and malar region are dull black in

adults and brownish or brownish-black in juvenals, and while individual varia-

tion is prevalent, females are distinguished by a stronger buffy wash on the

ventral surfaces, but this colour may also be an indication of age and geographic

variation. From Tasmania, the type locality of macropus, we have two adult

birds, unsexed but obvious males, in which the characteristic ventral buffy wash

is almost lacking and replaced by grey on the abdomen, flanks and thighs.

Further material may show that the island birds are a distinct population, but

this is doubtful.

From the drier areas of the maimland, specimens are somewhat paler than

those from eastern Australia, and there is often a reduction of the ventral

barring, characters which in part may be due to fading and abrasion, especially

as the moult is irregular and prolonged.

No geographic variation in size has been detected in Australian birds, which

have average dimensions only slightly below those of the American and British

races.

Wing. Tasmania, ¢ (ad), 280, 290 (SAM).

Victoria, ¢ (ad,), 280; 4 (juv.), 280, 285, 290; 9 (juv.), 332-344

(3385) (NMM), 337 (HLW),

New South Wales, ¢ (ad.), 285-300 (293) (AM), 290 (HLW);

6 (juv.), 289-800 (294): @ (ad.), 305-840 (327) (AM), 325

(SAM); ¢ (juv.), 320-348 (330-7) (AM), 320-3830 (332+3)

(LW), 330 (SAM).

South Australia, ¢6 (ad.), 270, 282, 295; 2 (ad.), 325, 325, 328;

2 (juv.), 325, 335 (SAM), 328 (HLW),

Tail. Tasmania, ¢, 144, 164.

Victoria, 4 (ad.), 163; g (juv.), 195, 162,165; @ (jnv.), 174-185

(179-7), 175.

New South Wales, ¢ (ad.), 140-145 (142), 160; 8 (juv.), 148-155

(150-7): @ (ad.), 170-185 (175), 170; ¢ (juv.), 173-195 (182);

(182); 170.

South Australia, g (ad.), 135, 144, 158; 9 (ad.), 170, 170, 170;

2 (juv.), 162, 172, 174.

CONDON AND AMADON—TAXONOMIC NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN HAWKS = 237

In fresh juvenal plumage the feathers of the crown are tipped with cinna-

mon buff and the nape region may be of the same colour; there is often a pale

rufous auricular patch, but the cheeks and malar region are dull black. The

upper surfaces are dark brown with cinnamon buff or pale buff tips to most

of the feathers, and the tail coverts are barred with the same colour as also

are the rectrices (incompletely). Ventrally the ground colour is a buffy-white,

becoming deeper on the abdomen, and the breast and abdomen have well-defined

brownish stripes which become sagittate on the flanks and thighs. The duration

of the juvenal plumage is unknown, but fading is common and wear (or partial

moult?) may cause a reduction in the intensity of the ventral stripes. It is

possible that this plumage is retained for more than one year.

A juvenal breeding female in wore plumage has some new grey (barred)

feathers on the lower scapular region, and the upper tail coverts are completely

replaced with grey feathers with darker barrings, as in the adult condition,

This bird was shot at the nest in October near Burra, South Australia. A male

taken on the Upper Murray River, in May, has acquired full adult plumage,

including the strongly barred grey tail, but the head is like the juvenal, and

there is a trace of rufous at the nape.

Signs of moulting have been observed in skins taken at all seasons of the

year, but this process probably begins in spring and is completed by the follow-

ing winter.

A juvenal female collected at Two Wells, South Australia, in February,

1933, weighed 2 Ib. 2 oz.

Faleo peregrinus submelanogenys Mathews.

Falco peregrinus submelanogenys Mathews, 1912, Austral Av. Rec., 1, p. 33;

“‘Bokerup, Plantagenet Arch,’’ south-western Australia. Type: AMNH No.

537365 (?) near adult female; April 14, 1900; J.T.T. (Tunney), Wing, 320;

tail, 175. Figured, Mathews, Bds. Austr., 5, plate 254, opp. p. 241.

Range: South-western Australia.

Diagnosis. About the size of F'. p. macropus, from which it differs in being

pale rufous on the foreneeck and upper breast, and deep rufous on the lower

breast and abdomen, with blackish shaft lines and regular cross barrings.

It would appear that this race is confined to South-west Australia. A single

adult female in the American Museum from north-western Australia is much

paler above and below than Mathews’ type (ef. Mayr, 1941, p. 1), and South

Australian birds are also rather light-coloured.

Certain features of the type of submelanogenys, such as buff tips to the

feathers of the dorsal surface, suggest that it may not be quite adult. The

238 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

only other specimen we have examined from south-western Aust ralia is con-

tained in the H. L. White collection. It is a juvenal male with a few adult

feathers on the back and seapulars (from Pallinup River), and is much darker

below than eastern birds in similar plumage. The breast and abdomen are a

deep, dirty buff with heavy blackish markings, and the foreneck is buffy-white,

with some erey adult feathers appearing. on the back and rump. Wing, 290;

tail, 153.

Reference to ‘‘The Birds of Western Australia,’ by Serventy and Whittell

(1951, p. 210), reveals that these authors regard the normal coloration of the

breast of the adult as ‘‘chestnut-brown,’’ with the abdomen, flanks, thighs and

under wing coverts ‘‘chestnut’’ with blackish spots and barrings, but we have

seen nothing from eastern Australia which will answer to this description.

It is true that the amount of buff colouring on the ventral surface is sub-

ject to individual variation, as mentioned by several authors, ineluding Mayr

(1941), and we have before us an adult male from Cobborah, New South Wales

(February taken), which is quite dark below, as well as four juvenal females

from the same area. Nevertheless, we anticipate that further material will con-

firm beyond all doubt that south-western birds are distinct.

Mathews claimed in his original diagnosis that submelanogenys was large, but

later, in his ‘‘Birds of Australia,’’ stated that eastern Australian individuals

were larger than those from the west. Actually there are no appreciable differ-

ences.

FALCO LONGIPENNIS (Swainson).

The Little Falcon oceurs in all parts of Australia and Tasmania, and in

winter it is believed that some birds visit southern New Guinea and other islands

to the north of the continent. A well-marked race, hanieli is resident on the

Lesser Sunda Islands; it is small, and pale ventrally. In Australia, two geo-

graphical races are recognizable, a southern longipennis and an interior and

northern murchisonianus. Altogether, we have examined 90 specimens in the

museums of Adelaide, Melbourne and Sydney, and there are 67 skins from Aus-

tralia in the American Museum.

Adequate material for comparison from Western Australia is lacking, but

the few skins we have examined from that area have raised certain problems

concerning plumage coloration, which will be discussed below.

Faleo longipennis longipennis Swainson.

Falco longipennis Swainson, 1837, Anim. in Menag., p. 341; Tasmania.

Falco melanotus White and Mellor, 1913, Emu, 12, p. 164; Flinders Island, Bass

Strait. Not Shaw, 1809, Gen. Zool., 7, 1., p. 86.

CONDON AND AMADON—TAXONOMIC NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN HAWKS = 239

Falco longipennis samuelt Mathews, 1916, Bds. Austr., 5, p. 232; new name

for melanotus White and Mellor.

Range. ‘Tasmania, islands of Bass Strait, and the more humid areas of

southern, eastern and south-western Australia; (?) mid- and north-western

Australia.

Diagnosis. Head, hind neck, cheeks, auriculars and malar region sooty

black; upper surfaces very dark grey; upper breast deep buff with heavy blackish

streaks, becoming rufous brown on the lower breast and abdomen, with heavy

blotches and barrings of blackish coloration, these markings extending to and

becoming darker on the sides and flanks, with some scattered pale buff blotches.

Individuals of the nominate race are at once recognized by the black head

and extensive blackish markings on the under surfaces. In eastern Australia

this race occurs in the humid coastal regions bounded approximately by the

Dividing Range from southern Victoria to southern Queensland. The occurrence

of similar dark birds in South-west Australia and other localities in that State

might suggest that dark birds are merely a colour phase, but we have seen no

dark birds from the interior, and no light specimens have been collected in

Tasmania nor the coastal regions of the south-east. In the American Museum

there is a very dark adult female from Parry’s Creek, north-west Australia

(February taken), as well as two dark immature females from mid-west Aus-

tralia (De Grey River, June 28, and Pt. Cloates, March 14). Possibly these

birds were migrants or wanderers from further south, where dark individuals

very similar to those found in south-eastern Australia occur. The southern form

of the Collared Sparrowhawk has also been taken at De Grey River. The affinities

of South-west Australian birds with those of south-eastern Australia is well known

in many groups, and at present it is preferable to unite the two populations

under longipennis, although a specimen of an adult female from King George’s

Sound, taken in February and now housed in the Australian Museum (No.

023881), has prominent blackish streaks on the breast only and is more rusty

rufous below than most others. Dark individuals from South-west Australia

have been examined from the following localities—Armadale, Gordon River,

King George’s Sound, Lake Muir and Wilson’s Inlet. As expected, a skin from

Zanthus belongs to murchisonianus.

Females in both races appear to be slightly more heavily pigmented than

males, but the present form is a striking one and readily separable, even though

intergradation occurs with murchisonianus in certain areas. Characters are

variable in birds from north of the main Divide in Victoria, south-eastern South

Australia, and in the vicinity of Wagga, Parramatta, Lithgow, and Yandembah,

240 REcORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

New South Wales, and Queensland coastal regions north to Cairns. In these

areas some birds are dark above and light below, while others show the reverse

condition, and usually the head is not so intensely blaek; perhaps they are better

classed under murchisonianus,

Wing. Tasmania, 4 (ad.), 280+ (worn) (RAOU collection),

Victoria, @ (ad.), 264 (SAM),

New South Wales, g (imm.), 242; 9 (imm.), 265, 272 (AM),

Queensland, ¢ (ad.), 245 (AM).

South-west Australia, 4 (ad.), 245 (NMM); @ (juv.), 238

(HLW); 2 (juv.), 242, 245 (AM).

Juvenals are generally darker than those of the pale form, The head is

brownish black with a rufous tinge, the upper surfaces dark brown with dull

niufous edges to the feathers, while ventrally the throat is pale buff, breast

and abdomen rufous brown with brownish black stripes and markings; thighs

and eentre of abdomen and under tail coverts deep buff.

Faleo longipennis murehisonianus Mathews.

Falco lunulatus murchisonianus Mathews 1912, Noy. Zool, 18, p, 252 (January

31); Bast Murchison, Western Australia. Type: AMNH No, 537513; adult

male; September 22, 1909. “F.L.W.” (Whitlock). Wing, 247.

Palco lwnulatus apsleyi Mathews, 1912, Austral. Ay, Ree., 1, p, 83 (April 2);

Melville Island, Northern Territory. Type: AMNH No, 537523; immature

female, moulting into adult plumage; October 22, 1911; J. P. Rogers. Wing,

262 (imm. primaries).

Range. The drier parts of Australia, extending to the Kimberleys, Western

Australia, and coastal Northern Territory,

Diagnosis. Differs from the other Autsralian race in its much paler

coloration above and below. The head is brownish black with a rufous wash;

cheeks and malar region brownish black; upper surfaces pale grey with black

shaft lines; primaries greyish brown instead of brownish black. Ventral surface

pale rufous brown, with the heavy blackish markings of the nominate race

reduced to narrow brownish stripes on the upper breast and indistinet greyish

barrings on the sides and flanks.

Examples of this race have been collected from sueh widely separated

localities as Derby and Zauthus, Western Australia, the Gulf of Carpentaria,

Queensland, and Cootamundra, New South Wales. Of ‘‘apsleyi,’’ Mathews

stated that it was similar in colour to murchisonianus but larger; judging from

CONDON AND AMADON—TAXONOMIC NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN HAWKS = 241

the few northern skins al. our disposal, this seems unlikely. There is a perfect

gradation between F. 1. longipennis and |. murchisonianus, but the differences

between typical examples of each form are marked and it. is surprising that this

faet has not been emphasized previously.

Measurements, except where otherwise indicated, are from skins in the

South Australian Museum,

Wing. North-west Australia, ¢ (imm.), 245 (AM); @ (imm.), 265, 273.

Northern Territory, 4 (ad,), 244; 248 (AM); ¢ (ad), 267, 276,

278.

Queensland, 4 (ad.), 248; 8 (imm.), 237; 240 (NMM); ¢ (ad.),

268; 270 (NMM): ¢ (imm.), 267,

South Australia, é (ad.), 242, 243, 240, 240-++; 4 (imm,), 238; ¢

(ad.), 245 +, 250, 255 +, 955, 271, 272; 9 cata 272,

New South Wales and Victoria, g (ad.), 285 +, 287, 244 (SAM),

242 (NMM); 4 (imm.), 235 (NMM); 9 (ad,), 266; @ (imm.),

267, 274 (SAM), 265 (AM).

South-western Australia, @ (ad.), 268 (NMM),

Jiivenals are markedly different in coloration from adults. The top of

the head is bright rufous with very narrow blackish shaft lines, the upper

surfaces are dull brown with rufous edges to the feathers, and the two central

reetrices are similarly coloured with incomplete rufous harrings and a broad

rufous tip. Cheeks and malar region are brownish black, throat and upper

breast. pale buff becoming a bright rufous brown on the breast and abdomen

and darker rufous on the sides. Dark markings are limited to the upper breast

and thighs and are brown and very little wider than the eentral dark shatts.

Moult colmmences on the head and seapular region, the reetrices being

replaced last, From numerous juvenal specimens it would seem that the juvenal

plumage is retained for less than one year when the assumption of adult, plum-

age is commenced in spring, the whole process taking at least six months. A

few examples have indicated that moulting may also commence at the end of

autumn, but these may be individuals which were hatehed early in the previons

season, The normal breeding period for this race is between August and

January.

Sodrrberg (1919, plate 1) shows, in natura! colours, a juvenal in fresh

plumage (fig. 3) and what he believes to be an adult with bleached plimage

(August-taken) in fig. 2, Actually this last-named illustration is of a juvenal

in worn and faded plumage, which is frequently met with just prior to the

commencement of the moult,

242 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Colours of soft parts. Adult (sexes similar): iris, dark brown or (?)

reddish (one record); bare space around eye bluish white, pale blue or bluish

grey; cere, greenish yellow; bill, bluish horn with dark tip to upper mandible

and darker mottlings on the lower; legs and feet, yellow; claws, black. The iris

may be paler in juvenals.

Weight of four adult females, collected between June and August: 247,

248, 325, 420 grammes. Wing span of two adult females, 30} inches, 33 inches.

Fauco cencuroiwes Vigors and Horsfield.

Falco cenchroides cenchroides Vigors and Horsfield.

Falco cenchroides Vigors and Horsfield, 1827, Trans. Linn. Soc., London, 15,

p. 183; New South Wales.

Cerchneis unicolor Milligan, 1904, Emu, 6, p. 2; Yalgoo, Western Australia.

Type said to be in Western Australian Museum, Perth.

Cerchneis cenchroides milligani Mathews, 1912, Nov. Zool., 18, p. 253; the type

locality was published as Parry’s Creek, north-western Australia, but the

field label says ‘‘Point Torment, King Sound.’’ Since there is a specimen

taken by the same collector at Parry’s Creek, it is possible that the type

label was tied on the wrong specimen, but this cannot be proved. Type:

AMNH No. 538594; adult male; January 7, 1911; J. P. Rogers. Wing,

232 (2) (worn); tail, 149 (?) (worn).

Range. Australia and Tasmania, straggling to Aru, Ceram, the Moluceas,

and Babber, South-west Islands. A number of stragglers have been recorded

from widely separated localities in the north and south islands of New Zealand.

The Nankeen Kestrel is very plentiful in southern Australia and probably

a permanent resident in many districts. However, it is possible that seasonal

or other movements may oceur, because four specimens which were taken in

Ceram, Moluceas (April 29) and Babber, South-west Islands (August 24, 29,

September 1) are inseparable from Australian birds and presumably migratory

stragglers.

Careful comparison of material from all parts of Australia reveals no geo-

graphical variation, although a larger series might show interior birds to be

a little smaller. We have seen no specimens from Tasmania. Mathews, at least

at one time, believed there were no subspecies in Australia, and Hartert (1931,

p. 46) was of the same opinion.

The plumages of the Nankeen Kestrel present some problems which, perhaps,

ean only be answered by study of birds of known age, i.e., ones kept in captivity

for a period of several years. Individuals with heavy black barrings and

CONDON AND AMADON—TAXONOMIC NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN Hawks 243

hastate markings on the back and wings and prominent stripes on the head are

rare in collections but appear to be first year birds. Ventrally, the breast is

deep rufous with dark brown streaks, and females are much darker generally

in this plumage than males. Study of skins has established that in males first

the rump, then the tail, and finally the head becomes grey, and this involves

several months. A few specimens with rufous rectrices were found to be males

although labelled as females, and this was confirmed by the presence of a erey

rump, which never seems to be present in the last-named, even in old birds with

greyish tails. The rufous immature rectrices are barred with black in both

sexes, but more strongly in females. In the adult the central pair is usually

almost immaculate (except for the subterminal black band), and the barring

is much reduced on the others. From one or two males with the tail in moult

it is evident that, even in the adult, the new rectrices are quite rufous at one

stage; the whitish or even grey colour is in part acquired later as a result of

fading; hut the feathers do have a glaucous sheen. In most adult males with

grey tails the edges of the rectrices are rufous in fresh plumage. The grey of

the head in the male seems to be partly a matter of wear as well as age; in

females the head is rufous with dark shaft lines, never erey.

In the tail of the adult female the barring often becomes reduced through-

out with maturity and is absent in the central pair of rectrices. The tail is

usually rufous in females at all ages, but in one specimen it is quite greyish,

but the rump is rufous.

Fading of the plumage appears to be rapid and prevalent in birds even

in southern districts. A female, taken in South Australia in December, shows

the new rectrices (nearly half-grown) of a much deeper shade than the remainder

of the rufous feathers of the dorsal surface. Juvenals in fresh plumage have a

decided rufous or buffy wash ventrally, especially on the upper breast, and the

dark shaft lines, which extend from this area to the sides of the body, are wider

and heavier than in adults. Males are paler rufous below and with less dark

striping than members of the opposite sex.

In the adult, the dark markings of the dorsal surface are much reduced

and confined to the head, seapulars and secondaries, and in some old males are

almost absent.

Sexual dimorphism in this species, as in kestrels in general, is much less

than in some members of the genus Falco. Nevertheless, unusually small indivi-

duals are fairly common, especially amonest males.

Adult males of cenchroides in good feather seldom have a wing length as

great as 255 mm., while in females the wing is almost always more than 255,

generally 260 or more and reaching 275.

244 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Colours of the soft parts (sexes alike): iris dark brown; bill dark blue at

tip, lighter at base; cere, legs and feet yellow; eyelids yellow with a greenish

tinge. Weight (female, juvenal, March), 128 grammes; female adult (Decem-

ber), 272-2 grammes, Span of wings: Female juv., 294 inches; female adull,

303 inches,

Faleo cenehroides baru Rand,

Falco cenchroides baru Rand, 1940, Amer. Mus, Novit., 1072, p. 1; 11 km, N.E.

of Mt. Wilhelmina.

Range. Oranje Range, New Guinea.

Examination of our specimens of this well-marked race (and other species

of kestrels) suggests that the Australian form of cenchroides is in a somewhat

transitional stage as regards sexual and age colour dimorphism. In adult males

or baru the grey of the head is much deeper than ever it is in the nominate race,

and it extends around to the sides of the throat; the tail is also greyer with

further suppression of the black barring (exeept the subterminal band). This

increase of the grey elements in the plumage is reflected in the immature stages,

at least as regards the tail, for a two-thirds grown nestling has the tail feathers

grey except for rufous tips. These feathers have more black bars than those

of the adult, although much fewer than are found in immatures of cenchroides.

The crown of this nestling of baru is rufous. In the adult female the head and

tail are grey, though the former is not such a clear grey as in the male.

When describing baru, Rand hinted that cenchroides and tinnunculus

might be regarded as conspecifie hy some workers, but the occurrence of two

sympatric species, tinnunculus and naumanni, in southern Europe argues

against too much species lumping in the group.

On Ceram, at least, there is resident Falco moluccensis which might be

regarded as a geographical representative of cenchroides. This form, perhaps

because of its tropical habitat, has less sexual dimorphism than cenchroides or

tinnunculus, and most workers regard it as a distinet species,

NEW FORMS DESCRIBED.

Aviceda suberistata njikena (Fitzroy River, Western Australia).

Haliastur indus flavirostris (Bougainville Is., Solomons).

Aquila audax fleayi (Great Lakes, Tasmania).

CONDON AND AMADON—-TAXONOMIC NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN HAWKS 245

REFERENCES.

Amadon, D. (1941): ‘‘Notes on some Australian birds of prey’'; Emu, 40, pp.

365-384,

Condon, H. T. (1951): ‘Variation in the Brown Hawk’’; Emu, 50, pp. 152-174.

DeVis, C, (1890): Proe. Roy. Soe., Qld., 6, p. 162.

DeVis, C. (1892): Proe. Linn. Soe., N.S.W., (2), 6, p. 439.

DeVis, C. (1905); Ann. Qld. Mus., 6, pp. 4-7.

Devis, C. (1911): Ann, Qld. Mus., 10, p. 17.

Pleay, D. (1950) : ‘Notes on the White Goshawk’’; Emu, 50, pp. 1-4,

Fleay, D, (1951): “Little Eagle in the Healesville Distriet, Vic.”; Emu., 51,

p. 57,

Fleay, D. (1952) : ‘‘ With a Wedge-tailed Eagle at the Nest’’: Emu, 52, pp. 1-16.

Friedmann, H. (1950): U.S. Nat. Mus. Bull., 50,

Gould, J. (1865) : Handbook to the Bds. of Australia, volume 1.

Gurney, J. H. (1881) : Tbis., 4th ser., 5, p, 262.

Gurney, J. H. (1882): Ibis., 4th ser., 6, pp. 451-452.

Hartert, E. (1931) : Novit. Zool., 37, pp. 39-46.

Jackson, W. 8. (1919): “Haunts of the Letter-winged Kite (Elanus scriptus)”;

Hmu, 18, p. 160.

Lyddeker, R. (1892) : Ibis., 6th ser., 4, pp. 530-533.

Mack, G. (1953): Mem. Qld. Mus., 13, 1, p. 8.

Mathews, G. M. (1915-1916): Bds. of Australia, vol, 5. London. Witherby

and Co.

Mathews, G. M. (1946): A Working List of Australian Bds. Sydney. The

Shepherd Press.

Mayr, E. (1931): Amer. Mus. Novit., No. 486, p. 8.

Mayr, E, and Rand, A. L. (1937): Bull. Amer, Mus, Nat. Hist., 73, p. 19.

Mayr, E. (1940): Amer. Mus. Novit., No. 1056, pp. 7-8.

Mayr, E. (1941): Amer. Mus. Novit., No. 1183, pp. 1-2.

McGilp, J. N. (1934) : ‘‘Hawks of South Australia,’’ S.A. Orn., 12, p. 268.

Morgan, A. M. (1932): “Spread and Weight of the Wedge-tailed Eagle (roaé-

tus audaz),?’ S.A. Orn., 11, pp. 156-157.

North, A. J. (1912); Austr. Mus. Spee. Cat., No. 1, vol. 2. Sydney.

Peters, J. L. (1931): Cheeklist Bds. WId., volume 1. Cambridge, Harvard Univ.

Press,

Ramsay, E. P. (1879): Proc. Linn. Soe., N.S.W., 3, pp. 173-174.

Ramsay, Hi. P. and North, A. J. (1898): Cat. Bds, in the Austr. Mus., part 1,

Sydney.

246 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Rand, A. L. (1941); Amer. Mus. Novit., No. 1102, p. 1.

Ripley, S. D. (1947): J. Wash. Acad. Sci., 37, p. 95.

Roche, W. G. ((1914) : “Eagles”; Emu, 13, p, 214.

Serventy, D. L. (1952): W.A. Nat., 3, pp. 4-5,

Serventy, D. L. (1953): W.A. Nat., 3, pp. 191-193.

Serventy, D. L. and Whittell, H. M. (1951): Bds. W. Austr. Perth. Paterson

Press.

Sharpe, R. B. (1874): Cat. Bds. Brit. Mus., volume 1.

Sodrrberg, R. (1918): ‘‘Studies in the Bds. N.W. Austr.’’; Kungl, Svensk.

Handl., 52, No. 17.

Southern, H. N. and Serventy, D. L. (1947): ‘‘The two phases of Astur novae-

hollandiae (Gm.) in Australia’; mu, 46, p. 331.

Stresemann, EB. (1913): Novit. Zool., 20, p. 305.

Stresemann, E. (1951): “Type Localities of Australian Birds Collected by the

‘Hxpedition Baudin’ (1801-1803)”; Emu, 51, p. 69.

White, H. L. (1915) : ‘Notes upon Astur cruentus (Urospiza fasciata cruenta) "he

Emu, 14, pp. 154-156.

Whitlock, F. L. (1925); ‘‘Ten months on the Fitzroy River, North-western

Australia’’; Emu, 25, p. 80.

RECORDS

OF THE

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Vol. XI, No. 3

Published by The Museum Board, and edited by the Museum Director

ADELAIDE, Fepruarny 28, 1955

PRINTED AT THE ADVERTISER PRINTING OFFICE, MARLBOROUGH PLACE,

ADELAIDE

Registered in Australia for transmission by post as a periodical.

LATE TERTIARY MARSUPIALS FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY R. A. STIRTON, MUSEUM OF PALEONTOLOGY, UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA

Summary

In 1953 Richard H. Tedford and R. A. Stirton received Fulbright awards to search for Tertiary

marsupials and monotremes in South Australia. Tertiary mammalian remains have turned up from

time to time on the mainland of Australia but the stratigraphy and in many instances the exact

localities of these important discoveries have not been adequately recorded.

LATE TERTIARY MARSUPIALS rrom SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By R, A, STIRTON (Museum oF Parzonrotocy, Universrry or CaLirornta)

Fig. 1-11

INTRODUCTION.

Ty 1953 Richard H. Tedford and R. A. Stirton received Fulbright awards to

search for Tertiary marsupials and monotremes in South Australia, Tertiary

mammalian remains have turned up from time to time on the mainland of Aus-

tralia but the stratigraphy and in many instances the exact localities of these

important discoveries have not been adequately recorded.

Some fossils now thought to be Pleistocene are surely Pliocene and others

may be older. This is particularly true of some of the specimens said to have

come from the Darling Downs area in Queensland. Also during the past few

years Edmund D. Gill, of the National Museum, Melbourne, has been stressing

an earlier age for some of the fossils from Victoria. Four of his marsupial speei-

mens from marine formations should be helpful in establishing a correlation

between continental and marine formations,

Our 1953 expedition was a co-operative project between the South Aus-

tralian Museum, the Department of Geology of the University of Adelaide, and

the Museum of Paleontology of the University of California. Those who actively

participated in different phases of the field work were Norman B. Tindale, Paul

F, Lawson, Geoffrey D. Woodard, Harold C. Reynolds, Tedford and Stirton.

Though we worked in human cultural levels at Lake Menindee and in the Dipro-

todon locality at Lake Callabonna, our prime objective was to locate econcentra-

tions of Tertiary mammals to initiate work on the continental stratigraphy of

Australia.

Toward the end of onr last trip in the interior Woodard discovered a con-

centration of late Tertiary mammalian materials in a sandy channel deposit

along the edge of Lake Palankarinna east of Lake Eyre. In the limited time

available we collected from that site a series of macropodid jaws, teeth and limb

bones, parts of two kinds of diprotodonts, a fragmentary bandicoot mandible as

well as numerous ecroeodilian and chelonian fragments, teleost bones, lung fish

teeth and crayfish gastroliths (Stirton and Woodard, 1954).

This report gives preliminary deseriptions of the mammals and is not a

comprehensive fatmal report. We hope to secure a more varied faunal represen-

tation and better preserved materials after we open a quarry at the Woodard

locality in July, 1954,

245 Recorps or THE §.A, Museum

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS.

We are grateful to Sir Douglas Mawson, Professor A. R. Alderman, Mr.

Herbert M. Hale, Mr. C. Warren Bonython and our many other Australian

friends without whose help and encouragement this project would have been

impossible. We also wish to express our appreciation for the Fulbright awards,

to the Associates in Tropical Biogeography at the University of California and

others who helped to make this work possible, Dr, A. T. Hopwood, of the British

Museum of Natural History, kindly placed at the author’s disposal Owen's types

and generously took much of his time in discussing his ideas on some of these

specimens. Mr. and Mrs, D. J. Oldfield, of Etadunna Station, were most hospit-

able and helped us in many ways, Mr, Jack Stewart, of the Electricity Trust

Company at Leigh Creek, gave us invaluable assistance and suggestions with our

transportation problems. The illustrations were prepared hy Mr. Owen J. Poe,

staff artist in our Museum. All measurements are in millimeters.

TYPE, LOCALITY AND AGE OF THE PALANKARINNA FAUNA.

The Woodard locality where the fossil bones were found is a grayish sandy

channel deposit with some unconsolidated ferruginous concentrations ranging

from one-fourth of an inch to two inches in diameter, Gypsum oceura through-

out the beds but most if not all of it is secondary in origin. These channel

sands were laid down in a formation composed primarily of greenish-blue and

red gypsiferous clays with a basal conglomerate derived from the Duricrust

chert. The channel sands are 35 feet above the basal conglomerate. The maxi-

mum thickness of the formation where the channel sands occur is 72 feet, though

the total thickness may be greater.

The exposures are along the west side of Lake Palankarinna, east of Lake

Eyre; 18 miles 8. 75° W. of Etadunna Station homestead. Military grid refer-

ence 656431, ordinance sheet Marree, South Australia, H54/1.2.5.6, zones 5 and

6, first edition 1942, seale 1: 506880. U.C. locality V5867 (Fig. 1).

Age of the fauna is difficult if not impossible to determine accurately at

this time, Perhaps the best key to an age is the fragmentary notothere (Pig. 6)

that seems closely related but more advanced than a specimen in the National

Museum at Melbourne. The Victorian specimen came from the Sandringham

sands (‘‘Cheltenhamian stage’’ of Singleton, 1941) at Beaumaris. Singleton

(1941), Gill (1950). and Glaessner (1951) refer this ‘‘stage’’ to the late

Miocene, and Crespin (oral communication) calls it early Pliocene, The Palan-

karinnu fauna therefore has been referred to the early or, possibly, middle

Pliocene.

StmTON—LATE TERTIARY MARSUPIALS FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 249

Mh,

9 Kopperomanng

\e/RRANNA SOAK. i iM bldg ol

i riccaTiLta wn, Mission Sta.

“Emu Camp \ ie Ruins

4 ~.

UNKUMILKA WH

“ae

/.Etadunna

aks Sta

5 searaveaninnd, }

C i, \

1 Par

\ we

L.TIDNA COORDOONINNA

L. FLORENCE

Fig. 1. Map showing Woodard Loeality at Lake Palankarinna east of Lake Eyre, South

Australia.

PALANKARINNA FAUNA—WOODARD LOCALITY.

Famity PERAMELIDAE.

The first Tertiary fossil of a bandicoot was found by Mr. Tedford on July

39, 1953, when we were opening the Palankarinna quarry. Unfortunately it was

in the weathered zone near the surface and consequently was badly shattered.

Genus IscHNOoDON 2) nov.

Type of genotypic species. Ischnodon australis sp. nov.

The diagnostic characters of the genus are those of the genotypie species

until other species have been described.

(1) t6xves, thin; dsuv=ddors, tooth.

950 Recorps oF THE S,A, MusruM

IscCHNODON AUSTRALIS sp. nov.

Iolotyye. Most of anterior half of right mandible with posterior edge of

canine alveolus, Py-. and My-. in place. Ps, missing from alveolus, Mo with

erack across talonid resulting in loss of posterolingual corner (Fig. 2). U.C.

No. 44380.

Generic diagnosis. Horizontal ramus slender; premolar thin transversely

(Py=1-1; P»=1-6), with long gently declining crest from anteromedian cusp

to talonid. Paraconid and hypoeconulid reduced on molars; talonid as high as

trigonid; height from base of enamel below metaconid-M,;—2-0; M,—2-1;

stylar cusp at anterior base of hypoconid of My.

DESCRIPTION,

Mandible. Jlorizontal ramus evidently nearly straight, perhaps with slight

convevity of lower border below molars; depth of mandible below P,—5-4, below

ONE INCH

Fig. 2. Isehnodon australis, Stirton, n. gen. and n. sp., holotype, No. 44380; Woodard

Locality ¥5367, Palankarinna fauna; Etadunna formation. Most of anterior half of right

mandible with posterior edge of canine alveolus, P,-s, alvevlus for Py, and My-M,, Occlusal

and labial views, Four times natural size,

STIRTON—LATE TerTrARyY MARSsuUPIALS FROM SourH AUSTRALIA 951

anterior edge of M,-7-0, transverse thickness below My—4-9; mental foramen

below Py. Horizontal ramus slender, evidently indicative of loug narrow-faced

animal.

Teeth. Posterior edve of alveolus of canine preserved; diastem between

C and 14-2:0; Py with anteromedian cusp 1:9 high; no tiny cusp at anterior

end; long gently deelining talonid without cusp; straight; very narrow-1-1;

length-8-6, Diastem between Py and Ps-1-2, Ps with anteromedian cusp 23

high; no tiny cusp at anterior end; long gently declining talonid with posterior

stylar cusp, outline straight lingually and convex labially; wider than Py-1:6;

length-4-1. Pe missing. Distance between Po and M4-3-+5. Molarg basically

tuberculosectorial but with talonid as high as trigonid; My triangular in outline,

lingual edge straight, labial edge tapers from posterolabial corner to anterolin-

gual corner; paralophid and paraconid present; paraconid not in line with meta-

conid and entoconid, paraconid separated from metaconid by distinet meta-

flexid; no anterior cingulum; metaconid and entoconid equal in size; hypo-

eonulid vestigial; small stylar cusp at anterior base of protoeonid; length 4:1;

with across trigonid—-2°5, across talonid—3-0; height of metaconid 2:0. Ms

differs from M, in less pronounced triangular outline; paraconid reduced; para-

lophid closely appressed to protolophid; prominent anterior cingulum with

atylar ensp af anterior base of protoconid; larger size, length-4-2; width across

trigonid—3-2, across talonid—4-4; height of metavonid—2-1,

Comparisons, The exact relationships of the Palankarinna bandicoot can-

not be determined from the fragmentary specimen at hand, Nevertheless there

are features in the teeth that suggest affinities with living genera. The long

gently declining crest from the anteromedian cusp to the talonid on Py and Pa,

and the reduction of the paraconid and the hypoconulid on the molars are sug-

gestive of affinities with the bilbies, On the other hand, the pattern and height

of crown in the molars are much like the features seen in Thylacis Tlinger

(=Isoodon Desmarest), but the presence of the paraconid and the hypoconulid,

though reduced, may be evidence of a vemote relationship to both Thylacis and

Perameles. The characters displayed in this specimen seem to indicate that the

Palankarinna animals were nearer to bilbies than to the other genera of the

Peramelidae,

Choerepus evidently represents another specialized form related most closely

to Perumeles, The premolars in the Palankarinna specimen are relatively and

actually longer and are relatively shorter crowned than in Choeropus, FWurther-

more there are no diastems between the premolars of Chacropus, Other differ-

ences are reflected in the molars; though considerably larger they are relatively

252, Recorps OF THE S.A. MusEUM

much lower crowned than in the pig-footed bandicoot. -The paraconids and hypo-

conulids, also, are more reduced, Choeropus is a much smaller animal. The

fossil form may be ancestral (but probably is not) to bilbies. If it is in a direct

aneestral position the bilbies have experienced considerable evolution in their

dentition, especially in becoming ligher crowned and in the loss of the para-

conid, since the Palankarinna fauna existed in the area east of Lake Eyre.

Famiry MACROPODIDAE.

Macropodid remains were more numerous at the Palankarinna site than all

the other fossils combined. Even in the limited time available for collecting on

our first trip to the locality we found a representative of every tooth both

permanent and deciduous. Eventually we should have an excellent series for a

study of variation in the population.

This new genus and species is recognized as a member of the Macropodinae.

Detailed comparisons with other genera in the subfamily have not been eom-

pleted for this preliminary report.

Genus ProowoTemNus(”? nov.

Type of genotypic species. Prionotemnus palankarinnicus sp, nov.)

The diagnostic characters of the genus are those of the genotypic species

Lad 5 5

until other species have been described.

PRIONOTEMNUS PALANKARINNICUS sp. TOV.

Holotype. Right mandible with P,;—-My in place, most of angle, ascending

ramus, part of symphysis and incisor missing (Fig. 3), U.C. No. 44381.

Paratypes, Lett maxillary with P®-M4, ULC, No, 44382 (Fig. 4). Left

maxillary with P?, DP#, M1—M® in place, M* still imbedded in the maxillary,

U.C. No. 44384. Left mandible with Ps,—Ms, in place, My, empty; most of

angle, ascending ramus, part of symphysis and incisor missing, U.C. No, 44885.

Rieht mandible with P,—M, in place; most of angle, part of ascending and in-

cisor missing, U.C. No, 44386. Left mandible with Py—M, in place; angle, part

of ascending ramus, symphysis and incisor missing, U-C. No, 44387, Part of

right mandible with Ms-, in place; front half broken off, angle nearly complete,

most of ascending ramus missing, U.C. No. 44888. Part of left mandible with

Ps. DP, M,-» in place, Ms still embedded in the maxillary, U.C, No. 44839.

Right metatarsal IV and associated phalanges, U.C. No. 44383 (Fig. 5). Right

(2) apy, saw; Téaurvs, to cut (in reference to the premolars).

(3)Named for the type fauna ut Lake Palankarinna.

STrRTON—LATE TERTIARY MARSUPIALS FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 253

P38, UC, No. 44390. Composite upper incisors, U.C. No, 44391, Left P?, ULC,

No. 44392. Symphysis of left mandible, U.C. No, 44393. Left lower incisor,

U.C. No. 44394. Right Po, U.C. No. 44395, left DP3, U.C. No. 44396.

forelink

masseteric foramen Ma

Fig. 3. Prionotemnus palankarinnicus, Stivton, n, gen, and n, sp., holotype, No, 44381;

Woodard Locality V5367, Palankarinna fauna; Wtadunna formation, Right mandible with

Ps-My; most of angle, ascending ramus, part of symphysis and incisor missing. Occlusal

(A) and labial (B) views. Natural size.

Generic Diagnosis. Partial forward rotation of molars. P* with no lmgual

basin; labial surface slightly convex and lingual surface slightly concave. Ps

with four labial and four lingual grooves. P* not longer than M+ nor shorter

than M*; P® with narrow lingual shelf and narrow lingual basin; prominent

posterointernal cusp; tiny posterointernal fossette. M+ and M* nearly quadrate.

[2(4) with enamel extending upward from yentral border nearly halfway on

lingual surface; relative proportions of IT? as in Wallabia but larger. P» with

long, deep and narrow anterior lingual groove and shorter wide posterior lingual

eroove divided into three parts by two short ridges in apical area of unworn

teeth. Ps usually equal in length to Ms sometimes as long as My; cusps of same

height on erest. DP, with short crescentic lophid on anterior moiety; crest

extends anteriorly from midpoint of anterior crescentic lophid thence labially

(4) Assuming the primitive incisor formula in marsupials was :

ryt 4-2 be P Pe 0-3-3+4-0

maining incisors in the Macropodidae are s-9-0-0"

1 “5

7 na and that the re-

254 Recorps OF THE S.A. MusEUM

downward and backward along basal part of anterior moiety forming shallow

basin on anterolabial corner of tooth. Lower molars lonver than wide but rela-

tively wider than in Wallabia and in Protemnodon,

Description.

Maxillary process opposite M*®, broad 11-5 mm. not rotated transversely,

anterior lower border sharp not overturned posteriorly ; infraorbital canal 24-0

mm. long, infraorbital foramen above M?,

Teeth. 1°(°) not as elongate anteroposteriorly as I?, crown of enamel much

longer, dimensions of crown almost uniform throughout, length of root variable

from 10:0 to 20-0 mm,, faint indication of groove slightly back of midpoint on

lateral surface; strongly decurved ; occlusion on posterior face.

midlink

TA x

protoloph

Fig. 4. Prionotemnus palankarinnicus, Stirton, n. gen, and n. sp., paratype, No. 44382;

Woodard Locality V5367, Palankarinna fauna; Etadunna formation, Left maxillary with

P8—M4, Ocelusal (A) and labial (B) views, Natural size,

18 smaller in all dimensions than I? or I+, labial surface convex and smooth,

occlusal surface triangular in outline with posterior inflection, crown probably

not more than 8-5 mm,, root relatively long—9+-4 mm.

1* crown elongate but narrow, prominent groove and ridge slightly anterior

of median labial position, oeclusal surface hook-shaped by anterior direction of

inflection from lateral groove, crown short-9-1, root approximately 12-0 mm.

(5) Thig is assuming that I) and 15 haye been lost.

SrtrrtOoN—LATE TERTIARY Marsupials FROM SourH AusiitALia 255

Spuce between alveolus of T+ and maxillary—premaxillary suture—12:0 mim,

P# two wide median labial grooves and two fainter median lingual grooves

separated by sharp crest; heavy basal enamel with irregular sturtace continuous

along labial surface, not sharply differentiated into cingulum; slight lingual

vingulium basal shell with irregular surface, no lingual basin; no posterolingual

cusp; anterior and posterior ends of crest only slightly elevated above middle

part; Jabial and lingual edges nearly parallel, labial surface slightly convex aud

lingual surface slightly concave, angulate anteriorly ; two roots.

P3 not longer than M® nor shorter than M2, four labial grooves and four

lingual grooves; labial basal cingulum not continuous around posterolabial

corner; irregular lingual eiugulum forming narrow basal shelf and narrow lin-

eval basin; anterior and posterior ends of erest slightly higher than three inter-

veining usps; prominent posterolingual cusp ; tiny posteromedian fossette; re-

places both P# and DP3 with crest pushing up between their roots.

DP® molariform but with protoloph narrower than metaloph. All apeci-

mens too heavily worn to show detailed pattern.

Upper Molars, Gradation in size from large to small in upper molars M*,

M‘, M2, M1; M% and M! nearly equal and somewhat clongate; M* and M* nearly

quadrate, M3 and M‘ more elongate; metaloph of M4 narrower than protoloph;

prominent trenchant auterobasal cimgulium nearly as wide as protoloph, not

sharply deflected palinally from midpoint ; no forelink; lophs orescentic in early

stages of wear become less so as they wear down; midlink usually formed by

spurs developed from protoloph and from metaloph, curved labially and poster-

jiorly from protocone to middle of metaloph, curvature less apparent in later

stages of wear, anterior and posterior spurs of midlink usually fused bit. some-

times not complete particularly in M%; faint basal lingual cingulum sometimes

present on any of the upper molars. Hindlink eregcentic on M1, M2 and usually

on M® joing at midpoint with similar but less distinct crest from metacone, ex-

tends to base of metacone on M# and sometimes on M*.

Mandible, Symphysial region only slightly upturned in lateroventral out-

line, not decumbent. Mental foramen usually elongate and ovate, directed an-

terodorsally, near diastemal crest, distance anterior to P, variable (8-4-13-5),

Hdge of masseteric foramen between opening of posterior dental canal and eoro-

noid fossa observable in adult specimens with mandible in horizontal position at

eye level ; mandibular ramus, tooth row, and symphysis nearly horizontal.

Te lanceolate; slightly curved from tip to end of root in labial outline;

labial enamel surface and length of root about equal; enamel extends npward

from veutral border nearly halfway on lingual surface; relative proportions as

in Wallabia; length of diastem between Ty and C in one adult—36-9,

256

REcoRDs OF THE S.A. MusEuM

Fig. 5. Prionotemnus palankarin-

nicus, Stirton, n. gen, and n. sp., para-

types No, 44883; Woodard Locality

V5367, Palankarinna fauna, Etadun-

na formation. Right metatarsal IV

and composite phalanges, A, exter-

nal; B, internal; and C, front views

of metatarsal; D, posterior; and E,

front views of phalanges. Three-

fourths natural size,

hohe

I, 7 ili,

SrtmToN—LATE TERTIARY MAnsuPIALs FROM SouTH AUSTRALIA 957

Ps long, deep and narrow anterior Lingual groove; shorter wide posterior

lingual grooye, divided into three parts by two short ridges in apical area of

nnworn teeth; a little over half as long as Ps; apparently two median labial

grooyes (not clear because of wear in specimens at hand) ; no indication of basal

cingulum; crest moderately serrate, of same height throughout; slightly convex

labially, slightly concave lingually ; two roots; no posterointernal eusp.

Ps four labial and four lingual short grooves; labial and lingual cingula

not continuous anteriorly or posteriorly; Ps usually equal in length to Ms some-

times as long as Ms; serrate crest, cusps of same heieht; posterior cusp thicker

than those in front, slightly deflected lingnally; replaces both Ps and DP, with

crest directly below these teeth; anterior end sometimes turned downward from

rotary pressure of molars behind.

DP, submolariform; triangular outline; anterior moiety with short cres-

centic lophid, posterior moiety bicuspid; crest extends anteriorly from midpoint

of anterior erescentic lophid thence labially, downward and backward along

basal part of anterior moiety forming shallow Jateral basin on anterolabial

corner of tooth; another short cingulum extends from anterior midpoint down

to anterolingual corner ; posterior cingulum; lophids connected by midlink,

Lower Molars, Gradation in size of lower molars My, M3, M2, My; longer

than wide; prominent anterior cingulum not equal to full width of tooth; lophids

erescentic in early stages of wear become less so as they wear down; forelink

curves slightly inward from protoconid then straight forward to auterior cingn-

lum; midlink curves shehtly inward from hypoconid then straight forward to

middle base of protolophid, no spur extending posterior from protolophid; faint

posterior cingulum; no labial or lingnal cingula; no hindlink.

Metatarsal [V—anterior surface not conspicnously convex; posterior prox-

imal half of shaft with rather sharp edge; outline of shaft above distal artieu-

lating surface ovate.

MEASUREMENTS OF MreraTARSAL AND PHALANGES.

Length M+ IV... ee tae oe na +. .. 123+2

Width proximal facet ¥- : na a ia Se 20-3

Width distal articulating surface at 19-2

Depth of shaft 90 inm. above distal end. a 20°23

Width of shaft 90 mm. above distal end 12+3

Remarks, P. palankarinnicus differs from each of the nine species from

Queensland described by De Vis (1895) winder the generie name Walamaturus.

The characters examined occur both in the molars and in the premolars, yet

characters based on the same structures in our series from the Woodard locality

258 Records or THE S.A. MusEuM

are constant. Unfortunately neither the geographic location, the stratigraphic

position, nor any indication of faunal assemblage information is available for

De Vis’ specimens. This of course makes a detailed comparison seem rather

futile, since characters that are stable in one species are not necessarily stable

in another. More than one of his types may come from one fauna. In some fea-

tures the Palankarinna animals resemble the wallabies and in other characters

they look like the species of Protemnoden from the Pleistocene. Our form may

approximate a common ancestral position to these two genera. The proportions

of the limb bones are suggestive of the Macropodinae.

Famity DIPROTODONTIDAE.

The relationships of the named genera of the Diprotodontidae are not yet

known. The smaller genera referred to the Nototherinae seem to belong to two

or more distinct groups, but we do not have enough information on the types and

other specimens in museum collections to determine the magnitude of these

differences. Lack of information on the stratigraphic position of the fossils and

on the associated mammalian faunas has also been a serious handicap in inter-

preting their affinities. Nevertheless, certain characters seem worthy of compari-

son and comment at this time. It is hoped that additional discoveries in the near

future will clear up the relationships of some of the named genera.

Genus Meniscovoprus!*) noy.

Type of genotypic species. Meniscolaphus mawsont'?) sp, nov.

The diagnostic characters of the genus are those of the genotypic species

until other species have been described,

MENISCOLOPHUS MAWSONT Sp, nov.

Holotype. Mandibles with complete little worn dentition, ascending ramus

and most of angle broken off. Left maxillary(*) fragment, with M? and M4 and

aright M$ (Fig. 7, 8,9). U.C. No, 44897.

Generic diagnosis. Tncisors not markedly procumbent nor conspicuously

grooved, not caniniform; dorsal outline of incisor slightly concave, Diastemal

erest. between Iz and Py, slightly convex. Posterior end of symphysis opposite

anterior moiety of My. Length of Py—17-1, right Py 4:4 greater than one-half

(8) payidwos, crescent; Aodos, crest.

(7)Named for Sir Douglas Mawson, Professor emeritus, Department of Geology, Univer-

sity of Adelaide.

(8)Evyideutly this belongs to the same individual as the mandible since the specimens

were found in proximity in the quarry and since both upper and lower teeth are in the same

stage of wear.

STmRTON—LATE TERTIARY MARSUPIALS FROM SouTIT AUSTRALIA 259

of length of My, left Ps 6-0 greater than one-half length of M, ; no indication of

cingulum on anterolabial corner of Pa. Length, width and height (of proto-

Jophid from base of enamel below metaconid) of My=87'126°38%20-9.

Lophids of molars slightly crescenti¢c and slightly oblique, midlink not entering

into crescentic outline of hypholophid; midlink extends straight forward down

into median valley from middle of labial half of hypolophid. No paralophid,

Posterior cingulum elevated sharply at midpoint, shallow somewhat widened

trench between cingulum and main body of tooth blocked by short low anterior

directed ridge at that point. Prominent diagastrie process aud postdiagastri¢

sulous on posterior lower border of mandible.

DESCRIPTION,

Mandible, Symphysial region normal, not spatulate nor abruptly upturned;

symphysial suleus markedly U-shaped laterally, slightly convex anteropos-

teriorly on Lingual surface along symphysial suture, narrow (1:5 wide) deep

yroove along symphysial line fades out 19-0 back of incisor alveolar border ;

ventral surface also with grooved sutural line, 39-5 this groove expands into

elongate (41-7) relatively narrow (10:0) slightly depressed rugose area; subal-

veolaris fossa distinct; spina mentalis broken off; no torsus transversus; «ia-

stemal crest. between incisor and P, pitted and grooved; mental foramen ovate

4-5 vertically and 5:8 anteroposteriorly, 27:5 below and +3 anterior to Ps,

Lower border of ramus slightly convex between symphysial notch and cdiagastrie

process; diagastrie process prominent, pointed; long (80-0) pronounced post-

diagastric sul¢us between diagastrie process and base of angle; angular fossa

deep (approx. 16-0) and continues forward as shallower depression 70-0 heyord

postdiagastric process. Posterior angular surface nearly flat, 74+ wide below

condyle (broken cannot be measured accurately) ; only base of ascending ramus

preserved, anterior border opposite anterior moiety of My; postalveolar shelf

back of My triangular, 25-0 long, with postalveolar ridge extending more or less

uninterrupted to postalyealar process at edge of postdental canal. Postdental

canal 9°0 in diameter, 51-0 back of and on level of upper half of My, canal runs

under labial border of tooth row; basal part of eoronoid fossa 77-0 wide and

15-0 deep,

Lower teeth, Diastem between incisors 6-0; incisors curved gently upward

and slightly ontward, extends 37-0 out of alveolus; anteroventral and labial sur-

face of incisor coated with enamel, enamel extends 12-0 into alveolus, lower

surface not grooved, npper lateral surface slightly grooved near contact with

exposed dentine surface, dorsal surface of dentine also slightly grooved near

lateral border; dentine exposed on inner and posterior surfaces, enamel occurred

260 Recorps oF THE S.A. MusEuM

on these surfaces; thick root, reduces in size at lower end, open, not compressed

laterally, terminates about 20-0 back of and below mental foramen and below

P;, ; dental canal passes down and over labial side of open root,

Cheekteeth decrease in size trom My to Ps, but Mg only slightly smaller

than My ; some cement in depressions of teeth.

Ps moderately worn, evidently with single cusp, exposed dentine roughly

triangular, expanded cingulum extending from posterolingual corner to point

between roots on labial side, shallow somewhat widened trench between cingulum

and main body of tooth, no indication of anterior cingulum; lingual edge

straight; no indication of vertical lateral grooves dividing tooth into anterior

and posterior moieties; labial enamel 2-0 thick, lingual enamel 0-5 thick; both

roots curved posteriorly.

Pattern of molars alike except shelf-like cingulum structure across opening

of median valley more prominent on lingual side of Mg and My and more pro-

nounced on labial side of My and Ms. Lophids shgehtly erescentie and slightly

oblique; protolophid not higher than hypolophid. Anterior and posterior mivie-

ties about equal in width except on M, where anterior moiety is a bit narrower;

posterior moieties on Ms, Mz and My as wide or slightly wider than anterior

indieties; posterior moieties longer anteroposteriorly than anterior moieties on

all of the molars. Median valleys sharply V-shaped. Posterior cingulum ele-

vated sharply but not discontinuous at midpoint, shallow somewhat widened

trench between posterior cingulum and main body of tooth bloeked by low crest

at that point. Midlink extends straight forward down into median valley from

labial side of hypholophid. Cingula discontinuous opposite labial and lingual

surfaces of protolophids and hypolophids, tend to ascend but fades out on these

surfaces.

Upper teeth. Lophs crescentic and slightly oblique; anterior moiety wider

than posterior moiety; median valleys sharply V-shaped ; only slight elevation m

area of midlink; wide anterior cingulum, without labial eusp: short cingula

across lingual and labial openings of median valleys; wide posterior basal cin-

gula. Posterior edge of jugal arch opposite anterior edge of M*,

MEASUREMENTS,

Length from tip of incisor to posterior angular surface ° 4 -.. 850°0

Length from tip of incisor to entry of dental canal A af -. 290-7

Depth of ramus below anterior alveolus of My .. :* e .. 70°0

Depth of ramus below anterior alveolus of Mg .. nd re _ 61-0

Thickness of ramus below M, ll ft i 3 a x. 33°5

Length of symphysis a .. 118-0

Depth of symphysis at midline opposite mental for atien a obi 47°8

Diastem between incisor and Pg .. - e% zt a4 62-9

Stimston—LATE TreRnTrARyY MaRrsuPlAts FROM Soutit AUSTRALIA 261

Length of feeth measured at middle and on left tooth row.

P,-My=150 3 ; Ps-M» =113- 4 3 Ps3-—Ma =T77 “6 ;

P3—M,=—46-4; M,-My=133-4; My-Mzg—96'7;

M,-M.—61-0; My-M,=103-9; Ms-M,—67°9;

My-My=72:8.

Median length X width of anterior moiety > width of posterior moiety, except.

Ps which is measured across the middle.

P3=17-213-0; My =29-0% 20-0; My —82-4¢ 22-8;

My,=36°4 26-0; My=87°1% 26:3,

Height of anterior lophid from base of enamel below metaconid of My 20-9

Length M?—M$& +. : . A an 69-1

Median length > width of anterior moiety > width of posterior moiety.

M?=31-6% 28-0 26-4 M8—37-0%31-1% 28-6

Comparison. The generic name Nototherium is second only to Diprotodon

in its frequency in the literature. Ironically though, in all probability the

specific characters in the type of the genotypic species N, mitchelli Owen (1845,

. 223, pls. 3-4) from the ‘‘alluvial or newer tertiary deposits in the bed of the

Condamine River, west of Moreton Bay,’’ can never be recognized, If this

proves to be true the name mitchelli must be set aside as a nomen dubium? or

nomen vanum\®), Tt seems unwise to treat the generic name in a like manner as

long as there is a possibility of recognizing generic affinities of the other species

with the type of the genotypic species.(1

Owen’s type of Nototheriwm is the posterior part of a left mandible with

Mz; and M, in place but nearly all of the enamel on the teeth has been shattered

and lost. The posterior lower border of the horizontal ramus is complete but the

ascending ramus is broken off. Unfortunately the teeth are so badly broken an

accurate determination of affinities from them will be extremely difficult. In

comparing the type with other specimens in the British Museum of Natural

History it was found to be more like specimen No, 43523 (Owen, 1877, pp. 289-

290, pl. XLV) than any other specimen with which it was compared. Some

enamel still preserved in the median valley of M. in the type is indicative of a

V-shaped valley as in the specimen mentioned above. This feature is also found

in the type of Huryzygoma dunense (De Vis), 1887. Buryzygoma. agrees with

the British Museum specimen No, 43523 in that the midlink on the molars is

(%) Kvyidently these terms are synonymous,

(10)Thus the opinion expressed by Savage (1951, p. 260, footnote 7) is followed in his

treatment. of the genus Camelops. It is appreciated though that the ease of Nototheriwm

differs from that of Camelops in that I am still not certain that the genus ean be recognized

in Owen’s type.

262 Recorps or THe S.A. Museum

continuous as a labial curvature of the hypolophid. Furthermore, Vuryeygoma

resembles Owen's type and the British Museum specimen No, 438523 in the ab-

sence of a pronounced diagastrie process and postdiagastric sulcus. NV. milohells

differs further from Meniscolophus in its postalyeolar process being 40'0 below

the opening of the postdental canal. In both Buryzygama and the referred

Nototherium, the lophids are more obliquely creseentio than in Meniscoloplus.

In addition Meniscolophus differs from both of these genera in the anteropos-

tevior direction of the midlink, and in the midpoint elevation of the posterior

aingnium, V-shaped median valleys are fownd in all of these genera, Muryey-

gona differs from Meniscolophus in its larger size, more procumbent and more

pronounced lateral grooved incisors. Other features of distinction in Muryey-

yoma are seen in the posterior end of the symphysis being opposite the anterior

end of Ms, in the length of Ps which ts one-half the length of M,, and in the

protolophid being 5:0 higher than on My, in Meniscolophus.

Both Huowenia robusta De Vis, 1891, and Euowenia grata (De Vis), 1887,

show marked resemblances to Meniscolophus in the construction of the molars,

in the presence of a diagastrie process and a diagastrie suleus. They differ in

the shape of the symphysis and in the outline and direction of the incisors.

here also are minor differences in the molar patterns. The symphysis in

robusta is long (197*2), narrow (51:8 hetween mental foramina), slightly \p-

turned, and with the symphysial notch below Ms. On the other hand the sym-

physis is much shorter m grata (116-8), wider (70°1 between mental foramina),

abruptly upturned and with the symphysial notch below M,.

I designate Euowenia robusta De Vis, 1891, as the genotypic species since

De Vis did not refer to either species as the type of his new genus. The type

specimens of these two species will be deseribed in detail at a later date by Jack

’, Woods of the Queensland Museum.

Though the generic affinities of ‘ Notothertum’’ vietoriae, Owen, 1873, are

not clear aud it differs from Meniscolophus in several features it scems nearer to

the Palankavinna genus than to the other genera and species. U1 differs from

Meniscolophus as follows: posterior end of symphysis opposite middle of Ma.

Length width and height (of protolophid from base of enamel below metaconics)

of My=45-3%¢33:524°6 approx. Lophids transverse. Midlink not as pro-

nounced but in same position. Diagastri¢ prominence as long as postdiagastrie

sulcus. Postdental canal about on same level in relation to tooth row as in

Meniscolophus, but separated from postalveolar shelf aud postalyeolar ridge by

deep groove. Median valley not as sharply V-shaped. Shelf-like cingula strne-

tures across openings of median valleys of molars not prominent, Trench be-

tween posterior cingulum and main body of tooth not blocked by crest. Length

M.—-M,=122:0.

Strrron—Late Tertiary MARSUPIALS FROM SouTH AUSTRALIA 263

**Nolotherium’’ tasmanicum, Scott, 1911, seems to be close to ‘'N."* wietoriae

except in the position of the foramen of the postdental canal, which is high on

the ascending ramus as in the type of ‘*N’’ mitchell.

protoloph = mejatoph position of paragone

Holotype

FOUR INCHES

“position of pasidentol candl

Fig. 6. Diprotodont, No. 44398; Woodard Loeality V5367; Palankarinna fauna; Bta-

dunna formation, Part of leff maxillary with M1l=Ms, Occlusal view. One-third natural

size,

Fig.7. Meniscolophus mawsoni, Stirton, n. gen. and n. sp., holotype No, 44397. Woaod-

ard Locality V5367; Palankarinna fauna; Ktadunna formation. Mandibles with little worn

incisors and Py-M4, ascending ramus and most of angle broken off, Ocelusal (A) and labial

(B) views, One-third natural size,

264 Recornps or Tue S.A. Museum

“Nototherium’’? watutense, Anderson, 1937, is represented by a very poor

type specimen since only a fragment of My remains in part of the mandible.

Nevertheless the presence of a diagastric process and a postdiagastric suleus give

evidence of a mandibular outline, at least in that area, much like that in Menis-

colophus. Though the tooth of a possible topotype from Surprise Creck, near

Wau, New Guinea (Australian Museum No. F41443), is much lower crowned

and smaller than Meniscolophus, has median valleys not so narrow, las a much

more complete anterior posterior and labial cingulum, but has slightly oblique

lophids and midlinks, though not as prominent, in the same position as in Meni-

scolaphus, “*N.7’ watutense is probably referable to the genus Meniscolophus,

It is not clear at this time to which of the smaller nototheres Diprotodon

is most closely related. Tt is much larger, has a longer eranium and mandible,

and the cheekteeth, though brachyodont, are both relatively and actually higher

erowned. It shows a marked similarity to Meniscolophus in the diagastric

process, in the postdiagastric suleus, the postalveolar ridge leading fram the

postalveolar shelf to the postdental canal, but in other features it is not close.

The large incisors have open roots; if root closure took place it must have been

in the oldest individuals. On the other hand the area covered with enamel on

the imcisors is somewhat like that nm Meniscolophus. The pattern of the molars

jn their transverse crescentic lophids, in the absence of midlinks, in the presence

of cement both in the median valleys and on other surfaces of the molars, is

quite different from Meniscolophus.

Some of the characters mentioned here may prove useful in an interpreta-

tion of phylogenetic relationships when we haye more information on the

Tertiary fossil reeard of the Diprotodontidae.

DIPROTODONT.

Four notothere specimens from Palankarimna are clearly not referable to

Memscolophus. These are the back part of a left mandible with a well-worn

My, in place, U.C. No, 44401, a fragment of a left mandible with a moderately-

worn My (Fig. 10) U.C. No. 44890, a left maxillary fragment with M1-M#

moderately worn (Fig. 7), and a left M1 of a smaller individual U.C., No. 44400

(Fig. 11). The following characters indicate affinities with part of a maxillary

from the marine Miocene near Beaumaris, Victoria, but it is thought that

materials from Palankarinna are not referable to the species from Victoria,

though it may belong to the same genus.

Upper molars with protoloph transverse and with metaloph shghtly

oblique; anterior moiety wider than posterior moiety except on M1; median

valley wide; slight elevation of mudlink-like structure in median valley back of

Stmron—LATE TERTIARY MARSUPIALS FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 265

pretdiapeetric sulces

10 11

Fig. 8. Mentscolophus mawsont, Stirton, n, gen, and n, sp., holotype No. 44397, Woodard

Loeality V5367, Palankarinna fauna; Etadunna formation. Part of left maxillary with

M2 and M8. Occlusal (A) and labial (B) views, One-third natural size.

Fig. 9, Meniseolophus mawesont, Stirton, n. gern, and n. sp., holotype No. 44397. Wood-

ard Locality V5367; Palankarinna fauna; Etadunna formation. Mandible. Ventral view.

One-third natural size,

Fig. 10, Diprotodont, No. 44397. Woodard Loeality V5367; Palankarinna fauna; Eta-

dunna formation. Right My. Labial (A) and oeelusal (B) views, One-third natural size.

Fig. 11. Diprotodont, No. 44400. Woodard Locality V5367; Palankarinna fauna; Eta-

dunna formation, Left M1. Labial (A) and oeelusal (B) views. One-third natural size.

paracone; wide anterior cingulum with labial cusp; wide posterior cingulum

with labial cusp; short cingulum across lingual opening of median valley;

stylar cusp at posterior labial base of paracone, does not cross labial opening

of middle valley. Posterior edge of jugal arch opposite middle of M3.

My, with transverse crescentic lophids; anterior cingulum less prominent

than in upper molars; anterior moiety wider than posterior moiety; median

266 Recorps oF THE S.A. MusEuM

valley wide; slight elevation of enamel in area of midlink; no indication of

cingula across opening of median valley; posterior cingulum slightly elevated

at midpoint; shallow trench between posterior cingulum and main body of

tooth not blocked by low crest at midpoint.

Lower mandibular outline like that in V. milchelli.

MmasUREMENTS.

No. 44398.

Leneth M1-M* Phe +3 i. t ay wt se =:109°5

Length M1-M? ie ite ai, ae + i be 67-9

Length M*—-M3 _ te te as LF 5 i bn 80+2

No. 44398.

Median length & width of anterior moiety width posterior moiety

M1=—31+927-9X28:0 M*=37-8833-7X31:1 M3=—43-436-1%32-4

No. 44400.

M1=27-4 25-8 25-6

No. 44401.

Depth of ramus below anterior alveolus of My—79:-0

No. 44397.

Median length * width of anterior moiety * width of posterior moiety

My—43-4 32-6 29-0

Comparison, The Palankarinna form is larger than the largest specimen

from New Guinea (7-0 in the length of M4) and almost twice as large as the

Beaumaris specimen, from Victoria (15-6 difference in the length of M*).

Trrespective of the difference in size characters in the Palankarinna maxillary

seem to be foreshadowed in the Beaumaris form except in the following features,

Posterior moiety relatively narrower transversely ; anterior cingulum with

labial cusp less developed but distinct; no stylar eusp at posterior labial base of

paracone; posterior edge of jugal arch apparently opposite anterior edge of M%,

If, as the evidence seems to indicate, the specimen from Beaumaris is in or

near the line of ancestry to the Palankarinna diprotodont and the unit of the

Sandringham sands from which it came is late Miocene in age (Singleton, 1941;

Gill, 1950; Glaessner, 1951) our fauna probably belongs in the early Pliocene.

On the other hand, if the Beaumaris fossil is early Pliocene (Crespin, oral

communication) then our fauna could be middle Pliocene.

Unfortunately the specimens at hand offer meagre evidence for a generic

diagnosis, though some of the features observed may be of generic magnitude.

Nevertheless it seems expedient to await the results of another field season in

anticipation of a more revealing type specimen.

StimtToN—LATE TERTIARY MARSUPIALS FROM SouTH AUSTRALIA 267

TEDFORD LOCALITY !11)

Famity PHASCOLARCTIDAE.

Tedford discovered a fragment of a right maxillary of a koala-like animal

among fragments of other vertebrates approximately 25 feet below the Wood-

ard locality. The specimen contains the posterior border of the alyeolus of P*,

the roots of M!, M* with much of the enamel surface and the inner edge broken

away, part of the alveolus of M®, and the base of the jugal arch.

Though the specimen shows a marked resemblance to Phascolarctos it differs

in several features. Auteorbital fossa shallow; width of base of jugal arch

opposite M*—6-7; enamel surface of molar conspicuously crenellated; proto-

cone and hypocone more crescentic; M? as wide as long; length 6-3, width 6-3;

occlusal outline of M* evidently more rounded.

This fossil ig more closely related to the koala than to Pseudocheirus,

Schoinobates or Hemibelidens. It differs from ** Pseudochirus (2)?* notabilis(4?)

De Vis, 1889, from Freestone Creek, Queensland, in the crenellated enamel sur-

face of M*, in that tooth being as wide as long, and in its more rounded outline.

Perhaps additional discoveries at Lake Palankarinna will clear up the relation-

ships of this animal.

SUMMARY.

Late Tertiary vertebrate remains are reported from the west side of Lake

Palankarinna east of Lake Eyre, South Australia. The assemblage is named

Palankarinna fauna, In accompanying notes the stratigraphie unit in which

it occurs has been described as the Etadunua formation by G. D. Woodard.

Locally the mammalian fossils are abundant in a channel deposit valled the

Woodard locality. The age seems to be early or middle Pliocene,

Preliminary deseviptions of the mammals include: PERAMELIDAB—

Ischnodon australis n. gen, and n. sp.; PHASCOLARCTIDAE—phascolarctid,

specimen not adequate for diagnosis (found on the same level as the Woodard

locality and in the Etadunna formation); MACROPODIDAK—Prionotemnus

palankarinnicus n, gen, and n, sp.; DIPROTODONTIDAE—Weniscolophus

mawsont n. gen, and n. sp.; diprotodont specimens not adequate for diagnosis.

Teleost, dipnoian, chelonian, crocodilian fragments and crayfish gastroliths also

were found,

Ischnodon seems more closely related to the bilbies than to Perameles and

Thylacis but in some features it displays relationships with these genera. The

(11)8ee stratigraphic position under section on stratigraphy.

(2) This type is not referable to the genus Pseudocheirus, but is much closer to the koala.

268 Recorps or THE S.A. Museum

phascolarctid is clearly nearer to the koala than to Pseudochetrus, Schoinobates

tlenmibelideus or Petropseudes, It also ditfers from ‘*Pseudocheirus (2)? nota-

bilis, De Vis, 1889, in certain details. Prionotemnus has some characters in

common with the wallabies and others that resemble Protemnodon. It may

represent a proximity to a common ancestor of both genera. Meniscolophus anil

the unidentified notothere share characters with most of the proposed genera

and species of the Nototherinae.

LITERATURE CITED

Anderson, ©. (19387). Paleontological notes. Fossil marsupials from New

Guinea. Ree. Aust. Mus., vol. 20, No, 2, pp. 73-87, pl. 8.

De Vis, C. W. (1887). On a supposed new species of Nototherium; Proe, Linn,

Soc. N.S.W., vol. 2, pp. 1065-1070, pl. 38,

De Vis, C. W. (1889), On the Vhalangistidae of the post-Tertiary period in

Queensland. Proc. Roy. Soc. Queensland, vol. 6, pp. 105-114, pls. 4-5.

De Vis, C. W. (1895). <A review of the fossil jaws of the Macropodidae in the

Queensland Museum, Proc. Linn. Soc., N.S.W., vol. 10, pp. 75-133, pls.

14-18,

Gill, EB. D. (1950). Nomenelature of certain Tertiary sediments near Mel-

bourne, Victoria. Proce. Roy. Soc., Victoria, vol. 62, pp, 165-170, Figs.

1-2, pl. 10.

Glaessner, M. F. (1951). Three foraminiferal zones in the Tertiary of Aus-

tralia, Geol. Mawe,, vol. 88, pp. 273-283,

Owen, R. (1845). On the extinct mammals of Australia. Rept. Brit. Assoc.

Adv. Sei., for 1844, vol. 14, pp. 225-240.

Owen, R. (1873). IV. On the fossil mammals of Australia—Part V. Genus

Nototherium, Owen, Phil. Trans. Roy. Soe., London, vol. 162, pp. 41-82,

Figs. 1-2, pls. 2-11.

Savage, D. E. (1951). Late Cenozoie vertebrates of the San Francisco Bay

region. Uniy. Calif. Publ. Bull. Dept. Geol. Sci., vol. 25, pp. 219-314,

Figs. 1-51.

Seott, H. WH. (1911). Nototheriiwn tamanicum. Tasmanian Naturalist, vol. 2,

No. 4, pp. 64-68, Figs. 1-5.

Singleton, PF. A. (1941), The Tertiary geology of Australia, Proc. Roy. Soc.,

Victoria, vol, 53, pp, 1-124, Figs. 1-15, pls. 1-3,

Stirton, R. A. and Woodard, G. D, (1954). Continental stratigraphy and late

Tertiary marsupials in South Australia (abstract). Proe. Geol. Soc.,

Amer, (in press). Read March 12, 1954, Cordilleran Sec., Seattle, Wash.

ARCHAELOGICAL SITE AT LAKE MENINDEE, NEW SOUTH WALES

BY NORMAN B. TINDALE, ANTHOPOLOGIST, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

This paper records the details of the finding, in 1939, of a site at Lake Menindee near the River

Darling in Western New South Wales, where aboriginal relics and some human remains were

present in a series of three superimposed old lake-shore deposits under circumstances implying the

occurrene of at least three successive industries. These have been identified, in descending order, as

representing the Mudukian, Pirrian and Tartangan culture horizons.

The mammals found at the site range from extinct species of Sthenurus, to a present-day fauna, it

being evident that the animals were in general relics of the hunting and feeding activities of the

people who made their camps there.

ARCHAEOLOGICAL SITE ar LAKE MENINDEE,

NEW SOUTH WALES

By NORMAN B. 'TINDALE, Awrnroronoaisr, Sourn AusrratiAn Musrum

Plate XXV and text fig, 1-12

SUMMARY

THis paper records the details of the finding, in 1939, of a site at Lake Menindee

near the River Darling in Western New South Wales, where aboriginal relics

and some human remains were present in a series of three superimposed old

lake-shore deposits under circumstances implying the occurrence of at least

three successive industries. These have been identified, in descending order, as

representing the Mudukian, Pirrian and Tartangan culture horizons.

The mammals found at the site range from extinct species of Sthenurus,

Procoptodon, Pratemnodan, Sarcophilus and Thylacinus, ete., at the lowest level,

to a present-day fauna, it being evident that the animals were in general relics

of the hunting and feeding activities of the people who made their camps there.

INTRODUCTION

During the Harvard and Adelaide Universities Anthropological Expedition,

1938-1939, while travelling by car from Broken Hill to Menindee in Western

New South Wales, on 28rd June, 1939, a chance roadside delay enabled some

members of the expedition to spend an hour examining the marginal shore dunes

of a dry lake where the highway from Broken Hill to Menindee, dropped down

on to the dry floor of Lake Menindee, at a point 12 miles north-west of Menindee

township. Mineralized bones, including those of several extinct species of

mammals were noted, together with aboriginal implements, on a series of wind-

blown erosion areas on the high bank fronting the northern shore of the lake.

Actual first find was made by Mrs. D. M. Tindale. At the conclusion of anthro-

pometric field work at Menindee Aboriginal Station Dr. J. B, Birdsell and the

writer devoted several days to an examination of the site. A general survey was

made, a partial contour map being prepared with improvized instruments, and

numerous specimens were collected for study. These are now registered as

A. 27628—A. 28148 in the South Australian Musenm. It was the intention of

the team to give additional attention to the site but the commencement of the

War in 1939 prevented realization of plans. A brief preliminary veference to

270 ReEcorps OF THE S.A, MusruM

BROKEN HILL

Fossil

Pamamaroo L,

site .

~ WO?

‘ fs

‘ fol

Vig. 1. Sketch map of the vicinity of Lake Menindee, Darling River, N.S.W.

the discovery was made by Dr. Hallam Movius in the Britannica Book of the

Year 1940.

In March, 1953, the oceasion of the visit to Adelaide of the mammalian

palaeontologists, Prof. R. A. Stirton and Mr. R. H. Tedford, enabled the present

writer briefly to revisit the area, and to introduce them to the array of fossil

bones seattered over the area. It was then possible to check again the prelimi-

nary conclusions reached by J. B,. Birdsell and the writer as a result of the 1939

work and to gather additional specimens. These also were included in the study

and the following paper is a result. Prof. Stirton has given some general par-

ticulars and photographs in the journal, ‘‘Pacifie Discovery’’, for March—April,

1954; the four illustrations on page 5 of that publication relate to the Lake

Menindee site.

The identification of mammalian remains has been carried out by Mr. R. H.

Tedford, who has kindly furnished a separate report on the mammal bones of

Layer B.

TinpaLe — AnCHAEOLOGICAL Srre in New Soutrn WALES 271

Save some isolated human teeth gathered by Prof, Stirton from the surface

of area B the human remains appear all to have been burials of bodies placed in

holes in the ground in the flexed position, Thus they aro transgressors in the

heds to which they were introduced, Their positions furnish only limited evi-

dence for their relationship with the other remains,

The implements and the fragmentary animal bones, being alike the waste

products of camp life may tend to furnish somewhat more readily interpreted

evidence as to the history of the site, and the animal bones, where they have been

fragmented and burned in fire or fashioned into implements before they were

buried will probably prove of the utmost significance as linking the aborigines

with the mammal fauna, which they, by their continued living and hunting,

doubtless helped to render extinct.

The main purpose therefore of this paper is to place on record the eireum-

stances of the finding of the series of aboriginal remains and to disenss, in pre-

liminary fashion, some of the cultural remains found in association with the

series of animal bones, Other papers may deal in more detail with the mam-

malian and the human remains, A summary list of the principal human remains

is given as Supplement A.

THE LAKE MENINDEE SITE

Lake Menindee is one of a series of flood basins and lake plains on the

western side of the Darling River, which here flows southward as an entrenched

meandering stream within a broad aid mature valley many miles wide (Fig. 1).

Its bed is largely eut into its own more alicient lacustrine deposits,

In 1939 Lake Menindce was, and within living memory, had been a dry

plain, some miles across, with a rim of earthy sand dunes along an old lake shore,

This shore was marked by a line of Huculyptus trees, principally nver-red-gum

and box-trees,

However, in 1950 it became filled with water during the unprecedented

rains of that year and in 1953 it still remained a full sheet of water in the

shallow margins of which were growing many lignum bushes.

The principal fossil site is situated near the northern extremity of the Lake,

just to the west of the old surveyed main road which runs from Broken Hill to

Menindee. The place is near the point where the road descended from the higher

plain to the floor of Lake Menindee plain. The site is about 12 miles north-west

from the river township of Menindee.

Shore features of this old lake inelude sand dunes, some red and earthy,

others of coarser and sharper sand forming a wall up to fifty feet or more in

height and of a width varying from a few hundred yards to half a mile.

272 Recorpbs OF THE S,A, MusEUM

In 1939 the shore contours of the lake were rounded, and did not obtrude

themselves, being masked by a canopy of blown sand. The advent of the water

in 1950 re-established the freshness of the shoreline features and at the height

of the flood nicked into und accentuated the steep sand-cliff which now fronts

the area under examination, By 1953 the water was slowly subsiding, leaving

the successive traces of its decline as ‘‘tide marks’! along the lake shore.

hearths e

burials x

200 metres

500 feet

Fig. 2. Area I and part of Area II at Lake Menindee, as plotted in 1939,

During the 1939 visit to the site a survey had been made of the portions of

the site that had become known to us as Area I and Area II (part only). A

measured base line of 100 metres was used, together with some elementary sur-

veying aids. A metric tape was available for linear measures but the heights

were read in feet. The main features of this rough plan are reproduced as

Fig. 2, The spot height of each of the major finds in the beds of Area I was

noted, but as these do not furnish any particular information for this report

they are not further referred to.

Contour heights were determined to a general accuracy of 0-5 foot using

the highest point of the measured cross-section of the beds as an arbitrary 100-

feet datum. On the basis of this datum point the ‘‘dry’’ lake floor near the

TINDALE — ARCHAEOLOGICAL SrrE iN New SoutH WALES 273

shore lay at forty feet or thereabouts, rising ten feet to a beach, and further as a

shore eliff, some forty feet in height, to the summit of the measured section.

The shore cliff, after it became nicked at its base in 1950, was a steep very

slightly indurated sand cliff, in places awkward to climb. The section, Fig, 3,

shows the levels of the beds as worked ont on the arbitrary seale of heights. In

reproducing the plan, contours have been shown only at intervals of 10 feet

although the original plotting was, in critical areas, recorded in more detail.

By 1958 shifting layers of superficial sand and further erosion had so far

altered the appearance of the area that R. H. Tedford made new plans of Areas

T and LI on a somewhat less detailed scale and continued the mapping into

Areas IIT and 1V. The general and detailed appearance of these areas is shown

in Fig. 4 which was reduced from a copy of his work plan.

THE SUCCESSION OF BEDS

Lowest and earliest bed exposed at this site is the one depicted as Layer B

in the accompanying plans and section. The greatest thickness of it seen was

about four feet (1-2 metres). The bed was not depthed during the course of

this study. It is a buff-coloured sand containing calcareous pipes and conere-

tions which on weathering produce a gravel of spheroidal calcareous nodules up

metres, feet

10+. 30

5 +20

1006 feet

Fig. 3. Diagrammatic and detailed sections of the beds in Area I at Lake Menindee.

274 Recorps or tHE S.A. Museum

to 2 em. in diameter, which everywhere characterizes Layer B exposures. The

upper part of Bed B contains a slightly harder band which on weathering tends

to stand up in miniature tableland formations, a foot or two above the rest of

the bed and holding relatively sharp cliff edges. A minor erosional interval

thus appears to have occurred between the laying down of Layer B and the

appearance of a bright red silty sand bed (Layer A) lying above it. Proof of

this appears to be that in more than one area the miniature erosional cliff fea-

ture of Layer B surface continues under bed A. In general the disconformity

shown may be a minor one with only a moderate degree of erosion between

Layers B and A.

Layer A as made known by erosional exposures varies from 2 to 4 feet (0*6-

1-2m.) in thickness. Its uppermost few centimetres tend to be grey and

slightly indurated. It weathers differently from the slightly softer lowest levels

of A.

In the preliminary field survey attempts were made to differentiate between

an upper and a lower A layer horizon, but this yielded little additional informa-

tion owing to the possibly subjeetive judgments necessary to prepare a good plot.

On erosion Layer A does not shed any concretionary gravel residue.

The most recent bed is Layer O, lying unconformably on Layer A, and econ-

sisting of a wind-blown light red sand, coarse-grained in some areas, perhaps

as a result of wind-sorting, partly held in control by dune vegetation, but

merging into a drifting superficial zone denoted in the diagrams of this report

by ‘‘flying bird’’ marks. The uppermost levels of this sand, where not fixed by

vegetation, move about so relatively rapidly, under present-day conditions, that

the amount of underlying beds exposed to view is subject to continual change.

The different appearance thus created may be realized by trying to match the

plan of Area I, as drawn in June 1939 (Fig. 2) with that done again, in some-

what less detail, by R. H. Tedford in April, 1953 (Wig. 4).

No significant differences have been detected in the beds as they reveal

themselves suceessively in the four main areas of exposure. For the purposes

of this report they are treated together although each of the specimens collected

is so marked that its source can be veviewed, on an individual area basis, when

this is deemed desirable.

In the gathering of the fossil and archaeological material a few general

principles were borne in mind. On the one hand uneroded witnesses, or un-

eroded blocks of late beds, from their surfaces tend to yield only reli¢a of Jate

culture. The greater the degree of erosion and the larger the number of beds

involved the greater the mixing with earlier culture strata.

TINDALE — ARCHAEOLOGICAL SITE IN NEw SoutH WALES 975

2000 feet

—

500 metres

500 feet

Oo SS SY

0 50 metres

hearths @ burials x

Fig. 4. Areas I-IV at Lake Menindee, as mapped by R. H. Tedford in 1953, (Positions

of some hearths and burials added in Area IIT.)

276 Recorns or THE S.A. Museum

On this criterion it was determined that microlith implement suites occurred

as unmixed assemblages alone with milling stones in and on the O beds and,

where dropped on to A, they become mixed with pirri points, which joined

them during the disintegration of bed A. The p/rri implements themselves

hecome more common as the base of A was exposed, while large semidiscoidal

high-backed flake implements only became common on the top surface of B and

in the erosion of B itself, where a few ‘‘horsehoof’’ implements also joined them.

The general impression gained thus was that the worked flake implements

became larger and coarser as the beds became more eroded. This could not have

heen due primarily to any form of differential wind-sorting for many of the

heaviest stones of all, the millstones, occurred on the uppermost deposits.

The distribution and suecession of implements thus inferred led to the con-

clusion that, since Lake Menindee is uot permanently supplied with water, a

result of its periodical filling was a succession of camps made on the site, each

registering a slightly different period of native culture. Since the margin of

the Lake extends for many miles there may have been relatively long intervals

between some successive camping episodes at a given plate. The mammalian

and shell remains found seem to be the food remains of these camps. They are

seattered among the implements and on occasion are found broken and burned

as if they have been subjected to the heat of cooking fires before being incorp-

orated in the layers in which they had become imbedded. (Plate I h and i).

The intermittent character of the occupational deposits at the site scemed

to be manifest in another way. The areas of distribution of individual camp

sites tended to be less than the total area of the outcrop of the exposed beds,

Camp sites in Beds O and A were not always directly above areas containing B

horizon camps, so that partial separations of the implement-hearing strata were

observed and the contents of the several strata could in part be isolated on such

evidence. Thus it happened that in only a few places were erescent-shaped

microlith implements of Layer O dropped on to the areas of B under study. In

general the B camps were further away from the lake shore than sites favoured

by later visitors to the site. This was possibly due to the growth Jakeward of

the dunes in course of time. In other places, e.g. in part of Area II, B itself

was overlain by a sterile or relatively sterile bed A and from this area in par-

ticular only one pirri point and no crescents were recovered. The inference is

that here the implements of an earlier period are present as a relatively ‘pure’’

association, Details such as this tended to support conclusions to be drawn from

a more directly statistical treatment of the implements.

TINDALE —- ARCHAEOLOGICAL Sire IN NEW SouTH WALES 277

STONE IMPLEMENTS

The stone implements, chippings, mills and hearthstones found at Menindee

Lake site are all humanly transported ones since there are no immediately avail-

able deposits of rock from which they might have been derived by natural means,

Hence the few critical examples found in situ in the several beds seem sufficient

to establish the existence of man in the area during the periods of formation of

all three beds, O, A and B.

The data from buried specimens is hard to come by unless they are just

beginning to be exposed, and excavations, unless on a very large scale are not

likely to be very productive owing to the low degree of concentration of speci-

mens. Ag illustrating this the approximately 360 specimens including bone

points, studied in this paper were retrieved from a surface area estimated as

some 286,000 sqnare metres of eroding surface; in round figures this is no more

than one implement on each 800 square metres of exposed surface within the

area of study On such a basis the chances are unlikely of establishmg imple-

ment, successions by any small excavation.

The best evidence is that furnished by the limited number of specimens still

remaining im situ in the deposits, with their substance in part revealed at the

surface. A few such specimens were found and marked as in A, in B, ete. The

ereat wajority of ‘‘floating’’ specimens could only be recorded according to the

nature of the surface on which they were recovered, as ‘‘on A,’’ ‘‘on uneroded

B,’’ ‘‘on eroded B’’, ‘‘on O”’, ete,

On the assumption that the primary disturbing factor in this remote spot

was the erosional one, which occurred only after the country was overstocked

with our animals in the past half century or more, it is possible to study the

distribution of the implements found on the various surfaces and to make some

tentative deductions from their occurrence,

The areas of exposed surface of the beds where implements occurred were

in square metres, approximately as follows:

I II HT IV

O _ _ — est. 10,000

A 20,000 8,500 18,500 30,000

B 65,000 68,500 33,000 37,500

This is a grand total of 286,000 square metres, The implements were not gen-

erally distributed on O, somewhat more widely present on A and still more

278 ReEcorDs OF THE S.A. MusEUM

generally distributed in areas of B. The yields can be divided on a percentage-

basis as follows:

% of % of

implements total camp areas

found examined

On layer O 7 4 (based on the one

camp in area IV)

On layer A 24 25

On layer B 67 71

These figures are not very satisfactory since large sterile areas of O are ignored

in making the calculations. Only in Area IV was there a large camp site on

Layer O.

The readily recognizable implements recovered fall into seventeen rather

loosely defined categories which may serve the purpose of this analysis. Some

typical examples are figured in this paper. They are ones which oceurred in

and on the several beds in the following proportions:

Approximate percentages

On and in On and in On and in

Implement types Bed O Bed A Bed B

Blades 6 5 7

Microlith crescents 30 4 6

Microlith discoidals 6 0 under 1

Bondi points 3 0

Throwing balls 3 1 1

Cores (microlith) 3 0 under 1

Millstones 18 0 3

Trregular adzes 9 3 10

Adzes, on random flakes 18 19 23

Adzes, prepared platform 0 22 11

Serapers, core-like 3 22 17

Elouera implements 0 1 under 1

End serapers 0 1 under 1

Points, pirri-form 9) 18 12

Karta-like implements 0 5 4

Horsehoof cores 0 0 2

Large hand choppers 0 0 1

From this table it may be deduced that the main implement types from the

three principal studied beds, O, A and B, are different. Thus, no pirrt appear

above horizon A; they are most common in and on Layer A. When the contents

of A beds are ‘‘dropped”’ by erosion on to eroded surfaces of bed B and become

TINDALE — ARCHAEOLOGICAL Sire IN New SoutH WALES 279

mixed with B specimens they become fewer in proportion, because of the addi-

tion of implements of different types eroded from Layer B. In the same way

microliths predominate in and on eroding surfaces of bed O; when dropped on

to and mixed with specimens from Layers A and B they become, percentage-

wise, far less abundant. The implications of this table seem to be in line with

deductions that can be made from the specimens, few in numbers, which were

found in situ in the several beds.

The total number of stone implements on which this rough analysis was

based is 344, of which Layer O contributed 33, Layer A 80, Layer B 231. The

number of specimens from Layer O is meagre, but was from a well-defined

campsite area in Area TV and the implements tabulated were the result of much

searching on surfaces which nowhere had been eroded down to the level of

Layer A.

Fig. 5. Microliths from Area IV, a. triangle, b, erescent and _c. discoidal adze on

Layer O; d, crescent on B; e. bondi point on B; f, short bondi point, made from quartz crystal

on uneroded B (natural size),

STONE IMPLEMENTS OF LAYER O

A few of the implements which appear to be characteristic of Layer O at

Lake Menindee are shown in Fig. 5, They comprise erescentic and triangular

microliths, some discoidal microliths and bondi points. Some are fashioned from

a white, now slightly chalky, chert and others in fine grey quartzite, a greyish-

white quartzite, and a greyish chert containing sandy nodules One bondi point

(Fig. 5£) is very delicately worked in clear quartz erystal.

Along with these implements appear to belong adze stones made on casual

flakes, such as shown in Fig. 6b.

280 Recorps or tue S.A. Museum

At least a few of the ‘‘throwing stones’’ belong with this suite; an example

is the one found on Layer O in Area IV and figured as Fig. 6a. It is made from

a dull milky-white quartz. Other subspherical throwing stones were found

lying on beds A and B, so that it cannot be established that such spherical

Fig. 6. Implements from Area IV. a. throwing stone of milky quartz, on Layer O;

b. adze stone made from random flake, ou Layer O (slightly under natural size).

trimmed stones are particularly an implement of upper horizons. However,

they are known to have remained in use until modern times and an example of

the implement as used by a living aboriginal of the Flinders Ranges, only some

200 miles to the west, is preserved in the South Australian Museum. Others

occur in Kangaroo Island where they are associated with au industry (the

Kartan) believed to be rather old.

Among known suites of implements those of this bed would best be placed

with the Mudukian industry of Hale and Tindale (1930). It may he significant

that the double-pointed bones, or muduk, characteristic of the industry at the

type site, are absent, These are now known to be fishing toggles and their ab-

sence from this site could be accounted for by the absence of likely fishing sites

on this shallow lake shore. The microlithic stone implement types recovered

may be regarded as reliable indicators of the Mudukian industry.

ee Tp

ae ae

TINDALE — ARCHAEOLOGICAL Srr—E IN New Sourn WaALgES

a. butted jade, in Layer A;

Fig. 7. Points and adze stones from Layers A and B.

bt, butted blade, in Layer Aj e, pirri potat on lower part. of A; d. pirré point on B, meur a

burial at Avea TIL; e. endseraper, on A; f£. high diseoidal adze stone on A; eg, discoldal adze

stone made on random flake, found on B at Ares IT (all natural size).

282 Recorps or THE S.A. Museum

STONE IMPLEMENTS OF LAYER A

In Fig. 7 are shown some implements which seem typical of Layer A. Pro-

jectile points of the types known as butted blades, and the developed form called

pirrt ogeur in and on Layer A but not in the Jayer above. On erosion of Layer

A they are shed on to Layer B surfaces, Fig. 7a is of a specimen found im situ

in Layer A and two others, Fig. 7h and 7¢ were on surfaces of A. Fig. 7d

shows a specimen found on B beside the remains of a flexed burial which ap-

peared to have been buried from a surface in A. It is not possible to establish

that pivrilike implements do not also occur in Layer B, but on present evidence

it seems reasonable to suggest that they are the most characteristic type of

Layer A,

Coming also from this layer are a few end scrapers of which Fig. 7e is

typical.

There are large nombers of high core-like discoidal scrapers of a type shown

at Fig. 7f. This implement comprises nearly one-fourth (22%) of the artefacts

of characteristic form recovered, The type is not characteristic of Layer O

where the adzes are all on random flakes and much more squat in form.

Half the discoidal and other adze stones recovered on and in Layer A were

ones made from flakes showing a prepared platform. These correspond to tula

adzes and in their developed form are nearly equal to the best products of the

famed Lake Eyre factory sites. Fig. 8a and d are excellent examples found on

Layer A,

The balance of the adges of Layer A are ones made on random flakes, Fig. 8b

being a good example. The presence of the random flake adze is not diagnostic

sinee it is found in all three layers appearing in increasing numbers from Layer

O down to eroded Layer B.

The implement suite which emerges as characteristic of Layer A seems to

he the Pirrian Industry, as defined by Hale and Tindale (1930), The projectile

points are the same, as are also the very occasional elowera-like examples which

ocenr. These are comparable with Fig. 195 in Hale and Tindale (1930).

There are some notable differences. At Devon Downs. the few adze stones

present were so worn by continued use in the manner recently described in detail

by Cooper (1954), that little more than butts remamed. At Lake Menindee,

with sources of stone probably only a few miles removed, partly used adze stones

are much more abundant and few show the great reduction which comes with

long use and continued resharpening.

TINDALE — ARCHAEOLOGICAL SrTE IN New SoutH WALES 283

Tig. 8. Adze stones from Layers A and B. a. diseoidal adze with prepared platform,

found on Aj b. irregular adge made from random flake, on A; c. discoidal adze with prepared

platform, on B; d, large diseoidal adze showing prepared platform, on A,

284 Recorps oF THE S.A. Museum

STONE IMPLEMENTS OF LAYER B

The only stone implements found in situ while excavating in B, were two

flakes. One without secondary trimming was found by R, H. Tedford (his

No. 38 from Area II). It has a dull white patina and is covered with the concre-

tion of B. The other (A. 27729) was found during the 1939 visit in B at Area I.

This is of a dull white patinated chert similar to several of the implements iden-

tified as of Tartangan facies.

Fig. 9. a. small chopper on Layer B; b, large chopper in sitm in a bed, identified as

Layer B, two miles W. of Menindee township,

TrnpALE — ArcHAEoLocIcAL Sire 1x New Soutrn WaALg&s 985

The total assembly of implements picked up on the eroded surfaces of B

embraces at least some examples of each of the types characteristic of Layers O

and A as well as those which might be contributions from within B, hence the

ugsessment of what implements are from Layer B is not easy, Despite the rela-

tively large numbers of implements retrieved from the surface of Layer B the

majority of them must be ones dropped from Layers A and above; the imple-

ments belonging to Layer B are likely to be relatively few in numbers as com-

pared with those from Layer A, However, it is not possible to clearly differen-

tiate them, and it is only the appearance of kinds of implements not gathered

from later beds which give any reliable indications.

Large ‘‘horsehoof’’ implements seem to be from this Layer, although one

very battered one, which probably had been secondarily used as a source of

flakes, was found on a B surface at a place where little or no erosion had taken

place, hence presumably eame from above the B horizon. Fig. 9a shows a large

chert implement reminiscent of irregularly-shaped karta implements, and also

of some of the larger implements found in the Tartangan beds by Hale and ‘lin-

dale (1930), ‘This is presumed to be a type from Layer B. Several like it were

recovered from Layer B surfaces but none from the higher beds.

The finding of a rather fine hand chopper (Fig. 9b) at another site, two

miles west of Menindee township, in a bed which is identified as probably equiva-

lent, to B (see notes on Other Sites, below) may tend to confirm the conclusion

that large hand choppers, horsehoof implements, smaller core implements in

great niimbers and adze stones made on random flakes are all at home in Layer B.

These types in general are ones characteristic of sites of the Tartangan

Industry, as first defined by Hale and Tindale (1930). Horsehoof implements

themselves were not particularly associated with this industry at the type site

but elsewhere they are quite characteristic of sites attributable to the Tartangan

and earlier industries. Subject to confirmation it seems probable that men em-

ploying implements of the Tartangan Industry lived around Lake Menindee in

the closing phases of the formation of Layer B and that at some time thereafter

when Layer A began to be deposited they had been succeeded by people with a

Pirrian Todustry.

BONE IMPLEMENTS

Twenty bone implements, or pieces of them, were recovered at the site.

Most of them were adrift on areas of A and B where wind erosion had exposed

them; not one was found on Layer O,

Two series are evident; first those with stainings and adhesions which seem

to indieate they were derived from bed A (Plate I c-g and Fig. 10 a-c) and

286 Recorps OF THE $,A. MusEUM

Fig. 10. Bone implements from Layers A and B. a. on B at Area III; b. on B at

Area IT (R.A.8, No. 4692); ¢ on B Area II (R,A.8. No. 4589); d. on B Area IV; ¢. on B

Arca 1 (part of R.A.S. No, 4589); f. on eroded Bin Area I; g. in B at, Area I (dotted

portions represent matrix).

TINDALE — ARCHAEOLOGICAL Sire IN New Soutit WALES 287

secondly, two examples which are from bed B. One of the latter has adhesions

of B deposit (Plate I a and Fig. 10f); the other was found still im sitw in B at

a level judged to be 2 metres stvatigraphieally below the top of the bed. As

figured (Plate Ib and Fig, 10g) it still shows part of the matrix from which it

was removed,

The bone implements considered to be derived from bed A are very charae-

teristic and even the broken ones, which have snapped off, seem to have done so

in a manner quite similar to ones found in Devon Downs Shelter Layers VIII-X,

perhaps implying they were put to very similar uses, The two worked bones of

Layer B are less easy to classify. Both are made from split pieces of massive

bone and seem to have some relationship to ones found at Tartanga by Hale and

Tindale (1930), It will be noted, however, that Fig. 10f bears some resemblance

to the eompressor-like piece of bone fouud in Layer TX (Pirrian Industry) at

Devon Downs Shelter and figured by Hale and Tindale (1930, Fig. 224). The

example found in sitw is the pointed end of a length of massive split bone (0°5

em, in thickness) which bas been abraded to a point by rubbing in such a way

as to leave two nearly flat oblique facets meeting at the outer cortex of the bone

to form a point, Its general relationship might be with the bone implement,

from Tartangan beds figured by Hale and Tindale (1930 Fig, 24), but it is far

more erudely finished,

FOOD REMAINS

The mammal remains at the site probably are in part the results of the

bringing together of bodies of animals as food by the hunters who camped there.

Not all are likely to be food remains sinee there are remains of animals which

could have died there naturally, Others may have been the victims of predatory

animals such as Uylacinus and Sarcophilus whose bones have been found at the

aite.

It is of interest to note that one of the extinet forms, Sarcophilus, was also

found in association with Pirrian eultural remains, at Devon Downs Shelter.

No evidence of the dingo has turned up so far on the Lake Menindee site;

it may have been an inhabitant of the eamps of Mudukian or Pirrian times since

a few limy coprolites, which could be of the dog were recovered loose on Layer B

in 19839, Identifiable bone material was very scant from beds O and A. If the

dog really was present perhaps the mammal bones were absent as a result of the

omnivorons-eating habits of these animals which, on modern aboriginal camp-

sites manage to dispose of taost hone substance.

There are traces of fresh-water mussel shells 7m situ in hearths in all three of

the principal beds. These shells seem to have been ones transported from the

288 Recorps or THE S.A. MusEUM

lake as food. In general they have been subjected to fire, and hence all but a

few are much disintegrated. Mr, B. C. Cotton has kindly identified the species

as Alathyria profuga, Gould, 1851, a form which is still common in the Darling

River.

Groups of shell fragments of large eggs occurred twice, both sets (A. 27920)

and (A. 28103) on the surface of Layer B. Mr, Condon has studied these frag-

ments and comments on them as follows:

A28103 consists of eleven irregular-shaped fragments, the largest 35 > 20

mm., the smallest 21 13 mm.; all except one have some of the matrix attached.

The outer surface is smooth and unpitted, and some mineralization has occurred,

but there is no trace of weathering. Thickness 10mm. A27920 consists of

22 pieces, the largest 24 22 mm.; the other fragments are mostly smaller than

those of A28103. The outer surface is smooth with some evidence of pitting.

Some fragments have a dark stain, but all appear to be slightly less mineralized

than A28103. Thickness 1°3mm. A28043 is a single fragment 22 % 23 mm,

and about 1-5 mm, thick. Both surfaces are covered with a limey incrustation.

To attempting to discover whether abrasion and weathering of a fresh egg

of an Emu would result in a similar surface texture, an average-sized specimen,

188 > 91mm. and 1mm. in thickness, was rubbed with sandpaper until the

coarse granulations were removed. It was found that the thickness of the shell

was reduced to only 0:8-0-9 mm,, and that the general texture of the shell

showed little resemblance to the fragments under notice,

From comparisons made the fragments are shown to have no partieular

resemblance to any egg of a modern species. Curvature and thickness suggest

an egg larger than that of the Emu (Dromains novae-hollandiae) and it is

possible that some species of fossil ratite (Genyornis, Dromornis, ete.) is

involved.

ASSOCIATION BETWEEN EXTINCT FOSSIL MAMMALS AND

ABORIGINES

The sole extinct. mammal bone found im situ in Layer A which can be de-

duced as affording positive evidence of large extinct animals contemporary with

people of Pirrian times is a lower jaw of Procoptodon with the two rami still

joined together, found in a fragile state, in situ during the 1939 study. It is of

course possible, since some erosion of bed B evidently had oceurred before the

deposition of bed A, that this was a disturbed fossil, brought up by accident on

to Layer A, rather than an animal killed in Pirrian time. However, its presence

appears significant. During the present author’s second brief visit to the area

part of an articulated leg which probably was that of a large bird, of the style

TINDALE — ARCHAEOLOGICAL Sirk IN New SourH WALES 289

of Genyornis, was noted in situ in A; owing to an oversight this example was not

collected by Professor Stirton’s party.

The vast majority of the larger mammal bones are ones found on the surface,

a few on A, usually where eroded down towards its base, but the bulk were lying

on Bed B. Hence they might appear to have been contemporary principally

with the relics of the implement industry here tentatively identified as Tar-

tungan.

Burned bones were found in Bed B indicating man had snbjected animal

bones to fire. Plate Ih shows an excellent example. The figure is of part of the

right side of the rear part of a skull of the size of Pracoptodon in the region of

the orbit, This bone, its species not yet identified, was found by KR. H. Tedford

(his No. 62) as a loose specimen, or ‘‘float’’? on Layer B in Area IIT; it has

matrix of Layer B still remaining attached, hence its horizon should not be in

doubt, This matrix is posterior in time to the burning of the bone.

The presence of the bones and stone implements in apparent association in

the one area could be fortuitous, and there are undoubted difficulties in the inter-

pretation of all sites which have been exposed by wind erosion with consequent

slumping of remains from one horizon to another, for despite every care in

gathering the material, errors of interpretation undoubtedly ean arise, Hence

there is every reason to regard as tentative, the conclusion reached here, that

the presence of so many animal bones together with native implements reqtires

the particular explanation that at least some of the bones were brought together

on surfaces of Layer B as food by early aboriginal hunters, The Layer B hunters

secmingly left relatively few implements but many animal bones, The suc-

ceeding Pirrian people left abundant traces of occupation in the form of imple-

ments, but relatively fewer traces of the animals they hunted.

COLLECTIONS FROM OTHER SITES IN THE DISTRICT

During the 1939 visit, heavy rains interrupted the field work. During inter-

ludes in the rain several sites nearer to Menindee township, on the Darling

River, were examined. Beds which seemed to represent the three horizons, O; A

and B were identified and further material collected. The results of these brief

reconnaissanees were given separate field marks in which Bed W=0, X—A and

Y —B, these identifications being based on lithological similarities, which should

be confirmed by further study. The principal sites were;

(a) 2m. W. of Menindee township,

(b) 14m. S. of Menindee township,

(¢) 14m. N--W, of the Lake Menindee railroad cutting,

(d) 18m. N.-W. of the Lake Menindee railroad cutting,

290 Recorps or THE S.A. Museum

The ‘‘eutting’’ referred to is one where the railroad from Broken Hill, after

skirting the shore of Lake Menindee, turns slightly to the east and cuts obliquely

across the lake dunes towards Menindee township. The new (1953) highway,

which avoids the Lake, instead of traversing its floor, crosses the railroad to the

south side, just beyond the eastern end of this cutting.

The results of these reconnaissanees yielded no data inconsistent with that

from the main site. A few examples of the material therefore have been drawn

to attention in the body of this paper and one specimen has been figured.

At the site 12 miles north-west of Lake Menindee Cutting on the windblown

sand of the equivalent of the top surface of Layer O and extending slightly

over on to a patch of umeroded A surface there is a Post-Huropean campsite,

possibly associated with the time of construction of the railroad. Here also

were a few aboriginal hearths with some long blades, fresh wombat and rodent

bones, fresh-water shells, pieces of red ochre, erude flakes and some remains

of clay pipes such as were traded to and much used by aborigines in the period

1840-1880, There were neither microliths nor pirrd implements on this site.

GENERAL DISCUSSION

The presence of several suites of implements on the Lake Menindee site

which can be matched with ones from elsewhere encourages speculation as to

their historical significance. In this the indications furnished by the excavations

at Devon Downs and Tartanga some 300 miles downstream on the same river

system are considered pertinent,

The microliths derived from Layer O are the same as those found in the

Mudukian levels of Devon Downs Cave.

Present day

wiod blown surface sands

— ~~

. flexed bundle burial

iv Oo & & microliths

cooking*hearth

of 200 stones | ( (h pie polots

. 7 H

mppermost Se Procoptodon

se fossil

mammals

Fig. 11, Diagrammatic summary of relationships of principal finds at Lake Menindee.

TINDALE — ARCHAEOLOGICAL StTrE IN NEw SoutH WALES 291

The implements found in and on the eroded surfaces of A are comparable

with the Pirrian Industry of Devon Downs, The suite of implements of Layer

A dropped on to the uneroded surface of B may run as high as 25 per cent, in

actual prrri implements, which would be reearded as a reasonable proportion ou

quite typical Pirrian sites, The relatively lacee implements of Layer B whieh

uppear where the bed is well exposed, seem to have aftinities with those called

Tartangan on the Murray River, although there are a few examples of karta-

like implements which might be equated with the limited suites of implements

of the Kartan (and allied Fulham Industry).

A generalized summary of the findings at Lake Menindee is given as Fig. 11.

The time interval involved between Layer B times and the present cannot

at the moment be assessed with any great exactitude. It is hoped that some

Carbon 14 determinations may soon become available for the corresponding

sequences at Devon Downs and Tartanga. These may throw some light on the

age of the Lake Menindee finds.

The orly real elue so far available for Tartanga itself is based on the fact

that the remains in the Tartangan beds became mineralized by immersion in

water after they were deposited. This could have taken place during the Post-

Glacial high-sea-leyel period, since the Tartanga site would then have been

‘drowned’? and would have remained so through the period of high-sea levels,

From this it has been deduced that Tartangan relics probably were deposited in

the earlier half of the Recent Period with a terminal date indicated by Post-

Glavial High Terrace time. On this basis the Pirrian eulture which appears to

have succeeded the Tartangan might have followed immediately after this mid-

Reeent episode. If this is substantiated by further work it may he possible to

see the extinction of the older Australian mammal fauna as a gradual process

brought about ulmost as inuch by the increasing toll of aboriginal hunters as by

climatic vagaries in mid-Recent time. If the very tentative time interpretation

worked out for Tartangan is applied to the Lake Menindee Site the eontinued

presence of relics of aboriginal occupation in bed A certainly imphes that any

climatic changes involved during the formation of the bed were sufficiently

moderate to permit of periodic returns by man to Lake Menindee, each time the

lake became refilled with water, and the continued presence of man in the vicin-

ity implies water was never very far away.

Looking further afield the evidence from Lake Menindee is in general

harmony with data suggesting that the Mudukian and Pirrian Industries were

widespread in parts of Australia, both along the coast and inland and that where

both have occurred the Mudukian with its microliths was later in time than the

Pirrian,

292 Records OF THE S.A. MusEUM

The particular phase of the Mudukian Industry which oceurs in coastal

New South Wales has been separated by McCarthy (1939, etc.) as a separate

industry (the Bondaian) implying that it represented a separate coastal indus-

try. However, typical Mudukian implements are ‘‘coastal’’ on the Coorong and

at Penong in South Australia and the particular bondi points on which stress

has been laid in distinguishing the coastal Bondaian Industry occur well into

the interior of the continent, for examples at sites near Wiluna, at 62 miles

north-west of Leonora, and at Smithsonia Waters, in Western Australia where

they were found by Dr. J. B. Birdsell last year. These sites are unquestionably

normal Mudukian ones. It is possible that the curious bondi points are really

triangular needle points, used in piercing skins, when sewing them together for

rugs and skin cloaks.

It is likely that in parts of eastern New South Wales as also in parts of

South Western Australia and limited areas of Queensland the Mudukian (or

Bondaian) was still the implement culture of the living aborigines at the time

of white settlement; although it was undervoing replacement. by the Murundian

culture with axes, blades and erude adze flakes, it was still influenced by Mudu-

Fig. 12. Hafted mierolithie discoidal adze, as used by the Maranganji natives of Peechall

Creek, near Charleville, Queensland (example collected in 1886; A.31089 in 5, Aust. Museum).

TINDALE — ARCHAEOLOGICAL SITE IN NEw SourH WALES 298

kian survivals, Apropos of this it seems of some little interest to note that micro-

lithic discoidal adzes or vhisels of the Mudukian culture phase survived, as

functional implements, in the present-day ewitore of Western Queensland, There

is an excellent example in our collection (Fig. 12) showing the mode of hafting

einployed, This adze and another were collected by Miss Dryer in J886 from

members of the Maranganji tribe at Beachall Creek (on the present Bierbank

Station, 75 miles west south-west of Charleville), The second example, from the

same place, lacks the stone but retains the impression of the butt of the microbth

in the gum of the haft. Tests have shown that the long, slender handle (19+5

centimetres) provided exceptional control and balance for the adze, which seem-

ingly could serve equally well as a chisel and graver in making the shallow

grooves on implements, dishes and shields characteristic of the area.

The Pirrian Industry has not yet been found to occur in the coastal areas

of HKastern Australia. ‘he south-east-most localities as at present established

are on the Coorong and near Mt, Gambier in South Anstralia and the most

easterly in New South Wales is near Goondiwindi on the upper reaches of the

Darlmg River. The westward and northern distribution of the Tndustry is now

well established, since they have been turned up in Arnhem Land by Macintosh

(1951) while Father Wurms recently has reported pirri-like implements from

Dampier Peninsula, north of Broome. | have examined some of his specimens,

True pirri have been found by J. B. Birdsell and myself in the past year

as occurring archaeologically over large areas in North Western Australia and

the implements survived as a functional type of spear point until modern times

in the Pilbara area of Western Australia, particularly among some people in

the vicinity of the Hamersley Ranges. There are several hafted examples in

this and other Museums which will be more fully deseribed and diseussed in a

separate paper. IJ, becomes possible to conceive that the surviving implement

culture in some parts of Western Australia to-day is Pirrian and that further

north the projectile point element of the industry evolved into the pressure-

flaked spear point of the Worora, Ungarinjin, Djatu, Kitja and Wandjira, tribe-

people of North Western Australia, We have an archaeological sequence at

Moola Bulla, North Western Australia, which substantiates this,

Notably missing from among the implements recovered at Lake Menindee

are forms of edge-ground stone axe. This lack may have been fortuitous, but a

relatively large area Was searehed and the absence is perhaps significant. It

seems to be in line with indications at Tartanga and Devon Downs, admittedly

on the very periphery of distribution of axes, that Mudukian mierolithie sites

lack edge-ground axes, which appear only in the subsequent Murundian horizon,

perhaps indieating a late arrival of the edge-ground axe in this part of Australia.

294 Recorps oF THE S.A. Museum

The supposed ‘‘throwing stones’’ found at Lake Menindee are similar to

ones found elsewhere in Southern Australia, both as to dimensions and weights.

Jn the living culture their function is a known one as indicated by the general

name, ‘‘throwing stone’’ applied to them. Their distribmtion, ete., is to be the

subject of a separate paper, A Wailpi tribe term for them is [*mara] which

elsewhere is a root-word for ‘‘hand’’. Fig. 6a shows a subspherical example of

such a mara in milky quartz, which weighs 137 grams. This weight is slightly

less than the mean of those in our collection.

The filling of Lake Menindee oceurred in 1950 after phenomenal rains in

Queensland and Northern New South Wales. Mr. B. Mason, of the Common-

wealth Meteorological Service has kindly supplied some notes on this unusual

happening :

“The year 1949 was wet in Queensland and New South Wales. Every river

in both States was in flood, By the end of the year all the catchment areas of

the Darling River showed rain records 20 to 30 per cent. above average. The

year 1950 was even wetter, and by the end of the year all districts had had from

two to two-and-one-half times their normal rainfall.

“Tn 1950 Darling River floods reached Menindee in April and by the end

of the month the mark was 9 inches above flood level. It continued so for 13

months. Peak of the flood level, at 9 feet 4 inches was at the end of October,

1950. The long continuous period of flooding was most unusual.

‘‘Records show that rainfall conditions similar to those which filled Lake

Menindee in 1950, forcing the deviation of the old road across its bed, occurred

in 1879 and 1890, There is evidently a lip over which the waters spill into the

lake only at the highest flood level. There were lesser floods in the Darling in

1908 and 1921. The only other indications of unusual rainfall which might

have a bearing, is the legendary account, from the coast of northern New South

Wales, of very heavy rains at the end of the 18th century.’’

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The field work of the Harvard and Adelaide Universities Anthropological

Expedition of 1938-389 was made possible by grants from the South Australian

Government, the Carnegie Corporation of New York, the University of Adelaide

and the Board of the South Australian Museum.

The field work described in this paper was done in company with Dr. J. B.

Birdsell. Although his name does not appear as co-author much of the spade

work was shared with him and full acknowledgment is made of his contribution

to the work. The implications of the finds were discussed with him and the

TINDALE — ARCHAEOLOGICAL SITE IN NEw SouTtH WaALEs 295

appearance of this paper is in no small measure a tribute to his encouragement.

Nevertheless, any errors in it are to be attributed to the present author,

The second visit to Lake Menindee was made possible through Prof. R. A.

Stirton, who devoted part of a grant-in-aid from the Associates in Tropical Bio-

graphy, University of California, to the journey. He and Mr. R. H. Tedford

obtained additional material as well as many mammal bones for study. Mr. R. TH.

Tedford supplied identifications of mammals.

Mr. B. Mason, of the Commonwealth Meteorological Service, provided data

on the phenomenal rains which filled Lake Menindee in 1950. Mr. H. Condon

kindly examined some remains of eggs, and the identification of the fresh water

shells was made by Mr. B. C. Cotton. Miss M. Boyce and Mr. H. Burrows are

responsible for some of the drawings illustrating this paper; warm appreciation

is expressed for their contributions.

REFERENCES CITED.

Cooper, H. M. (1954) : Rec. 8. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, xi, pp. 91-97.

Hale, H. M. and Tindale, N. B. (1930): Ree. 8S. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, iv, pp. 145—

218.

MeCarthy, F. D. (1939) : Aust. Journ. Sct., Sydney, I, pp. 39-40.

McCarthy, F. D. (1951) : Oceania, Sydney, xxi, pp. 205-213.

McCarthy, F. D. (1951) : Journ. Polynesian Soc., Wellington, 63, pp. 243-261.

Macintosh, N. W. G. (1951) : Oceania, Sydney, xxi, pp. 178-204.

Movius, H. L. (1940): Britannica Book of the Year, 1940. Archaeology—

Eastern Hemisphere, pp. 56-57.

Stirton, R, A. (1954) : Pacifie Discovery, Berkeley, vii, (2), pp. 3-138.

296 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MusEUM

DESCRIPTION OF PLATE XXV.

a. Possible bone compressor on eroded B in Area I; with adhering matrix of B.

b. Bone point found in B on Area I with some matrix still retained on it.

¢e-d. Tips of pointed bones, found on B in Area II (R.A.S. No. 4589); show adhering par-

ticles of Layer A.

e. Tip of implement on B in Area IV.

f. Two parts of bone implement, on B in Area II (R.A.S. No. 4592); shows matrix of

Layer A.

g. Complete bone implement on B in Area III.

h. Burnt bone with incrustation of Layer B found on B in Area IV (R.H.T. No. 62).

i. Typical jaw fragment showing probable traces of burning; on Layer B in Area III.

Ree. S.AL Must Vou. XL Phare XXWV

HONE RIADATNS PROM MIEN TN Tbe,

TINDALE — ARCHAEOLOGICAL SITE Is NEw Sourn WALES 297

SUPPLEMENT A.

THE HUMAN REMAINS,

The principal human remains found in 1939 are listed below. No attempt

has been made to stndy them.

A.27712 was a partly mineralized human skeleton found at Area I in a cir-

cular pit dug through the lower part of A into Layer B, and situated immediately

to the east of the measured section. The hole contained the soil of Layer A, indi-

cating burial from a horizon in the upper part of A. The burial was in a flexed

position, having been buried in the upright squatting position, pelvis to the

north-east and knees to the south-west, Only the lower part of the trunk was

im silw; the bones of the upper half of the body had partly disintegrated and

were scattered over the adjacent eroded surface of B.

A.27759 comprised parts of an incomplete skeleton lying at the junction of

A and B beds in Area IT.

A.27763 consisted of bones of at least two persons lying on the surfaee of

searcely eroded B near to a hearth on the uneroded top surface of B. This

hearth was tm situ and tashioned from many transported stones. (A photograph

suggests over 200 stones were present. )

A.27770 was the burial of a child lying on an eroded surface of B at the

western end of Area IIL (approximately at the position shown with a cross in the

1953 survey of Area IIT). The remains were spread over an area of a diameter of

3 metres. It is estimated that 0-5 m. of bed B had been eroded from the area.

The child may have been buried from a horizon in A but there is no evidence to

contradict an even later interment from Layer O.

A.27725 consisted of fragmentary portions of the skeleton of a child found

in Area I in an eroded area 1-3 metres below the level of the upper surface of B

at a point 109 metres W. of the measured section. Some of the bones seem to have

adhesions of the matrix of Layer B.

A.27734 consisted of seattered human bone fragments found on the surface

of B in Area I, 155 metres W. of the measured section. The bones were mixed

with various mammal bones scattered over an area of 3 metres diameter. The

mammal bones showed more concretionary adhesions and appeared older than the

human remains.

A.27752 was a burial the bones of which were scattered widely in Area IT on

top surface of barely eroded bed B, being evidently derived from A or above,

A.27752 was a burial near the eastern end of Area IJ, the bones of which had

become scattered on the top surface of slightly eroded B. Seemingly it had been

298 Recorps or THE §,A, Museum

derived from A or above. A hearth in the uppermost B horizon at this point

suggested occupation at an earlier period when Layer B was being formed.

A.27755 comprised parts of an adult cranial vault lying on bed B which had

eroded to approximately 0:3 metres below the red A bed which was here 0-6

metre thick, Evidently the bones had weathered out from the level of top B, but

must have been buried from a horizon either in A or above.

A.27757 a ‘‘floating’’ fragment of a right parietal on B in the centre of the

blown out Area II was lying among some mammal bones (A.27758).

A.27774 was a burial in the central part of eastern end of Area IL. Remains

of it were spread on wneroded B.

Two burials still in situ. were obtained by Stirton, Tedford and the writer

during the 1953 visit. They were both in Area IV, The first was the bundle

burial of a flexed individual (field No. 41), which was buried from a high level in

Layer O into its base; a cireular hole had been dug, a small amount of burned

material or highly carbonized vegetable debris was in the bottom of the hole.

The parcelled body had had an arm broken and passed through the pelvic girdle,

before burial; there was the remains of a piece of wood over the region of the

head. On the wind eroded surface of Layer O, beside this skeleton, was a white

discoidal microlith. Others were found on the surface of Layer O in the vicinity ;

all being exposed by the blowing away of portions of Layer O. Where this Layer

had been much eroded, they increased in numbers. This burial is figured at the

top of page 5 in the account by Stirton (1954).

The second burial (field No, 42) was situated 8 metres S.W. of the first. The

skeleton lay on its left side, knees folded at right angles to body with head

pointing N.N.W. This burial was in a deposit of a coarser red sandy nature

than the first and had been buried from a surface in a red earthy layer. It was

demonstrated by Tedford, after the present writer bad returned to Adelaide, that

this red earth was Layer A, hence the strong probability exists that this burial is

to be assoviated with the period of an upper level of bed A,

The grave earth was slightly indurated; the original burial pit was cireular,

1:0 & 1:1 metres in diameter. The bones were much decayed but portions

including the calvarium and the right humerus were salvaged. This find is

figured on the lower part of page 5 of the account by Stirton (1954).

REPORT ON THE EXTINCT MAMMALIAN REMAINS AT LAKE

MENINDEE, NEW SOUTH WALES

BY RICHARD H. TEDFORD, MUSEUM OF PALEONTOLOGY, UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA,

BERKELEY, C'ALIFORNIA

Summary

In 1939, while engaged in the work of the Harvard-Adelaide Universities Anthropological

Expedition, Dr. J. B. Birdsell, then of the Peabody Museum of Harvard University, and Mr. N. B.

Tindale, representing University of Adelaide, discovered human remains and associated extinct

marsupials at Lake Menindee along the Darling River in Western New South Wales. The discovery

as made in connection with other studies in the area and only a few days were available for an

investigation of the site. At that time, however, these workers were able to map and make a small

collection of fossil remains and a larger one of artifacts from two of the exposures as well as

explore the extent of the fossiliferous deposits on the northern shore of the then dry Lake Menindee.

A notice of this discovery was made by H. L. Movius in 1940. World War II interrupted further

investigation planned at that time.

REPORT on tHe EXTINCT MAMMALIAN REMAINS av

LAKE MENINDEE, NEW SOUTH WALES

By RICHARD H. TEDFORD (Museum of Paleontology, University of California,

Kerkeley, California),

Ly 1939, while engaged in the work of the Harvard-Adelaide Universities Anthro-

pological Expedition, Dr. J. B, Birdsell, then of the Peabody Museum of Harvard

University, and Mr. N, B. Tindale, representing the University of Adelaide, dis-

covered human remains and associated extinct marsupials at Lake Menindee

along the Darling River in Western New South Wales. The discovery was made

in connection with other studies in the area and only a few days were available

for an investigation of the site. At that time, however, these workers were able

to map and make a small collection of fossil remains and a larger one of artifacts

from two of the exposures as well as explore the extent of the fossiliferons

deposits on the northern shore of the then dry Lake Menindee. <A notice of this

discovery was made by H. L, Moyius in 1940. World War II interrupted further

investigation planned at that time.

While in Australia in 1953 on Fulbright Awards, Prof. R. A. Stirton and

the writer, representing the Museum ot Paleontology of the University of Cali-

fornia, and N. B. Tindale, representing the South Australian Museum, reopened

investigation of the Lake Menindee area. The work was partially financed by

ihe Associates in Tropical Biogeography, by the Museum of Paleoutology, both

of the University of California; by donation from a friend of the University;

und by the South Apstralian Museum.

Tn late March of 1953, Prof. Stirton and the writer spent nearly a month

in the field concentrating on the discovery site and associated areas on the north-

western shore of Lake Menindee. Tindale directed the party to the locality and

remained for the first week to collect additional artifacts and review the strati-

vraphy of the sites investigated. Our party was fortunate in recovering a large

collection of mammalian vemains which are now beine studied in the Museum

of Paleontology at the University of California. Additional human remains and

artifacts were also obtained, which are housed in the collections of the South

Australian Museum, The cireumstances of the finding of the site and an account

ol the arehacology has been published by ‘Tindale (1954). Detailed descriptions

of fossil remains and other studies will be presented in the future by Tindale and

the writer. In view of the unusual interest of this oecurrence to students of

human prehistory it was felt that the preliminary results of field work on the

300 Recorbs OF THE S.A. MusEUM

mammal remains done in 1953 should be reported at this time despite the incom-

pleteness of the studies.

The generous assistance and encouragement provided by Mr. H. M. Hale,

Director of the South Australian Museum; Mr. N. B. Tindale, of the same

institution; and Prof. R. A. Stirton, Chairman of the Department of Paleon-

tology of the University of California, is gratefully acknowledged.

LOCALITY

The sites are four wind deflation hollows or ‘‘blowouts’’ in the sand hills

formed along the north-western shore of Lake Menindee, New South Wales,

immediately west of the point at which the former main road from Broken ill

to Menindee entered the lake bottom. This road had been replaced by a new

main road, the old one being unavailable, as filling of the lake in 1950 after phe-

nomenal rains had left standing water over a considerable portion of the usually

dry lake bottom.

STRATIGRAPHY

Deflation by the wind has penetrated deep euough into the sand hills to

expose a series of superimposed aeolian deposits separated by erosional uncon-

formities. The following generalized sevtion presents the stratigraphic succes-

sion as exposed in all four of the blow-outs.

Unit Lithology Thickness

1. (0 of Tindale Light red dune sand, active, but partially 0-10 ft.

paper) ‘frozen’? by locally thick growths of Cane

Grass (Spinifex paradorus).

Erosional Unconformity

2. (A (upper)) Locally exposed unit of gray silty sand. 0-0-75 ft.

8. (A (lower) ) Bright briek-red cross-bedded silty sand. 0-3 ft.

4, (B) Reddish to buff cross-bedded sand containing 6 + ft.

small calearcous spheroidal to pipey sand-

stone concretions, and sandstone casts of

roots. Base of exposed section.

OCCURRENCE

Fossil remains and artifacts were collected from all of the units of the above

section except the thin and locally exposed unit two. In making these collections

the stratigraphic position of each specimen was recorded. Care was taken to

also record the disposition of each specimen as it was desirable to know whether

materials were found in place or as float on the present erosional surface of a

Treprorp — Extinct MAMMALIAN REMAINS IN N.S. WALES 801

given unit. It is hoped that this data will allow us to assign specimens found

scattered on the present erosional surface of the blow-outs to their proper strati-

eraphie position. This problem is a major one at the Lake Menindee sites as

wind removal of the upper wnits has lowered fossil remains and artifacts from

the upper units on to lower units. It would thus seem possible that any speci-

men not found in situ might have one of the following origins in terms of the

local sequence :

(a) Contemporaneous with deposition of the unit on which it is found.

(b) Contemporaneous with the time represented by the erosional hiatus

separating the unit on which it is found from the overlying unit.

hiatuses which separate them, including that of the Recent.

Fortunately the mammalian material, the bulk of which was collected from

or on the present erosional surface of unit four (B), shows clear evidence of

being derived from that unit. Mammalian remains were rarely met with in the

overlying units, a fact which lessens the possibility of contamination by material

of origin in the overlying deposits or hiatuses. On the other hand, material on

the erosion surface of unit four (B) before unit three (lower A) was deposited

may be represented in our collection as float from unit four.

In contrast with the mammalian material, relatively few artifacts were

found in place and as such they present considerable difficulty of interpretation.

The bulk of these materials was found scattered over the present erosional sur-

faces of all the lithologic units except unit two. Intrusive human burials were

encountered but owing to the characteristic litholoxy of the exposed deposits

they were easily detected.

Collections from each of the four areas investigated have been retained sepa-

rately although it is clear that the lithologic units can be correlated from one site

to the next. The following discussion, a summary of the material taken from

each of the lithologic units, assumes such a correlation is justifiable.

Uniti. (O)

A bundle-type human burial was collected 7m site from this unit. Another

burial of undetermined type was found intrusive into unit four from unit one.

A. few artifacts and bones of recent mammals were fonnd on the present erosion

surface of this unit.

Unit 3, (A)

Two flexed human burials were found with this unit. One was confined to

this unit while the other was intrusive into unit four from unit three. These

802 Recorps or tHe S.A, Museum

burials may be contemporaneous with unit three, or may have been made from

the surface of that unit during the time represented by the erosional hiatus

separating unit three from units one or two. Two partial skeletons of the rat

kangaroo (Belfongiw) were found in place in this unit. Scattered artifacts were

found on the present erosion surface of this unit.

Unit 4. (B)

This unit yielded the bulk of the mammalian remains collected at the Lake

Menindee sites. Some of these were materials collected on the surface of the

unit and may belong to the time interval represented by the erosional unconfor-

mity between units four and three as mentioned above. In the main, however,

the bulk of the material was taken im situ during the active phases of our work.

Many of the bones found in place were checked and cracked as if exposed to

weathering for a considerable time before burial. Frequently materials in placo

consisted of whole or partial skeletons, usually more or less articulated. These

specimens were usually well preserved, suggesting rapid burial. Complete articu-

lated skeletons of the smaller macropodids (Bettongia and Lagorchestes), and of

the monotreme (Zachyglassus) were found in place. Specimens of the larger

kangaroos were usually seattered, but interestingly enough, nearly complete

artienlated feet were not uncommon. In one case parts of the broken skeleton of

a giant short-faced kangaroo (Procoptodon) were found closely associated. The

mandible of this individual was still attached to the cranium, but most of the

brainvase was missing. Nearby the caudal vertebrae, sacrum and pelvis were

found articulated, Articulated portions of both fore and hind limbs, broken iso-

lated limb bones, and many small bone fraements were scattered within a radins

of about a yard of the cranial and caudal portions of the skeleton. In several

instances large marsupial bones showed clear evidence of having been burned.

Small bits of chareoal were also commonly associated with mammalian remains

in situ. in unit four.

The evidence seems highly suggestive that the fossil mammal remains col-

lected in place from unit four represent, to a considerable extent, man’s selection

of the game animals of the Lake Menindee area during the time unit four was

being deposited. Thus at least part of the accumulation of animal remains in

this unit, might be regarded as a kitchen midden built up over a period of seasons

when movements of game animals brought the nomadic hunters continually back

into the area.

TEDFoRD — Extinct MAMMALIAN REMAINS IN N.S, WALES 303

LAKE MENINDEE ASSEMBLAGE

The mammalian remains collected in situ from unit four have been identi-

fied to generic level and are listed below, This group of mammals, termed the

Lake Menindee assemblage, includes a somewhat selective sampling of the mam-

malian fauna living in the lower Darling River region during the time unit four

was being deposited. Due to the fact that materials collected from the surface

of unit four may actually belong to any one of the overlying units or erosional

hiatuses I have included in the following faunal list only those genera that were

found in situ.

MONOTREMATA Tachyglossidae Tachyglossus

*(?) Zaglossus

MARSUPIALIA Dasyuridae

Dasyurinae Dasyurus 8.1,

*Sarcophilus

Thylacininae *Thylacinus

Myrmecobiidae (?) Myrmecobius

Peramelidae Thylacis

(?) Perameles

Chaeropus

Thylacomys

Phascolonidae *Phascolonus

Lasiorhinus

Macropodidae

Hypsiprymnodontinae *Propleopus

Potoroinae Bettongia

Macropodinae *Sthenurus

*Procoptodon

*Protemnodon

Lagorchestes

Onychogalea

Wallabia

Macropus s. 1,

Diprotodontidae *Diprotodon

RODENTIA Muridae

Murinae various living genera

Hydromyinae Hydromys

* Indicates the genus is extinct to-day on the Australian mainland.

Tf the faunal list given above is compared with the list of genera of Recent

mammals from the same region and allowance made for the incompleteness of the

fossil representation, the Recent fauna appears as merely an impoverished rem-

nant of the fossil assemblage. Extinction or change of range could account for

804 Recorps or THE S.A. Museum

the differences. Among the genera still extant recorded in the fossil assemblage

only the hairy-nosed wombat (Lastorhinus) appears not to have lived in the

immediate region in recent times. It oceutrs to-day in the general geographic

proximity of Lake Menindee, along the lower Murray River, aud probably en-

joyed a much larger range in former times. Tf one exelndes the mamunals

known to have been introduced during Enropean colonization, the dingo stands

alone in being the only member of the native Recent fauna known to have en-

tered the area since unit four was deposited. Had these dogs heen present it is

difficult to see why at least some fragments of their skeleton was not preserved

in deposits in which even man was vepresented, The absence of the dingo from

the Lake Menindee assemblage is thus regarded as real until further collections

demonstrate evidence to the contrary.

ENVIRONMENT AND AGE OF THE MENINDER FAUNA

The change in the animal life of the region, as demonstrated by the com-

parison of the Lake Menindee assemblage and the present-day mammalian fauna

from the same region, could be a result of the supposedly rigorons climatic

changes that marked the end of the Pleistocene and the beginning of the Recent

in Australia (for summaries of Pleistocene and Post-Pleistocene physical history

see David and Browne (1950) and Fairbridge (1953) ). Geological and associated

studies in Australia have revealed that this climatic change involved an overall

trend towards aridity broken only by minor reversals since the end of the Plei-

stocene, One of the results of this transition from the cool-moist conditions

affecting a large part of Australia during the Last Glaciation to the warm-dry

conditions of the Recent probably involved a great restriction in the large areas

of suitable herbage necessary to support the diversity of late Pleistocene her-

bivores. Such a climatic change could have been the greatest single cause of the

extinction of these forms. As we have seen from the evidence at Lake Menindee,

man was a witness to this extinction, Te might have accelerated the process of

extinction in the case of some forms, but it seems unlikely that he played the

major role.

Considering the above evidence, an carly Recent age or at earliest late

Pleistocene for the Lake Menindee assemblage seems the most reasonable infer-

ence. The study of the artifacts from the Lake Menindee sites offers evidence

for close correlations with established sections on the Lower Murray River at

Devon Downs and Tartanga (Hale and Tindale, 1930). The suggestion exists

therefore, that the mammalian assemblage can he correlated with a known cul-

tural sequence. Suitable carbonaceous materials on which to conduct absolute

Treprorp — Extincr MAMMALIAN REMAINS IN N.S. WALES 805

age determinations by the carbon 14 method may be present but have not been

obtained as yet on the site. If sufficient fresh water shell material can be recoy-

ered on further work it may he possible to obtain a dating.

CONCLUSIONS

The evidence gained from a preliminary study of the material collected from

unit four (Layer B) at Lake Menindee suggests the following conclusions :

1. Man was a contemporary of extinct marsupials in Australia.

2. Man hunted these animals as a source of food.

3. The accumulation of animal remains in this unit probably represents a kit-

chen midden built up over a period of seasons when movements of game

animals brought the nomadic hunters continually back into the area.

4. The dingo probably was not present in western New South Wales at the time

unit four (B) was being deposited.

Po) |

The Lake Menindee assemblage lived at a time when a more equable climate

prevailed over this part of Australia, either at the close of the Pleistocene or

at the beginning of the Recent.

REFERENCES CITED

David, Sir T. E., and Browne, W. R. (1950) : The Geology of the Commonwealth

of Australia, London, pp.

Fairbridge, R. W. (1953): Australian Stratigraphy, 2nd Ed., Perth, Ch. XI,

pp. 1-100.

Hale, H. M. and Tindale, N. B. (1930). Notes on some Human Remains in the

lower Murray Valley, South Australia, Rec. 8. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 4,

pp. 145-218.

Movius, H. L. (1940) : Archaeology—Eastern Hemisphere. Britannica Book of

the Year, 1940, pp. 56-57.

Tindale, N. B. (1955): Archaeological site at Lake Menindee, New South Wales,

Ree. S. Aust, Mus., Adelaide, 11, pn. 269-298,

RECORDS

OF THE

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Vol. XI, No. 4

Published by The Museum Board, and edited by the Museum Director

Ape.awe, May 81, 1955

PRINTED AT THE ADVERTISER PRINTING OFFICE, MARLBOROUGH PLACE,

ADELAIDE

Registered in Australia for transmission by post as a periodical.

REVISION OF THE GHOST MOTHS

(LEPIDOPTERA HOMONEURA, FAMILY HEPIALIDAE)

PART VI

BY NORMAN B. TINDALE, B.SC., SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

Part V of this Revision was published in these Records, in vol. Vii, 1942, pp. 151-168. The long

delay in the appearance of this part was forced by six years of interruption during World War II

followed by pressure of other work. Parts VII and VIII are now in preparation.

Since 1942 three other short papers, not in the series, but dealing with Hepialidae, have been

published by the present author, namely, in Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., London, ser. 12, vii, 1954, pp. 13-

15 and plate; Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., Adelaide, 76, 1953, pp. 73-79 and plate; Proc. Ent. Soc.

Washington, 47, 1945, pp. 183-184. One earlier paper, in the South Australian Naturalist, Adelaide,

20, 1938, pp. 1-6 and plate, dealing with the life-histories of some Australian Hepialids, has not

been mentioned among previous bibliographic references.

REVISION or THE GHOST MOTHS

(LEPIDOPTERA HOMONEURA, Fami.y HEPIALIDAE)

PART VI

By NORMAN B. TINDALE, B.Sc,, Sourn Austranian Muskum

Plate xxvi-xxxii and text fig. 1-25

INTRODUCTION

Parr V of this Revision was published in these Records, in vol. vii, 1942, pp.

151-168. The long delay in the appearance of this part was foreed by six years

of interruption during World War IT followed by pressure of other work.

Parts VII and VIII ave now in preparation.

Since 1942 three other short papers, not in the series, but dealing with

Hepialidae, have been published by the present author, namely, in Ann. Mag.

Nat. Hist., London, ser. 12, vii, 1954, pp. 13-15 and plate; Trans. Roy. Soe.

S. Aust., Adelaide, 76, 1953, pp. 77-79 and plate; Proce, Ent, Soe. Washington,

47, 1945, pp. 183-184. One earlier paper, in the South Australian Naturalist,

Adelaide, 20, 1938, pp. 1-6 and plate, dealing with the life-histories of some

Australian Hepialids, has not been mentioned among previous bibliographic

references.

A supposed ancestral Homoneurous insect fossil was deseribed by the author

in the Proceedings of the Royal Society of Queensland, 56, 1945, pp. 37-46, as

Eoses triassica, fvom the fossil inseet beds of Triassic Age at Mt. Crosby.

Queensland.

As already mentioned ly name in previous parts of this Revision, thanks

are due to many who have assisted in the studies by loan of material, ete. As

the material is worked type specimens are being returned, requests being made

for paratype material for the South Australian Museum collection when these

are available.

genus OXYCANUS

Australian members of this genus were discussed in Part III of the Revision;

in the present account the New Guinea species are deseribed and some additions

and corrections are made to the earlier paper.

Previously eight valid species of Oxycanus had been recorded from New

Guinea. An additional 15 are described and figured herein.

308 Recorvs or Tue $.A. MuseuM

As in the case of the Australian ones, the study of the species of Oxycanus

from New Guinea has presented no little difficulty because of the great vari-

ability of the wing markings, which in any given species way tend to run the

gamut from an almost unmarked light-coloured phase, through light and dark-

fasciate, and silver-spotted forms to several distinetly melanie ones. In the study

and confirmation of the relationships of the Australian species lony series of

speciinens, including intergrades between the forms, usually were available, The

New Cntinea species are in general relatively scantily represented in collections,

hence in making some estimates of specific distinctness, experience gained in

handling Australian material has had to be relied on to make up for the limited

available series.

After study of the major part of the extant material it seems that the only

dependable characters for specific separations are evident in the male genitalia,

but times of appearance and altitude are also useful indicators. As in the

Australian forms, most of the New Guinea species haye limited emergence periods

and their habitats also are altitudinally (hence climatieally) delimited, so that,

for example, a species emerging in -luly is in general separable from one

occurring in, say, November, and one occurring at, say, 1,500 metres is not likely

to be present also near sea level.

Unfortunately these seeming facts have tended to be overlooked in the

past and they often run counter to earlier cabinet identifications, which often

have tended to equate, say, silver-spotted forms of more than one species as one,

while giving a different name in common to groups of melanie examples of more

than one other species,

Unless otherwise specified, the camera-lucida sketches of genitalia illustrat-

ing this paper were drawn from two aspects, without removal of the parts, and

are intended to give as much information as possible regarding the hard parts

and marginal contours of the tegumen, the apices of the harpes and the shape

and general size of the Sth sternite. In these sketches the body form is

veneralised and no allowanee could be made for post-mortem changes, ete, Tn

eoncral, the form of the tegumen is constant for eaeh species; the principal

variations are in the number and relative sizes of the smaller spines along

che tegumen; in several instances such minor differences are evident as asym-

ietries in the drawings.

Since this revision was ready for press, a paper by Viette (1950) has

become available. In it is a proposal that some New Guinea members of this

eroup should be placed in a separate genus Paraowycanus.

Some of the material upon which this Revision is based already has been

TinDALE — Revision oF THE Guost Morus

309

distributed, hence a comprehensive cheek is not possible, but, on the available

material, it would seem probable that at most Paraoxycanus is a valid subgenerie

division which can be used for O. novaeguineensis and its allies.

However, the

advisability of using strietly eenitalia characters even for subgeneric separation

is also one on which there may be legitimate

doubts.

The separation of

4 Papuan sub-vegion is a relatively recent episode of

zooloxical history—hence it is not often possible to establish clear-cut generic

separations in torms from this area, and it will be noticed that, in the body of

this paper, there are

several instances where direct comparisons are

made even

between New Guinea species and the more archaic forms preserved in, for

example, South-Western Australia.

the

eut

1H,

The case of Paraorycanus way be parallel with that encountered in the

venus Oncopera, where an essentially northern series of species were placed in

sub-genus Paroncopera, but the separation cannot be defined by clear-

characters.

KEY TO THE NEW GUINEA SPECIES OF OXYCANUS

(hased principally on male genitalia)

Male genitalia with teguminal margin not armed with spines ....

Male genitalia with teguminal margin armed with spines

Margin with main armature of serlate spines

Margin with maiu armature not of seriate spines

Spines on nearly full leneth of tegumen

Spines only on posterior half of teguimen

Posterior margin of Sth sternite convex

Posterior margin of &th sternite not convex

Teguminal contour rather even

Teeuminal contour markedly uneven...

Apex of forewings subfaleate, size large ......

Apex of forewings rounded, size small _.....

Posterior margin of &th sternite concave

Posterior margin of 8th sternite not concave

Serrations of tegumen irregular in size and spacing

Serrations of tezumen regular in size and spacing

Harpe with apex not dilated

Harpe with apex dilated

Harpe bent over at apex

Harpe not bent over at apex en

Teeumen with large process, or spine, in anterior third

Tevuinen with laree process, or spine, at or near middle

Posterior half of teguimen with seriate spines —....

Posterior half of tegumen with irreeularly spined process

Anterior process of tegumen with more than one tip

Anterior process of tegumen with a single tip

fuliginosa

_ postflavida

tamsr

ois

fe]

a ” dives

mm, ple

subochraceu

hecabe

hecabe {. lethe

serratus

eu Ut:

lhasus

sal monacesn

310 Recorps oF THE S.A. MusEuM

14. Anterior process of tegumen not strongly bent over at tip —..... nigripuncta

Anterior process of tegumen strongly hent over at tip sais, ae 15

15, Anterior process of teoumen pointed vertically downwards wu thoe

Anterior process of tegumen pointed obliquely forwards _..... albostrigata

16, Anterior half of tezumen with seriafe spines 0.00 uuu. saat atrox

Anterior half of tegumen not armed with seriate spines atm asst 17

17. Median process of tegumen only a simple pointed spine... C08

Median process not a simple pointed spine — ... Leung Sie geet 18

18, Median process other than a plate-like expansion 000 eee 19

Median process a plate-like expansion _.... wre tle ie be tues 20

19, Median process a broad digitiform lobe... ssuat wy meily perplexus

Median process a slender digitiform lobe 9 esau meekt

20. Median process anteriorly directed (0a en mayri

Median process posteriorly directed (0.0 en rr} |

21, Harpes slender and inflated at tip a P... Br uu. discipennis

Oxycanus FULIGINOSA (Rothschild)

Plate xxix, fig. 6 and text fig. 1

Porina fuliginosa Rothschild 1916, Lepidoptera of Brit. Ornithol. Union Exped.

to New Guinea, 2, No. 15, p. 145.

Male. Antennae reddish-ochreous, slender, short, moderately pectinate with

whorls of hairs. Head and thorax dari sooty brown, abdomen grayish-brown.

Forewings rather uniformly dark sooty brown, roughly sealed, with traces of

long yellowish hair-like seales alone costa; there is a transverse series of

ochreous-fuseous marginal spots, one between each vein from # costa running

parallel to termen and reaching inner margin just beyond one-half (in the

holotype male these ave slightly more evident with traces of two additional ones

on discocellulars), Hindwing gray with the base only of the wing clothed in

yellow-tinged hairs; hairs near inner margin darker than elsewhere. Forewing

length 19 mm., expanse 42 mm.

Loc, New Guinea: Carstensz Peak, Utakwa River, 5,000-10,000 feet, Febru-

ary to Mareh, 1913, A. F. R. Wollaston. Type, probably a male, in British

Museum (ex Tring), also a paratype male. The type was deseribed as a

female but appears to be (without eritical examination of the genitalia) a

male,

The example available for detailed study is the rather worn paratype

male, but a photograph of the type (pl. xxix fig. 6) is available. The figure

shows the rather characteristically rounded wings, with reduced vannal area of

hindwings, a rather obscure series of markings across the forewings, and the

hairy clothing.

TrnDALE — ReEvIsION OF THE GHost Morus 811

<a ee

-—- =

Fig. 1. Oxycanus fuliyinosa (Rothsebild), Carstensz Peak, male genitalia of paratype,

oblique lateral and ventral views.

The genitalia (text fig. 1) have the tezumen entirely unarmed, presenting

an even convex outline, when seen in lateral view.

This species is not close to any other known one, which is perhaps to be

expected from its presence at such a relatively high altitude on a tropical

mountain. The form of the genitalia may hint at relationship with the rather

isolated O. perditus from South Western Australia, which likewise shows 4

tendency to reduction of the vannal area of hindwing. It is of interest to

speculate that these two peripheral species may represent relict forms of a

very early differentiation of the Oxrycanus stock,

OXYCANUS RILEYI sp. nov.

Plate xxvi, fig. 1 and text fig. 2

Male. Head with antennal segments ochreous, segments transversely

keeled, with whorls of fine hairs; head and thorax grayish-brown, abdomen pale

eray. Forewings dark brown with tinges of ochreous brown in anterior part

of disc; a broad creamy-white flash from base to termen, crossed by about eight

transverse rows of silvery-white spots, each spot ringed with dark brown, cilia

on termen eream, on inner margin grayish-brown. Hindwings gray with a

tinge of ochreous-yellow towards termen. Forewings helow gray with traces

of the cream flash and the white.spots. Hindwings below tinged ochreous yellow,

the colour stronger along costa. Wing length 30 mm., expanse 65 mm.

Loc. New Guinea: Nomnagihé, 25 miles south of Wangaar, 2,000 feet

January to February, 1921, collected by C., F. and J. Pratt. Type in British

Museum (Joicey Coll., 1929-122).

312 Recorps oF THE S.A. MusEuM

Only a single example has been examined of this most distinctive species.

It. seems rather out of place among the New Guinea species and to fall more

with O. poeticus of South Western Australia and with O. stellans of Victoria.

This relationship may he real, though remote. Tlowever, the form of the tezumen

is different, so that in a classification based on form of genitalia alone it would

fall into a quite separate group, not very elose to any other.

Fig. 2. Oxycanus rileyi Tindale, Nomnagihé, 25 miles south of Wangaar, male genitalia,

ventral and oblique lateral views.

The male genitalia (fig. 2), so far as they may be seen in the type without

dissection, have the eighth sternite with posterior margin evenly coneave; there

is a long and slender harpe, and the tegumen, viewed from the side, shows

anteriorly a pair of forwardly directed spines; the anterior half of the margin

is unarmed and the posterior half well armed with about ten seriate spines.

I have pleasure in associating with this species the name of Mr, N. D, Riley,

to whom I am much indebted for opportunities to study material from the

British Museum.

OXYCANUS PosTFLAVIDA (Rothschild)

Plate xxix, fie. 5 and text fig. 3

Porina postflavida Rothschild, 1915, Lepidoplera of British Ornith. Union

Hxped. to New Guinea, p. 145.

“Male. Antennae brown; head and thorax blackish-choeolate; abdomen

buff, Forewing blackish-chocolate with four transverse rows of dull orange

TrpaLe — Revision oF THE GHost Morus 313

fulvous rings. Hindwine semihyaline buff, nervures and mareins broadly

” Forewing length 25 mm., expanse 55 mm.

Loc. New Guinea: Carstensz Peak, 5,000-10,000 feet, February to March,

1918, A, F. R. Wollaston. Type, unique, in British Museum (ex Tring).

The antennae in this species are relatively long, nearly one-fourth the

length of forewing and each segment is sttrrounded by a complete ring of hairs;

the palpi are very short and concealed in the dense hairy clothing of face.

The genitalia, so far as they eould be observed in the type, are shown in

free-hand sketches (fig. 3). The posterior margin of the 8th sternite is convex

and the tegumen, viewed from the side, is seen to be arched and well armed, with

orange,

Fig. 8. Oxycanus postflavida (Rothschild), Carstensz Peak; freehand sketches of male

genitalia of type; left, ventral view; right, silhouette of right tegumen as viewed from right

side,

seven large spines, followed by two small ones. In the general form of the

genitalia this species is nearest to O. tamsi from Mt. Goliath, this also is a

species from a moderately high altitude, emerging at about the same time of

the year. However, the shape and markings of the wings, as well as details

of the genitalia are quite different, it being noted that the spines of O. postflavida

are more acutely pointed and rather more evenly dispersed along the margin

of the tezumen, the right and left sides of which appear more widely separated.

OXYCANUS TAMSI sp. noy.

Plate xxvii, fig. 1-3 and text fig. 4

Male. Antennae dark ochreous, short, stout, tapered. Head and thorax

pale brown, abdomen ochreous, slightly darker at apex. Forewing bright

ochreous with a dusting of fine black and brown scales; costa, a band from near

costa at } to inner margin at #, and blotches surrounding small black spots near

314 Recorps or THE $.A. MusEuM

termen grayish-brown, and showing a faint violaceous bloom; at the costa itself

the transverse band is grayish-white; there is a black blotch in the discoidal

area and a series of black margined silvery-white discoidal spots, also some

additional subterminal marks just beyond the grayish transverse band. Hind-

wings bright ochreous, the dense hair near base appears slightly darker, Wings

beneath rather uniformly ochreous, without markines. Forewing length 38 mm.,

expanse 83 mm.

Loc. New Guinea: Mt. Goliath, 5,000-7,000 feet, February, 1911 (A, 8.

Meek); type, a male in British Museum (ex Tring); also fourteen paratypes

taken in January and February.

Like many of its congeners this species is variable in colour and markings.

The type example (plate xxvii, fig. 1) is representative of a bright ochreous,

silver-spotted phase; a further example (plate xxvii, fig. 3), also taken in

Fig. 4. Ozycanus tamsi Tindale, Mt. Goliath, January, genitalia of paratype male,

oblique lateral and ventral views,

February, represents a darker form with the silvery-white spots remaining only

as dark marks and the slightly violaceous grayish-brown bands somewhat ex-

tended. A third example (plate xxvii, fig. 2), taken in January, is an inter-

mediate form. In the almost pointed forewings this species stands a little apart.

from the other New Guinea species, and at: first sight it bears a superficial resem-

blanee to some examples of the genus Phassodes, from Fiji. Of Australian

species it might bear some relationship to O. beltistus and its allies, which share

a somewhat similar type of genital armature, but the rather peculiarly shaped

TINDALE — REvIsION OF THE GHost Morus 315

hindwings, which ate characteristic of several other New Guinea species, may

sugvest that the relationship with Australian forms is no closer than with

several other New Guinea species.

The male genitalia have the 8th sternite with hind margin strongly convex;

the harpes are relatively long and slender; the tegumen, viewed obliquely, is

strongly and bluntly serrated, with the silhouette not markedly irregular save

for the slight elevation of the spines immediately before the middle, followed

by a series of slightly depressed ones (fig. 4).

The name chosen for this interesting species is that of Mr. W. H. T. Tams,

to whom I am indebted for much hidden help in checking details on specimens

in the British Museum,

OXYCANUS XOIS 8p, Noy.

Plate xxix, fig. 1-2 and text fig. 5

Male. Antennae dark ochreous, short, relatively thick-set; head and thorax

dull brown, abdomen ochreous fawn, apex a little more ochreous. Forewings

brown with ochreous-brown patches surrounding black spots some of which show

traces of an ochreous centre; a more or less connected series of black marks from

Fig. 5-6, Fig. 5 (left). Orycanus cois Tindale, Dohunsehik, Arfak Mts., male genitalia,

oblique view. Fig. 6 (right). Oxyennus dives Tindaie, Mt. Kunupi, male genitalia, oblique

lateral and ventral views.

near costa at two-thirds obliquely to disc, thenee to inner margin at one-half.

Hindwings ochreous fawn, the down at base of wing appears lighter, termeu

narrowly, and veins ochreous. Wings below ochreous fawn with the markings

above repeated as traces, Forewing length 23 mm., expanse 50 mm.

316 Recorps or THe 5.A. Museum

Loc. New Guinea: Dohunsehik, Arfak Mountains, 1,400 metres, June, 1928,

Dr. Kh. Mayr; type, a male in British Museum (ex Trine); a second specimen is

from Angi Lakes, Arfak, 1,800 metres, Jame, 1928, Dx, E. Mayr.

This is one of the smaller species of New Guinea Oaycanus; it is not very

close to any other.

The genitalia of the male present rounded posterior margin to the 8th

sternite, a strongly spined tesumen, elevated with a pair of spines in the anterior

third and a median excavated area (fig, 5).

In the well-rounded shape of the wings this species falls close to O. fule-

ginosa, but the apex of the forewings is not as rounded and the armature of

the tezumen places it far closer to O. tamsi from Mt. Goliath; from that species

it differs markedly in the abundantly spotted forewings, as well as in details

of the genitalia.

OXYCANUS DIVES 8p. nov.

Plate xxviii, fig, 1-4 and text fig, 6

Male. Antennae ochreous, well developed; head and eyes large, dark brown,

thorax and abdomen somewhat paler, base of abdomen slightly ochreous. Fore-

wings with costa and inner margin pale erayish-brown, rest of wing generally

choeolate-brown with ochreous scales near costa towards apex, near inner angle,

and partly margining otherwise black outlined silvery-white spots in discal area.

Hindwings dull ochreous, brighter towards tertmien. Wine below obscurely

ochreous. Forewing length 387 mm., expanse 81 mm.

Loc, New Guinea: Mt. Kunupi, Menoo Valley, Weyland Mts., 6,000 feet,

November to December, 1920 (C., F. and J. Pratt), type in British Museum;

also thirty paratypes with same details and one marked, December, 1920, to

January, 1921,

This species presents a wide range of variation. Of the colour phases a

dark form has been deseribed and figured as typical (plate xxviii, fig. 1). Among

notable variants there is an ochreous-brown-spotted form (plate xxviii, fig. 2)

and a dark form with a median longitudinal white flash on forewing (plate xxviii,

fix. 8). In addition there is an ochreous form with markings largely suppressed

except for a diffuse brown transverse bar from costa at #ths to inner margin

at $rds, and a few dark brown spots (plate xxviii, fiz. 4). Intermediates oceur

between these forms.

The genitalia show a markedly serrated tegumen, a little produced towards

the anterior end (fig. 6). As usual in species with a serrated tezumen there

are slight variations in the development of individual spines; the degree of

TinDALeE — Revision or THE Guost Morus 317

asymmetry evident in the figured example is of the usual order. The genitalia

sug¢est a relationship between this species, O. serratus, from Wondiwoi, and

O. subochracea, but the resemblances do not extend to the wing-form, patterns,

or size, which are very different,

Tf the same brief emereence limits hold for Papuan species as for Australian

ones, this shonld he mainly a December species, The Messrs. Pratt took 4 lone

series, all males, of which ten examples have been examined in detail at Adelaide

—the others during a visit to the British Museum.

OXYCANUS SUBOCHRACEA (Joicey and Talbot)

Plate xxvi, fig. 2-3 and text fig, 7

Porina subochracea Joicey and Talbot, 1917, Ann, Mag. Nat. Hist. (8), 20,

p. 85, plate 2, fig, 12.

Porina argentipuncta Joicey and Talbot, 1917, lc. p. 85, plate 2, fig, 13.

Paraoxycanus subochrea Vietta, 1950, Zool. Med., Leiden, 31, p. 71, fig, 6.

Male. Antennae short, tapering, pale ochreous, head and thorax brownish-

ochreous, abdomen paler, Forewing brownish-ochreous with some gray along

costa; a series of silvery-while spots, narrowly margined with dark brown, larger

in discal area, where the Jargest is partly surrounded by an ochreous-brown

suffusion darker along veins and towards inner margin at one-half; a wide

Fig, 7. Oxycanus subochracea (Joicey and Talbot), Wandammen Mts., November, maic

genitalia, ventral and oblique lateral views.

suffused grayish-white band from costa at $ths to inner margin at one-half,

within it a line of small spots; between band and termen a series of spots, some

large; a subterminal series of small spots surrounded by whitish-eray, one

between each pair of veins. Hindwinys subhyaline, pinkish-ochreous without

markings. Forewing length 27 mm., expanse 60 mm.

318 Recorps oF THE S.A, Museum

Loc. New Guinea: Wandammen Mountains, 3,000-4,000 feet, November;

type, a male, also type of argentipuncta, same details, and a series of paratypes

from the type locality in British Museum; two males (ex Tring) in South

Australian Museum.

The two named forms associated here are undoubtedly conspecific. The

above description is based on an example which is almost identical with the

type of O. argentipuncta. The genitalia have the outline of the tegumen, as

viewed obliquely, rather evenly arcuate with only 6 to 7 small seriate spines

which, in ventral view, appear to be irregularly placed (fig. 7). The differ-

ences in wing markings, between the two named forms, thouzh considerable,

follow the usual trend of variation; the typical one has a longitudinal white

flash on forewing; the argentipuncta form has the flash absent, the spots are

enlarged and these have conspicuous silvery-white centres. Plate xxvi, fig. 3,

shows a third form in whieh the forewings are paler, the spots are black, and

each is surrounded by an area of ochreous suffusion. In still other examples

most of the markings are suppressed in favour of a uniform ochreous suffusion

with scatterings of individually darker scales.

OXYCANUS HECABE sp. nov.

Plate xxviii, fie. 5 and text fie. 8

Male, Antennae ochreous, relatively long, pectinations 1. Head and thorax

pale brown, abdomen palest salmon, becoming grayish-fawn towards apex. Fore-

wings brown with bright ochreous suffusions towards base and paler ochreous

along termen from near apex to beyond middle; several silvery-white marks

hordered with brownish-black; traces of a slightly paler brown band from costa

at two-thirds to inner margin at two-thirds partly margined by a series of

ochreous patches, some embracing small spots; costa grayish-brown; a series of

white-centred subterminal spots. Hindwings ochreous, becoming salmon-tinged

towards base. Costa of forewings below narrowly brownish-hblack, rest of

wings ochreous. Wing length 32 mm., expanse 70 mm.

Loc. New Guinea: Hunsteinspitze, 1,850 metres. Kaiserin Augusta Fl,

Expedition, February to March, 1913, 8. G. Biirgers (Sepik River). Type, a

male, No, 4,509 in Berlin Museum; a paratype, same details, in South Australian

Museum.

OXYCANUS HECABE form lethe noy.

Plate xxviii, fig. 6 and text fie. 9

Male. Antennae ochreous, appearing slightly shorter than in typical hecabe.

Head and thorax ochreous gray, abdomen pale salmon, apical half becoming

TINDALE — REVISION OF THE GHost Morus 819

grayish-fawn. Forewings grayish-ochreous with two moderate black spots and

four subhyaline gray bands across wing; each band encloses a series of small

black spots; the band commencing at 5/6th costa, runs only to near termen at

about My vein; it is ochreous-tinged near costa; the fourth band is obscure, sub-

terminal, and encloses a series of subterminal black spots each ringed with gray;

cilia dark gray. Hindwings ochreous with a fuscous suffusion near posterior

angle. Wings below ochreous, without markings; costal margin scarcely darker

than rest of wing. Forewing length 29 mm., expanse 64 mm.

Loc. New Guinea: Hunsteinspitze, 1,350 metres, August, 1912, S. G.

Biirgers. Type, a male, in Berlin Museum, a paratype male, same details, but

labelled February-March, 1913, in South Australian Museum.

Fig. 8-9. Fig. 8 (left). Oxucanus hecabe Tindale, Hunsteinspitze, February to Maren,

male genitalia, oblique lateral view. Fig. 9 (right). O. hecabe form lethe Tindale, Hunstein-

spitze, August, eighth sternite and male genitalia, oblique lateral view.

The four specimens of O. hecabe available for study were taken at two

different periods of the year, nearly six months apart. They belong to two very

different colour forms which differ also in size and might almost be considered

to be separate species. However, these colour changes cut across some slight

structural differences in the genitalia, as may be seen from the following table:

hecabe hecabe f. lethe f. lethe

type paratype type paratype

Colour brown brown ochreous gray ochreous gray

Wing length 32 mm. 28 mm. 29 mm. 29 mm.

Tegumen irregularly irregularly regularly irregularly

serrated serrated serrated serrated

Emergence period Feb.-March Feb.-March August Feb.-March

Bearing in mind the inherent variabilities of colour pattern, repeated in

so many species of Oxycanus, it might seem that there are two races or forms

320 Recorps or THE S.A. Museum

of O. hecabe, genetically isolated since they emerge at different times of the

vear, These, perhaps, are descended from a common stock which already

possessed two colour phases. Though now structurally differentiated and possess-

ing different-seeming genitalia, the defhe colour phase still tends to appear in

each strain, When further material is collected it will be of mterest to learn

whether a hecabe-like form appears also in the August appearing strain,

According to another possible explanation, 0. hecabe and Q. lethe could be

two separate species of whieh one. O. hecabe, is variable and presents two

separate forms, one of which is less readily differentiated from O, lelhe on a

basis of wing patterns, Both the above are attempted explanations of the

presence of these two forms; they furnish another of the many significant

problems associated with the study of these interesting species.

O, hecabe is probably closest to O. subochracea and in the key these species

fall near to each other. One of the forms of O. subochracea, figured at plate xxvi,

fig. 3, shows many points of resemblance to the form /ethe of this species. How-

ever, the two species are separable on several characters of which one of the

more evident ig wing shape: the forewings of O. subochracea are relatively

broader and the apex of hindwings somewhat less acute. The harpes also are

of quite different shape.

The genitalia of O. hecabe (tig. 8) have the posterior nargin of the eighth

sternite transverse and slightly notched; the tegumen is armed with seriate

spines which are somewhat irregularly disposed and irregular in size. In the

form lethe (fig. 9) the seriate spines of tegumen are rather more even in size

and arrangement.

OXYCANUS SERRATUS Sp. NOY,

Plate xxvi, fig. 6 and text fig. 10

Male. Antennae short, slender, tapering, pale ochreous; head pale brown,

thorax paler, abdomen pale fewn with a pinkish tinge on basal half. Forewings

pale brown, costa slightly more grayish-brown; two series of silyery-white spots

each margined with brown: one a discal series of scattered spots, several of them

partly embracing an irregular discal black pateh; the other a transverse series

running in stepped fashion in a line from near apex to near posterior angle;

on the inner side of this line is a pale eray transverse band in which there are

small brown spots; a subterminal series of small spots also are surrounded by

pale gravish-white. Tindwings opaque yellowish-oehreous with the cilia rather

evenly dark gray; wings below yellowish-ochreous. Forewimg length 28 mm.,

expanse 60 mm.

TINDALE — Revision OF THE GHost MorTHs 321

Loc, New Guinea: Wondiwoi, Wandammen Mountains, 1,400 metres, July,

1928, Dr. BE. Mayr. Type, a ale, in British Museum (ex Tring). There is a

paratype example.

This form is so similar in markines to some examples of O. swbhochracea,

taken in the same mountains, that it is diftienlt to separate it until the genitalia

are examined. There is between a three and a five months difference in emer-

gence date. The Wondiwoi examples of Q. serratus were taken in July at an

elevation of just over 4,500 feet, whereas O. subochracea flies in November at

3,000-4,000 feet.

The type of O. serratus (plate xxvi, fie. 6) compares well with the 0. argent?

puncta form of O. subochracea, and it was thought at first that the name argent7-

puncta might be used for it. However, the type of argenttpuncta was taken

in November and unquestionably is an O, subochracea form.

Fig. 10. Qxycanus serratus Tindale, Wondiwoi, July, wale genitalia, ventral and oblique

lateral views.

The second example of O. serrafus is an ochreous variant in which the

brown ot the thorax and wings and the pale transverse band of forewing are

replaced by a bright ochreous colour; the silvery-white spots remain but tend to

be slightly smaller, with the dusky tiareins sometimes encroaching on the white

centres. This example was formerly identified as an example of O. argentipuncta,

which it rather closely resembles, bui like the type example, its genitalia are

of Q. serratus pattern. The essential difference lies in the contrast between

the rather reeularly serrated marein of the tegumen (fie. 10); as viewed from

below, and the very irregularly serrated margin found in O. subochracea. The

former has 9-10, the latter 6-7 spines. Another not so evident difference exists

in the shape of the forewings, which are relatively narrow in O, serratus and

322 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

shorter and broader in O. subochracea. Despite the similarities it seems proper

to regard them as separate species. If the two belong together then the genitalia

must be very variable and the emergence period in this species must be an

extended one, unlike other members of this puzzling genus.

OXYCANUS THASUS sp. nov.

Plate xxvi, fig. 5 and text fig. 11

Male. Antennae ochreous, short; head and thorax grayish-fuscous, abdo-

men pale ochreous-fuscous, duskier towards apex. Forewings with costa

erayish-fuscous, elsewhere paler, with tinges of ochreous-fuscous; basal half

of wing suffused whitish-ochreous with traces of a narrow median longi-

tudinal light streak; several rows of small feebly white-centred fuscous dots

across wing including a rather regularly spaced subterminal series. Hindwings

pale ochreous-fuscous with terminal fourth from below apex to inner margin

noticeably fuscous. Wings below pale ochreous. Forewing length 22 mm.,

expanse 50 mm.

Fig. 11. Owycanus thasus Tindale, Fak Fak, male genitalia, oblique lateral and ventral

views, of type.

Loc. New Guinea: Fak Fak, 1,700 feet, December, 1906 (Pratt). Type, a

male, 1911-117 in British Museum, unique.

The sub-rectangular hindwings are shared with several other Papuan forms

such as O. meekt, from Biagi, and O. perplexus, from Ninay Valley. This species

seems close in wing pattern to the non-fasciate form of O. mayrt but in their

genitalia these species bear little resemblance to each other.

TINnDALE — Revision oF THe GHosr Morus 323

The male genitalia (fig. 11) have the eighth sternite with a slightly excavate

posterior Hurgin; the harpes are concealed and anteriorly the teeumen is strongly

chitinised; there is a large stvap-like anterior projection behind whieh the tegu-

nen is rather evenly excavate to the middle where it. is avain produeed, showing

rom one angle a spime-like process, and from below a rather broad slightly

dentate eninenece.

In the only specimen parts of the genitalia are concealed by the eighth

sternite, but the two eanera-licida sketelies as shown, modified by free-hand

sketching tO Suggest the approximate form of the hidden parts, should assist

identification.

OXYCANTS SALMONACKEA (Rothsehild and Jordan)

Plate xxvi, fig. 7, plate xxix, fig. T and text fig. 12

Porina salnionaced Rothschild and Jordan, 1905, Novit. Zaol., 12, p. 478.

Male. Antennae pale buff, very short, stout and tapering rather abruptly

lo tip. lead and palpi uummy-brown, thorax shghtly paler, abdomen loose-

haired, buff with a salmon tinge. Forewings ochreous-buff with costa slightly

darker. Four black-edged spots in diseoidal region, usually conjoined in pairs;

there are traces of other spots with light centres; terminal third of wing paler,

with a subterminal darker band embracing vague traces of spots from ensta

hear apex to immer Margin. Ulindwing pinkish-buff beeoming slightly more rose-

coloured near base. Leneth of forewing 25 mim, éxpanse 56 mum.

Loc. Papua: Angabunga River, affluent of St. Joseph River, (1,000 feet

upwards, November, 1904, to February, 1905, A. S, Meek. Type, a male, in

British Museum (ex Tring), and a series of paratypes; one example with same

details in South Australian Museum (from Tring),

The lurge tift of hairs at base of the antenna is notable. This species has

a generally rough-haired look shared with QO. fuliginosu, whieh alsu is a fori

from relatively high altitudes. Tlowever, the two species are entirely different

in colour and markinus, Plate xxix, fiv. 7, shows the ivpe in (he British Museum

(ex Tring) and plate xxvi, fie. 7, shows the South Australian Museum specimen.

The genitalia (fig. 12) which have an anterior eminence on the tegument,

followed by a notch and several spines, may suggest a relationship with O. thoe

of the Wandarmumen coast. However, the species emerge at different times of the

year, one not far from sea level and the other at 6,000 ft. elevation, and (howe)

superficially similar in markings, they differ in size, wing-shape, and details

of the genitalia. In O. sa/monacea the anterior spine of the tegumen, as viewed

from below, is outwardly curled as a short flat strap-like spine with wp to three

324 Recorps oF THE S.A. MusEUM

Fig. 12. Ozycanus salmonacea (Rothsehild and Jordan), Angabunga River, male gen

talia, yontral and oblique lateral views.

slight projections on it, whereas in O. thoe the spine tends to be a high, rather

more rounded eminence, projecting outwards, usually as a single rounded point.

The eighth sternite is different in the two species, having a notched posterior

margin in O. salmonacea and au only slightly arched one in QO, thoe.

There is a specimen in the British Museum labelled Mafalu (?=Mafulu),

6,000 feet, August, 1903 (A. E. Pratt), which seems close to this species. It was

not possible to examine the genitalia. It will be noted that the season of emer-

sence is entirely different (August instead of Noyember-February), hence the

possibility that it will prove, on further study, to be a separate species,

OXYCANUS NIGRIPUNCTA (Joicey and Talbot)

Text fiz, 18

Porina nigripuncta Joicey and Talbot, 1917, Ann, Mag. Nat. Hist. (8), 20,

p. 83, plate 2, fig. 10.

Porina nigricosta Joicey and Talbot, 1917, lc, p. $4, plate 2, fig. 11.

Male. Antennae pale ochreous; palpi, head and thorax above brownish-

ochreous, thorax below and abdomen pale ochreous. Forewings ochreous gray

numerous transverse brownish-black spots (sometimes with pale centres) between

the veins, ones at middle and end of cell and near junction of My and Cura

larger than the others; traces of a line of brown suffusion from costa at

TINDALE — REVISION OF THE GHost Motus 325

three-fifths to inner margin at one-half; a similar faint suffusion from four-fifths

costa to near inner angle. Hindwines ochreous; an indistinet series of sub-

terminal spots between the veins. Wing length 36 mm., expanse 78 mm.

Loc. New Guinea: Wandammen Mountains, 3,000-4,000 feet, in November.

Type, a male, also type of O. nigricosta, same details, in British Museum.

There scermus to be little doubt that O. nigripuncta and O. nigricosta are

merely colour forms of the one species.

O. mgricosta has the forewings with costa darker, the dark spots larger, and

the spots, linked to form faint transverse streaks at three-fifths and four-fifths,

are broadened into dark bands extending nearly to hind margin. Both forms

are figured in colour by Joicey and Talbot. The structure of the genitalia, so

Fig. 13. Oxycanus nigripuncta (Joicey and Talbot), upper, silhouette of tegumen of

nigricosta, type; lower, the same of nigripuncta, type (anterior extremity at left).

far as they can be seen in the types are the same, and the ranges of variation

in other characters are only such as are commonly found within specific limits

in other species of the genus.

The main outlines of the tegumen were sketched, free-hand, during an

examination of the types in the British Museum (fig. 13). The upper figure

is that of the type of O. nigricosta, the lower that of O. nigripuncta, The species

falls into a suite in which O. salmonacea from Angabunga River at 6,000 feet,

0. thoe, from Wassior at sea level, in July, and O. meekt, from Biagi at 5,000 feet,

taken about March, are kindred forms. In O. meeki the main process of the

tegumen is placed in a medial position much behind that found in the present

form,

326 Recorps oF THE S.A. Museum

OXYCANUS THOE sp. nov.

Plate xxvi, fig. 4, plate xxx, fig. 3 and text fig. 14,

Male. Antennae ochreous, short, pectinations very short, palpi brownish-

ochreous, head and thorax ochreous, abdomen pale ochreous. Forewings sub-

faleate, brownish-ochreous with a broad somewhat more grayish-brown band

across forewing from costa at threequarters to near inner margin; a number of

white-centred brown spots between the veins; two large silvery-white centred

spots in dise and some smaller ones; traces of a dark brown streak from near

base of wine to termen before one-half? Tindwings pale ochreous, tinged with

pink in basal half, cilia nearly concolorous with rest of wing. Length of fore-

wing 33 mm., expanse 72 mm,

Fig. 14. Oxyeanus thoe Tindale, Wassior, July, male genitalia, ventral and oblique

lateral views.

Loc. New Guinea: Wassior, Wandammen coast, July, 1928, Dr. E. Mayr.

Type, a male, in British Museum: there is a paratype with same details.

This is a relatively large species with rather broad forewings (plate xxvi,

fig. 4), having a tendency to truncated hindwings, as seen also in the much

smaller O. salmonacea from the Angabunea River, The genitalia of these two

species fall into the same group, the arming of the tegumen being similar,

except for details. The posterior margin of the Sth sternite is almost transverse

TINDALE — Revision ov rae GHosr Morns 827

in this species, whereas it has a wide median notch in 0. salmonacea, The

tegumen (fig. 14) has an outwardly bent, blunted spine on the anterior third,

sliehtly variable, as may be seen fron the two drawings, one from the type

and the other from the paratype. In this speeies jhe harpes are more slender

than in O. salmonaced,

The second example (plate xxx, fig. 3) has the wine tips injured. It differs

from the type in haying a black streak from base of forewing to termen just

above 1/2. This form has a close superficial resemblance to QO. salmonacea.

OXxYCANUS ALBOSTRIGATA ( Rothsehild)

Plate xxix, fig. 3, plate xxx, fig, 7-8 and text fio, 15

Phassodes albostrigata Rothschild, 1913, Novit, Zool., 20, p, 278,

Male. Antennae ochreous, short, slender, peetinations 1. Head and thorax

gravish-fuscous. abdomen gray. Forewing with costa narrowly vray, rest of

wing ochreous fuscous, paler towards apex of wings with darker fuscous suffu-

sions; bwo series of irregularly connected silvery-white spots margined with

fuseous in discoidal area; a single ochreous-centved spot near inner margin at

one-half and other smaller ones forming a series along costa and scattered across

wing, Hindwings with anterior half pale ochreous-fuscous, posterior halt darker;

a series of small vaenely pale-centred gray spots, one between each vein along

termen. Forewing leneth 30 mm., expanse 65 mm,

Female. Antennae ochreous, very short, slender and simple; head and

thorax pale grayish-fuscous, abdomen pale fawn. Forewings pale ochreous-

fuscous, with paler ochreous markings in patehes between the veins; two groups

of silvery-white diseoidal markings as in male; other markings present are

margined with ochreous; hindwings pale ochreous-fawn, without subterminal

spots. Forewing length 38 mm., expanse $1 mm.

Loc. New Guinea: Bolanherg, IIuon Gulf, 3,600 metres (Keysser). Type,

a female, in British Museum (ex Tring); Rawlinson Mountains (Keysser), allo-

type, male, deseribed herein; an additional series of five females has been

examined,

Tlitherto known only from the type, a feruale in the British Musenm (ex

Tring). This was taken on Bolaubers, inland from the Huon Gulf, at 3,600

metres, Uhis example, expanding 72 mim., is somewhat similar in markings and

colour to some males of O, mayri trom Mt. Siwi, but is unlikely to he conspecific.

Plate xxix, fig. J, depicts the type. Structurally this species is notable for the

relatively long 3rd segment of the palpi which are earried directed downwards

and forwards.

328 REcorDs OF THE S.A, MusEUM

The male is now described from takings in the same area; the second female

example, also figured, was taken along with this male on the Rawlinson Mountains

of which Bolauberg is a part. The wing markings of the two sexes are similar

although the small terminal gray spots on the hindwing are absent from the

female; the suffusions on forewings of the female are ochreous rather than

erayish-brown, and there is less infuscation in the discoidal area. Two of

five females examined are larger and have the forewings rather gray in colour.

As indicating our relative paucity of material in this genus from New

Guinea, this is the only New Guinea species of Oxycanus of which the female is

yet known.

The male genitalia have the posterior margin of the eighth sternite slightly

concave. The tegumen, in oblique lateral view, shows a slightly anteriorly

directed, outwardly rolled projection, rather flat at summit, placed well before

middle; also a slightly elevated median and posterior portion armed with two

larger and several smaller spines. Fig, 15 shows as much of the genitalia of

the allotype male as may be sketched without dissection; for convenience of

presentation a view from the left side has been mirror-imaged to make it more

directly comparable with drawings of other species, shown as viewed from the

right.

The genitalia alone might suggest that this species falls near to O. nigri-

puncta and to O. thoe from Wassior; from both of these it is distinct in the

form and markings of the wings. In the presence of small terminal spots on

the hindwings there are suggestions of affinities with O. eos from the Cyclops

Mountains, and O. thasus from Fak Fak; in the latter species these spots are

only faintly represented.

OXYCANUS ATROX sp. NOV.

Plate xxx, fig. 5-6 and text fig. 16

Male. Antennae ochreous, short, pectinations 1, delicate. Head and thorax

ochreous-brown, abdomen pale fawn, more ochreous at tip and hairs pink-tinged

at base. Forewings rich ochreous-brown, slightly darker towards termen with

series of small brown markings, generally with ochreous centres and surrounded

by ochreous suffusions. Hindwings ochreous-fawn, with hairs at base tinged

pink; cilia fuscous. Wings below ochreous-fawn, cilia fuscous. Forewing length

33 mm., expanse 72 mm.

Loc. New Guinea: Buntibasa district, Kratke Mountains, 4,000-5,000 feet,

August, 1932, F, Shaw Mayer. Type, a male, also two paratypes, taken July

TINDALE — REVISION OF THE GHost Morus 329

and August, 1932, in British Museum (ex Tring) ; another paratype male, same

details, was taken June, 1982.

The examples examined were taken during the three months June, July arid

August: the June example is superficially rather distinet; however, the genitalia

are very close, differing only in minor details of the anterior spines of tegumen,

which are slightly less conspicuous. An Oxycanus similar in appearance, taken

be Bir

\ Pa

Fig, 15-17, Fig, 15 (left). Oxycanus albostrigata (Rothschild), Rawlinson Range, allo-

type male, genitalia, oblique lateral view. Fig. 16 (middle). Oxycanux atror Tindale, Bunti-

basa, August, male genitalia, oblique lateral view. Fig. 17 (right). Oxyeanus cos Tindale,

Cyclops Mts, male genitalia, oblique lateral view.

in February, 1933, at the same place, may be a distinct species, but it has not

yet been studied. Tt is in the British Museum (ex Tring). Evidently, as in

other members of this genus, the species is variable in colour and markings;

the type example represents an ochreous form with dark markings reduced and

tending to be ochreous-centred, whereas one paratype (plate xxx, fig. 6) tends

a little towards a florid form with more conspicuous dark markings and with

white suffusions instead of ochreous ones. In the examples seen the strongly

rounded hindwings are the same as is also the dark ciliation, which gives a

rather clear-cut marein to the hindwing outlines; the dense clothing of down

at the base of the hindwings is locally and strongly pink-tinged. In life the

pink colour was probably most brilliant, but as in Australian species such as

O. stellans, is fugitive, fading rapidly after death,

880 Records OF THE S.A. Muskum

In the male genitalia (fig. 16), the tegumen is divided into an armed anterior

portion with five or more spines, a median eminence, which has its body bent

inwards towards the centre line but at the tip is bent outwards again, and a

heavily armed posterior portion with five spines. The harpes are more slender

and more conspicuously dilated at the apex than in the other species examined

from New Guinea. The genitalia in general are quite unlike those of any other

species, showing perhaps some distant relationship with those of O. hebe from

Fak Fak. In the present species the enlargement of the central portion of the

tegumen and its incurvature has not reached the extreme met with in 0. hebe;

instead the anterior and posterior armatures are emphasised.

OXYCANUS EOS sp. nov.

Plate xxix, fig. 4 and text fig. 17

Male. Antennae ochreous brown, very short, pectinations transversely

carinate; head and thorax ochreous brown, abdomen somewhat paler. Forewings

bright ochreous with costa and various suffusions brownish-ochreous—towards

base colour is very rich; several series of transverse lines of small, generally

pale-centred blackish-brown spots, a particular series, running from costa at

three-fourths to hind margin at two-thirds, are obseurely margined in light

grayish-fawn scales, the ochreous suffusions near base are richly coloured and

there is a particularly evident patch of darker suffusion surrounding a relatively

large black spot near posterior margin at one-half ; cilia brown. Hindwings

grayish-fawn, darker near anal margin, alone termen ochreous with a series of

faint brown spots between the veins. Forewing length 30 mm, expanse 64 mm.

Loc, New Guinea: Cyclops Mountains, August to September, 1928, Dr.

EK. Mayr. Type, a male, in British Museum (ex Tring); there is a paratype

male with the same details.

This species is conspicuous for its pointed and relatively narrow forewings.

Both examples examined are similar in markings, the paratype example differing

chiefly in the absence of the pale band across forewing; the hindwing is less

evidently infuscated.

In the genitalia (fig. 17) the outline of the tegumen is excavated at the

anterior end and bears a large simple spine just before the middle ; the posterior

half shows several smaller spines; these are spaced rather widely apart.

This species is not close to any other; in the form of the armature of tegumen

it falls nearest to O. occidentalis of South Western Australia, but in form of

wings and coloration does not show close relationship with that species; its

closest links possibly are with O. albostrigata from the Rawlinson Ranges, inland

TINDALE — REVISION OF THE GHosr Morus 331

from the Huon Gulf, and it shares with the male of that species, and with

O, thasus trom Fak Fak, the presence on the hindwing above of an inconspicuous

series of terminal gray spots between the veins; in both these species, however,

the genital armatures are different.

OXYCANUS PRRPLEXUS

Plate xxxi, fiz, 3-4 and text fig. 18

Male. Antennae ochreous, short, peetinations about 1. Head and thorax

grayish-brown, tending more to eray on inetanotum; abdomen pale creamy-fawn

slightly darker at apex. Forewings pale grayish-brown, darkest along costa,

with about eight rows of transverse creamy-white spots, outlined with brown;

a median silyery-white flash runs from base to termen above one-half, where it

turns towards apex; this laseia is wide near base then suddenly narruwed at

one-half; a darker suffusion lies between it and margin; there is a subterminal

series of spots, one between each yein. A faintly visible broad gray band runs

from costa at four-fifths to just beyond inner angle. Hindwings creamy-fawn

with subanal fourth of wine. extending to near apex, infuseated with grayish-

brown; cilia erayish-brown. Wing length 27 mm., expanse 58 mm.

Loc. New Guinea: Ninay Valley, Central Arfak Mountains, 3,500 feet,

November, 1908, to January, 1909, Type in British Museum; there are three

paratypes with the same details.

The paratypes (for example, plate xxxi, fig. 3) appear rather different from.

the type because the broad gray transverse band from tonr-fifths costa to inner

angle of forewing is emphasised and the silvery-white longitudinal flash tends

to be suppressed. The cream-centred spots are the samé as in the type (plate

xxxi, fig. 4); the colour of the hindwings is identical.

The genitalia (fig. 15) have the posterior margin of the eighth sternite

slightly convex. The tegumen has a smooth-margined anterior portion, rising

at about a right angle into a large, median, outwardly twisted eminence, showing

a slightly serrated outline and outwardly euryed tip; behind this the margm

drops to a shallow notch, followed by two or three rather evident, and several

less conspicuous spines. The harpes are long, their fips extending to the first

of the posterior suite of spines of tegumen. In postero-ventral view the central

elevations of the tezumen appear as a pair of shining castaneous subquadrate

plates, bent obliquely forwards.

This species and the two following are closely related, standing somewhat

apart from other New Guinea species. They may be distantly related to the

Australian 0. nuptialis from Mt. Kosciusko. Towever, in that species the hind-

332 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 18-19. Fig. 18 (left). Oxycanus perplexus Tindale, Ninay Valley, male genitalia,

oblique lateral view. Fig. 19 (right). Oxycanus meeki (Viette), Biagi.

wings are more acute, the wings are subhyaline, and the genitalia show little

relationship. There are resemblances to O. subvarius, also from Australia, par-

ticularly in the pattern of spots on the wings and the wing texture, but again

the genitalia are very different. The mutual relationships of this and the two

following species are discussed under the heading of the species O. discipennis.

OXYCANUS MEEKI (Viette)

Plate xxx, fig. 1-2 and text fig. 19

Paraoxycanus meeki Viette, 1950, Zool. Med., Leiden, 31, p. 69, fig. 5.

Male. Antennae ochreous, short, pectinations 1. Head, thorax and tip

of abdomen brownish-ochreous, base of abdomen light pinkish-fawn becoming

tinged with gray towards extremity; clothing of body and of hindwings relatively

thick, sealing of forewings rather rough and hairy. Forewings pointed at apex,

almost faleate in form, brownish-ochreous, darker along costa with some black-

and some silvery-white-centred black spots, a creamy-white longitudinal flash

from base to near termen above middle where it expands into a subterminal

suffusion which runs from just below apex to end obscurely near anal angle;

two conjoined lines of predominantly black spots cross the wing, the first from

TINDALE — REVISION OF THE GHost MOTHS 383

near costa at five-sixths running nearly parallel to termen to touch anal angle;

in the centre of the wing there is an obseure infuseation below the longitudinal

white flash, basally from this the flash is much broadened; cilia brownish-

ochreous. [indwings angulate, costa and termen meeting nearly at right angles,

pale pinkish-fawn, darker along costa and near anal angle; traces of spots,

some obscurely white-centred, ene between each vein of termen; cilia fawn. In

life the down at base of wings was probably strongly pink-tinged, traces remain,

Wing length 29 mm., expanse 62 mm.

Loc. New Guinea: Biagi, Mambare River, 5,000 feet, March, 1906, type

in Paris Museum; u series of fourteen labelled January to April, 1906, A. 4.

Meek, from same locality are in the British Museum (ex Tring), and one, labelled

Mareh, 1906, in South Australian Museuin.

As in other species of this genus, the wing markings show variations. The

fieured specimen (plate xxx, fig. 2) and one of the other examples seen are

rather similar, although in the last named the silvery-white spots. are a little

larger, They share a longitudinal white flash extending from base of forewing

nearly to termen where it expands into a broad fan-shaped suffusion from just

below apex nearly to anal angle, In yet another example (plate xxx, fig. 1)

the white flash is replaced by a similar, but brownish-black one. This type of

variation, by colour replacement, is common in O:eycanus species.

The venitalia (fig, 19) have the Sth sternite with posterior margin straight.

The tegumen has a slender, almost parallel-sided median spine with gently

serrated outline, the tip of it is outwardly bent over. There is a single small

apine in the middle of the anterior half of teguminal margin, and a set of five

to six medium-sized spines on posterior half. On one margin of the example

drawn these spines tended to be grouped together in pairs, this is not quite so

evident on the other margin.

The armature of the tegumen tends to place this species near O. perplerus

and its allies, but the central spine is very different in its proportions. In wing

form and markings these two species obviously lie rather far apart. A link is

that the longitudinal white fascia of the forewings, when present, shows a

common tendency to be expanded in basal half and be narrowed in apical part

of the wing, suggesting some ancient tie. The markings of the wings might also

suggest a relationship with O. rileyi, but. the subfaleate forewing of the present.

species is quite distinctive.

The above description and figures were prepared before the papor by Viette

became available; the species seems unquestionably to be that deseribed by Viette,

but there has been no time for a direet comparison of specimens,

834 REcorpDs OF THE S.A. MusEuM

OXYCANUS MAYRI sp, nov.

Plate xxxi, fig. 1-2 and text fig. 20

Male. Antennae pale ochreous, pectinations short, less than 1. Head and

thorax dark ochreous-fawn, abdomen pale ochreous-lawn. Forewings pale

ochreous-fawn, slightly darker along costa with ochreous suffusions and a broad

ill-defined ochreous band from costa at four-fifths to inner margin; there are

sever or more transverse rows of brown spots, some larger and with ochreous

centres, also a subterminal series of spots each surrounded by an ochreous patch.

Hindwings pale ochreous-fawn, slightly darker towards anal angle; traces of a

series of subterminal spots; cilia dark fawn. Wing length 26 nim., expanse

56 mm.

_ Pig. 20. Oxycanus mayri Tindale, Mt. Siwi, malo genitalia, oblique lateral and ventral

views.

Loc. New Guinea: Mt. Siwi, Arfak Mountains, 800 metres, 13 May, 1928,

Dr. KE. Mayr. Holotype, a male, in British Museum (ex Tring); there are

eight paratype males with the same details. A worn male example, not critically

studied, is dated as having been taken 23rd April, 1928, at the same locality,

A paratype specimen (plate xxxi, fig. 2) differs somewhat from the example

deseribed above, being superficially similar to the type of O. perplerus. As in

that species, it possesses a white flash from base to termen of forewing. The

hindwing, however, agrees well with the type as also do characters of the

genitalia; it seems evident that wing markings follow the same tendency to

variation as is met with in many other species of Oxycanus.

TINDALE — REVISION OF THE GHost MoTus 335

The male genitalia (fig. 20) have the tezumen much as in O. perplewus, but

the anterior notched portion is shorter, the central elevation is more conspicuous

and in postero-ventral view appears as a dark, serrated, nearly circular plate;

there are no large, and only a few small spines on the posterior half of the

margin.

OXYCANUS DISCIPENNIS Sp. TOV.

Plate xxx, fig. 4 and text fig. 21

Male. Antennae ochreous, short, hairy, pectinations short (half or less),

palpi projecting beyond frons; head and pronotum pale ochreous-brown, rest of

thorax paler; abdomen creamy-fawn slightly more ochreous at base. Forewings

pale grayish-brown, rather more gray along costa, with traces of brown spots

surrounded by ochreous patches arranged in transverse series across wings; cilia

dark fawn. Hindwings pale ochreous fawn with a dusky suffusion extending

inward from anal angle between (1,1, and Cuz veins; in life the base of wing was

probably tinged pink, traces of this remain; cilia dark fawn. Wing length

26 mm., expanse 56 mm.

Fig. 21. Oxycanus diseipennis Tindale, Mt, Siwi, May, male genitalia, oblique lateral

and ventral views.

Loc. New Guinea: Mt. Siwi, Arfak Mountains, 800 metres, 13 May, 1928,

EB, Mayr; type, a male, in British Museum (ex Tring); there is one other avail-

able example, a worn male, with same details.

This species was taken at the same time and place as O. mayri, of which

it, at first glance, might he taken to be merely a variant form in which the fore-

wing markings were partly suppressed. The resemblances in the hindwing

336 Recorps or THe $.A. Museum

accentuate the similarity, Towever, the sreater deeree of rounding of the hind-

wings appears real, there are no subterminal spots, and the genitalia show

inarked differences, being especially distinct because of the exaggerated folding

of the central eminence of the tegumen. This folding is aceentuated by a lateral

ridging of the margin between it and the anterior extremity (fig. 21).

In both exainples of this species the anterior portion of the tezuminal

iargin is less acutely notched than in 0. perplecus and O. mayri; in the presence

ol a medium-sized spine and traces of other smaller ones on the posterior part

o! the teeumen it is closer to the former species. The harpes rise from a broad

base to a narrowed median portion which is dilated in a knob-like extremity.

The complex of fortis here described as O. perplexus, O. mayri and O, disci-

pennis have constituted a problem, the complexities of which may, or may not

have been solved. All three have points of resemblance, in size, range of inarkings

and general facies, and it is evident that they belong to a closely linked species

group. QO. perplexus and O,. mayrt were taken in the same general area, at

slightly different altitudes, 3,500 versus 2,500 feet, at periods of the year at

least 34 months apart. Since Oxycanus adults have a very brief non-feeding

adult lite, the emergence period is usually restricted, hence the different emer-

genee periods may have significance. The genitalia are different, althouch some-

times they require more than superficial examination to establish the differences.

Aceeptance of O. perplexus and QO, mayri as distinct species on these erounds

does not immediately resolve the puzzle beeause the wing markings in the two

species are variable and wit patterns appear to range counter to genital

structure. A mayri-like form of QO. perplecus exists as well as a perplexus-like

form of O, mayrt, However, the hindwing characters seem to run with genitalia

and help to emphasise the distinctive character of the two species.

Although the view that these are all separate species is accepted, there may

be alternutive explanations, It is possible that the difference between O. mayri

and O. perplexus are only of subspecifie value, the isolating factor being lime

of emergence vather than spatial separation, since the areas of occurrence are

nol very far apart.

A third possible view would be that the genitalia themselves are not constant

and that all the variant forms belong to one species which also has a wide range

in time of emergence, In the ease of Australian members of the genus Oncopera

a siilar situation was met, but was resolyed on further work, when the forms

were proved all to be quite separate species.

The present species, O. discapennis, does not assist the solving of the problem

and is puzzling in another way. It was taken along with examples of O. mayri

TInDALE — REvisION OF THE GHost Morus 837

at the same time and place. There are some similarities in markings, but the

genital structures are very distinet, although they show relationships with those

of both O. mayrt and O. perplexus.

OXYCANUS HEBE Sp. NOV.

Plate xxvi, fig, 8 and text fig, 22

Male. Ilead and thorax ochreous brown, abdomen pale fawn. Forewings

ochreous brown, slightly darker in centre olf wing, with two discoidal silvery-

white spots, each narrowly margined with black; traces of other dark spots below

them, and series of smaller white-centred spots, rimmed with pale fawn, along

termen; also a double subterminal series rather irregularly aligned. Hindwings

pale fawn, Wings below pale fawn, the hindwings slightly more ochreous-tinged.

Forewing length 30 mm., expanse 66 mm.

Fig. 22. Oxycanus hebe Tindale, Fak Fuk, male genitalia, oblique lateral and ventral

views.

Loc, New Guinea: Fak I’ak, 1,700 feet, January and February, 1908

(Pratt), Tywpe, a male, 1911-117 in British Museum.

Although this species occurs in the same district and altitude as O. thasus

and is about the same size, it appears about a month later in the season and

evidently is quite distinct. Its genitalia (fig. 22) are entirely different in form,

possessing a large median expansion on the tegumen whieh curls inwards and

then outwards so that the processes of opposite sides almost meet in the midline.

The only available example, unfortunately, lacks ifs antennae. Without examina-

tion of the genitalia the example would probably have been placed with O. nigrt-

838 Recorps oF THE S.A. MuskumM

puncta to which it has a close superficial resemblance. It differs in the relatively

large size of its forewings and the shape of the short wide hindwings. The

genitalia are closest to those of O. dise‘pennis but differ in the much enlarged

size of the median process on {he tegumen and in possessing “normal” harpes

rather than the knob-like ones of O. discipennts.

Oxycanus (PARAOXYCANUS) NOVAGUINEENSIS ( Viette)

Paraoxrycanus novagiinecnsis Viette, 1950, Zool. Med., Leiden, 31, p. 68, fig. 3

and 8.

Loc, New Guinea: Paniai, + September, 1939, taken by the Nieuw Guinea

Expedition, K.N.A.G,, 1939. Type in Leiden Museum,

The tegumen in this species, which has not been seen, is figured as very

similar to that of Ocycanus tamsi, described earlier in this paper. In the key

given here the species would fall out close to O. famsi, but the harpes appear

much shorter in the present species. The two were taken at different times of

the year and are differeiut in size and coloration.

ADDITIONS TO AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF OXYCANUS

(See Part ITI, these Records, v, 5, 1935, p. 280-331,)

Large series of most of the Australian species of Oxcycanus have been brought

together by collectors since the earlier Revision appeared and several additional

new species have been discovered; in the main, however, the account of the

genus given earlier still holds.

Oxycanous Byksa ( Pfitzner)

Pfitzner could not have examined this form closely for, despite the different

venation, he regarded it merely as a variety of “Pielus hyalinatus.” Pfitzner

and Grede, in Seitz Maerolepidoptera 10, 1933, p, 8384, retained it in bantiades.

The late Dr. B. L. Middleton took inany specimens at Ebor, New South Wales, in

April and May, and it is now a comparatively well-known. species; examples

exactly matehing the type have been taken. The venational patterns and general

structure clearly indicate that it is an Oxycanus.

OXYCANUS GLAURRTT sp. Toy.

Plate xxxii, fig. 1-+ and text fie. 28

Male. Antennae moderate, ochreous, pectinations short, less than 1; palpi

brown, smooth-haired, porrect, not lone; head and thorax pale brown, abdomen

at base ochreous, hecoming pale brown at apex. Forewiny opaque, dull brown

TINDALE — REVISION OF THE GHost Morus 839

with scattered yellow seales concentrated along veins, along costa at three-

fourths, and in an obseure band from base to outer margin at one-half; there is

a silver spot near apex of cell and traces of another nearer to base, the area

between them is uniformly brown; there is a marginal series of brown spots

between the veins from apex to inner margin, with a parallel submarginal series

and traces of still others in the middle of the wing; several of them have traces

of silvery-white seales forming centres to the spots. Hindwings pale ochreous

at base and along veins, becoming dull brown towards apex. Wing length

26 mm., expanse 56 mm,

Female. Larger, generally gray with a few traces of markings chiefly

confined to a small irregular silvery-white spot near apex of cell and a few dark

brown seale patches also in the cell; the base of the abdomen and the base of

hindwings obscurely ochreous. Wing length 41 mm., expanse 88 mm.

Loc. Western Australia: no specific locality indicated; type, a male, and

allotype, female, in British Museum (labelled W. Australia, G. C. Shortbridge,

1906-293); there are seven other examples.

I have pleasure in naming this interesting species after Mr. L. Glauert, who,

as Director of the Western Australian Museum at Perth, has done so much for

the general study of zoology in Western Australia.

As in so many others of this genus, the wing patterns and colours of the

male of this species show considerable variation in detail. The type is well

marked and dark; one paratype tends to a pale extreme with the posterior

Fig. 23. Oxycanus glauerti Tindale, Western Australia, outline of tegumen in lateral

view and of eighth sternite.

three-fifths of the wing yellowish and markings largely suppressed. A third

male is much worn but shows a darker phase in which the yellow scales are not

as evident.

Examination of the male genitalia will at once identity the species. The

tegumen bears three principal spines (fig. 23), a medium-sized anterior one,

followed by a slightly smaller one, then a large posterior one, swollen at base and

tapering to a sharp spine. The 8th sternite has its hind margin evenly coneave.

340 Records oF THE S.A. MusEuM

The simple posterior spine of the tegumen is in marked contrast with the

many-spined process found here in O, determinatus (Walker), its nearest ally

in Western Australia, From that species it differs conspicuously also in the

much shorter, rather porrect palpi. Of Hastern Australian species it has, in

the male, the most general superficial resemblance to O. nuptialis Tindale.

Absence of an armed posterior lobe to the tegumen of this species indicates the

two are not very closely related.

OXYCANUS KOCHI sp. nov.

Plate xxxii, fig. 5-6 and text fig. 24

Male. Antennae pale fawn, pectinations weak (14-2); palpi slender, porrect

smooth-haired; head and thorax fuscous, abdomen light yellowish-fawn becoming

4 little darker at apex. Forewings pale ochreous fawn; the costa dark fawn;

markings comprise a series of obscure dark fawn spots, one series diminishing

in size running from near apex to near inner angle with several obscure

blotches of the same colour surrounding white seales on each side of vein Rs.

Hindwing rather narrowly ochreous-fawn along costa and on veins, elsewhere

fuscous. Wing length 27 mm., expanse 60 mm.

Female. Larger, with elongate forewings uniformly pale grayish-fawn in

both wings, with traces of a semi-lunate white patch of scales at apex of cell

of forewing. Wing length 40 mm., expanse 87 mm.

Vig. 24. Oxycanus kochi Tindale, Australia, outline of tegumen, and of eighth sternite.

Loc, Australia. Type, a male (No, 10797), and allotype, female (No.

10798), in Senckenberg Museum (labelled only as “Australien”); also one para-

type, male, labelled “New Holland,” in Oxford University Museum.

The abraded condition of the three specimens and their lack of exact

provenance has hitherto deterred me from a description. However, the genitalia

of the males are distinctive and will enable the species to be readily recognised

when further material comes to hand. The similarities in the palpi in the two

Senckenberg examples helps to convince me that they are correctly associated

as male and female of one species, The lastnamed examples long stood in the

TinpaALe — Revision OF THE GHost Morus 341

Senckenbery collection under a name label “hyalinatus Koch,” They are, of

course, typical members of the genus Oxrycanus.

The species appears to be distantly related to O. nuptialis and there are

some general resemblances, such as the slightly pointed wings of the male and

the somewhat elongated wings of the female, but the body build is more robust,

the markings less evident, and the genitalia show distinctive features,

The male genitalia have the tegumen with a long anterior projection and

also 2 large bifureate posterior pair of blint spines with a straight margin

between them (fig. 24). In the key by Tindale (1935, p. 283, et. seq.) it would

fall on p, 287 under a heading “gg. Tegumen with only posteriorly directed post-

suspensorial spines or projections.”

The very battered Oxford University Museum example seems undoubtedly

to belong here, the genitalia, so far as they may be seen without dissection, being

identical. The forewings bear more definite silvery-white markings which

oeeupy a roughly V-shaped space near the extremity of the cell and below it.

In this detail the species bears a superficial resemblance to the male of O. nip-

hadias in which, however, the markings are nearer to the base of the wing. Other

markings present include two ill-defined silvery-white spots in the cell.

OXYCANUS ARMATUS sp. lov.

Plate xxxii, fie. 7 and text fig, 25

Male. Antennae and palpi not preserved in available specimen; head and

thorax pale fuscous, abdomen yellowish-fuscous. Forewings bright ochreous

yellow with pale fuseous on basal half of costa and generally along inner margin;

luseous-mnargined silvery-white spots forming two parallel series from near apex

to inner margin, with two lurger angulate markings towards base of wing; there

is a series of semi-lnnate marginal fuscous marks between the veins along outer

margin. Uindwings bright ochreous yellow, almost orange in colour on costa,

along outer margin, and on veins, with infuseations between the veins; traces of

three outer-marginal fuseous spots. Wings below generally fuscous tinged with

ochreous along margins and at base of hindwing. Wing length 34 mm., expanse

75 mm.

Loc. Western Australia. Type, a male, in British Museum (labelled W.

Australia, G. C. Shortbridge, 1906-293).

In the key previously published, Tindale (1935, p, 283), this species falls

close to O. poeticus, although the general appearance is strikingly different,

showing, instead of the mixed brown and ochreous colours, a rather uniformly

842 Recorps OF THE S.A. MusEUM

Fig. 25. Oxycanus armatus Tindale, Western Australia, outline of- tegumen, and ot

eighth sternite.

yellow background tint on the forewings and also infuscated hindwings instead

of plain reddish-ochreous ones.

The male genitalia differ in the shape and size of the posterior lobe of the

tegumen. In O. poeticus this is large and subcireular with a margin only feebly

serrated, whereas in O. armatus this posterior lobe is small, longer than wide,

and armed with two large and a series of seven smaller seriate spines (fig. 25).

OxyYCANus sorpipus (Herrich-Schaeffer )

Plate xxxii, fig. 8

An extreme form of this species with the silvery markings greatly expanded

was taken by Mr. Charles McCubbin at Langwarren, Victoria, in early May,

1947, and through the courtesy of Mr. Nigel Quick I have examined a further

series of 10 males and 3 females taken together on 10 May, 1947, ranging from

a light brownish-ochreous form without markings on the forewing to the silvery

extreme form.

The last named form superficially resembles O. stellans, but the base of

abdomen and hindwings are almost crimson and the same wings are distally

often a dingy gray. The markings of forewings are differently disposed.. The

tegumen is of typical O. sordidus form and readily distinguishable from

O. stellans by the longer principal spine on the tegumen, the margin of which

is shorter than in O. stellans.

Three similar examples were taken by Mr. David Holmes at Red Hill.

Victoria, on 25th May, 1952. Plate xxxii, fig. 8, shows one of his examples

expanding 71 mim. In this the forewings, base of hindwings and body are flashed

with a dull reddish-colour, becoming paler towards margins of wings. The

silvery markings are widely expanded and edged and lined along veins with dull

brown.

TINDALE — REVISION OF THE Guost Morus 348

SUMMARY

This paper describes and figures fifteen new Oxycanus moths of the family

Hepialidae from New Guinea, and also three new species from Australia. The

status and synonymy of eight previously described New (uinea species is

discussed.

344

NS oR ee

Pm Si os POPS

see

G0. 55 > St pa Goh i

Recorps or tHe S.A, Museum

EXPLANATION OF PLATES

PLATE XXVI

Oxycanus rileuwi Tindale, male, Dohunsehik, type,

Oxryeanus subochracea (Joieey and Talbot), male, Wandammen Mts,, November.

Oxycanus subochracea (Joicey aud Talbot), male, Wandammen Mts., November.

Oxycanus thoe Tindale, male, Wassior, July, type.

Oxycanus thasus Tindale, male, Fak Fuk, Deceniber, type.

Oxycanus serratus Tindale, male, Woudiwoi, July, type.

Oxycanus salmonacea (Rothschild and Jordan), male, Angabunga. River,

Ozycanue hebe Tindale, male, Mak Fak, type.

PLATE XXVIT

Oxycanus tamsi Tindale, male, Mt. Goliath, Mebruary, type.

Oxycanus tamsi Tindale, male, Mt. Goliath, January, paratype.

Oxycanus tamsi Tindale, male, Mt. Goliath, February, melanie form.

PLATE XXVIIT

Oxycanus dives Tindale, male, Mt. Kunupi, type.

Orycanus dives Tindale, male, ochreous brown form, Mt. Kunupi.

Oxycanus dives Tindale, male, white-streaked form, Mt. Kunupi.

Oxycanus dives Tindale, male, form with markings suppressed, Mt. ICunupi.

Oxycanus hecabe Tindale, male, Hunsteinspitze, February-March, type.

Oxycanus hecabe form lcthe Tindale, male, Hunsteinspitze, August, type.

PLATE XXTX

Ocyoanus xcois Tindale, male, Dohunsehik, June, type.

Orycanns xois Tindale, male, Angi Lake, June.

Oxycanus albostrigata (Rothschild), female, Bolauberg, inland from Huon (fulr, type

Oxycawus eos Tindale, male, Cyclops Mts., type.

Oxyconus postflavida (Rothschild), male, ‘Carstensz Peak, type.

Oxycanus fuliginosa (Rothschild), probably a male, Carstensz Peak, type.

Orycanus salmonacea (Rothschild and Jordan), male, Angabunga River, type.

PLATE XXX

Oxycanus meeki (Viette), male, Biagi.

Oxycanus thoe Tindale, male, Wassior, July, paratype.

Oaycanus discipennis, Tindale, inale, Mt. Siwi, May, type.

Oxycanus atrox Tindale, male, Buntibasa, August, type.

Oxycanus atrox Tindale, male, Buntibasa, August.

Ozycanus albostrigata (Rothschild), male, Rawlinson Mts., allotype,

Oxycanus albostrigata (Rothschild), female, Rawlinson Mts.

PLATE XXXI

Oxycanus mayrt Tindale, male, Mt. Siwi, May, type.

Oxyeanus mayri Tindale, male, white-streaked form, Mt. Siwi, May.

Oxycanus perplexus Tindale, male, Ninay Valley, form without white streag

Onycanus. perplerus Tindale, male, Ninay Valley, type.

PLATE XXAII

Ozycanus glaverti Tindale, male, Western Australia.

Oxycanus glaverti Tindale, male, Western Australia,

Oxycanus glaverti Tindale, femule, Western Australia.

Oxycanus glanerti Tindale, female, Western Australia.

Ozycanus kochi Tindale, male, Australia, type.

Oxyéanus kochi Tindale, female, Australia, allotype.

Oxycanus armatus Tindale, male, Western Australia, type.

Oxycanus sordidus (Herrich-Schaefter), male, silvery-white marked form,

Victoria.

Red Hill,

Rec. S.A. Musrunt Vor. XT. Puare XXVI

NEW GUINEA GHOST MOTHS

Rec. S.A, Museum Vou. XI, Prare XXVIII

NEW GUINEA GHOST MOTHS

Ree. S.A. Museum Von, XT, Puare XXVIII

NEW GUINEA GHOST MOTHS

Rec. S.A. Museuns Vou. XT. Prare XXITX

NEW GUINEA GHOST MOTHS

Rec. S.A. Museum Vou. XI, Phare XXX

GUINEA GHOST MOTHS

Rec. S.A. Mustum Vor. XI. Phare XXNXT

Rec. S.A. Museu Vou. XI, Purare XXXII

AUSTRALIAN GHOST MOTHS

AN UNRECORDED METHOD OF ABORIGINAL ROCK MARKING

BY CHARLES P. MOUNTFORD, HONORARY ASSOCIATE IN ETHNOLOGY,

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

Only two methods of aboriginal rock markings have been recorded in Australia, (a) the rock

engravings on the Triassic sandstone of the Hawkesbury River basin of New South Wales, which

consist of outline figures of human beings and creatures cut into the soft rock, some of them up to

sixty feet in length, (1) and (b), the pecked or intagliated rock engravings of western New South

Wales and South Australia in which the designs, usually of small size, are made up of a series of

small pits, close together, probably as the result of blows from a sharp-edged boulder held in the

hand (2). The latter type of rock engraving has a wider distribution than at present recorded, the

writer having photographed examples of Korporilya Springs and the Iromba rock-hole in the

Macdonnell Ranges of Central Australia and at Tomsons rock-hole in north-western Central

Australia.

AN UNRECORDED METHOD or ABORIGINAL,

ROCK MARKING

By CHARLES P. MOUNTFORD, Honorary Associate 1s ErHnovocy,

Soutn Austratian Museum

Plate xxxiii and text fig. 1-5

ONLY two methods of aboriginal rock markings have been recorded in Australia,

(a) the rock engrayings on the Triassie sandstone of the Hawkesbury River

basin of New South Wales, which consist of outline figures of human beings

and creatures cut into the soft rock, some of them up to sixty feet in length,

(1) and (b), the pecked or intagliated rock engravings of western New South

Wales and South Australia in which the designs, usually of small size, are

made up of a series of small pits, close together, probably as the result of blows

from a sharp-edged boulder held in the hand (2). The latter type of rock

engraving has a wider distribution than at present recorded, the writer having

photoeraphed examples of Korporilya Springs and the Iromba rock-hole in the

Macdonnell Ranges of Central Australia and at Tomsons rock-hole in north-

western Central Australia.

While a member of the 1937 University of Adelaide anthropological expedi-

tion to the Granites gold fields and the 1940 expedition to the western deserts

of Central Australia, the writer observed aborigines producing rock pictures

by a hitherto unrecorded technique,

The Method. In the arid parts of Australia, the exposed rock surfaces are

coated with a dark-red patina, which is destroyed when struck with a hard

object, exposing the lighter-coloured stone underneath. The aborigines have

used this characteristic to produce their simple designs.

In the Granites area, the aboriginal took a small pebble (Plate xxxiii, fig. A

and B), and in the Muserave Ranges, an upper grinding stone (Plate xxxiii,

marks which made up the design.

These rock poundings have a different appearance from that of the intagli-

ated engravings. This difference was strikingly illustrated at the Iromhba rock-

hole in the Macdonnel] Ranges where there were a number of these rock

engravings, among them being a series of bird tracks. Immediately below one

of these bird tracks some aboriginal had made a copy of one of them by

346 Recorps oF THE S.A. MusEuM

rock-pounding technique, leaving the pounding tool, an oval boulder, near-by

(Plate xxxiii, fig. D).

The eight localities in which rock-pounding designs have been found (ex-

eluding the Tromba rock-hole) are indicated on fig. 1. They are the Granites

gold fields and Tomsons rock-hole in north-western Central Australia; Mt. Olga,

northern Musgrave Ranges, and Kanbi, Tjitibidi, Atalnva and Kuna in the

Mann Ranges, The last six localities are in the western deserts of Central

N. 3. WALES,

Fig. 1. Localities of rock-pounding designs. A, Granites gold fields. B, Tomsons rock-

hole. O, Mt. Olga. D, Northern Musgrave Range. WH, Tjitabidi, north-eastern Mann Range.

F, Atalnya, north-eastern Mann Range. G, Kuna, northern Mann Range. H, Kanbi, southern

Mann Range.

Australia. Further research will almost certainly show that this method of

rock marking has a much wider distribution.

The meaning of the designs. It has been possible to find out, from the

aborigines themselves, the meanings of a number of designs recorded in this

paper. From this it is reasonable to assume that the remainder, even though

they have not been deciphered, would haye a meaning. They could not, how-

ever, be interpreted without the aid of the artist who produced them.

Fig. 2. A, Musgrave Ranges. The circles represent breasts of young girls

and the barred double circle the pendant breast of an old woman (Plate xxxiii,

edge pictures a ceremonial head-dress. The lower figures were unidentified. D,

Mountrorp — A MeEtTHop or ABorRIGINAL Rock MARKINGS 847

Pa}

“Freee

pote a]

entity wa

: ROK)

f af Vd

see iteaey

erent’

Sater Neer,

teen

ae #

“ben Midatyy

Vans

Haein, ors

Fig. 2. Rock-pounding designs.

348 Recorps oF THE S.A. MusEuM

Fig. 3. Rock-pounding design

Mountrorp — A METHop oF ABoRIGINAL Rock MARKINCS 349

teeny

Wes, Sy

cee

tty Po pete 3 Sox's,

om arearatte ee ee “ea Fg

A rennet .

aie at ty aber

ath, ae Pag tee

aera gen ey

4, 5,

"eat

Peroeachity Sey,

sest

Fdsnnctet

Fig. 4. Rock-pounding designs.

Kanbi. The central group are erude alphabetical symbols made by aboriginat

children who had attended a recently-established mission school. E, Tjitabidi,

Mann Ranges. An aboriginal, having run an emu down on a hot day, returned

to camp at the Tjitibidi rock-hole and commemorated the remarkable feat by

pounding a series of emu and human footprints on a tall boulder. The emu

footprints indicate the bird he had just captured and the dots his own tracks.

The paired meandering lines picture two wanambi (rainbow serpents) who,

the aborigines believe, live in the near-by Piltadi rock-hole. F, Mt. Olga; B, G

and J, Atalnya; and H and K, Kuna, were not identified.

Fig, 3. B, Granites. The meandering lines are the tracks of a mythical

snake, wana, the paired tracks those of a kangaroo, and the bird tracks a

bustard. C, Granites. Motor ear. D, Granites, Motor lorry. EH, Granites.

Totemie map; a represents Burgidji, a totemie place adjacent to the Granites,

the home of the mythical opossum, tanumba, who travelled to Bia; b, a place

to the south. The lines c, d, e symbolize the tracks made by the mythical

opossum. , Granites. Mythical snake, wana. G, Granites. The figure on

Recorps oF THE S.A. MusEUM

350

Salads Maahaealetye

oben see

Rock-pounding designs,

Fig. 5.

Mountrorp — A MEtTHop oF ABORIGINAL Rock MARKINGS 851

the right is an old woman, Pundunda, and that on left an old man, Dina, H

and J, Granites. Two white men whose hats distinguish them from aborigines.

Kx, Granites. The rock-pounding design is shown on Plate xxxiii, fig. A and B.

The meandering lines on the right svmbolize two mythical snakes, wana, which

belong to the area. The loops at the top of the design are their fangs and the

double cirele at the bottom the hole from which they had emerged. The tracks

ure those of an unidentified water-bird, kaliwa, and the meandering line on

the right a small spinifex snake called wilgibura. A, Tomsons rock-hole, and

Lu, Granites, were not identified.

Fig. 4. K, L, M, N, Tomsons rock-hole. Snake designs. O, Granites.

Snake, wana, entering hole. R, Granites. The waninga or head-dress of the

mythical opossuin, fanumba. A, B, C, D, B, F, G, I, P, Q, Tomsons rock-hole.

Not identified.

Fig. 5. A, Tomsons roek-hole. Simple human figures, meandering lines,

abstract designs and kangaroo tracks. D and E, Tomsons rock-hole. Maze

designs probably representing the tracks of snakes. C, Tomsons rock-hole, and

B, F and G, Kuna, Mann Range, not identified.

REFERENCES CITED

(1) Campbell, W. D. (1899): Aboriginal Carvings of Port Jackson and Broken

Bay.

(2) Mountford, C. P. (1985): A survey of the Petroglyphs of South Australia.

Aust., N.Z. Ass. Ady. Science, pp. 208-215,

352

Dp.

Recorps OF THE S.A. MusEUM

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXIII

TECHNIQUES OF ROCK-POUNDING

Pebble used to produce rock-poundings at the Granites gold field.

Aboriginal producing rock-pounding designs at Granites gold field.

Aboriginal producing rock-pounding designs at northern Musgrave Ranges.

Intagliated rock engravings (outlined) and rock-pounding design at Iromba rock-hole,

Macdonnell Ranges.

Ric. S.A. Museum Vou, XI, Puare XXXNIT

TECHNIQUE OF ROCK-POUNDING

PELAGIC FOSSILS (ATURIA, PENGUINS, WHALES) FROM THE

TERTIARY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY M. F. GLAESSNER, UNIVERSITY OF ADELAIDE

Summary

The study of the fossil remains of pelagic animals is one of the most promising approaches to the

problem of inter-regional stratigraphic correlation. The re-assessment of the relative ages of

Tertiary strata in southern Australia which is now in progress, makes it necessary to record all

available information on fossils representing pelagic animals, and therefore likely to be encountered

in other areas. The four groups discussed in the present contribution, the Cephalopod genus Aturia,

the penguins, squalodont whales and cetotheriid whales, are approached from different points of

view. Ample material of Aturia is now available which makes it possible to revise taxonomic

concepts and define the regional stratigraphic value of at least two species. The use of Aturia for

inter-regional correlation will depend on a general revision of its morphogeny and taxonomy, based

on direct comparison of specimens from different parts of the world which are traditionally placed

in different species of unknown genetic relations.

PELAGIC FOSSILS (ATURIA, PENGUINS, WHALES) From tHe

TERTIARY or SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By M. F. GLAESSNER, University or AngLaipe

Plates xxxiv-xxxvi and text fig, 1-7

INTRODUCTION

Tuk study of the fossil remains of pelagic animals is one of the most promising

approaches to the problem of inter-regional stratigraphic correlation. The re-

assessment of the relative ages of Tertiary strata in southern Australia which

is now in progress, makes it necessary to record all available information on

fossils representing pelagic animals, and therefore likely to be encountered in

other areas. The four groups disenssed in the present contribution, the Cepha-

loped genus Afuria, the penguins, squalodont whales and cetotheriid whales, are

approached from different points of view. Ample material of Aturia is now

available which makes it possible to revise taxonomie concepts and define the

regional stratigraphic value of at least two species. The use of Aturia for inter-

regional correlation will depend on a general revision of its morphogeny and

taxonomy, based on direct comparison of specimens from different parts of the

world which are traditionally placed in different species of unknown genetic

relations.

The discoveries of penguin bones are recorded only from a stratigraphic.

and biostratonomic viewpoint, and a correction is made in the age determination

of the only specimen which had been previously deseribed. A morphological

and systematic study of this material will be undertaken by Dr. G, G. Simpson,

who is a noted specialist in this field and has better facilities for comparison at

his disposal.

A single squalodont tooth is deseribed mainly because of its excellent pre-

servation and obvious differences from all known Australian cetacean teeth.

It. gives hopes of further discoveries in this field. Beeanse of the rapid and

comparatively well-documented evolution of this group, such discoveries will

eventually lead to important stratigraphic conclusions.

The re-discovery of a long-lost, exceptionally well-preserved skull of a whale

is announced. It is recognized as the first Australian representative of the

Cetotheriidae, the ancestors of the whalebone whales. Detailed study and

identification of this skull has to be postponed, but it is hoped that the recording

of the occurrence will lead to further discoveries in the field.

354 Recorps of THE S,A, MusEUM

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The writer is indebted to Mr. H. M. Hale, Director, South Australian

Museum, for the loan of specimens and for other facilities; to Professors E, 5.

Hills (University of Melbourne) and R. T. Prider (University of Western

Australia) for the loan of material for conparison; to Ma. V. Raghavendra Rao,

of the Geological Survey ot India, who is at present engaged in research work

at the University of Adelaide and who was instrumental in obtaining specimems

here described from the Mt. Gambier Limestone; to Miss M. J. Wade (University

of Adelaide) for the stratigraphie column of Witton Bluff and photography

of specimens, and to Miss M. Boyee (South Australian Museum) for illustra-

tions. his research was assisted bv a generous donation from the W. Burdett

Fund and by contributions from the General Research Funds of the University

of Adelaide.

1. ATURIA IN THE TERTIARY OF SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA

AtvuRIA CLARKEL Teichert

Plate xxxiy, fig, 2, plate xxxy, fig. 3 and text fig. 1-3

1919 Aturia aturt (Basterot) Newton, Malac, Soe. London, Proc., vol. 14, p. 160,

pls. 5, 6.

1939 Aturia ef, A. etezae (Sowerby) Miller and Crespin, J. Paleont., vol, 13,

p. 80, pl. 14, fig. 1.

1944 Aturia clarket Teichert, J. Paleont., vol. 18, p. 79, pl. 14, fig. 1-4, pl. 16,

fig. 1-2, text fig. 2.

1947 Deltoidonautilus bakeri Teichert, Min, Geol. J. Melbourne, vol. 3, No, 2,

fig. 1-2.

1947 Aturia nov. sp., Teichert, Min. Geol, J. Melbourne., yol. 3, No. 2.

1949 Aluria clarket attenuata Teichert and Cotton, Ree. S,A. Mus,, vol. 9,

No, 2, p. 255, pl. 21.

Material. Types: Holotype of A. elarkei, U.W.A. No. 21406, paratype

U.W.A. No. 21407; holotype of A. clarke’ attenuata S.A.M, No. P9027, holotype

of D. bakert M.U.G.D. No. 1939.*

Other material. Christies Beach-Port Noarlunga section, S.A.M, P5219,

P7153, P5944, P5954, P5937 (probably from this locality), A.U.G.D. F15102-5,

Maslin Bay A.U.G,D. F15099-101, Campbelltown (north of Adelaide), from a

to are kept: A,U.G.D.—Adelaide University Geology Department, M.U.G.D—Mvelbdurne Uni-

yersity Geology Department, S.A.M.—South Australian Museum, .W.A—University of

Western Australia Geology Department,

GLAESSNER — PeLacic Fossits FROM Sou'rH AUSTRALIA 855

depth of 60 feet in a well, 8.A.M. 7017. Northern Yorke Peninsula (between

Clinton and Ardrossan), A.ULG,D, F15106, This specimen was found without

a label in the old ecolleetions; its peculiar preservation in a silicified vlaneonitic

limestone with sponge spicules suggests that it came from this area,

Preservation. Most of the 15 new specimens are well-preserved internal

moulds of varying sizes, ranging from a diameter of only 85 mim. to a frag-

mentary large adult specimen with chambers 45 mim, Jony on the venter, The

body ehamber is partly preserved in only one specimen, The shell is present

only in specimen F15102 in which parts of the surface are porteetly preserved.

It is replaeed by siliea in F15106.

Remarks, A, clarkei was fully deseribed by Teichert (1944), The abun-

danf new material shows that it is impossible to distinguish the proposed South

Australian subspecies A, clarke’ attenuata from the Western Australian types

in the manner proposed hy Teichert and Cotton, The original deseription of

AL, clarkei atlenuata does not enumerate the differences between it and A, clarkei

clarker, but the stated resemblances with sl. australis, ic, “the general propor-

tions of the shell, particularly the narrowly rounded venter, and slight depression

along a ventro-lateral zone,” can he taken as indications of its diagnostic sub-

specific characters, particularly as attenuata was regarded as “intermediate

hetween the two species” (Teichert and Cotton, 1949, p. 256). The study of the

new material from the tspe locality and adjoining areas, including specimens

more than twice the size of ihe speeimen deseribed by Teiehert and Cotton,

shows that these characters are not present in adult shells and that at the size

of the holotype of A. clarket the venter in the South Australian specimen is less

“narrowly rounded” and the depression on the ventro-lateral flanks disappears.

The examination of the fragmentary holotype of Deltoidonautilus hakeri

showed that the curved “suture lines” fizured by Teichert (1947, fig. 3) are not

external sutures bit oblique seetions across the inner portions of the septa on

the deeply eroded right lateral surface of the specimen figured in Teichert’s

fig. 1. Preparation of the other flank revealed the true septa which prove that

the specimen belongs to the genus Afuria, The apparently angular venter is

the result of abrasion. The sulure as now revealed (text fig. 1) resembles that

of A. clarket in the characteristic shape of the lateral lobe and saddle, In this

small specimen they are elose-set, but in a large specimen from the same loeality,

recorded by Teichert as A. sp., they are more widely spaced, as in the typical

wl. clarket (text fig. 2), Another point of agreement between the holotype of

/!. clarket and this speeimen is seen in the relative position of the tip of the

lateral lobe and the ventrolateral shoulders of the ventral saddles of the preced-

356 Recorps oF THE S.A. MusEUM

} 2

“I

Fig. 1. Aturia clarkei Teichert. Suture lines of the fragment described as Deltotdonautilus

bakert Teichert, 1947. Diagrammatic. Further preparation has since revealed some

additional details.

Fig. 2. Aturia clarkei Teichert. Suture lines of the fragment described as Aturia nov. sp.,

Teichert, 1947.

Fig. 3. <Aturia clarkei Teichert. Suture lines of holotype.

Fig. 4. Aturia stansburiensis Glaessner. Suture lines of holotype.

ing sutures. The tips of the lateral lobes are always placed a short distance

towards the ventral side from the rectangular shoulders so that they come to

lie against the straight transverse portion of the ventral saddle and the successive

suture lines are “staggered” in this region. This is never found in the specimens

from the type horizon of A. clarket attenuata. In these the deepest points of

the lateral lobes are very sharp and are in line with the sides of the ventral

saddles. It is therefore necessary to emend the subspecies attenuata, basing it

on the character and alignment of the lateral lobes alone. A. bakeri, which was

based on a fragment, is probably a synonym of A. clarkei clarkei. The separation

of the subspecies attenuata as emended appears to have some biostratigraphic

significance as one specimen found recently in situ in the Blanche Point Marls at

GLAgSSNER — PeELAcic Fossits FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 857

Blanehe Point, and another whieh comes probably from the equivalents of these

marls on Yorke Peninsula (but was not labelled), have the “staggered” arranye-

ment of the suture lines whieh is seen in the typical vl. clarkei. The holotype

of A, elarkei attenvata and all other South Australian specimens listed above

which have the lateral saddles and ventral lobes aliened come from the under-

lying Tortachilla Limestone,

Stratigraphic position and age. Two of the South Australian specimens

come from the type locality of the Tortachilla Limestone ai Maslin Bay, where

they were found just south of the hut known as “Unele Tom’s Cabin” (Reynolds,

1953), about 3 feet above the base of the formation. The specimens from

Christie’s Beach are also from the Tortachilla Limestone, about 7 miles north

of Maslin Bay, The specimen from Campbelltown is preserved in a glanconitic

limestone which is the probable subsurface equivalent of the Tortachilla Lime-

stone in the Adelaide Plains Basin, about 22 miles northeast of Christie’s Beach.

The Tortachilla Limestone grades upward into the “transitional” member of the

Blanche Point Marl in which Hantkenina alabamensis compressa and other

distinetive Upper Eocene foraminifera were found by the late Mr. W. J, Parr,

A single specimen of A. clarket with the typical arrangement of septa was found

at the top of the succeeding Banded Marl member of the Blanche Point Marls

at the southern end of Blanche Point, about 40 feet above the Tortachilla Lime-

stone, The type specimen of “Deltoidonautilus bakeri” came from a phosphatic

nodule bed near Princetown overlain by strata containing smaller foraminifera

Which indieate a transition from “Janjukian” to “Baleombian” (Parr in Baker,

1944), ie. Late Oligocene or Marly Miocene age. Teichert considered it and

the larger Afuria as possibly derived from the Eocene of which lower members

are preserved east of the Gellibrand River. The large specimen shows clear signs

of wear prior to deposition, as the deeply worn surface of its internal mould is

coated with fossiliferous caleareous material.

The Western Australian specimens of A. clarkei are probably also of Late

BKocene age. I have previously suggested that age for the Plantagenet beds

in which Newton’s specimen was found (Glaessner, 1953), and the same age

is now assigned (o the Tertiary strata of the Kennedy Range in which is the

type locality of the species (oral information from Dr. R. O. Brunnschweiler),

ATURIA STANSBURIENSIS Sp. Noy,

Pl, xxxiv, fig. la, b

Material. A single well-preserved and undeformed completely septate

specimen, partly an internal mould and partly a cast. A.U.G.D. No, 15109, coll,

O. S. Rogers, don. Dr. J. Verco.

358 Recorps oF THE S.A. MusEUM

Occurrence. Stansbury, Yorke Peninsula, in bryozoal limestone.

Description, A large specimen, diameter about 120 nim., maximum thiel-

ness about 50 mm,, maximum height of last chamber 71 mm., median height of

last chamber 50 mm. The shell is not preserved, The whorls are compressed,

flattened laterally and narrowly rounded ventrally. The flanks are slightly

inflated near the inner and compressed near the outer third of their heicht.

There are 14-15 chambers in the last whorl. The sutures are shaped as in

A, clarkei, and show the “staggered” arrangement described above.

Comparison, This form differs from A. clarket clearly in the shape of the

conch which is much more laterally compressed and has a more marked ventro-

lateral compressed zone. The chambers are sliorter and more closely set. Other-

wise the septation does not deviate from the typical shape of the suture in

A, clarkei. It differs from A. australis in the shape of the suture line.

Stratigraphic position and age. This species comes from a bryozoal lime-

stone which is the equivalent of the Port Willunga Beds of the Maslin-Aldinga

Bay standard section. The typical foraminiferal fauna of the Port Willunga

Beds with Sherbornina was found at Stansbury but has not yet been described,

The age of these beds is considered as Late Oligocene.

ATURIA AUSTRALIS MeCoy

Pl. xxxv, fig. la, b and 2

1944 Aturia australis McCoy, Teichert, J. Paleont., vol. 18, p. 73, pl. 14, text

fig. 3.

Material. 1. Muddy Creek, Victoria, A.U.G.D. No, 15108. 2. Naracoorte

Quarries, South Australia, S.A.M, No. 10544, No. 8810, and probably also

A.U.G.D. No. F15097-8 (received without label from Kingston School). Both

collections inelude partial internal moulds of several specimens. 3. Table Cape,

Tasmania, M,U.G.D. No. B118. 4. Mt, Gambier, South Australia.

Preservation. The specimens from Muddy Creek are mostly perfectly

preserved shells. Those from Naracoorte are mostly large internal moulds whieh

are perfect and not compressed, but tend to become disjointed. The specimen

from Table Cape is a fragment of an outer whorl of a large conch with the

chambers ventrally up to 40 mm. long. Only an internal mould of a single

chamber is available from Mt. Gambier.

Remarks. The characters and affinities of this species were recently dis-

cussed by Teichert, who showed that an orally directed bulge in the septum just

aboye the siphuncular orifice, the even curvature of the lateral saddle (Teichert,

1944, fig. 2, 3), and the compressed shape of the conch distinguish this species

GLAESSNER — PeLacic Fossuts FROM SouTH AUSTRALIA 359

from A, clarkei, Nothing can be added to his detailed description exeept the

observation that the distinguishing characters are also clearly recognizable in

internal moulds. The only new record is that from Naracoorte,

Stratiqraphic distribution and age. Teichert had restricted the strati-

eraphie range of A. australis to Miocene, following Singleton. This is undoubtedly

eorrect for its type locality, Muddy Creek, and for Beaumaris, in Vietoria.

Teichert questioned the New Zealand records which have since been eliminated,

with the exception of a Late Oligocene or Karly Miocene “A. cf. australis”

(Fleming, 1945). Teiechert also doubts the correctness of the record from the

Gellibrand River, hut neither this material nor the specimens trom Brown's

Creel to whieh Chapman veferred are available for re-examination, The species

also occurs at Spring Creek near Torquay (Victoria), Table Cape (Tasmania),

and Mt. Gambier (South Australia). At all these Jocalities a foraminiferal fauna

which is older than that trom Muddy Creek was found and the age of the strata

is probably late Oligocene. The age of the limestone at Naracoorte has not

yet been established, but it is probably not much vounger than the Mt. Gambier

limestone. <1. australis lias not heen found in the Eocene where A. clarket

occurs. The relationship between the two species is therefore not one of con-

temporaneity in different areas, but one of substitution in time, This should

make them most valuable index fossils,

2. THE OCCURRENCE OF TERTIARY PENGUIN REMAINS

IN SOUTED AUSTRALTA

In 1938 Finlayson described the first fossil penguin bone from Australia,

a left humerus, which he named Palaeeudyptes cf. antarcticus Huxley. Three

more penguin bones have been found recently in the Tertiary of South Australia.

Pending description and identification of these remains, which will be under-

tuken by Dr. G. G. Simpson at the American Museum of Natural History where

the necessary comparative material is available, only a record of their discovery

and stratigraphic relations is included in the present communication.

The first specimen was found by W. Burdett at Witton Bluff, at the southern

end of Christie’s Beach, about 16 miles south of Adelaide. The description given

by Mr. Finlayson was based on the lateral (external) aspect of the bone (S.A.M.

No. P7158). It has since been freed from the matrix which is a soft 2lauconitic

marl It comes from the “Transitional Marl’ Member which forms the base

of the Blanche Point Marla and overlies the Tortachilla Limestone at this

locality as it does at Maslin Bay 7 miles further south (Reynolds, 1953), where

W. J. Parr found Hanthenina alabamensis compréssa and other Upper Bocene

360 REcorDs OF THE S.A. MusEUM

foraminifera in the Transitional Marl. The foraminiferal faunas from this

locality and from the matrix of Finlayson’s Palaeeudyptes show close agreement.

Their investigation is proceeding. Howchin had incorrectly considered the

marine sequences at these localities (below transgressive Pliocene) as Miocene.

In 1952 IT found another penguin bone, a right tibiotarsus (S.A.M. No.

P10862) in situ just below the top of the Banded Marl Member of the Blanche

Point Marls north of Port Noarlunga Jetty, at the base of the cliff extending

southward from Witton Bluff, at high water level. This bed is, according to

Miss M. Wade who mapped and measured the cliff section, about 20-25 feet above

the Transitional Marl. There is no significant change in the foraminiferal fauna

and the age of the bed is probably Late Eocene. The proximal end of the bone

was eroded away by the sea and the distal end as found in the rock matrix was

incomplete, probably because of weathering prior to embedding. The shaft of

the bone is well preserved.

A third bone (pl. xxxvi, fig. la, b), a right humerus (8.A.M. No. P10863),

was received soon afterwards from Mr. P. Pritchard, of Mt. Gambier, Mr.

Max Pritchard had found it in Pritchard Brothers’ building-stone quarry

about 74 miles west-north-west of the town of Mt. Gambier. It was completely

embedded in bryozoal limestone but the distal end was lost when a block of stone

was cut during quarrying operations. The proximal part is completely preserved

but its surface is worn. When the matrix was carefully removed from the surface

of the shaft of the humerus it was found marked with several deep grooves

running across it obliquely on both sides. They are sharp-edged, narrow, and

slightly irregular on the external side, and shallower, with more rounded edges,

on the internal side. They are obviously injuries inflicted by some animal, either

in connection with or subsequent to the death of the penguin. They were infilled

with bryozoal limestone matrix. The contrast between the sharp somewhat

splintered cuts on one side and the corresponding smoother depressions on the

other could be due to slight abrasion of the upper surface by current-driven sand

on the sea floor prior to complete embedding. This was suggested to me by

Mr. P. Lawson, of the South Australian Museum, It is thought that the parallel

cuts were made by the bite of a shark or a squalodont whale. Large sharks’ teeth

occur in the Gambier Limestone, and the tooth of a Squalodon, found at the

same time as this bone, is described below.

The fourth penguin bone, a small left femur (S.A.M. No. P10870) was

found and presented to the writer by Mr. D. J. Leonard, of Adelaide, who

discovered it while working on the surface of a Mt. Gambier building stone

block. It was taken from tlie matrix undamaged, but both ends showed signs

861

GLAESSNER —- PELAGIC FossiLs FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA

usTynfuse,,

WeIpPIojseqeg,,

seboig

UDL40991 A

DIDNIUGHYD LYLI2 *F,

8SIL ‘oedg, I

Z980T “edgy, Vays] L2YL0]9 “Fg

dnoay yystuyy

‘ST BTTYORIIO,

SPRL

quiog eyourlg

speg ATR

Ss UBUTBUIgQ

quorusynun

uopoppnbsni0g% | OL8OT *9°dg» SISUALUNGSUDIS *F,

“‘qSOUNI'T Iorqures) pue % speg

asuasarquinb pus

uopoppnbs'. | €980T ‘edgy. SYDEND “V4 BaUnTTIM WO

‘ds -u

; UBIABLIN]A,, gsnqaoonp By 5 g

* °

Delp Larquoy 83104 Mh sunbuag Dungy SDUnD Ty vate {np

"4W—fnwunyy *UDLO LT quaourd “3S!

T WTaVvb

qusv0

aeddq

euss03T[0|

euso0Ty

IOMO'T

abe

862 Recorps of tHe S.A, Mus—eum

of wear and weathering prior to embedding. Bryozoal colonics were found in

crowing position attached to the surface of the bone. The proximal part was

deeply splintered with a V-shaped edge, suggesting that this part may have

been bitten off. Abrasion would have removed the projecting caput femoris

rather than an adjoining trianeular portion.

The Gambier Limestone, a thick-bedded aggregate of coarse bryozoal,

echinoderm and mollusean fragmentary and complete specimens, is younger than

the Blanche Point Marl and corresponds in lithology and general character of

its foraminiferal fauna (which is being examined) to some of the Port Willunga

Beds of the Maslin-Aldinga Bay Section, Typical Hocene and Miocene fora-

minifera are absent and the age of the deposit is considered as Oligocene, It

rests uncontormably on the paralie (intermittently marine) sands and clays

of the Knight Group.

The stratigraphic position of the four penguin bones is shown in Table 1.

3. A CHETACEAN TOOTH FROM THE GAMBIER LIMESTONE

SQUALODON GAMBIRRENSE sp, noy,

Text fie. 5a-¢

Material. One isolated perfectly preserved molariform tooth, probably from

the right mandible.

Occurrence. Gambier Limestone, Pritchard Brothers’ quarry, about 74

miles west-north-west of Mt. Gambier. Presented by Mr. P. Pritchard, of Mt.

Gambier, 1952.

Age. Probably Late Oligocene.

Holotype. A.U.G.D. No. F 15107.

Diagnosis, The species is based on a compressed molariform tooth in which

both eutting edges are denticulate, the median cusp is large, the enamel is

smooth on the labial and finely vertically ridged on the lingual side near the

hase: the roots are widely separated below a thin isthmus.

Description. The tooth, which is unworn, shows a compressed, triangular,

denticulate crown and two widely separated roots which are joined below the

erown by a thinner lamina (“isthmus”) to about one-third of their length. The

crown ends in a strong median point which has a long euryed anterior and a

shorter almost straight posterior cutting edge. The anterior edge of the tooth

shows three denticles decreasing rapidly in size downward, The first (upper)

resembles the median point in shape but is much smaller, The second and third

Guarssnrek — PeLacic Fossius from Soura AUSTRALIA 363

are conical. The eutting edge which is pronounced on the first and second

denticle vanishes on the third. In some places, such as the base of the main

point and the anterior edge of the upper denticle, is seems to show a minute

secondary denticulation, The posterior edge of the tooth shows four well-

developed denticles which decrease regularly in size downward, and a minute

trace of a fifth. The euttine edge extends to the posterior end of the fourth

denticle and shows a fine secondary denticulation on the posterior edge of the

third. The maximum antero-posterior diameter of the tooth les above the

base of the crown, owing to the pronounced curvature of the edges of the third

anterior and fourth posterior denticles, The general outline of the crown is

broadly triangular, the points of the denticles being directed upward rather than

Vig. 5. ace. Squalodon yambiercnse Glaossner. ILolotype, a, labial view; b, lingual view; e,

anterior view. Nat, size (approx.),

forward or backward. The bases of the denticles are separated by pronounced

“valleys” extending up the slopes of the crown, There is also a short, wide,

median depression leading from the centre of the erown towards the isthmus.

Qn the labial side the surface of the enamel is pertectly smooth and only slightly

fluted by the “valleys” hetween the denticles, On the lingual side there are faint

straight vertical rueosities which converge in the direction of the main point

and disappear without reaching it. They do not form any prominent projecting

points on the surface. The base of the enamel crown is a sinuous line, faintly

S-shaped above each root base and rising to an angular deep embayment labially

and a rounded shallower embayment lingually. The roots are constricted below

the erown, with irregular shapes and roughly triangular transverse sections. The

maximum antero-posterior diameter of the posterior root exceeds that of the

364 Recorps oF THE S.A. MusEuUM

anterior root, but there is little difference Letwecu Lheir transverse diameters.

The distance between the roots varies little though the lower end of the anterior

root is shehtly curved backward. The isthmus ends below in a sharp edge which

is Pierced in the middle by a pin-hole opening.

Measurements. Antero-posterior diameter (maximum) JO nim., antero-

posterior diameter at base of crown 27-4 mm., median height of crown on lingual

surface 22-0 mim., median height of crown on labial surface 20°39 mm., maximum

height of crown (from lowest level of enamel vertically to main point) 26-0 mm.,

maximum thickness of crown 11-0 mm., length of isthmus (labial) 12-4 mm.,

length of isthmus (lingual) 9-0 min., length of anterior root over 30 mm., length

of posterior root over 29 min., transverse diameter of roots about LO mm., antero-

posterior diameter of posterior root 13-2 mm., antero-posterior diameter of

anterior root 10-1 mm., maximum antero-posterior diameter at maximunt cor-

vexity of roots 29:2 mm., same immediately below crown 27-2 mim., total length

(height) of tooth as preserved 54 mm.

Discussion. In 1881 Sanver established the species Zeuglodon harwoodi on

a molariform serrate tooth “and the fraements of a second” which was left

undeseribed. The type material scems to have been lost (Hall, 1911). It came

from a fossiliferous yellow calcareous clay on the River Murray near Wellington.

South Australia, None of the fossils from that locality as named by Sanger.

who considered then as “Hocene,” vives any definite indication of age, but they

are definitely pre-Pliocenc. The accompanying fauna consisted of sharks,

Aturia, lamellibranchs, gastropods, and echinoids. The exact locality is not

known, The tooth is compressed and rather small, the antero-posterior diameter

being 23 mm. and the median height of the crown 19 mm. There are four

denticles on the anterior and six on the posterior edge, The median cusp is not

much larger than the adjoiming lateral denticles. The surface of the enamel

is not deseribed in the text but appears smooth in the drawing which is probably

correct. Coarse rugosities such 4s appear on other Australian squalodont teeth

would have attracted the anuthor’s attention and would have been mentioned in

his otherwise detailed deseription. The roots are broken off below a thin ¢on-

necting “isthmus” and the author was “inclined to think that possibly the

isthinus was wanting in the portion broken off, so that the pillars became two

distinct fangs” (p. 299). These details are important in the interpretation

of this fossil.

The species was diseussed by Hall (1911), who attributed to it a tooth

from Mt. Gambier on account of a similarity in the thickness of the roots whieh

he cousidered as different from those of Parasqualodon unlkinsoni MeCoy. Te

GLaEssNen — PELAGIC Fossits FRoM SourH AUSTRALIA 865

thought that “such a marked difference in the proportionate size of the roots

would probably be correlated with differences in the strength of the jaws”

(p. 258) while he cousidered the “variation in the ornament” as less important.

On that basis he established the zenus Parasqualodon for MeCoy’s species and the

genus Metasyualodon for Sanger’s species, describing it as follows:

“Roots of molariform teeth slender and only a little longer than (he height

of the crown, the iwo fangs connected by a thin ‘isthmus’ much as figured by

Lydekker in Prosqualodon, but the fangs more nearly approaching one another.

The material does not inform us as to whether the fangs were connected through-

out their leneth by the isthmus, ov whether they projected freely beyond it.

Lateral cusps rather large. Ornament as in Parasqualodon.”

This generic description is obviously influenced by Hall’s assignment of

the tooth from Mt. Gambier (in the National Museum of Victoria) to Sanger’s

species. The study of more complete remains of toothed whales shows clearly

that Hall’s basic assumption was wrong and that the ornamentation of the

surface is a valid taxonomic character while the “proportionate size of the roots”

depends on the position of the teeth in the jaws. Kellogg (1923, p. 20) stated:

“The ornamentation of the enamel crown (of the tooth from Mt. Gambier)

suggests a closer relationship with Parasqualodon wilkinsoni. In that ease this

tooth represents one of the posterior premolars.” Flynn (1948) fully deseribed

a fine skull of Prosqualodon duidi and on this occasion revised Hall’s identi-

fications. This led to the following revision of the legend to Hall’s plate 36:

Hall Flynn Locality

Fig. 1 ?Parasqualodon wilkinsont q Waurn Ponds

Fig. 2. as tt Prosqualodon dawidt 49 fs

Vig. 3. a3 ” ” ? Spring Creel

Fig, 4 A hs sf Table Cape

*Fig, 5 - 4 Purasqualodon Castle Cove

wilkinson

Fig. 6. Metasqualodon harwaodi ?Parasqualodon Mt. Gambier

wilkinsana

*Kig. 7, : ba Metasqualodon Wellington

harwooda

(Figures of holotypes are marked in the above list with *.)

Though neither Kelloge nor Flynn are quite definite in assigning the tooth

of Hall’s fig. 6 to MeCoy’s species, it obviously does not belone to Metasqualodon

or to Sanger’s species. The genus Wetasqualodon vests therefore on the lost

366 Recorvs oF THE S.A, MuskuM

specimen from Wellington only, and until another similar specimen is found it

cannot be redefined or properly understood. The new tooth from Mt. Gambier

regetubles Sanver’s fig. \ (=Hall’s fig. 7) only in the smooth crown, but differs

in the size and number of denticles and particularly in the very large size of the

main cusp. Its substitution as a neotype of Wetasqualodon harwoodi would not

be justified.

Abel (1913) had tentatively placed Zeuglodon harwoodi in the genus Micro-

zeugloden Stromer (Type Zeuglodon caucasicum Lydekker). The discovery

of a new speciinen from the Oligocene of the Caueasus, belonging or at least

closely related to Lydekker’s species (Rjabinin, 1938) proved that the slull of

the Cancasiaty form has the character of the Archaeoceti and not that of the

squalodontids. Abel had proposed the establishment of a ‘amily Mierozeuglodon-

tidae within the Archaeoveti. A distinction between Archaeoceti and Squalodon-

tidae on the basis of isolated teeth is difficult but not impossible, and perliaps

not very important if there has been a gradation trom the older to the younger

group as some authors postulate. The differences im the teeth have not heen

clearly stated, but in his description of Kekenodon onamata Heetor, Kellogg

(1923, p. 27) says: “The unusual appearance of the accessory cusps, the charac-

ter of the enamel surface of the erown, and the large size of the teeth are

peculiarities which place this fori among the zeuglodonts. Sugh features are

imknown for any squalodont.” Te assigned ta the Archaeoceti Phococetus

vasconum (Delfortrie), which was based on a single tooth, as their youngest

representative (Lower Mioceuc), The appearance of the aceessory cusps and

the character of the enamel surface, revealed by further preparation of the

holotype, which will be redeseribed elsewhere, place Squalodon serratus Davis

(Lower Oligocene, White Roek River quarries, Okuku River, North Canterbury,

New Zealand) in the vieinity of Kekeneden, but it is much smaller than any of

the teeth of A. onamata. WW had been sugvested by Flynn (1945, p, 186) that

Davis’ species might belong to Parasqualodon wilkinson MeCoy, but this proved

to be incorrect.

The new tooth from Mt, Gambier differs in the character of the aveessory

cusps. the main cusp, the enamel surface and the roots from all these genera

and species, ineluding Parusyualodon and Prosqualodon. Although it resembles

typical Archaeoceti such as Dorudon in the outline of the crown and the separa-

tion of the roots, it is smaller and much more compressed and resembles more

closely species of the genera Neosywalodon and Squalodan. The teeth of Neo-

squalodon are ‘auch smaller, The teeth of Squalodon are often of the size of the

present specimen, but in most species their surface 1s more rugose. It is signi-

GLAnssNER — Petacic Fossms rrom SoutH AUSTRALIA 367

ficant that a species distinguished mainly by smooth enamel, 8. dalpiazi, was

recently deseribed by Fabiani (1949). He has also shown that the roots of

8. svillae (Agassiz) (8S. melitensis Blainville sp, in Kellogg, 1923) are straight

and not convergent at their lower ends. The median cusps of molariform teeth

of Squalodon are often strongly developed, as in the present species. For these

reasons it is best assigned to the widespread genus Squalodon, though confirma-

tion from at least the discovery of complete jaws is still required. Benham

(1942, p. 267) has referred isolated more strongly seulptured teeth from the

Middle Oligocene of New Zealand to a species Squalodon andrewi. This material

requires further investigation.

4, PIRST RECORD OF A CETOTHERUD WHALE FROM AUSTRALIA

In 1885 R. Tate, in a paper on the geology of the Murray River Basin, under

the heading “Species of the Lower Murravian,” stated :

“This series is characterized rather by lithological than palaeontological

characters, which latter are somewhat negative, as the species are few in number

Fi gs

Wig. 6, 7. <Aglaocetus? sp. noy. 6. Diagrammatic dorsal view of cranium, SO—supraocecipital

shield, PA—parietals, SOP—supraorbital process of frontal, SQ—squamosum. About

1/9 nat. size. 7. Diagrammatic frontal view of broken cranium, showing slope of

supraorbital processes.

and somewhat sparsely distributed. Cetacean remains have occurred to me

only at this horizon, notably at MacBean’s Pound, four miles from Blanche-

town, whence I obtained the entire lower jaw of a balenoid whale, six feet long,

and at Murbko, 14 miles north of Blanchetown, whence I obtained a cranium,

The anterior half of a Paguroid (sic) fish in excellent preservation was obtained

at Morgan from these beds.” (Tate, 1885, p. 41,)

365 Recorps OF THE S.A. MusEUM

Since that time there seems to have beet no further reference to the whale

eranium from Murbke, Enquiries have now resulted in the re-discovery of this

skull in the collections of the South Australian Museum (No. P63), Incidentally,

Tate’s pagroid fish was found in the collections of the Adelaide University

Geology Department (No. F15110) and is now being deseribed hy Mr. T. Seott,

The beds termed “Lower Murrayian” by Tate are currently placed m the Lower

Miocene.

'The posterior portion of the skull is well preserved and entirely undistorted

(fic. 6, 7). It is 480 mm. wide between the broken ends of the zygomatic

processes and over 800 mm. long from the occipital condyli to the broken

anterior edges of the supraorbital processes. Its maximum height is about

240 mm. and the distance from the upper margin of the foramen magnum 10

the apex of the supraoceipital shield is 213 mim. The frontorostral portion is

missing, but an wndistorted transverse section (fig. 7) near the orbital plane is

exposed on the broken face of the specimen. The palatal surface was well

preserved and has been freed from the matrix by a previous investigator. The

skull is filled with yellowish limestone matrix in which small fossils occur.

This skull, which was discovered by Tate more than 70 years ayo, is the

first member of the family Cetotheriidae, a group of ancestral whalebone whales,

from Australia, Kelloge (1928, p. 185) deseribed the main characters of this

family as follows:

“we find that the skulls of all known edentulous Miocene cetotheres

have stpraorbital processes that slope gradually outward from the dorsal surface

of the interorbital region to the rim of the orbit and are never abruptly depressed

basally below the level of the former as in the balaenopterine whales. Many of

these cetotheres retained a well defined intertemporal region, constituted entirely

by the parietals, whieh meet along the median line in front. of the supraoecipital

shield. In most species the brainease is short and broad, but the supraoccipital

shield is quite yarialle in shape and extent, depending in part upon the degree

of forward overthrust.”

Kellogg goes on to discuss the relative position of the maxillaries to the

frontals and the relations between vostrum and brainease generally, The relevant

portion of the skull is not preserved in ihe present specimen.

More recently, the same author (Kelloge, 1940, pp. 3-4) confirmed his diag-

nosis of the Cetothariidae: ‘The extinct whalebone whales belonging to the family

Cetotheriidae were the preciirsors of the Recent Mysticeti. ‘hese cetaceans differ

from one another in the extent of the forward overthrust of the supraoccipital

shield and in the degree of interdigitation of the posterior ends of the rostral

bones with the interorbital region. Skulls of all Recent whalebone whales

GLAESsSNER — PeiAcic Fossits rrom SouTH AUSTRALIA 369

differ from those of the archaic less highly modified celotheres in one very

important detail, namely, the abrupt depression of the basal portions of the

supraorbital processes below the median interorbital portions of the frontals.

On all these cetothere skwils the supraorbital processes slope gradually down-

ward and outward from the level of the dorsal surface of the interorbital region.

Thus these cetothere skulls are particularly distinguished from all Recent whale-

bone whale skulls by the fact that the proximal portions of their supraorbital

processes have not as yet been abruptly depressed below the level of the median

interorbital elevation of the frontals.”

Kelloge has also described a mmaber of new genera (Mixocetus, Cophocetus,

Aglaocetus Kellogg, 1934) of which the last named, from the Lower Miocene (?)

Patagonian Formation, is nearest to the South Australian specimen. This shows

in dorsal view a very large triangular supraoccipital shield without a distinct

median crest. Its apex reaches forward to just beyond the level of the posterior

margins of the supraorbital processes of the frontal. The parietals form a short

sharp savittal crest in front of the apex and separate it from the rostral elements.

Differences in the posterior and palatal aspects of the skull and deficiencies in

its preservation, particularly of the terminations of the zygomatic processes, make

it difficult to decide, without further detailed study and comparison, whether the

South Australian specimen can be placed in the South American genus or in one

of the other closely related genera, but the characters mentioned above and illus-

trated in fig. 6 and 7 justify the inelusion of this fossil in the family Cetotheriidae

under the provisional designation of Aglaocetus ? nov. sp.

It is of considerable interest that Kelloge (quoted by Benham, 1942,

pp, 261, 263) had considered the fragmentary skulls from the Upper Oligocene

of New Zenland, deseribed by Benham first (1937) as Lophocephalus (nom,

preoce.) and later (1942) as Mauicetus parki, as similar to Aglaocetus, The

arguments given hy Benham against this view do not seem to carry much

weight. These and other New Zealand cetacean remains need careful re-prepara-

tion, re-examination, and comparison with Australian and other material which

is likely to yield important results in the fields of phylogeny and biostratigraphy.

REFERENCES.

Abel, O. (1918) : Die Vorfahren der Bartenwale, Denksehr. Akad, d. Wissenseh.

Wien, vol. 90, pp. 155-224.

Baker, G. (1944): The geology of the Port Campbell distriet. Proc. Roy. Soe.

Vie., vol. 56, pp. 77-108.

Benham, W. B. (1987): On Lophocephalus. a new genus of zeuglodont cetacea.

Trans. Roy. Soe. N.Z., vol. 67, pp. 1-14, pls. 1-7.

370 Recorps or THe S.A. MusEuM

Benham, W. B. (1942) : Fossil Cetacea of New Zealand, V. Mauieetus, a. generic

name substituted for Lophocephalus Benham. Trans. Roy. Soc. N.Z., vol.

71, pp. 260-270, pls. 44-47.

Chapman, F, (1915) : New or little known fossils in the National Museum, Pt, 17,

Some Tertiary Cephalopods. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vie., vol. 27, n.s. pp. 350-361,

pls. 3-8.

Chapman, F, (1921): The specifie name of the Australian Aturia and its distri-

bution, Proc. Roy, Soe. Vie., vol. 34, ns. pp. 12-16.

Fabiani, R. (1949); Gli Odontoceti del Miocene Inferiore della Sicilia. Mem.

Tust, Geol. Univ. Padova, vol. 16, 32 pp., 2 pls,

Fleming, C. A. (1945): Some New Zealand Tertiary Cephalopods. Trans. Roy.

Soc. N.Z., vol. 74, pp. 411-418.

Flynn, T, T. (1948) : Description of Prosqualodon davidi, a fossil Cetacean from

Tasmania, Trans. Zool. Soe. London, vol. 26, pp. 153-197, pls. 1-6.

Finlayson, H. H, (1988) : On the occurrence of a fossil penzuin in Miocene beds

in South Australia, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., vol. 62, pp. 14-17, pl. 1,

Glaessner, M. F, (1953): Conditions of Tertiary sedimentation in southern

Australia. Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Aust., vol. 76, pp. 141-146.

Hall, T. 8, (1911); On the systematie position of the species of Squalodon and

Zeuglodon described from Australia and New Zealand, Proc, Roy. Soc.

Vie., vol. 23, ns., pp. 257-265, pl. 36,

Kelloge, R. (1923): Description of two squalodonts recently discovered in the

Calvert Cliffs, Maryland; and notes on the shark-toothed Cetaceans., Proe.

U.S. Nat. Mus., vol, 62, art. 6.

Kellogy, R, (1928); The history of whales, their adaptation to life in the water.

(Juart. Rev. Biol., vol. 3, pp, 29-76, 174-208.

Kellogg, R. (1934): The Patagonian fossil whalebone whale, Cetotherium moreni

(Lydekker). Carnegie Inst. Publ. No. 44, pp. 63-81.

Kellogg, R. (1936): A review of the Archaeoceti, Carnegie Inst, Publ, No. 482.

Kelloge, R. (1940): On the Cetotheres figured by Vandelli. Bol. Mus. Min.

Geol. Univ. Lisboa,, No. 7-&,

Miller, A. K. and Crespin, I. (1939): An Atutia from the Northwest Division

of Western Australia. .J. Paleont., vol, 15, pp. 79-81.

Newton, R. B. (1919): Aturia aturi from Western Australia. Proc. Malacol.

Soe., vol. 13, pp, 160-167, pls. 5, 6G.

Reynolds, M. A. (1953): The Cainozoie suceession of Maslin and Aldinga Bays,

South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soe. 8. Aust., vol. 76, pp. 114-140.

GLAESSNER — PELAGIC Fossits FROM SouTH AUSTRALIA 871

Rjabinin, A. (1938): Microzeuglodon aff. caucasicum (Lydekker) from the

Upper Maikop Beds of Kabristan. Probl. Paleont., Moscow Univ., vol. 4,

pp. 137-185, 16 pls.

Sanger, E. B. (1881): On a molar tooth of Zeuglodon from the Tertiary beds

of the Murray River near Wellington. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, vol. 5,

pp. 298-300.

Tate, R. (1885): Notes on the physical and geological features of the basin of

the Lower Murray River. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., vol. 7, pp. 24-46.

Teichert, C. (1944): The genus Aturia in the Tertiary of Australia. J. Paleont.,

vol. 18, pp. 73-82, pls. 14-16.

Teichert, C. (1947): New nautiloids from the older Tertiary of Victoria. Min.

Geol. J. Melbourne, vol. 3, No. 2.

Teichert, C. and Cotton, B. C. (1949): A new Aturia from the Tertiary of South

Australia. Ree. 8. Aust. Mus., vol. 9, pp. 255-256, pl. 21.

872 Recorps or THE S.A. MusEUM

EXPLANATION OF PLATES

PLATE XXXIV

Fig. la, b. Aturia stansburiensis Glaessner. Holotype. 5/6 nat. size.

Mig. 2. Aturia clarkei attenuata Teichert and Cotton, S.A.M. Spec. No. 7153. 5/6 nat.

size.

PLATE XXXV

Fig. la, b. Aturia australis McCoy. A.U.G.D. Spec. No. F15097. Nat. size.

Fig. 2. Aturia australis McCoy. Topotype. A.U.G.D. Spee. No. F15108. Nat. size.

Fig. 3. Aturia clarkei attenuata Teichert and Cotton. S.A.M. Spec. No. F5219. Nat. size.

PLATE XXXVI

Fig. la, b. Humerus of penguin showing bite marks diagonally across the shaft. Note that

the lower end (fig. 1a) was cut off with a saw which also left marks at a steeper angle

than the matrix-infilled bite marks. Mt. Gambier. S.A.M. Spec. No, P10863. Nat. size.

Fig. 2. Femur of penguin, as extracted from the matrix, showing the proximal end fractured,

probably by a bite. S.A.M. Spec. No. P10873. About x2.

Rec. S.A. Museum Vou. XI, Phare XXXIV

PLATE XXXV

VoL.

S.A. MuskumM

Rc.

Rec. S.A. \Mbuseum Vow. XT, Phare XXXVI

PRELIMINARY ACCOUNT OF THE REPTILIA AND AMPHIBIA

COLLECTED BY THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY-

COMMONWEALTH GOVERNMENT-SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION

EXPEDITION TO ARNHEM LAND (APRIL TO NOVEMBER, 1948)

BY FRANCIS J. MITCHELL, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

Under the field curatorship of the ichthyologist, Dr. R. R. Miller, the expedition made an official

collection of 729 specimens. These have been divided between the United States National Museum,

Washington, and the South Australian Museum, Adelaide, as indicated by the abbreviations

U.S.N.M. and S.A.M. R. respecively, which precede the reference numbers entered herein. All

holotype specimens have been deposited in the latter institution. In addition, a series of 179

specimens comprising the bulk of a collection obtained by the expedition transport officer, Mr. J. E.

Bray, and presented to the Australian Museum, Sydney, has also been made available for inclusion

in this report. Such specimens are indicated by the abbreviation A.M. R. In all, 908 specimens

representing 65 species and subspecies.

PRELIMINARY’ ACCOUNT or tHe REPTILIA anp AMPHIBIA

COLLECTED BY THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIRT Y-COMMONWEALTH

GOVERNMENT-SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION EXPEDITION TO ARNHEM

LAND (April to Nevember, 1948)

By FRANCIS J. MITCHELL, Sour Ausrracian Museum

Plate xxxvyii and text fig. 1-7

Unper the field euratorship of the ichthyologist, Dr. R. R. Miller, the expedition

made an official collection of 729 specimens. These have been divided between

the United States National Museum, Washington, and the South Anstralian

Museum, Adelaide, as indicated by the abbreviations U.S.N.M. and S.A.M, R.

respectively, which precede the reference numbers entered herein. All holotype

specimens have been deposited in the latter institution. In addition, a series

of 179 specimens comprising the bulk of a collection obtained by the expedition

transport officer, Mr. J. FE. Bray, and presented to the Australian Museum,

Sydney, has also heen made available for inclusion in this report. Such specimens

are indicated by the abbreviation A.M. R. In all, 908 specimens representing

65 species and subspecies.

The present study was undertaken at the South Australian Museum and

extensive use was made of its research collection for purposes of reference and

comparison.

The titles of various Australian political areas have been abbreviated as

follows: N.T., for Northern Territory; Qld., for Queensland; N.S.W., for New

South Wales; Vict., for Victoria; S. Aust., for South Australia; and W. Aust.,

for Western Australia.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS.

I wish to acknowledge the co-operation of Dr. Remington Kellogg and Dr.

Doris M. Cochran, of the United States National Museum, Washington, and Dr.

A. B. Walkom and Mr. J. R, Kinghorn, of the Australian Museum, Sydney, in

facilitating my examination of the total reptile and amphibian collection. Their

assistance ig much appreciated. I am also indebted to Mr. Arthur Loveridge,

Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard, Mr. G. Mack, Queensland Museum,

1A more detailed account will appear in the official journal of the expedition to be published

at a later date.

874 Recorps OF THE S.A. MusEuM

Brisbane, and Messrs. J. Henry and 8. J. Copland, of the Macleay Museum,

University of Sydney, who forwarded type and other material housed in their

respective institutions for my examination.

TESTUDINATA

Famity CHELONIIDAE

ERETMOCHELYS ImMBrRiIcaTa (Linnaeus)

Testudo imbricata Linnaeus, 1766, p. 350.

Eretmochelys squamata Agassiz, 1857, p. 382.

U.S.N.M, 128527, Black Rock Point, Coberg Peninsula, N.T.

LORICATA

Famity CROCODYLIDAE

CrocopyLus porosus Schneider

Crocodylus porosus Schneider, 1801, p. 169.

U.S.N.M. 128526, Black Rock Point, Coberg Peninsula, N.T.

U_S.N.M. 128685, South end of Melville Bay, west of Yirrkalla, N.T.

SERPENTES

Famity BOIDAE

LIASIS CHILDRENT CHILDRENI Gray

Liasis childrent Gray, 1842, p. 44.

U.S.N.M, 128469, Port Langdon, N.T.

Lasts Fuscus Fuscus Peters

Liasis fuscus Peters, 1873, p, 607.

U.S.N.M. 128768, Oenpelli, N,T,

MoreELIA SPILOTES VARIEGATA Gray

Morelia variegata Gray, 1842, p. 43.

U.S.N.M. 128235 (head only), Lee Point, 9 miles north-east of Darwin,

N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128442, near Umba Kumba, Groote Eylandt, N.T.

As indicated by Loveridge (1934, p. 270), present data does not suggest any

correlation between the distribution of the variegata colour phase and a particular

geographical region or environment. However, no one worker has yet had the

opportunity of examining a large Australia-wide series of this species, and as

pure populations of both phases undoubtedly occur, variegata is herein retained.

{See also Mitehell (1951, p. 545).]

MircHet, —- Annem LANnp RepritiA AND AMPHITBIA 375

Famity COLUBRIDAE

ACHROCHORDUS JAVANICUS Hornstedt

Achrochordus javanicus Hornstedt, 1787, p. 307, pl. xii.

U.S.N.M. 128765-128767, Oenpelli, N.T.

8.A.M. R.2844 (2 specimens), Oenpelli, N.T.

ACHROCHORDUS GRANULATUS GRANULATUS (Schneider).

Hydras granulatus Schneider, 1799, p, 243.

U.S.N.M. 128511, Milimgimbi Island, N.T.

FORDONIA LEUCOBALIA (Schlegel)

Homalopsis leucobalia Schlegel 1837, p. 345, pl. xiii, fig. 8-9.

J.8.N.M. 128334, Inlet at dock for Delisseville, 11 miles west-south-west of

Darwin, N.T.

ENHYDRIS POLYLEPIS (Fischer)

Hypsirhina polylepis Fischer, 1886, p. 14.

U.S.N.M. 128474, Port Langdon, N.T.

U.S.N.M, 128450, near Umba Kumba, Groote Eylandt, N.T.

Kinghorn (1929, p. 90) appears to be in error when he records single sub-

caudals for macleayi Ogilby, a species which Loveridge (1934, p. 273) places in

the synonymy of polylepis.

AHAETULLA PUNCTULATA PUNCTULATA (Gray)

Leptophis punctulatus Gray, 1827, p. 432.

U.S.N.M. 128445-128447, near Umba Kumba, Groote Hylandt, N.T,

U.S.N.M. 128769-128771, S.A.M. R.2845, Oenpelli, N.T.

U.S.N.M, 128683-128684, Yirrkalla, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128470-128472, Port Langdon, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128233, West Point, 5 miles west of Darwin, N.T.

The longitudinal dark line under the tail, stated to be characteristic of the

New Guinea race lineolata (Guiehenot) is present in about half of this series,

being particularly prominent in the three specimens from Groote Eylandt. As

recorded by Loveridge (1948, p. 385) the horizontal diameter of the eye relative

to the other head dimensions varies considerably with age in this species.

NATRIX MATRU MAIRIL (Gray),

Tropidonotus mairti Gray, 1841, p. 442.

U.S.N.M. 128443-128444, near Umba Kumba, Groote Eylandt, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128772, Oenpelli, N.T.

376 Recorps or THE S.A. MusEuM

CERBERUS RHYNCHOPS AUSTRALIS (Gray)

Homalopsis australis Gray, 1842, p. 65.

U.S.N.M. 128264, Nighteliff, near Darwin, N,T.

A single South Australian Museum specimen from Melville Island, N.T.,

was also examined.

Ventral scales 146, 148; subeaudals in 48 (tail incomplete) and 46 pairs;

anal divided: 23 and 25 rows of keeled scales at midbody. A suture through the

nostril to the first labial on one side of the head and to the second labial on the

other in both specimens; loreal contacting the Ist, 2nd, 3rd and 4th, or 2nd, 3rd

and 4th upper labials. A single preocular seale extends around to a point well

under the eye; one or two sub- and two post-oculars.

The desienation of these two specimens to australis is based mainly on the

locality, it being evident from the above data that they do not conform satis-

factorily to any of the three subspecies as keyed by Loveridge (1948, p. 389),

his key being based on a series of 70 r. rhynchops, 5 r. novieguinea, 4 r. australis

and presumably data published by Bonlenger (1896, 1897) and De Rooij (1917).

Tf the tails were complete, both specimens would possess more than Love-

ridee’s maximum of 51 pairs of subcaudals and would be identifiable as 7. rhyn-

chops. On the other hand, if the diagnosis is based on the nasal cleft, there

would be equal grounds for placing these specimens with cither novmeguinea or

australis, Tt is possible that the eireumocular sealation will be found to provide

i better keying character for the separation of the three subspeeies. In figuring

australis Boulenger shows the nasal cleft joining the 2nd upper labial on one

side and the preocular on the other, with only the second and third upper labials

contacting the loreal, the fourth heing widely separated from it. De Rooij (1917,

fig, 70) figures rhynchops and shows a smaller preocular and two suboeulars.

Although it seems probable that australis and novaeguinea can he satis-

factorily distinguished from the type race, many more specimens will have to

be examined and their variation tabled before a practicable key can be devised.

Borea rusca (Gray)

Dendrophis fusca Gray, 1842, p. 54.

U.S.N.M. 128478, Port Langdon, N.T.

Famity ELAPIDAE

ASPIDOMORPHUS DIADEMA (Schlegel)

Calumaria diademu Schlegel, 1837, p, 32.

US.N.M. 128261, Nighteliff, 7 miles north-east of Darwin, N.T.

Midbody scales in 15 rows; 176 ventrals; 54 pairs of subeaudals; anal divided.

MircHeLL — ARNHEM LAND REPTILIA AND AMPHTBIA 377

Preocular almost separating the supraocular from the prefrontal, Nostril break-

ing the upper edge of the nasal shield.

The patterning of this specimen very closely resembles that of christieanus

Fry, with which this species coexists in the vicinity of Darwin. The head and

neck are black with a broad lighter band across the nape replacing the more

usual small crescent shaped marking. Upper labials and ventral surfaces white;

dorsal surfaces pale yellow, each scale being edged with brown, giving a net-

work effect.

ASPIDOMORPHUS CHRISTIEANUS (Fry }

Pseudelaps christieanus Fry, 1915, p. 91, fig. 6.

U.S.N.M, 128262, Niehteliff, 7 miles north-east of Darwin, N.T.

Midbody seales in 17 rows; 187 ventrals; 49 pairs of subeaudals; anal

divided, The nasal is widely separated from the preocular which joins the

frontal.

An additional specimen from Nighteliff was presented to the South Aus-

tralian Museum in 1949 and a note forwarded with it suggests that the species

is quife common within a Jimited distribution centred near Darwin, It is

registered S.A.M. R.2995, and possesses 17 midhody seales; 185 ventrals; 43

pairs of suheaudals and a divided anal. Tt is the larger of the two and measures

375 (319+56) mm.

The tails of both of these specimens appear to be complete, indicating that

the subcandal count is variable. It has heen recorded as 38 (type specimen),

49 and 43 (the present specimens), 56 (Loveridge, 1934, p. 276) and 57 (Long-

man, 1916, p. 48).

The general ground colour is almost white tending yellow middorsally; cach

seale is edged with purple, giving the dorsal surface a reticulate appearance. A

light band aeross the nape separates a dark purple neck band from the still

darker head.

The distributions of diadema und christieanus appear to meet in the vicinity

of Darwin, and the close superficial resemblance of the two snakes in this district,

together with the geographical segregation of christieanus in suitable districts

of north-western Australia, suggests that it may only be a subspecies of diadema,

distinenishable by its greater midbody count and several minor differences in

colouration. Both snakes display a wide variation in ventral and subeaudal

scale counts,

878 Recorps oF THE S,A, MuszEuM

DrMansi4 cartNata (Longman)

Diemenia carinata Loneman, 1915, p. 31, fig,

U.S.N.M. 128471, Port Langdon, N.T.

The record of this specimen from Port Langdon is interesting as it con-

siderably extends the known range of this arboreal Demansia, the type locality

being Cane Grass Station, yia Charlesville, in western Queensland.

DEMANSIA PSAMMOPHIS PSAMMOPHIS (Schlegel)

Hlaps psammophis Schlegel, 1837, p. 455.

U.S.N.M. 128448, near Umba Kumba, Groote Eylandt, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128263, Nighteliff, near Darwin, N,T.

PSEUDECHIS AUSTRALIS (Gray)

Naja australis Gray, 1842, p. 55.

U.S.N.M,. 128451, 5.A.M. R.2848 (2 specimens), near Umba Kumba, Groote

Kylandt, N.T.

OXYURANUS SCUTELLATUS (Peters)

Pseudechis scutellatus Peters, 1867, p. 710,

Oxyuranus maclennant Kinghorn, 1923, pp. 42-45.

U.S.N.M. 128773 (head and neck only), 20 miles N.B. of Oenpelli, N.T,

ACANTHOPHIS ANTARCTICUS ANTARCTICUS (Shaw)

Boa antarctica Shaw, 1894, pl. mxxxv.

U.S.N.M. 128476-128477, 5.A.M. R.3226, Port Langdon, N.T,

Head shields multikeeled, one specimen approaching the palpebrosa condi-

tion. General colouration typical of the species, these specimens possessing a

smooth scaled, strongly compressed, white extremity to the tail.

A comparison of this Arnhem Land material together with other northern

Australian specimens with southern Australian examples indicates that the colour

variation of the caudal extremity is largely, if not completely, correlated with

locality, Also, there would appear to be some variation in its form, southern

specimens possessing an acutely keeled extremity with stronely imbricate seales.

(See fig, 1.)

South Australian Museum specimens from the following localities were

examined. Those possessing a light coloured caudal extremity were from

Bathurst Head, Qld. (2 specimens); Coen River, Qld. (1 specimen); Melville

Island, N.T. (1 specimen); Roper River, N.T. (1 specimen).

MrrcHeELL — ARNHEM LAND RepritiA AND AMPHIBIA 879

BES

pests

Wig. |. Acunthophis antarcticus (Shaw): dorsal and lateral yiews of the caudal append

age, showing the variation in colour and form (see text),

Those possessing a dark coloured caudal extremity were from Penong, 8.

Aust. (1 specimen); Reevesby Island, 8. Aust. (1 specimen); Koonibba, 8. Aust.

(2 specimens); Ardrossan, S. Aust. (6 specimens); 20 miles west of Whyalla,

S. Aust. (1 specimen); Hallett’s Cove, S. Aust. (1 specimen); Denial Bay, 5S.

Aust. (1 specimen); Coorabie (near Fowlers Bay), 8. Aust. (1 specimen); and

7 specimens taken at local beaches near Adelaide, S. Aust.

Although T have been unable to find any other character correlated with this

caudal variation, its constancy within the material examined and apparent eeo-

graphic segregation indicate that it is more than an irregular variant, and the

possibility of the two groups being sub-specifieally distinet is worthy of further

consideration. In dealing with Indo-Australian specimens, De Rooij (1917,

p. 273) states “end of tail yellow or black.” Whether this statement is based on

the Indo-Australian material examined or merely following Boulenger (1896,

p. 455) is not clear. The specimen figured by De Rooij (op. cit. fig. 111) bas a

light caudal extremity.

Famity HYDROPHIIDAF

FypropHis ELEGANS (Gray )

Aluria elegans Gray, 1842, p. 61.

U.S.N.M. 128473, Port Langdon, N.T,

380 Recorps OF THE S.A. MusEUM

SAURIA

Famity GEKKONIDAE

HETERONOTA BINOEI Gray

Heteronota binoet Gray, 1845, p. 174.

U.S,N.M. 128539-128556, S.A.M. R.2854 (28 specimens), Yirrkalla, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128282-128291, 128463, A.M, R.12473 (3 specimens), R.13474 (3

specimens), Umba Kumba, Groote Eylandt, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128240-128246, Nighteliff, near Darwin, N.T.

U.S.N.M, 128518, Rocky Beach, Cape Arnhem, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128525, Black Rock Point, Coberg Peninsula, N.T.

A.M. R.12651 (7 specimens), Cape Arnhem, N.T.

HeMIpAcTyLus FRENATUS Dumeril and Bibron

Hemidactylus frenatus (Schleg,) Dumeril and Bibron, 1836, p. 366.

U.S.N.M. 128494, S.A.M. R.2872 (2 specimens), Milimgimbi Island, Crocodile

Islands, N.T.

OEDURA RHOMBIFERA Gray

Oedura rhombifera Gray, 1844, pl. xvi, fig. 6.

U.S.N.M. 128531-128534, S.A.M. R.2859 (3 specimens), Yirrkalla, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128460-128461, Central Hill, Groote Eylandt, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128293-128299, A.M. R.12627 (5 specimens), R.18518 (2 speci-

mens), R.13517 (2 specimens), Umba Kumba, Groote Eylandt, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128728, Oenpelli, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128516-128517, Birlouja Creek, N.T.

A.M. R.13559 (2 specimens), Cape Arnhem, N.T.

S.A.M. R.2870 (3 specimens), Gove Air Base, 8 miles south-west of Yirrkalla,

N.T.

OEDURA MARMORATA Gray

Oedura marmorata Gray, 1842, p. 52.

U.S.N.M. 128557-128565, S.A.M. R.2s04, Yirrkalla, N.T,

U.S.N.M. 128729, Oenpelli, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128515, Purlonkoima Creek, N.T.

A.M. R.13551-13553, Cape Arnhem, N.T.

Mrrenent. — Arnuem LAnn Repruura AND AMPHIBIA 38L

DIPLODACTYLUS STROPHURUS CILIARIS Boulenger

Diplodactylus ciliaris Boulenger, 1885, p. 98, pl. viii, fig. 2,

U.S.N.M. 128247, Nighteliff, near Darwin, N.T.

This specimen is almost topotypiec.

Brazenor (1951) and Glauert (1952) have contributed much toward elarify-

ing the taxonomy of this species and associated forms by examining the specimens

preserved in the National Museum, Melhourne, and the Western Australian

Milseum, Perth, respectively. In an endeavour to link the worl of these two

authors, the collection in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide, has been

examined and a veneral zougeographical study undertaken,

This has resulted in stropharus being considered a polytypie species in which

the subspecies spinigerus, ciliaris and aberrans ean be satisfactorily distinguished

from the type race. The subspecies intermedius Ovilby is provisionally recog-

nized, but additional work on its variation will have to be undertaken before

its status can be satisfactorily determined.

An analysis of the variation of the individual characters has revealed several

distinct geographical trends. The sapraciliary spines are well developed in the

northern. populations, reduced to short conical tubereles in Central Australian

specimens, and ill-defined or absent in material colleeted in the south-western

and south-eastern corners of the continent. A survey of the literature and the

specimens examined reveals all stages in this north to south gradation, and the

inconsistency of this, and other characters in the intermedius zone which separates

the typical populations of ciliaris and strophurus has resulted in two or more

of the races being recorded from the one locality, An example is two specimens

in the South Australian Museum collection taken at Well 32 on the Canning

Stock Route in Western Australia, One of these had been identified as ciliaris

and the other as intermedius. Both of these specimens have the supraciliary and

caudal spines reduced to short conical tubercles, but whereas the lineal distribu-

tion of the dorsal tnbereles persists in one specimen, there is little sign of

regularity in the other. Similarly, a collection of seventeen specimens eollected

from between the Kverard and Musgrave Ranges, South Australia, contains these

two variants, and other specimens showing additional intermediary stages.

Kinghorn (1929, pp, 80-51) identified three forms [rom New South Wales,

intermedius with regularly distributed dorsal tubercles, strophurus with scat-

fered dorsal tubercles, and some specimens from the northern halt of the State

which he identified as spinigerus. From the variation noted among some eollec-

tions taken further west, and the reference by Longman (1916, p, 50) to some

southern Queensland specimens possessing short supraciliary spines, it is sug-

382 Recorps oF THE S.A, MuszuM

vested that the latter specimens strictly belong to the subspecies ciliaris, although

the reduetion of the supraciliary spines, without a corresponding decrease in the

size of the caudal spines made spinigerus the only practicable identification at

that time.

An examination of several Western Australian specimens, together with

the data provided by Glauert (op. cit.) indicate a similar eradation of characters

between strophacrus and spinigerus, Typical specimens of spinigerus appear to

be restricted to within the Mulga-Hucalvpt line in the south-west, and although

some specimens taken to the north-east can be identified as spintgerus, they show

definite signs of gradation toward strophurus. Specimens examined from Laver-

ton, Maleolm and Frazer Range, Western Australia, possess reduced caudal

apines and distinet supraciliary tubercles. Glauerl (op. ett.) mentions that

some south-western specimens possess solid tubercles alone the supraeiliary border

and also records an additional specimen from Laverton, W, Aust., with the

caudal spines reduced to tubercles.

The deseribing of the subspecies aberrans has provided an additional link

between strophurus and ciliaris as it indicates how the transverse rows of caudal

tubercles in strophurus and ditermedius could have evolved. Each ring of

tubereles comprises four of approximately equal size on the dorsal surface. Two

of these replace the spines, and an additional pair have formed between them.

In aberrans, the central pair of tubercles have formed without any depreciation

in the size of the caudal spines.

From the present study only one feature appears to be sufficiently stable

to provide a foundation for separating intermedius from strophurus, and this is

the reeularity of the dorsal tuberele distribution. The disposition of the caudal

tubereles appears to be identieal in both forms although the segmentation is

not as pronounced in the eastern form. Lf! specimens of the strophuwrus type,

but with the dorsal tubercles distributed uniformly in two longitudinal series

ave accepted as representing inéermedius, then the race can be reeorded as

occurring from northern Victoria, south-eastern South Australia to central New

Sontl Wales and extending across a narrow zone in northern South Australia

into Western Australia, Although this distribution pattern is rather wnusnal

und one is hesitant to accept a race based on a single definable, but rather

wustable difference, the large area over which recoonizable specimens haye been

iaken make its provisional recognition appear warranted. Ogilby’s name tor

this race is most appropriate as it appears to cover a discontinuous series of

populations, in which several of the major [features are at median stages of

distinct geoeraplieal trends.

MircHeLtL — ARNHEM LAND Rertimia AND AMPHTBIA 383,

A synopsis of the salient features and reeorded distributions of the sub-

species is as follows:

Diplodactylus strophurus strophurus (Dumeril and Bibron).

Supraciliary spines replaced by short conical tubercles; dorsal surface of

the body with irrerularly distributed tubercles. Tail with sixteen or seventeen

rings of enlarged tubercles, cach rine representing the position of one pair of

caudal spines in other races, and composed of four major tubercles of approxi-

mately equal size on the dorsal surface.

Recorded distribution: Type loeality, Shark’s Bay, W. Aust.; Mount

Narryer Station, W. Aust.; Murehison District, W. Aust.; Yalgoo District,

W. Aust.; Carnarvon, W. Anst.; Milly Milly Station, W. Aust. (Glauert,

1952). Wells 32, 39 Canning Stock Route, W. Aust.; Barrow Ranges, W.

Aust.; Ooldea, S. Aust.; between Everard and Musgrave Ranges, 8. Aust,

(South Australian Museum). Hillston, N.S. Wales; Leeton, N.S. Wales

(Kinghorn, 1929),

Diplodactylus strophurus intermedius Ovilby.

General form and scalation similar to that of the type race, but possessing

the dorsal tubercles uniformly distributed in two lonvitudinal series. Seementa-

tion not obvious in regenerated tails although the tubercles are occasionally

reproduced,

Recorded distribution: Type locality, “Interior of New South Wales.”

Northern Mallee districts of Victoria; Purnong, 8. Aust. (Brazenor, 1951).

Tintinara, §. Aust.; Peake, S. Aust.; Wilpena Pound, S. Aust.; between

the Everard and Musgrave Ranges, 8. Aust.; Well 32, Canning Stock Route,

W. Aust. (South Australian Museum), Bogarabri, N.S. Wales; Lachlan

River, N.S. Wales; Carinda, N.S. Wales (Kinghorn, 1929). Darling Downs,

Qld. (Longman, 1916).

INiplodactylus strophurus ciliaris (Boulenger).

Supraciliary and caudal spines fully developed; dorsal tubercles distributed

uniformly in two longitudinal series. ,

Recorded distribution: Type locality, Darwin, N.T.; Dunraven, QId.;

Prairie, Qld.; Army Downs, Qld. (Loveridge, 1934). Sylvania, Qld. (Kine-

horn, 1929). Yuendumu, N.T.; Tempe Downs, N.T.; junction of Fitzroy

and Marvaret Rivers, W. Aust.; Well 39, Canning Stock Route, W, Aust.;

Erldunda, N.T.; Tennant Creek, N.T.; Hermannsburg Mission, N.T. (South

Australian Museum). Murchison District, W. Aust.; Mount Margaret, W.

384 Recorps oF THE S,A, MusEUM

Aust.; Yandie Station, Canning Stock Route, W. Aust. (Glauert, 1952).

Specimens recorded by Kinghorn (1929) from Tamworth, Lachlan River,

Yandembah, Barmedonan, Coonamble, Wvalong, Hillston in New South

Wales and Bowen in Queensland and identified as spinigerus are probably

referable to this race,

Diplodactylus strophurus aberrans Qlauert.

Supraciliary and caudal spines fully developed, the supraciliary spines ex-

tending on to the nape in the form of short tubercles. Two enlarged tubercles

between each pair of caudal spines.

Recorded distribution: Type locality, Mt. Wynna, West Kimberley,

W. Aust.; La Grange, W. Aust.; Wallal, W. Aust.; Kine Sound, W. Aust.

(an Australian Museum specimen recorded by Kinghorn (1929) as ciliaris).

100 miles east of 80-mile Beach, W, Aust. (South Australian Museum).

Diplodactylus strophurus spinigerus (Cray).

Supraciliary spines absent; caudal spines well developed. Tubercles on the

dorsal surface of the body slightly irregular but forming two distinct longitudinal

series.

Recorded distribution: Type locality, Houtman Abrolhos, W. Aust.;

Cunderdin, W. Aust.; Kulin, W. Aust.; Mount Magnet, W. Aust.; Perth,

W. Aust. (Loveridge, 1934); Frazer Range, W. Aust. (South Australian

Museum),

GEHYRA VARIEGATA AUSTRALIS Gray

Gehyra australis Gray, 1845, p. 163.

U.S.N.M. 128292, 128300, Umba Kumbha, Groote Eylandt, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128535-128538, $.A.M. R.2861, Yirrkalla, N.T.

A.M. R.13638 (2 specimens), East Alligator River, N.T.

A.M. R.13556, Cape Arnhem, N.T,

8.A.M. R.2863, Oenpelli, N.T.

S.A.M. R,2862, Milimgimbi Island, Crocodile Islands, N.T.

Subdigital scansors undivided anteriorly but with a median groove pos-

teriorly; a slight rudiment of a claw is evident on the fifth toe in several

specimens and the rudiment of a web at the base of the toe seems to be more

prominent than in variegata variegata. A cutaneous fold present along the

back of the thigh; in three specimens a dorsal-lateral fold is also present, but

this may be the result of dehydration by strong preservative. Nine to eleven

Mircuett, — ARNHEM Lanp REPTILIA AND AMPHIBIA 885

enlarged upper, and seven to nine enlarged lower labials. Two or three post-

nasals; internasals forming a medium suture or separated by one or two small

granules, Five of this series are males and they possess 15-29 (average 22)

preanal pores.

Contrary to the findings in other species, the Arnhem Land specimens of this

species seem to possess a greater average number of preanal pores than specimens

taken further south. Loveridge (1934, p. 313) records an average of 15 with

range of 13-19 for five Queensland males, while an examination of the males in

the South Australian Museum collection gave the following data, G.v. australis,

six males possessing 13-21, average 16; Gv. punctata, four males possessing

11-13, average 12 (Loveridge (op, cit.) also records 11-13 for punctata); Gv.

variegata, thirty-three males possessing 9-21, average 15.

The colour varies from uniform light blue to light brown with indistinet

darker yariegations. When analysed under a microscope, the light blue colour

is shown to be a translucent white minutely punctate with black.

The position and status of punctata Fry have heen verified by the examina-

tion of eleven specimens in the South Australian Museum collection. The best

diagnostic feature for its separation appears to be the shape of the mental and

chinshields (see fig. 2), the characters used by Fry in his type deseription being

both variable and diffieult to define.

nat

Lana

Fig. 2. Gehyra variegata (Dumeril and Bibron): ventral view of the snout of (2)

G. v. australis Gray; (b) G. vu, punctata (Fry) and (c) G. v. variegata (Dumeril and Bibron).

On examining the type description of variegata (Dumeril and Bibron, 1836,

p. 353), it was noted that one of the four type specimens is referable to

punctata, being from “baie de Chiens Marins” or Shark Bay, Western Australia.

The remaining three specimens, which are mentioned first wherever the variation

warrants a comparison and are therefore accepted as representing the type race,

were reputedly taken in Tasmania (“la terre de Vandieman”), The species

has not been subsequently recorded as oceurring on the island and the last

386 Recorps or THE S.A. MusEUuM

person to list the lizards of Tasmania, Hewer (1948), completely omits the

species.

The South Australian Museum specimens are from the following localities :

Gehyra variegata variegata; South Australia—Ooldea, 2 specimens;

northern Flinders Ranges, 22 specimens; Mount Lofty Ranges, 8 specimens; Lake

Phillipson, south-west of Stuart Range, 1 specimen; Quorn, 1 specimen; Koo-

nibba, 1 speeimen; Streaky Bay, 1 specimen; Devon Downs, 1 specimen; Putta-

burra, via Marree, 1 specimen; Gawler Ranges, 2 specimens; Mt. Painter, 1

specimen; Lake Callabonna, 21 specimens; between Everard and Barrow Ranges,

2 specimens; Fowlers Bay, 1 specimen; Kangaroo Island, 10 specimens;

Wynbring, 2 specimens; Encounter Bay, 1 snecimen; Sutherlands, 1 speeimen;

Buckleboo, 2 specimens; Moolooloo, 7 specimens; Tarcoola, 3 specimens; Oodna-

datta, 2 specimens; between Everard and Musgrave Ranges, 17 specimens; Finniss

Springs, 10 specimens; Warcowie, 2 specimens; Marree, 4 specimens; Andamook:

Ranges, 7 specimens; Gammon Ranges, 1 specimen; Strzelecki Creek, 5 specimens;

Killalpannina Mission, 4 specimens; Clayton, 2 specimens; Coopers Creek, 3

specimens; Hudunda, 1 specimen.

Northern Territory—Hermannsburg, 25 specimens; Charlotte Waters, 1

specimen; Cordilla Downs, 2 specimens; Macdonnell Ranges, 23 specimens; Hanns

Range, 1 specimen.

New South Wales.—Dareton, 2 specimens.

Western Australia—Frazer Range, 3 specimens; Broad Arrow, 1 specimen.

Gehyra variegata australis: Northern Territory—Darwin, 7 specimens;

Tennant Creek, 3 specimens.

Queensland.—Bathhurst Head, 5 specimens; Cairns, 1 specimen.

Gehyra variegata punctata: Western Australia—Gascoyne District, 7 speci-

mens; Flora. Valley, East Kimberleys, 1 specimen; Canning Stock Route, 3

specimens.

Famity AGAMIDAE

CHLAMYDOSAURUS KING Gray

Chlamydosaurus hingtt Gray, 1827, p. 425, pl. A.

U.S.N.M, 128480, Milimgimbi Island, Crocodile Islands, N.T,

U.S.N.M, 128452-128453, Umba Kumba, Groote Eylandt, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128568, 8.A.M. R.3228, Yirrkalla, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128752, Oenpelli, N.T,

MrrcHeLt — ARNHEM LAND RepritiA AND AMPHIBIA 387

AMPHIBOLURUS CAUDICINCTUS CAUDICINGTUS ((Chunther)

Grammatophora caudicincta Gunther, 1844, p. 19.

U.S.N.M. 128751, S.A.M. R.3229, 44 miles §.8.F. of Oenpelli, N.T.

Loveridge (1934, p. 319) suggests that rufescens Stirling and Zieta and

imbricatus Peters may prove to be races of caudicinctus Gunther. Preliminary

work on a revision of the genus Amphibolurus has been undertaken by the

author and the above possibility investigated. The types (S.A.M. R.1423, R.1424

and R.1425) and four other specimens of rufescens have been examined and

compared with caudicinetus. Although they do resemble one another in colour

and general form, they differ markedly in structural detail, and until more

extensive work on the distribution and variation of these lizards can be under-

taken, no adyantage is to be gained by linking them under a specific name,

although this may ultimately prove warranted. The followinw characters serve

to distinguish the two lizards :

A. caudicinetus Gunther A, rufescens Stirling and Zietz

1. Femoral and preanal pores 29-35, Femoral and preanal pores 56-60.

2. Canthus rostralis swollen and Canthus rostralis obtuse, but angu-

rounded, with nostril in the ros- late, with nostril below the ros-

tralis, directed upward. tralis, directed outward.

3. A longitudinal series of enlarged No longitudinal series of enlarged

middorsal seales and low spinous middorsal seales, and a_ sliehtly

nuchal erest, enlarged, non spinous series of mid-

nuchal seales.

After examining eleven specimens from the vicinity of Marree and Finniss

Springs, §. Aust., the author is of the opinion that imbricatus Peters is speci-

fically distinet from cawdicinetus Gunther.

AMPHIBOLURUS BARBATUS BARBATUS (Cuvier)

Agama barbatus Cuvier, 1829, p. 35.

U.S.N.M. 128529, Horseshoe Bend, Finke River, 8. Aust.

Although most characters of this specimen agree with those of the type

race, the “beard” is not developed to the same extent as that of specimens taken

further south, showing a tendency toward the sub-species minor Sterntfeld, whieh

was originally taken at Uermannsburg, N.T. It apparently occurs at that

locality and westward, as specimens examined from localities to the south,

east and north are all nearer the type race. Loveridge (1954, p. 325) records a

specimen of minor from the north-west coast at Broome, W. Aust.

388 Recorps oF THE S.A. MusEUM

DIPorRIPHORA BILINEATA Gray

Diporiphora bilineata Gray, 1842, p. 54; Loveridge, 1934, p. 327 (Syn.).

U.S.N.M. 128301, 129542-129561, S.A.M. R.2848 (29 specimens), Umba

Kumba, Groote Eylandt, N.T.

A.M. B.13621 (7 specimens), R.13613 (6 specimens), R.13617 (6 specimens).

Groote Eylandt, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128734-128749, 8.A.M. R.2847, Oenpelli, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128248-128249, Nightcliff, near Darwin, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128455, south end of Lake Hubert, N.T.

A.M. R.13644 (4 specimens), East Alligator River, N.T.

S,A.M. R.2858 (1 specimen), Yirrkalla, N.T.

Preanal pores present in the male, 1+1 or 2+2; gular fold constantly absent.

This latter character serves to readily distinguish bilineata from Physignathus

gilberti (Gray), some specimens of which closely resemble it.

PHYSIGNATHUS GILBERTI GILBERTI (Gray)

Lophognathus gilberti Gray, 1842, p. 53.

U.S.N.M. 128730, 128732-128733, S.A.M. R.2941 (3 specimens), Oenpelli,

N.T.

U.S.N.M, 128731, 2 miles 8.8.E. of Oenpelli, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128566, Yirrkalla, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128456, west side of Lake Hubert, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128454, south end of Lake Hubert, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128464, between Emerald River and Old Mission, Groote Bylandt,

N.T.

A.M. R.13639, East Alligator River, N.T.

Famity VARANIDAE

Varanus (VARANUS) GOULDI (Gray)

Hydrosaurus gouldii Gray, 1838, p. 394.

U.S.N.M, 128571-128573, 128575, Yirrkalla, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128384, 4 miles south-west of Umba Kumba, Groote Eylandt, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128479, Port Langdon, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128753, Red Lily Lagoon, 7 miles W.S5.W. of Oenpelli, N.T.

U.S.N.M, 128754, Oenpelli, N.T.

MrrcHELL — ARNHEM LAND REPTILIA AND AMPHIBIA 889

VaRanus (VARANUS) VARTUS (Shaw)

Lacerta varia Shaw, 1790, p. 246, pl. iii, fig. 2.

U.S.N.M. 128386, near swamp at Lake Hubert, N.T.

8.A.M. R.38230, 5 miles west of Oenpelli, N.T.

VaRANuUS (ODATRIA) GLEBOPALMA Sp. NOV.

Holotype: S.AM. R.3222 an adult male taken at the south end of Lake

Hubert, N.T.

Diagnosis: This Varanus is a typical member of the Odatria group and is

most nearly approached by the subspecies timorensis trislis (Schlegel). It differs

from that lizard in possessing a much longer tail, different colouration and charac-

teristic dorsal and eaudal sealations (see pl. xxxvii), The best diagnostic

feature is the presence of highly polished black pads on the soles of all four feet.

(See fig. 3.)

Description: Teeth acute, slightly compressed. Canthus rostralis acute,

nostrils oval, below the rostralis, nearer the tip of the snout than the anterior

corner of the eye, the measurements from the eentre of the nostril being & mm.

and 12 mm. respectively. Upper head scales moderate, slightly larger than the

temporals but. smaller than the interorbitals; 37-40 between the supraciliary

ridges. Two or three rows of scales at the supraciliary border larger than the

supraoculars. Ear opening triangular, slightly oblique; its vertical diameter is

approximately equal to the horizontal diameter of the eye. Dorsal and caudal

seales of characteristic forms, not. approached by the variation recorded for

timorensis. (See pl. xxxvii.) Abdominal seales smooth, in one hundred and

twenty-six transverse rows. Tail slightly depressed basally, compressed pos-

teriorly; covered with uniform, obtusely keeled scales which do not rise to a

ypine. The spines often to be found on each side of the vent in males of Odatria

species are absent, being replaced by several slightly prominent scales, Scales

on the limbs with an obtuse central keel. The soles of both fore and hind limhs

are covered with highly polished black pads, the largest pads being at the base

of each digit. (See fig. 3.) The tail is very long, measuring more than the

combined lengths of the head and body.

The basic colour pattern of the body is light grey-brown with numerous

black seales distributed irregularly over the dorsal surface. On the anterior

half of the tail the black seales become dominant, while toward its tip the

basal colouring lightens and black pigmentation disappears. Under side of the

lower jaw white with four black transverse bands; remainder of gular region and

chest with a black and white recticulate patterning.

890 Records OF THE S.A. MuszEuM

6 NG is In SBP

LES 0 aig OO Sia se oO OR aa ss

J eeesar so egies

74D t met io a) Wees cyt

S9OSSOS SO |= ROE MBE)

—

2 s?

Fe WPL

Fig. 3. Varanus glebopalma Mitchell: view of the sole of the hind foot showing the

positions and size of the polished black pads.

Measurements : 821 (262+-559) mm.—the distance from the tip of the snout

to the gular fold is 112 mm., while 75 mm. and 107 mm. are the lengths of the

fore and hind limbs respectively.

Comments: The type specimen is unique and was “shot by R. R. Miller and

F. M. Setzler in a crevasse of a sandstone boulder at the base of a sandstone

escarpment near south end of Lake Hubert” (R.R.M.).

VARANUS (ODATRIA) TIMORENSIS ORIENTALIS F'ry

Varanus punctatus var. orientalis Fry, 1913, p. 18.

U.S.N.M. 128481-128485, 128487-128493, S.A.M. R.3227, Milimgimbi Island,

Crocodile Islands, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128569-128570, 138574, Yirrkalla, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128387, S.A.M. R.2851, Umba Kumba, Groote Eylandt, N.T.

A.M. R.18637, R.13646, East Alligator River, N.T.

A.M. R.12550, Cape Arnhem, N.T.

The following South Australian Museum specimens were also examined:

V.t. ortentalis—R.137, R.182, R.183, Hidsvold, Qld. (type locality); R.351-353,

Stewart River, Qld.; R.3862-365, Melville Island, N.T.; R.1938, Flinders Island,

Qld.

V.t. tristis—R.329, Macdonnell Ranges, N.T.; R.2058, between Mt. Singleton

and Treur Range, 8. Aust. (4 specimens); R.2186, Kairi, Qld.; R.3085, Frazer

Mrrcuet. — ArnuemM LAND RevrintA AND AMPHIBIA 891

Range, W. Aust.; 8.8228, Innamineka, 8. Aust.; R.3224, Tennant Creek, N.T.

(5 specimens).

The dorsal and catdal sealations of the material listed above show consider-

able variation, It indicates that the sealation characters enumerated and figured

by Fry (1913, pp. 18-19, fig. 7-10) as distinguishing features are inadequate to

satisfactorily characterize this subspecies. However, several more easily dis-

cernible and constant features distinguishing it from the other subspecies are

deseribed by Mertens (1942, pp. 298-307). One of these, the suposed longer

tail of tristis is not confirmed by the present material. In the Arnhem Land

specimens the tail length, combined head and body length ratio varies from

1-5-1:7 and in the South Australian Museum specimens of orientalis from

1:4-1-7; in the fristis material the variation is 1-6-1-8. Except in cases where

the difference is paramount, the taxonomie value of this character is limited

because of the difficulties in accurately measuring the body lengths of many

preserved specimens and in determining whether or not the last few centimeters

of tail are present.

The measurements and tail/head and body ratio of the adult specimens

taken by the expedition :

Specimen Sex Total Hoad nnd Tail Tail Jength

Number length Rody length length Head and Body

length

128454 (h a2 194 327 1-7

128485 ) 499 Ls7 512 1-7

L28486 3 487 182 305 1-7

128487 g 465 185 280 1:5

128488 4 497 185 312 1-7

128489 By 451 172 279 1:6

128490 g +05 160 245 1-5

128492 é nD0 130 220 1-7

128387 g 440 165 275 17

128574 9 480) 190 290) 1-5

Several additional adults obviously possess incomplete tails.

AJthoueh comparatively constant in specimens from the one locality, the

body sealation of this Species varies markedly from one locality to another. The

seales vary both in shape and relative density. The latter variation ean be illus-

trated by counting the number of miero-scales. In the Armhem Land specimens

the dorsal seales are separated by as many as five rows of micro-scales, while

in others, notably those from Tennant Creek, by only one or two rows. Fry

(1913, fig. 7) figures 1-2 vows for his Eidsvold specimens, while the three South

Australian Museum specimens, from the type locality possess 2-3. Kurther, the

relative size of these micro-scales varies. The number bordering each dorsal

392 Recorps or THE S.A. MuseumM

varies from an average of eight for the Stewart River specimens to fourteen for

those from Tennant Creek; the average is twelve in the Arnhem Land series.

Fry (op. cit., fig. 8) figures eighteen for his punctatus var. typica. In some

specimens there is a tendency for the micro-seales to become fused, forming

larger elongate scales along the lateral borders of the dorsals. Working on a

limited number of specimens, this variation does not appear to be sienificant,

although the examination of a larger series may reveal grounds for the sub-

division of the material at present referred to tristis. Plate xxxvii contains photo-

oraphs illustrating this variation in both /ristis and orientalis.

The number of abdominal scales averages 84 in a range of 79-94 in the

Arnhem Land specimens and 90 in a range of 85-104 in the South Australian

Museum series of tristts.

Two gravid females were opened, one U.S.N.M. 128574, contained twelve

egas, while the other, U.S,N.M. 128287, contained eight.

The largest specimen examined, S.A.M. R.8085, a male from the Frazer

Range, W, Aust., originally recorded by Stirling and Zietz (1893, p, 170),

measures 614 (265+435) mm,, while the largest Arnhem Land speeimen,

U,S.N.M. 128488, also a male, measures 465 (210+-255+) tm.—tail incomplete.

Famity PYGOPODIDAE

DELMA FRASERI FRASERT Gray

Delma frasert Gray, 1831, p. 14.

Delma plebeia De Vis, 1888, p. 825.

U.S.N.M. 128679-128682, Yirrkalla, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128260, Nightelifi, near Darwin, N.T.

A.M. R,13648 (2 specimens), R.13569 (2 specimens), R.13570 (2 specimens),

Cape Arnhem, N.T.

A.M. R.13471, Groote Eylandt, N.T.

The anal sealation of this material is interesting as it confirms that plebeta

De Vis ts a variant of fraseri, as was suggested by Loneman (1916, p. 51) and

Kinghorn (1926, p. 58). Althouvh all of the present series possess three anal

scales, the size and position of the median scale varies considerably; the outer

anals accordingly vary from widely separated by the median anal to forming

a median suture, thereby excluding the median anal. (See fig. 4.) Probably

the median anal is present in the type of plebeia, but its position and size make

it of little apparent significance.

MrrcrieLL — ARNHEM LAND REPTILIA AND AMPHIBIA 393

Fig. 4. Delma fraseri fraseri Gray: drawings of the anal region showing, (a) the var.

typiea condition and (b) the var, plebeia condition, Both drawings were made from specimens

taken at or near Yirrkalla, N.T.

LIALIS BURTONIS Gray

Lialis burtonis Gray, 1834, p. 134.

U.S.N.M, 128379-128383, 128441, A.M. R.13610 (3 specimens), Umba Kumba,

Groote Hylandt, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128467-128468, Port Langdon, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128259, Niehteliff, near Darwin, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128576, Yirrkalla, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128504, Miliurimbi Island, Crocodile Islands, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128514, Kuraiturumuru, N.T.

A.M. R.13546, Oenpelli, N.T.

Famity SCINCIDAE

LIQ A SCESCOIDES INTERMEDIA subsp, nov.

Holotype: S.A.M. R.3095, an adult male, Yirrkalla, N.T.

Paratypes: U.S.N.M. 128636-128637, 128639, Yirrkalla, N.T.

S.A.M. R.3225, near Umba Kumba, Groote Eylandt, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128478, Port Langdon, N.T.

Diagnosis: Differs from the southern Australian race in possessing a dis-

tinetive colour pattern and in attaining a larger adult size.

394 Recorps OF THE S.A. MusEUM

Scalation: Midbody scales in 32-35 rows, irregular in the dorso-lateral region

of the body. Prefrontals narrowly separated or making point contact on the mid-

line; nasals invariably separated. Nine or ten upper labials with the 5th, 6th

and 7th or 6th, 7th and 8th subocular; 6-7 supraciliaries; 2-3 auricular lobules.

Colouration: The most distinctive feature of this race is its colour pattern.

In the type race the dorsal surfaces of the body and tail have a uniform pat-

terning of alternate light and dark ecrossbands; in intermedia this banding is

broken up into a series of alternate light and dark bars on the dorso-lateral

surface only, none of the bars extending to or across the dorsal midline. Further-

more, the bars are staggered along the body, a dark bar on one side facing a

light bar on the other. The middorsal colouring is darker than the light bars,

but with a light blotch the same shade as the light bars at the dorsal end of

each dark bar. The dark temporal streak is not as prominent as in the type

race.

This somewhat complicated colour pattern is constant in all specimens

examined, including the South Australian Museum specimens recorded by

Mitchell (1950, p. 295).

Measurements: The largest specimen examined is the holotype and _ it

measures 447+ (334+113+) mm.—tail incomplete. All specimens examined,

except the juvenile (U.S.N.M. 128388) possess body lengths in excess of 300

mm. Of twenty-one South Australian specimens of the type race examined, the

largest measure 293 mm. from the tip of the snout to the vent.

LycosomMA (SPHENOMORPHUS) TAENIOLATA (Shaw)

Lacerta taenolata Shaw, 1790, p. 245, pl. xxxii, fig. 1.

U.S.N.M. 128758, S.A.M. R.2868, Oenpelli, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128756, East Alligator River, N.T.

LyGosoma (SPHENOMORPHUS) ESSINGTONI (Gray )

Tiliqua essingtonu Gray, 1842, p. 51.

U.S.N.M. 128251-128256, Niehteliff, near Darwin, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128603-128607, 128609-128610, Yirrkalla, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128402-128407, A.M. R.13466 (2 specimens), R.18467 (3 speci-

mens), S.A.M. R.2866 (7 specimens), Umba Kumba, Groote Eylandt, N.T.

Loveridge (1934, p. 346) raises the question of the affinities of 7. essingtonii

Gray and suggests that it may be more nearly allied to leonhardii Sternfeld

than taeniolata Shaw. Although varying a little, the colouration of this series

of 31 specimens agrees well with Gray’s type and Boulenger’s catalogue descrip-

MrrcHieLt, — ARNHEM LAND ReprrLtA AND AMPHIBIA 395

tion (1887, p. 228) of this species. An examination of the sealation supports

Boulenger’s statement (op. ctf.) that it differs in no way from that of taenialata

Shaw.

The colour and pattern are distinctive. A broad dorsal stripe varies from

light brown in the Nighteliff specimens through light bronze to almost cream

in some of the Groote Eylandt material. This is bordered on each side by a

wide, light edeed, dark dorso-lateral stripe, which breaks up into a series of

dark spots on the tail. The light upper edee of this stripe is defined on the

nape and anterior half of the body by a further dark line, which is particularly

prominent in the Nightcliff specimens. In the Yirrkalla and Groote Eylandt

specimens a series of 16-24 bronze blotches are enclosed within the dark dorso-

lateral stripe. In the Nighteliff series there are only occasional small lighter

spots in the anterior half. Limbs bronze, spotted or striated with black. Upper

labials and ventral surfaces white.

Lycosoma (SPHENOMORPHUS) SPALDING! (Macleay)

Hinulia spaldingi Macleay, 1877, p. 63.

U.S.N.M. 128594-128595, 128548, 128600, 128585, Yirrkalla, N.T.

U.S.N.M, 128591, S.A.M. R.2851, Umba Kumba, Groote Eylandt, N.T.

A.M, 8.13576 (part), Cape Arnhem, N.T,

LyGOsoMA (SPHENOMORPHUS) LEONHARDIL (Sternfeld)

Lygosoma (Hinulia) taeniolatum var. maculata Rosen, 1905, p, 140.

Lygosoma (Hinulia) leonhurdii Sternfeld, 1919, p. 79.

U.S.N.M, 128577-128584, 128586-128593, 128596-128597, 128599, 128601,

128608, 128618, S.A.M. R.2860, Yirrkalla, N.T,

U.S.N.M. 128389-128390, 128392-128401; S.A.M. R.2869; A.M. R.13605 (3

specimens), R.13602 (3 specimens), R.13611 (1 specimen), R.13465 (1 specimen),

R.13514 (2 specimens), h.13603 (3 speeimens), R.13508 (2 specimens), R.13597

(3 specimens), Umba Kumba, Groote Eylandt, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128757, S.A.M. R.2867, Oenpelli, N.T.

A.M. R.13655 (2 specimens), R.18577 (2 specimens), 2.13576 (1 specimen),

Cape Armhem, N.T.

The variation displayed by this large series is as follows: Midbody seales

in 28 rows (16 specimens) or 30 rows (24 specimens)—only the adults were

counted. Nasals separated behind the rostral in all specimens; prefrontals form-

ine a variable length median suture; ear opening oval, relatively smaller in the

adult than in the juvenile; 3-5 auricular lobules, the shape of each varying from

obtuse to yery acute. A subnarial suture is present in many specimens. Two

396 Recorps oF ‘rar S.A, MuszEuM

or three pairs of enlarged nuchals. All specimens possess four supraoculars

except U.S.N.M. 128582, which has only three, there being an indication of the

fourth suture at the supraciliary border. The second anterior supraocular is

invariably the largest. Exeept for two specimens which possess six on one side

and five on the other, all specimens have five upper labials anterior to the first

subocular. The length of the snout seems to be very variable with consequent

variation in the shape and size of the loreals and proportions of the prefrontals

and internasal,

The colour and pattern show some yariation. Many adult specimens are

without a black vertebral stripe, and when some vestige of this line is evident,

it is usually without the white border characteristic of specimens taken further

south.

Some interesting variation in the size and shape of the supraoeulars is

also evident from this study. Although the size of the second supraocular is

variable in all populations examined, there appears to be a south to north

gradation tending toward an enlargement of this supraocular, its average size

in the Arnhem Land specimens being markedly greater than that of South

Australian skinks examined. (See fig. 5.)

Fig. 5. Lygosoma (Sphenomorphus) leonhurdii Sterufeld: three drawings illustrating

the variation in supraocular scalation and its correlation with latitude. (a) U.S.N.M. 128608,

Yirrkalla, N.T.; (b) SAM. R.1582, Hermaunsburg Mission, N.T. (type locality); (¢) S.A.M.

R.3177, Mern Merna, 8. Aust.

MrrcHeLL — ARNHEM LAND RepritiA AND AMPHITBIA 397

LyGosoMA (SPHENOMOKPHUS) ISOLEPIS ISOLEPIS (Boulenger)

Lygosome isolepis Boulenger, IS8T, p. 254, pL xv, fie. 1.

U.S.N.M. 128506, §.A.M, R.8249, Milingimbi Island, Crocodile Islands, N.T.

LU.S.NM, 128250, Nighteliff, near Darwin, N.T.

LS.N.M. 128512, Larporkuru, N.T,

A.M, R.18606 (2 specimens), R.13468 (3 specimens), Groote Eylandt, N.T.

AM. R.13549, Arnhem Land, N.T.

A.M, R.13654, Cape Arnhem, N.'T.

A.M. R.13641, East Alligator River, N.T,

LyGosoMa (LYGOSOMA) CRASSICATIDUM Dumeril

Lygosome crassicaudiae AL Diineril, 14, p. 172.

U.S.N.M. 128611, Yirrkalla, N.T.

Midbody scales in 20 longitudinal rows; four pairs of enlarged nuchals,

contracting in size to a double series of slieh!ty enlareed yertebrals. Auricular

opening round, without lobules; approximately one-third the horizontal diameter

of the eve. The axilla to groin measurement is approximately one and three-

quarter times longer than that from the tip of the snout to the forelimb. The

hindlimb measures 14 mm., a leneth equal to the distance between the centre of

the eye and the forelimb. Fifth upper labial centrally subocular; frontonasal

forming broad sutures with both rostral and frontal, the suture in each case

being a little more than hali the frontonasal leneth, The maximum conbined

length of the frontoparietals and interparietal is a little greater than that of

the frontal. Subdigital Jamellac smooth, 5, 7-8, 12-138, 18-19, 8-9 beinw the

formula for the hindlimb and 5,8,8,64, the formula for the forelimb, Dorsal

surfaces dark brown, minutely punetate with black; the black spots becoming

nore prominent as the basic colour lightens ventro-laterally, Upper labials and

underside of tail also punetate with black. Remaining ventral surfaces uniform

white. The limbs have longitudinal rows of black spots.

This specimen measures 78+ (56+-22+-) mm.—tail incomplete.

Although it possesses the lone frontonasal-lrontal and frontonasal-rostral

sutures stated to be characteristic of mjobergi Lonnbere and Andersson (1915,

p. 6), this specimen has the larger number of subdigital lamellae of erassicaudum,

While confidently claiming on the evidence of an examination of a specimen from

Ravenshoe, Qld., referred to mjohergt by Proctor (1923, p. 1073), and another

without locality data, that these two names refer to distinct species, Loveridge

(1934, p. 867) refers the latter specimen which possesses only twelve lamellae

heneath the fourth toe to erassicaudum. I! eorreet, this would greatly reduce the

value of the hindlimb lamellar formula as a taxonomie character for the separa-

398 Records of THE $,A. MusEuM

tion of these two lizards. Similarly, the validity of the relative lengths of the

frontonasal sutures us a distinguishing feature is endangered if this specimen

has been correctly referred to crassicaudum.

A comparison with the literature also shows the following characters to

vary. The Armhem Land specimen and the type material as figured by Hombron

and Jaequinot (1842-1858, pl. iv, fig. 1), have the fifth upper labial centrally sub-

ocular, while Lonnberg and Andersson record the fourth as being “below the

centre of the eye” in the cotypes of mjobergi; Boulenger (1887, p. 325), after

oxamining the specimens from Fly River, New Guinea, Murray and Cornwallis

Islands records both eanditions in his material. A suggestion of variation in

the relative proportion of the frontonasal and in the number of supraoculars

contacting the frontal is dependent on the aeeuracy of the Hombron and Jae-

quinot figure (op. ctf.) which shows the frontonasal to be much longer than

wide and the Ist, 2nd and 3rd supraoculars contacting the frontal. In colouration

mijoberg? is intermediate between that of the Arnhem Land specimen described

above and that of typical crassicaudum. No evidence of a dark dorso-lateral

stripe, sharply defined at its dorsal edge, is to be found in the present specimen,

while some reference to this ts made in all other relevant literature, including

Macleay’s Lygosomn ornatum (1878, p. 64),

Loveridge (07. cit.) mentions that mjobergi is a nich larger species, a sug-

gestion supported by the measurements of the larger cotype.

Genus LroLopisMA

Beeause of the confused nomenclature in certain sections of this genus, it

was found necessary to make a brief revision of the “Heteropus” species group,

which is characterized within the genus by the possession of 4+5 digits and an

undivided frontoparietal, to enable three of the species taken by the expedition

to be satisfactorily identified. This revision has been published in the “Records

of the South Australian Museum,” xi, pp. 75-90, and the synonomies quoted below

are discussed in it,

LerrotorismMa ruscum Fuscum (Dumeril and Bibron)

Heteropus fuscus Dameril and Bibron, 1839, p. 759.

Tleteropus schmeltzu Peters, 1867, p. 23.

Heteropus tricarinatus Meyer, 1874, p. 133.

Heteropus longipes Macleay, 1877, p. 66.

Heteropus serdentatus Macleay, 1877, p. 67.

ITeteropus maculatus De Vis, 1885, p. 169.

Heteropus rubricatus De Vis, 1885, p. 170.

Heteropus rostralis De Vis, 1885, p. 171,

Mircuett — ARNHEM LAND REPTILIA AND AMPHIBIA 899

U.S.N.M. 128612-128617, 128518, Yirrkalla, N.T.

A.M. 2.13583-13584, R.13656 (3 specimens), Cape Arnhem, N.T.

LEIOLOPISMA VIVAX (De Vis)

Heteropus peronii Dumeril and Bibron, 1839, p. 760.

Myophila vivax De Vis, 1884, p. 77.

Heteropus blackmanni De Vis, 1885, p. 168.

U.S.N.M. 128507-128510, Milimgimbi Island, Crocodile Islands, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128257, Niehteliff, near Darwin, N.T.

A.M. R.13585 (4 specimens), R.13586 (4 specimens), Cape Arnhem, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128439-128440, 128412; A.M, R.13464 (2 specimens), R.13470 (2

specimens) ; R.13607 (2 specimens) ; S.A. M. R.2857 (3 specimens), Umba Kumba,

Groote Eylandt, N.T.

S.A.M. R.2865, Yirrkalla, N.T.

LEIOLOPISMA. PECTORALIS (De Vis)

Carlia melanopogon Gray, 1844, pl. vii, fig. 1.

Heteropus lateralis De Vis, 1885, p. 168.

Heteropus pectoralis De Vis, 1885, p. 169.

Heteropus mundus De Vis, 1885, p. 172.

Lygosoma devisii Boulenger, 1890, p. 79 (un. for lateralis De Vis, as preoccupied

in Lygosoma).

2Lygisaurus foliorum De Vis, 1884, p. 77.

U.S.N.M. 128764, Oenpelli, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128528, Port Essington, N.T.

LeloLorisMa GUICHENOTI DELICATA (De Vis)

Mocoa delicata De Vis, 1888 (1887), p. 820,

AM, R.15461, Groote Eylandt, N.T.

Midbody seales in 26 rows; no auricular lobules. Ceneral sealation similar

to that of South Australian and Victorian speeimens of guichenoti, but with a

much wider frontonasal-frontal suture. Its general form is more slender and the

limbs weaker. On the above evidence delicata is retained as a subspecies. The

colour corresponds acenrately with that deseribed by De Vis, and if constant

would distinenish it readily from the type race.

Loyeridee (1934, p. 359) doubtfully referred delicata to the synonymy of

guichenoti, commenting on the faet that all specimens of guichenoti possessed

enlarged preanals, and that this feature was not characteristic of delicata. This

is confirmed by material examined.

400 ReEcoRDS OF THE S.A. MusEUM

RHODONA STYLIS sp. nov.

Holotype: S.A.M. R.3094, Yirrkalla, N.T.

Paratypes: U.S.N.M. 128640-128678; S.A.M. R.2856 (5 specimens), Yirr-

kalla, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128409-128411, S.A.M. R.2855 (2 specimens), Umba Kumba,

Groote Eylandt, N.T.

U.S.N.M, 128520, Rocky Beach, Cape Arnhem, N.T.

A.M. R.13566 (4 specimens), R.13567 (5 specimens), R,13568 (5 specimens),

R.13657 (8 specimens), R.13658 (8 specimens), Cape Arnhem, N.T.

Diagnosis: This species most nearly approaches Rhodonu lineata Cray in the

degree of reduction of the limbs, but is immediately distinguished from it by

the presence of frontoparietals and at least three supraoculars, The scalation

closely resembles that of Rhodona wilkinsi Parker, with which it agrees in all

essential details including the midbody scale count. However, the presence of

a styliform hind limb immediately separates it from that species.

Type description: Body elongate; forelimb absent: hindlimb ininute, styli-

form, variable in size (see fig. 7), but equivalent in length to two of the

Big. 6. Rhodona stylis Mitchell: dorsal and lateral views of the head of the holotype

(10 approx.),

MrrcHELL — ARNHEM LAND REPTILIA AND AMPHIBIA AOL

adjacent scales in the holotype. Snout euneiform with angularly projecting

labial edge; eye small, lower evelid with a large transparent disk. Three supra-

oculars; frontoparietals and interparietal distinet, the former being widely

separated and less than half the size of the latter; parietals forming a suture

behind the interparietal. A loreal and one or two preoculars; two postoculars.

Five upper and five lower labials, the third upper labial being subocular; two

pairs of enlareed nuchals and a pair of slightly enlarged anal plates present.

BKighteen smooth seales at midbody. Har opening minute.

Colouration : Light grey dorsally with a black dorsolateral stripe extending

from behind each eve to the tip of the tail. On the dorsal surface a longitudinal

line of fine black dots extends down each side of the vertebral line, the two rows

coalescing on the tail. Ventral surfaces uniform white.

Measurements: The holotype measures 113 (60+53) mm,—tail regenerating,

Variation: The head scalation is very constant within the type series of

82 specimens, the main variation being in the size and number of the small

ocular and supraciliary scales. In several of the Groote Kylandt specimens the

large postocular has been forced up into Jine with the supraoculars by the en-

largement of several small scales at the posterior border of the eye, and it might

therefore be considered an additional supraocular. The number of seales at

Fig. 7. Drawings of the bones dissected from within the styliform hindlimb of Rhodona

stylis Mitchell.

A and B—specimens from Groote Eylandt, N.T.

CG and D—specimens from Yirrkalla, N.T. (type locality).

The body lengths of the four specimens from which the bones figured above were taken

are GO+2 mm,

402, Recorps oF tHe S.A, MusgEuM

midbody is usually eighteen, but the lateral scales are often irregular and in

such cases twenty can often be counted, particularly in the Yirrkalla material.

The hasie midbody count for the Groote Eylandt skinks is sixteen, with eighteen

occurring in the two specimens with irregular lateral scaling. Accepting mid-

body as being the middle point of the distanee between the ear opening and the

hind limb, fifty specimens were counted with the following results: eighteen

specimens were found to possess 20 midbody scales, twenty-seven possessed 18,

and five possessed 16. Many specimens have only four lower labials,

Although no point would seem to be gained by separating them, the Groote

Kylandt specimens have several characters which distinguish them from the

Yirrkalla series, Apart from the small sealation differences indicated above,

they differ in possessing less degenerate hind limbs, some evidence of the tibia,

fibula and tarsals being present. There is only a short rudiment of the tibio-

fibula present in the Yirrkalla lizards (see fig, 7),

The uniform degeneration of the limbs and digits in the genus Rhodona

has been of considerable interest to the author, and limb dissections of the nine

species available in the South Australian Museum collection have been made

and studied, Although by no means conelusive, the variation in tarsal (carpal)

and metatarsal (metacarpal) bones, particularly among specimens of the same

species, but from different localities, suggests that the loss of digits and digital

bones may not be always indicative of specific variation. The genus may be found

to contain polytypic species within which the number of digits varies,

ABLEPHARUS TAENIOPLEURUS Peters

Ablepharus (Morethia) taenioplenrus Peters, 1874, p. 375.

U.S.N.M, 128759, Red Lily Lagoon, 7 miles W.S.W. of Oenpelli, N,'T.

U.S.N.M. 128635, Yirrkalla, N.T.

A®BLEPHARUS ORTEN'TALIS (De Vis)

Miculia orientalis De Vis, 1888, p. 160.

U.S.N.M. 128408, near Umba Kumba, Groote Eylandt, N.T.

Except for the possession of 20 instead of 18 midbody seales, this specimen

corresponds accurately with De Vis’s type description. De Vis (op. cit) refers

to orientalis as the “eastern representative of e/egans Gunther.” This suggests

subspecifie relationship, and it is possible that the western and north-eastern

populations do intergrade at some point in north-western Australia. Zietz

(1920, p. 222) gives the distribution of elegans as Western Australia, South

Australia, Central Australia, New South Wales and Victoria, Except for

MrrcHett — ARNHEM LAND RepritiA AND AMPHIBIA A038

Western Australia, I have been unable to find grounds for suggesting that the

species oceur in any of the States mentioned. The South Australian Museum

eolleetion contained 18-20 specimens which had been identified as elegans, but

all are referable to A. greyi Gray or A, timidus De Vis. The oeeurrence of

elegans in South Australia is therefore doubtful. The present specimen differs

from the Western Australian elegans in possessing a higher number of midbody

seales, the presence of only three upper labials anterior to the subocular and in

the complete encirclement of the eye by small granular seales.

ABLEPHARUS BOUTONID M@rALLIcus Boulenger

Ablepharus boutonii var. metallicus Boulenger, 1887, p. 347.

U.S.N.M. 128619-128634, Yirrkalla, N.T.

U.S.N.M, 128413-128488; A.M. R.13469 (3 specimens), R.18592 (10 speci-

mens), S.A.M. R.2852 (3 specimens), near Umba Kumba, Groote Eylandt, N_T.

U.S.N.M. 128760-128763, S.A.M. R.2850 (3 specimens), 2 miles 8.S.E. of

Oenpelli, N.T.

}.S.N.M. 128232, 128258, Niehteliff, N.T.

A.M. R.13582 (5 specimens), R.13650 (7 specimens), Cape Arnhem, N.T.

SALIENTIA

Famity LEPTODACTYLIDAE

LIMNODYNASTES ORNATUS (Gray)

Discloglossus ornatus Gray, 1842, p. 56.

U.S.N.M. 128457-128458, Central Hill, Groote Wylandt, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128274-128275, S.A.M. R.3250, Umba Kumba, Groote Hylandt,

N,T.

U.S.N.M. 128465-128466, Port Langdon, N.T.

CYCLORANA AUSTRALIS. (Gray )

Alytes australis Gray, 1842, p. 56.

U.S.N.M. 128236-128239, Niehtcliff, near Darwin, N.T,

This species is separable from its more slender ally, C. alboguttatus (Gun-

ther) by the strong sculpturing of the upper surfaces of the maxillae, pre-

maxillae and zygomatie processes of the squamosals. The occurrence of both

species at Alexandra Station, N.T. (Loveridge, 1935, p. 13; 1949, p. 213, quoting

Parker, 1940, p. 20) and Port Denison, Queensland (Parker, 1940, pp. 19-20)

indicates that they coexist over a large range.

404 Recorps oF THE S.A. MuseuM

GLAUERTIA ORIENTALIS Parker

Glauertia orientalis Parker, 1940, p. 67.

U.S.N.M. 128276-128277, Umba Kumba, Groote Evlandt, N.T,

These two interesting frogs support Parker’s type description in all respects,

one paratype female having been taken on Groote Eylandt.

Famity HYLIDAE

FiyLa CAERULEA (Shaw)

Rana caerulea Shaw, 1790, p. 248.

U.S.N.M. 128267, Umba Kumba, Groote Eyvlandt, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128530, Yirrkalla, N.T.

HyYLa RUBELLA Gray

Hyla rubella Gray, 1842, p. 57.

U.S.N.M. 128281, Umba Kumba, Groote Eylandt, N.T.

Hywua Lesueuri Dumeril and Bibron

Hyla lesueurtt Dumeril and Bibron, 1841, p. 595.

U.S.N.M, 128719, Oenpelli, N.T.

This specimen agrees well with Gunther’s type description (1867, p. 56) and

Boulenger’s redescription and figure (1882, p. 413, pl. xxvi. fig. 2), of the type

of nigrofrenata, which name was placed in the synonymy of lesuewrit by Love-

ridge (1935, p. 51).

Hyna Peroni (Tsehudi)

Dendryhyas peroni Tschudi, 1838, p. 75.

T.S.N.M. 128715-128718, Oenpelli, N.T.

This species appears to be widely distributed in northern, eastern and

southern Australia, haying been recorded from the Northern Territory, Queens-

land, New South Wales, Tasmania, and I take this opportunity to record its

occurrence in the lower reaches of the River Murray, at Tailem Bend, 5. Aust.

It seems probable that the species also occurs in Victoria.

Except for a darker and more variegated colour pattern, the South Austra-

lian specimens are not distinguishable from northern and eastern Australian

specimens. In life these dorsal variceations contain numerous green flecks which

are not evident in preserved material.

MrrcHeLt — ARNHEM LAND REpTILIA AND AMPHIBIA A405

Fiyna ADELAIDENSIS Gray

Myla adelaidensis Gray, 1841, p. 447, pl. viii, fig. 2.

U.S.N.M, 128720-128725, S.A.M. R.3252, Oenpelli, N.T.

Hyna nasuta (Gray)

Pelodytes nasutus Gray, 1842, p. 56.

U.S.N.M. 128268-128271, S.A.M. R.3253, Umba Kumba, Groote Eylandt,

N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128459, Central Hill, Groote Eylandt, N.T.

U,S.N.M. 128462, near Old Mission, Groote Evlandt, N.T.

Ayia srcotor (Gray)

Eucnemis bicolor Gray, 1842, p. 57.

U.S.N.M. 128712-128714, Oenpelli, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128686-128703, S.A.M. R.3251, Cahill’s Landing, Hast Alligator

River, N.T.

U.S.N.M. 128710-128711, Red Lily Lagoon, N.T.

The latter localities are within a mile or so of each other, approximately

six miles west of Oenpelli, N.T.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Agassiz, L. (1857): Contr. Nat. Hist. U.S., i, p. 382.

Boulenger, G. A. (1882): Catalogue of Batrachia Salientia in the British

Museum, London.

Boulenger, G. A. (1885-1887): Catalogue of Lizards in the British Museum

London, vols. 1-3.

Boulenger, G. A. (1890) : Proc. Zool. Soe., p. 79.

Boulenger, Gi, A. (1893-1896): Catalogue of Snakes in the British Museum

London, vols, 1-3.

Bourne, G. (1932-1933) : Journ. Roy. Soc. W. Aust., xix, p. 9.

Copland, §. J. (1946): Proce. Linn. Soe. N.S. Wales, Ixx, (pts. 3-4), pp. 62-92,

Copland, 8. J. (1947): Proe. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, Ixxi (pts. 3-4), pp. 136-144

Cuvier, G. (1829): Regne Animal (2nd ed.), ii, p. 35.

Dumeril, A. (1851): Cat. Method. Coll. Rept. Paris, p. 172.

Dumeril, A. and Bibron, G. (1834-1854) : Erp. Gen., i-ix,

Fischer, J. G. (1886): Abh. Nat. Geb. Hambure.

Fry, D. B. (1913); Ree. Aust. Mus. Sydney, x, p. 18, fig. 7-10.

406 Recorps of THE §.A. MusEuM

Fry, D. B. (1915): Proe. Roy. Soc. Qld., xxvii, p. 91, fig. 6.

Garman, 8. (1901); Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, 39, pp. 1-14.

Glauert, L. (1950); W. Aust. Naturalist, p. 162.

Gray, J. E. (1827): In King’s Voy. Aust., ii., pp. 425, 432, pl. A.

Gray, J. E. (1831): Zool, Mise., p. 14,

Gray, J. BE. (1834): Proe. Zool. Soe, London, p. 134,

ivay, J. E. (1838): Ann, and Mag. Nat. Hist. (3), xx, p. 42.

Gray, J. E. (1841): In Grey’s Journ. Exped. Discov., 2, pp. 442, 447, pl. viii,

fie. 2,

Gray, J. E. (1842) : Zool. Mise., pp. 43-65,

(ray, J. EB, (1844) ; Zool. Erebus and Terror, Rept., pl. vii, fig. 1.

Gray, J. B. (1845): Catalogue of Lizards in the British Museum, London,

Gunther, A, (1844): Zool, Erebus and Terror, Rept., p. 19.

(funther, A. (1867): Ann, and Mag. Nat, Hist. (3), xx, pp. 52-56.

Hewer, A. M. (1948): Tasmanian Naturalist, i (pt. 3), pp, 8-11.

[fombron, J. B. and Jaequinot, C. H. (1842-1853): Voyage au pole sud, Astra-

labe et Zoologie (Reptiles et Poissons par Jacquinot et Guichenot), pp. 16-17,

pl. iv, fig. 1.

Hornstedt, C. F. (1787); Abh. Ac, Stoekholm, viii, p. 307, pl. xii.

Kinghorn, J. R. (1923): Ree, Aust. Mus., xiv, pp. 42-45,

Kinghorn, J. R. (1924): Ree, Aust. Mus., xiv, p. 186,

Kinghorn, J, R. (1926); Ree, Aust. Mus., xv, pp. 51-55.

Kinghorn, J. R. (1929); The Snakes of Australia, Sydney.

Kinehorn, J. R. (1942): Ree. Aust. Mus., xxi, p. 118,

Linnaeus, — (1766) ; Syst. Nat. (ed. 12), i, p. 350,

Lonnberg, E, and Andersson, L. G. (1915): Svenska, Vetsk. Akad. Handl.,

Stockholm, 52, No. 7, pp. 1-9,

Longman, H. (1915): Mem, Qld. Mus., iii, p. 31.

Longman, H. (1916): Mem. Qld. Mus., v, p. 48.

Loveridge, A. (1934) : Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, Ixxvii, No. 6, pp. 336-344.

Loveridge, A. (1935) : Bull. Mus. Comp, Zool, Harvard, Ixxvili, No. 1, pp. 1-60,

pl.

Loveridge, A. (1948); Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., ci, No. 2, pp. 305-430.

Loveridge, A, (1949) : Trans, Roy. Soe. S. Aust., 72 (2), pp. 208-215.

Mertens, R. (1931); Zool. Jahrb., 61, pp. 63-210, pls. ii-iv, text fig.

Mertens, R. (1942): Abhand. Senekenberg, Naturf, Ges., No. 466, pp. 237-391,

Meyer, A. (1874): MB. Akad. Berlin, pp. 128-140.

Mitchell, F. J. (1950); Ree. S. Austral. Mus., ix, pp. 275-308.

Mitchell, F. J, (1951): Ree. 8. Austral. Mus., ix, p. 545,

Mrrcnet. — ARNHEM LAND REpTiILIA AND AMPHIBIA 407

Montague, P. D. (1914): Proe. Roy. Zool. Soc., London, ii, pp. 640-643,

Ogilby, D. (1890): Ree. Austral. Mus., 1, p. 94.

Parker, H. W. (1940): Nov. Zool., 42, p. 67.

Peters, W. (1867): Monatsb. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, p. 710.

Peters, W. (1869): Monatsh. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, p. 607.

Proctor, J. B. (1923): Proe. Roy. Zool. Soe. London, p. 1073.

De Rooij, N. (1917): Indo-Australian Reptiles, ii, p. 77, Leiden.

Rosen, N. (1905): Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (7), xvi, p. 140.

Schlegel, H. (1837): Phys. Serp., ii, pp. 32, 345, 455.

Schneider, J. G. (1799) : Hist. Amphib., i, p. 248.

Schneider, J. G. (1801): Hist. Amphib., ii, p. 169.

Shaw, G. (1790): In White’s Journ. Voy. N.S. Wales, app. p. 248, pl.

Smith, M. A. (1931): Fauna of British India, Reptilia and Amphibia, i, p. 67,

London.

Smith, M. A. (1937) : Ree. Ind. Mus., xxxix, pp. 218-234.

Smith, M. A, (1943) : Fauna of British India, Reptilia and Amphibia, iii, London,

Sternfeld, R. (1919) : Mitt. Senckenb. Naturtf. Gesell., i, p. 79.

Stirling, E. C. and Zietz, A. (1893): Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Austral. xvi, p. 170.

Thomson, D. F. (1930): Austral. Journ. Exp. Biol. and Med. Science., vii, pp.

125-133, text fig.

Thomson, D. F. (1933) : Proe. Roy. Zool. Soe. London, p. 859.

Tschudi, J. J. (1888): Classif. Batr., p. 75.

Vis, C. W. de (1884-1885) : Proe. Roy. Soe. Qld., i, pp. 77, 169-172.

Vis, C. D. de (1887-1888) : Proe. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales (2), ii, pp. 820, 824.

Zietz, F. R. (1920): Ree, S. Austral. Mus., i, pp. 181-228.

408 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MusEUM

EXPLANATION OF PLATE.

PLATE XXXVIL

Photographs showing the form and density of the middorsal (right) and basal third

caudal scales of:

Varanus glebopalma Mitchell. Holotype.

Varanus timorensis tristis (Schlegel). Loc. Fraser Range, W. Aust.

Varanus timorensis tristis (Schlegel). Loc. Tennant Creek, N.T.

Varanus timorensis orientalis Fry. Loe. Eidsvold, Qld.

Varanus timorensis orientalis Fry. Loc. Groote Eylandt, N.T.

Von. NI. Prare XXXVII

S.A. Muse

Krc.

A REVISION OF THE FLOWER BUGS (HETEROPTERA

ANTHOCORIDAE) OF THE AUSTRALIAN AND ADJACENT PACIFIC

REGIONS —- PART II

BY GORDON F’. GROSS, ASSISTANT ENTOMOLOGIST, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

Cardiastethus Fieber, 1860, Wien. Ent. Monat., 4, 266.

In addition to the reference in Van Duzee, 1917, Cat. Hem. Nth. Mexico, 295, there is Zimmerman,

1948, Insects of Hawaii, 178.

Body oblong or ovate pubescent. Rostrum surpassing anterior coxae. Posterior margin of pronotum

deeply excavate, lateral margins straight or sinuate. The channel of the scent gland surpassing the

middle of the pleurae and directed anteriad at the apex. Anterior tibiae usually armed with a row of

short denticles on their inner side.

This genus is very well represented in the fauna of the regions dealt with here.

A REVISION or tHe FLOWER BUGS (HETEROPTERA

ANTHOCORIDAE) or trae AUSTRALIAN anp ADJACENT

PACIFIC REGIONS — PART II

By GORDON F. GROSS, Assistant Enromotoaisr,

Soutu AustrALiAN Museum

Fig. 1

Genus Carpiastetius Fieber

Cardiastethus Fieber, 1860, Wien. Ent. Monat., 4, 266.

In addition to the reference in Van Duzee, 1917, Cat. Hem. Nth. Mexico, 295,

there is Zimmerman, 1948, Insects of Tlawaii, 178.

Body oblong or ovate pubescent. Rostrum surpassine anterior coxae.

Pos-

terior margin of pronotum deeply excavate, lateral margins straight or sinuate.

The channel of the scent gland surpassing the middle of the pleurae and directed

anteriad at the apex. Anterior tibiae usually armed with a row of short denticles

on their inner side.

This genus is very well represented in the fauna of the regions dealt with

here.

The species can be separated by the following key :

Kry to AUSTRALIAN AND ApJAceNtT Recions Sprcrms or CARDIASTETHUS

1. Head much wider than long _.... wo CL inquilinus China and Myers

Tlead not, or little, wider than lone —,... ett ae ee oo

2. Small species, less than 2mm. in length __.... _ C. powert White.

3. Second segment of antennae not Jonver than width of thedd HeTUSS

OYOSy sal ante Pasa, one ieee) “iiuee IM oe CL minutus Popp.

Second segment of antennae longer than width of head across eYES ....

4. Pronotum almost rectangular, anterior angles produced in front of

the anterior margin (fig, 1@) 0 an. C. aridimpressus sp.

Pronotum considerably broader posteriorly than anteriorly, anterior

angles not produced ees

». Cuneus in part rosaceous, male genitalia in the fori of a large nlate

over 5004 long, female genitalia also very long (ca, 350)

C'. consors White

Cuneus not rosaccous, male genitalia do not exceed 350, nor the

female genitalia 25040 9 ae woe Mi ea Pre

(i, Brown species ee TE dhe | Hntbinensis sp.

Light species, mainly yellow ae wai iris ete ee -neaete me BG

410 Recorps oF Tur $.A, Musrum

7. Lateral margins of pronotum rounded with four long hairs on each

side as well as the usual short pilosity. Hind marein of pronotum

virtually straight. Terminal pair of antennal segments fairly short

(172 -210 : 220- 77h i, aera rr aw CL noumeensis sp. NOV.

Lateral mareins of pronotum sinuate ‘without fonr long hairs. Hind

margin of pronotum excavate. Terminal pair of antennal segments

longer (both 280-290) ou. ow. aan dant CO. fulvescens (Walk.)

CARDIASTETHUS INQUILINUS China and Myers

Cardiustethus inquilinus China and Myers, 1929, A.M.N.H., (10) 3, 119.

Oval, dark brown shading to yellow brown towards apex of head and anterior

lateral margins of pronotum. First and second antennal segments, rostrum,

and lees yellowish.

Head short and broad, slightly longer than interocular width (17: 13),

rostrum reaching apex of auterior coxac. Ratios of length of antennal segments

7:17:12:14 (same seale as above). Pronotum flattened with calli feebly

elevated, distinctly but broadly impressed in the middle behind anterior lobe.

Anterior margin straight, not emarginate.

Left genital style of the male conspicuously large and spathulate, strongly

widened and truneate at apex. Length 2°] mm.

Loc. South Australia, The original specimens were taken in the nest of

an Oxyopid spider near Renmark, S.A.

CarbIAsrernus consors White

Fig, 1, A-B

Cardiastethus consors White, 1879, Ent. Mo. Mag. 16, 143.

‘Yellowish, clothed with long pale hairs; head, pronotum anteriorly and

posteriorly, and the abdomen dilutely reddish or yellowish fusecous; seutelluin

darker, cuneus exterolaterally rosaceous; hemi-elytra more or less Tuseonebulous;

first segment of the antennae apically infuseated, second with the apical third

fuscous black, third fuscous brown; membrane dilutely brownish fuscous with

indistinet concolorous veins, near the base of the exterior vein a small triangular

luteous spot. Vertex and the posterior part of the dise of the pronotunt trans-

versely rugulose, the latter with the lateral margins and the hind margin trans-

versely punctate; seutellam subrugulose, the posterior lobe of the dise of the

pronotum transversely iunpressed.

Length, 3 mm.’ (translated from White’s Latin description).

There are several specimens in the Woodward Collection available to the

author for study which fit this description. From them the following standard

measurements (in microns) have been obtained.

Gross — A REVISION OF THE FLOWER Bucs 411

Fig. 1. A-B, Cardiastethus consors White. Male, A, apex of abdomen from below. Female,

B, apex of abdomen from below. C-D, Cardiastethus aridimpressus sp. nov. Male. C, head

and pronotum; D, apex of abdomen from below. E-F, Cardiastethus lincolnensis sp. noy-

Male. E, head and pronotum; F, apex of abdomen from below. G, Cardiastethus brownianus

White. Male. Apex of abdomen from below. H, Cardiastethus fulvescens (Walker). Male.

Apex of abdomen from below. I-J, Cardiastethus nowmeensis sp. nov. Male, I, apex of

abdomen from below. Female. J, apex of abdomen from below. (All enlarged 40 diameters.)

Head. Length, 500-590; length in front of eyes, 170-210; length behind

eyes, 120-140; length of eyes, 170-210; width across eyes, 410-470; width of eyes,

120-150; interocular, 190-210; width of collum, 360-460.

Antennae. I, 120-140; II, 500-530. Remaining segments missing on all

specimens.

Rostrum. I, 140-160; II, 380-450; ITI, 260-280.

Pronotum. Anterior width, 380-470; posterior width, 930-1,000; median

length, 400-470; lateral length, 550-600.

412, Recorps oF THE S.A. MusEUM

Scutellum. Anterior width, 590-650; median length, 450-470; lateral length,

480-550.

Legs coxa fomur tibia tarsi I TI 11 el,

I 260-320 500-530 520-600 50 70 120 30

II 210-240 520-550 520-640 50 70 120 30

Tit 310 640-740 800-900

Total length, 2,810-3,450; total width, 1,030-1,410; length abdomen,

1,360-1,790; length male genitalia, 530; length female genitalia, 350.

Loc. New Zealand: Huia, Auckland (T. BE. Woodward, 13 May, 1950, 4

specimens) ; Paiaka, Manawatu (T. E. Woodward, 8 January, 1950). All speci-

mens in the Woodward Collection.

CARDIASTETHUS ARIDIMPRESSUS Sp. NOV.

Fig. 1, C-D

Dark brown, Legs, antennae and embolium yellow. Eyes black. Ocelli

red, Rostrum paler brown. Membrane fuliginous. Pilosity yellowish.

Flattened oval pilose. Collum very short. Pronotum rectangular (fig. 1, C),

slightly convex, marginate anterior angles produced somewhat in front of fore

margin. Behind fore margin a slightly raised punctate callus. Collar tenuous.

Scutellum triangular, plane, slightly depressed posteriad, with many denticula-

tions laterally. All femora somewhat incrassated. Male genitalia in form of

an angular plate with a hook-like process.

The standard measurements (in microns) from 4 specimens are:

Head. Total length, 380-460; length in front of eyes, 120-150; length

behind eyes, 50; length of an eye, 200-270; width across eyes, 450-500; width

of eye, 120-150; interocular, 170-240; width of collum, 320-400.

Antennae. T, 900-1,000; I1, 310-330; ITT, 190-220; TV, 240.

Rostrum. 1, 160-220; IT, 330-480; III, 310-330.

Pronotum. Anterior width, 450-520; posterior width, 760-930; median

length, 290-450; lateral length, 430-530,

Scutellum. Anterior width, 520-690; median length, 350-480; lateral length,

360-570.

Legs coxa femur tibia tarsi I II TIL wl,

I 240-280 400-450 380-450 34 68 103 34

II 220-260 360-400 360-450 34 68 103 84

Iii 200-260 510-550 530-570 34 68 103 34

Total length, 2,400-2,800; width, 960-1,160; length abdomen, 1,150-1,580;

length male genitalia, 240-330; length female genitalia, 172.

Gross — A REVISION OF THE FLOWER Bucs 413

Loc. South Australia: Wilpena Pound (G. F. Gross, 3 August, 1951, Holo-

type 3, Ree. Nos. E.S.I, 1480 and 120065), Mt. Lofty (Allotype 2°, Reg, No.

[20066 and S. B. Curmmow, Paratype ¢, Ree. No, 120067), Burnside (J. G. O.

Tepper, 5 July, 1884, Paratype 3, Reg. No. [20068).

CARDIASTETHUS LINCOLNENSIS Sp, Nov,

Fie. 1, E-F

Very similar in colouration to C, wridimpressus. Flattened, elongate oval,

pilose. Collum quite long. Pronotum marginate. Lateral margin somewhat

sinuate and diverging much more strongly posteriad than-in C. wridimpressus.

Collar tenuous. Seutellum triangular, plane, slightly depressed posteriad with

many denticulations laterally. Femora not inerassated. Male genitalia very

similar to C, aridimpressus.

The standard measurements (in microns) from 4 specimens are:

Head, Total length, 470-500; length in front of eyes, 170-210; leneth behind

eyes, 90-120; length of an eye, 170-210; width across eyes, 400-470; width of an

eye, 100-140; interocular, 170-210; width of eollum, 330-380,

Antennae. I, 100-120; I], 350-480; TIT, 290-345; TV, 280-310.

Rostrum. 1, 90-140; I, 400-470; TTI, 290-310.

Pronotum, Anterior width, 430-520; posterior width, 900-1,020; median

length, 330-350; lateral length, 520-600.

Scutellum. Anterior width, 520-640; median leneth, 470-590; lateral length,

470-620.

Legs COX femur tibia tarsi [ IL LIL eh

I 260-290 500-520 480-520 30 80 100-120 30

Il 220-240 460-510 500-530 30 80 = 100-120 30

Til 260 640-670 690-740 30 80 120 30

Total leneth, 2,070-2,870; width, 1,020-1,140; length abdomen, 1,240-1,480;

length male genitalia, 290; length female genitalia, 170-210.

Loc. South Australia: Pt. Lincoln (A. M, Lea, Holotype @, Reg. No,

120069 and 1 paratype 9, Reg. No. 120070), Lucindale (A. M. Lea, 1 paratype

9, Reg. No. 120071); Tasmania: Daveystown (H. Felix, Allotype @, Reg. No.

120072); all in South Australian Museum.

CARDIASTETHUS POWERI White.

Cardiastethus powert White, 1880, Ent, Mo. Mag. 16, 144.

‘Pieceous brown or piceous black, opaque, clothed with longish cinereous

hairs; head anteriorly and posteriorly, pronotum laterally and posteriorly, also

414 Recorps OF THE S.A, MuseEuM

the seutellum apically, embolinm basally, clavus and the corium for the most

part more or less lighter, sometimes lightly reddish, The third segment of the

antennae fuscous brown, fourth reddish, a whitish fuscous nearly round spot

before the base of the cuneus, membrane dilutely fuseous brown with three

lighter markings, two basally, and the other on the inner margin, veins poorly

defined. Rostrum basally piceows, apically somewhat yellowish, legs piceous

brown, basally tending lighter in colour, femora apically, the apical half of the

tibiae and usually the tarsi brownish yellow, body beneath a shining piceous

brown, abdomen medianly lighter. Head and pronotum (anterior part of the

disc excepted) transversely rugulose; scutellum lightly rugulose punctate, the

posterior lobe of the pronotum anteriorly tranversely impressed or (2?) with a

small deep fovea; membrane of the female shortened, Length, 14-2 mm.’ (trans-

lated from White’s Latin deseription).

Loc. New Zealand.

CARDIASTETHUS BROUNIANUS White

Fig, 1, G

Cardiastethus brounianus White, 1878, Ent. Mo. Mag., 15, 159.

“Piceous brown, clothed with rather long pale hairs: cly pets, anterior margin

of the embolium, and the corium rather paler, second joint of the antennae

(apex excepted) and legs brownish vellow; membrane dark fusecous, with the

outer three nerves margined with whitish, Head, pronotum and scutellum finely

transyersely rugose; transverse depression of the pronotum nearly obsolete:

central depression of the seutellum rather shallow.

Length, 2-24 mm.’ (White’s description).

There are a number of specimens in the Woodward Collection which seem

to fit this deseription. From some of them the following standard measurements

have been obtained.

Head. Ueneth, 450-480; length in front of eyes, 170; length behind eyes,

90; length of eyes, 190-210; width across eyes, 450-450; width of eyes, 100-120;

interocular, 240; width of eollum, 410.

Antennae. I, 100-120; II, 860; III, 220; IV, 240.

Rostrum. I, 160; IT, 310-350; ILT, 260-310.

Pronotum, Anterior width, 450; posterior width, 1,000; median length, 430;

lateral length, 570.

Scutellum. Anterior width, 410; median length, 430; lateral length, 480-500.

Gross — A REVISION OF THE FLOwER Bucs A415

Legs eoxa femur tibia tarsi T IL Tit el.

I — 520-550 00-520 — i— — —

IL _— 520 500 = — — =

Til 310 670 = — i Lan, 25

Total leneth, 1,980; total width, 1,100; length abdomen, 1,120-1,210; length

male venitalia, 350; length female genitalia, 210.

Loc. New Zealand: Cable Bay, N. Auckland (T. E. Woodward, 27 Feb-

ruary, L951, 3 specimens), Paiaka, Manawatu (T. f. Woodward, 15th January,

1950, by sweeping Muehlenbeckia australis, 9 specimens), South West Island,

Three Kings (T. BE. Woodward, 18 February, 1951, 10 specimens), Great Island,

Three Kines, Hast Point (T. E. Woodward, 15 January, 1951, 3 specimens, ditto

Tasman Valley, I specimen), Otaki River, South of Levin, Wellington Provinee

(T. E. Woodward, 30 January, 1951, 3 specimens), Huia, Auckland

(T. FE. Woodward, 13 April, 1950, 1 specimen), and Punakitere, near Kaikohe,

North Auekland (T. EK. Woodward, 11 February, 1951, one specimen).

CARDIASTETHUS PULVESCENS (Walk)

Fig, 1, A

Xylocoris fulvescens Walker, 1872, Cat. Het. 5, 160.

Cardiastethus ? fulvescens Lethierry and Severin, 1896, Cat. Hem. 3, 250.

Amphiareus fulvescens Distant, 1904, A.M.N.H. (7) 14, 220. Fai. Brit. Ind.

Rhynceh. 3, 4, fig. 3.

Cardiastethus fulvescens Poppius, 1909, Act. Soe. Sei. Fenn. 37 (9), 19.

Xylocoris fumipennis Walker loc. cit.

Cardiastethus fumapennis Lethierry and Severin loc. cit.

Light yellow with long yellow hairs. Generally the apical margin of the

corium and seldom the head, pronotum, clavus, the first segment of the antennae,

and an apical band on the second, brown.

Sides of pronotwn sinuate, dise deeply transversely impressed behind the

middle, hind portion punetate. Seutellum medially broadly transversely im-

pressed, anteriorly punctate, terminally striated.

The standard data (in microns) from the three specimens in the South

Australian Museum are:

ITead. Length, 380-480; length in front of eyes, 140-170; length behind

eyes, 70-120; length of eyes, 170-190; width across eyes, 360-430; width of eyes,

120-140; interocular, 120-140; width of ecollam, 290-310,

416 Records OF THE S.A. MusruM

Antennae. I, 100-140; IT, 360-460; IIT, 280-290; IV, 280-290,

Rostrum. 1, 140; TI, 400; TIT, 210-260.

Pronotum. Anterior width, 310-380; posterior width, 760-810; median

length, 310-460; lateral length, 480-570.

Scutellum. Anterior width, 480-570; median length, 330-400; lateral length,

360-450.

Legs coxa femur tibia tarsi I TT pat el.

I 240-290 480-530 510-580 — — — ae!

TI 220-260 480-530 600-670 50 70 100 30

IIT 260 620-720 770-930 90 100 140 30

Total length, 2,170-2,410; total width, 770-950; leneth abdomen, 1,070-1,090,

length male genitalia, 280; length female genitalia, 120.

Loc. Distributed widely over an area trom Ceylon to Queensland. There

are three specimens in the South Australian Museum from Malaya: Gap, F'razer’s

Hill (A, M. Lea and wife), New Guinea; Mt. Lamington, N.E. Papna (C. T.

MeNamara), and Queensland: Cairns District (A. M. Lea, attracted to light).

CaRDIASTETHUS NOUMEENSIS sp, nov.

Fig. 1, LJ

Yellowish brown, eyes reddish brown. Collum, collar of pronotum, and

two large patches on the anterior angles, clavus, seutellum, euneus, embolium

apically, and underside brown.

Collum long, third and fourth segments of antennae short. Lateral margins

of pronotum rounded with four long hairs and a number of shorter ones, fore

margin straight, hind margin excavate. Pronotum stronely raised, immarginate,

just anterior to middle a deep curved suture. Scutellum with strong denticula-

lations laterally, impressed behind the middle. Clavus and posterior margin of

corium punctate.

Upper surface longly pilose, anal end equipped with long hairs. Male

genitalia in the form of a roughly semicircular plate, with about 7 long back-

wardly directed hairs.

The standard measurements (in microns) from four specimens are:

Head. Length, 380-550; length in front of eves, 110-220; length behind

eyes, 80-90; length of eyes, 160-190; width across eyes, 380-470; width of eyes,

120-160; interocular, 90-160; width of collum, 300-400.

Antennae, 1, 90-100; IT, 220-360; ILI, 170-210; TV, 190-240.

Gross — A REVISION OF THE FLOWER Bucs Al7

Rostrum. 1, 120-170; 11, 300-450; TTT, 170-240.

Pronotum. Auterior width, 210-430; posterior width, 830-1,000; median

length, 410-450; lateral length, 450-500,

Scutellum. Anterior width, 430-517; median length, 220-360; lateral length,

280-430,

Legs coxa femur tibia tarsi T IL Trl el,

T 260-380 380-480 380-470 30 50 90 30

II 190-220 360-460 410-500 30 50 90 30

TIT 190-260 480-600 620-750 50 70 100 30

Total length, 2,170-2,460; total width, §00-1,020; length abdomen,

1,030-1,330; length male genitalia, 190-270; length female genitalia, 140.

Loc. New Caledonia: Noumea (A. M. Lea, Holotype 4, Reg. No, 120073,

Allotype @, Reg. No. 120074, and two paratypes, Reg. Nos. 120075-76) in the

South Australian Museum.

CARDIASTETHUS MINU'TUS Poppius

Cardiastethus minutus Poppius, 1909, Act. Soe. Sc. Fenn. 37 (9), 20.

Shining, hemielytra duller, clothed with short semi-erect brown hairs. Apical

part of corium and cuneus, the second segment of the rostrum and the third and

fourth antennal segments brown.

Head depressed, second segment of the antennae not longer than the head

is wide, rostrum reaches the fore coxae, The dise of the pronotum is fairly

deeply excavate behind the middle and transversely impressed. Corium and

clayus very obscurely punctate. There is one specimen belonging to this species

in the South Australian Museum and its standard measurements are:

Head. Length, 360; length in front of eyes, 140; length behind eyes, 90;

length of eyes, 110-140; width across eyes, 330; width of eyes, 100-120; interocu-

lar, 100; width of collum, 260.

Antennae. 1, 90; II, 220; remaining segments missing.

Rostrum. I, 90; IT, 280; ITI, 220.

Pronotum. Anterior width, 330; posterior width, 720; median length, 310;

lateral length, 600.

Scutellum. Anterior width, 400; median length, 350; lateral length, 360-380.

Legs Coxe femur tibia tarsi 1 IL IIL el,

I — 380-400 380-410 30 70 90 30

II 170 350-380 410-430 30 70 90 30

Til 170-190 450-470 580-600 30 90 100 30

418 Recorps or tHe S.A. Museum

Total length, 2,300; total width, 830; length abdomen, 1,100; length male

genitalia, 170.

Lec, New Guinea: Mt. Lamington, N.E. Papua, 1,300-1,500 ft. (C, H. Me-

Namara).

PoronoreLuus Kirkaldy

The genus Poronotellus has proved to be rather common in these regions

and the species have proved extremely diffieult to separate. To date it has not

proved possible to come to any definite conclusions about the status of forms.

Accordingly, it is intended to investigate more fully this problem and to present

the results in a further paper to comprise, together with additional material on

species in the other two subfamilies, part III of this.vevision,

Therefore the sections of the ecology and zoogeography of the Anthocoridae

have been introduced here, instead of at the end of the whole systematic account

as originally intended,

ECOLOGY: OF ANTHOCORIDAE

The minor habitats oceupied by Australian and Pacific Anthocoridae are

fairly varied. Those species of Cardiastethus for whieh the minor habitat is

known are all subcortical, especially on eucalypts, with the exception of the two

type specimens of Cardiastethus inquilinus China, whieh were found in an

Oxyopid spider’s nest. This spider’s nest was located in a mallee area of South

Australia in which in the main the only vegetation is depauperate species of

Eucalyptus, mostly of the peeling “eum barked” type. These mallees very nearly

duplicate the minor habitat of such eucalypts as Eucalyptus camaldulensis on

which C. aridimpressus nov. frequently occurs. Therefore it is not unlikely that

C. inquilinus is also usually subcortical under eucalypt bark.

The widespread Xylocoris flavipes Reuter. occurs in stored grains. The family

seems definitely to be predaceous, though it is not clear whether all are egg

predators like are Orius australis (China) and Orius insidiosus (Say) or whether

some of the litter dwelling forms feed also on Collembola and mites. The habits

of Xylocoris flavipes and of Cardiastethus spp. suggest that they may be egg

predators for adult animals small enough for them to feed on, are rare in their

two preferred minor habitats.

The widespread Lyctocoris campestris (Fah.) is at home in crevices and

eracks in man made dwellings and is the only Anthocorid known to bite man.

The remaining forms all seem to be most likely associated with the litter

layers of the forest floor. This has been proven for Falda queenslandica Gross

and several species of Lasiochilus.

Cross — A REVISION OF THE FLowen Bucs 419

The members of the family are definitely favoured by hot and warm condi-

tions. There are therefore considerably more species in the tropies than in

jhe temperate zones, and in any given temperature zone more species in the

forest major habitats than in adjacent grassland or desert. Of the known

Australian species only Lyctocoris campestris, Cardiastethus inquilinus and C,

avidimpressus occur in major habitats drier than dry sclerophyll forest. On the

other hand, no fewer than twelve species oceur in the Queensland wet forests.

ZOOGEOGRAPHY OF AUSTRALIAN ANTHOCORIDAE

This preference for hot and wet conditions of Anthocoridae deseribed above

has considerable bearing on their use in helping to elucidate the puzzling facts

of the present distribution of the Australian biotas and its relation to past

climatic history.

The present primary disjunction of the terrestrial hotas is largely a resul-

tant of the distribution of land and sea in past geological ages. Within any

one area which has had a geological history of relative stability and unity, any

disjunction now evident is mostly an outcome of the past climatic history. Some

groups of the biota (eo, plants and their associated herbivorous insects) are

affected more than others (e.g., mammals, carnivorous insects, ete.) by these

climatic changes.

In Australia the biota has at least two distinct elements with perhaps

two, possibly three, other elements. The first of these is the “old world tropical”

or “northern” element variously called Tropical, Torresian, Papuan or Indo-

Malayan, The last has priority but does not necessarily reflect the origin of the

element, merely its present centre of distribution and the pathway by whieh it

entered Australia. Some constituents may be but birds of passage in the Indo-

Malayan tropies, having perhaps had their greatest period of development. in

the northern temperate areas, This Indo-Malayan element includes amongst

animals the insect families Anthocoridae, Pyrrhocoridae, Flatidae, Ricaniidae,

ete. (Hemiptera) Papilionidae (Lepidoptera), etc., and of the vertebrate groups

the whole of the Australian eutheria and metatheria and modern Australian

reptiles and amphibians. The Indo-Malayan element of the flora includes such

genera as Eugenia, Ficus, Terminalia, Erythrina (Coral trees), Cochlospermum

(Kapok trees), Adamsonia (Baobab), Cocos (Coeomut palm) and Pandanus. Also

(see Eyrian element) //ibiseus, Malva, Acacia, Cassia and Eucalyptus are really

a part of this biota, Generally members of this element tend to be limited by

the southern boundary of the northern Australian tropical forest, savannahs and

savannah woodlands,

420 Recorps oF THE 5,A, MuskuM

The second element of the biota is the so called “southern” element whose

members show three different types of distribution, namely :

(1) Endemic to Australia and adjacent regions, e.g,, Casuarinaceae in the

plants and Melolonthinae (Coleoptera) amongst the animals.

(2) Affinities with New Zealand and often South America, e.g., the plant

genera Nothofagus, Araucaria, part of the family Podocarpaceae and

the family Epaeridaceae and the animal groups Peloridiidae, Isoder-

minae (Hemiptera), part of the Tiphiidae (Hymenoptera), and of the

Dynastinae (Coleoptera).

(3) Affinities with South Africa and Madagasear only (Proteaceae, part

of Podocarpaceae).

Some authors recognize one or more of these three as being entirely different

biotas, but it will probably prove that (2) and (3) are but wider ranging wind

borne or island hopping members of (1), which extended their distribution during

Pleistocene and earlier changes of sea level, This whole southern element, or

various parts of it, has been called by a yariety of names (e.g., Antarctic, Bassian

and Autochthonian) and it generally tends to be limited by the northern border

of the southern humid regions.

Lastly, there is the desert biota. This has been considered a distinct element

by some authors (e.g., “Hyrean’” of Spencer and “Kremian” of Tate), but this

can only be justified on the basis of the great modification that plants and most

aninals must adopt in order to survive in the desert. Apart from these physio-

logically essential modifications, the Australian desert biota is clearly eomprised

of demonstratable elements of the contiguous “northern” and “southern” biotas.

Actually, in plants it is much the same eroup the world over that may enter

desert or similar areas, e.,, Acacia ( Australian, African, Asian and North

American deserts, note also the closely related North American Prosopis), Atri-

plex (Australian, African, Asian and North American deserts), Triodia (Austra-

lian, Asian and North American deserts), and many others.

This restriction on what groups of plants and animals can enter desert

regions, together with the tendency of strong prevailing winds to blow around

the world latitudinally (e.g., parallel to the deserts, not across them) may well

explain the primary disjunction of the Australian biota into two or (countine

the Eyrean) three elements. For if the continent has been divided latitudinally

by the same belt of desert as now exists (this would have extended probably

from coast to coast before the Mount Kosciusko and New Guinea uplifts), the

southern element would haye been effectively isolated from the northern, 1 this

Gross — A REVISION OF THE FLOWER Bucs 421

state of affairs came into being at the beginning of the Tertiary, the “southern”

element would have had time to develop its distinctive features.

We cannot assume this barrier to have been any earlier than the beginning

of the Tertiary, for during the Upper Cretaceous plant species were notoriously

widespread. During the progress of the Tertiary progressive restriction of

distribution is evident in plants. (Cookson and Pike, 1958, a, b, 1954; Cookson,

1953, a, b, 1954),

The presence of a few members of the one element in the area occupied

in the main by menibers of the other, and the presence of both together in the

desert, seems to be explicable mostly on the hasis of desert adaption, for it is

usually groups capable of desert adaption that occur in the region of the other

element. A whole suite of adaptable genera of the Todo-Malayan element! has

moved into the desert from the north (sleactu, Cassia, Malva, Eucalyptus, Hibis-

cus, and Melaleuca amongst the plants) or has been trapped in favourable

pockets during one of the north or south oscillations of the position of the eon-

tinuous band of desert (in plants Limstona mariae, Macrozamia macdonnelli,

and Ficus platypoda) with some actually crossing the southern boundary of the

desert into the southern humid formations (Acacia, Eucalyptus, Melaleuce).

Rqually, a group of adaptable genera were able to penetrate the desert from

the south and usually make their way through to the north (Hakea, Grevillea,

Brachychiton amongst the plants),

At the end of the Pliocene the Kosciusko uplift formed a moist corridor of

forest formations traversing the area formerly covered by part of the desert

and breaking the continuity of this belt in the east. This gave considerable

opportunity for mixing the “northern” and “southern” elements, and this seems

to have oceurred, As is to be expected, the vreatest mixing has oceurred in this

north-south moist corridor with the effect falling off the further the distance

from the corridor until, in such places as the Darwin and Perth areas, practically

the only members of an extraneous element present are those that have eome

through via the desert. No group shows the effect. of this moist corridor better

than the Anthocoridae, for this undoubtedly tropieal or “northern” group have

fourteen species in Queensland, six in New South Wales, five in Victoria, five in

South Australia (one of which is introduced), and one (introduced) in Western

Australia,

This theory of the permanence of the desert belts is not in accord with the

concept of a vast aridity covering the whole continent. as postulated by Crocker

and Wood (1947) during the ‘‘mid recent high” in sea level, Their “great:

arid” hypothesis is at the moment under criticism trom other quarters, Tindale

422 Recorps oF THE S.A. MusEUM

(1947, a and b, 1949, 1952) and Condon (1954) have shown that most zoological

data, and even a considerable part of the botanical distributions employed by

Crocker and Wood as proof of their “great arid,” are better explained by assum-

ing a steady increase in aridity in the southern regions from the end of the

Pleistocene right up to the present. This may inyolve a steady shifting south

of the desert belt.

Some investigations of the author have tended to confirm these later views.

The discovery of “myall” (Acacia sowdeni) growing near the southern end of

Lake Eyre South suggests rather an earlier continuous belt of “toyall” stretching

from Kingoonya around the north end of Lake Torrens to the Broken Hill district

and disjoined into two species by the present aridity rather than that the

distribution of the two species, A. sowdeni and A. loderi reflects emergence from

refriges in the Gawler Ranges and Flinders Ranges into which they retreated

during the “great arid.” The Gawler Ranges would provide little or no better

eonditions for such a plant than the surrounding countryside for the ranges

themselves ave of porphyry, onto which myall never ventures, with wide loam flats

(on which myall now oceurs) between, and which receive little, if any, more rain

than the main areas of myall distribution,

Even more diffieult to explain by the “great arid” are the presence of such

forms as Cardiastethus aridimpressus and the butterfly /Teteronympha merope

merope in favoured gorges in Wilpena Pound, over 90 miles away from their

next main oeeurrences at Mount Remarkable. (/Teleronympha merope merope

also occurs in favoured gorges in the Elder Ranve 10 miles west of Wilpena

Pound.) A stunted mallee form of Eucalyptus elaeophorw oceurs in the

highest 300 feet. of the Elder Range (3,700 feet) and as a similar though

less stunted patch in the Clare region. Tts main occurrence is as large

trees on Mt. Remarkable and in Alligator Gorge, 90 miles to the south or 70

miles to north respectively, Both the Elder Range patch and the Clare patch

could hardly have survived more aridity than at present exists, nor could the

small clumps of only a few tree ferns (Dichksonta antarctica) present in Morialta

foree, and some other isolated localities in South Australia when the white man

came. This also applies to the small pateh now existent at the Silverband Falls

in the Grampians of Vietoria.

Erratum. On p. 153 of Part 1 of this paper Lesidiella should read as

Lasiellidea,

INDEX TO GENERA AND SPECIES

INDEX to GENERA anp SPECIES

PAGE

abeona, Tisiphone . . ty ss 6B.

aberrans, Diploductylis = .. 884

Ablepharus .. : 402

Abrus es A, “15, 28, 34, 35

Acacia L 12, 13, 14, 26, 30

Acanthophis . . os 378

Acaroptes F a: zh af 71

awasta, Candalides . il, .. 661

Accipiter 9.3 aa be .. 207

Achrochordus ss rae -. 875

acuta, Cochlicella .. - .. 182

adelaideae, Dendrolaelaps . . .+ 118

adelaideae, Trombella Fe Lf «127

adelaidensis, Hyla_ .. iy -» 405

aenea, Paralucia w} ie .. 61

affinis, istaronyrapha te .. 44

affinis, Milvus bel .. 99

aganippe, Delias -. . -» 60

Aglaocetus .. i" £5 367, 369

agrestis, Agriolimax .. ms ». 179

agricola, Neolucia .. A rir aL

Agriolimax .. o's & .. 179

Ahaetulla fe ot a ., 875

Alathyria + fs 288

albostrigata, Oxycanus 310, 327, 830

alliarius, Oxychilus .. rp 183

Alphistona 3 AR al ‘14, 29

Amphibolurus - z .- 387

amphorus, Melo a ‘0 8, 27

Anaphaeis ‘ sts we .. 60

andrewi, Squalodon . . os .- 85867

angela, Heteronympha ra 45, 48, 60

antarcticus, Acanthophis . . .. 878

antarcticus, Palaeeudyptes .. 859

Anthocoris pas ; 131, 133

antoni, Tisiphone . . ey 1. 661

aperta, Geostilbia .. ot »» 183

Aquila 4 et .. 226

argentipuncta, Oxycanus 316, 318, 320

aridimpressus, Cardiastethus 409, 412, 419

armata, Physopleurella ay 160

armatus, Orius es 4 .. 187

armatus, Oxycanus .. ar .. B41

aruana, Megalatractus 3 .. 615

Aspasmogaster : i. .. dll

aspersa, Helix Pan .. 182

Aspidomorphus ve an .. 876

assimilis, Cireus af le .. 230

ater, Avion .. +s we .. 179

atrox, Oxycanus a. t -. 810

attenuata, Aturia ts .. 855

Aturia (Cephalopoda) Ss .. 853

Aturia (Reptilia) as be .. 378

audax, Aquila at +t ». 226

Audyana . a a ., 198

australis, Aturia 3 4 .. 858

australis, Cerberus. , 4 .. 876

Pace

australis, Cyclorana ., rh .. 403

australis, Gehyra aA .. 884

australis, Ischnodon . . se 250

australis, Livistona . . ne 2, 80, 31

australis, Orius oe 136

australis, Physopleurella - i. 162

australis, Pseudechis ap .. 878

Austrochirus . . i, ., 118

austropiceus, Anthocors be .. 184

Aviceda . Seed te .. 197

Avion bs Ar is .. 179

bakeri, Deltoidonautilus ts 357

bunksii, Heteronympha bs 48, 49, 60

barbatus, Amphibolurus ran .. B87

barringtonensis, Pseudalmenus zy #61

baru, Falco .. = rf .. 244

beltistus, Oxyeanus . . ¥y .. 314

benefactor, Maoricoris ss »., 381

Bettongia re _ 302, 303

bicarinatum, Leiolopisma ar 76, 84

bicolor, Hyla . . 1 .. 405

hilineata, Diporiphora — es .. 888

binoei, Heteronota .. “% .. 880

Blaptostethis Lt, at de 131, 132

boeticus, Lampides . . 2 ras Ol

Boiga ar 5. .. 876

houtonii, Ablepharus es .. 403

bribiensus, Physopleurella .. 162

brounianus, Cardiastethus ., ., 414

burtonis, Lialis fk A .. 893

buruensis, Accipiter . . ar ». 25

byrsa, Oxycanus ag A, -. 838

caerulea, Hyla =. -. AOd4

campanulatus, Planorbis ~ .. 186

campestris, a canes t-. 141, 418

Candalides . . i: ff” 81

Candidula ss... os . -. I18l

caperata, Helicella.. AS .» ‘181

Cardiastethus ve ats .. 409

cardui, Vanessa “t a oe 60

carinata, Demansia . . ‘ :. 878

caucasicum, Microsqualodon. .. 866

caudicinetus, Amphibolurus .. 987

cellaria, Oxychilus 33 -_ .. 183

cenchroides, Falco... , .. 242

Cerberus E aA als .. 376

verea, Turritella ote a 8, 16, 32

chalceus, Threpterius ot .. 108

chaostola, Hesperilla | . -_ ~~ 82

chares, Hesperilla .. aa Lar Be

childreni, Liasis me wa .. 374

Chlamydosaurus ; ad .. 886

chlorinda, Pseudalmenus . . 51,52

chloris, Pseudalmenus ds Jt ated

Choeropus .. bs r, § 251, 303

424

christicanus, Aspidomorphus

chysotricha, Hesperilla

ciliaris, Diplodactylus

Circus

cirrhocephalus, “Accipiter

citrifolia, Morinda

clara, Hesperilla

clarkei, Aturia

coaxans, Geloina

Cochlicella - - me

coense, Leiolopisma . .

compacta, Dispar

compressa, Hantkenina

concinna, Dendrolaelaps

consors, Cardiastethus

Cophocetus . .

cordace, Heteronympha

costata, Vallonia

crassicaudum, Lygosoma

Crocodylus .

crotonoides, Alphistona

erypsargyta, Hesperilla

crystallina, Vitrea .

cunninghamii, Ficus

Cyclorana Pe

dalpiazi, Beijualodan

Danaus

Dasyurns be

Delias ‘

delicata, Leiolopisma

Delma Je

delos, Hesperilla re

Deltoidonautilus a

Demansia

Dendrobium

Dendrolaelaps +s

derricki, Lasiochilus . .

diadema, Aspidomorphus

didimus, Accipiter

Diplodactylus

Diporiphora . .

Diprotodon

diseipennis, Oxycanus —

Dispar Py t

dives, Oxycanus

donnysa, Mespcciile

Dorudon

Dromaius

Dromornis

Elanus .

elegans, Hydrophis re

eliena, Trapezites ..

clongata, Plochiocorella

Enhydris ot Ly

eos, Oxycanus

Eoses oy .

eremicola, rapezites

Erctinochelys as

orchis is

“4

.. 16, 28, 83, 85

ato, 330

307

374

222

Recorps or THE $,A, MuszEuM

essingtonii, sj sania

Euowenia oa

Buparypha

Euryzygona

Falco

Falda

fasciata, Trygonorrhina

fasciatus, Accipiter

femoralis, Lasiochilus

femoralis, elohates

Ferussacia

Ficus ,

fisheri, Pseudalmenus

flammeata, Signeta ..

flavescens, Acacia

Hlavipes, Xylocoris

flavirostris, Haliastur

flayns, Lira

fleayi, Aquila

folliculus, Ferussacia

Fordonia .

fraseri, Delma _ ;

frenatus, Hemidactylus

fuliginosa, Oxycanus

fiulvescens, Cardiastethus

fusea, Boiga ..

fuscum, Leiolopisma

fuscus, Liasis

vagates, Milax F

gambierense, Squalodon

Gehyra . -

Geloina

Genyormis

Geostilbia

gigas, Urolophus 4

gilberti, Physignathus

girrenera, Haliastur

glaberrima, Lasicllidea

vlauerti, Oxycanus

Glauetia : ‘

glebopalma, Varanug |

gouldii, Varanus ;

granulatus, Achrachordus

grata, Euowenia e

guanerius, Trygonorrhina

guichenoti, Leiolopisma

Haliaectus

Haliastur

haliotidea, Testacella

halmaturia, Ogyris

Hamirostra

Hantkenina .

harwoodi, Metasqualodon

harwoodi, Zeugloden

hebe, Oxycanus a%

heeabe, Oxyeanus ..

Helicella ; :

Helix .. in

‘3 -. 831

.- 138, 139, 418

Pace

394

262

180

261

108

208

147

139

184.

“12, 14, 28, 29

52, 62

By, 62

2, 50

149, 418

206

178

229

184

875

B92

380

: 309, 310, 323

410, 415

876

76, 77, 398

.. 374

810, 337

* 309, 318, 820

180

182, 185

Hemibelideus

TMemidactylus

Hesperilla ' ;

herpipensis, Hebiella

Heteronota :

Heteronympha

hewitsoni, Ogyris

Hibiscus ‘

Hieraaetus

holosericea, Acacia

hopsoni, Hesperilla

hortensis, Arion ‘

hyacinthina, Candalides

Hyla .. .

Hydromys

Hydrophis

Hypochrysops

hypoleucos, Falco

lalmenus -

icilius, Ialmenus

idmo, Ogyris . -

idothea, Hesperiila

ignita, Hypochrysops

imbricata, Eretrnochelys

imbricatus, Amphibolurus

indus, Haliastur Ke

inquilinus, Cardiastethus

intermedia, Tiliqua

intermedius, Diplo :

Ischnodon

isolepis, Ly gosoma

ispidula, Oliva

isura, Lophoictinia

itala, Helicella

itea, Vanessa ..

java, Anaphaeis

javanicus, Achrochordus

johannis, Dendrobium

kanunda, Oreixenica

kershawi, Oreixenica

kershawi, Vanessa

kingii, Chlamydosaurus

Kdugii, Geitoneura

kochi, Oxyeanus

labradus, Zizeeria

Laclaps f

laevis, Agriolimax

Lagorchestes

Lampides ‘

Lampronannella

Lasiellidea

Lasiochilus

Lasiorhmus ..

latifolia, Acacia

Leiolopisma é

leonhardii, Lygosoma

lesouefi, Hesperilla

9, 12, 14, 25, 96

INDEX TO GENERA AND SPECIES 495

PAGE

~. 267

.. 880

55, 62

. 118i

.. 880

44, 60

lesueurii, Hyla

lethe, Oxycanus rs

leucobalia, Fordonia . . wr .. 875

leucadendron, Melaleuca... 9, 29, 30

Jeucogaster, Haliaeetus ‘e 229

leucosia, Hpyeellls _ sa .. 62

Lialis es j-¥ -. 893

Liasis Me +. i .. 874

Limax wa sa -. 178

Liranodynastes _ 3 ». 408

lincolnensis, Cardiastethus . . 409, 413

littoralis, Scirpus s 7, 31, 32

Livistona : 12, 13, 14, 30, 31

longipennis, Falco .. : .. 238

Lophoictinia . . 3 nfs -. 200

lucida, Paralucia 61

Lyctocoris ds * 138, 141, 418

Lygosoma . . as . .. 894

Lymnaea ad — at vi “S86

maccooeyi, Lektogtand 76, 83

Macropus : . a, .. $808

macropus, Falco he J. ». 285

maculosus, Threpterius + .. 110

mairii, Natrix “e ef .» $875

Maoricoris 7 - 11

Maraia, Heteronympha_ 51, 60

margaritifera, Pinctada 16, 32

inirginatus, Limax .. 4, ., 178

mariposa, Heteronympha- . -» AT

marmorata, Oedura . - ne .. 880

Mauicetus ++ A ohh ., 869

maximus, Limax ; o4 .. 178

inawsoni, Meniscolophus taf 13) 258

mayri, Oxycanus 810, 822, 334, 336

meeki, Oxycanus . 810, 322, 332

Megalatractus : pe, aS

Melaleuca 9, 12, 29, 80

melaleuca, Trygonorthina -. 106

melanostermon, Hamirostra . . -. 202

inelitensis, Squalodon “ .. 367

Melo .. + we as 8, 27

menippe, Danaus... tg -. 60

Meniscolophus “os t .. 268

meridionalis, Ogyris . . ot .. 61

imerope, Heteronympha Rus .. 60

metallicus, atilepharni kt .. 403

Me tasqualodon j by ». 865

Microzeuglodon v: ott .. 866

migrans, Milyus - fs .. 199

Milax . . aes ae ue .. 178

Milvus : a .. 199

minutus, Cardiastethus 3%, A409, 417

mitchelli, Notothertum as wae! BBL

rmoisimae, Lasiochilus . . 4: .. 145

Mixocetus . es .. 869

rnonocycla, Trapezites: 44 an” 7O2

Morelia : af ‘ .. 874

Morinda te 15, 29

morphnoides, Hieraaetus i= +t BBA

multiflora, Xerotes os 4,13

426 Rrconps or THE S.A. MusEuM

Pack PAGE

mundula, Physopleurella 157 penelope, Heteronympha 51, 60

murchisonianus, Falco 240 peregrinus, Falco .. 235.

Myrmecobius 308 Perameles 251, 803

pereger, Lymnaea 186

naguta, Hyla .. . aA _. 405 peroni, Hyla .. . 404

Natrix’ a _. 875 perornatus, Oreisplanus 63

Nautilus : 15,16 perplexus, Oxycanus 310. ae 331, 336

neglect, Helicella 180 Phascolarctos - 267

ney ina, Tlete Auta acer 44, eo es ai4 a

Neolucia p ; 6 -- ala: hte

Neosqualodon ' > 366 vhigalia, Tiapezites - 62

nigricosta, Oxyeanus . . 325 pbigalicides, Prebeeites 62

nigripunecta, Oxycanus _ 310, 524, 328 Physignathus .. ._ 388

nitida, Zonitoides 183 Physopleurella , 153, 156

njikpait, LA viogtha 198 piceus, Blaptostethus 133

notabilis, Pseudochirus 267 Pinotada - ‘ 16, 32

notatus, Elanus 193 pisana, Euparypha 180

Nototherium . . . 261 Planorbis ‘ 186

noiimeensis, Cardiastethus 410, 416 Plochiocorella , .. 158

novaeguineae, Leiolopisma 76, 85 Bostions, Oxycanus 312, 34)

novaguineensis, Oxycauus 338 polyle; ‘cab Enhydris m4 _875

novaehollandiae, Accipiter . 218 pompilius, Nautilus . . 15, 16

novachollandiae, Dromaius - . 288 ponatagesd nacht 2 ane

elie hat r ry! 4d . d

nuptialis, Oxycanus . . 331 postflavi da, Oxyeanns 309, 312

- poweri, Cardiastethus 409, 413

occidentalis, Oxyeanus . 330 precatorius, Abrus 28, 54, 35

octana, Subulina . 184 Priondteninus a5

Odatria aon Procoptodon 269, 288, 289, 802, 303

ae 8 ar protuga, Alathyria 288

VTLS F. } 30;

olane, Ogyris 61 Prosdiaa don a :

Oliva .. ate Protemnodan 269, 303

eae era ies - 308 psammophis, Demansia -. 9378

Inychogalea .. - 138 Pseudalmenus 2

Oplobates : Pscudechis . 378

Oreisplanus : a Pseudocheirus 267

Oreixenica oe : hell: ‘<

orientalis, Ablepharus A 402 See taata Abcoviils as

orientalis, Glauertia .. 3 , 404 :

orientalis, Varanus : 390 quaesitandus, Accipiter to, QT

ornatus, Limnodynastes 408 queenslandica, Falda 140, 418

aa i 158, nc queenslandicus, Xylocoris .» 1

Otala -- 185 radiatus, Erythrotriorchis 223

Oxycuims ae reticulatus, Agriolimax 179

xychilus ; 32

Oxyuranus we | Ene oe 400

rhombifera, Oedura . . 350

pacificus, Anthocoris . . 134 thomboidalis, Leiolopisma 76, 84

pucifiea, Physopleurella 158 rhynchops, Cerberus -+- 876

Palaeeudyptes by 359 rileyi, Oxycanus 309, 311

palankarinnicus, Prionotemnus 252 robusta, Euowenia ». 262

parallelus, Scoloposcelis mA 155 rubella, Hyla . a . 404

puralursa My oe ane rufescens, Amphibolurus 887

araoxycanus te

Parasgualodon 364, 366 sulmonacea, Oxycanus 309, 232, 324, 326

parki, Mauicetus .. 869 Sarcophilus ts .. 269, 287, 303

parsonsi, Ogyris 62 Sarcoptes oY : ada EO

patella, “Aspasmogaster 111 Scoloposcelis . . 158, 155

pectoralis, Leiolopisma 76, 86, 399 scriptis, Elanus .. 195

scabei, Sarcoptes

scillae, Squalodon

Schoinobates . -

seiron, Trapezites

Scirpus ; oe

scutellatus, Oxyuranus

serpentata, Neolucia . .

serratus, Oxycanus

Signeta

similaris, Helix

simplexa, Candalides

sminthopsis, Austrochirus

sminthopsis, Laelaps . .

solomonensis, Lasiochilus

solandri, Heteronympha

sordidus, Oxycanus

Sphenomorphus

spaldingi, Lygosoma , .

sphenurus, Haliastur .

spilotes, Morelia :

spinigerus, Diplodactylus

spirorbis, Planorbis ..

Squalodon

stagnalis, Lymnaea

stansburiensis, Aturia

stellans, Oxycanus

Sthenurus . i

stolismena, Helicella ~.

strophurus, Diplodactylus

stylis, Rhodona +h

subcristata, Aviceda ..

submelanogenys, Falco

subniger, Falco

subochracea, Oxycanus

Subulina aT

Tachyglossus .

taeniolata, Lygosoma

taeniopleurus, Ablepharus

tamsi, Oxycanus

tasmanicum, Nototherium

Testacella 4 j

tetradactylum, Leiolopisma ¥

teutonia, Anaphaeis ob

thasus, Oxycanus

thoe, Oxycanus

thompsoni, Audyana ..

Threpterius — . oe

ylacinus . - <3

[npEx TO GENERA AND SPECIES

. 312, 329, 342

269, 303

-. I8l

., 880

-» 400

197

237

234

309, 817, 520, 321

184

802, 303

.» 894

-. 402

309, 313

263

ve 180)

76, 83

.. 309, 322, 828

310, 824, 326, 328

1c “8 Tes

bs -. 108

- 269, 287, 303

Thylacis

Thylacomys

Tiliqua 4) 2

timorensis, Varanus ..

Tisiphone

Trapezites

triacantha, Leiolopisma

Trombella ry

triassica, Eoses

Trygonorrhina

Turritella

Urolophus

Vallonia

Vanessa

Varanus

variegata, Gehyra

variegatum, Leiolopisma

variegata, Morelia

varius, Varanus 4,

ventrosa, Cochlicella . .

vermiculata, Otala_ .

vertebralis, Leiolopisma

victoriae, Nototherium

vigilax, Accipiter

virgata, Helicella

vitiensis, Lasiochilus . .

Vitrea

vivax, Leiolopisma

vornbatus, Acaroptes . .

Wallabia eo as

warregensis, Trombella

watutense, Nototherium

wilkinsoni, Parasqualodon

wilsoni, Heteronympha

wombati, Sarcoptes

Xylocoris

Xerocincta

Xerotes

xois, Oxycanus

Xylocoris

Zaglossus :

zephyrus, Pseudalmenus

Zeuglodon

Zizeeria

Zonitoides

427

Pace

251, 308

303

105

309, 315